advertisement
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Software Input Output Reference —
Administration
7.0
NN43001-611, 04.05
April 2011
© 2011 Avaya Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya assumes no liability for any errors. Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes.
Documentation disclaimer
“Documentation” means information published by Avaya in varying mediums which may include product information, operating instructions and performance specifications that Avaya generally makes available to users of its products. Documentation does not include marketing materials. Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. End User agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation, to the extent made by End User.
Link disclaimer
Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation provided by Avaya.
Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information, statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them.
Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages.
Warranty
Avaya provides a limited warranty on its Hardware and Software
(“Product(s)”). Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this Product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the
Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com
. Please note that if you acquired the Product(s) from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada, the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya.
Licenses
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA
WEBSITE, HTTP://SUPPORT.AVAYA.COM/LICENSEINFO/ ARE
APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS, USES AND/OR
INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE, PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC.,
ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE, OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER
(AS APPLICABLE) UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH
AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER. UNLESS
OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING, AVAYA DOES
NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED
FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA, AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN
AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER; AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT
TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE
USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE. BY
INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR
AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO, YOU, ON BEHALF OF
YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING,
DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE (HEREINAFTER
REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS “YOU” AND “END USER”),
AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A
BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC. OR THE
APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE ( “AVAYA”).
Copyright
Except where expressly stated otherwise, no use should be made of materials on this site, the Documentation, Software, or Hardware provided by Avaya. All content on this site, the documentation and the
Product provided by Avaya including the selection, arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases. You may not modify, copy, reproduce, republish, upload, post, transmit or distribute in any way any content, in whole or in part, including any code and software unless expressly authorized by Avaya. Unauthorized reproduction, transmission, dissemination, storage, and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal, as well as a civil offense under the applicable law.
Third-party components
Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements (“Third
Party Components”), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product (“Third Party Terms”).
Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code (for those
Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code), and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the
Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support
Web site: http://support.avaya.com/Copyright .
Preventing Toll Fraud
“Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there can be a risk of Toll Fraud associated with your system and that, if Toll Fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention
If you suspect that you are being victimized by Toll Fraud and you need technical assistance or support, call Technical Service Center Toll
Fraud Intervention Hotline at +1-800-643-2353 for the United States and Canada. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya
Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com
. Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to: [email protected].
Trademarks
The trademarks, logos and service marks (“Marks”) displayed in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya, its affiliates, or other third parties. Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark.
Nothing contained in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party.
Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc.
All non-Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners, and “Linux” is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Downloading Documentation
For the most current versions of Documentation, see the Avaya
Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com
.
Contact Avaya Support
Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your Product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://support.avaya.com
.
2 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 3
4 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 12: LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and
Chapter 15: LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance.............................379
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 5
Chapter 17: LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and
6 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 7
8 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 23: LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center677
Chapter 27: LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration................................725
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 9
Chapter 28: LD 28: Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification......................755
Chapter 30: LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion......765
Chapter 31: LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation....................................771
10 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 37: LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link.................................897
Chapter 40: LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group.................................. 927
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 11
12 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 13
Chapter 52: Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data......1205
14 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 1: New in this release
This document is up-issued to support CS 1000 Release 7.0.
Other changes
Revision History
April 2011 Standard 04.05. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 7.0. Added SCHD for GRDRC.
March 2011 Standard 04.04. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made in LD 57 to reduce the number user access codes from 100 to 99 that can be entered at a time for one or more different codes (with the exception of PLDN). After entering 99 user access codes, SCH8891 is output..
August 2010 Standard 04.03. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made in LD 97 IPMG_TYP0 and IPMG_TYP1 prompts and the Alphabetical list of commands for CR Q02166989.
July 2010 Standard 04.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 7.0.
June 2010 Standard 04.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 7.0.
September 2009 Standard 03.07. This document is up-issued to support MG 1010.
August 2009 Standard 03.06. This document is up-issued to update the table LD 73:
Digital Trunk Interface and LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1.
August 2009 Standard 03.05. This document is up-issued to update the PPID prompt in table LD 14: Trunk Data Block.
August 2009 Standard 03.04. This document is up-issued to update the DNSZ prompt in chapter LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special
Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline.
June 2009 Standard 03.03. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 6.0.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 15
New in this release
May 2009 Standard 03.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 6.0.
May 2009 Standard 03.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 6.0.
January 2009 Standard 02.14. This document is up-issued to add CLS responses to overlays 10 and 11.
January 2009 Standard 02.13. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• In LD 24, updated the prompts CUST and ENTR in the ESA data block section.
• In LD 17, updated the prompts CSQI and CSQO.
January 2009 Standard 02.12. Up-issued to reflect changes in sections LD 16 and
Alphabetical list of prompts.
December 2008 Standard 02.11. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD 11, updated the prompt MLNG in the section Prompts and responses by task.
December 2008 Standard 02.10. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• In LD 11, updated the Package/Release column for the DANI and
DORG prompts to indicate basic-5.00
• In LD 16, updated the commands STIP TN Iscu, CLID, CHG
SNMP_SYSNAME and NDP in the section Alphabetical List of
Commands
• In LD 17, updated the prompt VSID in the section Configuration
Record 1
• In LD 49, updated the section prompts and responses
• In LD 97, updated the section Configuration Record 2
• In LD 117, updated the section commands and description
• Updated to reflect changes in technical content for IP Phones
6120/6140
• Modified numerous sections for CHG, PRT, EXPORT and OUT.
September 2008 Standard 02.09. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• In LD 11 table, Updated Digital Telephone Administration
• In LD 86 table, Updated Electronic Switched Network1
• Updated Alphabetical List of Prompts
May 2008 Standard 02.08. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
May 2008 Standard 02.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD 10, updated CLS prompt to include AGRA/AGRD response.
16 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Other changes
April 2008 Standard 02.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD 73, updated description of MGCLK command and added example of removing an IPMG Clock Controller from a particular
IPMG.
April 2008 Standard 02.05. Up-issued to correct various editing issues.
March 2008 Standard 02.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• In LD 11, updated PCAG and PCAM prompts to support Interop with
Microsoft OCS2007 in CS 1000 Release 5.0.
• In LD 15, updated responses and descriptions for FLSH, DIDT, and
DIND prompts.
• In LD 117, added GRNS command and description
January 2008 Standard 02.03. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• In LD57, removed MFAC (Mobile Feature Activation Code) prompt.
• In LD15, added MFAC (Mobile Feature Activation Code) prompt.
• In LD11,
- updated the list of valid responses for the UXTY prompt
• added TLSV (Telephony Services)
• added SIPN (Nortel SIP Line)
• added SIP3 (Third Party SIP Line)
• removed CNVO (Converged Office Line)
• removed SIPL (SIP Line)
- removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE and NEWTYPE prompts
• In LD20, removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE and FOR prompts
• In LD83, removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE prompt
• In LD117:
- in STIP TYPE command, removed "1240" as an argument
- added CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description
- in CHG ADMIN_COMM command, changed indicated value for
DEFAULT(1) from "Public" to “admingroup1”
- in PRT SEL command removed "ALL" as an argument (Category) and indicated that ALL is the default when no Category argument is specified
- added PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 17
New in this release
- added TEST ALARM command with arguments and description
December 2007 Standard 02.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD57, flexible feature code mnemonic MTRA changed to mnemonic
MTRN.
December 2007 Standard 02.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000
Release 5.5.
November 2007 Standard 01.08. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD11, updated description for HFA/HFD class of service to indicate that HFA is required for ACD agent digital telephones and applicable IP
Phones.
November 2007 Standard 01.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
In LD117, syntax of SYNC NTP command argument changed from
BKGD to BACKGROUND. In LD23 default setting for HOML prompt changed from YES to NO.
October 2007 Standard 01.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
July 2007 Standard 01.05. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
June 2007 Standard 01.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
June 2007 Standard 01.03. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
June 2007 Standard 01.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
May 2007 Standard 01.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000
Release 5.0.
This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired: Software Input/Output
Administration (553-3001-311) .
December 2006 Standard 17.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• LD10/11 - Last Number Redial Size (LNRS) inserted missing value
20.
• LD23 - Night Call Forward (NCFW) amended to specify will not exit overlay with package OPAO enabled.
• LD56 - Log In Mode Tone (LIMT) Note added to use default values for
A-Law configuration.
• LD81 - Features (FEAT) removed individual IP Phones
(2002/2004/2050) and added global ISET subprompt.
• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) ISM and subprompts TNS through KEY3 removed.
• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) FDLC prompt removed.
• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) FNUM prompt modified.
October 2006 Standard 16.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
18 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Other changes
• LD02 - Set Time of Day y = 0-25 second adjustment.
• LD10/11 - MIND change of wording.
• LD14/16/17 - DES, change of description to include spaces.
• LD17 - MSCL 0-8191.
• LD17 - MWI amend to include Virtual Dchannels.
• LD17 - PMCR 5-1023.
• LD20/22/27/81/82/83 - NACT YES response description amended.
• LD23 - ICDD prompt added.
• LD27 - APP = BRI references removed.
• LD74 - CNTR to include new prompts.
• PKGBYNUM FXS added pkg 152.
July 2006 Standard 15.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• LD17 - NCR: Increase minimum Call Registers to 80 and modify system types.
• LD117 - ZDST: Note concerning last week of the month value = 5.
• LD117 - SHELLS: Warning concerning disabling shells.
January 2006 Standard 14.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.
• Addition of package 408, Multimedia Systems Convergence
(MS_CONV).
• LD11 - Addition of CLS response Remote Call Control (T87D)/
T87A.
• LD73 - Correction of comments for BIPV prompt.
August 2005 Standard 13.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000
Release 4.5.
September 2004 Standard 12.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000
Release 4.0.
October 2003 Standard 11.00. Up-issued to support Succession 3.0.
November 2002 Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content changes for Meridian 1
Release 25.4x and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise
1000, Release 2.0.
January 2002 Standard 9.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 25.40.
December 2000 Standard 8.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 25.3x.
Now contains information on Small System IP Expansion.
April 2000 Standard 7.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 25.0x.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 19
New in this release
Document changes include:
• removal of redundant content.
• removal of references to equipment types, except Options 11C, 51C,
61C and 81C.
• removal of references to previous software releases.
June 1999 Standard 6.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 24.2x.
March 1999 Standard 5.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 24.0x.
October 1997 Standard 4.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 23.0x.
April 1996 Standard 3.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 22.0x.
December 1995 Standard 2.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 21.1x.
July 1995 Standard 1.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for
X11 Release 21.0x.
This document has the new NTP number 553-3001-311 and replaces
NTP 553-2311-311.
20 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 2: Introduction
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area.
Note about legacy products and releases
This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0 software. For more information about legacy products and releases, click the Technical Support link under Support & Training on the
Nortel home page: http://www.avaya.com
Subject
The system uses a prompt-response system for switch configuration and alteration. When the data administrator loads an Administration Overlay into memory on a Terminal, the switch outputs a prompt. The data administrator can then type a response to answer that prompt. If the response is valid, the program outputs the next prompt. If the response is invalid, an
SCHxxxx message is output.
To configure or change a feature, the data administrator may have to respond specifically to several prompts. This Data Administration NTP documents input and output in CS 1000 systems. (The term "overlay" is synonymous with the terms "load" and "overlay program".)
Format and structure
This NTP presents only data administration overlays and text supplementary to these overlays.
Overlay programs are identified by LD XX or XXX where XX or XXX is the load number.
Administration overlays are arranged in numerical order and appear in this NTP as separate modules.
Two general table types appear in each Load. The first table type is the Prompts and responses table. It appears at the front of each load and often follows introductory text. The second general table concludes each Administration Load and is titled Alphabetical list of prompts.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 21
Introduction
The Prompts and responses table
Many Prompts and responses tables present a complete list of an overlays prompts. When this is the case, they are simply titled Prompts and responses. Other Prompts and responses tables present only a subset of an overlays prompts. These tables present a list of prompts associated with a given data block, task, or feature.
In some Overlays, the complete prompt list as well as several prompt sublists are presented in a Prompts and responsessection. Overlays which feature multiple Prompts and responses tables begin with a Contents box to help you find a particular prompt listing.
All Prompts and responses tables list prompts in the order in which they are output in each overlay. Acceptable responses or response variables are listed beside each prompt. A brief explanation of the prompt is provided in a Comment column. Subprompts (prompts which are indented with a hyphen) also appear in the Prompts and responses table. To have subprompts appear on the TTY, the data administrator must enter specific responses at the previous nonindented prompt. Shown below is an excerpt from a Prompts and responses table.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
TN
CDEN
Response aaa aaa l s c u
SD, DD
Comment
Request
Type of data block
Terminal Number
Card Density
Note that in a Prompts and responses table:
1. Responses are often left as generic variables.
2. The comment entry is typically brief and explains the prompt.
The Alphabetical list of prompts table
This table provides a more detailed description of a response. Shown below is an excerpt from
Overlay 14 Alphabetical list of prompts table:
Prompt Response
REQ
Comment Package
Release
basic-1
CHG
END
Request
Change existing data
Exit overlay program
22 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Subject
Prompt Response
TN l ch
Comment Package
Release
Terminal Number for digital trunks when TYPE =
RDC or VDC: l = 0-159, Large System l = 0, 4, 8 - 252,
CS 1000E l = 0-255: loops, Systems with
Fibre Network Fabric basic-4.0
fnf-25
• l = 1-9 Option 11C l = 1-9, 11-19, 21-29,
31-39, 41-49, Option 11C with Survivable
IP
• ch = channel 1-24 for 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI or
1-30 for 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.
sipe-25 basic-1.0
basic-4.0
Note that in an Alphabetical list of prompts table:
1. Responses are actual alternatives and not generic variables.
2. The comment entry is often expansive and may explain the prompt, the response, or both.
3. The package and release column provides the mnemonic of the package that must be equipped on the switch to receive this prompt. (In this example, the "basic" package must be equipped to view REQ.) The number following the hyphen ("1" in this example) denotes the Release of software in which the package was made available. When there are two or more entries in the package and release column for a prompt, the Comment column provides clarification. In the example, the prompt
TN has multiple entries for package and release. The Large System opposite the
"fnf-25" entry in the Package Release column indicates that the Fibre Network
Fabric package does not apply for other systems.
Feature Packages
A listing of Feature Packages appears twice in this NTP. An alphabetical listing (sorted by
Package mnemonic) of Feature Packages can be found on
Alphabetical list of packages on
page 41. A numerical listing (sorted by Package number) of Feature Packages can be found on
Numerical list of packages on page 53.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 23
Introduction
Applicable systems
This document applies to the following systems:
• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)
• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)
• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)
• Meridian 1 PBX 61C
• Meridian 1 PBX 81C
Note:
When upgrading software, memory upgrades can be required on the Signaling Server, the
Call Server, or both.
System migration
When particular Meridian 1systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Rel. 6.0 software and
upgrade path to a CS 1000 system.
Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems
This Meridian 1 system...
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet
Meridian 1 PBX 61C
Meridian 1 PBX 81C
Maps to this CS 1000M system
CS 1000E
CS 1000E
CS 1000M Single Group
CS 1000M Multi Group
For more information, see one or more of the following NTPs:
• CS 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview, NN43021-458
• Communication Server 1000E Upgrades, NN43041-458
• Communication Server 1000E Upgrade - Hardware Upgrade Procedures , NN43041-464
24 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Intended audience
Intended audience
This document is intended for individuals responsible for the maintenance of CS 1000 and
Meridian 1 systems.
Conventions
Terminology
In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as "system":
• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)
• Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M)
• Meridian 1
The following systems are referred to generically as "Large System":
• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)
• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)
• Meridian 1 PBX 61C
• Meridian 1 PBX 81C
Notational conventions
• Both upper and lower case are used in this book to distinguish between Prompts,
Commands, and Variables.
• Lowercase variables are used in this book to represent many possible responses. The following table lists a few key variables which appear throughout this NTP.
# x
Variable
a
Meaning
Alphabetic characters
Alphanumeric characters
Numeric characters
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 25
Introduction
c c (u) c u c 0 0 u dn hh mm loop l s c (u) l s c u
Customer Number
Small System, MG 1000B, and Terminal Number (TN) Card, Unit; where unit is optional
Small System, MG 1000B, and Terminal Number (TN) Card and Unit
Terminal Number (TN) for Small System, MG 1000B, A TN consists of a card, two filler digits, and a unit.
Directory Number (DN)
Hours (0 - 23) and Minutes (00 - 59)
Network Loop Number (0-159)
Large System and CS 1000E System Terminal Number (TN), Loop, Shelf,
Card, Unit; where unit is optional
Large System and CS 1000E System Terminal Number (TN) (loop, shelf, card, and unit number)
Month (JAN - DEC) when used in a date.
Numeric characters
Numeric value of set number of digits
Numeric value of several digits
Year (00 - 99), Month (1 - 12) and Day (1 - 31)
mmm nnn xxx xxx x...x
yy mm dd
• <CR> denotes that the carriage return key is to be depressed without inputting any data.
The carriage return leaves the existing value unchanged, or enters the default value if there is no existing value.
• <space> denotes that the space bar is to be depressed instead of <CR>.
• <value> denotes a variable value, generally for a prompt response.
• For example, <NIPN> is the value responded to the NIPN prompt and <min> is a minimum value.
• Default values are shown in parentheses.
• A range of numbers is denoted by giving the lower and upper limits of the range. For example, given the range 0 - (2) - 3, the user may manually enter 0, 1, 2, or 3, or carriage return (press <CR>) to enter the default of 2.
• Default values are shown in brackets in the response column where applicable. Pressing
<CR> enters the default.
• Where applicable, precede an entry with an X to delete that entry or set your entry to default value.
26 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Related information
Related information
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.
NTPs
The following NTPs are referenced in this document:
• Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 (contains information about features and the testing of features and services for telephones and attendant (ATT) consoles)
• Software Input Output Reference - Maintenance, NN43001-711 (contains information about Maintenance overlay programs)
• Software Input Output Reference - System Messages, NN43001-712 (contains information about system error messages)
Online
To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel home page: http://www.avaya.com
CD-ROM
To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel Networks customer representative.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 27
Introduction
28 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 3: How to get help
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Getting help from the Nortel web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site: http://www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
• download software, documentation, and product bulletins
• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues
• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment
• open and manage technical support cases
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions
Center
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the telephone from a Nortel
Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone number for your region: http://www.nortel.com/callus
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 29
How to get help
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing
Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express Routing Code
(ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the
ERC for your product or service, go to: http://www.nortel.com/erc
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.
30 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 4: Communicating with the system
To communicate with the system, the following input/output devices at either on-site (local) or remote locations are required:
• TTY or VDT terminal as an input/output device
• RS-232-C compatible printer as an output only device
• Maintenance telephone set as an input only device
• Element Manager for CS 1000
• Telephony Manager (TM)
• rlogin over Ethernet/LAN/WAN
The input/output system can operate with terminals having the following characteristics:
• Interface: RS-232-C
• Code: ASCII
• Speed: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 baud
• Loop Current: 20 mA
Accessing the system
Logging in and out
When you access the system through a system terminal, a login procedure is required (refer to Procedure 1). All system passwords are initially set as 0000, but you can change passwords through the Configuration Record (LD 17). See also "Limited Access to Overlays" in the
Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106.
• Level 1 password. This general password is used in the log in sequence to provide general access to the system by service personnel. Once the system is accessed, the service personnel may then perform any necessary administration or maintenance tasks.
• Level 2 password. This administrative password is known and used by only the data administration manager. The password is used to protect the system configuration record and is required when using LD 17 to change either the general or the administrative passwords.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 31
Communicating with the system
Local and remote access
Input/output terminals may operate either locally or remotely. However, data modems are required for terminals located more than 50 feet (15 meters) from the central control interface.
Both local and remote terminals interface with the system through Serial Data Interface (SDI) packs.
Many devices can be installed at local and remote locations. When a system terminal is installed locally, it is connected directly to a SDI Card. When a system terminal is installed at a remote location, modems (or data sets) and a telephone line are required between the
terminal and the SDI card. Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal on
page 32, shows typical system terminal configurations.
Multiple devices can simultaneously communicate with the Meridian 1 if Multi User Login is enabled. Refer to the System Management Reference, NN43001-600 for details regarding the
Multi User Login Feature.
Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal
HOST mode access
A system terminal is connected through an SDI port. SDI ports are defined in LD 17 and can be configured for different types of outputs. For example, one terminal can be defined for traffic reports, another for maintenance messages. Two ports can be defined for the same output.
32 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Accessing the system
It is possible to log in as a HOST. When in the HOST mode, the outputs defined for the port are output only to that port. This is useful for applications which require high speed ports. Once the HOST port has logged out, the outputs to the other ports are restored.
To configure a system terminal, see the "System and limited access passwords" in the configuration record (LD 17). See also OVL403 and OVL404 messages, which are output to the ports affected by a HOST log in.
PDT and OAM commands for SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)
SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is a network protocol that provides confidentiality and integrity to data (such as files or commands) transmitted between an SFTP client and a server.
When you upgrade to CS 1000 Release 6.0 from older CS 1000 releases, the SFTP client is enabled by default. For more information on SFTP, refer to Signaling Server IP Line
Applications Fundamentals, NN43001-125.
To use the SFTP client, enable the client by running either LD 117 or OAM commands. For
more information on LD 117 commands, refer to LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management on
page 1067
The commands to enable or disable FTP and SFTP transfers in the system are provided exclusively on the OAM and PDT2 shells, and only users with PWD2 rights can execute them.
The OAM and PDT commands for SFTP are listed below:
• disInsecureTransfers: Disables all insecure FTP transfers in the system.
• enlInsecureTransfers: Enables all insecure FTP transfers in the system.
• disSecureTransfers: Disables all insecure SFTP transfers in the system.
• enlSecureTransfers: Enables all insecure SFTP transfers in the system.
• statInsecureTransfers: Shows whether insecure transfer access is enabled or disabled.
• statSecureTransfers: Shows whether secure transfer access is enabled or disabled.
• joinSecDomain: Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server.
• leaveSecDomain: Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device.
• statSecDomain: Display the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint.
Line mode interface log in procedure
The Overlay Loader offers a Line Mode interface. With Line Mode enabled (LON), the backspace can be used to edit input. The entered information (responses, for example) is not processed until the <CR> is entered. When the Line Mode is disabled (LOF), the system terminal interface processes information as it is entered.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 33
Communicating with the system
Note:
Line Mode interface requires the setting: seven data bits, space parity and one stop bit.
The Serial Data Interface (SDI) application on the Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card offers the Line Mode Editing (LME) function. With the LME function enabled (FUNC=LME), the backspace can be used to edit input. The LME function is supported only on VT200 type terminals running EM200 emulation mode.
Logging in and out
1. Press <CR>
• If the response is: OVL111 nn TTY or OVL111 nn SL-1
• That means: Someone else is logged into the system. When they have logged off, press <CR> and go to Step 2.
• If the response is: OVL111 nn IDLE or OVL111 nn BACKGROUND
• That means: You are ready to log into the system. Go to Step 2.
• If the response is: OVL000 >
That means: This is the program identifier which indicates that you are have already logged into the system. Go to Step 4.
2. Enter: LOGI , and then press <CR>
The normal response is: PASS?
If there is any other response, refer to the message text in the System Error
Messages NTP.
3. Enter: Level 1 or Level 2 password and press <CR>.
If the password is correct, the system responds with the prompt: >
4. Load a program by entering: LD XXX where XXX represents the overlay program number).
5. Perform tasks
6. End the program by entering: END or ****
7. Always end the log in session with: LOGO
The background routines are then loaded automatically.
Access through the maintenance telephone
A telephone functions as a maintenance telephone when you define the class-of-service as
MTA (maintenance telephone allowed) in the Multi-line Telephone Administration program (LD
11). You can use a maintenance telephone to send commands to the system, but you can use only a subset of the commands that can be entered from a system terminal.
34 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Accessing the system
You can test tones and outpulsing through the maintenance telephone. Specific commands for those tests are given in the Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic (LD
34).
To access the system using the maintenance telephone, see Procedure 2. To enter commands, press the keys that correspond to the letters and numbers of the command (for example, to enter LD 42 return, key in 53#42##).
Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad on
page 35 shows the translation from a keyboard to a dial pad.
The following overlays (LDs) ARE accessible from a maintenance telephone: 30, 32, 33, 34,
36, 37, 38, 42, 43, 45, 46, 60, 61, and 62
The following overlays (LDs) ARE NOT accessible from a maintenance telephone: 31, 40, 48,
77, 80, 92, 96, 135, 37
Note:
To use the maintenance telephone, the loop for that telephone must be operating.
Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad
M
P, Q
T
W
G
J
A
D
U
X
N
R
H
K
B
E
Keyboard
O
S
V
Y, Z
I
L
C
F
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
Space or #
Return
*
Dial pad
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
#
##
8
9
*
Note:
There is no equivalent for Q or Z on a dial pad.
Accessing through the maintenance telephone
1. Press the prime DN key.
2. Place the phone in maintenance mode by entering: xxxx91
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 35
Communicating with the system
Where: "xxxx" is the customer Special Prefix (SPRE) number. It is defined in the
Customer Data Block and can be printed using LD 21. The SPRE number is typically
"1" (which means you would enter 191).
3. Check for busy tone by entering "return": ##
• If there is no busy tone, go to Step 4.
• If there is a busy tone, a program is active. To end an active program and access the system enter: ****
4. Load a program by entering: 53#xx##
Where: "xx" represents the number of the overlay program
5. Perform tasks.
6. To exit the program and return the telephone to call processing mode, enter: ****
Background routines are then loaded automatically.
Accessing Meridian Mail
You can use a Small System to access Meridian Mail Administration & Maintenance through a shared terminal on the Small System. To access the Meridian Mail system, log in and enter:
AX. To exit from Meridian Mail, press the Control key and the closed square bracket ( ] ) simultaneously.
Preview of overlay content
System information, call information, features and services are all controlled by overlays (LDs).
Data blocks are used to control this information. Listed below are some of the items accessible through the overlays.
Type
Terminal Number data block
Customer data block
Overlay(s) Item
10, 11, 12, 14 • busy lamp field • Class of Service (CLS)
• feature access and requirements • key assignments • route assignment
• telephone features (# of key strips, data modules) • telephone type • trunk access
• trunk type
15 • attendant console information • customer number • feature access codes • incoming call identification • intercept options
• Listed Directory Number (LDN) • night service • Recorded Announcement (RAN)
36 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
System memory and disk space
Type
Route data block
Configuration data block
Overlay(s)
16
17
Item
• access codes • Call Detail Recording
(CDR) information • code restrictions
• network trunk features • route number
• trunk route type • trunking features
(timers, starting arrangements)
• input/output devices • memory location
• network loop usage • number of memory modules • number of network loops
• system parameters (call register, buffer sizes, traffic)
System memory and disk space
The following memory information is output when an administration program is loaded. This information is used to plan the addition of new features, such as speed call lists, which require memory and disk space.
MEM AVAIL: (U/P): pppppp USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrrr or (depending on the total amount of memory)
MEM AVAIL: (U-ppppp1 P-ppppp2): USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr
DISK RECS AVAIL: xxxxx, for Small Systems
DISK SPACE NEEDED: nnnnn KBYTES, for Large Systems
Legend:
Element
ppppp1 ppppp2 ppppp qqqqq rrrrrr xxxxx nnnnn
Definition
Amount of unprotected memory available for use (in words)
Amount of protected memory available for use (in words)
Total memory available for use (ppppp1 + ppppp2) (in words)
Total amount of memory used (in words)
Total amount of memory (in words)
Records available for storage of additional data (Small
Systems)
Records available for storage of additional data (Large
Systems)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 37
Communicating with the system
Low memory and disk warnings
If the amount of memory or disk space is low, the following messages are output on the systems.
WARNING: LOW MEMORY WARNING: LOW DISK WARNING: LOW MEMORY/DISK
Note:
The LOW DISK messages are not displayed after sysload and until a data dump is performed.
Warning:
When the LOW MEMORY, LOW DISK, or LOW MEMORY/DISK messages appear, avoid performing further administration changes which require more memory and disk space.
These changes can be lost during the next data dump.
When low memory or disk problems occur, a review of system memory is recommended.
Memory can be reclaimed by removing unused features. For example, the system may have speed call lists which are no longer used and can be removed.
Depending on the data storage type required (such as protected/ unprotected), it can be necessary to perform an initialize or sysload to access the reclaimed data store space.
A disk record stores approximately 500 words of protected data store. A single 3.5 inch high density floppy disk can hold a maximum of 1425 records.
When the software detects that more than one floppy disk is required, the data is compressed during the backup, thereby reducing the number of disks required.
System Lookup messages
On systems equipped with System Errors and Events Lookup package 245, it is possible to display system messages on screen. Specific system messages may then be viewed on screen if the user enters ERR followed by the desired system error code and <CR>. The following example shows the data entries necessary to view error message SCH946:
• Login to switch
• PASS (Enter only your password)
• ERR SCH946<CR>(The user must type "ERR SCH946" and press return)
The screen displays the error message corresponding to SCH946. In this case, that message is:
Invalid User Type
38 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Multi-User Login
For further information about system messages refer to the Software Input Output Reference
- System Messages, NN43001-712.
Multi-User Login
Meridian 1 Multi-User Login (MULTI_USER) (package 242) enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlays simultaneously. These users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The multi-user capability increases the efficiency of technicians by enabling them to perform tasks in parallel. To facilitate this operating environment, Multi-User
Login includes significant functionality:
• Database conflict prevention
• Additional user commands
• TTY log files
• TTY directed I/O
With multiple overlays operating concurrently, there is the potential for a database conflict if two or more overlays attempt to modify the same data structure. Multi-User Login software prevents such conflicts. When a user requests that an overlay be loaded, the software determines if it poses a potential conflict with an overlay that is already executing. If no conflict exists, the requested overlay is loaded. If a conflict does exist, the system issues the following message:
OVL429-OVERLAY CONFLICT
The user can try again later, or try to load a different overlay.
Multi-User Login also introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the ability to:
• communicate with other users
• determine who is logged into the system
• halt and resume background and midnight routines
• initiate and terminate terminal monitoring
• change printer output assignment
Note:
For complete feature information about Multi-User Login, consult the Overlay Loader and
Multi-User Login section in this NTP.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 39
Communicating with the system
Maintenance display codes
Maintenance displays are located on the faceplate of certain circuit cards. A maintenance display code is a one-, two-, or three-digit alphanumeric code which can indicate the status of the system and identify faulty equipment. For a detailed definition of these codes, see the section titled "HEX" in the System Error Messages NTP.
Time and date of fault
The system identifies the time that faults are detected. When a diagnostic message is output, a timestamp is output within 15 minutes. The format is:
TIMxxx hh:mm dd/mm/yy CPU x
Where: xxx is the system ID
The time, date, and system ID are set in LD 2.
40 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 5: Alphabetical list of packages
The following list is a comprehensive alphabetical list of packages that can be equipped on Meridian 1 or
AA
AAA
AAB
ABCD
ACDA
ACDB
Mnemonic
ACDC
ACDD
ACDE
ACLI
ACNT
ACRL
ADMINSET
ADSP
AFNA
AINS
ALRM_FILTER
ANI
ANIR
AOP
APL
ARDL
ARFW
ARIE
Feature Name
Attendant Administration
Attendant Alternative Answering
Automatic Answerback
16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone
Automatic Call Distribution, Package A
Automatic Call Distribution, Package B
Automatic Call Distribution Package C
Automatic Call Distribution Package D
ACD/CDN Expansion
Analog Calling Line Identification
Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code
AC15 Recall
Set Based Administration
ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect
Supervision
Attendant Forward No Answer
Automatic Installation
Alarm Filtering
Automatic Number Identification
ANI Route Selection
Attendant Overflow Position
Auxiliary Processor Link
Automatic Redial
Attendant Remote Call Forward
Aries Digital Sets
13
56
109
304
134
200
243
12
253
170
42
50
388
349
155
236
256
289
Number Release
54 1
174 15
47
144
45
41
1
14
1
1
1
2
25.4
24
13
20
21
23
10
22
1
1
14
16
19
1
20
14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 41
Alphabetical list of packages
ATAN
Mnemonic
ATM
ATX
AUXS
AWU
BACD
BARS
BASIC
BAUT
BGD
BKI
BNE
BQUE
BRI
BRIL
BRIT
BRTE
BTD
CAB
CALL ID
CASM
CASR
CBC
CCB
CCDR
CCOS
ZBD_PACKAGE
CDP
CDIR
CDR
CDRE
Feature Name
Attendant Announcement
Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Autodial Tandem Transfer
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary
Security
Automatic Wake-Up
Basic Automatic Call Distribution
Basic Alternate Route Selection
Basic Call Processing
Basic Authorization Code
Background Terminal
Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer
Business Network Express
Basic Queuing
Basic Rate Interface
BRI line application
ISDN BRI Trunk Access
Basic Routing
Busy Tone Detection Tone
Charge Account/Authorization Code
Call ID (for AML applications)
Centralized Attendant Services (Main)
Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)
Call-by-Call Service
Collect Call Blocking
Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording
Controlled Class Of Service
Zone Based Dialing
Coordinated Dialing Plan
Corporate Directory
Call Detail Recording
Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit)
Number Release
384 25.4
84 7
258
114
20
12
21
13
7
6.0
1
1
1
1
19
13
18
1
21
1
18
18
10
1
25
1
1
1
10
1
290
118
81
420
59
381
4
151
233
14
294
24
247
26
27
117
99
127
367
28
216
235
102
40
57
0
25
1
13
42 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Mnemonic
CDRQ
CDRX
CHG
CHINA
CHTL
CISMFS
CPRK
CPRKNET
CSL
CTY
CUST
CWNT
DASS2
DBA
DCON
DCP
DDSP
DHLD
DI
CIST
CNAME
CNUMB
COOP
CORENET
CDIR
CPCI
CPGS
CPIO
CPND
CPP
CPP_CNI
Feature Name
ACD CDR Queue Record
Call Detail Recording Enhancement
Charge Account for CDR
China Attendant Monitor Package
China Toll Package
Commonwealth of Independent States
Multifrequency Shuttle Signalling
Commonwealth of Independent States - Trunk
Calling Name Delivery
Calling Number Delivery
Console Operations
Core Network Module
Corporate Directory
Called Party Control on Internal Calls
Console Presentation Group
Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81C)
Calling Party Name Display
Calling Party Privacy
CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine
Call Park
Call Park Networkwide
Command Status Link
Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal
Multiple-Customer Operation
Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)
Digital Access Signaling System 2
Data Buffering and Access
M2250 Attendant Console
Directed Call Pickup
Digit Display
Deluxe Hold
Dial Intercom
140
115
19
71
21
33
306
77
5
2
225
124
351
310
172
298
95
301
368
221
333
332
169
299
381
Number Release
83 3
259 20
23
285
292
326
1
21
21
23
15
12
1
4
1
19
16
24
8
1
2
22
1
10
21
25
22
15
21
14
21
25
21
23
23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 43
ECCS
ECT
EDRG
EES
EMUS
ENS
DRNG
DSET
DTI2
DTD
DTOT
EAR
EOVF
ESA
ESA_CLMP
DISA
DKS
DLDN
Mnemonic
DLT2
DMWI
DNDG
DNDI
DNIS
DNWK
DNXP
DPNA
DPNSS189I
DPNSS
DPNSS_ES
ESA_SUPP
ETSI_SS
Alphabetical list of packages
Feature Name
Direct Inward System Access
Digit Key Signaling
Departmental Listed Directory Number
M2317 Digital Sets
DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication
Do-Not-Disturb, Group
Do-Not-Disturb, Individual
Dialed Number Identification System
DPNSS Network Services
Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit)
Direct Private Network Access
Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1
DPNSS Enhanced Services
Distinctive Ringing
M2000 Digital Sets
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
Dial Tone Detector
DID to Tie (Japan only)
Enhanced ACD Routing
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service
Enhanced Call Trace
Executive Distinctive Ringing
End-To-End Signaling
Enhanced Music
Enhanced Night Service
ACD Enhanced Overflow
Emergency Services Access
Emergency Services Access Calling Number
Mapping
Emergency Services Access Supplementary
Euro Supplementary service
173
215
185
10
119
133
74
88
129
138
176
214
178
329
331
9
98
231
150
250
284
123
288
Number Release
22 1
180 1
76
91
325
16
5
9
23
1
13
21
20
16
21
1
10
16
1
12
20
15
18
16
15
23
23
10
16
17
4/9
7
10
330
323
23
22
44 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
EURO
Mnemonic
Extended MGP
Resources
FAXS
FCC 68
FCA
FCBQ
FCDR
FDID
FFC
FFCSF
FGD
FIBN
Euro ISDN
Feature Name
Extended Media Gateway PRI Resources
HiMail Fax Server
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision
Forced Charge Account
Flexible Call Back Queuing
New Format CDR
Flexible DID
Flexible Feature Codes
FMCL
FNP
FRTA
FTC
FTDS
FXS
Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)
Feature Group D
Fiber Network
Converged Mobile Users
Flexible Numbering Plan
French Type Approval
GCM
GRP
GRPRIM
GRSEC
GPRI
GCM
H323_VTRK
HA
Flexible Tones and Cadences
Fast Tone and Digit Switch
Flexible Services Package
General Call Monitor
Group Call
Geographic Redundancy Primary system
Geographic Redundancy Secondary system
International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway
Global Call Monitoring
H.323 Virtual Trunk
High availability
HIGH_SCALABILITY HighScalability package
HIST History File
HOSP Hospitality Management
HOT
HSE
Enhanced Hot Line
Hospitality Screen Enhancement
Number Release
261 20
418 5.5
344
399
410
421
55
166
70
208
125
87
152
344
48
404
405
167
198
158
365
414
160
197
195
223
52
61
234
362
139
7.0
1
16
24
3.0
5.0
4/10
17
24
1
4.0
4.0
18
16
7
25
5.5
14
15
15
17
25
18
24
15
18
17
1
1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 45
Alphabetical list of packages
JPN
JTDS
JTTC
KD3
LAPW
L1MF
LLC
LMAN
LNK
HVS
IAP3P
Mnemonic
ICDR
ICON_PACKAGE
ICP
IDA
IDC
IEC
IMS
INBD
INTR
IPEX
Feature Name
Meridian Hospitality Voice Service
Integrated Services Digital Network Application
Module Link for Third Party Vendors
Internal CDR
M3900 Full Icon Support
Intercept Computer Interface
Integrated Digital Access
Incoming DID Digit Conversion
Inter-Exchange Carrier
Integrated Message System UST and UMG are part of IMS Package.
International nB+D
Intercept Treatment
IP Expansion
IPMEDIA_SERVICES IP Media Services
IPMG IP Media Gateway
IPRA International Primary Rate Access
ISDN
ISDN INTL SUP
ISL
ISPC
IVR
JDMI
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISDN Supplementary Features
ISDN signaling Link
ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection
Hold in Queue for IVR
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface
Japan Central Office Trunks
Japan Tone and Digit Switch
Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee
Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface
Limited Access to Overlays
X08 to X11 Gateway
Line Load Control
Automatic Call Distribution Load Management (C2)
ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor
Number Release
179 16
153 13
108
397
143
122
113
149
35
97
171
335
252
164
188
105
43
51
145
161
147
313
218
136
255
11
295
422
403
202
12
13
2
10
3.0
10
16
20
16
15
9
14
23
10
1
2
22
18
14
13
14
13
7.0
4.0
15
20
1
3.0
46 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
LNR
LOCX
Mnemonic
LSCM
Feature Name
Last Number Redial
Location Code Expansion
Local Steering Code Modifications
LSEL Automatic Line Selection
M3900_PROD_ENH M3900 Phase III Productivity Enhancement
M3900_RGA_PROG M3900 Ring Again
M911 ENH
MAID
MASTER
M911 Enhancement Display
Maid Identification
Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side
MAT
MC32
MCBQ
MCMO
MCT
MED_LANG
MEET
MFC
MAT 5.0
Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity
Network callback Queuing
Meridian 1 Companion Option
Malicious Call Trace
M3904 Mediterranean Language group
MCDN End to End Transparency
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
MFE
MINT
MLIO
MLM
MLMS: Brazilian
Meridian Link Modular Server
Meridian Link Modular Server: Brazilian
MLMS: Chinese (PRC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (PRC)
MLMS: Chinese
(ROC)
MLMS: Dainish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (ROC)
Meridian Link Modular Server: Dainish
MLMS: Dutch
MLMS: Finnish
MLMS: Canadian
French
MLMS: European
French
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
Message Intercept
Multi-Language I/O Package
Meridian Link Modular Server: Dutch
Meridian Link Modular Server: Finnish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Canadian French
Meridian Link Modular Server: European French
395
348
128
135
163
211
209
264
265
266
249
210
309
296
350
38
240
107
Number Release
90 8
400 4.0
137
72
386
396
10
4
25.4
3.0
22
24
2
19
10
25
17
22
10
15
16
3.0
24
9
16
20
20
20
267
268
269
270
20
20
20
20
271 20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 47
Alphabetical list of packages
MS_CONV
MSB
MSDL
MSDL SDI
MSDL STA
MSMN
MULTI_USER
MUS
MUSBRD
MWC
MWI
M911
NACD
NARS
NAS
MLWU
MOBX
MPH
MPO
MQA
MR
Mnemonic
MLMS: German
MLMS: Italian
MLMS: Japanese
MLMS: Korean
MLMS: Norwegian
MLMS: Russian
MLMS: European
Spanish
MLMS: Latin Am.
Spanish
MLMS: Swedish
Feature Name
Meridian Link Modular Server: German
Meridian Link Modular Server: Italian
Meridian Link Modular Server: Japanese
Meridian Link Modular Server: Korean
Meridian Link Modular Server: Norwegian
Meridian Link Modular Server: Russian
Meridian Link Modular Server: European Spanish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Latin American
Spanish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Swedish
Multi-Language Wake Up
Mobile Extensions
Meridian 1 Packet Handler
Multi-Party Operations
Multiple Queue Assignment
PPM/Message Registration
Multimedia Systems Convergence
Make Set Busy
Multipurpose Serial Data Link
MSDL Serial Data Interface
MSDL Single Terminal Access
Mobility Networking
Multi-User Login
Music
Music Broadcast
Message Waiting Center
Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS
Meridian 911
Network Automatic Call Distribution
Network Alternate Route Selection
Network Attendant Service
Number Release
272 20
273 20
274
275
276
277
278
20
20
20
20
20
279 20
242
44
328
46
219
224
207
58
159
408
17
222
227
228
370
280
206
412
248
141
297
101
1
19
19
19
1
23
15
1
20
4.50
1
18
19
19
25
20
21
10
20
16
5.5
19
48 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
NAUT
Mnemonic
NCOS
NFCR
NGCC
NGEN
NI2
NI-2 CBC
NI-2 Name
NMCE
NMS
NSC
NSIG
NTRF
NTWK
NXFR
OAS
ODAS
OHOL
OHQ
OOD
OPAO
OPCB
OPEN ALARM
OPTF
ORC_RVQ
OVLP
PAGENET
PAGT
PBXI
PCA
PEMD
Feature Name
Network Authorization Code
Network Class Of Service
New Flexible Code Restriction
Nortel Symposium Call Center
Next Generation Connectivity
North America National ISDN Class II Equipment
NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection
NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service
NGenR2/Meridian Communications Exchange
Connectivity
Network Message Services
Network Speed Call
Network Signaling
Network Traffic Measurements
Advanced ISDN Network Services
Network Call Transfer
Observe Agent Security
Office Data Administration System
On Hold On Loudspeaker
Off-Hook Queuing
Optional Outpulsing Delay
Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)
Operator Call Back (China #1)
Open Alarms
Optional Features
Remote Virtual Queueing
Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)
Call Page Networkwide
Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent
1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
Personal Call Assistant
Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colisée)
Number Release
63 1
32 1
49
311
324
291
2
22
22
21
334
385
364
23
25.4
24
394
20
196
62
79
104
126
315
175
39
37
29
148
67
1
192
184
307
116
75
398
232
3.0
1
20
1
5
1
13
3
16
2
2
22
12
5
3.0
18
14
22
1
18
15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 49
Alphabetical list of packages
RPA
RUCM
RVQ
SACP
SAMM
SAR
RAN
RANBRD
RCK
REMOTE_IPE
RMS
ROA
PHTN
Mnemonic
PLDN
PLUGIN
PMSI
PONW
POVR
PQUE
PRA
PRI2
PVQM
PXLT
QSIG
QSIG GF
QSIG SS
SBO
SCC
SCDR
SCI
SCMP
Feature Name
Phantom TN
Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL
Plug-In
Property Management System Interface
Priority Network Override
Priority Override/Forced Camp-On
Network Priority Queuing
Primary Rate Access (CO)
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface
Proactive Voice Quality Management
Pretranslation
Q reference signaling point Interface
QSIG Generic Functional protocol
QSIG Supplementary service
Recorded Announcement
Recorded Announcement Broadcast
Ringing Change Key
Remote IPE
Room Status
Recorded Overflow Announcement
Radio Paging
Russian Call Monitoring
Remote Virtual Queuing
Semi-Automatic Camp-On
Stand-alone Meridian Mail
Scheduled Access Restrictions
Branch Office
Tone Detector Special Common Carrier
Station Activity Records
Station Category Indication
Station Camp-On
187
353
192
181
262
162
7
327
193
286
100
36
60
146
154
401
92
263
305
316
Number Release
254 20
120 15
366
103
389
186
24
10
25.4
20
4.0
8
20
22
22
1
13
14
1
23
15
390
66
251
80
121
2.0
7
20
15
20
20
7
20
10
2
15
24
18
50 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
SECL
Mnemonic
SIP
SIP_LINES
SIPL_NORTEL
SIPL_3RDPARTY
SLP
SMS
SNR
SOFTSWITCH
SR
SSAU
SS5
SS25
SSC
TAD
TATO
TBAR
TDET
TENS
TFM
STA
STS
SUPP
SUPV
SVCT
SYS_MSG_LKUP
THF
TLSV
TMON
TOF
TSET
Feature Name
Series Call
SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop
SIP Line Services
Nortel SIP Lines
Third Party SIP Lines
Station Loop Preemption
Short Message Service
Stored Number Redial
Soft Switch
Set Relocation
Station Specific Authorization Codes
500 Set Dial Access to Features
2500 Set Features
System Speed Call
Single Term Access
Set to Set Messaging
International Supplementary Features
Supervisory Attendant Console
Supervisory Console Tones
System Errors and Events Lookup
Time and Date
Trunk AntiTromboning
Trunk Barring
Tone Detector
Multiple-Tenant Service
Trunk Failure Monitor
Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)
Telephony Services
Traffic Monitoring
Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow Queuing
M3000 Digital Sets
8
312
132
65
86
182
228
380
131
93
189
245
346
64
402
53
229
73
18
34
Number Release
191 15
406 4.0
417
415
416
106
6.0
5.5
5.5
10
4
1
1
19
2
24
3
4.0
8
20
19
1
19
25
9
157
413
168
111
89
20
7
7
15
14
5.5
10
7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 51
Alphabetical list of packages
TVS
TWR1
Mnemonic
UIGW
UK
UUI
VAWU
VMBA
VIR_OFF_ENH
VIRTUAL_OFFICE
VNS
VO
VOE
XCT0
XCT1
XPE
ZCAC
Feature Name
Trunk Verification from Station
Taiwan R1
Universal ISDN Gateways
United Kingdom
Call Center Transfer Connect
VIP Auto Wake Up
Voice Mailbox Administration
M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement
Virtual Office
Virtual Network Services
Virtual Office
Virtual Office Enhancement
M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS
M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)
Meridian 1 XPE
Zone Call Admission Control
246
387
382
183
382
387
204
205
203
407
Number Release
110 9.32
347 24
283
190
393
212
20
16
3.0
17
19
25.4
25
16
3.0
3.0
15
15
15
4.50
52 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 6: Numerical list of packages
The following list is a comprehensive numerical list of available packages that can be equipped on Meridian
1and CS 1000systems. For an alphabetical list of packages, see Alphabetical list of packages
on page
41.
20
21
22
17
18
19
23
24
25
26
11
12
13
14
16
8
9
10
4
5
7
0
1
2
Number
MSB
SS25
DDSP
ODAS
DI
DISA
CHG
CAB
BAUT
CASM
TAD
DNDI
EES
INTR
ANI
ANIR
BRTE
DNDG
BASIC
Mnemonic
OPTF
CUST
CDR
CTY
RAN
Name
Basic Call Processing
Optional Features
Multi-Customer Operation
Call Detail Recording, Teletype Terminal
Call Detail Recording, Teletype Terminal
Recorded Announcement
Time and Date
Do Not Disturb Individual
End-to-End Signaling
Intercept Treatment
Automatic Number Identification
Automatic Number Identification, Route Selection
Basic Routing
Do Not Disturb Group
Make Set Busy
Special Service for 2500 Sets
Digit Display
Office Data Administration System
Dial Intercom
Direct Inward System Access
Charge Account for CDR
Charge Account/Authorization code
Basic Authorization code
Centralized Attendant Service (Main)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 53
Numerical list of packages
55
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
40
29
32
33
27
Number
28
34
35
CASR
Mnemonic
BQUE
NTRF
NCOS
CPRK
SSC
IMS
AAB
GRP
NFCR
ACDD
LNK
FCA
SR
AA
HIST
AOP
BARS
NARS
CDP
ROA
NSIG
MCBQ
NSC
BACD
ACDB
ACDC
LMAN
MUS
ACDA
MWC
Name
Centralized Attendant Service (Remote)
Basic Queuing
Network Traffic must have NWK packages.
Network Class of Service
Call Park
System Speed Call
Integrated Message Services. UST and UMG are part of the
IMS package.
Recorded Overflow Announcement
Network Signaling
Network Call Back Queuing
Network Speed Call
Basic Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution, Package B
Automatic Call Distribution, Package C
Automatic Call Distribution, Load Management Reports
Music
Automatic Call Distribution, Package A
Message Waiting Center
Automatic Answerback
Group call
New Flexible Code Restriction
Automatic Call Distribution, Package D
ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor
Forced Charge Account
Set Relocation
Attendant Administration
History File
Attendant Overflow Position
Basic Alternate Route Selection
Network Alternate Route Selection
Coordinated Dialing Plan
54 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
CCOS
CDRQ
ATM
TENS
FTDS
DSET
DRNG
PBXI
DLDN
CSL
OOD
SCI
SCC
NXFR
ATVN
ACDR
HOT
DHLD
LSEL
SS5
PQUE
Mnemonic
FCBQ
OHQ
NAUT
SNR
TDET
TSET
LNR
DLT2
PXLT
SUPV
86
87
88
81
83
84
77
79
80
74
75
76
89
90
91
92
93
69
70
71
72
73
66
67
68
62
63
64
65
60
Number
61
Network Priority Queuing
Flexible Call Back Queuing
Name
Off-Hook Queuing
Network Authorization code
Stored Number Redial
Tone Detector
Tone Detector Special Common Carrier
Network Call Transfer
Autovon
Autovon Call Detail Queue Call Restore
Enhanced Hot Line
Deluxe Hold
Automatic Line Selection
500 Set Dial Access to Features
Distinctive Ringing
1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
Departmental Listed Directory Number
Command Status Link
Optional Outpulsing Delay
Station Category Information
Controlled Class of Service
ACD CDR Queue Record
Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Multi-Tenant Service
Fast Tone and Digit Switch
M2000 Digital Sets
M3000 Digital Sets
Last Number Redial
M2317 Digital Sets
Pretranslation
Supervisory Console
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 55
Numerical list of packages
PAGT
CBC
CCDR
EMUS
PLDN
SCMP
TVS
TOF
NKL
IDC
AUXS
DCP
AWU
PMSI
OPAO
LLC
SLP
MCT
ICDR
APL
CPND
Mnemonic
JPN
DNIS
BGD
RMS
MR
IDA
DPNSS
DASS2
FTC
OPCB
116
117
118
119
120
121
110
111
112
113
114
115
122
123
124
125
126
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
95
Number
97
98
99
100
101
Name
Calling Party Name Display
Japan Central Office Trunks
Dialed Number Identification System
Background Terminal
Room Status
PPM / Message Registration
Automatic Wake Up
Property Management System Interface
Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)
Line Load Control
Station Loop Pre-emption
Malicious Call Trace
Internal CDR
Auxiliary Processor Link
Trunk Verification from Station
Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow Queuing
Notification Key Lamps
Incoming Digit Conversion
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary Security
Directed Call Pickup
Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent
Call by Call Service
Calling Line Identification in Call Detail Recording
Enhanced Music
Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL
Station Camp-On
Integrated Digital Access. COMDT is part of IDA Package
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1
Digital Access Signaling System 2
Flexible Tones and Cadences
Operator Call Back (China #1)
56 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IEC
DNXP
CDRE
FXS
IAP3P
PRI2
ICP
ABCD
ISDN
PRA
ISL
NTWK
AFNA
MFE
JDMI
LSCM
DTD
FFC
DCON
MPO
BKI
MFC
DTI2
SUPP
TBAR
ENS
Mnemonic
ACNT
THF
FGD
NAS
FNP
149
150
151
152
153
154
143
144
145
146
147
148
155
157
158
159
160
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
Number
127
128
129
131
132
133
Name
Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
International Supplementary Features
Trunk Barring
Enhanced Night Service
Attendant Forward No Answer
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface
Local Steering Code Modification
Dial Tone Detection
Flexible Feature Codes
M2250 Attendant Console
Multi-Party Operations
Intercept Computer Interface
16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone
Integrated Services Digital Network
Primary Rate Access (CO)
ISDN Signaling Link
Advanced ISDN Network Services
Inter-Exchange Carrier
DN Expansion (7 digit)
CDR Expansion (7 digit)
Flexible Services Package
ISDN AP for 3rd Party Vendors
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface
Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code
Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)
Feature Group D
Network Attendant Service
Flexible Numbering Plan
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 57
Numerical list of packages
TFM
VNS
OVLP
EDRG
POVR
RPA
NMS
DTOT
EOVF
HVS
DKS
SACP
GPRI
TMON
COOP
ARIE
JTDS
CPGS
ECCS
AAA
Mnemonic
ISDN INTL SUP
SAR
MINT
LAPW
RPE2
HOSP
L1MF
SVCT
UK
SECL
ORC_RVQ
182
183
184
185
186
187
175
176
178
179
180
181
188
189
190
191
192
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
Number
161
162
163
164
165
166
Name
ISDN Supplementary Features
Scheduled Access Restrictions
Message Intercept
Limited Access to Overlays
2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment
Hospitality Management
International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway
Traffic Monitoring
Console Operations
Aries Digital Sets
Japan Tone and Digit Switch
Console Presentation Groups
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service
Attendant Alternative Answering
Network Message Services
DID To Tie (Japan only)
ACD Enhanced Overflow
Meridian Hospitality Voice Service
Digit Key Signaling
Semi-Automatic Camp-On
Trunk Failure Monitor
Virtual Network Services
Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)
Executive Distinctive Ringing
Priority Override/Forced Camp-On
Radio Paging
X08 to X11 Gateway
Supervisory Console Tones
United Kingdom
Series Call
Remote Virtual Queuing
58 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
MAID
MLIO
VAWU
EAR
ECT
BRI
IVR
MWI
CIST
MSDL
FCC 68
M911
IPRA
XPE
XCT0
XCT1
MLWU
NACD
HSE
MLM
RCK
FAXS
OHOL
Mnemonic
FRTA
FFCSF
AINS
CWNT
MSDL SDI
MSDL STA
SSAU
DNWK
218
219
221
222
223
224
210
211
212
214
215
216
225
227
228
229
231
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
Number
193
195
196
197
198
200
Name
Ringing Change Key
HiMail Fax Server
On-Hold On-Loudspeaker
French Type Approval
Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)
Automatic Installation
International Primary Rate Access (CO)
Meridian 1 XPE
M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS
M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)
Multi Language Wake Up
Network Automatic Call Distribution
Hospitality Screen Enhancement
Meridian Link Modular Server
Maid Identification
Multi Language Input/Output
VIP Automatic Wake Up
Enhanced ACD Routing
Enhanced Call Trace
Basic Rate Interface
Hold in queue for IVR
Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS
Commonwealth of Independent States -Trunk
Multi-purpose Serial Data Link
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision
Meridian 911
Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)
MSDL Serial Data Interface
Single Terminal Access
Station Specific Authorization Codes
DPNSS Network Services
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 59
Numerical list of packages
257
258
259
261
262
263
251
252
253
254
255
256
264
265
266
267
268
242
243
245
246
247
248
249
250
Number
232
233
234
235
236
240
EQA
ATX
CDRX
EURO
SAMM
QSIG
SCDR
KD3
ARFW
PHTN
INBD
ADMINSET
PEMD
Mnemonic
BRIT
FCDR
BRIL
ACRL
MCMO
MULTI_USER
ALRM_FILTER
SYS_MSG_LKUP
VMBA
CALL ID
MPH
M911 EHN
DPNA
Pulsed E & M (Indonesia, French Colisée)
ISDN BRI Trunk Access
New Format CDR
BRI line application
AC15 Recall
Station Activity Records
Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface
Attendant Remote Call Forward
Phantom TN
International nB+D
Set Based Administration
Equal Access
Autodial Tandem Transfer
Enhanced Call Detail Recording
EuroISDN
Standalone Meridian Mail
QSIG Interface
Name
Meridian 1 Companion Option
Multi-User Login
Alarm Filtering
System Errors and Events Lookup (Option 81C)
Voice Mailbox Administration
Call ID (for AML applications)
Meridian1 Packet Handler
M911 Enhancement Display
Direct Private Network Access
MLMS: Brazilian Meridian Link Modular Server: Brazilian
MLMS: Chinese (PRC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (PRC)
MLMS: Chinese (ROC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (ROC)
MLMS: Dainish
MLMS: Dutch
Meridian Link Modular Server: Dainish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Dutch
60 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
288
289
290
291
292
294
280
283
284
285
286
295
296
297
298
299
301
304
Number
269
270
271
NI2
CHTL
BTD
IPEX
MAT
MQA
UIGW
DPNSS 189I
CHINA
REMOTE_IPE
DPNSS_ES
ADSP
CCB
CPIO
CORENET
CPP
ARDL
Mnemonic
MLMS: Finnish
MLMS: Canadian
French
MLMS: European
French
MLMS: German
MLMS: Italian
MLMS: Japanese
MLMS: Korean
MLMS: Norwegian
MLMS: Russian
MLMS: European
Spanish
MLMS: Latin Am.
Spanish
MLMS: Swedish
Name
Meridian Link Modular Server: Finnish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Canadian French
Meridian Link Modular Server: European French
Meridian Link Modular Server: German
Meridian Link Modular Server: Italian
Meridian Link Modular Server: Japanese
Meridian Link Modular Server: Korean
Meridian Link Modular Server: Norwegian
Meridian Link Modular Server: Russian
Meridian Link Modular Server: European Spanish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Latin American Spanish
Meridian Link Modular Server: Swedish
Universal ISDN Gateways
Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway
China Attendant Monitor Package
Remote IPE
DPNSS Enhanced Services
ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect Supervision
Collect Call Blocking
North American National ISDN Class II Equipment
China Toll Package
Busy Tone Detection
IP Expansion
MAT 5.0
Multiple Queue Assignment
Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81C)
Core Network Module
Calling Party Privacy
Automatic Redial
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 61
Numerical list of packages
334
335
344
346
347
348
349
350
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
311
312
313
315
316
321
323
324
325
326
Number
305
306
307
308
309
310
Mnemonic
QSIG GF
CPRKNET
PAGENET
PTU
MASTER
CPCI
NGCC
TATO
ISPC
OPEN ALARM
QSIG SS
QTN
ETSI_SS
NGEN
DMWI
CISMFS
RANBRD
MUSBRD
ESA
ESA_SUPP
ESA_CLMP
CNUMB
CNAME
NI-2 CBC
JTTC
GCM
SMS
TWR1
MEET
ACLI
MC32
Name
QSIG Generic Functional protocol
Call Park Networkwide
Call Page Networkwide
Preference Trunk Usage
Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side
Called Party Control on Internal Calls
Nortel Symposium Call Center
Trunk Anti Tromboning
ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection
Open Alarms
QSIG Supplementary service
Euro Supplementary service
Next Generation Connectivity
DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication
Commonwealth of Independent States Multifrequency
Shuttle Signalling
Recorded Announcement Broadcast
Music Broadcast
Emergency Services Access
Emergency Services Access Supplementary
Emergency Services Access Calling Number Mapping
Calling Number Delivery
Calling Name Delivery
NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection
Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee
General Call Monitoring
Short Message Service
Taiwan R1
MCDN End to End Transparency
Analog Calling Line Identification
Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity
62 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
DBA
RUCM
Mnemonic
FDID
NMCE
FIBN
PLUGIN
BNE
CPP_CNI
MSMN
STS
CDIR
VIRTUAL_OFFICE
ATAN
NI-2 Name
M3900_PROD_ENH
VIR_OFF_ENH
ACDE
PONW
SBO
UUI
OAS
MED_LANG
M3900_RGA_PROG
ICON_PACKAGE
PCA
H323_VTRK
LOCX
PVQM
SOFTSWITCH
IPMG
GRPRIM
394
395
396
397
398
399
386
387
388
389
390
393
400
401
402
403
404
367
368
370
380
381
382
384
385
Number
351
353
362
364
365
366
Data Buffering and Access
Name
Russian Call Monitoring
Flexible DID
NGenR2/Meridian Communications Exchange Connectivity
Fiber Network
Plug-In
Business Network Express
CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine
Mobility Networking
Set to Set Messaging
Corporate Directory
Virtual Office
Attendant Announcement
NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service
M3900 Phase III Productivity Enhancement
M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement
ACD/CDN Expansion
Priority Network Override
Branch Office
Call Center Transfer Connect
Observe Agent Security
M3904 Mediterranean Language group
M3900 Ring Again
M3900 Full Icon Support
Personal Call Assistant
H.323 Virtual Trunk
Location Code Expansion
Proactive Voice Quality Management
Soft Switch
IP Media Gateway
Geographic Redundancy Primary system
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 63
Numerical list of packages
413
414
415
416
417
418
Number
405
406
407
408
410
412
420
421
422
Mnemonic
GRSEC
SIP
ZCAC
MS_CONV
HA
MOBX
TLSV
FMCL
SIPL_NORTEL
SIPL_3RDPARTY
SIP_LINES
Extended MGP
Resources
Geographic Redundancy Secondary system
SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop
Call Admission Control
Name
Multimedia Systems Convergence
High Availability
Mobile Extensions
Telephony Services
Converged Mobile Users
Nortel SIP Lines
Third Party SIP Lines
SIP Line Services
Extended Media Gateway PRI Resources
ZBD_PACKAGE Zone Based Dialing
HIGH_SCALABILITY HighScalability software package
IPMEDIA_SERVICES IP Media Services
64 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 7: Overlay loader and Multi-User
Login
Overlay loader
The Overlay loader becomes active after the login sequence and password, and then accepts input commands from the Serial Data Interface Terminals (SDI) after the ">" prompt (after login but with no overlay executing).
Overlay loader commands
The Overlay loader commands are as follows:
DIST
Command
ENLT
ERR x..x
FDLC
LD xxx
LD xx D
LOF
Description
Disable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
Enable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
Specific system messages are displayed (package 245 required).
Where: x..x = specific error type and number (ex. ERR SCH1001)
Cancels or stop the system wide download for M39xx units
Load overlay program into the overlay area, and then the loaded program assumes control.
Where: xxx = number of the desired overlay program.
Load overlay programs from disk into the overlay area, even if the program resides in cache memory.
Where:
• xx = number of the desired overlay.
• D = entered as part of command to specify the active disk.
Disable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit).
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 65
Overlay loader and Multi-User Login
STAT
****
Command
LOGO
LON
Description
Exit overlay loader and Log-off the system.
Enable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit).
Print the status of the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
Aborts the current overlay program, allowing another overlay program to be loaded into the overlay area.
Multi-User Login commands
Multi-User Login enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlay programs simultaneously. These five users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The Multi-User capability also introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the ability to:
• determine who is logged into the system
• communicate with other connected users
• halt and resume background and midnight routines
• initiate and terminate terminal monitoring
• change printer output assignment
Note:
MULTI_USER must be enabled in LD 17.
Multi-User commands
A user can issue any of the commands listed in the following table from Overlay loader or from any position within an overlay. Precede the command with an exclamation point (!) to issue a command from within an overlay.
For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type:
!
>WHO
> <CR> takes user back to the same position in current overlay
66 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
WHO
Command
SEND xx
SEND ALL
SEND OFF
SEND ON
FORC xx
HALT
HALT OFF
MON xx
MON OFF
SPRT xx
SPRT OFF
Multi-User Login commands
Description
Displays user name, port ID, and overlay loaded for each logged-in terminal, as well as the user's MON and SPRT commands (see below).
Sends a message to logged-in terminal xx. When the system responds with a "SEND MSG:" prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file.
Sends a message to all logged-in terminals. When the system responds with a "SEND MSG:" prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file.
Prevents messages sent by other terminals from appearing at the user's terminal.
Enables messages sent by other terminals to appear at the user's terminal.
Forces terminal xx to log off (the requesting user must log in with
LAPW or a level 2 password).
Stops background and midnight routines during a login session.
Resumes halted background and midnight routines.
Initiates monitoring for terminal xx (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or a level 2 password). The monitored terminal receives a message at the beginning and end of the monitored period.
Turns off the monitor function.
Assigns printer output to port xx.
Resets printer output assignment.
Note:
For complete feature information about Multi-User Login, consult the System Management
Reference, NN43001-600.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 67
Overlay loader and Multi-User Login
68 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 8: LD 02: Traffic
Basic commands
Command
ASUM
ASUM A
ASUM E
BWTM
CITM
COPC C R R
COPN C R R
COPS R R
FWTM
IDLT 0
IDLT 1
INVC C R R ...
INVN C R R ...
INVS R R ...
ITHC C TH
ITHS TH
Description
Print Alarm/Exception summary
Print all the alarms that have at least one occurrence
Print all the alarms that have escalated
Set the date and time for the clock to move backward
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Clear Individual Traffic Measurement from TNs
Clear one or more customer report types
Clear one or more network report types
Clear one or more system report types
Set the date and time for the clock to move forward
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
No title is printed unless further data is also printed
The title is always printed
Print one or more of the last customer reports
Print one or more of the last network reports
Print one or more of last system reports
Perform threshold tests on customer reports
Perform threshold tests on system reports
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 69
LD 02: Traffic
Command
SCFT C
SCTL X
SDTA X X Y
SDST
SITM
SLLC X
SOPC C R R
SOPN C R R
SOPS R R
SSHC C
SSHS
SSID SID
STAD
STHC C TH TV
STHS TH TV
TCFT
TDST
Description
Set the customer to be measured for feature key usage
Set blocking probability
Set the time of day adjustment
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Enable or disable the automatic daylight savings time adjustment
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Set Individual Traffic Measurement on terminals
Activate Line Load Control at Level X
Set one or more customer report types
Set one or more network report types
Set one or more system report types
Set customer report schedule
Set system report schedule
Change the system ID number
Set the time and date
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Set the customer thresholds
Set the system thresholds
Print current customer being measured for feature key usage
Query the daylight savings time adjustment information
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications
70 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
TITM
TLLC
TOPC C
TOPN C
TOPS
TSHC C
TSHS
TSID
TTAD
TTHC C TH
TTHS TH
TDTA X
Command
How to use traffic commands
Description
co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Print the current time of day adjustment
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Print the current TNs with Individual Traffic Measurement set
Print current LLC level and blocking probability
Print the current customer report types
Print the current network report types
Print the current system report types
Print current customer report schedule
Print current system report schedule
Print the current system ID number
Print the current time and date
Print the current customer thresholds
Print the current system thresholds
How to use traffic commands
The Traffic Control program is used to set traffic options, system ID, date and time. The conventions used to describe the traffic commands are:
• data entered by the user is shown in upper case, data output by the system is shown in lower case
• a period (.) prompt indicates that the system is ready to receive a new command
• a double dash (--) indicates that the system is ready to receive data
• a <CR> indicates that the return key should be pressed
Note:
The message TFC000 output on your switch indicates that the traffic program is running.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 71
LD 02: Traffic
Set traffic report schedules
To print current customer report schedule:
TSHC C sd sm ed em sh eh so d d ...
To print current system report schedule:
TSHS sd sm ed em sh eh so d d ...
To set customer report schedule:
SSHC C sd sm ed em -- SD SM ED EM sh eh so -- SH EH SO d d ... -- D D ...<CR>
To set system report schedule:
SSHS sd sm ed em -- SD SM ED EM sh eh so -- SH EH SO d d ... -- D D ...<CR>
Legend
C = customer number
D = day of the week:
1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
ED = end day (1-31)
EH = end hour (0-23)
EM = end month (1-12)
SD = start day (1-31)
SH = start hour (0-23)
SM = start month (1-12)
SO = schedule options:
0 = no traffic scheduled 1 = hourly on the hour 2 = hourly on the half-hour 3 = every half-hour
Example
To change the system reports schedule:
SSHS 25 4 16 7 -- 1 10 1 12 12 21 2 -- 0 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 -- 1 7<CR>
Old schedule start time: April 25 at 12 noon end time: July 16 at 9 P.M. frequency: hourly on the half-hour (SO = 2) days of the week: Monday to Friday
New schedule
72 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to use traffic commands start time: October 1 at 12 midnight end time: December 1 at 11 P.M.
frequency: hourly on the hour (SO = 1) days of the week: Sunday and
Saturday
Note:
In order to obtain traffic reports at the scheduled intervals, the output device must have prompt USER = TRF in (LD 17). If TRF is not defined for any device, reports are still generated to allow the printing of the last reports.
Note:
Half hour start and end times are not possible.
Set system ID
Each Meridian 1 system has a unique system ID number (SID) selected from 0000 to 9999.
The 4-digit ID number can be printed or set by the following commands.
To print the current SID: TSID sid
To change the SID: SSID sid -- SID
System reports
To print the current report types: TOPS r r ...
To set one or more report types: SOPS r r ... -- R R ...<CR>
To clear one or more report types: COPS r r ... -- R R ...<CR>
Legend
R is traffic report type:
1 = networks 2 = service loops 3 = dial tone delay 4 = processor load 5 = measurement on selected terminals 7 = junctor group traffic 8 = CSL and AML links 9 = D-channel 10 = ISDN GF Transport 11 = MISP traffic 12 = MISP Dchannel management 13 = MISP messaging 14 = ISDN BRI trunk DSL system report 15 = MPH traffic 16 = IP Phone Zone traffic report
Note:
To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 73
LD 02: Traffic
Note:
If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system.
Customer reports
To print the current report types: TOPC C r r ...
To set one or more report types: SOPC C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>
To clear one or more report types: COPC C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>
Legend
C = customer number
R is traffic report type:
1 = networks 2 = trunks 3 = customer console measurements 4 = individual console measurement 5 = feature key usage 6 = Radio Paging 7 = Call Park 8
= messaging and Auxiliary Processor links 9 = Network Attendant Service 10 =
ISPC links establishment 11 = use of broadcasting routes 12 = call blocking due to lack of DSP resource
Note:
To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.
Note:
If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system. For report 5, see "Set customer for feature key usage measurement".
Network reports
To print the current report types: TOPN C r r ...
To set one or more report types: SOPN C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>
To clear one or more report types: COPN C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>
Legend
C = customer number
R is traffic report type:
74 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to use traffic commands
1 = route list measurements 2 = network class of service measurements 3 = incoming trunk group measurements
Note:
To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.
Note:
If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system.
Set customer for feature key usage measurement
To print current customer being measured: TCFT c
To set the customer to be measured: SCFT c -- C
Note:
Where C is the customer number. Only one customer can have feature measurement set at a time.
Stop printing of title, date and time
It is possible to suppress the printing of the title (TFS000), date and time in cases where traffic measurement is scheduled but no other data is printed. The command format is:
IDLT 0,1
0 = no title is printed unless further data is also printed 1 = the title is always printed
Set traffic measurement on selected terminals
These commands are used to print, set and clear the Individual Traffic Measurement (ITM) class of service for given terminal numbers for traffic report TFS005. Telephones, trunks and
DTI channels can have this class of service. Terminals with ITM set are included in the groups for which Line Traffic Measurements are recorded.
Note:
Do not use these commands on superloops or octal density cards (NT8D02, NT8D03,
NT8D09, NT8D14, or NT8D16).
To print the current TNs with ITM set: TITM
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 75
LD 02: Traffic
TITM shelf 4 0 (all units on loop 4 shelf 0 have ITM set) loop 5 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1 (unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 13 2 1 (all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18 (loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set)
To set ITM on terminals: SITM
SITM (prints current settings) shelf 4 1 (current settings) loop 05 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1 (unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 13 2 1(all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18(only loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set) -- 7(set ITM on all units on this loop) -- 6
1(set ITM on all units this shelf, or on channel 1) -- 8 1 1(set ITM on all units on this card) -- 8
1 1 1(set ITM on this unit) -- 30 18(set ITM on this loop 30 channel 18) -- <CR>(stop "--" prompt)
To clear line traffic TNs: CITM (the ITM class of service is removed from all units)
CITM (print current settings) shelf 4 1 (all units on loop 4 shelf 1 have ITM set) loop 05 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1(unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 19 1 1(all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18 (only loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set) -- 4 1(clear ITM on all units on this loop 4 shelf 1) -- 5 (clear ITM on all units on this loop) -- 11 3 4 1(clear ITM on this unit) -- 19 1 1(clear ITM on all units on this card) -- 34 18(clear ITM on this loop 34 channel
18) -- <CR>(stop "--" prompt)
To clear line traffic TNs: CITM (the ITM class of service is removed from all units)
Set blocking probability for Line Load Control (LLC)
To print current LLC level and blocking probability: TLLC
To set blocking probability: SCTL X aaa
To activate Line Load Control at level X: SLLC X
Legend x = F, S or T (for LLC level F, S, or T) aaa = blocking probability in %
Set time and date
To print the current time and date: TTAD day-of-week day month year hour minute second
TTAD WED 24 11 1976 15 41 49
To set the time and date: STAD DAY MONTH YEAR HOUR MINUTE SECOND
STAD 24 11 1976 15 41 49
Note:
Except for the year, the other entries in the time of day output are 2-digit numbers. The year can be any year from 1901 to 2099 inclusive. It can be input as a full 4-digit field or as a 2digit short form. The 2-digit short form is assumed to be in the range 1976 to 2075 and the appropriate addition is made when calculating the day-of-week and leap years.
76 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to use traffic commands
Note:
Only a user having SEC_ADMIN privilege can change the system time and date. This is to prevent date and time based system attacks.
Warning:
Changing the time on the CS 1000 can impact devices and ELAN applications that derive their time from the CS 1000 system. You need to consider the implications of an incorrect time and date change before implementing the change.
Set daily time adjustment
The time of day can be adjusted during the midnight routines to compensate for a fast or slow system clock.
To print the current adjustment: TDTA X y
To set the adjustment: SDTA X y -- X Y
Legend x = 0 (negative increment) or 1 (positive increment) y = 0-25 second adjustment in increments of 100 ms
Set and print Daylight Savings Time
The daylight savings time adjustment can be programmed to take place automatically. You can set the date to change to daylight savings, and to return to standard time. This information can be queried at any time.
The following commands are accepted by this program for this capability. The system clock
MUST ALREADY be set for the daylight savings time to be updated. This information survives sysload:
• FWTM = Set the date and time for the clock to move forward.
• BWTM = Set the date and time for the clock to move backward.
• SDST = Enable or disable the automatic change.
• TDST = Query the change information.
Note:
These commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 77
LD 02: Traffic
Note:
To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.
To implement these commands, use the following:
• FWTM <month> <week> <day> <hour> month = 1-(4)-12 [January-December] week = (1)-5, L [1st-5th, L is the last week of the month] day = (1)-7 [Sunday-Saturday] hour = 1-(2)-22 [Midnight-11:00 pm]
• BWTM <month> <week> <day> <hour> month = 1-(10)-12 [January-December] week = (1)-5, L [1st-5th, L is the last week of the month] day = (1)-7 [Sunday-Saturday] hour = 1-(2)-22 [Midnight-11:00 pm]
• SDST ON, (OFF)
ON enables the automatic change capability OFF disables the automatic change capability
• TDST <CR>
The output reflects the input format to indicate the change information.
Set thresholds
To print the current system thresholds: TTHS TH tv
To set the system thresholds: STHS TH tv -- TV
The system thresholds (TH) and range of values (TV) are:
1 = dial tone speed (range 0.00% to 99.9%) 2 = loop traffic (range 000 to 999 CCS) 3 = junctor group traffic (range 0000 to 9999 CCS) 4 = superloop traffic (range 0000 to 9999 CCS) 5 = zone bandwidth (range 000 to 999)
To print the current customer thresholds: TTHC C TH tv
To set the customer thresholds: STHC C TH tv -- TV
Legend
The thresholds (TC) and range of values (TV) for customer C are:
1 = incoming matching loss (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 2 = outgoing matching loss (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 3 = average Speed of Answer (TV range 00.0
to 99.9 seconds) 4 = percent All Trunks Busy (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 5 = percent OHQ Overflow (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%)
78 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to use traffic commands
Perform threshold tests on last reports
To perform threshold tests on customer reports: ITHC C TH
Legend
C = customer number
TH is the threshold type:
1 = incoming matching loss 2 = outgoing matching loss 3 = average speed of answer 4 = percent all trunks busy 5 = percent OHQ overflow
To perform threshold tests on system reports: ITHS TH
Legend
TH is the threshold type:
1 = dial tone speed 2 = loop traffic 3 = junctor group traffic 4 = superloop traffic
Note:
When a threshold test passes, OK is output.
Print last reports
The last traffic reports can be printed or tested against threshold values. Data accumulating for the next reports is not accessible.
To print one or more of the last customer reports: INVC C R R ...
Legend
C = customer number
R is traffic report type:
1 = networks 2 = trunks 3 = customer console measurements 4 = individual console measurement 5 = feature key usage 6 = Radio Paging 7 = Call Park 8
= messaging and auxiliary processor links 9 = Network Attendant Service 10 =
ISPC links establishment 11 = usage of broadcasting routes 12 = call blocking due to lack of DSP resource
To print one or more of the last network reports: INVN C R R ...
Legend
C = customer number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 79
LD 02: Traffic
R is traffic report type:
1 = route list measurements 2 = network class of service measurements 3 = incoming trunk group measurements
To print one or more of last system reports: INVS R R ...
Legend
R is traffic report type:
1 = networks (per loop) 2 = services 3 = dial tone delay 4 = processor load 5 = selected terminals 7 = junctor group traffic 8 = CSL and ISDN/AP links 9 = Dchannel 10 = ISDN GF Transport 11 = MISP traffic 12 = MISP D-channel management 13 = MISP messaging 14 = ISDN BRI trunk DSL system report
15 = MPH traffic 16 = IP Phone Zone traffic report
Print alarm and exception filter summary
Alarms status summaries can be printed by this overlay. The alarms printed by this overlay are discussed in the System Management Reference, NN43001-600.
Enter any of the following commands at the dot (.) prompt.
Command
ASUM
ASUM A
ASUM E
Description
Print Alarm/Exception summary
Print all the alarms that have at least one occurrence
Print all the alarms that have escalated
Release alrm_filter-19 alrm_filter-21 alrm_filter-21
80 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 9: LD 10: Analog (500/2500)
Telephone Administration
This Overlay program allows data blocks for the 500/2500, DTMF type telephones and Displayphone
1000/220 to be created or modified.
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:
>ld 10
PBX000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED U P: xxxxxx xxxxxx TOT: xxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS
AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ACD AGENTS AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ANALOGUE
TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx AST AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ANALOGUE
TELEPHONES AVAIL : xxxxUSED: xx TOT: xxxx AST AVAIL: xxxxUSED: XX TOT: xxxx WIRELESS
TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx WIRELESS VISITORS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx
CLASS TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx DATA PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx PHANTOM PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx
If a License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License is not printed.
This does not apply for the TNs License.
The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk(**) as valid input to a number of prompts. Usually an asterisk is part of a dialed number. If this package is not equipped, inputting an asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt; inputting two asterisks causes a restart of the Overlay at REQ.
Linked Overlay programs
Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a phone without having to exit one Overlay and load another.
The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:
1. a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or
2. an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 81
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by task:
on page 88
on page 89
on page 89
Prompt
REQ:
DMC
TYPE:
MODL
CFTN
SFMT a...a
TN l s c u
DELETE_VMB (YES) NO
ECHG (NO) YES
- ITEM
TOTN
CDEN
DES
CUST aaaa yyy l s c u aa d...d
xx
Response
a...a
l s c a...a
1-127 l s c u
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on Request)
DECT Mobility Controller Location
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE:)
Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG
1000B, and MG 1000T
Copy From Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Select format for copy command (a...a = TNDN, TN,
DN, or AUTO)
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Delete Voice Mailbox
Easy Change
Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic; yyy = its new value)
To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Office Data Administration System Station Designator
Customer number
82 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- VSIT
- HMDN
DIG
DN
(NO) YES x..x
0-2045 0-99 x..x yyyy
- MARP (NO) YES
- - CPND_LANG aaa aaaa,bbbb xx
- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb
- VMB
- - VMB_COS
- -
SECOND_DN
- - THIRD_DN x...x
- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES
AST
Prompt
NUMZONE
ERL
WRLS
- WTYP
- MWUN
- DMC
- INDX
- - NAME
- - XPLN
- ANIE
IAPG
HUNT
Response
0-1023
(0)-65535
(NO) YES aaaa
(16) 32 l s c
0-509 aaa
0-127 x...x
(0)-n
(NO) YES
(0)-15 x...x
Comment
Numbering zone.
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,
ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.
TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone
Meridian Companion Mobility Option
Maximum number of Wireless Units
DECT Mobility Controller Location
DECT Mobility Controller index to map hand set to
Virtual TN
Visiting DECT Handset 4060
Home Directory Number
Dial Intercom Group number and Member number
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Calling Party Name Display Language (aa = (ROM) or
KAT)
Calling Party Name Display Name
Expected name length
Display Format for Calling Party Name Display
Voice Mailbox (aaa = NEW, CHG, or OUT)
Voice Mailbox Class Of Service
Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password
Automatic Number Identification Entry
Associate Set assignment
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group
Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 83
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
RNPG
XLST
SCPW
SGRP
CRCS
ELKP
SFLT
- SFDN
CAC
CAC_CIS
CAC_MFC
CLS
MAUT
- SPWD
- AUTH
RCO
DCLP
ICT
LNRS
TEN
OHID
HDID
PLEV
SCI
0-(2)-7
(0)-7
FCAR (NO) YES
MLWU_LANG (0)-5
PLEV 0-(2)-7
(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx
(0)-2
0-159
0-<NIPN>
4-(16)-31
1-51
(0)-9
(0)-9 xx
Response
a...a
(0)-99
(0)-4095
(0)-254 xxxx
(0)-999
0-7 x...x
a...a
xxxx
(0)-10
0-(3)-9
(0)-10 a...a
Comment
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Departmental Listed DN (a...a = (NO), 0-3, or 0-5)
Network Class Of Service group number
Ringing Number Pickup Group
Pretranslation group with which this station is associated
Station Control Password
Scheduled Access Restriction group number
Code Restriction Block
Electronic Lock Password
Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
Category Code for outgoing CNI of MFC trunks
CIS ANI Category Code
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service options (see Alphabetical list of prompts
on page 90)
Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone
Secure data password
Authorization code
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer
Dealer Conference Loop
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Last Number Redial Size
Tenant Number
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN Index defined in LD 15
Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect Index defined in LD 15
Priority Level
Station Category Indication priority level
Forced Charge Account Restriction
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service
Priority Level
84 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
Prompt
SPID
PRI
AACD
ARTO
ADAY
AHOL
FTR
TIMP
BIMP
Response
x...x
(1)-48
(NO) YES
(0)-3
(0)-3
(0)-3 a...a x...x
xxx a...a
Comment
Supervisor Position ID
Priority level for ACD Agent
AST ACD telephone
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15
Feature name and related data (FTR responses begin on FTR)
Termination Impedance for XOPS unit (xxx = (600) or
900)
Balance Impedance for XOPS unit (a...a = 600, 900,
3COM, or 3CM2)
Prompts and responses by task
Add a telephone
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
MODL
TN
CDEN
DES
CUST
NUMZONE
ERL
Response
NEW a...a
1-127 l s c u aa d...d
xx
0-1023
(0)-65535
Comment
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE:)
Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG
1000B, and MG 1000T
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined for TN on )
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Office Data Administration System Station Designator
Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0, ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 85
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
DIG
DN
Prompt
WRLS
- WTYP
- MWUN
- DMC
- INDX
- VSIT
- HMDN
- MARP
- CPND
Response
(NO) YES aaaa
(16) 32 l s c
0-509
(NO) YES x..x
0-2045 0-99
Comment
TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone
Meridian Companion Mobility Option
Maximum number of Wireless Units
DECT Mobility Controller Location
DECT Mobility Controller index to map hand set to Virtual
TN
Visiting DECT Handset 4060
Home Directory Number x..x yyyy
(NO) YES aaa
- - CPND_LAN aaa
- - NAME
- - XPLN aaaa,bbbb xx
- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb
- VMB aaa
- - VMB_COS 0-127
- -
SECOND_DN x...x
- - THIRD_DN x...x
- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES
- ANIE
AST
IAPG
HUNT
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
RNPG
(0)-n
(NO) YES
(0)-15 x...x
xx aaa
(0)-99
(0)-4095
Dial Intercom Group number and Member number
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Calling Party Name Display
Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or
KAT)
Calling Party Name Display Name
Expected name length
Display Format for Calling Party Name Display
Voice Mailbox (aaa = NEW, CHG or OUT)
Voice Mailbox Class Of Service
Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password
Automatic Number Identification Entry
Associate Set assignment
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group
Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Departmental Listed DN (aaa = (NO), 0-3, or 0-5)
Network Class of Service group number
Ringing Number Pickup Group
86 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
Prompt
XLST
SCPW
SGRP
CRCS
ELKP
SFLT
- SFDN
CAC
CAC_CIS
CAC_MFC
CLS
CSDN
MAUT
- SPWD
- AUTH
RCO
DCLP
ICT
LNRS
TEN
OHID
HDID
SCI
Response
(0)-254 xxxx
(0)-999
0-7 x...x
aaa xxxx
(0)-10
0-(3)-9
(0)-10 a...a
x..x
(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx
(0)-2
0-159
0-<NIPN>
4-(16)-31
1-51
(0)-9
(0)-9
FCAR (NO) YES
MLWU_LANG (0)-5
PLEV
SPID
PRI
(0)-7
0-(2)-7 x...x
(1)-48
Comment
Pretranslation group with which this station is associated
Station Control Password
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
Code Restriction Block
Electronic Lock Password
Secretarial Filtering (aaa = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
Category Code for outgoing CNI of MFC trunks
CIS ANI Category Code
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service options (see
on page 90)
Converged Service Directory Number Converged
Desktop Service Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23. CSDN is prompted only if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO. NULL response is not accepted.
Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone
Secure Data Password
Authorization code
Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer
Dealer Conference Loop
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Last Number Redial Size
Tenant Number
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN Index defined in LD 15
Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect Index defined in LD 15
Station Category Indication priority level
Forced Charge Account Restriction
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service
Priority Level
Supervisor Position ID
Priority level for ACD Agent
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 87
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
AACD
ARTO
ADAY
AHOL
FTR
TIMP
BIMP
Response
(NO) YES
(0)-3
(0)-3
(0)-3 a...a x...x
xxx a...a
Comment
AST ACD telephone
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15
Feature name and related data (FTR options begin on
FTR)
Termination Impedance for XOPS unit (xxx = (600) or
900)
Balance Impedance for XOPS unit (a...a = 600, 900,
3COM, or 3CM2)
Copy a set
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CFTN
SFMT
- TN
- DN
- POS
- TN
- DN
- POS
Response
CPY 1-32 Request = CPY x a...a
Type of data block l s c u aaaa
Comment
Copy from Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Select Format. You may respond to SFMT with: AUTO,
TNDN, TN or DN. Subprompts follow each of these responses as follows:
AUTO l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx
TNDN l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx
The system provides the new TNs, DNs and ACD position
ID for ACD telephones.
TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
ACD position ID
Manual selection of TNs, DNs and ACD position IDs for
ACD telephones. TN, DN and are prompted -n- times as defined by the CPY command.
TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
ACD position ID
88 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
- DN
- POS
- TN
- TN
- DN
- POS
Prompt Response
TN x..x yyyy xxxx l s c u
DN l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx
Comment
New DNs and ACD position IDs for ACD telephones are provided by the system. TN is prompted -n- times as defined in the CPY command.
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
ACD position ID
TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )
The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN and ACD position ID for ACD telephones. DN and/or POS are prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.
TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
ACD position ID
Easy change
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
MODL
TN
ECHG
ITEM
Response
CHG a...a
1-127 l s c u
YES aaaa yyy
Comment
Request = CHG
Type of data block
Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Easy Change
Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic; yyy = its new value)
Remove a telephone
When removing more than one telephone at a time, you are prompted for the starting TN. The next consecutive assigned TNs are removed.
Prompt
REQ:
Response
OUT 1-32 Request = OUT x
Comment
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 89
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
TYPE:
Response
a...a
Type of data block
Comment
TN l s c u Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
DELETE_VMB (YES) NO Delete Voice Mailbox
Move a telephone
Telephones with mixed directory numbers can be moved only to a TN on the same loop unless the prompt MLDN = YES in LD 17.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
TOTN
Response
MOV a...a
l s c u l s c u
Comment
Request = MOV
Type of data block
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on To
Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AACD
ADAY
Response
(NO) YES
(0)-3
AHOL (0)-3
Comment
Associate set (AST) ACD telephone
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15
Prompted if CLS = RBDA
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15
Prompted if CLS = RBHA
Pack/Rel
ism-17 basic-24 basic-24
ANIE (0)-n ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set. The old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
If ANIE is of 1-N: cist-24
• If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place; the components of the ANI message are
90 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ARTO
AST
AUTH
BIMP
CAC
Response Comment
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer
Data Block, if configured.
• If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC = NO for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place; the old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
(0)-3
(NO) YES n xxxx
600
900
3COM
3CM2
(0)-10
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9
Pack/Rel
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection, defined in the customer data block. Prompted if CLS = RTDA.
basic-22
Associate Set assignment For sets associated with ISDN Applications
Protocol features.
iap3-12
Authorization code. Where:
• n = number (1-6) of assigned authorization code
• xxxx = assigned authorization code (Any customer authorization code assigned in
LD 88 is valid.) ssau-19
AUTH is prompted when CLS = AUTR
(Class of Service = Authorization code required).
Balance Impedance for Enhanced Off-
Premise Station (XOPS) unit
600 ohms. This is the default, except when
CLS = OPS.
900 ohms
3 component
3 component 2. This is the default if CLS
= OPS basic-20
Category code
Category Code range for outgoing CNI of
MFC trunks when Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128 is equipped.
mfc-14
CIS ANI Category Access Code cist-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 91
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
CAC_MFC
Response
(0)-10
Comment
MFC CNI Category Access Code
CDEN
CFTN
Pack/Rel
cist-24
SD DD 4D 8D Single Density Card Double Density Card
Quadruple Density Card Octal Density
Card
XOPS cards are configured as DD on superloops or Small Systems, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B, and MG 1000T.
If REQ=NEW and the loop is a superloop, the default is 4D. If REQ=NEW and the
XOPS card is to be configured on the loop, set CDEN to DD. If REQ=CHG, the card density is not changed.
basic-7
Note:
If a QPC192 (off-premises extension) card is configured in superloop, the response for CDEN should be
Quadruple Density.
l s c u c u
Copy From Terminal Number. Prompted if
REQ = CPY.
For Large System
For CS 1000E
For Small System
For CS 1000S, MG 1000B, MG 1000T
Use this TN as a template for the new sets.
Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new telephones.
basic-12 basic-4.00
basic-16 basic-4.00
CLS
(CTD)
UNR
CUN
Class of Service options
The following CLS assignments determine the calling options and features available to an analog telephone. Defaults are shown in parentheses. Enter each nondefault option required, separated by a space.
basic-1 basic-1 Access Restrictions
Conditionally Toll Denied (default)
Unrestricted
Conditionally Unrestricted.
92 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TLD
SRE
FRE
FR1
FR2
Comment
Toll Denied.
Semi-Restricted.
Fully Restricted.
Fully Restricted 1.
Fully Restricted 2.
(ABDD)
ABDA
(AGRD)
AGRA
(AGTD)
Pack/Rel
Abandoned call record and time to answer denied fcdr-18
Abandoned call record and time to answer allowed
Agent Greeting Denied
Agent Greeting Allowed fxs-25
AGTA
(ALCA)
ALCB
(ARHD)
ARHA
ACD services for 500/2500 type telephones denied
ACD services for 500/2500 type telephones allowed
An AGTA entry is not validated if you do not define ACD in the same pass through this overlay.
phtn-20 cdr-18 ALC loss plan class A port type
ALC loss plan class B port type
Audible Reminder of Held Call Denied
Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed basic-14
(ASCD)
ASCA
(AUTU)
AUTD
AUTR
Alarm Security Denied
Alarm Security Allowed
Mutually exclusive with Three-Party
Service Allowed (TSA) ohas-18
Unrestricted Authcode
Denied Authcode
Restricted Authcode
When the CLS is changed from AUTR to either AUTU or AUTD, all previous telephone authorization code information is removed. Must have Station Specific ssau-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 93
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Authorization Codes (SSAU) package
229.
(BNRD)
BNRA
(C6D)
C6A
Busy Number Redial Denied
Busy Number Redial Allowed
Must have ADL configured and Flexible
Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.
Six-Party Conference Denied
Six-Party Conference Allowed
C6A requires Transfer Allowed (XFA)
Class of Service.
(CCBD)
CCBA
(CCSD)
CCSA
Pack/Rel
ffc-21 basic-10
Collect Call Blocking Denied (permits a set to accept collect calls) ccb-21
Collect Call Blocking Allowed (prevents a set from accepting collect calls)
Must have Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290.
Controlled Class of Service Denied
Controlled Class of Service Allowed
CCSA is required for the Electronic Lock feature. See the Flexible Feature Codes section in the Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106. Must have
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81.
phtn-20
(ZBDD)
ZBDA
(ZBDR)
ZBDV
ZBDO
(CFHD)
CFHA
ZBDD denies record generation
ZBDA generates external station activity records for the set emct-20
Converged Desktop Multimedia
Restricted (default)
Converged Desktop Multimedia and Voice
Converged Desktop Multimedia Only sip-4.00
Call Forward/HUNT Override Denied
Call Forward/HUNT Override Allowed cfho-20
94 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(CFTD)
CFTA
Comment
Call Forward by Call Type Denied
Call Forward by Call Type Allowed
Call Forward by Call Type enhances Hunt and Call Forward No Answer. CFTA requires Hunting Allowed (HTA) and/or
Call Forward Allowed (FNA) Class of
Service.
Pack/Rel
opft-10
(CFXD)
CFXA
Call Forward All Calls to external DN
Denied.
Call Forward All Calls to external DN
Allowed
Examples of external DNs are:
• Route Access Code
• ESN Access Code
• CDP Distant Steering Code
When Denied, a call can be forwarded to only the following internal DNs:
• Single or multi-line telephone
• Attendant DN or CAS local attendant DN
• Listed DN as defined in LD 15
• Message center DN where MWC = YES optf-19
(CLBD)
CLBA
(CLTD)
CLTA
(CNAD)
CNAA
Deactivate Calling Party Number and
Name per-line blocking
Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking
The user may still request CPP by dialing the CPP code.
cpp-21 pra-17 Network Call Trace from this telephone
Denied.
Network Call Trace from this telephone
Allowed
CLASS Calling Name Denied.
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data
Format Allowed.
cname-23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 95
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
CPFD
(CPTA)
CPTD
(CRD)
CRA
(CROD)
CROA
(CWD)
CWA
Response
(CNDD)
CNDA
(CNID)
CNIA
(CNUD)
CNUA
CNUS
(CPFA)
Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
CNUD/CNUD/CNUS/CNAD/CNAA are not a valid input for a Dial Intercom
Group (DIG) set.
Call Number Display Denied.
Call Number Display Allowed
The user can see calling or called name associated with the number dialed if
CPND is set up for the customer associated with the portable personal telephone. Allowed if WRLS = YES.
mcmo-20
Call Number Information Denied
Call Number Information Allowed bgd-10
CLASS Calling Number Delivery Denied.
cnumb-23
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data
Format Allowed.
CLASS Calling Number Single Data
Format Allowed.
Forced Camp-On from another set
Allowed
Forced Camp-On from another set Denied scmp-15
Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed scmp-15
Forced Camp-On to another set Denied
Continuous Ring Denied
Continuous Ring Allowed scmp-15
Calling Line Restriction Override Denied
Calling Line Restriction Override Allowed
Call Waiting Denied
Call Waiting Allowed
The telephone should also have CLS =
HTD (Hunting Denied) because hunting takes precedence.
basic-1
96 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(CWND)
CWNA
Comment
Call Waiting Notification Denied
Call Waiting Notification Allowed
Must have Call Waiting Notification
(CWNT) package 225.
(DDGA)
DDGD
(DNAA)
DNAD
(DNDY)
DNDN
DN display on other set Allowed.
DN display on other set Denied
Pack/Rel
cwnt-19 dpd-21
DN of set is used in 3WT ANI messages.
cist-21
Outgoing 3WT route is used as DN in 3WT
ANI messages.
Must have Commonwealth of Independent
States (CIST) package 221.
Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification without called party's number and name.
qsigss-23
(DNO3)
DNO1
DNO2
(DTN)
DIP
MNL
(DPUD)
DPUA
Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification Option without notification.
Diversion Notification Option without diverted-to party's number and name.
qsigss-23
Digitone. DTN is used for 2500, UNITY and digitone telephones.
Dial Pulse. DIP is used for 500, rotary and dial pulse telephones.
Manual service. MNL is used for manual service to the attendant and Flexible Hot
Line basic-20
DN Pickup Denied
DN Pickup Allowed
DN Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero (RNPG = 0). Must have
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.
dcp-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 97
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
(DSH)
DLO
Comment
Digital Short telephone
Digital Long telephone
Select DLO for line lengths of 2 km or 1.2
miles or more.
Must have Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.
Pack/Rel
ida-16
(EHTD)
EHTA
(EXR0)
EXR1
EXR2
EXR3
EXR4
(FAXD)
FAXA
Enhanced Hot Line Denied
Enhanced Hot Line Allowed
Cannot be assigned with LLC1, LLC2,
LLC3, LNA, MNL or Permanent Hold feature.
phtn-20
Executive Distinctive Ringing Off 0
Executive Distinctive Ringing On 1
Executive Distinctive Ringing On 2
Executive Distinctive Ringing On 3
Eecutive Distinctive Ringing On 4
The digit indicates which of the four distinctive ringing tones and cadences defined in LD 56 is to be used. Must have
Executive Distinctive Ringing (EDRG) package 185.
edrg-16
Fax denied.
Fax allowed. ISDN call is generated with
3.1 KHz Bearer Capability. Set is a modem or a FAX machine.
euro-22
(FBD)
FBA
(FDSD)
Call Forward Busy Denied
Call Forward Busy Allowed
Call Forward Busy Allowed sends DID calls which encounter a busy condition to the attendant. Call Forward Busy should have Hunting and Call Waiting Denied or
CLS = HTD and CWD, because Hunting and Call Waiting take precedence over
FBA.
basic-1
Force Disconnect Denied ponw-25.4
98 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
FDSA
Comment
Force Disconnect Allowed
(FEDA)
FEDD
(FND)
FNA
(FTTC)
Far End Disconnect Allowed for Digital
Cordless Set.
Far End Disconnect Denied for Digital
Cordless Set.
Call Forward No answer Denied
Call Forward No answer Allowed
FTTR
FTTU
(GPUD)
GPUA
Pack/Rel
mc32-25 basic-1
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Conditional creates trunk to trunk connections for supervised Conference.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Restricted denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Unrestricted creates trunk to trunk connections for both Conference and
Transfer.
basic-23
Group Pickup Denied
Group Pickup Allowed
Group Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero. Must have Directed Call
Pickup (DCP) package 115.
dcp-12
(HBTD)
HBTA
(HSPD)
HSPA
(HTD)
Hunt By call Type Denied
Hunt By call Type Allowed basic-10
Hospitality Denied. HSPD is for administration sets.
Hospitality Allowed. HSPA is for room sets.
For HSPA, you must also enter CLS =
CCSA and CLS = MRA. HSPA CLS cannot be entered for a set with transfer or conference capability. This feature is used for Hospitality Management.
hvs-16
Hunting Denied basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 99
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
HTA Hunting Allowed
Comment
(IAMD)
IAMA
ICP Answering Machine Denied
ICP Answering Machine Allowed
This features allows a 2500 set to be a channel in the Intercept Computer
Interface (ICP) Answering Machine.
(ICDD)
ICDA
(IRGD)
IRGA
(LDTD)
LDTA
(LLCN)
LLC1
LLC2
LLC3
(LND)
LNA
Internal Call Detail Recording Denied
Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed
Interrogation set Denied for intercept computer
Interrogation set Allowed for intercept computer
Line Disconnect Tone Denied
Line Disconnect Tone Allowed
Line Load Control off
Line Load Control Class 1
Line Load Control Class 2
Line Load Control Class 3
(LPD)
LPA
(LPR)
HPR
Pack/Rel
icp-16 icdr-10 icp-14 basic-17 llc-13
Last Number Redial Denied
Last Number Redial Allowed
Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15 lnr-8
Message Waiting Lamp Denied
Message Waiting Lamp Allowed
If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, that port should be defined as LPD. With LPA the modem can be damaged by the message waiting lamp voltage 150 V.
phtn-20
Low Priority station
High Priority station
High Priority places this set or trunk at the top of the dial tone queue.
povr-1
100 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(MBXD)
MBXA
Comment Pack/Rel
Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind
Transfer Denied. When CLS = MBXD, blind transfers occur with mis-operation treatment.
Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind
Transfer Allowed. When CLS = MBXA, blind transfers occur without mis-operation treatment. To configure CLS = MBXA, CLS must first be defined as TSA or XFA.
Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package
141 must be equipped to enter MBXD or
MBXA.
mpo-21
MCDA
(MCDD)
(MCRD)
MCRA
(MCTD)
MCTA
Microsoft Converged Desktop Allowed.
Package MS_CONV (408) is required for
MCDA.
Microsoft Converged Desktop Denied
Multiple Call Arrangement Denied
Multiple Call Arrangement Allowed basic-15
(MIND)
MINA
(MPTD)
MPTA
(MRD)
MRA
Malicious Call Trace Denied
Malicious Call Trace Allowed
The TRC key must be removed before changing MCTA to MCTD. MCT is applied on a TN basis.
mct-10 mr-15 Message Intercept Denied
Message Intercept Allowed
Modem Pass Through Denied
Modem Pass Through Allowed
Message Registration Denied
Message Registration Allowed basic-5.50
mr-10
(MWD)
MWA
(NAMA)
NAMD
Message Waiting Denied
Message Waiting Allowed
Name display Allowed
Name display Denied mwc-1 dpd-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 101
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
(NOVD)
NOVA
Comment
Network Override/Breakin Denied
Network Override/Breakin Allowed
(NRCD)
NRCA
(NROD)
NROA
Pack/Rel
ponw-25.4
Night Restriction for forced Camp-On
Denied
Night Restriction for forced Camp-On
Allowed If night restriction is allowed, then forced Camp-On for this set is allowed only during night service .
povr-16
Night Restriction for Priority Override
Denied
Night Restriction for Priority Override
Allowed If night restriction is allowed, then
Priority Override for this set is allowed during night service only.
povr-16
(NRWD)
NRWA
(OCBD)
OCBA
Night Restriction for Call Waiting Denied povr-16
Night Restriction for Call Waiting Allowed
If Night Restriction is allowed, then Call
Waiting for this set is allowed during night service only.
ccb-21 Outgoing Call Barring Denied
Outgoing Call Barring Allowed
Must have FFC and NFCR packages.
(ONP)
OPX
OPS
ONS
(OVDD)
OVDA
On-Premises extension
Off-Premises extension
Supported by QPC192 only.
basic-1
Off-Premises Station (default if CDEN is
DD)
On-Premises Station (default for all others) xpe-20
Override Denied
Override Allowed
Must have Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 ffc-15
102 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
OKCH
PKCH
Comment
Originating Key DN of ACD agent set is charged for a call. Dialing from non prime key: When an external call is set up from a digital set with multiple DNs programmed using any key other than the
Prime DN key the Meridian 1 outputs a
CDR N-record at the end of the call. The
ORIG-ID field of the N-record holds the value of the Prime Key DN.
Enhancement: A new class-of-service
(CLS) is provided for digital sets. When the
CLS is OKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the
N-record will contain the actual originating
DN.
Prime key DN of ACD agent set is charged for the call. When the CLS is PKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the Prime DN. PKCH is the default setting.
(PCWD)
PCWA
Note:
Calls from an ordinary set are not affected by this CLS.
Deny Precedence Call Waiting.
Allow Precedence Call Waiting
Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package. Requires PRMA class of service.
atvn
Pack/Rel
(PGND)
PGNA
(PHTD
PHTA
(PRMD)
PRMA
Deny PAGENET access
Allow PAGENET access
Requires PAGENET package 307.
Deny Precedence Hunting
Allow Precedence Hunting
Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package. Requires HTA and PRMA class of service.
Deny Preemption
Allow Preemption pagenet-22 atvn
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 103
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Allowed only if Station Loop Preemption
(SLP) is equipped. Requires Warning
Tone Allowed (WTA) class of service.
(PRSD)
PRSA
(PUD)
PUA
Priority Call Pickup Station Denied
Priority Call Pickup Station Allowed
Pack/Rel
povr-15
Call Pickup Denied
Call Pickup Allowed
Default changes to PUA if Ringing Number
Pickup Group (RNPG) is defined. Call
Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero or RNPG = 0.
grp-1
(RBDD)
RBDA
(RBHD)
RBHA
(RCC)
UCC
(RMMD)
RMMA
RMMO
(RTDD)
RTDA
(SDND)
SDNA
(SFD)
SFA
Redirection By Day Denied
Redirection By Day Allowed
Redirection By Holiday Denied
Redirection By Holiday Allowed basic-24 basic-24
Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls fca-10
Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls
Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied vmba-24
Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed
Allow Remote Monitoring of Messages and to Override, if it is being already monitored
Call Redirection by Time of day denied
Call Redirection by Time of day allowed
If CLS = RTDD, AFD/AHNT/AEFD/AEHT is removed, and ARTO is reset to zero.
basic-22 basic-5.50
Phantom DN as SDN denied.
Phantom DN as SDN allowed.
Second Level CFNA Denied
Second Level CFNA Allowed
SFA requires FNA Class of Service.
basic-10
104 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(SHL)
LOL
Comment
Short line Class of Service
Long line Class of Service (default if CLS
= OPS)
Enter ALC Loss Plan Class of Service to be used for determining the Loss Plan
Classification for this unit. If neither SHL or
LOL is specified for a NEW unit, then SHL is set as the default.
Pack/Rel
xops-20
(SLKD)
SLKA
(SMSD)
SMSA
(SMWD)
Scheduled Electronic Lock Denied
Scheduled Electronic Lock Allowed
Standalone Mail Server Denied
Standalone Mail Server Allowed sar-20 samm-20 vmba-24
SMWA
(SPKD)
SPKA
Extended Message Waiting Indication
Denied.
Extended Message Waiting Indication
Allowed.
Speaker Denied
Speaker Allowed
Must have On-Hold on Loudspeaker
(OHOL) package 196.
ohol-15
(SWD)
SWA
(TEND)
TENA
(T87D)
T87A
(THFD)
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed
Enhances Call Waiting Allowed. Must have CLS = CWA. Must also have CLS =
HTD, because hunting takes precedence over Station-to-Station Call Waiting.
basic-8 tens-7 Tenant Service Denied
Tenant Service Allowed
Deny Remote Call Control
Allow Remote Call Control ms_conv-4.50
Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash on this set denied thf-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 105
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
THFA
Comment
Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash on this set allowed
TSA
Pack/Rel
Three-Party Service allowed
TSA is mutually exclusive with ASCA and
XFA. If TSA is requested and XFA is currently set, then XFA is changed to XFD mpo-20
(TVD)
TVA
(UDI)
RDI
(ULAD)
ULAA
Trunk Verification from station Denied
Trunk Verification from station Allowed tvs-10
Station is not restricted from receiving DID calls supp-10
Station is restricted from receiving DID calls
Set Based Administration User Access
Denied
Set Based Administration User Access
Allowed adminset-21
(USMD)
USMA
(USRD)
USRA
(WTA)
WTD
(XFD)
XFA
XFR
Meridian 911 position Denied
Meridian 911 position Allowed
Must have Meridian 911 (M911) package
224 m911-19
User Selectable Call Redirection Denied uscr-19
User Selectable Call Redirection Allowed
Warning Tone Allowed
Warning Tone Denied basic-1
Call Transfer Denied
Call Transfer Allowed
Call Transfer Restricted
TSA is mutually exclusive with XFA. If TSA is requested and XFA is currently set, then
XFA is changed to XFD. The most recently entered CLS overwrites the prior CLS of the same category. Note that one can specify XFR instead of XFD.
basic-1
106 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(XHD)
XHA
Comment
Exclusive Hold Denied
Exclusive Hold Allowed
(XRD)
XRA
Pack/Rel
dhld-4
Ring Again Denied
Ring Again Allowed
Must have CLS= XFA. RANA can be activated if OPT = RNA in LD 15. When
OPT = RND in LD 15, all sets with CLS =
XRA can activate only Ring Again Busy.
optf-1
CPND
CPND_LANG
CRCS
CSDN
NEW
CHG
OUT
(ROM)
KAT
0-7 x..x
Calling Party Name Display
Add data block
Change existing data block
Remove existing data block
Must have CPND data block defined in LD
95.
cpnd-19
Calling Party Name Display Language
Roman
Katakana
CPND_LANG applies when FTR = CPND.
CPND_LANG appears only when Multi-
Language I/O (MLIO) package 211 is equipped.
cpnd-19
Code Restriction Block nfcr-2
CUST
DCLP xx
0-159
Converged Service Directory Number
Converged Desktop Service
Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23.
CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO
NULL response is not accepted sip-4.00
Customer number associated with this set as defined in LD 15.
cust-1
Dealer Conference Loop ohol-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 107
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
DELETE_VMB
(YES)
DES
Response Comment
DCLP input defines the conference loop assigned to the unit. The loop should be in the same group as the unit.
NO d...d
Delete Voice Mailbox
Remove the Voice Mailbox from the
Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail
Remove the Voice Mailbox from the
Meridian 1
Prompted if REQ = OUT and TN has an associated Voice Mailbox. Allowed if the
DN is either a single appearance or a multiple appearance DN on a single TN.
ODAS Station Designator
Enter a 1-6 alphanumeric character representing an Office Data
Administration System (ODAS) Station
Designator.
Pack/Rel
vmba-19 odas-1
DIG 0-2045 0-99 Dial Intercom Group (DIG) number and
Dial Intercom Member (DIM) numbers.
The value entered for the member number cannot be equal to the SPRE code. In the case of double-digit values, the first digit cannot be the same as the SPRE code.
For example, if SPRE = 1, the member number cannot be 10, 11...19.
Single line telephones assigned as Dial
Intercom sets can only make calls within their own dial intercom groups. No DN can be assigned to them.
If any member in the group has a two digit member number, all members have a two digit number. The system enters leading zeros.
Must have maximum number of Dial
Intercom Groups (DGRP) defined in LD
15.
di-1
DISPLAY_FMT
(FIRST,
LAST)
Display Format for CPND name can be input as FIRST To view names as
John Doe cpnd-19
108 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
LAST, FIRST can be input as Last To view names as Doe
John
DMC
DN
ECHG l s c l s c c c c x..x yyyy
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Digital Enhanced Cordless
Telecommunication (DECT) Mobility
Controller Location
Format for Large System
Format for CS 1000E
Format for Small System
Format for CS 1000S
Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T mc32-25 basic-4.00
basic-1 basic-4.00
Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry (yyyy)
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. DN is not prompted for
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Model sets or if DIG is defined.
Range for CLID table entry is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)
If the new DN entered already exists, one of the following messages is output when the TNB is updated: basic-1
• MIX (DN entered already appears on another set)
• PVR (DN is a Private Line number)
• HNT (DN exists and is defined as
Hunting Allowed)
• FNA (DN exists and has Forward No
Answer)
Before the DN can be modified, the station
DN must be removed from all Group Hunt lists in which it is a member.
ISDN is not required for Calling Line
Identification entry.
Easy Change. Prompted when REQ =
CHG.
basic-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 109
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
ELKP
ERL
Response Comment
This allows change to any prompt in this program without toggling through all the prompts.
x...x
<CR>
(0)-65535
X
Pack/Rel
Electronic Lock Password
Prompted with the Flexible Feature Codes
(FFC) package 139. Password length is one to 15 digits, and is set in LD 15.
ffc-14
Emergency Response Location.
Enter no value to make this TN Auto
Update.
Enter a value to statically configure this TN
(Manual Update).
Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.
basic-5.00
FCTB
FTR FTR
Feature Control Bitmap.
Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature
Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
Enter the feature name and related data.
ss25-1
Precede feature mnemonic with X to remove it from the allowed features for the telephone. Prompted with Special Service for 2500 sets (SS25) package 18.
ACD x...x yyyy
The ACD DN and the ACD position (POS
ID)
The ACD queue must be set in LD 23. ACD can be up to 4 digits; up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
An ACD entry is only allowed if you have already defined CLS = AGTA in the same pass through this overlay.
ism-16
110 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADL nn x..x
Auto Dial
Comment
Auto Dial cannot be configured if Hot Line is defined.
nn = number of digits, up to 31 maximum in Auto Dial DN x..x = Auto Dial DN
Auto Dial is required for BNRA
Must have Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.
Pack/Rel
ffc-15
AEFD y...y
basic-22
AEHT y...y
Alternate External Flexible Call Forward
DN, up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or
CFTD.
Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.
Alternate External Hunt DN, up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or
CFTD.
Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.
basic-22
AFD y...y
AHNT y...y
CFW nn
Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN, up to
13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD
Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.
basic-22
Alternate Hunt DN, up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.
Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.
basic-22
Call Forward all calls.
Where: nn = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN; it must be large enough to hold the customer Reply DN.
• When the Enhanced System Access feature is configured, valid entries are 4,
8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Numbers ss25-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 111
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
between 4 and 31 are rounded up to the next valid number.
• When the Enhanced System Access feature is not configured, valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-23.
Pack/Rel
CPND
DCFW nn x...x
Default Call Forward
Where: nn = maximum number of digits in the DCFW DN.
supp-10
Valid entries for nn are: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24,
28, 31.
Where: x...x = Default Call Forward DN.
EFD x...x
Call Party Name Display, name assignment allowed
Response required only if Background
Terminal or PMSI is used to configure names. Response is not required if CPND is programmed in LD 95.
cpnd-10
EHT x...x
External Flexible call forward DN (a Group
Hunt pilot DN can be entered) basic-10
This is the DN to which external no answer calls are routed when Class of Service is
Call Forward by Call Type allowed (CLS =
CFTA). Must also have CLS = FNA.
EFD is only used if one of the following customer options are defined in LD 15:
• FNAD = FDN
• FNAT = FDN
• FNAL = FDN
Listed DNs, Departmental Listed DNs and prime DNs are accepted as valid input.
EFDs can be up to 13 digits.
External Hunt DN
This is the DN to which external busy calls
Hunt when Class of Service is Call
Forward by Call Type allowed (CLS =
CFTA). Must also have CLS = HTA.
basic-10
112 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Listed DNs, Departmental Listed DNs and prime DNs are accepted as valid input. A
Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered with up to:
• 4 digits without DNXP package 150
• 7 digits with DNXP package 150
• 13 digits for Network Call Redirection
FAXS x...x
FDN x...x
Pack/Rel
Facsimile server and command sequence faxs-18
The command sequence includes the following:
• Wx = waiting time of 0 to 9 seconds
• Cxxx = control command digits
• Oxxxx = originating or designated fax
DN
• D = the called fax DN
For HiMail server, if the designated fax DN is 1234:
FTR FAXS W6 O1234 C#10* D C## W4, or
FTR FAXS W6 O1234 C#20* D C## W4
For Phi-Net server, if the designated fax
DN is 1234:
FTR FAXS W4 C30 O1234 C*0 D C#
The facsimile server TNs must have
Digitone (DTN) Class of Service and cannot have FNA, CWA, or FBA Class of
Service, or FTR CFW feature.
Use the HUNT feature to define the DN of the next port on the facsimile server.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer
The DN cannot be an LDN
A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered of up to: basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 113
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
• 4 digits without DNXP package 150
• 7 digits with DNXP package 150
• 13 digits for Network Call Redirection
FDN is used for internal calls, if CLS is
CFTA and FNA.
FDN is used for all calls if CLS is CFTD and FNA.
FDN requires that CLS = MWA or FNA.
FDN is only used if one or more of the following customer options are defined in
LD 15:
• FNAD = FDN
• FNAT = FDN
• FNAL = FDN
Pack/Rel
HOT Small System Model set
Direct entry for Hotline Model set.
Automatic termination DN is 8 digits.
CS 1000S Model set hot-16 basic-1.0
HOT D nn x...x
Direct entry for one way Enhanced Hot
Line. Where:
• nn = up to 31 digits maximum in Target
DN
• x...x = Terminating DN
CLS = EHTA and DIP or DTN hot-10
HOT D nn x...x yyyy
Direct entry for two way Enhanced Hot
Line. Where:
• nn = up to 31 digits maximum in Target
DN
• x...x = Terminating DN
• yyyy = optional two way Hot Line DN.
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 hot-10
114 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
CLS = EHTA and DIP or DTN.
Pack/Rel
HOT nn x..x
Flexible Hot Line.
Where: nn = up to 31 digits maximum in
Target DN and x..x = Terminating DN.
Flexible Hot Line requires that CLS =
MNL.
HOT L bbb One way list entry for Enhanced Hot Line hot-10
Where: bbb = list entry position from Hot
Line list in LD 18.
The Hot Line list NCOS overrides the set
NCOS.
Enhanced Hot Line requires CLS = EHTA,
LLCN, PHTD and DIP or DTN. To remove
Hot Line DN, change CLS EHTA to
EHTD.
Hot Line DNs can be programmed with * as operands only if OPAO is enabled.
HOT L bbb x...x
ICF x...x
Two way list entry for Enhanced Hot Line.
Where: hot-10
• bbb = list entry position
• xxxx = optional two way Hot Line DN.
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
Enhanced Hot Line requires CLS = EHTA,
LLCN, PHTD and DIP or DTN. To remove
Hot Line DN, change CLS EHTA to
EHTD.
Hot Line DNs can be programmed with * as operands only if OPAO is enabled.
Internal Call Forward and Forward DN length.
Valid entries for x...x are: any integer in the range of (4)-31.
icf-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 115
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
ISP 1-(75)-255
Comment
Enable hook flash disconnect supervision with flash timer in 10 milliseconds units. If the numeric parameter is not entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 75 (750 ms). Otherwise, it does not change.
Pack/Rel
basic-21
OSP (1)
OSP 2
Enable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with absolute and assumed answer indication.
Enable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with absolute answer indication only.
If the numeric parameter is not entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 1. Otherwise, it does not change.
basic-21
PEP xxxxx
PHD
Apply PEP number xxxxx to this set. PEP number xxxxx is an X21 maintenance PEP which is available from the Meridian PEP
Library. PEP xxxxx uses this feature as a
'trigger' to execute certain code.
basic-4.50
Permanent Hold. Allowed with CLS =
XFA.
basic-1
RDL nn Stored Number Redial
Where: nn = DN length 4, 8, 12, (16), 24,
28, 31. Numbers between 5 and 30 are rounded up to the next valid number.
Allowed with CLS = XFA.
snr-3 optf-1 SCC 0-8190 Speed Call Controller list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.
SCU 0-8190 Speed Call User list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.
optf-1
SSU 0-4095 System Speed call User list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.
ssc-2
XISP Disable hook flash disconnect supervision
116 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
XOSP
Comment
Disable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision
HDID (0)-9
Pack/Rel
Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect
Index defined in LD 15 basic-24
HMDN x..x
HUNT
IAPG
ICT
INDX x...x
(0)-15
0-<NIPN>
0-509
Home Directory Number Sets the DN as a valid MCDN network DN msmn-32
Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain
A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered of up to:
• 4 digits without DNXP package 150
• 13 digits with DNXP package 150
Precede with X to remove.
With Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type, this is the Hunt DN for:
• internal calls if CLS = CFTA, or
• all busy calls if CLS = CFTD
A Control Directory Number (CDN) can be defined as a Hunt DN for both physical and phantom 500/2500 sets. When a CDN is configured in this way, a call which comes to a busy DN can be Hunting or Call
Forward Busy to a CDN.
basic-1
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message
(USM) group aml-16
Assign Associate (AST) telephones to an
USM group defined in LD 15. These groups determine which status messages are sent to the host computer for an AST telephone. The default Group 0 sends no messages, while Group 1 sends all messages.
aml-16 icp-16 Intercept Computer Terminal or Printer
Number The Number of Intercept
Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.
DECT Mobility Controller index Maps hand set to Virtual TN mc32-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 117
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
ITEM
Response
aaaa yyy
Comment Pack/Rel
Change any prompt Respond with the desired program mnemonic (aaaa) and its new value (yyy). ITEM is reprompted until only a carriage return <CR> is entered.
basic-12
KEEP_MSGS
(NO) YES
LDN (NO) 0-5 vmba-19
Keep Messages Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password
Departmental Listed Directory Number is not activated for this set Departmental
Listed Directory Number (LDN) as defined in LD 15 dldn-5
LNRS
MARP
MAUT
4-(16)-31
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
MLWU_LANG
(0)
1
2
3
4
5
Last Number Redial Size
Enter the maximum number of digits that can be stored. Valid entries are 4, 8, 12,
(16), 20,24, 28, 31. Invalid entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.
Prompted if CLS = LNA.
lnr-8
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Use TN as the Multiple Appearance DN
Redirection Prime. The MARP prompt, or
MARP information, is given only when assigning a DN.
Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone Prompted with Station
Specific Authorization Codes (SSAU) package 229 and CLS = AUTR.
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service. Prompted with Multi-Language
Wake Up (MLWU) package 206. This entry defines the language presented for the
Automatic Wake Up recorded announcement (RAN) for language 0 through 5 as follows: basic-18 ssau-19 mlwu-19
See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15
See LA11/LA12 in LD 15
See LA21/LA22 in LD 15
See LA31/LA32 in LD 15
See LA41/LA42 in LD 15
See LA51/LA52 in LD 15
118 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
X
Response
Remove entry
Comment
MODL 1-127
MWUN
NAME
(16) 32 aaaa,bbbb aaaa aaaa,
,bbbb
Pack/Rel
Model number
Prompted for Small System and CS 1000S
Model sets.
Prompted for CS 1000S Model sets.
basic-16 basic-1
Maximum number of Wireless Units
Standard line card = 16 Octal line card =
32 mc32-24
Calling Party Name Display Name First name comma Last name.
For example, John Doe is entered as
John,Doe. The first single comma is treated as the delimiter. Up to 27 characters (including the comma) can be input. The last occurrence of the first comma group serves as the name delimiter and is translated into a space between the first and last name.
When the delimiter is omitted, the input is stored as a first name.
When the delimiter follows the input, the input is stored as the first name.
When the delimiter precedes the input, the input is stored as a last name.
cpnd-21
NCOS
(0)-3
(0)-7
(0)-15
(0)-99
NUMZON
E
0-1023
OHID (0)-9
Network Class of Service group number ncos-2
CDP
BARS or NFCR
NARS
Network Class of Service group number
Numbering zone.
zbd-6.00
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index
Enter the index number 0-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompt ODNx. When a dial tone or interdigit timeout occurs on a set with Alarm Security Allowed (ASCA) basic-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 119
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
PLEV
POS
Response Comment
Class of Service, the set is intercepted to a predefined DN.
0-(2)-7 xxxx
Pack/Rel
Priority Level
Where: 2 = set can override sets of level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of level 2-7. Prompted with Priority Override/
Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or
Enhanced DPNSS1 Services
(DPNSS_ES) package 288.
povr-20
ACD position ID. Prompted when SFMT =
AUTO, TNDN, TN or DN.
basic-12
PRI (1)-48
RCO
REQ:
(0)-2
?
CHG
CDCS
CPY n
END
MOV
Priority level for ACD Agent. The agent with the lowest number assigned has the highest priority and is the first ACD agent to receive calls. (Priority 1 has the highest priority level) pagt-16
PRI is prompted if Automatic Call
Distribution, Priority Agent package 116 is equipped and CLS = AGTA.
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No
Answer Prompted when CLS = FNA or
MWA (or both).
uscr-19
Request
To get a list of valid responses
Change existing data block
Convert Digital Communication Set basic-1 mc32-25
Note:
The CDCS command can also be used on MCMO type telephones
Copy or create 1 to 32 new station data block or blocks automatically from the specified station data block. Not valid for
Option11 Models.
Exit Overlay program
Move data block from one TN to another.
MOV command can be used to move analogue "IPE" telephones from one loop, shelf, card, unit to another lscu with the basic-25.4
120 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NEW X
OUT X
Comment
following restrictions (includes moves across Superloops):
-ACD sets must not be moved. Remove
(out) data and re-enter at destination.
-Telephones with mixed directory numbers can only be moved to a TN on the same loop; unless the prompt MLDN = Yes in LD
17.
-Cannot be used for Small System and CS
1000S Model sets
MOV command can be used to move analogue "EPE" telephones from one unit or card to another, but does not support moving these phones across shelves or loops.
Add new data block or blocks Follow NEW with a value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive telephone data block or blocks.
Remove data block or blocks Follow OUT with a value of 1-255 to remove that number of consecutive telephones.
The following is a list of valid responses.
For further information, consult the appropriate Overlay program.
LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC
DISI DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS
DSXP ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN
ENLS ENLU ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU
LBSY LDIS LIDL LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT
SUPL TRK XNTT XPCT XPEC
LD 20: LTN LUC LUDU LUU LUVU PRT
LD 10: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT
RNPG (0)-255
(0)-4095
SCI (0)-7
Ringing Number Pickup Group
Ringing Number Pickup Group with
Capacity Expansion
To remove a telephone from a group, enter
0 in response to the RNPG prompt.
grp-1 grp-1
Station Category Indication priority level
The Station Category number 1 to 7 must sci-7
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 121
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
SCPW
Response Comment
be defined as attendant console Incoming
Call Indicator in LD 15 prompt ICI = CA1-
CA7.
xxxx
Pack/Rel
Station Control Password
The Station Control password is used for the Electronic Lock and Remote Call
Forward features. This entry must equal the Station Control Password Length
(SCPL) as defined in LD 15.
Not prompted if SCPL = 0. See Flexible
Feature Codes in Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106
ffc-15
SECOND_DN x...x
SFDN
SFLT
SFMT
X xxxx
(NO)
BOSS
SEC
TNDN vmba-19
Second Directory Number sharing the
Voice Mailbox. This number can be up to
4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150.
Enter the letter "X" to delete the second directory number
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set SFDN is prompted if SFLT = BOSS.
ftcsf-15
Secretarial Filtering
Assign no designation to telephone
Designate telephone as a Boss set
Designate telephone as a Secretary set
(NO), SEC and <CR> takes you to the next prompt.
SFLT is prompted with Boss Secretary
Filtering (FTCSF) package 198.
ftcsf-15
Select Format for the copy command
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The POS prompt appears if
CLS = AGTA.
Manual selection of TNs, DNs and ACD position IDs for ACD telephones. TN, DN basic-12
122 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TN
DN
AUTO
Comment
and POS are prompted -n- times as defined by the CPY command.
The new DNs and ACD position IDs for
ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting
DN, ACD position ID and each TN. TN is prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.
The new TNs are provided by the system.
You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN and ACD position ID for ACD telephones. DN and/or POS are prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.
The new TNs, DNs and ACD position ID for ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting
TN, DN and ACD position ID.
SGRP (0)-999
SPID
SPWD
TEN x...x
xxxx
1-51
Pack/Rel
Scheduled Access Restriction Group
Number
Prompted with Schedule Access
Restrictions (SAR) package 162. The group must be defined in LD 88.
sar-15
Supervisor Position ID
This input assigns an agent to a supervisor when agent lamps are not assigned on the supervisor telephone.
acdb-1
This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150. However, ISDN applications can accept up to 13 digits.
Prompted for ACD packages B, C and D when CLS = AGTA.
ssau-19 Secure Data Password Prompted if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security codes do not print when PRT is requested.
Multi-Tenant Number Enter the Multi-
Tenant number for this telephone.
Prompted with Multiple-Tenant Service tens-7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 123
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
TGAR
THIRD_DN
Response Comment
(TENS) package 86 and Tenant Service enabled.
0-(1)-31 x...x
X
Pack/Rel
Trunk Group Access Restriction The default of (1) automatically blocks direct access basic-1
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third Directory Number. This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Deletes the third directory number vmba-19
TIMP
TN
(600)
900 l s c u
Termination Impedance for XOPS unit
600 ohms
900 ohms
The following combinations of TIMP/BIMP are valid: basic-20
• 600/600
• 900/900
• 600/3COM
• 900/3COM
• 600/3CM2
• 900/3CM2
These are equivalent to the TIMP/BIMP prompts in LD 14 for the EXUT card. TIMP is prompted if the specified TN is configured on an XOPS card (DD card on a superloop). If the response to TIMP uniquely describes the TIMP/BIMP combination, then BIMP is not prompted.
Terminal Number The TN defines the location of the telephone. TN appears when REQ = NEW, CHG, MOV or OUT.
Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Where l = basic-1
124 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
l s c u c u
Comment
• 0-159: loops, superloops which are multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0
• 0-255: loops, Systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
Where s =
Pack/Rel
fnf-25
• 0-3: IPE shelves on loops defined TERM in LD 17
• 0-1: IPE shelves on loops defined TERD in LD 17 and superloops
• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined TERQ in
LD 17
Where c =
• 1-10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops
• 0-15: IPE cards of superloops
Where u =
• 0-3: single density units
• 0-7: double density units
• 0-15: quad density units
Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, -
252: superloop number in multiples of 4
Where s = basic-4.00
basic-6.00
• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop
• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop
Where c = basic-5.00
basic-6.00
• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop
• 1-10: cabinet on superloop
• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop
Where u = 0-31
Format for Small System, where:c u = card, unit basic-16
• c = 1-50
• u = 0-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 125
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
c u c u
Comment
Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit
Pack/Rel
basic-1.0
• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
• u = 0-31
Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit basic-4.00
• c = 0-4, 7-10
• u = 0-31
Format for MG 1000B Cabinet, where: c = card and u = unit
• c = 0-10
• u = 0-31
TOTN c u
l s c u l s c u c u c u c u
Note:
For converted Small Systems only, the
Meridian Mail card must be installed in slot 10 if Meridian Mail is to be supported.
Format for MG 1000T, where:
• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37-
44, 47-50
• u = 0-31 basic-4.00
To Terminal Number. Prompted when
REQ = MOV
Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit basic-1
Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small
System Model sets.
basic-4.00
basic-16
Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit
Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit To Terminal
Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV.
basic-1.0
basic-4.00
126 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TYPE:
Response
TYPE:
?
500
500 M
CARD
CARDSLT
DCS
OOSSLT
Comment
Type of data block.
To get a list of valid responses
500/2500 telephone data block
500/2500 Model telephone data block for
Small System and CS 1000S
500/2500 card block for Automatic Set
Relocation (ASR)
Single-line telephone line card
Digital Cordless Set
Out-of-Service Single Line Terminal unit
Pack/Rel
basic-20 mc32-25 vmba-19 VMB NEW
CHG
OUT
VMB_COS
0-127
VSIT (NO) YES
Add Voice Mailbox
Change Voice Mailbox
Remove Voice Mailbox
Voice Mailbox Class of Service
Visiting DECT Handset 4060 Determines the difference between a local handset and a visiting handset.
vmba-19 msmn-32
WRLS (NO) YES
WTYP
XLST
(MCMO)
DECT
(0)-254
TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone. Must have Meridian 1
Companion Option (MCMO) package
240.
Note:
Additional units configured on either the
MCMO or DECT card requires identical entries for WRLS, WTYP and MWUN prompts.
mcmo-20
Meridian Companion Mobility Option
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephone mcmo-23
Pretranslation group associated with this station If the user wants to use a 16-button
DTMF ABCD set as a call forward destination station to deactivate the call forward all calls function, then XLST must pxlt-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 127
LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration
Prompt
XPLN xx
Response Comment
be set equal to the table number defined in LD 18.
Pack/Rel
Expected name length (this value should be set to a sufficient length for current and future names for that DN)
When REQ=NEW, the XPLN prompt defines the maximum name length for that particular DN or DIG. The XPLN for a DN cannot be changed without deleting that name entry.
XPLN must range from the actual length of the name string to MXLN, or defaults to
DFLN.
cpnd-19
128 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 10: LD 11: Digital Telephone
Administration
This Overlay program allows data blocks for Displayphone 1200, M1000 series, M2000 series, M3000 digital telephones, and IP Phones to be created or modified.
When the Overlay is loaded, the available system memory, disk records, and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:
>ld 11
SL1000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED U P: xxxxxx xxxxxx TOT: xxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS
AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx INTERNET TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xxx TOT: xxxx ACD
AGENTS AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx AST AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx DIGITAL
TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx WIRELESS TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx DATA PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx
If a License limit is set to the value 32767 (maximum), then the information for that License is not output.
This does not apply for the TNs License.
The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk (**) as a valid input to a number of prompts. Usually the asterisk is part of a dialed number. Without this package, inputting one asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt; inputting two asterisks causes the system to restart the Overlay at the REQ prompt.
Linked Overlay programs
Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load another.
The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:
• a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or
• an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 129
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by task:
on page 136
on page 140
on page 144
on page 146
on page 146
MODL
CFTN
SFMT
TN
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
ECHG
- ITEM
Response
a...a
a...a
1-127 l s c u c u a...a
l s c u c u
DELETE_VMB (YES) NO
NEWTYP
PROCEED a...a
YES (NO)
(NO) YES aaaa yyy
Comment
Request
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)
Model number for small systems and CS 1000S
Copy From Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal
Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Select Format (a...a = TNDN, TN, DN, or AUTO)
Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The
TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Delete Voice Mailbox
Specifies the TN_TYPE to convert to. (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)
Confirm that the system administrator is aware that the feature is lost and still wants to perform the conversion.
Anything typed except YES implies NO.
Easy Change
Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic ; yyy = its new value)
130 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
TOTN
CDEN
DES
CTYP
CUST
NUMZONE
UXTY
MCCL
SIPU
SUPR
NDID
UXID
NUID
NHTN
BUID
MOTN
Response
l s c u c u aa d...d
0-1023 xxxx x y z u
Comment
To Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.
The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Office Data Administration System Station Designator
(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Universal Extension type.
x...x
Number of clients per supported SIP Line type for a
Universal Extension designated as SIP Line.
Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.
SIP Line user id.
Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.
(NO) YES xxxx
SIP Line super user.
Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.
The SIP Lines Gateway (SLG) node identifier.
Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.
<CLID> aaaa l s c u
0000 x...x
<CR> l s c u
Calling Line ID of the Universal Extension.
Network User ID for dialable home system DN. Applies to IP Phones.
Network User Id. Enter X to delete.
Network Home system TN.
Format for CS 1000M Large System and CS
1000Esystem, Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Reserved TN to indicate the Network Home is a CS
2100 system. Do not use if the Network Home is a CS
1000 system.
dialable DN, Main Office user id
Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the
Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS
1000E
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 131
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
MPHI
KLS
AOM
KBA
DBA
DSPL
DSPT
ZONE
KEM
KEY
PAGEOFST
KEMOFST
LANG
ERL
ECL
VSIT
HMDN
FDN
TGAR
Response
0000
(NO) YES
1-7
0-2
(0)-2
(0)-1
(0)-500
(0)-2 x...x
Comment
Reserved TN to indicate the Main Office is a CS 2100 system. It must not be used if the Main Office is a CS
1000 system.
Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH Interface
Number of Key/Lamp Strips
Number of Add-on Modules
Key-Based Accessory
Display-Based Accessory
Length (in characters) of portable display
Type of portable display
Zone Number to which Nortel Networks IP Phone
2002, IP Phone 2004, and IP SoftPhone 2050 set belongs
(0)-4 Number of IP Phone Key Expansion Units (KEM) to configure.
xx aaa yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Telephone function key assignments
Function key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone. KEY is prompted until a
<CR>
is entered.
<Page>
<KeyOffset>
<KEM>
<KeyOffset> a
<CR> 0-65535
X
(0)-65535
(NO) YES x...x
x...x
xx
Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that support Paging and have a specific number of KEMs configured.
Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that do not support Paging and have a specific number of IP
Phone KEMs configured.
Language choice
Emergency Response Location
Home Emergency Call List
Visitor
Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.
Flexible CFNA DN
Trunk Group Access Restriction
132 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
ARTO
ADAY
AHOL
AFD
AHNT
AEFD
AEHT
MAUT
- SPWD
- AUTH
RCO
ICT
EFD
LDN
Prompt
NCOS
RNPG
SSU
XLST
SCPW
SGRP
ELKP
SFLT
- SFDN
CAC
CAC_CIS
CAC_MFC
CLS
CSDN
(0)-3
(0)-3
(0)-3 x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx
(0)-2
0-<NIPN> x...x
x...x
a...a
xxxx
(0)-10
0-(3)-9
(0)-10 a...a
Response
aaa
(0)-99
(0)-4095
0-4095
(0)-7 xxxx
(0)-999 x..x
Comment
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15
Network Class of Service group
Ringing Number Pickup Group
System Speed call list number
Pretranslation group associated with this station
Station Control Password
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)
Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks
CIS ANI category code
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of
Service options)
Converged Service Directory Number Converged
Desktop Service Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23. CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO. NULL response is not accepted.
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15
Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate Hunt DN
Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate External Hunt DN
Modify authorization codes for this telephone
Secure Data Password
Authorization code
Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Flexible CFNA DN for External calls
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 133
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
- DTR
- DUP
- HOT
- AUT
- AUTB
- BAUD
- DCD
- PRM
SCI
TOV
DTAO
PSEL
OPE
- PSDS
- TRAN
- PAR
- VLL
- MOD
- INT
- CLK
- DEM
- DLNG
- KBD
Prompt
HUNT
EHT
LHK
LNRS
TEN
OHID
FSVC
(0)-7
(0)-(0)-23 a...a
a...a
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
a...a
(OFF) ON aaaa
(OFF) ON
(ON) OFF
(ON) OFF
0-(7)-10
(ON) OFF
(ON) OFF
(OFF) ON
(NO) YES
(OFF) ON
(OFF) ON aaa aaa
Response
x...x
x...x
(0)-69
4-(16)-31
1-511
(0)-9
(0)-9
(ON) OFF
Comment
Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain
External Hunt DN
Last Hunt Key number limit
Last Number Redial Size
Tenant number
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.
Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index
Station Category Indication priority level
Timeout Value for the data port
Data Option (a...a = (MPDA) or MCA)
Protocol Selection (a...a = (DMDM) or TLNK)
Change data port Operating Parameters
Public Switched Data Service option
Port Transmission type (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)
Parity (a...a = (SPACE), EVEN, ODD, or MARK)
Data Terminal Ready settings
Duplex (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)
Hotline
Auto-answer
Auto Baud rate
Baud rate index for the data port
Dynamic Carrier Detect
Prompt for terminal or host mode
Virtual Leased Line
Mode
Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking
Clock
Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)
Language preference for DAC prompts (aaa = (ENG) or FRN)
Keyboard Dialing
134 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
DTMK
DNDR
DCFW
KEY
- MARP
- CPND
Prompt
- V25
- HDLC
- RTS
- WIRE
- PBDO
LPK
PLEV
FCAR
LTN
SPID
AST
IAPG
ITNA
DGRP
PRI
LANG
MLNG
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(ON) OFF
(OFF) ON
(OFF) ON
(0)-69
0-(2)-7
(NO) YES
1-253 0-15 x...x
xx yy
(0)-15
(NO) YES
(1)-5
(1)-32 a
MLWU_LANG a a...a
x...x
(0)-120 x...x
xx aaa yyyy zz..z
(NO) YES aaa
Comment
V.25 bis option (synchronous mode only)
High Level Data Link Control
Request To Send (applies only to asynchronous mode)
Wire test
Port Busy when DTR off
Line Preference Key
Priority Level
Forced Charge Account Restricted
Logical TN and AUX link number
ACD Supervisor Position ID DN
Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group
Idle TN for the Third Party Application
Device Group
Priority level for ACD agent
Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls
(a = (0)-5 or X)
Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls
(a = (0)-5 or X)
Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,
M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001, I2002,
I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:
• <CR> no change
• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,
POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.
Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN
Directory Number Delayed Ringing in seconds
Default Call Forward DN
Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Calling Party Name Display
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 135
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
- - CPND_LANG aaa
- - NAME
- - XPLN
- - DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb
- VMB aaa
- - VMB_COS 0-127
- -
SECOND_DN x...x
- - THIRD_DN x...x
- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES
- ANIE
- DNRO
- DNRI aaaa,bbbb xx
(0)-n
(0)-4
(0)-4
Comment
Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Calling Party Name Display name
Expected Name Length
Display Format for CPND name
Voice Mailbox
Voice Mailbox Class of Service
Second DN sharing the voice mailbox
Third DN sharing the voice mailbox
Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password
ANI entry
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls
Prompts and responses by task
Add a voice telephone
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
MODL
TN
CDEN
DES
Response
NEW a...a
1-127 l s c u c u aa d...d
Comment
Request = NEW
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)
Model number for small systems and CS 1000S
Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.
The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Office Data Administration System Station Designator
136 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
FDN
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
RNPG
SSU
XLST
SCPW
SGRP
ELKP
Prompt
CTYP
CUST
BUID
MOTN
MPHI
KLS
AOM
KBA
DSPL
DSPT
ZONE
NUMZONE
LANG
ERL
VSIT
HMDN xx aaa
(0)-99
(0)-4095
0-4095
(0)-7 xxxx
(0)-999 x...x
Response
(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx x...x
Customer number
Comment
dialable DN, Main Office user id
<CR> l s c u
(NO) YES
1-7
0-2
(0)-2
(0)-500
(NO) YES x...x
Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the
Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS
1000E.
Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface
(0)-2 Type of portable display
0–255 0–8000 Zone Number which IP Phone 2004 set belongs
0-1023 a
(0)-65535
Number of Key/Lamp Strips
Number of Add-on Modules
Key-Based Accessory
Length (in characters) of portable display
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Language choice
Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,
ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.
Visitor x...x
Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.
Flexible CFNA DN
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15
Network Class of Service group
Ringing Number Pickup Group
System Speed Call list number
Pretranslation group associated with this station
Station Control Password
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 137
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
FSVC
SCI
LPK
PLEV
FCAR
MAUT
- SPWD
- AUTH
RCO
ICT
EFD
HUNT
EHT
ARTO
ADAY
AHOL
AFD
AHNT
AEFD
AEHT
LHK
LNRS
TEN
OHID
Prompt
SFLT
- SFDN
CAC
CAC_CIS
CAC_MFC
CLS
Response
a...a
xxxx
(0)-10
0-(3)-9
(0)-10 aaaa
(0)-3
(0)-3
(0)-3 x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx
(0)-2
0-<NIPN> x...x
x...x
x...x
(0)-69
4-(16)-31
1-511
(0)-9
(0)-9
(0)-7
(0)-69
0-(2)-7
(NO) YES
Comment
Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks
CIS ANI category code
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of
Service options)
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15
Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate Hunt DN
Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate External Hunt DN
Modify authorization codes for this telephone
Secure Data Password
Authorization code
Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Flexible CFNA DN for External calls
Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain
External Hunt DN
Last Hunt Key number limit
Last Number Redial Size
Tenant number
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.
Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index
Station Category Indication priority level
Line Preference Key
Priority Level
Forced Charge Account Restricted
138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
LTN
DTMK
DNDR
DCFW
KEY
Prompt
SPID
AST
IAPG
ITNA
DGRP
PRI
MLNG
- MARP
- CPND
Response
1-253 0-15 x...x
xx yy
(0)-15
(NO) YES
(1)-5
(1)-32
LANG (0)-5 X
MLWU_LANG a a...a
Comment
Logical TN and AUX link number
ACD Supervisor Position ID DN
Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group
Idle TN for the Third Party Application
Device Group
Priority level for ACD agent
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls
Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls
(a = (0)-5 or X)
Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,
M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001,
I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:
• <CR> no change
• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,
POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.
x...x
(0)-120 x...x
Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN
Directory Number Delayed Ringing (in seconds)
Default Call Forward DN xx aaa yyyy zz..z Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)
(NO) YES Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime aaa Calling Party Name Display (aaa = NEW, CHG or
OUT)
- - CPND_LANG aaa Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Calling Party Name Display name
Expected Name Length
- - NAME aaaa,bbbb
- - XPLN
- - DISPLAY_FMT xx
- VMB
- - VMB_COS aaaa,bbbb aaa
0-127
Display Format for CPND name
Voice Mailbox
Voice Mailbox Class of Service
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 139
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
- - SECOND_DN
Response
x...x
- - THIRD_DN x...x
- - KEEP_MSGS
(NO) YES
- ANIE
- DNRO
- DNRI
(0)-n
(0)-4
(0)-4
Comment
Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password
ANI entry
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls
Add a data telephone
The following prompts apply to only M2006, M2008, M2216, M2616 data ports (MPDA), DAC card units and Meridian Communications Adapters (MCA).
All operating parameter information is stored in the MPDA. If the hardware does not exist, the parameter information is lost. The hardware must be connected before configuring the operating parameters in this program. In the event that the parameters are lost, it is possible to enter the data through the data adapter. It is not necessary to re-enter the program.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
DES
CTYP
CUST
NUMZONE
BUID
MOTN
Response
NEW a...a
l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.
The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D) aa d...d
Office Data Administration System Station Designator
(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx
0-1023
Comment
Request = NEW
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) x...x
<CR> l s c u
Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
disable DN, Main Office user id
Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the
Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS
1000E.
140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
ARTO
AFD
AHNT
AEFD
AEHT
MAUT
- SPWD
FDN
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
RNPG
SSU
XLST
SCPW
SGRP
ELKP
SFLT
- SFDN
CAC
CAC_CIS
CAC_MFC
CLS
Prompt
MPHI
KLS
AOM
KBA
ZONE
LANG
ERL
(0)-999 x...x
a...a
xxxx
(0)-10
0-(3)-9
(0)-10 aaaa x...x
xx aaa
(0)-99
(0)-4095
0-4095
(0)-7 xxxx
Response
(NO) YES
1-7
0-2
Comment
Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface
Number of Key/Lamp Strips
Number of Add-on Modules
(0)-2 Key-Based Accessory
0–255 0–8000 Zone Number which IP Phone 2004 set belongs a
(0)-65535
Language choice
Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,
ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.
Flexible CFNA DN
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15
Network Class of Service group
Ringing Number Pickup Group
System Speed call list number
Pretranslation group associated with this station
Station Control Password
(0)-3 x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
(NO) YES xxxx
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)
Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks
CIS ANI category code
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of
Service options)
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection
Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate Hunt DN
Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN
Alternate External Hunt DN
Modify authorization codes for this telephone
Secure Data Password
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 141
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
- KBD
- V25
- HDLC
- RTS
EFD
HUNT
- BAUD
- DCD
- PRM
- VLL
- MOD
- INT
- CLK
- DEM
- DLNG
- PSDS
- TRAN
- PAR
- DTR
- DUP
- HOT
- AUT
- AUTB
Prompt
- AUTH
RCO
ICT
TOV
DTAO
PSEL
OPE
0-(7)-10
(ON) OFF
(ON) OFF
(OFF) ON
(NO) YES
(OFF) ON
(OFF) ON aaa aaa
Response
n xxxx
(0)-2
0-<NIPN>
(0)-3 a...a
a...a
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
a...a
(OFF) ON aaaa
(OFF) ON
(ON) OFF
(ON) OFF
(ON) OFF
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(ON) OFF x...x
x...x
Comment
Authorization code
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Timeout Value for the Data port
Data Option (a...a = (MPDA) or MCA)
Protocol Selection (a...a = (DMDM) or TLNK)
Change data port Operating Parameters
Public Switched Data Service option
Port Transmission type (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)
Parity (a...a = (SPACE), EVEN, ODD, or MARK)
Data Terminal Ready settings
Duplex (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)
Hotline
Auto Answer
Auto Baud rate
Baud rate index for the data port
Dynamic Carrier Detect
Prompt for terminal or host mode
Virtual Leased Line
Mode
Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking
Clock
Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)
Language preference for DAC prompts (aaa = (ENG) or FRN)
Keyboard Dialing
V.25 bis option, synchronous mode only
High Level Data Link Control
Request To Send (applies to asynchronous mode only)
Flexible CFNA DN for External calls
Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain
142 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
FSVC
SCI
WIRE
PBDO
LPK
PLEV
FCAR
LTN
SPID
AST
EHT
LHK
TEN
Prompt
LNRS
OHID
IAPG
ITNA
DGRP
PRI
DTMK
DNDR
DCFW
Response
x...x
(0)-69
4-(16)-31
1-511
(0)-9
(0)-9
(0)-7
(OFF) ON
(OFF) ON
(0)-69
0-(2)-7
(NO) YES
1-253 0-15 x...x
xx yy
(0)-15
(NO) YES
(1)-5
(1)-32
LANG (0)-5 X
MLWU_LANG aaaa,bbbb
MLNG a...a
x...x
(0)-120 x...x
Comment
External Hunt DN
Last Hunt Key number limit
Last Number Redial Size
Tenant number
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.
Forced Out of Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index
Station Category Indication priority level
Wire test
Port Busy when DTR off
Line Preference Key
Priority Level
Forced Charge Account Restricted
Logical TN and AUX link number
ACD Supervisor Position ID DN
Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group
Idle TN for the Third Party Application
Device Group
Priority level for ACD agent
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls
Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls
Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,
M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001,
I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:
• <CR> no change
• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,
POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.
Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN
Directory Number Delayed Ringing (in seconds)
Default Call Forward DN
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 143
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
KEY
Prompt
- MARP
- CPND
- -CPND_LANG
Response Comment
xx aaa yyyy zz..z Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)
(NO) YES aaa aaa
- - NAME
- - XPLN
- -DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb xx aaa
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Calling Party Name Display
Calling Party Name Display Language
Calling Party Name Display name
Expected NameLength
Display Format for CPND name
Voice Mailbox
Voice Mailbox Class of Service
- VMB
- - VMB_COS
- -SECOND_DN aaa
0-127 x...x
- - THIRD_DN x...x
- -KEEP_MSGS
(NO) YES
Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password
Copy a telephone
ACD supervisory telephones cannot be copied. Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new telephones.
Mobile Extension telephones cannot be copied (TYPE = UEXT).
Prompt Response
REQ: CPY n
TYPE:
CFTN
Request = CPY n
Comment
a...a
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Copy From Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.
The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
SFMT aaaa Select Format. You may respond to SFMT with: AUTO, TNDN,
TN or DN. Subprompts follow each of these responses as follows:
144 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by task
Prompt
- TN
- DN
- POS
Response
AUTO xxxx
TNDN
Comment
The system provides the new DNs or position IDs (for ACD telephones) and TNs by automatically selecting consecutive unused DNs or ACD position IDs and TNs.
l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x...x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)
ACD position ID of new set
Manual selection of DNs or ACD position IDs and TNs. You are prompted for the DN or ACD position ID and TN of each new telephone.
- TN
- DN
- POS l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx
TN
ACD Position ID of new set
The new DNs or ACD Position IDs are provided by the system.
You are prompted for the starting DN or ACD Position ID and each TN. TN is prompted -n- times as defined in the CPY command.
- TN
- DN
- POS
- TN
- DN
- POS l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx
DN
ACD Position ID of new set
The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN or ACD Position ID.
l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx ACD Position ID of new set
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 145
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Easy change
Prompt Response
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
ECHG
ITEM
CHG a...a
Comment
Request = CHG
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
YES Easy Change aaaa bbbb Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic ; yyy = its new value)
Move a telephone
If moving a voice unit with an associated data unit, the data unit must also be moved. On
NT8D02 Digital Line Card, both voice and data TNs can be moved by entering MOV PAIR in response to the REQ prompt.
Prompt Response
REQ: a...a
TYPE:
TN
Comment
Request = MOV or MOV PAIR a...a
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
TOTN l s c u c u To Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Remove a telephone
Before removing an ACD agent telephone, first remove the associated AGT key on the supervisor's telephone.
Prompt Response
REQ: OUT
TYPE: a...a
Comment
Request = OUT
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)
146 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TN l s c u cu
Comment
Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ADAY
Response
(0)-3
Comment
Alternate Days as defined in LD 15 Prompted if CLS = RBDA
Pack/Rel
basic-24
AEFD
AEHT
AFD
AHNT
AHOL
ANIE x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
(0)-3
(0)-n
Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or CFTD.
Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22
Alternate External Hunt DN. Remove by setting
CLS = RTDD or CFTD.
Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22
Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN. Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.
Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22
Alternate Hunt DN. Remove by setting CLS =
RTDD.
Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22
Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD
15 Prompted if CLS = RBHA basic-24
ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set.
The old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
If ANIE is of 1-N: cist-24
• If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 147
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
AOM
ARTO
AST
AUT
AUTB
AUTH
BAUD
Response Comment
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer
Data Block, if configured.
• If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if
ANIC = NO for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
Pack/Rel
0-2
(0)-3
Number of Add-on Modules. AOM appears if
TYPE = M2216 or M2616.
arie-14
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection, defined in the customer data block.
ARTO is prompted if CLS = RTDA.
basic-22
(ON)
OFF
(ON)
OFF xx yy Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications
A maximum of two DN keys, xx and yy, can be controlled by the host computer. Precede with
X to delete.
iap3p-12 xx xx xx xx If PKG 411 is equipped, a maximum of four DN keys can be controlled by the host computer.
basic-7.00
Enable Auto-Answer
Do not enable Auto-Answer arie-14
Auto Baud rate enabled
Auto Baud rate disabled
AUTB is prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422 and if HOT = OFF.
dac-16 n xxxx Authorization code. Where:
• n = the number of the assigned authorization code (1-6)
• xxxx = assigned authorization code (Any authorization code assigned in LD 88 is valid).
AUTH appears when CLS = Authorization
Code Required (AUTR).
ssau-19
Baud rate mcu/arie-19
148 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
BUID
Response
0-(7)-8
0-(7)-10
0-(11)-12
Comment
Baud rate index for the data port for data port on M2006, M2008, M2216 and M2616 telephones and Data Access Card.
Baud rate index for the data port for
M3901,M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephones.
The following values apply to:
• MPDA-1
• MCA with DTAO = MPDA and TRAN = ASYN
• MCA with DTAO = MCA
• TYPE = MCU and TRAN = ASYN
Where: 0 = 110, 1 = 150, 2 = 300, 3 = 600, 4 =
1200, 5 = 2400, 6 = 4800, (7) = 9600, 8 =
19,200, 9=28,800, and 10=33,600.
The following values apply to:
• MCA with DTAO = MPDA, with MCA hardware
• TRAN = SYN, MCA with TRAN = SYN
• MCA with DTAO = MCA
Where: 0 = 1200, 1 = 2400, 2 = 3600, 3 = 4800,
4 = 7200, 5 = 9600, 6 = 14,400, 7 = 19,200, 8
= 38,400, 9 = 40,800, 10 = 48,000, (11) =
56,000, and 12 = 64,000.
With DAC, BAUD is only prompted if AUTB
(Auto Baud Rate) = OFF.
Pack/Rel
basic-24 x...x
Dialable DN, Main Office user id For CS 1000S sbo-2
Enter X to delete
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9
CAC_MFC (0)-10
CDEN SD
DD
4D
8D
CIS ANI Category Access Code
MFC CNI Category Access Code
Single Card Density
Double Card Density
Quadruple Card Density
Octal Card Density cist-24 cist-24 basic-7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 149
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
CFTN
CLK
CLS c u c u c u c u
Response Comment
CDEN defaults to the density of the network loop. CDEN is not prompted for Small System and CS 1000S Model sets or superloops.
l s c u
(OFF)
ON
Pack/Rel
Copy From Terminal Number
General TN format
Large System format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit CS 1000E format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit basic-12 basic-4.00
c u = card, unit
Small System
CS 1000S
MG 1000B, and MG 1000T
Use this TN as a template for new sets. ACD supervisory sets cannot be copied. Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new sets.
With the introduction of Phantom TNs, the system checks to be sure that TNs are not moved or copied from phantom TNs to non-
Phantom TNs or visa versa.
CFTN appears if REQ = CPY.
basic-1 basic-4.00
Clock off
Clock on arie-14
(CTD)
UNR
CUN
TLD
SRE
FRE
Class of Service options
The following CLS assignments determine the calling options and features available to the telephone. Defaults are shown in parentheses.
Enter each non-default option required, separated by a space.
Access Restrictions
Conditionally Toll Denied (default)
Unrestricted
Conditionally Unrestricted.
Toll Denied.
Semi-Restricted.
Fully Restricted.
basic-1 basic-1
150 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
FR1
FR2
Fully Restricted 1.
Comment
Fully Restricted 2.
(AAD)
AAA
(ABDD)
ABDA
ADD
DDS
NDD
TDD
Automatic Answerback Denied
Automatic Answerback Allowed
Automatic Answerback can be used on M2317,
M2616, and IP Phones with handsfree capability. A special hardware kit is required for
Companion 4 speakerphones.
Automatic Answerback must have CLS = HFA for M2616, and IP Phones (excluding IP Phone
2001). CLS AAA or AAK keys are not allowed for M2317 and IP Phone 2001 TNs.
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Denied
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Allowed
Digit Display
Automatic Digit Display, default for M2008,
M2216, M2317, M2616, and M3000.
Delay Display, display activates after call is answered
No Digit Display, default for M2006
Tandem Digit Display. Automatic set display feature, TDD Class of Service is default for
M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905, and applicable to all Meridian 1 proprietary sets except for the M2006 which does not have display capability.
Pack/Rel
aab-10 fcdr-18 ddsp-1
(AGN)
SPV
(AGRD)
Note:
Manufacturer discontinued sets, such as the
M2317 and the SL1, can be configured with
TDD Class of Service however, may not have full functionality of the Automatic Set
Display feature.
ACD Agent
ACD Supervisor
Agent Greeting Denied fxs-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 151
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
AGRA
Comment
Agent Greeting Allowed
(AHD)
AHA
(ARHD)
ARHA
(ASCD)
ASCA
(AUTU)
AUTD
AUTR
(BFED)
BFEA
(BUZZ)
RNGI
RNGB
Automatic Hold Denied
Automatic Hold Allowed
Audible Reminder of Held Call Denied
Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed
Pack/Rel
supp-10 basic-14
Alarm Security Denied
Alarm Security Allowed ohas-18
Unrestricted Authorization code Class of
Service
Denied Authorization code Class of Service
Restricted Authorization code Class of Service
When the CLS is changed from AUTR to AUTU or AUTD, all previous telephone authorization code information is removed. This Class of
Service is valid only when Station Specific
Authorization Codes (SSAU) package 229 is equipped.
ssau-19
Boss Secretary Feature Enhancement Denied ffcsf-24
Boss Secretary Feature Enhancement Allowed
Buzz
Apply ringing when idle but off hook
Apply ringing when idle but off hook or busy on the other line basic-24
(CCBD)
CCBA
(CCSD)
CCSA
Collect Call Blocking Denied (permits a set to accept collect calls)
Collect Call Blocking Allowed (prevents a set from accepting collect calls
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is required.
ccb-21
Controlled Class of Service Denied
Controlled Class of Service Allowed ccos-7
152 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ZBDV
ZBDO
(CFHD)
CFHA
(CFTD)
CFTA
Response Comment
CCSA is required for the Electronic Lock feature. Must have Controlled Class of Service
(CCOS) package 81.
(CDCA)
CDCD
ZBDA
(ZBDD)
(ZBDR)
Conferee Display Count Allowed.
Conferee Display Count Denied.
Pack/Rel
ZBDA allows external station activity records to be generated for the set
ZBDD denies external station activity records to be generated for the set
ZBDA emct-20
Converged Desktop Multimedia Restricted
(default)
Converged Desktop Multimedia and Voice
Converged Desktop Multimedia Only
Call Forward Hunt Override Denied
Call Forward Hunt Override Allowed basic-23 sip-4.00
cfho-20
(CFXD)
CFXA
Call Forward by Call Type Denied
Call Forward by Call Type Allowed
If response is CFTA, you must also designate
HTA, FNA or both.
optf-10
Call Forward All Calls to External DN Denied optf-19
Call Forward All Calls to External DN Allowed
Examples of external DNs are:
• Route Access Code
• ESN Access Code
• CDP Distant Steering Code
When denied, a call can only be forwarded to the following internal DNs:
• Single or multi-line telephone
• Attendant DN or CAS local attendant DN
• Listed DN as defined in LD 15
• Message Center DN where MWC = YES
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 153
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
(CLBD)
CLBA
Comment
Deactivate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking
Activate Calling Party Number and Name perline blocking
The user may still request CPP by dialing the
CPP code.
Pack/Rel
cpp-21
(CLTD)
CLTA
(CMSD)
CMSA
(CNDD)
CNDA
(CNID)
CNIA
(CNTD)
CNTA
Network Call Trace from this telephone Denied pra-17
Network Call Trace from this telephone Allowed
Command and Status link Denied
Command and Status link Allowed
CMSA is not supported by M2317, and
M3000.
Call Party Name Display Denied
Call Party Name Display Allowed
CNDA allows user names to be displayed on the telephone's digit display.
Call Number Information Denied
Call Number Information Allowed csl-8 cpnd-10 bgd-10 nacd-15
(CPFA)
CPFD
(CPTA)
CPTD
(CROD)
CROA
(CRPD)
CRPA
Network ACD Countdown Denied
Network ACD Countdown Allowed
Only allowed on ACD agent telephones.
Forced Camp-On from another set Allowed
Forced Camp-On from another set Denied
Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed.
CPTA is the default for VCE TNs.
Forced Camp-On to another set Denied
Calling Line Restriction Override Denied
Calling Line Restriction Override Allowed
Corporate Directory Denied
Corporate Directory Allowed
Only applies for M3903 and M3904 units.
scmp-15 scmp-15 arie-25
154 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(DAPA)
DAPD
Comment
Display Access Prefix Allowed
Display Access Prefix Denied
(DDGA)
DDGD
(DELD)
DELA
(DNAA)
DNAD
Pack/Rel
isdn-24
DN Display on other set Allowed
DN Display on other set Denied dpd-21
Dealer Denied
Dealer Allowed
Must have On-Hold On Loudspeaker (OHOL) package 196.
ohol-20
DN of the key that makes the call used in ANI messages.
Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route ANDN used as
DN in ANI messages
Must have Commonwealth of Independent
States Trunk Interface (CIST) package 221.
cist-21
(DNDD)
DNDA
(DNDY)
DNDN
(DNO3)
DNO1
DNO2
Dialed Name Display Denied
Dialed Name Display Allowed
DNDA allows the display of the originally dialed
DN's names on redirected calls. Name display applies to M2317, M3000 or Meridian Modular telephones with displays.
Must have Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95. Must also have CLS = CNDA. CLS is not DTA.
cpnd-13
Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification without called party's number and name notification.
qsig ss-23
Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification Option without notification.
Diversion Notification Option without divertedto party's number and name.
qsig ss-23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 155
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
(DOS)
AOS
Comment
ACD Supervisory Set Denied observation of other supervisory sets
ACD Supervisory Set Allowed observation of other supervisory sets
Must have CLS = SPV.
(DPUD)
DPUA
(DRDD)
DRDA
(DRG1)
DRG2
DRG3
DRG4
DRG3
DRG4
(DSX)
DSI
DVLA
DVLD
(ELD)
DN Pickup Denied
DN Pickup Allowed
Pack/Rel
acdb-1 dcp-12
Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number
Denied.
Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number
Allowed.
Digital telephone distinctive ringing
High fast tone, frequency 667 Hz/500 Hz, warble rate 10.4 Hz
High slow tone, frequency 667 Hz/ 500 Hz, warble rate 2.6 Hz
Low fast tone, frequency 333 Hz/ 250 Hz, warble rate 10.4 Hz
Low slow tone, frequency 333 Hz/ 250 Hz, warble rate 2.6 Hz
DRG3 and DRG4 distinctive ringing for M2006 and M2008 telephones are different.
Low fast tone, frequency 1600/ 2000 Hz, warble rate 10.0 Hz
Low slow tone, frequency 1600/ 2000 Hz, warble rate 2.5 Hz edrg-24 drng-7
Data Service access or IS Server TN Denied cls-8
Data Service access or IS Server TN Allowed
CLS is automatically set to DTA.
Default Virtual Office Logout Allowed
Default Virtual Office Logout Denied (default)
(IP Phone in Virtual Office logout state by default. Can only be used for Virtual Office login)
Erase lists Denied basic-7.00
basic-7.00
basic-25.4
156 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ELA
Comment
Erase lists Allowed
(ELMA)
ELMD
(EXR0)
EXR1
EXR2
EXR3
EXR4
Pack/Rel
Early media Allowed
Early media Denied basic-6.50
Executive Distinctive Ringing Off (0)
Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 1
Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 2
Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 3
Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 4
The digit indicates which of the four distinctive ringing tones and cadences defined in LD 56 is to be used. Executive Distinctive Ringing
(EDRG) package 185 is required. Must have
(DRDD) class of service.
edrg-16
(FBD)
FBA
(FDSD)
FDSA
(FICD)
FICA
(FITD)
FITA
(FLXD)
FLXA
Call Forward Busy Denied
Call Forward Busy Allowed
This feature sends DID calls encountering a busy condition to the attendant. Call Forward
Busy should have Hunting and Call Waiting denied, CLS = HTD and CWD, because
Hunting and Call Waiting take precedence over
FBA.
basic-1 ponw-25.4
Force Disconnect Denied
Force Disconnect Allowed
Forward Intercom Calls Denied
Forward Intercom Calls Allowed basic-21
Flexible Incoming Tones Denied
Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed
For Digital sets OPT must be DBA in LD 15.
basic-14
Flexible voice/data Denied
Flexible voice/data Allowed
FLXA is only allowed for Aries sets.
By entering FLXA, you may configure dynamic voice/data TNs by assigning VCE to the upper basic-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 157
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
(FND)
FNA
(FRA)
FRU
FRD
(FRN)
Response Comment
TN (unit 16-31) and DTA to the lower TN (unit
0-15). You also have the option of designating a SCR key as DTM (data mode).
Warning: If connecting the Aries set only to the
TCM loop, this option should not be specified.
External equipment which can use this capability should be connected.
Warning: When changing from CLS DTA to
CLS VCE, CLS WTA should also be assigned to avoid conflict with CLS CPTA. CLS CPTA is the default for VCE TNs.
ENG
(FTTC)
Call Forward No Answer Denied
Call Forward No Answer Allowed
Flexible Registration Allowed
Flexible Registration Upgrade
Flexible Registration Denied
French language display
English language display
For M2317 alphanumeric display sets.
FTTR
FTTU
Pack/Rel
basic-1 dlt2-12
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Conditional allows trunk to trunk connections for supervised Conference.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Unrestricted allows trunk to trunk connections for both Conference and Transfer.
basic-23
Flexible Services Port fxs-25 FXSP
(GPUD)
GPUA
(GRLD)
GRLA
Group Pickup Denied
Group Pickup Allowed
Group Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero, RNPG = 0.
dcp-12
Group Listening Denied
Group Listening Allowed basic-24
158 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
For M3902, M3903, M3904 sets.
(HBTD)
HBTA
(HFD)
HFA
Hunt By Call Type Denied
Hunt By Call Type Allowed
Pack/Rel
basic-10
Handsfree Denied
Handsfree Allowed
Available for M2008, M2616, M3902, M3903,
M3904, all IP Phones (except IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 1110), and IP SoftPhone 2050 telephones. Handsfree capability on all other telephones is a function of the hardware and does not require HFA Class of Service to operate.
ACD agent digital telephones and IP Phones
(except IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 1110) must have CLS=HFA.
Available for IP Phones 1210, 1220, and 1230
(assigned by default).
arie-14 basic-5.50
(HSPD)
HSPA
(HTD)
HTA
(ICDD)
ICDA
(ICRD)
ICRA
Hospitality Denied, used for Hospitality
Management
HSPD is for administration sets.
Hospitality Allowed, used for Hospitality
Management
HSPA is for room sets. For HSPA, you must also enter CLS = CCSA and CLS = MRA. HSPA
CLS cannot be entered for a set with transfer or conference capability. Prime DN must be single appearance, single call ringing or nonringing.
hvs-16 basic-1 Hunting Denied
Hunting Allowed
Internal Call Detail Recording Denied
Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed
IP Phone Call Recording Denied
IP Phone Call Recording Allowed icdr-10 basic-4.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 159
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
(IMD)
IMA
Comment
Integrated Messaging Service Attendant
Denied
Integrated Messaging Service Attendant
Allowed
(IPND)
IPNA
(IRD)
IRA
(KEM4)
(LLCN)
LLC1
LLC2
LLC3
(LMPN)
LMPX
Intercept Position Denied
Intercept Position Allowed
Incoming Ringing Line Preference Denied
Incoming Ringing Line Preference Allowed
Pack/Rel
ims-2 icp-10 lsel-4
IP Phone 1200 Series Key Expansion Module
Allows the definition of extra function keys on
IP Phone 1200 Series KEMs attached to IP
Phones 1220 and 1230.
Only applicable to IP Phones 1220 and 1230.
Assigned by default and can not be changed.
basic-5.50
llc-10 Line Load Control off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN
Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN and non-PDNs vmba-24
(LND)
LNA
(LPR)
HPR
(LVXD)
LVXA
Last Number Redial Denied
Last Number Redial Allowed
Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15.
lnr-8
Low Priority Station
High Priority Station
High Priority places this set or trunk at the top of the dial tone queue.
povr-16
LOGIVOX Class of Service Denied
LOGIVOX Class of Service Allowed supp-10
160 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MCBY
MCBN
Comment
Set linked to a MICB line card.
Set linked to a non-MICB line card.
MCDA
(MCDD)
(MCTD)
MCTA
(MIND)
MINA
MMA
(MOAD)
MOAA
(MRD)
MRA
(MSID)
MSIA
(MSNV)
Microsoft Converged Desktop Allowed.
Package MS_CONV (408) is required for
MCDA.
Microsoft Converged Desktop Denied
Malicious Call Trace Denied
Malicious Call Trace Allowed
The TRC key must be removed before changing MCTA to MCTD. MCT is applied on a
TN basis.
mct-10 mr-15 Message Intercept Denied
Message Intercept Allowed
Multimedia Allowed
Mute on Answer Denied
Mute on Answer Allowed ngen-24 fxs-25
Message Registration Denied
Message Registration Allowed
Make Set Busy Improvement Denied
Make Set Busy Improvement Allowed
Pack/Rel
basic-25 mr-10 msb-24
MSBT
MSAW
(MTD)
MTA
Media Security Never: Default setting for all users. Implies that there is no attempt to secure either incoming or outgoing calls.
Media Security Best Effort, Best effort security is attempted for both call originations and terminations.
Media Security Always: strict security option, no incoming or outgoing calls are completed without encryption.
basic-5.00
Maintenance Telephone Denied
Maintenance Telephone Allowed basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 161
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
MUTA
MUTD
(MWD)
MWA
MWTA
MWTD
Comment
Mute key functionality allowed on IP Phone
(default)
Mute key functionality denied on IP Phone
(these are applicable only to IP phones with a
Mute key)
Message Waiting Denied
Message Waiting Allowed
If CLS = MWA and there is no Message Waiting
Key (MWK) defined, then the red Message
Waiting LED lights to indicate Message Waiting notification.
Message Waiting Tone allowed
Message Waiting Tone denied (default)
(applicable for IP Phones only)
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
basic-7.00
mwc-1 basic-7.00
basic-7.00
basic-21 (NAID)
NAIA
(NAMA)
NAMD
No Answer Indication Denied
No Answer Indication Allowed
Name Display on other set Allowed
Name Display on other set Denied dpd-21
(NOVD)
NOVA
(NID)
NIA
(NRCD)
NRCA
(NROD)
NROA
(NRWD)
Network Override/Breakin Denied
Network Override/Breakin Allowed pomw-25.4
Non-ringing Incoming Line Preference Denied lsel-4
Non-ringing Incoming Line Preference Allowed
Night Restriction for Forced Campon Denied povr-16
Night Restriction for Forced Campon Allowed
If Night Restriction is allowed, then Forced
Campon for this set is allowed during Night
Service only.
Night Restriction for Priority Override Denied povr-16
Night Restriction for Priority Override Allowed
If Night Restriction is allowed then Priority
Override for this set is allowed during Night
Service only.
Night Restriction for Call Waiting Denied povr-16
162 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NRWA
Comment
Night Restriction for Call Waiting Allowed
If Night Restriction is allowed Call Waiting for this set is permitted during Night Service only.
(OBPD)
OBPA
(OCBD)
OCBA
(OLD)
OLA
(ONDD)
ONDA
(OUSD)
OUSA
OKCH
Observe Password Disabled
Observe Password Allowed
Outgoing Call Barring Denied
Outgoing Call Barring Allowed
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 and New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) package 49 are required.
Outgoing Line Preference Denied
Outgoing Line Preference Allowed
One Number Delivery Denied for a portable
One Number Delivery Allowed for a portable
(PKCH)
(PCWD)
Pack/Rel
oas-3.0
ccb-21 lsel-4 basic-22
Observe using SCL Denied
Observe using SCL Allowed oas-3.0
Originating Key DN of ACD agent set is charged for a call. Dialing from non prime key:
When an external call is set up from a digital set with multiple DNs programmed using any key other than the Prime DN key the Meridian 1 outputs a CDR N-record at the end of the call.
The ORIG-ID field of the N-record holds the value of the Prime Key DN.
Enhancement: A new class-of-service (CLS) is provided for digital sets. When the CLS is
OKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the actual originating DN.
Prime key DN of ACD agent set is charged for the call. When the CLS is PKCH then the
ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the
Prime DN. PKCH is the default setting.
Note:
Calls from an ordinary set are not affected by this CLS.
Deny Precedence Call Waiting.
atvn
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 163
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
PCWA
Comment
Allow Precedence Call Waiting.
Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.
Requires PRMA class of service.
(PGND)
PGNA
(PHTD)
PHTA
Pack/Rel
Deny PAGENET access
Allow PAGENET access
PGND/A allowed if PAGENET package 307 is equipped.
pagenet-22
Deny Precedence Hunting
Allow Precedence Hunting
Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.
Requires HTA and PRMA class of service.
atvn
(PRMD)
PRMA
(POD)
POA
(PRSD)
PRSA
(PUD)
PUA
(RBDD)
Deny Preemption
Allow Preemption
Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.
Requires Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) class of service.
atvn basic-5 Privacy Override Denied
Privacy Override Allowed
The Privacy Optional feature is used with multiple appearance DNs.
Priority Call Pickup Denied
Priority Call Pickup Allowed povr-15
Call Pickup Denied
Call Pickup Allowed
Default changes to PUA if Ringing Number
Pickup Group (RNPG) is defined. Call Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero or
RNPG = 0.
grp-1
Redirection By Day Denied basic-24
164 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
RBDA
Comment
Redirection By Day Allowed
(RCC)
UCC
(RBHD)
RBHA
(RCBD)
RCBA
(RDLA)
RDLD
(RECD)
RECA
(RLFD)
RLFA
(RMMD)
RMMA
RMMO
Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls
Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls
Redirection By Holiday Denied
Redirection By Holiday Allowed
Recall to Boss Denied
Recall to Boss Allowed
Automatic Redial Allowed
Automatic Redial Denied
Call Recording Denied
Call Recording Allowed
Reversed Lamp Flash Denied
Reversed Lamp Flash Allowed
LOGIVOX must be assigned RLFA.
Pack/Rel
fca-10 basic-24 bfs-24 ardl-22 basic-7.00
supp-10
Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied
Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed
Allow Remote Monitoring of Messages and to
Override, if it is being already monitored vmba-24
(RTDD)
RTDA
(SBMD)
SBMA
(SFD)
SFA
(SMWD)
SMWA
Call Redirection by Time of day denied
Call Redirection by Time of day allowed
Set-based Music on Hold denied
Set-based Music on Hold allowed basic-22 basic-7.00
basic-7.00
basic-10 Second level CFNA Denied
Second level CFNA Allowed
SFA requires the FNA Class of Service.
Extended Message Waiting Indication Denied mw-24
Extended Message Waiting Indication Allowed
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 165
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Only applies for M3903, M3904 and M3905 units.
(STSD)
STSA
(SWD)
SWA
Set-to-Set Messaging Denied
Set-to-Set Messaging Allowed
Only applies for M3903 and M3904 units.
Pack/Rel
arie-25
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed
A Call Waiting key or CWT must be defined.
Must have CLS = HTD because hunting takes precedence.
basic-8
(TEND)
TENA
(T87D)
T87A
(ULAD)
ULAA
(UDI)
RDI
(USMD)
USMA
(USRD)
USRA
(VOLA)
Tenant Service Denied
Tenant Service Allowed
Deny Remote Call Control tens-7 ms_conv-4.5
0
Allow Remote Call Control
Class of Service ZBDV and T87A are mutually exclusive with Converged Office.
Deny access to Set Based Administration
Allow access to Set Based Administration
Must have Set Based Administration
(ADMINSET) package 256.
Station is (not) restricted from receiving DID calls.
Station is restricted from receiving DID calls.
adminset-21 supp-10
Meridian 911 position denied
Meridian 911 position allowed
Must have Meridian 911 (M911) package 224.
m911-19 uscr-19 User Selectable Call Redirection Denied
User Selectable Call Redirection Allowed
Allow Virtual Office operation from this TN
For CS 1000S sbo-2
166 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
VOLD
Comment
Deny Virtual Office operation from this TN
For CS 1000S
(VOUD)
VOUA
Pack/Rel
sbo-2
Deny Virtual Office login onto this TN using other phone (destination of Virtual Office login)
Allow Virtual Office login onto this TN using other phone (destination of Virtual Office login) sbo-2 sbo-2
(VCE)
DTA
Voice Terminal
Data Terminal
VCE is used for voice TNs. DTA is used for data.
For 8 port Digital Line Cards, VCE for units 0-7 and DTA for units 8-15.
For 16 port Digital Line Cards, VCE for units
0-15 and DTA for units 16-31.
For 24 port Digital Line Card, VCE for units 0-23 and DTA is for units 24-31.
basic-5
CPND
(VMD)
VMA
(WTA)
WTD
(XHD)
XHA
NEW
OUT
CHG
Note:
24 port Digital Line Card not supported on small system and CS 1000S.
Server Voice Messaging Denied
Server Voice Messaging Allowed
Warning Tone Allowed
Warning Tone Denied
Exclusive Hold Denied
Exclusive Hold Allowed cls-8 basic-1 dhld-4
Calling Party Name Display
New CPND entry
Delete CPND entry
Change CPND entry
Must have Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 and CPND data block defined in
LD 95.
cpnd-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 167
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
CPND_LANG
Response
(ROM)
KAT
Comment
Calling Party Name Display Language
Roman
Katakana
CSDN x..x
CTYP (XDLC)
EDLC
Pack/Rel
cpnd-19
Converged Service Directory Number
Converged Desktop Service
Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in
LD 23
CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as
ZBDV or ZBDO.
NULL response is not accepted.
sip-4.00
Card type is 16 port DLC
Card type is 24 port DLCVCE/DTA
EDLC not supported on Small Systems and CS
1000S.
basic-25
CUST xx
DANI
DBA
(NO) YES
(0)-1
Customer number associated with this set as defined in LD 15 basic-1
The CLID or ANI information of the originating caller is displayed on the terminating telephone during transfer or conference. If set to No, there is no change and the CLID information of the transferring telephone is displayed on the terminating telephone.
basic-5.00
Display-Based Accessory arie-25
DCD
DCFW
(ON)
OFF x...x
Note:
The Key-Based Accessory (KBA) and
Display-Based Accessory (DBA) are mutually exclusive.
Dynamic Carrier Detect
Enable Dynamic CD
Carrier Detect starts as inactive and follows the state of the call. With DAC, DCD is only prompted if TYPE = R232.
arie-14
Default Call Forward DN. Prompted for Virtual
Terminals only.
arie-25
168 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
x...x = Default Call Forward DN where calls are to be forwarded. Maximum of 31 digits allowed.
Precede with X to remove.
DELETE_VMB
(YES)
DEM
DES
NO
(DCE)
DTE d...d
Pack/Rel
Delete Voice Mailbox
Remove the Voice Mailbox from the Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail
Remove the Voice Mailbox from the Meridian 1
DELETE_VMB is prompted if REQ = OUT and
TN has an associated Voice Mailbox.
DELETE_VMB is allowed if the DN is a single appearance or multiple appearance DN on a single TN.
vmba-19 dac-16 Data Equipment Mode. Prompted if TYPE =
R232.
Data Carrier Equipment
Data Terminal Equipment
ODAS Station Designator
Enter a 1-6 alphanumeric character representing an Office Data Administration
System (ODAS) Station Designator.
odas-1
DGRP (1)-5 Device Group
DGRP designates an AST BCS set into a specific device group. It is recommended that an AST phantom (BCS) TN should be a nondisplay BCS set. An AST BCS set of a phantom loop cannot be an ACD set.
basic-20 cpnd-19 DISPLAY_FMT
(FIRST,LAST)
Display Format for CPND name can be input as FIRST
To view names as John Doe
LAST,FIRST can be input as LAST
To view names as Doe John
DLNG Language preference for the DAC prompts.
dac-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 169
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
DN
Response
(ENG)
FRN
Comment
English
French
Prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422.
x..x yyyy
DNAN (DNAA)
DNAD
Pack/Rel
Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry
(yyyy)
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. DN is not prompted for Small System and
CS 1000S Model sets or if DIG is defined.
Range for CLID table entry is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)] basic-12
Customer Attendant DN (ATDN) + Attendant
Number (ANUM) are used as ANI DN in 3WT
ANI messages.
ANDN of outgoing 3WT route is used as ANI
DN in 3WT ANI messages.
Prompted with Commonwealth of Independent
States (CIST) package 221.
cist-21
DNDR (0)-120
DNRI
DNRO
DSPL
DSPT
DTAO
(0)-4
(0)-4
(0)-500
(0)-2
Delay Value in seconds.
A DNDR value of 0 disables this feature. If the
DNDR value is an odd number, then it is incremented to the next even number.
basic-21
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls
The index NDR1-4 BCS is defined in LD 56 edrg-24
Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls
The index NDR1-4 BCS is defined in LD 56 edrg-24
Length of portable display (in characters).
basic-22
Type of portable display: 0 = display is numeric
1 = display is alphabetic 2 = display is alphanumeric basic-22
Data Option, not prompted if TYPE = MCU.
arie-18
170 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DTMK
Response
(MPDA)
MCA
Comment
Software for Meridian Programmable Data
Adapter
Software for Meridian Communications
Adapter
The DTAO prompt determines the downloaded data, system, and operating parameters.
x...x
<CR>
Pack/Rel
Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/ data TN.
DTMK is prompted if the TN has both CLS =
VCE and CLS = FLXA. There can be only one data mode key per TN. Any response to DTMK overwrites a previous setting.
When changing from CLS = DTA to CLS = VCE,
CLS = WTA should also be assigned to avoid conflict with CLS = CPTA.
Where x...x = number of the SCR/SCN key to be designated as the data mode key. This cannot be key 00.
No data mode key. TN is not a dynamic voice/ data TN.
basic-22
DTR
DUP
ECHG
(OFF)
ON
(FULL)
HALF
(NO) YES
Data Terminal Ready settings
Dynamic DTR
Forced DTR, force the data port to always be ready for transmission.
With the Data Access Card (DAC). DTR is prompted if TYPE = R232.
arie-14 arie-14 Full Duplex
Half Duplex
Easy Change
This allows change to any prompt in this program without having to <CR> through all unrelated prompts. ECHG is prompted when
REQ = CHG.
basic-12
ECL
EFD
(0)-65535 x...x
Home Emergency Call List
Flexible CFNA DN for External calls optf-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 171
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
EHT
ELKP
ERL
Response Comment
EFD is the DN to which external calls are routed when there is no answer, if one of the following customer options is defined in LD 15:
• FNAD = FDN
• FNAT = FDN
• FNAL = FDN
A Group Hunt DN can be entered.
The DN can be up to 4 digits without Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150, or
13 digits with DNXP package 150.
Call Forward by Call Type Allowed and Forward
No Answer must be defined as the Class of
Service (CLS = CFTA and FNA). LDNs,
DLDNs, and Prime DNs is accepted as valid input.
x...x
000 x...x
Pack/Rel
External Hunt DN
EHT is the DN hunted for by external busy calls when: basic-10
• Class of Service is Call Forward by Call Type
Allowed (CFTA) and Hunting Allowed (HTA)
• the LD 15 prompt FNAD, FNAT, or FNAL =
HNT
A Group Hunt DN can be entered.
This DN can be up to 4 digits without Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 or 13 digits with DNXP package 150.
LDNs, DLDNs, and Prime DNs are accepted as valid input. To remove EFD or EHT DNs, change CFTA Class of Service to CFTD.
Prompted when CFTA is defined.
Short Hunt for external calls
Electronic Lock Password. Length is 1-15 digits ffc-15
<CR>
0-65535
Current Emergency Response Location
Enter no value to make this TN Auto Update..
Enter a value to statically configure this TN
(Manual Update).
basic-5.00
172 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
X
Response Comment
Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.
FCAR
FCTB
FDN
(NO)
YES x...x
Pack/Rel
Forced Charge Account Restricted
Must use Forced Charge Account
Restricted from using Forced Charge Account
Prompted if FCAF = YES in LD 15 and CLS =
TLD, CUN or CTD.
chg-1
Feature Control Bitmap
Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature
Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of
SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN.
A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
Flexible CFNA DN
FDN is used for internal calls, if CLS is CFTA and FNA. FDN is used for all calls if CLS is
CFTD and FNA.
FDN can be up to 4 digits without Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 or 13 digits with DNXP package 150.
A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. Precede with X to delete.
FDN requires CLS = MWA or FNA. FDN is only used if one or more of the following customer options are defined in LD 15: optf-1
• FNAD = FDN
• FNAT = FDN
• FNAL = FDN
FSVC (0)-9 Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm
Security DN index.
When Forced Out-of-Service condition occurs on a digital telephone with Alarm Security
Allowed (ASCA) Class of Service, the telephone is intercepted to a predefined DN.
Enter the index number (0)-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompts ODN 0-9. ODN is the basic-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 173
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
HDLC
HMDN
HOT
HUNT
Response Comment
acronym for Change Off-Hook Alarm Security
Directory Number options (OHAS DN).
(NO) YES x...x
Pack/Rel
High Level Data Link Control
Prompted if V25 = YES.
arie-18
Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.
MSMN-370
(OFF)
ON x...x
000
Hotline
Hotline is inactive for data port.
Enables Hotline for data port.
If HOT = ON, Auto Baud is forced OFF for the
Data Access Card.
arie-14
Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain
This Hunt DN can be up to 4 digits without
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150 or 13 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to delete.
Short Hunting
A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.
AControl Directory Number (CDN) can be defined as a Hunt DN for both physical and phantom 500/2500 sets. When a CDN is configured in this way, a call which comes to a busy DN can be Hunting or Call Forward Busy to a CDN.
With Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type, this is the Hunt DN for: basic-10
• internal calls if CLS = CFTA, or
• for all busy calls if CLS = CFTD
IAPG 0-9 (0)-15 Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message
(USM) group
IAPG assigns AST DNs to a status message group defined in LD 15. These groups determine which status messages are sent for aml-16
174 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ICT
INT
ITEM
Response Comment
an AST set. The default Group 0 sends no messages, while Group 1 sends all messages.
0-<NIPN>
ON
(OFF)
Pack/Rel
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number icp-16
Number of Intercept Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.
arie-14 Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking
Enable Meridian 1 and SL-100 interworking
Do not enable Meridian 1 and SL-100 interworking aaaa yyy
ITNA
KBA
<CR>
(NO)
YES
(0)
1
Respond with the desired program mnemonic
(aaaa) and its new value (yyy).
ITEM is reprompted until only a <CR> is entered. For example:
REQ CHG
TYPE SL1
TN lll ss cc uu
ECHG YES
ITEM KEY 07 ADL
KEY <CR> (KEY is prompted until <CR> is entered.)
ITEM <CR>
REQ
Return to REQ basic-12
Idle TN for the Third Party Application.
Do not identify an Associated Set (AST) to be used only by Third Party Application
Identify an Associated Set (AST) to be used only by Third Party Application basic-20
Key-Based Accessory for M3904 and M3905 which support key-based modules.
Configure keys up to and including 31
Configure keys up to and including 53 basic-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 175
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
2
Response Comment
Configure keys up to and including 75
KBD
(ON)
OFF
KEEP_MSGS
Pack/Rel
Keyboard Dialing Option
Enable Keyboard Dialing for data port
Enables Hayes mode dac-16
Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password vmba-19
(NO) YES
KEM (0)-4 Number of IP Phone Key Expansion Modules
(KEM) to configure.
basic-4.00
Note:
You can only configure more than 2 KEMs for IP Phones 1220 and 1230.
KEMOFST basic-4.00
<KEM><KeyOffset>
Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that do not support Paging and have a specific number of IP Phone KEMs configured.
On IP Phone 2002, prompted if 1 KEM is configured and
<CR>
is entered at the
KEY
prompt.
Where:
• KEM = 1
• KeyOffset = 0-23
On IP Phone 2004, prompted if 2 KEMs are configured and
<CR>
is entered at the
KEY
prompt.
Where:
• KEM = 1-2
• KeyOffset = 0-23
On IP Phone 1220, prompted if 1 to 4 KEMs are configured and
<CR>
is entered at the
KEY
prompt.
Where:
• KEM = 1-4
• KeyOffset = 0-11 basic-5.50
176 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
KEY
Response Comment
On IP Phone 1230, prompted if 3 or 4 KEMs are configured and
<CR>
is entered at the
KEY
prompt.
Where:
• KEM = 1-4
• KeyOffset = 0-11
Pack/Rel
basic-5.50
Once values are entered for KEM and
KeyOffset, the
KEY xx
prompt is presented for assignment of a function to the calculated KEM key. The
xx
is replaced with the calculated
KEM key number. When
<CR>
is entered after the assignment of a function to the KEM key, the
KEMOFST
prompt is presented again. This loop continues until a
<CR>
is entered at the
KEMOFST
prompt.
basic-1 xx aaa yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Telephone function key assignments.
Key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone
Note:
The just a
KEY
prompt is presented in a loop until
<CR>
is entered at the prompt.
Where:
• xx = entered IP Phone key number or calculated IP Phone KEM key number
Type xx NUL to remove a calling option or feature already assigned to a key.
• aaa = key name or function
• yyyy = additional information required for the key
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
• cccc or D = deals specifically with the Calling
Line identification feature.
Where:
- cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N
= the value entered at the SIZE prompt in
LD 15, minus 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 177
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Note:
You can only specify a value for cccc if aaa = ACD, HOT d, HOT L, MCN, MCR,
PVN, PVR, SCN or SCR.
- When the character "D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with a CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found
DN key is used.
Note:
The position of the (cccc or D) field varies depending on the key name or function.
The cccc and D parameters are mutually exclusive.
Some data ports require specific key assignments. Refer to the Meridian Data
Services NTPs for information regarding these requirements.
Note:
Type xx NUL to remove a calling option or feature already assigned to a key.
Key number limits that can be assigned are as follows:
0-7 for Meridian Communications Adapter
(MCA)
0-5 for M2006
0-7 for M2008
0-59 for M2616, varies with number of add-on modules
If either the Meridian Programmable Data
Adapter (MPDA) or the Display Module is equipped, then key 7 on sets M2008, M2216, and M2616 sets and key 5 on set M2006 become Program keys which cannot be used as function keys.
Any printout of the TN block does not show key
7 because it is a local function key.
On the M2616, if CLS = HFA, key 15 on the voice TN defaults to the Handsfree key. No other feature assignment is accepted.
Pack/Rel
178 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Primary and secondary data DNs must be unique.
A station SCR, SCN, MCR, or MCN DN must be removed as a member from all Group Hunt lists before the DN can be modified.
On the M3903, keys 4-15 are blocked. No feature assignment is accepted for keys 2-15.
On the M3903, M3904, and M3905, keys 29-31 are reserved. No feature assignment is accepted for keys 29-31 other than NUL.
On M3904, no feature assignment is accepted for keys 12-15.
On M3905, the craftsperson can assign NUL or a server application on key 5. On key 6, the craftsperson can assign NUL or a local application.
On M3905, the craftsperson can assign NUL or the program key on key 7.
On M3905, the craftsperson can assign AAG,
AMG, ASP,DWC, EMR, MSB, or NRD on keys
8-11. Other features are blocked.
Ranges of key numbers that can be assigned are as follows:
Pack/Rel
basic-24 basic-4.00
On IP Phone 1130, key numbers 0-15 and
27-28.
On IP Phone 2002, key numbers 0-79, varying with value specified at the
KEM
prompt.
• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31
• if KEM 1, key range = 0-55
• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79
On IP Phone 2004, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the
KEM
prompt.
• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31
• if KEM 1, key range = 0-79 (Paging feature)
• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79 (no Paging feature)
On IP Phones 1210/1220/1230, key number range is as follows: basic-5.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 179
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
On IP Phone 1210, key numbers 0-31.
On IP Phone 1220, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the
KEM
prompt.
• if KEM = 0, key range = 0-31
• if KEM = 1. key range = 0-43
• if KEM = 2, key range = 0-55
• if KEM = 3. key range = 0-67
• if KEM = 4, key range = 0-79
On IP Phones 1230, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the
KEM
prompt.
• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31
• if KEM 1, key range = 0-55 (Paging feature)
• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79 (Paging feature)
• if KEM 3, key range = 0-67 (no Paging feature)
• if KEM 4, key range = 0-79 (no Paging feature)
On IP Phones 1210/1220/1230, configuration guidelines for keys are as follows:
• key 0 is used for the primary DN
• keys 1-15 are used for programmable feature keys
These keys can be programmed with any DN or feature, except Message Waiting (key 16) and those DNs or features configured on keys 17-26 (soft keys)
• key 16 is reserved for the Message Waiting
(MWK) feature
• keys 17-26 are reserved for soft keys
• keys 27-30 are reserved, except on an IP
Phone 1230 that has 20 feature keys, where they are the last 4 programmable feature keys.
• key 31 is reserved
On IP Phone 1210, Key 0 is the only programmable feature key. It is configured with the primary DN.
Pack/Rel
180 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
On IP Phone 1220, the number of programmable feature keys depends on the number of KEMs configured:
• if KEM = 0, keys 1-3
• if KEM = 1, keys 1-3 and 32-43
• if KEM = 2, keys 1-3 and 32-55
• if KEM = 3, keys 1-3 and 32-67
• if KEM = 4, keys 1-3 and 32-79
On IP Phone 1230, the number of programmable feature keys depends on the number of KEMs configured:
• if KEM = 0, keys 1-15 and 27-30
• if KEM = 1, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-55
(Paging feature)
• if KEM = 2, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-79
(Paging feature)
• if KEM = 3, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-67 (no
Paging feature)
• if KEM = 4, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-79 (no
Paging feature)
Pack/Rel
xx AAG xx AAK
ACD Answer Agent key
Must have CLS = SPV.
acdb-1
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.
basic-24
Automatic Answerback key
AAA CLS and AAK key cannot be assigned to the same telephone. Only one type of
Automatic Answerback is allowed. M2616 telephone must have CLS = HFA.
aab-1 xx ACD yyyy (cccc or D) zzz bacd-1
Automatic Call Distribution key
Where:
• xx = key number (must be key 0)
• yyyy = ACD DN or Message Center DN bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 181
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys, from key 0, up to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zzzz = agent's position ID yyyy and zzzz can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150. Only ACD DN for Small
System and CS 1000S Model set.
Pack/Rel
xx ACNT Activity Code entry key
This key must have an associated lamp and applies to ACD-D and ACD-MAX only. ADS data block must be configured in LD 23.
acdd-13 xx ADL yy z...z
Autodial key
Where:
• xx = key number
• yy = maximum length of the ADL DN. Valid entries are: 4, 8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Note that other values are rounded up to the next valid number.
• z...z = actual Autodial DN (this entry is optional) optf-1 xx AGT yyyy xx AMG bacd-1
ACD Agent status key
Where: yyyy = agent's ID. The agent ID number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Must have CLS = SPV.
ACD Answer Emergency call key
Must have CLS = SPV.
acdb-1
182 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
The Position ID of the ACD set cannot be changed when the ACD set is acquired as a
Human Agent.
Pack/Rel
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AMG basic-24 xx AO3 xx AO6
Three-Party Conference key
On the M3902 key number 4 is reserved for
AO3, AO6, TRN, or NUL
On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.
basic-1 basic-24 basic-24 basic-25
Six-Party Conference key
On the M3902 key number 4 is reserved for
AO3, AO6, TRN, NUL
On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.
basic-1 basic-24 basic-24 basic-25
Attendant Recall key basic-1 xx ARC xx ASP ACD Supervisor call key (must have CLS =
AGN)
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for NRD, MSB, AAG, AMG, DWC and ASP.
acdb-1 basic-24
ACD Call Waiting Time indication key supp-14 xx ATW xx AWC ACD Calls Waiting key
Must have CLS = AGN and Supervisor Position
ID or SPID must be configured.
bacd-1 xx BFS TN Busy Forward Status key
Where: TN = Terminal Number to be screened.
A Key cannot be assigned to a BRI set.
bfs-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 183
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
It is possible to configure the TN of the same set against the BFS key only if the Class of
Service is BFEA.
xx CA yy z...z
Combined No Hold Conference and Autodial key
Where:
• yy = maximum length of the CA DN. Valid entries are: 4, 8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Note that other values are rounded up to the next valid number.
• z...z = actual Autodial DN (this entry is optional) basic-14 xx CAS Centralized Attendant Service key casm-1 xx CFW yy z...z
Call Forward key
Where: yy = maximum length of the CFW DN
Valid entries for M2317 or M3000 sets are any integer in the range of (4)-23. For all other BCS type sets, you may enter any integer in the range of (4)-31.
optf-1
Note:
The default for M3900 series telephones is
(16).
Where: z...z = Call Forward DN or range of DNs where calls are to be forwarded (the target DN).
Must be key 11 for LOGIVOX telephones.
A Group Hunt DN can be entered. If CLS =
CFXD, the Call Forward number must be an internal DN.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 19 is reserved for CFW or NULL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key number 19 is reserved for CFW or NULL.
basic-24 basic-25 xx CH D yy z...z
basic-14
184 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Combined No Hold Conference and Direct
Hotline key
Where:
• yy = number of digits in target DN (1-31)
• z...z = target DN
Pack/Rel
xx CH L yyy Combined No Hold Conference and Hotline
List key
Where: yyy = 0-999 for Hotline list entry as defined in LD 18.
xx CHG basic-14
Charge account key
On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 25 is reserved for CHG or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key number 25 is reserved for CHG or NUL.
chg-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx CLT Configure Callers List key in context sensitive area, CLT/NUL are only options for key 27.
basic-25.4
xx COS xx CPN
Controlled Class of Service key ccos-7
Calling Party Number key
On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 26 is reserved for CPN or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key number 25 is reserved for CPN or NUL.
chg-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx CS yyyy Combined No Hold Conference and Speed Call key
Where: yyyy = Speed Call list number from
0-8190. Not available on M3000 telephones.
basic-14 xx CSD xx CWT xx DAG
Conferee Selectable Display key.
Call Waiting key
Only one CWT Key is allowed. Should have
CLS = HTD because Hunting takes precedence.
Display ACD Agents key basic-23 basic-1 bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 185
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
This key displays the status of ACD agents appearing on the supervisor's telephone. Must have CLS = SPV and ADD or DDS.
Pack/Rel
xx DIG yyyy zz R/V
Dial Intercom Group key
Where:
• yyyy = group number, from 0-2045.
• zz = member number from 0-99. The zz value cannot be equal to or share the first digit of a
2 digit number with the SPRE code. For example, if SPRE = 1, zz cannot be 1, 10,
11...19.
• R = Ring option
• V = Voice option
Must have maximum number of Dial Intercom
Groups DGRP defined in LD 15.
If any member in a group has a two-digit member number, then all members have a twodigit number. The system adds leading zeros to other entries.
Prompted with Dial Intercom (DI) package 21.
di-1 xx DPU Directed Call Pickup key
Key is optional, dial access code can be used if CLS = DPUA. Not available on M3000 telephones. This prompt appears with Directed
Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.
dcp-12 basic-15 xx DRC yyy DID Route Control key
Where: yyy = route number = 0-511 xx DSP Display key
This key must have an associated key/lamp pair.
ddsp-1 xx DWC yyyy bacd-19
ACD Supervisor Display Waiting Calls key
186 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Where: yyyy = ACD DN. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
A maximum of eight DWC keys can be assigned per queue on eight supervisors.
Agent sets can only have 1 SWC key for their own queue.
ACD agent telephones can support the display waiting calls key. Must have CLS = SPV and
ADD or DDS.
Pack/Rel
T The key can be used with supervisors and agents.
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.
basic-24 xx EMR ACD Emergency key (must have CLS = AGN) acdb-1
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.
basic-24 acdb-1 xx ENI yyyy ACD Enable Interflow key
Where: yyyy = DN. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Only one is allowed per ACD DN. Must have
CLS = SPV.
xx EOVR xx FDIS xx FLH xx FOV xx GHD xx GPU
Enhanced Override key
Force Disconnect Key
DSN Flash Key
DSN Flash Override Key povr-20 pomw-25.4
atvn atvn
Group Hunt Deactivation
A station user can toggle the PDN in and out of all groups of which that PDN is a member.
pldn-15
Group Call Pickup key
The key is optional because a dial access code can be used if CLS = GPUA. Not available on
M3000 telephones. Allowed with Directed Call
Pickup (DCP) package 115.
dcp-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 187
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
xx GRC yy Group Call key Where: yy = 0-63 for Group number as defined in LD 18
Pack/Rel
grp-1 xx HLD xx HNDO
Hold
Hand-off for a Mobile Extension user.
supp-10 mobx-5.50
xx HOT Direct entry for Hotline Model set key (Small
System and CS 1000S), Automatic termination
DN is eight digits hot-10 nn HOT D dd num DN m (cccc or D)
Two-way Hotline key
Where:
• dd = number of digits dialed
• num = target_number (terminating DN is a maximum of 31 digits)
• DN = two-way hotline DN
• m = one of the following Terminating Modes:
H = Hotline (default), N = Non-ringing, R =
Ringing, or V = Voice
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
hot-21 xx HOT D nn x...x
Direct entry for One-way Enhanced Hotline key
Where: hot-10
• nn = number of digits dialed
• x...x = Hotline terminating DN up to a 31 digit maximum xx HOT D nn x...x xxxx (cccc or D)
Direct entry for Two-way Enhanced Hotline key hot-10
188 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Where:
• nn = number of digits in Target DN
• x...x = Terminating DN up to a 31 digit maximum
• xxxx = optional two way Hotline DN. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
Pack/Rel
xx HOT I dd num m
Intercom key
Where:
• dd = number of digits dialed
• num = target_number (terminating DN max
31 digits)
• m = one of the following Terminating Modes:
V = Voice (default), N = Non-ringing, or R =
Ringing hot-21 xx HOT L bbb
One-way Hotline key
Where: bbb = Hotlline list entry = 0-999. The
Hotline list entry is defined in LD 18.
Note that the Hotline list NCOS overrides the set NCOS.
hot-10 xx HOT L bbb xxxx (cccc or D)
Two-way list entry for Enhanced Hotline key
Where: hot-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 189
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
• bbb = List entry = 0-999
• xxxx = Two-way Hotline DN. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys, from key 0, up to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
Hotline list entry is defined in LD 18.
Note that the Hotline list NCOS overrides set
NCOS.
xx HOT P nn yyyy
Target PCA DN
Where:
• nn = PCA DN length. Maximum length is
32.
• yyyy = the target DN
Pack/Rel
pca-398
Note:
PCA supports configuration of Key 0 and
Key 1.
xx HOT P nn yyyzzzz
Access Code to dial the mobile phone of the
Universal Extension client (UXTY = MOBX).
For UXTY = MOBX, key 1 is reserved for HOT
P functionality.
Where:
• nn = maximum number of digits for yyyzzzz
(HOT P DN)
• yyyzzzz = 1-32 digit number where:
- yyy = the trunk steering code, or access code, to dial into the mobile network.
The access code could be a NARS/BARS/
CDP access code, or a route access code.
mobx-5.50
190 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
- zzzz = the mobile phone DN
Pack/Rel
xx HOT U <UADN>
Access Code used to make and receive calls between the SIP client and the universal extension (UXTY = SIPL). The SIP Line
Gateway (SLG) application is the only entity that makes use of this key.
Where:
• xx = any key except 0 (key 0 is reserved for the Primary DN)
• <UADN> = a 1-7 digit number representing a
User Agent DN
If a User Agent prefix (UAPR) is provisioned in the Customer Data Block (CDB), after the primary DN (PDN) is configured on key 0, the system automatically generates a UADN
(PDN + UAPR) and displays it on the TTY.
You can enter <CR> to accept the systemgenerated UADN, or enter a different
UADN.
If a UAPR is not provisioned in the CDB, you must enter a UADN.
Note:
The UADN must conform to the customer's dialing plan.
sip_lines-6.0
0 xx ICF nn xxxx
Internal Call Forward key
Where: nn = Forward DN length. Valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.
Where: xxxx = Forward DN (this entry is optional)
An ICF key can be configured if Call Forward is icf-19 xx IMM
KY1 aaa
DSN Immedicate Key
Key 1 located far left, below dial pad.
Where: aaa = VUP (Volume Up) by default for
KY1. Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.
atvn
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 191
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
KY2 aaa
Comment
Key 2 located middle, below dial pad.
Where: aaa = VDN (Volume Down) by default for KY2. Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.
KY3 aaa
Pack/Rel
Key 3 located far right, below dial pad.
Where: aaa = HLD (Hold) by default for KY3.
Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.
supp-10 xx LNG xx LNK
M2317 Language Toggle key (No Language) dlt2-9
Where:
• xx = key 29
• LNG = Language Toggle enabled
• NUL = Remove Language Option
This feature allows set operator to set and reset language display, toggling between French and
English versions on the alphanumeric display.
Last Number Redial key
LNRS defines the Last Number Redial Size.
For LOGIVOX telephones, key 8 is defined by set firmware as the Last Number Redial key.
The key definition is optional, because the user can press the DN key twice to activate Last
Number Redial.
Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15 and CLS =
LNA.
Inr-8 xx LSPK yyyy
Loudspeaker key
Where: yyyy = associated loudspeaker DN or
SPEKABUS channel ohol-20 mwc-1 xx MCK Message Cancellation Key
This key should only be programmed on
Message Center sets.
xx MCN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Multiple Call Non-Ringing key basic-20
192 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
Where:
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. The DN cannot appear simultaneously on a PBX set DN or as an SCR DN or SCN DN.
Once the MCN key has been defined, MARP is prompted.
On the M3901 and M3902 MCN cannot be configured on keys 1-5. MCN, if it is configured, must be assigned to key 0.
basic-24 xx MCR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Multiple Call Ringing key
Where:
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. The DN cannot appear simultaneously on a PBX set DN or as a SCR Single Call or SCN
DN.
basic-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 193
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Once the MCR key has been defined MARP is prompted.
On the M3901 and M3902 MCR cannot be configured on keys 1-5. MCR, if it is configured, must be assigned to key 0.
Pack/Rel
basic-24 xx MIK mwc-1 xx MRK
Message Indication Key
This key should only be programmed on
Message Center sets.
Message Registration Key
Requires PPM/Message Registration (MR) package 101 and CLS = ADD or DDS.
mr-10 xx MSB Make Set Busy key
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.
msb-1 basic-24 xx MWK yyyy Message Waiting Key
Where: yyyy = DN.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. With the Network Message Service feature equipped, the NMS-DN can be up to 13 digits.
On the M3902, key 5 is reserved for MWK or
NUL. On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 16 is reserved for MWK or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key 16 is reserved for
MWK or NUL.
mwc-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx NHC xx NRD xx NSVC yyyy
No Hold Conference key basic-14
Not Ready key
AGN or SPV Class of Service must be assigned.
On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.
bacd-1 basic-24 bacd-12
Night Service key (must have CLS = SPV)
194 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Where: yyyy = ACD DN associated with that
Night Service. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
xx NUL xx OBV
Removes function or feature from key
Observe ACD agent key (must have CLS =
OUSD)
Pack/Rel
basic-1 bacd-12 xx OBV yy..yy
Observe key with Speed Call List Number
(must have CLS = OUSD). Where: yy.yy = SCL number xx OSN xx OVB xx OVR xx PONW xx PRK xx PRS
On-Site Notification key.
Overflow Position Busy key
Override key
Priority Override/Breakin Networkwide key oas-3.0
esa-23 aop-1 optf-1 pomw-25.4
Call Park key
The Transfer (TRN), or Six-Party Conference
(A06) key plus a Dial Access code can be used instead of the Park key.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 21 is reserved for PRK or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key 21 is reserved for
PRK or NUL.
cprk-2 basic-24 basic-25
Privacy Release key
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 24 is reserved for PRS or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key 24 is reserved for
PRS or NUL.
basic-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx PRY DSN Priority Key xx PVN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Private Line Non-Ringing key atvn basic-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 195
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
Where:
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. Must have Private Line Directory Number
(PRDN) defined in LD 14.
On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for
PVN.
basic-24 xx PVR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Private Line Ringing key
Where: basic-20
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. Must have Private Line Directory Number
(PRDN) defined in LD 14.
On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for
PRV.
basic-24 xx RAG ACD Ring Agent key (must have CLS =SPV) acdb-1
196 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
xx RCK y z Ringing Change Key
Where:
• y = first key/lamp strip controlled by key =
(0)-6
• z = second key/lamp strip controlled by key =
0-(1)-6.
Only one ringing change key per set is permitted. Requires International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 and Ringing Change Key (RCK) package
193.
rck-15 xx RDL yy Redial stored number key
Where: yy = number of digits = 4, 8, 12, (16),
20, 23. Numbers between 5 and 22 are rounded up to the next valid number.
snr-3 xx RGA xx RLS
Ring Again key
Must be key 10 on LOGIVOX telephones.RANA can be activated if OPT =
RNA in LD 15. When OPT = RND in LD 15, all sets with the RGA key can only activate Ring
Again Busy.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 20 is reserved for RGA or NUL.
On the IP Phone, key 20 is reserved for RGA or NUL.
rga/optf-2
0basic-24 basic-25
Release key
Requires an SL1 phone. Key/lamp pair is not required. Must be KY3 on a LOGIVOX phone
(CLS=LVXA).
basic-1 xx RLT xx RMK xx RMWK xxxx [yyyy]
Configure Redial List key in context sensitive area, RLT/NUL are only options for key 28.
basic-25.4
Room Status Key
Remote Message Waiting indication key rms-10 mw-24
Where:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 197
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
• xx= key number
• xxxx = Message Center DN
• [yyyy] = DN to be monitored [optional]
Pack/Rel
xx RNP xx
RNP yyyy
Ringing Number Pickup key basic-1 supp-12
Where: yyyy = Ringing Number Pickup group number is optional with package 131 SUPP
International Supplementary Features.
The RNP key when programmed without a group number allows the user to pick up a call in the Ringing Number Pickup Group specified by the RNPG prompt. This prompt also controls the group of which the set is a member . When programmed with a group number the key is used to pickup calls for that specific group. This was introduced for the Centralized Multiple
Line Emulation feature.
Radio Paging key rpa-15 xx RPAG yyyy
Where: yyyy = Route Access Code
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) Trunk Steering
Codes (TSC) and Distant Steering Codes
(DSC) can be entered against yyyy.
xx SCC yyyy Speed Call Controller key
Where: yyyy = SCL list number 0-8190. SCL must be defined in LD 18.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.
optf-1 basic-24 xx SCN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Single Call Non-Ringing key
Where:
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN basic-20
198 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
Pack/Rel
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. Once the SCN key has been defined,
MARP is prompted.
On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for
SCN.
basic-24 xx SCR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z
Single Call Ringing key
Where: basic-20
• yyyy = DN
• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD
15 minus 1.
• D = the character "D". When the character
"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with
CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.
• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. Use a single appearance DN to terminate
VCC Voice Call or SIG Signaling calls.
Once the SCR key has been defined, MARP is prompted.
On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for
SCR.
On Universal Extensions (TYPE = UEXT), key
0 is reserved for SCR.
The SCR primary key should be configured with the optional CLID information appended.
basic-24 basic-5.50
basic-5.00
xx SCU yyyy Speed Call User key optf-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 199
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Where: yyyy = SCL list number 0-8190. SCL must be defined in LD 18.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key 23 is reserved for
SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.
Pack/Rel
basic-24 basic-25 xx SIG yyyy Signal key
Where: yyyy = Single appearance DN.
The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
DNXP package 150. Key/lamp is not required.
basic-1 xx SSC yyyy System Speed Call controller key
Where: yyyy = SSC list number 0-4095.SSC list must be defined in LD 18.
On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.
optf-1 basic-24 xx SSU yyyy System Speed Call User key
Where: yyyy = SSC list number 0-4095.SSC list must be defined in LD 18.
optf-1 xx TAD xx THF xx TRC
Time and Date key
For SL-1 sets only, must have CLS = ADD or
DDS, cannot be key 0.
Blocked on the M3901, M3902, M3903,
M3904, M3905.
Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash key ddsp-1 basic-24 thf-14
Malicious Call Trace key
Key/lamp not required. MCT is applied on a TN basis. This key can be configured on ACD telephones. Allowed when CLS = MCTA.
mct-10 xx TRN Call Transfer key
On the M3902, key 4 is reserved for TRN or
NUL. On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 17 is reserved for TRN or NUL.
On the IP Phone 2004 key 17 is reserved for
TRN or NUL.
basic-1 basic-24 basic-25
200 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
xx USR
Comment
User Selectable Call Redirection key xx UST xx VCC yyyy
User Status key (must have UST = YES in
LD15 and UST = YES in LD 23)
Voice Call key
Where: yyyy = Single appearance DN. Not available on M3000 telephones.
Pack/Rel
uscr-19 ims-2 basic-1 xx VUP xx VDN
Volume Up key (must be assigned if Volume
Down is assigned)
Volume Down key (must be assigned if Volume
Up is assigned) xx WUK Guest entry of automatic Wakeup key (Key/ lamp pair is required) xx XMWK xxxx yyyy
Extended Message Waiting indication key
Where:
• xx= key number
• xxxx = Message Center DN
• yyyy = DN to be monitored gewu-16 mw-24
LANG (0)-5 X
(0)
1
2
3
4
5
X
Language choice for Automatic Wakeup
(AWU) calls. Prompted with Multi-Language
Wakeup (MLWU) package 206.
This entry defines the language presented for the Automatic Wakeup Recorded
Announcement (RAN), for language 0 through
5 as follows:
See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15
See LA11/LA12 in LD 15
See LA21/LA22 in LD 15
See LA31/LA32 in LD 15
See LA41/LA42 in LD 15
See LA51/LA52 in LD 15
Remove entry mlwu-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 201
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
LDN
Response
(NO)
0-3
0-5
Comment
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD
15
Pack/Rel
nldn-20
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD
15
Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD
15
LHK
LNRS
(0)-7
(0)-27
(0)-59
(0)
4-(16)-31
Last Hunt Key number limit
For M2008
For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules (Small System and CS 1000S)
For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules
No Last Hunt Key or remove Last Hunt Key
(used for Internal/External Short Hunt) basic-10
Last Number Redial Size
Enter the maximum number of digits that can be stored. Valid entries are 4, 8, 12, (16), 20,24,
28, or 31. Invalid entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.
Inr-8
LPK
LTN
MARP
(0)-5
(0)-7
(0)-27
(0)-59
Line Preference Key limit (last key scanned for
Automatic Line Preference)
For M2006
For M2008
For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules (Small System and CS 1000S)
For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules
Prompted when CLS = IRA, NIA or OLA.
Isel-4
1-253 0-15 Logical TN and AUX link number
This prompt appears when CLS = IMA and the valid APL link is defined in LD15.
ims-5
(NO) YES Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
Use TN as the Multiple Appearance DN
Redirection Prime. The MARP prompt, or
MARP information, appears following the DN basic-18
202 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MAUT
MCCL
Response Comment
KEY designation, and is associated with those
DN assignments.
(NO) YES x y z u
Pack/Rel
Modify Authorization Codes for this telephone ssau-19
This prompt appears with Station Specific
Authorization Codes (SSAU)package 229 and
CLS = AUTR.
Number of clients per supported SIP Line type for a Universal Extension designated as a SIP
Line.
Where:
• x = number of clients on Nortel SIP lines
(SIPN type)
• y = number of clients on 3rd party SIP lines
(SIP3 type)
• z = number of clients on fixed mobile convergence SIP lines (FMCL type)
• u = number of clients on telephony service
SIP lines (TLSV type) sip_lines-6.0
0
MLNG a...a
MLWU_LANG
(0)
1
2
3
4
Language selection for the M3902, M3903,
M3904, M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140,
I1150, I2001, I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:
• <CR> no change
• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR,
SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,
RUS, LAT, TUR.
basic-25.4
Language choice for Automatic Wakeup
(AWU) calls.
This entry defines the language presented for the Automatic Wakeup Recorded
Announcement (RAN), for language 0 through
5 as follows:
See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15
See LA11/LA12 in LD 15
See LA21/LA22 in LD 15
See LA31/LA32 in LD 15
See LA41/LA42 in LD 15 mlwu-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 203
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
5
Response
X
Comment
See LA51/LA52 in LD 15
Precede with X to remove
MOD
MODL
MOTN
MPHI
(NO)
YES
1-127
<CR> l s c u
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Mode
Network is required for Meridian
Programmable Data Adapter
Modem synchronizes to clock in external device, such as QMT21 arie-14
Model number for small systems
Model number for CS 1000S
This prompt appears for Small System and CS
1000S Model sets.
basic-16 basic-1
Main Office TN
Accept default when CS 1000S is the Main
Office
When Main Office is a Large System.
sbo-2
Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface
Prompted if TYPE = MCU.
mph-19
MRT
NAME n aaaa,bbbb aaaa aaaa,
,bbbb
Music route number for route types MUS or
IMUS. By default there is no value.
basic-7.00
Calling Party Name Display name
First name comma Last name.
For example, John Doe is entered as
John,Doe. The first single comma is treated as the delimiter. Up to 27 characters (including the comma) can be input. The last occurrence of the first comma group serves as the name delimiter and is translated into a space between the first and last name.
When the delimiter is omitted, the input is stored as a first name.
When the delimiter follows the input, the input is stored as the first name.
When the delimiter precedes the input, the input is stored as a last name.
cpnd-21
204 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NCOS
NDID
NEWTYP
Response
(0)-99
Comment
Network Class of Service group xxxx a...a
Pack/Rel
ncos-1
The SIP Lines Gateway (SLG) node identifier. sip_lines-6.0
0
Specifies the TN_TYPE to convert to. (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)
NUID
NHTN aaaa l s c u
0000
Network User ID for a dialable home system
DN. Applies to IP Phones.
Precede with X to delete.
grsec-4.0
Network Home system TN CS 1000M Large
Systemand CS 1000Esystem. Prompted when
NUID is defined.
0000 is a reserved TN to indicate the Network
Home is a CS 2100 System. Not used if the
Network Home is a CS 1000 System.
grprim-4.00
basic-5.00
Numbering zone.
zbd-6.00
NUMZON
E
0-1023
OHID (0)-9
OPE
PAR
(NO) YES
(SPAC)
EVEN
ODD
MARK
Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.
When a dial tone or interdigit timeout occurs on a set with Alarm Security Allowed (ASCA)
Class of Service, the set is intercepted to a predefined DN.
Enter the index number (0)-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompts ODNx.
basic-18
Change data port Operating Parameters
Space Parity
Even Parity
Odd Parity
Mark Parity mcu/arie-19 basic-1
PAGEOFST
<Page><KeyOffset>
Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that support Paging and have a specific number of
KEMs configured.
basic-4.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 205
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
PBDO
PLEV
POS
Response Comment
On IP Phone 2004, prompted if 1 KEM is configured and
<CR>
is entered at the
KEY
prompt.
Where:
• Page = 0-1
• KeyOffset = 0-23
Pack/Rel
On IP Phone 1230, prompted if 1 or 2 KEMs are configured and
<CR>
is entered at the KEY prompt.
Where:
• if KEM = 1, Page = 0-1
• if KEM = 2, Page = 2-3
• KeyOffSet = 0-11 basic-5.50
Once values are entered for Page and
KeyOffset, the
KEY xx
prompt is presented for assignment of a function to the calculated KEM key. The
xx
is replaced with the calculated
KEM key number. When
<CR>
is entered after the assignment of a function to the KEM key, the
PAGEOFST
prompt is presented again.
This loop continues until a
<CR>
is entered at the
PAGEOFST
prompt.
(OFF)
ON
0-(2)-7 xxxx
Port Busy when DTR off
Disabled
Key 7 is automatically assigned as the Make
Set Busy (MSB) key
Switching to any other mode forces PBDO to
OFF. Prompted if TYPE = R232 in operating modes 8 or 12.
dac-16
Priority Level, prompted with Priority Override/
Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or
Enhanced DPNSS1 Services (DPNSS_ES) package 288
2 = set can override sets of level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of level 2-7.
povr-20
ACD position ID. Prompted when SFMT =
AUTO, TNDN, TN or DN.
basic-12
206 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PRI
PRM
Response
(1)-48
(1)-32
Comment
Priority level for Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) agent
Valid range for systems 11C, 51C, 61C, and
81C.
Valid range for all other system options.
The agent with the lowest number assigned has the highest priority and is the first ACD agent to receive calls. (Where Priority 1 has the highest priority level).
PRI is prompted with Automatic Call
Distribution, Priority Agent (PAGT) package
116 and CLS = AGN or SPV.
Pack/Rel
pagt-12
(ON)
OFF
Prompt for terminal or host mode
Terminal or Keyboard dial mode, prompts are output by data unit
Host mode prompts are not output by data unit arie-14
PROCEED
PSDS
PSEL
RCO
YES (NO)
(NO) YES
(DMDM)
TLNK
(0)-2
Confirms that the System Administrator is aware of what features is lost and still wants to perform the conversion.
Anything typed except YES implies NO
Public Switched Data Service option
With PSDS = YES, transmission is synchronous and the baud is 56K or 64K. 56K is the default.
arie-18
Protocol Selection, DM-DM or T-link
DMDM is used by Meridian 1 data devices such as ASIM, AIM, ADM, SADM, Asynchronous
Data Option or ADO, and MPDA. MCA can use both protocols.
TLNK protocol is used by SL-100 and DMS data devices
This prompt appears if DTAO = MCA, or TYPE
= MCU arie-18
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No
Answer uscr-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 207
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
REQ:
?
Response Comment
This prompt appears when CLS = FNA or MWA
(or both)
Request
To get a list of possible responses
CHG
CPY 1-32
Change existing data block
Copy or create 1 to 32 new station data block(s) automatically from the specified station data block. Model sets cannot be copied.
Pack/Rel
basic-19
CHGTYP
END
MOV
Change type of an IP phone
Exit overlay program
Move data block from one TN to another.
MOV command can be used to move digital
"IPE" telephones from one loop, shelf, card, unit to another lscu with the following restrictions (includes moves across
Superloops):
-ACD sets must not be moved. Remove (out) data and re-enter at destination.
-Cannot be used for Small System and CS
1000S Model sets
MOV command can be used to move digital
"EPE" telephones from one unit or card to another, but does not support moving these phones across shelves or loops.
MOV PAIR command can be used providing the system is on Rls 24 or 25. This command do not function properly on Rls 15 - 23. It is recommended to use MOV on these releases of software.
basic-5.00
basic-25.4
Note:
If moving a voice unit with an associated data unit, the data unit must also be moved.
On the NT8D02 DLC card, both voice and data TN's can be moved by the MOV PAIR command.
208 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RNPG
RTS
SCI
SCPW
Response Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
If Call Forward is activated prior to the set move, the Call Forward data is moved to the destination set.
MOV PAIR Move voice TN and data TN data blocks on
NT8D02 Digital Line Card
NEW
OUT
Add new data block to the system
Remove data block
Before removing an ACD agent telephone, first remove the associated AGT key on the supervisor's telephone. Select OUT and then
NEW when switching resources between virtual and actual ACD DNs, to avoid unwanted information on ACD-D reports.
The following is a list of valid responses. For further information, consult the appropriate
Overlay program.
LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC DISI
DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS DSXP
ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN ENLS ENLU
ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU LBSY LDIS LIDL
LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT SUPL TRK XNTT
XPCT XPEC
LD 20: LTN LUC LUDU LUU LUVU PRT
LD 10: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT
(0)-4095
(ON) OFF
(0)-7 xxxx
Ringing Number Pickup Group
To remove a telephone from a group, enter 0 in response to the RNPG prompt.
grp-1
Request To Send applies only to asynchronous mode.
mca-18 sci-7 Station Category Indication priority level
The station category number 1 to 7 must be defined as attendant console Incoming Call
Indicator. LD 15 prompt ICI = CA1-CA7.
Station Control Password ffc-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 209
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Must equal Station Control Password Length
(SCPL) as defined in LD 15. Not prompted if
SCPL = 0. Precede with X to delete.
SECOND_DN x...x
SFDN
SFLT
X xxxx
(NO)
BOSS
SEC
Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Second Directory Number. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Deletes the second directory number
Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set
This prompt appears if response to SFLT =
BOSS.
Secretarial Filtering
Assign no designation to telephone
Designate telephone as a Boss set
Designate telephone as a Secretary set
SEC (NO) and <CR> takes you to the next prompt.
This prompt appears with Boss Secretary
Filtering (FTCSF) package 198.
Pack/Rel
vmba-19 ftcsf-15 ftcsf-15
SFMT
TNDN
TN
Select one of the following formats for the copy command. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to
7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
basic-1
Manual selection of TNs and DNs or ACD position IDs for ACD telephones.
The TN and DN or POS for ACD set prompts repeat n times as specified under the CPY n command.
TN I s c u TN of new set
DN xxxx DN of new set
POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set
The new DNs or ACD position IDs for ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and DN or
210 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SGRP
Response Comment
ACD position ID for ACD telephones and each
TN.
The TN prompt repeats n times as specified under the CPY n command.
TN I s c u TN of new set
DN xxxx DN of new set
POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set
DN
AUTO
The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN or ACD position ID for ACD telephones.
The DN or POS for ACD sets prompt repeats n times as specified under the CPY n command.
TN I s c u TN of new set
DN xxxx DN of new set
POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set
The new TNs and DNs or ACD position IDs for
ACD telephones are provided by the system.
You are prompted for the starting TN and DN or ACD position ID for ACD telephones.
TN I s c u TN of new set
DN xxxx DN of new set
POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set
(0)-999
SIPU
SPID x...x
x...x
Pack/Rel
Scheduled Access Restriction group number sar-20
This prompt appears with Scheduled Access
Restrictions (SAR) package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.
SIP Lines user id.
sip_lines-6.0
0
Supervisor Position ID DN
SPID is prompted for ACD packages B, C, and
D when CLS = AGN. SPID can be up to 4 digits, bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 211
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt
SPWD
SSU
SUPR
Response Comment
up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
xxxx
0-4095
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Secure Data Password
This prompt appears only if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security codes do not print when PRT is requested.
ssau-19 ssc-2 System Speed Call List number
Precede with X to delete.
SIP Line super user.
Where:
• NO = SIP line user is not a super user
• YES = SIP Line user is a super user sip_lines-6.0
0
TEN
TGAR
THIRD_DN
TN
1-511
0-(1)-31 x...x
l s c u
Tenant number
This prompt appears if Multi-tenant is configured for the customer.
tens-7
Trunk Group Access Restriction. The default of
(1) automatically blocks direct access.
basic-1 vmba-19
Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox
Third Directory Number. This DN can be up to
4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
X Deletes the third directory number
Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.
TN appears when REQ = NEW, CHG, MOV,
MOV PAIR or OUT.
Large System TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
Where l = basic-1
212 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• 0-159: loops, superloops must be multiples of four, starting with superloop 0
• 0–255: loops, Option 81C
Pack/Rel
fnf-25
Where s =
• 0-3: IPE shelves on loops defined TERM in
LD 17 0-1: IPE shelves on loops defined
TERD in LD 17 and superloops
• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined TERQ in LD 17
Where c =
• 1-10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops.
• 0-15: IPE cards of superloops.
Where u =
• 0-3: single density units
• 0-7: double density units
• 0-15: integrated services digital line (ISDLC) cards
• 0-31: digital line cards or DLC
For a static voice or data TN, u = 0-31. To assign VCE to TNs (where u = 16-31), CLS must be FLXA. To assign DTA to TNs (where u
= 0-15), CLS must be FLXA. See text regarding
FLXA.
l s c u Format for CS 1000E, where:
Where l = 0, 4, 8, - 252: superloop number, multiples of 4
Where s =
• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop
• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop
Where c =
• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop
• 1-10: cabinet on superloop
• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop
Where u = 0-31 basic-4.00
basic-6.00
basic-5.00
basic-6.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 213
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
c u
Comment Pack/Rel
Format for Small System, where c u = card, unit basic-16
• c = 1-50
• u = 0-31 c u c u
Format for CS 1000S, where c u = card, unit basic-1
• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
• u = 0-31
Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit basic-4.00
• c = 0-4, 7-10
• u = 0-31
Format for MG 1000B Cabinet, where: c = card and u = unit
• c = 0-10
• u = 0-31
TOTN c u l s c u c u c u
Note:
For converted Small Systems only, the
Meridian Mail card must be installed in slot
10 if Meridian Mail is to be supported.
Format for MG 1000T, where:
• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,
47-50
• u = 0-31 basic-4.00
To Terminal Number
Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit basic-20 basic-4.00
Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small System
Model sets.
basic-16
Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit basic-1.0
214 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
c u
Comment
Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit
This prompt appears when REQ = MOV and is not prompted for Model sets.
Pack/Rel
basic-4.00
TOV
TRAN
TYPE:
(0)
1
2
3
(ASYN)
SYN
Timeout Value for the Data port, for M2006,
M2008, M2216 and M2616 data port only
No Timeout
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes mcu/arie-19
Port transmission type for the data port on
M2006, M2008, M2216, M2616 telephones
Asynchronous data transmission
Synchronous data transmission
Asynchronous data modules cannot be set as synchronous. An MMPO with DTAO, MPDA, or
MMPO supports SYN.
mcu/arie-19 basic-1
?
Type of data block
To get a list of possible responses
1110 1120
1130 1140
1145 1150
1160 2001
2002 2004
2004p1
2004p2 2007
2033 2210
2211 2212
IP phone types
2006
2006 M
M2006 Digital telephone.1 DN per set
M2006 Digital telephone Model set
2008
2008 M
2016
M2008 Digital telephone
M2008 Digital telephone Model set
M2016 Digital telephone
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 215
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
2216
2216 M
Comment
M2216 Digital ACD telephone
M2216 Digital ACD telephone Model set
2317
2317 M
2616
2616 M
3000
3000 M
3901
3902
M2317 Digital telephone
M2317 Digital telephone Model set
M2616 Digital telephone
M2616 Digital telephone Model set
M3000 Digital Touchphone
M3000 Digital Touchphone Model set
M3901 Digital telephone
M3902 Digital telephone
3903
3903V
3903H
3904
3904V
3904H
M3903 Digital telephone
M3903 Virtual Terminal Set
M3903 Host Terminal Set
M3904 Digital telephone
M3904 Virtual Terminal Set
M3904 Host Terminal Set
3905
CARD
M3905 Digital telephone.
Unused line card data block, used for
Automatic Telephone Relocation.
Multi-line Telephone Line Card CARDMLT
I2001
I2002
I2004
I2050
IP Phone 2001
IP Phone 2002
IP Phone 2004
IP Software Phone 2050
MCU Meridian Communications Unit
MPORTBL Mobility Portable
Pack/Rel
arie-25 arie-25 basic-4.00
basic-2.0
basic-2.5
basic-2.0
216 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
OOSMLT
Comment
Out of Service Multi-Line Terminal Unit
Entering OOSMLT allows the administrator to mark any unit, regardless of card density or type, "Out of Service".
Pack/Rel
xpe-20
PCA
R232
R232 M
Personal Call Assistant
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-232 Data mode
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-232 Data mode Model set pca-3.0
R422
R422 M
VOLO
1210 1220
1230
UEXT
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-422 mode
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-422 mode Model set
The M2006, M2008, M2216, and M2616 require ISDLC line card Version C or greater.
The data port requires specific key assignments.
Mnemonic to configure an emergency TN
New IP Phone 1200 Series types.
basic-5.00
basic-5.50
UXID
UXTY
<CLID>
MOBX
TLSV
FMCL
SIPN
Universal extension.
Indicates that the TN is used by a universal extension client.
mobx-5.50
Calling Line ID of the Universal Extension client.
Where <CLID> = 1-16 digit number (excluding
0).
Must be entered if UXTY = MOBX; optional for other Universal Extension types.
mobx-5.50
Universal Extension type.
Prompted only if TYPE = UEXT.
Mobile Extension Line
Telephony Services
Fixed Mobile Convergence Line (reserved for future use)
Nortel SIP Line basic-5.50
mobx-5.50
tlsv-5.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 217
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
Prompt Response
SIP3
SIPL
Comment
Third Party SIP line
SIP Lines client
V25
VLL
VMB
VMB_COS
VSIT
WIRE
XLST
XPLN
ZONE
(NO) YES
(OFF) ON
NEW
CHG
OUT
0-127
(NO) YES
(OFF)
ON
(0)-254 xx
0–255 0–
8000
Pack/Rel
sip_lines-6.0
0
Note:
Universal Extension type cannot be changed on a Universal Extension. The
Universal Extension must be removed
(OUT) and configured again (NEW) to change the Universal Extension type.
V.25 bis option, synchronous mode only.
Virtual Leased Line
Voice Mailbox
Add Voice Mailbox
Change Voice Mailbox
Remove Voice Mailbox
This prompt appears with Voice Mailbox
Administration (VMBA) package 246.
arie-18 arie-14 vmba-19
Voice Mailbox Class of Service
Valid range
Visitor vmba-19
MSMN-370
Wire test. Prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422. dac-16
Wire test disabled
System automatically tests wiring/cabling when DAC installed.
Pretranslation group associated with this station.
Expected name length pre-8 cpnd-19
Zone Number to which the IP Phone belongs basic-25 basic-7.00
The zone prompt applies only when the IP
Phone type is 2001, 2002, 2004, and 2050.
Zone number is not checked against Overlay
117.
218 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response Comment
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 219
LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration
220 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 11: LD 12: Attendant Consoles
This program allows data blocks for attendant consoles to be created or modified.
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:
>ld 12 ATT000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx TNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx
TOT: xxxxx ATTENDANT CONSOLES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx
If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License.
Prompts and responses
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
Response
aaa a...a
l s c u
Comment
Request (aaa = NEW, CHG, END, MOV, OUT)
Type of data block (a...a = 2250, or PWR)
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)
CTYP
CDEN
SETN
CDEN
TOTN
CUST l s c u xx
NUMZONE 0-1023
ANUM
(XDLC) EDLC Card type aa Card Density (aa = SD or DD) l s c u aa
Second Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)
Card Density of Second Terminal Number (aa = SD or DD)
1-63
To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)
Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Attendant Number
IADN
ERL
ALPD
DLEN xxxx
(0)-65535
(NO) YES xx
Individual Attendant DN for this console
Current ERL
Alphanumeric Display
Display Length (aa = (8) or 16)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 221
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
CPND
- DNDI
LANG
EBLF
SGRP
PRES
QTHM
- QDIS
ICP
- ICT
AADN
DNAN
Prompt
SSU
ICDR
- ABAN
DAPC
KEY
Response
yyyy
Comment
System Speed Call User list number
(ICDD) ICDA Internal Call Detail Recording (Denied) Allowed
(ABDD) ABDA Abandoned call record and time to answer (Denied)
Allowed
(CNDD) CNDA Call Party Name Display feature (Denied) Allowed
(DNDD) DNDA Dialed Name Display (Denied) Allowed
(00)-15
(BLFD) BLFA
Language to download to M2250 on Sysload
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (Denied) Allowed
(0)-999
0-19
(NO) YES
0-3 0-19
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
ICI keys to have Presentation Status
Queue Thermometer equipped
Queue Thermometer Display position, and ICI key number
(NO) YES
0-<NIPN>
Intercept Computer available
Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number xxxx Attendant Alternate Answering DN
(DNAA) DNAD (ANI DN used for 3WT ANI messages) or Outgoing CDTI2/
CSDTI2 route ANDN is used as DN in ANI messages
(DAPA) DAPD Dial Access Prefix on Console xx aaa yyyy Key (KEY responses begin on xx aaa yyyy)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AADN
ABAN
Response
x...x
Comment
Attendant Alternate Answering DN
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The DN must be a valid station DN or ACD DN. This prompt appears with Attendant Alternative
Answering (AAA) package 174.
Pack/Rel
aaa-15
(ABDD) Abandoned call record and time to answer
Denied fcdr-18
222 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
ALPD
ANUM
CDEN
CPND
CTYP
CUST
DAPC
Alphabetical list of prompts
Response
ABDA
Comment
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Allowed
ABDA generates a B-Record in CDR reports. Refer to the Call Detail Reporting
NTP for more information. ABAN appears with New Format Call Detail Recording
(FCDR) package 234.
Pack/Rel
(NO)
Yes
1-63
SD
DD
Alphanumeric Display
QCW3 Attendant Console
QCW4 Attendant Console
This prompt appears when TYPE = ATT.
Attendant Number basic-12 basic-1
Single Card Density
Double Card Density
If the loop is a single density loop, the default is single density. If the loop is a double density, the default is double density. If the loop is a quad density, there is no default.
This prompt appears when TYPE = ATT or
1250 and the loop is a single or double density.
basic-7
(CNDD) Call Party Name Display feature Denied cpnd-12
CNDA Call Party Name Display feature Allowed
(XDLC)
EDLC
Prompted when TYPE = 2250 and has
Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 and OPT = IDP in LD 15.
Card type is 16 port DLC Card type is 24 port DLCVCE/DTA basic-25 xx
Note:
EDLC not supported on Small Systems and CS 1000S.
Customer number associated with this set basic-1
Customer number is defined in LD 15.
(DAPA)
Dial Access Prefix on Console
Display Access Prefix Allowed isdn-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 223
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
Prompt
DLEN
DNAN
DNDI
EBLF
ERL
IADN
ICDR
Response
DAPD
Comment
Display Access Prefix Denied
(8)
16
Display Length
QCW2 Attendant Console
QCW3 or QCW4 Attendant Console
Prompted when TYPE = ATT. DLEN applies for only a QCW type console.
Pack/Rel
basic-1
(DNAA) ANI DN is used as the Customer Listed
Directory Number 0 (as defined in LD 15).
DNAD Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route ANDN is used as DN in ANI messages.
Prompted with Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIST) package 221.
cist-21
(DNDD) Dialed Name Display Denied
DNDA Dialed Name Display Allowed
Prompted if TYPE is 2250 and CPND =
CNDA.
(BLFD)
BLFA
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Denied
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Allowed
Prompted when TYPE = 2250 and OPT =
IBL or ILF in LD 15.
cpnd-13 basic-15
<CR>
Current Emergency Response Locator
Enter no value to make this TN Auto
Update.
0-65535 Enter a value to statically configure this TN
(Manual Update).
X Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.
basic-5.00
xxxx
(ICDD)
ICDA
Individual Attendant DN for this console.
The Individual Attendant DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with 'X' to delete an existing
IADN.
basic- 23
Internal Call Detail Recording Denied
Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed icdr-10
224 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
ICP
ICT
KEY
Alphabetical list of prompts
Response Comment
ICDA generates an L-Record in CDR reports. Refer to the Call Detail Reporting
NTP for more information. ICDR is prompted with Internal Call Detail
Recording (ICDR) package 108.
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES Intercept Computer available
Prompted when:
1. Intercept Computer Interface (ICP) package 143 is equipped
2. LD 17 ADAN USER is set for ICP
3. LD 15 prompt ICP = YES icp-16
0-<NIPN> Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number
Number of Intercept Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.
icp-16 xx aaa yyyy
Console Key. Where:
• xx = key number 0-19 for M2250 consoles
• aaa = key name or function
• yyyy = additional information required for the key basic-1 xx ADL yy z...z
Autodial key. Where:
• xx = key number
• yy = ADL DN, maximum length is 31 digits.
• z...z = actual Autodial DN is optional basic-1 xx AUTO yyy...y
Direct Autoline DN, where: xx = Key number (0 - 19) yyy....y = Autoline DN. The Autoline DN can be 1 - 31 digits.
basic- 23 xx AWU Automatic Wake Up key (cannot be key 0 or 1) awu-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 225
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
Prompt Response
01 BIN
Comment
Allow Barge-In on key 01.
Pack/Rel
basic-1
Allow both Barge-In and Attendant Monitor on key 01 if China Attendant Monitor
Package (CHINA) package 285 is equipped. Must have OPT = AMA in
LD15.
china-21 xx BKI Break-In key
00 BVR Allow Busy Verify on key 0.
bki-1 basic-1
Allow both Busy Verify and Attendant
Monitor on key 00 if China Attendant
Monitor Package (CHINA) package 285 is equipped. Must have OPT = AMA in
LD15.
china-21 xx CHG Charge account key xx COS Controlled Class of Service key xx CPN Calling Party Number key xx DCW Display Call Waiting key xx DDL xx DDT xx DPD xx DPS
Do Not Disturb Individual key
Display Date key
Display Destination key
Display Source key fca-1 eccs-15 cab-1 basic-1 dndi-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 xx DRC DID Route Control key xx DTM Display Time key xx EES basic-1 basic-1
End-to-End Signaling key (cannot be key 0 or 1) basic-1 xx FLH xx FOV
DSN Flash key
DSN Flash Override key xx GND yy Group Do Not Disturb key Where: yy = group number = 0-99 atvn atvn dngd-1
226 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
Alphabetical list of prompts
Response
xx IMM
Comment
DSN Immedicate key xx LTA Low Tape Alarm key for mini CDR xx MCK Message Cancellation key
Turns off indication at a telephone.
Pack/Rel
cdr-8 mwc-1 xx MDT Maintain Change/Display Date key xx MIK Message Indication key
Turns on indication at a telephone.
xx MTM xx MTR xx NAS xx NUL xx PAG yyyy
Maintain Change/Display Time key
Meter key tad-1 mwc-1 tad-1 mr-10
Network Attendant Service key nas-20
Remove feature or function from key
Paging key Where: yyyy = Route Access
Code. This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The route must be defined in LD 16.
basic-1 basic-1 xx PRG Attendant Administration Program key xx PRK Call Park key xx PRY xx RDL
DSN Priority key
Redial stored number aa-1 cprk-2 atvn basic-1 xx RFW Attendant Remote Call Forward key xx RPAG yyyy
Radio Paging key Where: yyyy = Route
Access Code Coordinated Dialing Plan
(CDP), Trunk Steering Codes (TSC) and
Distant Steering Codes (DSC) can be entered against yyyy.
xx RTC arfw-20 rpa-15
Routing Controls key This key activates the
NCOS map defined in LD 86. Must have bars-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 227
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
Prompt
LANG
Response Comment
Network Class of Service (NCOS) package
32.
Pack/Rel
sacp-20 xx SACP Semi-Automatic Camp-On key
Must have Semi-Automatic Camp-On
(SACP) package 181.
xx SCC yyyy
Speed Call Controller key Where: yyyy = list number, 0-8190 optf-1 xx SECL Series Call key
Must have Series Call (SECL) package 191 secl-15 xx SSC yyyy
System Speed Call controller key Where: yyyy = list number, 0-4095 ssc-2 xxTHF xx TRC
(00)-15
Trunk Switch Hook Flash key
Malicious Call Trace key
Must have Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107.
Language to download to M2250 on
Sysload Language choices:
• (00) - English
• 01 - French
• 02 - Spanish
• 03 - German
• 04 - Italian
• 05 - Norwegian
• 06 - Galic
• 07 - Turkish
• 08 - Katakana
• 09 - People's Republic of China
• 10 - Taiwan
• 11 - Korean
• 12 - Polish thf-20 mct-10 basic-1
228 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
NUMZON
E
PRES
QDIS
QTHM
REQ
Alphabetical list of prompts
Response Comment
• 13 - Czech/Slovak
• 14 - Hungarian
• 15 - No language assigned
0-1023 Numbering zone
Pack/Rel
zbd-6.00
0-19 ICI keys to have Presentation Status
Up to 20 fields can be input, fields must be separated by a space.
coop-14
0-3 0-19 Queue Thermometer Display position, and
ICI key number coop-14
0-3 REST Queue Thermometer Display position, all
ICI keys that are not displayed on any other displays for the Queue Thermometer
0-3 NUL Queue Thermometer Display position, no
ICI key assigned
<CR> Stop the repetition of this prompt
(NO) YES Queue Thermometer equipped
Prompted with Console Operations
(COOP) package 169.
coop-14
CHG
END
MOV
Request
Change existing data
Exit overlay program
Move from one TN to another. CAUTION:
There is a possibility of data corruption when consoles are moved using this response.
Trunk and Attendant Consoles cannot be moved across loops or superloops.
Console data must be deleted "Out data" and reentered in the new location.
basic-1 basic-25.4
Note:
Superloops on an Small System are as follows: internal superloops in a 2 cabinet Option11C system are (4 slots per Sloop): slots 1- 4 5 - 8 9 - 12 13 -
16 17 -
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 229
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
Prompt
SETN
SGRP
SSU
TN
Response
NEW
Comment
20|--------------------------------|---------------
----------------| cabinet 0 cabinet
1
Add new data to the system
Pack/Rel
l s c u c u
(0)-999 yyyy l s c u
Second Terminal Number
Large System TN format, Where: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
Format for CS 1000E, Where: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
Small System and CS 1000S format
SETN must have same loop, shelf and card as the primary TN if TYPE = 2250. This cannot be a phantom loop.
basic-1 basic-4.00
sar-20 Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR)
Group number
Prompted with SAR package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.
System Speed Call User list number
Where: yyyy = 0-4095 ssc-2
Terminal Number.
The TN defines the location of the console.
For Meridian: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
The range values are as follows:
Where l =
• 0 - 159: loops, superloops must be multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0
• 0 - 255: loops, Option 81C
Where s =
• 0 - 3: IPE shelves on loops defined as
TERM in LD 17
• 0 - 1: IPE shelves on loops defined as
TERD in LD 17 and superloops
• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined as TERQ in
LD 17 basic-1
Where c =
230 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
TOTN
Alphabetical list of prompts
Response Comment
• 1 - 10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops
• 0 - 15: IPE cards of superloops
Where u =
• 0 - 3: single density units
• 0 - 7: double density units
• 0 - 7: integrated services digital line(ISDLC) cards
• 0 - 15: digital line cards (DLC)
Pack/Rel
l s c u c u l s c u l s c u c u c u
Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, -
252: superloop number in multiples of 4
Where s =
• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop
• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop
Where c =
• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop
• 1-10: cabinet on superloop
• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop
Where u = 0-31 basic-4.00
basic-6.00
basic-5.00
basic-6.00
For Small System: c u = card, unit
• c = 1 - 50
• u = 0 - 15 basic-16
To Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ
= MOV. TOTN cannot be a phantom loop.
Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small
System Model sets.
Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit basic-1 basic-4.00
basic-16 basic-1.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 231
LD 12: Attendant Consoles
Prompt
TYPE
ZONE
Response
c u
Comment
Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit
2250
Pack/Rel
basic-4.00
Type of data block
M2250 Console data block
M2250 requires an ISDLC Card or a Digital
Line Card.
basic-1
3260
PWR
0-8000
IP Attendant Console 3260
Power data block
TN used for power or Attendant
Supervisory Module (ASM). Third and fourth TNs used for power, or third TN for
ASM and fourth and fifth TNs used for power.
Zone of the IP Attendant Console 3260 basic-7.00
basic-7.00
232 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 12: LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone
Detectors, Multifrequency
Senders and Receivers
This program enables the administrator to create or modify data blocks for the following:
• Digitone Receivers (DTR)
• SL-1 Tone Detectors (TDET)
• Multifrequency Receivers (MFR)
• Dial Tone Detectors (DTD)
• Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) Senders/Receivers
• 2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signalling (MFK5)
• 2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling (MFK6)
• Extended Dial Tone Detector/Digitone Receivers (XTD)
• Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Senders/Receivers
• Extended CLASS Modem Card (XCMC)
These cards are used by 2500-type telephones and trunks that send DTMF tones to the system, and by
MF trunks to send MF tones to the system. All 2500 sets and some trunks must have Class of Service
(CLS) defined as Digitone (DTN). MF reception is available to QPC916 cards only.
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:
DTR000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx
If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License.
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
REQ: aaa
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, MOV, NEW, or OUT)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 233
LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers
Prompt
TYPE:
TN
POLR
XTDT
- DTO
Response
a...a
l s c u a...a
Comment
Type of data block (a...a = DTD, DTR, MFC, MFE, MFK5, MFK6,
MFR, TDET, CMODCMOD or XTD)
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Polarity of LED messages for DTD (a...a = (NORM) or REV)
(0)-7 Extended Tone Detector Table number
(NO) YES Dial Tone Detection Only
CDEN
TOTN aa l s c u
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, or 4D)
To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CDEN
SD
DD
4D
<CR>
Card Density
Comment
Enter SD if this unit is on a single density circuit card. The card density cannot be changed from DD to SD if more than one unit is assigned.
Enter DD if this unit is on a double density circuit card. DD is not allowed if the network loop is not configured for double density
Enter 4D if this unit is on a quadruple density circuit card. 4D is not allowed if the network loop is not configured for quadruple density
If REQ = NEW and TYPE = DTR then CDEN is set to the default density as specified in the configuration record.
DTO
(NO)
YES
Dial Tone Detection Only
Do not disable DTR Detection
Disable DTR detection, only perform dial tone detection.
Prompted when TYPE = XTD
Pack/Rel
basic-1 dtd-10
234 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response
POLR
Comment
Polarity of LED messages
(NORM) Normal
REV Reversed
REQ
CHG
END
MOV
NEW
OUT
Request
Change existing data
Exit overlay program
Move Digitone Receiver, Tone
Detectors, MF Senders and
Receivers from one TN to another
CAUTION: There is a possibility of data corruption when Digitone
Receivers are moved using this response.
MOV command not supported due to complexity of restrictions and the risk of data corruption if restrictions not adhered to. Limited usefulness.
Add new data to the system
Remove information from data block
TN l s c u
Terminal Number
For Meridian: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
The range values are as follows:
Where l =
0 - 159: loops, superloops must be multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0
0 - 255: loops, Systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
Where s =
0 - 3: IPE shelves on loops defined as TERM in LD 17
0 - 1: IPE shelves on loops defined as TERD in LD 17 and superloops
0: IPE shelf on loops defined as
TERQ in LD 17
Where c =
1 - 10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
dtd-10 basic-1 basic-25.4
basic-1 fnf-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 235
LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers
Prompt Response
l s c u
Comment
Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0,
4, 8, - 252: superloop number in multiples of 4
Where s =
• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop
• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop
Where c = c u
• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop
• 1-10: cabinet on superloop
• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop
Where u = 0-31
For Small System: c u = card, unit
The range values are: c = 1-50 u = 0-7 u = 8-11 when TYPE = MFR, MFC,
MFE, MFK5, MFK6 for Card 0
Note that units 0-7 must be of one type. Units 8-15 must also be of one type. The new MFC/MFE/MFK5/
MFK6 units on Card 0 must be enabled using the ENLX 0 command in LD 34.
TOTN l s c u
TYPE l s c u c u cu c u
To Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV.
Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit
Format for Small System, where: c u
= card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small System Model sets.
Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit
Format for MG 1000B, and MG
1000T, where: c = card and u = unit
Type of data block
Pack/Rel
basic-4.00
basic-6.00
basic-5.00
basic-6.00
basic-1 basic-4.00
basic-16 basic-1.0
basic-4.00
basic-1
236 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response
CMOD
Comment
CLASS modem unit.
A CLASS modem unit is configured on the XCMC card. A maximum of
32 units can be configured on the
XCMC card.
DTD
DTR
MFC
MFE
MFK5
MFK6
MFR
Dial Tone Detector data block
Digitone Receiver data block
Multifrequency Compelled sender/ receiver data block
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
(MFC) package 128 is required.
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel sender/receiver data block.
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
(MFE) package 135 is required.
2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
Multifrequency Receiver data block
MFR applies to Feature Group D. Up to 255 MF Receivers can be defined.
Only units 0 and 1 can be used.
Feature Group D (FGD) package
158 is required.
XTDT
TDET
XTD
(0)-7
Tone Detector data block (Not supported on Small System)
Extended Dial Tone Detector and
Digitone Receiver data block
Extended Tone Detector Table number
If a table other than 0 is entered, it must exist in LD 97.
This prompt appears when TYPE =
XTD.
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
cname-23 cnumb-23 mfe-10 kd3-20 kd3-20 tdet-7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 237
LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers
238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 13: LD 14: Trunk Data Block
This program allows data blocks for trunks to be created or modified.
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:
>ld 14
TRK000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS AVAIL: (U/
P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx RAN CON AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx MUS
CON AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx AST SET AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx
ITG ISDN TRUNKS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xxxx TOT: xxxx TRADITIONAL TRUNKS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx
TOT: xxxx
If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License. The header includes Recorded Announcement
Broadcast, Music Broadcast connections and Associated trunk License information.
After making any changes to the trunk data block, IPE trunk cards must be downloaded with ENLC l s c command in LD 32.
The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL package or PLDN package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk (**) as a valid input to a number of prompts, usually the asterisk is part of a dialed number. Without this package, for example, inputting one asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt, and two asterisks causes a restart of the Overlay at REQ.
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
REQ a...a
TYPE a...a
T_TN
- IPRI l ch l ch
- OPRI l ch
MODL -127
TN
DES l s c u x...x
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, MOV, LCHG, NEW x, or OUT x)
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on ADM)
Loop number and channel for tandem PRI connection
Loop number and channel for incoming PRI channel
Loop number and channel for outgoing PRI channel
Model number for Small System and CS 1000S
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on TN)
Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 239
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
CDEN
XTRK
MAXU
Response
aa a...a
1 - 32
Comment
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Extended Trunk (a...a = DB32, DB96, EXUT, ITG1, ITG2, ITG8,
ITGP, MC8, MC32, M32S, XCOT, XDID, XEM, XFEM, or XUT)
Maximum number of IP units supported (ITG card version dependant)
IPTN
ZONE
(NO) YES ITG card Physical TN.
0–255 0–
8000
Zone number
FWTM (NO) YES Firmware Timing for trunk hook flash
SXS (NO) YES Step-by-step CO trunk
SICA (1)-16
PDCA (1)-16
PCML aa
TOTN l s c u
Signaling Category table number
Pad Category table number for PRI2,DTI2,JDM,PRI,DTI trunks
Pulse Code Modulation Law (aa = MU or A)
TO Terminal Number
DDSL
DTSL
SIGL
CUST
0-15
0-159 aaa xx
Digital DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link (NT hardware)
Digital Trunk Signaling Link (GPT hardware)
Level 3 Signaling
Customer number associated with this trunk
SFEX
IAPG
(NO) YES Special digital FEX trunk
(0)-15 Event Group for USM message
NCOS xx
RTMB xxx xxx
Network Class of Service group
Route number, Member number
CONN
INC
(4)-48 Maximum number of broadcast connections allowed for this trunk.
(YES) NO Increasing channel numbers and decreasing member numbers
PRIO
CHID aaa xxxx
Priority designation (aaa = (XHP) or YLP)
Channel ID for this trunk.
SREF 1-9999999 ISDN Semi Permanent Connection (ISPC) Reference Number
SDCH (NO) YES Is the ISPC link used by a D-channel?
SMAS (NO) YES Is this ISPC acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link?
MTN l s c u Modem Terminal Number
NMUS (NO) YES Network Music
240 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
PRDN xxxx
CMF
RLDN
(NO) YES xxxx
Comment
Private Line Directory Number
Call Modification Features restriction
Release Link Trunk Directory Number
NGRP (0)-9
NITE xxxx
ATDN xxxx
MNDN xxxx
Night Service Group number
Night Service directory number
Auto Terminate DN
Manual Directory Number
TGAR
SIGL
XDIC
EMTY
CPAD xx aaa aaa aaa a...a
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Trunk Signaling (SIGL responses begin on SIGL)
Outpulsing for DIC trunks (aaa = (MUT) or NOR)
E & M Type (aaa = (TY2), TY1, or BPO) a...a
x...x
a...a
Carrier Pad out or Carrier Pad in for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks
(a...a = (COUT) or CIN)
Loop Dial Outpulsing (a...a = (LOOP) or BOP) LDOP
TIMP
BIMP
STRO a...a
Termination Impedance
Balance Impedance (a...a = (3COM), 600, 900, or 3CM2)
AUTO_BIMP
(NO) YES Automatic Balance Impedance Option
STRI a...a
Start arrangement Incoming (a...a = DDL, IMM, MWNK, OWK,
PTSD, SACK, RT, or WNK)
Start arrangement Outgoing (a...a = DDL, IMM, MWNK, OWK,
PTSD, SACK, RT, or WNK)
SUPN (NO) YES Answer and disconnect Supervision required
- STYP a...a
Supervision Type (a...a = ARF, BAT, BST, BTS, JDID, JCO, LBS,
PIP, and PSP)
AST
SEIZ
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Associated trunk for CTI trunk Monitoring and Control
Automatic Guard Detection for outgoing trunk
PPID
BTID
CLS
MFL
(0)-15
(0)-15 a...a
(0)-15
Periodic Pulse Metering country ID
Busy Tone country ID
Class of Service (CLS responses begin on )
Multifrequency digit level
MFLI (0) 1 Multifrequency transmit level identifier
MFPD (NO) YES Multifrequency PAD
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 241
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt Response
BTDT (0)-7
FCAR
TKID
(NO) YES nnnnnnn
Busy Tone Detection Table
Forced Charge Account
Trunk Identifier
Comment
DTCR
CFLP
(NO) YES Digit Collection Ready
0-159 Music Conference Loop
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AST
ATDN
AUTO_BIMP
BIMP
Response Comment
(NO) YES Associated trunk for CTI trunk Monitoring and
Control x...x
Pack/Rel
basic-23
Auto Terminate DN
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.
If a DNIS route is defined, then the response can only be an ACD DN. If no DN is assigned, the NITE number of the trunk is used.
Must have AUTO = YES in LD 16. Not prompted for Option 11C models.
disa-1 btd-23
(NO) YES Enable Automatic Balance Impedance Option.
Prompted only for EXUT type trunks. Not supported on dual Busy Tone Detection card
(NT5D31).
(3COM) 3-component Complex Impedance tip/ xpe-19
600
900
3CM2
Not prompted for RAN which exclusively uses 600
Not prompted for XEM trunks
For XUT trunks, the Termination Impedance
(TIMP) must be compatible with the Balance
Impedance (BIMP). See prompt TIMP for allowed combinations of BIMP/TIMP.
When using the Enhanced Universal Trunk card only 600 or 900 ¾ terminating impedance is allowed. However, more Terminating and Balance
Impedance (BIMP) combinations are available.
242 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
BTDT
BTID
CDEN
CFLP
CHID
SD
DD
4D
8D
Response Comment
In the case of AUTO_BIMP, this BIMP value is used as default value if an optimum AUTO_BIMP is not found or if the AUTO_BIMP test is not complete.
The Terminating and Balance Impedance options are listed below.
TIMP BIMP
600 600 600 3COM 900 3COM
900 900 900 3CM2 600 3CM2
Pack/Rel
btd-23
(0)-7 xxxx
Busy Tone Detection Table
The BTD table must be defined in LD 97. BTDT is mutually exclusive with BTID.
btd-21
Busy Tone country ID
This must be configured for a BTS supervised
XCOT trunk. One BTID type per card. Trunks must be removed from card to change BTID. BTDT is mutually exclusive with BTDT.
Busy Tone ID Recommended Country
0-2 Reserved for future use
3 Germany, Ireland
4 Switzerland 5 Denmark
6 Norway, Kuwait, Chili, Venezuela,
Indonesia, Thailand, Korea 7 Holland
8 Australia, Mexico
9 Ireland 10 Taiwan,
Brazil, Tortola, Mexico 11 Singapore
12 Argentina, Italy
13 Lebanon, Italy 14 Turkey
15 Reserved for future use btd-21
0-159
1-382
Card Density
Single Density
Double Density
Quad Density for XCOT only
Octal Density for XCOT only and there is no default.
Not prompted for superloops or Small System and
CS 1000S Models.
basic-7
Music Conference Loop
Channel ID for this trunk
Prompted when the Route specified has ISL enabled in LD 16. The number of ISL trunks allowed for the D-channel is specified in LD 17.
mus-1 isl-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 243
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
CIST
CLS
Response
1-4300
Comment
A different channel ID is requested for each
Phantom TN which is used for ISPC links. The same channel ID must be configured for the same
ISPC reference number on both PBXs linked by the connection.
For CS 1000 Release 4.0
Pack/Rel
basic-4.0
0
(NO)
YES
Incoming CIS three wire trunk is not a toll trunk cist-21
Incoming CIS three wire trunk is a toll trunk
CIST appears for trunks when SIGL = CIS. Only prompted for incoming route.
(APN)
APY
(BARD)
BARA
(CLID)
CLIA
CMFS
Class of Service options for trunks. Defaults are shown in parentheses. Enter each non-default option required, followed by a space.
ACD Priority not required
ACD Priority required
Applies only to COT, WAT, DID and FEX trunks.
basic-1 bacd-1
Barring Denied
Barring Allowed basic-7
(CND)
CNA
(CORX)
CORP
Calling Line Identification Denied
Calling Line Identification Allowed acli-24
CMFS trunk register signaling means that the CIS
MF Shuttle protocol is supported by the trunk.
CMFS can be defined only for trunks on CDTI2/
CSDTI2 with "CISFW=MFS" and only if both the
MFS and CIST Packages are equipped.
cismfs-23
Calling party Denied
Calling party Allowed
Allowed for L1 Multifrequency Compelled
Signaling and R2 MFC trunks. Automatic Number
Identification is denied for an Outgoing Loop Start
(LOP) Central Office Trunk (COT).
Must have Commonwealth of Independent States
(CIST) package 221 or Multifrequency Compelled
Signaling (MFC) package 128.
mfc-21
Central Office Ringback not provided by SL-1
Central Office Ringback provided by SL-1 supp-14
244 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(DIP)
DPDT
DTDP
DIPF
Comment Pack/Rel
Dial Pulse
Dial Pulse Digitone (incoming dial pulse - outgoing digitone) basic-21 basic-24
Digitone Dial Pulse (incoming digitone - outgoing dial pulse)
DIPF trunk register signaling requires that DP digit collection be performed by firmware. Applies to
CDTI2 or CSDTI2.
basic-24
DTN
MFC
MFE
MFK
MFR
Digitone
R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling. MFC can be configured on 1.5 DTI routes.
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
Multifrequency Signaling for KD3
Multifrequency Receiver for Feature Group D basic-20
Mixed Signaling (MFC/DTMF) MFX
(DRPD)
DRPA
(ECD)
ECA
DTR PAD value Denied
DTR PAD value Allowed
Can only be configured for 2.0 Mb/s DID with DTI2 enabled.
dti2-10
Echo Canceling Denied
Echo Canceling Allowed
ECA indicates Echo suppression equipment is connected to trunk.
basic-1
(HKD)
HKA
(LNT)
JDID
JCO
Hong Kong DTI Denied
Hong Kong DTI Allowed
May only be used with DTI TNs with DTN CLS on
DID or TIE routes.
basic-6
Loop Start Non-supervisory Trunk
Japan DID (JDID not valid for XCOT trunks)
Japan CO capabilities allowed. JCO should only be accepted with SIGL = LOP. Japan PSTN trunks, (QPC686), not allowed for XUT/XEM.
Answer NO to prompt SUPN for an unsupervised trunk, instead of using LNT. For supervised trunks xutj-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 245
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt Response Comment
answer YES to SUPN then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt STYP.
Pack/Rel
(LPR)
HPR
(MID)
MIA
(MSNV)
MSBT
(NHFD)
NHFA
(P10)
P12
P20
(PIP)
PSP
Low Priority
High Priority
DID and TIE trunks should use HPR and be installed in card slot 1. Superloops do not require any trunks assigned as high priority.
basic-1
Manual Incoming Denied
Manual Incoming Allowed
Media Security Never
Media Security Best Effort
(Deny) Network Hook Flash
Allow Network Hook Flash
Trunk Hook Switch Flash feature over 911P trunks.
Make-break ratio for dial pulse dialing
10 pulses per second
(see explanation below)
20 pulses per second
P12 option:
• P10 = primary 10 pps make-break ratio of 50%
• P12 = secondary 10 pps make-break ratio of
50% basic-1 basic-5.0
0 basic-5.0
0 basic-21
All three make-break ratios can be set for XUT,
XUTJ and XEM trunks. See prompts P10R, P12R and P20R in LD 97.
Use P10 for PPS1 and P12 for PPS2 XUT/XEM trunks.
For Small System, P10 and P12 is also used for
DTI/DTI2 trunks. P12 applies only to XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks.
Polarity Insensitive card. (PIP is used for QPC330 and QPC331 packs)
Polarity Sensitive card (use PSP for QPC218,
QPC219 and QPC295 packs). When using PSP in
North America, the trunk route should have message registration set to reverse battery; the LD
16 prompt MR should be set to RVB.
basic-10
246 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
BST
Comment
Battery Supervised card (SIGL = LOP is required)
For loop start trunks with Answer Supervision in
U.S., the NT8D14 Universal Trunk does not provide Message Registration, PPM or PIP operation.
This can be used for Answer Supervision on
Ground Start trunks.
Not valid for XCOT trunks.
Pack/Rel
basic-4
SHL
LOL
Short line Class of Service
Long line Class of Service
SHL replaces NTC and LOL replaces TRC and
VNL for XDID and XCOT trunks.
basic-20
(SPCD)
SPCA
MIA
(THFD)
THFA
Analog Semi-Permanent Connections Denied
Analog Semi-Permanent Connections Allowed
Manual Incoming Allowed basic-24
(TRC)
NTC
VNL
Centrex Switchhook Flash Denied
Centrex Switchhook Flash Allowed basic-14
Transmission Class of Service
Transmission Compensated
Non-Transmission Compensated
Via Net Loss
The default depends on the signaling type (SIGL)
• DX2 = VNL
• DX4 = VNL
• EAM = VNL
• EM4 = VNL
• GRD = NTC
• LDR = NTC
• LOP = NTC
• OAD = NTC tip-19
VNL Class of Service is allowed with Universal
Trunk Tie trunks.
For XDID and XCOT cards:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 247
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
UNR
Response Comment
• NTC is replaced by SHL
• TRC and VNL are replaced by LOL
Existing databases is converted automatically. For
EM4 and WR4, AC15 = 2280 Hz. on XFEM trunks:
• NTC and VNL are equivalent to TIE designation
• TRC is equivalent to LINK designation
• TIE = PBX-PBX connections via leased line
• LINK = PBX-PBX connections on-premises
Pack/Rel
(CTD)
(WTA)
WTD
(XARF)
ARF
(XBAT)
BAT
(XBTS)
Conditionally Toll Denied. CTD is the default for trunk types: TIE, CSA, ATVN, FGD, and IDA
Conditionally Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Unrestricted. Only UNR is allowed for CO, FX and
WATS trunks. UNR is the default for all trunk types except: TIE, CSA, ATVN, FGD, and IDA
Warning Tone Allowed
Warning Tone Denied basic-7
ARF Supervised COT denied
ARF Supervised COT allowed
Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL
= LOP. Answer YES to prompt SUPN then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt
STYP.
basic-7
Battery Supervised COT denied
Battery Supervised COT allowed
Answer YES to prompt SUPN then enter the appropriate Supervision Type at prompt STYP.
Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL
= LOP.
basic-7
Busy Tone Supervised COT denied basic-7
248 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CMF
CONN
CPAD
CUST
DDSL
DES
DTCR
Response
BTS
Comment
Busy Tone Supervised COT allowed
Answer YES to prompt SUPN and then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt STYP.
Pack/Rel
(XLBS)
LBS
(XREP)
RVEP
(NO)
YES
(4)-48
Loop Break Supervised COT denied
Loop Break Supervised COT allowed
Answer YES to prompt SUPN and then enter the appropriate Supervision Type at prompt STYP.
Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL
= LOP.
basic-7 rpa-15 Reversed Ear Piece denied
Reversed Ear Piece allowed
The E-lead is reversed for a radio paging trunk
Call Modification
Call Modifications allowed
Modifications not allowed basic-1
(COUT)
CIN
Define the maximum number of broadcast connections allowed for this trunk.
ranbrd-23 ran-23
Carrier Pad Out for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks xpe-15
Carrier Pad In for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks
With CPAD = CIN, a 7 dB pad attenuates the trunk input and a 16 dB pad attenuates the trunk output.
xx
0-15 x...x
Customer number (defined in LD 15 and prompted when REQ = NEW) basic-1 basic-7 Digital DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link
DASS2/DPNSS D-channel
Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs (DES is an optional entry) basic-22
(NO) YES Digit Collection Ready
Send acknowledge when digit collection resources such as DTR, MFC, and S/R are ready and attached.
Prompted when TYPE = DID and CLS = DTN.
Prompted with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131. Prompted when basic-7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 249
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
IAPG
INC
Prompt
DTSL
EMTY
FCAR
FWTM
IPRI
IPTN
Response
0-159
Comment
the incoming trunk is analog, answer supervision is on, and EOS is set to BSY.
Digital Trunk Signaling Link
DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link
Not supported on Small System and CS 1000S
Pack/Rel
basic-7
(TY2)
TY1
BPO l ch
E & M Type
4-wire E&M Type 2
4-wire E&M Type 1
4 wire E&M British Post Office. (BPO is allowed if
TYPE = XFEM and SIGL = EAM or EM4)
Precede with X to delete xpe-15
X
(NO) YES Forced Charge Account
(NO) Firmware Timing for Trunk Hook Flash is not used by the card
YES Firmware timing for Trunk Hook Flash is used by the card
This prompt appears if Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290, Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107 or Trunk Hook Flash (THF) package
157 are enabled.
chg-1 ccb-21
(0)-15
(YES)
NO
Event Group for USM message
Increasing channel numbers and member numbers
Increasing channel numbers and decreasing member numbers basic-23 basic-7
Incoming PRI channel
This is the PRI channel through which the Meridian
1 gains access to the PSPDN. Where:
• Loop = PRI loop number
• Channel = PRI channel that holds the incoming nailed up connection (between 1-23) mph-19
(NO)
YES
ITG card Physical TN.
The Terminal Number is a trunk unit on ITG card.
The Terminal Number is used for concentration purpose.
IPTN is output only if XTRK is ITG1 or ITG2.
basic-25
250 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
LDOP
MAXU
MFL
MFLI
Response
(LOOP)
BOP
Comment Pack/Rel
Loop Dial Outpulsing
Loop outpulsing for Loop Dial Repeating signalling xpe-15
Battery Oupulsing for Loop Dial Repeating signalling
1-32
1-24
32
(0)-15
(0)
1
Maximum number of Internet Protocol (IP) units supported
Meridian Integrated IP Telephony Gateway (dual slot)
Meridian Integrated IP Telephony Gateway (single slot)
Maximum number of voice media channels supported
For CS 1000S itg- 25 basic-2
Multifrequency digit level. MFL is not prompted for
Option 11C.
Expanded from 0-7 to 0-15 for Meridian 1 for superloop only. Enter the MFC digit level required for signals to the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN).
Non-superloop codes and values:
Codes Level Values
(0) -5 dBm 1 -8 dBm 2 -9 dBm
3 -10 dBm 4 -11 dBm 5 -12 dBm 6 -13 dBm 7 -32 dBm basic-2
Superloop codes and values:
Codes Level Values
(0) -8 dBm 1 - 11 dBm 2 -
12 dBm 3 - 13 dBm 4 - 14 dBm
5 - 15 dBm 6 - 16 dBm 7 -
31 dBm 8 - 4 dBm 9 - 5 dBm
10 - 6 dBm 11 - 7 dBm 12 - 9 dBm 13 - 10 dBm 14 Spare
15 Spare
Multifrequency transmit level identifier. MFLI is prompted exclusively for the Small System. MFLI is prompted when CLS = MFC, MFE, or MFK.
opt11c-22
Use multifrequency transmit level as defined for
MFTL0 in LD 97.
Use multifrequency transmit levels defined for
MFTL1 in LD 97.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 251
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
MFPD
MNDN
MODL
NCOS
NGRP
NITE
NMUS
OPRI
PCML
Response Comment
(NO) YES Multifrequency PAD
MFPD is prompted if CLS = TLD, CUN or CTD, and if the trunk type is CSA or TIE. TLD is recommended. MFPD is not prompted if the route is 1.5 DTI and CLS= MFC.
Pack/Rel
basic-3 x...x
basic-1
1-127
Manual Directory Number
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. CLS should be MIA.
Model number for Small System
Model number for CS 1000S basic-14 basic-1
(0)-99
(0)-9 x...x
YES l ch
MU
A
Network Class of Service group
Night Service Group number
NGRP appears when ENS = YES in LD15. This prompt replaces the NITE prompt.
If ENS is changed from NO to YES while Night
Service is in effect, the system verifies that the
NITE number defined is a group number or a DN.
If a night DN or 0000 is defined, the existing NITE number is used.
ncos-1 basic-2
Night Service directory number
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to seven digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.
Night Service applies to trunks terminating at the attendant. This prompt takes precedence over the
NITE and NIT1-NIT4 prompts in LD 15.
If a DN is defined here, the call goes to this DN. If there is no DN here, the call goes to the defined
LD 15 NITE prompts. Precede with X to remove.
basic-1
Network Music
Outgoing PRI channel (the PRI channel through which the Meridian 1 gains access to the PSPDN)
Where: Loop = PRI loop number and Channel =
PRI channel that holds the outgoing nailed up connection (between 1-23).
basic-5.0
0 mph-19 dti 2-15 Pulse Code Modulation Law
Mu-law
A-law
252 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PDCA
PPID
PRDN
PRIO
REQ
Response Comment
PCML is not prompted for JDMI loops. Prompted if loop is PRI2, DTI2, or if loop is PRI/DTI and is equipped with International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway
(GPRI) package 167.
Pack/Rel
(1)-16 xx x...x
(XHP)
YLP
CHG
END
LCHG
MOV
Pad Category table number
The PAD table must be defined in LD 73 first.
dti 2-15
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) country ID
Must be configured if PPM is enabled. One PPID type per card. Trunks must be removed from card to change PPID.
PPMID Frequency Recommended Country
(0) 50 Hz UK 1 12 kHz France
2 50 Hz France 3 16 kHz
Germany, Turkey, Egypt, Venezuela, Indonesia,
Finland 4 12 kHz Switzerland, Ireland,
Portugal, Italy, Spain, Lebanon, Turkey 5 12 kHz Denmark 6 16 kHz Norway,
Belgium 7 50 Hz Holland 8
12 kHz/50 Hz Australia (two different packs)
9-15 -------- Reserved for future use
Private Line Directory Number
PRDN must be defined in LD 11. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
basic-7 basic-1 basic-7 Priority designation. Prompted if SIGL = DPN.
X High Priority
Y Low Priority
Used to determine which end has priority in a glare condition, where both sides seize the trunk at same time. XHP always has priority over YLP.
Request
Change existing data block
Exit overlay program
Print date and time that a trunk data block was last changed. The change can be the result of a NEW,
OUT, or CHG command.
basic-1
Move data block from one TN to another. Not valid for Small System and CS 1000S Models.MOV
cannot be used to move a Phantom TN.
MOV command cannot be used to move trunk data blocks.
basic-25
.4
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 253
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
RLDN
RTMB
SDCH
SEIZ
SFEX
SICA
Response
NEW x
OUT x
Comment
Add new data block to the system. Follow NEW with a value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive trunks.
You are not allowed to create more than one
Phantom TN at a time. When a value different than
1 is entered for the creation of a Phantom TN, it is simply ignored and only one TN is created.
Remove data block. Follow OUT with a value of
1-255 to remove that number of consecutive trunks.
Pack/Rel
x...x
Release Link trunk Directory Number
This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150.
cas-1
0-511
1-510
0-127
1-510
0-511
1-4000
0-127
1-4000
(NO)
YES
Route number and Member number
Large System
Note:
CS 1000 Release 6.5 Virtual Trunks are limited to 3700 for SIP and 2400 for H.323.
The ISPC link is not used by a D-channel
The ISPC link is used by a D-channel
(NO) YES Automatic Guard Detection for outgoing trunk basic-1 basic-24
Small System
B-Channel Signaling is output if CHTY = BCH in
LD 16. A/B Bit Signaling is output if CHTY = ABCH in LD 16.
To use the ISDN Semi Permanent Connection
(ISPC) link, this entry must be an ISL TIE route.
Large System and CS 1000E system basic-4.0
0
Small System, CS 1000S system, MG 1000B, and
MG 1000T basic-4.0
0 ispc-22 basic-2 dti-5 (NO) YES Special digital FEX trunk
This is used on Digital Trunk Interface (DTI).
(1)-16 Signaling Category table number
The Digital Signaling Category table must be defined first.
dti 2-15
254 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SIGL
SMAS
Response Comment
See ABCD in LD 73. Default is 16 if loop type =
JDMI.
ALS
APNS
CIS
Level 3 signaling
ALS signaling on COT trunk with ground start
Alternate Private Network Signaling System
CIS three wire trunk signaling for IPE.
Commonwealth of Independent States (CIST) package 221 is required.
DAS
DPN
DX2
DX4
EAM
EM4
GRD
LDC
Digital Access Signaling System Number 2. This is allowed if DASS2 package 124 is equipped and
PRIV = NO in DTSL data block in LD 74.
Digital Private Network Signaling System Number
1, allowed for DPNSS package 123.
2-wire duplex
4-wire duplex. The Enhanced Universal Trunk card uses DX4 signaling.
E&M 2-wire
E&M 4-wire
LDR
LGR
LOP
OAD
WR4
Ground start
Loop calling, Disconnect Clear.
Accepted when TYPE = COT and UK package is equipped.
Loop Dial Repeating
Loop calling, Guarded Release. Accepted when
TYPE = COT and UK package is equipped.
Loop start
Outgoing Automatic, incoming dial
AC15 = 2280 Hz, 4-wire
Pack/Rel
tip-21
(NO)
YES
This ISPC is not acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link
This ISPC is acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link
SMAS is prompted when SDCH =YES.
When the ISPC link is used to convey D-channel signaling, it is mandatory to have one side of the
ISPC link configured with SMAS=YES and the other side with SMAS=NO.
ispc-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 255
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
SREF
STRI
Response Comment
SMAS must be YES on the side of the ISPC link where the data interface is configured with the auto dialing capability.
Pack/Rel
1-9999999 ISDN Semi Permanent Connection (ISPC)
Reference Number
The ISPC reference number is defined by Telecom administration at the time of subscription. The response is limited to seven digits.
When REQ=NEW, the number given must be different than all the other ISPC reference numbers already associated with other Phantom trunk TNs.
DDL
IMM ispc-22
Start arrangement Incoming
Your response to STRI determines which type of signaling is used by the trunk to initiate digit sending or collection. Your STRI response should reflect the type of operation in use at the near end.
Delayed Dial
The terminating trunk returns an off-hook to the originating trunk, which is interpreted as an instruction not to send digits immediately. This delay allows the terminating end to find and attach digit collections equipment. When the equipment is attached, the terminating end returns on-hook which is interpreted as a signal to start sending digits.
For this application on incoming calls, the Meridian
PBX sends a non-programmable 256-384 ms pulse. For outgoing calls, the Meridian PBX expects a delay-dial pulse from the far end to terminate before sending digits. Some types of delay-dial operation can also be accommodated by the IMM option.
basic-5
Immediate
The terminating trunk is not expected to return a pulse telling the originating end to begin sending digits. In this application for incoming calls, the
Meridian 1 returns a 256-384 ms off-hook/on-hook wink to the far end. This wink accommodates certain types of delay-dial operation.
For outgoing calls, the Meridian 1 starts a 300 ms timer when the outgoing trunk is seized. Digits are sent out when an off-hook/on-hook wink returned from the far end ends, or when the 300 ms timer expires (whichever occurs first).
256 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
STRO
Response
MWNK
Comment
Modified Wink (MWNK) is printed automatically for
Taiwan R1 trunks.
Pack/Rel
twr1-24
OWK
PTSD
RT
Off-Hook Wink for RLR trunks equipped with signaling converter
This mode of operation is similar to wink except that the Meridian 1 waits one second after seizure before sending a wink start pulse. This arrangement applies only to release link remote trunks.
Proceed to Send for CEPT L1 signaling basic-20
WNK
SACK
Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.
RON/TRON start arrangement to be sent by the near end PABX upon reception of an Incoming
Seize
Wink or Fast Flash
The terminating trunk sends an off-hook/on-hook wink as in DDL operation. However, in WNK operation the pulse is interpreted as a signal that digit collection equipment has been attached. The pulse is expected to be of 140-290 ms duration.
For this application, the Meridian 1 first waits
128-256 ms after seizure and then returns a 256 ms pulse to the far end. After this, the Meridian 1 is ready to collect digits. On outgoing calls, the
Meridian 1 waits until the wink pulse is finished before sending digits.
basic-20
Seize Acknowledge for CEPT L1 signaling
Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.
Start arrangement Outgoing
Your response to STRO determines which type of signaling is used by the trunk to initiate digit sending or collection. Your STRO response should reflect the type of operation in use at the far end.
basic-20 basic-5
DDL
IMM
MWNK
OWK
PTSD
Delayed Dial
Immediate
Modified Wink (MWNK) is printed automatically for
Taiwan R1 trunks.
Off-Hook Wink for RLR trunks equipped with signaling converter
Proceed to Send for CEPT L1 signaling
Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.
twr1-24 xpe-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 257
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
STYP
Response
RT
Comment
RON/TRON start arrangement to be received by the near end PABX after an outgoing seize has been sent
SACK
WNK
Pack/Rel
xpe-20
Seize Acknowledge for CEPT L1 signaling
Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.
Wink or Fast Flash xpe-20
Supervision Type. STYP is prompted when SUPN
= YES.
For EPE equipment, only one response of PSP,
PIP or BST is accepted. For IPE equipment or with
XUT/EXUT, only one of BST, PIP, JDID, or JCO is accepted.
For XCOT, STYP accepts up to two responses.
The responses BAT, ARF and LBS are mutually exclusive. However, BTS can be used with any one of the aforementioned three responses.
basic-20
ARF
BAT
BST
(BTS)
(PSP)
JCO
When BTD and Japan packages are equipped,
BTS can be assigned to an XUT card. For Japan,
TYPE = COT, SIGL = LOP, SUPN = YES, STYP =
JCO BTS or TYPE = DID, SIGL = LOP, SUPN =
YES, STYP = JDID BTS.
ARF supervised trunks. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.
Battery Supervised COT. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.
Both Supervised Trunk
Incoming and Outgoing supervised LOP CO/FEX/
WATS trunk (QPC330/XUT/EXUT). BST and PIP are mutually exclusive.
Busy Tone Supervision. BTS is the default when
XTRK = XCOT. Must have XCOT LOP trunks. BTD package must be equipped. BTS can be configured with any one of PIP, BST, JCO or
JDID.
Polarity Sensitive Pack. PSP is the default when
SIGL = GRD.
Outgoing supervised LOP or GRD start CO/FEX/
WATS trunk (QPC218/XUT/EXUT)
Japan CO trunk.
Must have Japan Central Office Trunks (JPN) package 97 with LOP trunks (XUTJ). JCO and
BTS are no longer mutually exclusive.
258 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SUPN
SXS
T_TN
TGAR
TIMP
Response
(JDID)
Comment
Japan DID trunk.
JDID is the default when the trunk is a LOP DID trunk. Must have Japan Central Office Trunks
(JPN) package 97.
JDID is not automatically displayed.
(600)
900
1200
Pack/Rel
LBS
(PIP) l ch
Loop Break Supervision. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.
Polarity Insensitive Pack. PIP is the default when
SIGL = LOP.
Outgoing supervised Loop start CO/FEX/WATS trunk (QPC330/XUT/EXUT). PIP and BST are mutually exclusive.
(NO) YES Answer and disconnect supervision required
SUPN must = YES for a COT with Virtual Network
Service. For ground start trunks disconnect supervision is detected even if SUPN = NO.
The operation of answer supervision is affected if
Federal Communications Commission
Compliance for DID Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223 is equipped.
SUPN is automatically prompted YES for DID
LOP.
(NO) YES Step-by-step CO trunk
Only prompted for Universal Trunks XTRK or XUT when TYPE = CO. The central office reverses polarity on outgoing calls.
basic-1 xpe-15 mph-19
0-(1)-31
Tandem PRI connection. Where:
• Loop = PRI loop number
• Channel = PRI channel that holds the outgoing nailed up connection (between 1-23)
If the connection exists, both channels are displayed. Prompted if TYPE = TCON.
Trunk Group Access Restriction. The default of (1) automatically blocks direct access.
basic-1
Termination Impedance. Prompted if XTRK = XEM or XUT.
600 ohms tip/xpe-19
900 ohms
1200 ohms
Use 1200 ohms for RAN trunks and (600) or 900 for all others.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 259
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
TN
Prompt
TKID
Response Comment
When using the Enhanced Universal Trunk card only 600 or 900 ¾ terminating impedance is allowed. However, more Terminating and Balance impedance (BIMP) combinations are available.
The terminating and balance impedance options are:
TIMP BIMP
600 600 600 3COM 900 3COM 900 900
900 3CM2 600 3CM2
For XUT trunks, the Termination Impedance or
TIMP must be compatible with the Balance
Impedance or BIMP.
Pack/Rel
The following combination of BIMP/TIMP are allowed:
Timp Impedance Bimp Impedance
600 ohms 3-component or 3com 900 ohms 3-component or 3com 600 ohms 600 ohms 1200 ohms 600 ohms
For XEM trunks, TIMP must be set to 600.
When CLS = JDID, TIMP must be set to 600.
nnnnnnn Trunk Identifier
Does not have to be unique. Default is no trunk identifier assigned.
basic-6 l s c u Terminal Number, Large System format basic-1 l s c u c u l = 0-159 l = 0-255 with Fibre Network Fabric
Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, - 252: superloop number in multiples of 4
Where s = fnf-25 basic-4.0
0
• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop
• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop
Where c = basic-6.0
0
• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop
• 1-10: cabinet on superloop
• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop basic-5.0
0 basic-6.0
0
Where u = 0-31
Terminal Number, Small System format For Option
11C basic-14
260 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• c = 1-50
• u = 0-31
For Option 11C Chassis
• c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
• u = 0-31
Terminal Number, CS 1000S system format
• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
• u = 0-31
Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit
• c = 0-4, 7-10
• u = 0-31 l ch c u
Pack/Rel
basic-1 basic-4.0
0
Format for MG 1000T, where:
• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
• u = 0-31
Terminal Number for digital trunks when TYPE =
RDC or VDC: l = 0-159, Large System l = 0, 4, 8 - 252, CS 1000E basic-4.0
0 fnf-25 l = 0-255: loops, Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric
• l = 1-9 Option 11C l = 1-9, 11-19, 21-29, 31-39,
41-49, Option 11C with Survivable IP l = 11-14,
21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S l = 0-4, 7-10,
11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50 for MG 1000T
• ch = channel 1-24 for 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI or 1-30 for 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.
sipe-25 basic-1.0
basic-4.0
TN cannot belong to a phantom loop. TYPE must be TIE if this TN is on a Phantom loop.
TN is not prompted for model sets.
Terminal Number of the first Virtual Trunk
For CS 1000S system, where: c = 61-99 basic-2.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 261
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
TOTN
TYPE
Response Comment
For MG 1000T, where: c = 61-69 xx xx l s c u cu cu l ch
ADM
ADM M
Pack/Rel
basic-4.0
0
PRI loop and channel atvn-25.4
7 basic-1 To Terminal Number. TOTN is prompted when
REQ = MOV. TOTN cannot be a phantom loop.
Format for Large System
Format for CS 1000E
Format for Small System
Format for CS 1000S system
Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit
Loop and channel for digital trunks when TYPE =
RDC or VDC
Add-on Data Module data block
Data port interfacing with a data line card
Small System and CS 1000S Model basic-4.0
0 basic-7 basic-1.0
basic-4.0
0 basic-1
AWR
AWR M
CAA
Automatic Wake Up RAN/Music trunk data block.
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model CAA M
CAM
CAM M
CBCT
COT
COT M
CSA
CSA M
CAMA trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
NI-2 CBC trunk
Central Office Trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
262 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DIC
DIC M
Comment
Dictation trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
DID
DID M
FEX
FEX M
Direct Inward Dial trunk data block.
Per FCC regulations, DID trunks used in the U.S.
must be properly designated for answer supervision. Refer to FCC Compliance for DID
Answer Supervision in Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106. For an ISPC link when SDCH = YES, TYPE = DID .
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Foreign Exchange trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Pack/Rel
FGDT
IMUS
Feature Group D Trunk data block
IP Music trunk data block basic-7.0
0
IPAV
IPTI
IRAN
IP for ATVN
IP TIE trunk data block
IP Recorded Announcement trunk data block basic-7.0
0
ISA
MCU
MDM
MDM M
MUS
MUS M
PAG
Integrated Services Access trunk data block. Also called Call-By-Call service trunk type.
There is no provision against the use of non-
QPC237 trunk types for the analog ISA service route. Only TIE and ISA trunks are applicable for directly connecting SL-1 PBX to SL-1 PBX.
Meridian Communications Unit.
Modem/Data Module data block.
Data port interfacing with QPC60/2500 type card.
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Music trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Paging trunk data block
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 263
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
XDIC
TIE M
VAC
VDC
VGW
WAT
WAT M
(MUT)
NOR
RLM
RLM M
RLR
RLR M
TCON
TIE
Response
PAG M
Comment
Small System and CS 1000S Model
R232
R232 M
R422
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in RS-232
Data mode data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
R422 M
RAC
RAN
RAN M
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in RS-422
Data mode data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Real Analog Channel data block
Recorded Announcement trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Pack/Rel
RCD
RDC
Recorder trunk data block
Real Digital Channel data block
Release Link Main trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Release Link Remote trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Tandem Connection for MPH and PRI connections
TIE trunk data block For an ISPC link when SDCH
= NO, TYPE must be TIE.
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Virtual Analog Channel data block
Virtual Digital Channel data block
Voice Gateway
Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Mute outpulsing for DIC trunks
Normal outpulsing for DIC trunks xpe-15
264 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
XTRK
Response
DB32
Comment
Extended trunk. Prompted for superloops when defining the first unit. Packages 97 and 294 must be equipped.
VGW channels configured on 32 port DSP daughterboards
Pack/Rel
tip/xpe-19 basic-5.0
0
DB96
EXUT
IPMS
ITG1
ITG2
ITG8
ITGP
Note:
DB32 blocked for MGX
VGW channels configured on 96 port DSP daughterboards basic-5.0
0
Note:
DB96 restricted to cards 8-10 or 11-13 for MGX
Enhanced Extended Universal Trunk
IP Media Services Extended Trunk basic-5.0
0 basic-7.0
0
ITG card (1 cardslot circuit card)
ITG card (2 cardslot circuit card)
ITG 486 8-port card
ITG-P 24-port card itg- 25 itg- 25 basic-3.0
basic-3.0
MC8
MC32
M32S
XCOT
XDID
XEM
XFEM
XUT
VTRK
Media Card 8-port
Media Card 32-port (MC32) or Media Card 32-port
Secure (MC32S)
Media Card 32S basic-3.0
basic-3.0
basic-5.0
0
Extended CO trunk card. Type must be COT or
DID. If one or more units are to be used on a PPM route, then unit 0 must be defined as a PPM route member. If not, PPM do not function for any other unit on the card.
Extended DID trunk card
Extended E & M trunk card
Extended Flexible E & M trunk card
Extended Universal Trunk card
Virtual trunk for CS 1000S basic-2
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 265
LD 14: Trunk Data Block
Prompt
ZONE
Response
0-255 0–
8000
Comment
Zone Number which the physical unit of the ITG card belongs.
ZONE number is not checked against Overlay
117.
If xtrk is ITG1 or ITG2 and if IPTN is YES, the data block is saved and Overlay 14 returns to the REQ prompt after ZONE prompt
Pack/Rel
basic-25 basic-7.0
0
266 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 14: LD 15: Customer Data Block
This program allows data blocks for customers to be created or modified. When the Overlay is loaded, the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:
CDB000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx
Overlay program 15 is structured to allow changes to be made by entering the desired gate opener mnemonic at the TYPE: prompt. The prompt sequence associated with that gate opener is then prompted in the usual manner. Once the end of the sub prompts has been reached, the Customer Data Block is updated and saved.
Enhanced input processing has also been applied to the REQ: and TYPE: prompts in LD 15. Thus, if the prompt ends with a colon a list of possible responses can be obtained by entering '?' followed by a carriage return. The REQ: and TYPE: prompts also accept abbreviated responses, thus allowing the user to only enter the first three unique characters of the gateway name.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Contents:
on page 268
Default Customer Data Block on page 270
Data Block: AML (Application Module Link) on page 272
Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)
on page 273
Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles) on page 274
Data Block: AWU (Automatic Wake Up Data) on page 276
Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data) on page 277
Data Block: CCS (Controlled Class of Service)
on page 278
Data Block: CDR (Call Detail Recording)
on page 278
Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)
on page 279
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 267
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Section
Data Block: FFC (Flexible Feature Codes) on page 280
Data Block: FTR (Features and options) on page 280
Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)
on page 285
Data Block: ICP (Intercept Computer Update) on page 286
Data Block: IMS (Integrated Message Service)
on page 286
Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments) on page 287
Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers) on page 289
Data Block: MON (Set-based Monitoring)
on page 290
Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations) on page 291
Data Block: NET (Networking) on page 292
Data Block: NIT (Night Service) on page 295
Data Block: OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security) on page 296
Data Block: PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering) on page 296
on page 297
Data Block: RDR (Call Redirection) on page 297
Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement) on page 299
Data Block: TIM (Timers) on page 300
on page 301
Customer data block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
AML_DATA
ANI_DATA
ATT_DATA
Response
CHG
CDB xx
Comment
Change existing data block
Customer Data Block
Customer number
(NO) YES Change Application Module Link options (see
on page 272)
(NO) YES Change Automatic Number Identification numbers (see
Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)
on page 273)
(NO) YES Change Attendant Console options (see
(Attendant Consoles) on page 274)
268 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response Comment
AWU_DATA (NO) YES Change Automatic Wake Up options (see
(Automatic Wake Up Data) on page 276)
CAS_DATA (NO) YES Change Centralized Attendant Service options (see
Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)
on page 277)
CCS_DATA (NO) YES
Change Controlled Class of Service options (see Data Block:
CCS (Controlled Class of Service)
on page 278)
CDR_DATA (NO) YES Change CDR and Charge Account options (see
on page 278)
FCR_DATA (NO) YES
Change New Flexible Code Restriction options (see
Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)
on page 279)
FFC_DATA
FTR_DATA
(NO) YES
Change Flexible Feature Code options (see Data Block: FFC
(Flexible Feature Codes) on page 280)
(NO) YES Change Features and options (see
(Features and options) on page 280)
HSP_DATA
ICP_DATA
IMS_DATA
INT_DATA
(NO) YES
Change Hospitality Management options (see Data Block:
HSP (Hospitality Management) on page 285)
(NO) YES Change Intercept Computer update (se
(Intercept Computer Update) on page 286)
(NO) YES
Change Integrated Message Service options (see Data Block:
IMS (Integrated Message Service)
on page 286)
(NO) YES
Change Intercept treatment options (see Data Block: INT
(Intercept Treatments) on page 287)
LDN_DATA (NO) YES
Change Listed Directory Numbers (see Data Block: LDN
(Listed Directory Numbers) on page 289)
MPO_DATA (NO) YES
Change Multi-Party Options (see Data Block: MPO (Multi-
on page 291)
NET_DATA
NIT_DATA
(NO) YES Change ISDN and ESN Networking options (see
(NO) YES Change Night Service options (see
OAS_DATA (NO) YES Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options (see
on page 296)
PPM_DATA (NO) YES Change Periodic Pulse Metering options (see
PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering) on page 296)
PWD_DATA (NO) YES
Change Customer related Passwords (see Data Block: PWD
RDR_DATA (NO) YES Change Call Redirection (see
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 269
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response Comment
ROA_DATA (NO) YES Change Recorded Overflow Announcement (see
ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement) on page 299)
SLS_DATA
TIM_DATA
TST_DATA
(NO) YES
Change SIP Line Services options (see Data block: SLS (SIP
(NO) YES Change Timers (see
on page 300)
(NO) YES
page 301)
on
Note:
This Prompts and responses table does not list prompts which appear under each gate opener. To find prompts which appear under a given gate opener, refer to the page listed in the Comment section of this table.
Default Customer Data Block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ANI_DATA
ANAT
ANLD
PANI
CIS_ANI
- S_SIZE
Response
NEW Request = NEW
Comment
DEFAULT Type = DEFAULT (Default Customer Data Block) xx Customer number
Automatic Number Identification prompts are automatically output when adding a new customer
ANI billing number for attendants making ANI calls x...x
x...x
ANI Listed DN
(NO) YES M911 Pseudo ANI display
(NO) YES ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.
(0)-2000 Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.
- - S_ENTRY 1-2000
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15
- - LEC
- - ADDG
0-99..99
Entry of ANI table applying to a set
DN Length
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
0-(8)-99..9
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).
- - ANDN 0-99..99
Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.
Up to 15 digits can be entered.
270 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- CIS_ENT
- - CAC0
- - CAC1
- - CAC2
- - CAC3
- - CAC4
- - CAC5
- - CAC6
- - CAC7
- - CAC8
- - CAC1
- - CAC2
- - CAC3
- - CAC4
- - CAC5
- - CAC6
- - CAC7
- - CAC8
- - CAC9
- - DFLT
Prompt
- R_SIZE
Response
(1)-512
- R_ENTRY (0)-aa
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15
- - LEC
- - ADDG
0-99..99
Comment
Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.
ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified
DN Length
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
0-(8)-99..9
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).
- - ANDN 0-99..99
Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.
Up to 15 digits can be entered.
(NO) YES CAC Conversion table option CACC
- MFC_ENT (0)-31
- - CAC0 0-(3)-9
CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9
CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or
MFC CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table
(0)-31
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into MFC CAC
MFC value corresponding to CIS 0
MFC value corresponding to CIS 1
MFC value corresponding to CIS 2
MFC value corresponding to CIS 3
MFC value corresponding to CIS 4
MFC value corresponding to CIS 5
MFC value corresponding to CIS 6
MFC value corresponding to CIS 7
MFC value corresponding to CIS 8
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 271
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
- - CAC9
- DFLT
Response
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
Comment
MFC value corresponding to CIS 9
CIS value used when CIS CAC has not been received, or CIS
CAC received is not in the CIS CAC list of this table
Data Block: AML (Application Module Link)
GP03
GP04
GP05
GP06
GP07
GP08
GP09
GP10
GP11
GP12
GP13
GP14
GP15
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE: AML_DATA Application Module Link
Comment
Change existing data block
CUST
OPT
VSID
GP02 xx a..a
0-127 n n n n n n
Customer number
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
Value-Added Server Identifier
Group 2 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
Group 3 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 4 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 5 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 6 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 7 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 8 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 9 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 10 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 11 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 12 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 13 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 14 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 15 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
272 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)
Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ANAT
ANLD
CIS_ANI
- S_SIZE
Response
CHG
Comment
Change existing data block
ANI_DATA Automatic Number Identification xx Customer number x...x
x...x
ANI Attendant Billing number
ANI Listed Directory Number
(NO) YES ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.
(0)-2000 Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.
- - S_ENTRY 1-2000
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15
- - LEC
- - ADDG
0-99..99
Entry of ANI table applying to a set
DN Length
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
0-(8)-99..9
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete
ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL
16).
- - ANDN
- R_SIZE
0-99..99
(1)-512
Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.
Up to 15 digits can be entered.
Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.
- R_ENTRY (0)-aa
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15
- - LEC
- - ADDG
0-99..99
ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified
DN Length
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
0-(8)-99..9
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete
ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL
16).
- - ANDN 0-99..99
Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.
Up to 15 digits can be entered.
(NO) YES CAC Conversion table option CACC
- MFC_ENT (0)-31
- - CAC0 0-(3)-9
- - CAC1 0-(3)-9
CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 273
LD 15: Customer Data Block
- CIS_ENT
- - CAC0
- - CAC1
- - CAC2
- - CAC3
- - CAC4
- - CAC5
- - CAC6
- - CAC7
- - CAC8
- - CAC9
- DFLT
Prompt
- - CAC2
- - CAC3
- - CAC4
- - CAC5
- - CAC6
- - CAC7
- - CAC8
- - CAC9
- - DFLT
(0)-31
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
0-(6)-10
Response
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
Comment
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9
CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or
MFC CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table
CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into MFC CAC
MFC value corresponding to CIS 0
MFC value corresponding to CIS 1
MFC value corresponding to CIS 2
MFC value corresponding to CIS 3
MFC value corresponding to CIS 4
MFC value corresponding to CIS 5
MFC value corresponding to CIS 6
MFC value corresponding to CIS 7
MFC value corresponding to CIS 8
MFC value corresponding to CIS 9
CIS value used when CIS CAC has not been received, or CIS
CAC received is not in the CIS CAC list of this table
Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
ATT_DATA xx
Attendant Consoles
Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
274 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles)
- ITH2
- ITH3
RTSA
SACP
ABDN
IRFR
- IRFP
LFFD
RTIM
ATIM
AQTT
AODN
SPVC
- SBLF
- ITH1
Prompt Response
OPT
ATDN
NCOS
ATAC
- PWD2
CWUP
CWCL
CWTM
CWBZ
EFLL
MATT
LFTN
LFTN a...a
(0)-x...x
(0)-99
Comment
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
Attendant Directory Number
Network Class of Service for all attendant consoles for this customer xxxxx x...x
Attendant Administration Access Code
Second level administration Password
(NO) YES Call Waiting queue Update
(0)-255
(0)-255
Call Waiting Call Limit
Call Waiting Time (0)-511
(0)-511
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Call Waiting Buzz
(0)-8064 Efficiency Factor Loading Level
(NO) YES Consoles used as Message Center l s c u l s c u
Lamp Field array Terminal Number (Opt 11 format is cu) (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)
Second Lamp Field array Terminal Number (Opt 11 format is cu)
(l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u) x00...x00
xxx yyy zzz Recall Timers for Slow-Answer, Camp-On and Call Waiting
(0)-126
0-(30)-255 x...x
(0)-63
(NO) YES
1-255
1-255
1-255 aaaa aaaa
First Directory Number of lamp field array
Attendant Alternative Answering Timer
Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds
Attendant Overflow DN
Supervisory Console
Standard Busy Lamp Field
Visual Indication Threshold 1
Visual Indication Threshold 2
Visual Indication Threshold 3
Recall To Same Attendant (aaaa = (RSAD), RSAA, or RSAX)
Semi-Automatic Camp-On (aaaa = (NO), ALL, or SNGL)
(NO) YES Activation of the Attendant Blocking of DN feature
(NO) YES Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward Password x...x
Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward Password
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 275
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
XRFR (NO) YES
Comment
External Attendant Remote Call Forward Password
- XRFP
ADHT x...x
(0)-14
External Attendant Remote Call Forward Password
Attendant Delay On-Hold Timer in seconds
AFNT
AFBT
(0)-126 Attendant Forward No Answer Timer (must be an even number)
(0)- AFNT Attendant Forward Buzz Tone (Entry can be equal to or less than response to AFNT prompt and must be an even number)
IDBZ
PBUZ
ICI
RICI
(NO) YES Trunk Buzzing IADN calls in the attendant queue.
xx yy Flexible Priority Buzz cadence for IADN and Code Blue calls.
0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Call Indicators xx xx...
ICI key numbers that may receive Recorded Overflow
Announcement
Data Block: AWU (Automatic Wake Up Data)
LA12
LA21
LA22
LA31
LA32
LA41
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
AWU_DAT
A xx
AWU
ATRC
Customer number
(NO) YES Automatic Wake Up
(NO) YES Attendant Recall allowed
Comment
Change existing data block
Automatic Wake Up Data
RANF
RAN1
RAN2
LA11
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
Music route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16
Primary Ran route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16
Secondary RAN route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16
Primary RAN route for Language1
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
Secondary RAN route for Language1
Primary RAN route for Language 2
Secondary RAN route for Language 2
Primary RAN route for Language 3
Secondary RAN route for Language 3
Primary RAN route for Language 4
276 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)
Prompt Response
LA42 0-511
LA51
LA52
0-511
0-511
R2BN
R2ED
NRWU
TAWU
- WUD
- - STE
Comment
Secondary RAN route for Language 4
Primary RAN route for Language 5
Secondary RAN route for Language 5
0-23 0-59 RAN2 Begin time; hour, minute
0-23 0-59 RAN2 End time; hour, minute
2-(5)
1-(3)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Number of Rings for Wake Up before recall to attendant
Number of Tries for an unanswered AWU call
Is Wake-up Delimiter required
Is Standard Time Entry allowed?
Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
Comment
Change existing data block
CAS_DATA Centralized Attendant Service Data xx Customer number
CAS
- MAIN
(NO) YES Centralized Attendant Service main
(NO) YES CAS Main
- - CHDN x...x
- - HRCL 0-512
CAS silent Hold DN
Hold Recall timer in units of 2 seconds
- - ICI
- DFLT
- LDNT
- LADN
- RLA
0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
(NO) YES Default
(NO) YES Listed Directory Number Tone x...x
Local Attendant Directory Number
0-511 Release Link route number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 277
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data Block: CCS (Controlled Class of Service)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
CCRS
Comment
Change existing data block
CCS_DATA Controlled Class of Service xx aaa
Customer number
ECC1 aaa
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) Restricted Service (aaa =
(UNR), CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 1 (aaa = (UNR),
CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)
ECC2
CNCS
PELK aaa
0-99
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 2 (aaa = (UNR),
CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)
Network Controlled Class of Service for Electronic Lock
(NO) YES Electronic Lock on Private Lines
Data Block: CDR (Call Detail Recording)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
CDR
- IMPH
- OMPH
- AXID
- TRCR
- CDPR
- ECDR
- BDI
- OTCR
Response
CHG
CDR_DATA Call Detail Recording
Comment
Change existing data block xx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Customer number
Change Call Detail Recording data
CDR for Incoming Packet data call
CDR for Outgoing Packet data call
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
Auxiliary Identification output in CDR record
Carriage Return sent after each CDR message
Coordinated Dialing Plan Record option
End-to-End Signaling digits in CDR record
Buffer Data Interface for CDR
CDR provided, based on Originally dialed Trunk Route
278 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)
Prompt
- PORT
- - CNI
- BCAP
CHLN
FCAF
- CHMN
- FCNC
Response
0-15 a...a
(NO) YES
(0)-23
(NO) YES
(1)-CHLN
0-99
Comment
CDR port
Calling Number Identification (a...a = (DGTS), CLID, or
NONE)
Bearer Capability in CDR
Charge account number Length
Forced Charge Account active
Minimum number of digits for FCA code (Entry can be equal to or less than response to prompt CHLN)
FCA Network Class of Service
Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
Comment
Change existing data block
FCR_DATA New Flexible Code Restriction xx Customer number
NFCR
- MAXT
- OCB1
- OCB2
(NO) YES
1-255
(0)-
(MAXT-1),
255
(0)-
(MAXT-1),
255
Enable New Flexible Code Restriction
Maximum number of NFCR translation tables
NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.
255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level 2. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.
255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
- OCB3
IDCA
- DCMX
(0)-
(MAXT-1),
255
NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level 3. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.
255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
(NO) YES Incoming DID Digit Conversion allowed
1-255 Maximum number of IDC conversion tables
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 279
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data Block: FFC (Flexible Feature Codes)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
FFC_DATA Flexible Feature Code xx Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
CCRS
SCPL
SBUP
- PWD2
FFCS
- STRL aaa
0-8
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) Restricted Service
Station Control Password Length
(YES) NO Enable use of station control passwords for set based administration user level access xxxx PWD2 password for confirmation
(NO) YES Change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing indicator
1-3 String Length of end-of-dial indicator
- STRG xxx String to indicate end-of-dialing (Enterable characters are digits
0-9, *, and #.)
Auto Dial Delay in seconds ADLD
DFLT_SCPW
(0)-20
(NO) YES Allow or deny Default Station Control Password for IP
Phones.
MFAC x Mobile Feature Activation Code.
Data Block: FTR (Features and options)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
OPT
DGRP
IRNG
Response
CHG
FTR_DATA xx a...a
(0)-2046
(NO) YES
Comment
Change existing data block
Customer Features and options
Customer number
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
Maximum number of Dial Intercom Groups
Intercom Ring
280 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: FTR (Features and options)
TMON
PORT
STCB
NSCP
TFDR
RPA
MCDC
NAUT
IDEF
HCC
ALDN
ALRM
TIME
INT
RECD
- MCRT
SRCD
EEST
- DTMF
EESD
TTBL
ADCP
MUS
- MUSR
Prompt
PKND
DNDL
SPRE
LINK
- APL
PREO
BPSS
(NO) YES
0-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Response
(1)-4
(NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES
0-15
(0) 1
(NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(0)-31 xxxx
(NO) YES
0-511 aaaa x...x
(NO) YES
0-(15)
NO YES
(NO) YES
0-511
Comment
Number of digits Dialed for Group Pickup
Do Not Disturb Lamp on 500/2500 telephones
Special Prefix number (1-4 digits)
ACD DNIS Link option
Auxiliary Processor Link number
Pretranslation Option
Block Pretranslation on System Speed Call lists.
Set Relocation Security Code
End-to-End Signaling Tone to originating party
DTMF feedback tone
End-to-End Signalling Digit Display
Tone Table number
All-Digital Connection Prefix
Music for sets
Music Route for sets
Held Call Clearing (aaa = (NO), YES, or XFER)
Alarm Directory Number
Malicious Call Trace Alarm for internal or external calls
Time for the alarm in minutes
Internal
Recorder
Malicious Call Trace Recording Route number as defined in LD 16
Traffic Monitoring
Serial Data Interface Port Monitor
Station Camp-On Busy allowed
Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed
Trunk Failure Display Required
Radio Paging Allowed
Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed
Network Authorization Code
Internal/external definition
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 281
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
MTAR
LEND
MSCD
CPCI
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
CONF_DSP (NO) YES
- CNFFIELD (NO) YES
- -CNF_NAME (CONF) aaaa
- INTFIELD
- -INT_NAME
(NO) YES
(I) aaaa
- EXTFIELD (NO) YES
- -EXT_NAME (E) aaaa
DAPC
- TBL
- NPI
- - TON
- - - PREF
(NO) YES
1-15 aaa aaaa
0-9999
BSFE
- ACT_IDLE
- ACT_BUSY
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa
- DACT_IDLE
- DACT_BUSY
ARDL_ATTEMP
T
ASPCT
FXS
- FXSDN1 aaaa aaaa
1-(30)-60
(10)-180
YES (NO) x...x
Comment
Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction
List Entry Number Delimiter
Mandatory Speed Call Delimiter
Called Party Control on Internal Call (is not) is allowed for the customer
Change Conference Display configurations
Enable Conference Count Display Field
Change Conferees Count Display Field Name
Enable Internal Conferees Count display field
Change Internal Conferees Count display field
Enable Total External Conferees Count display field
Change Total External Conferees Count field name
Dial Access Prefix on CLID table entry option
Table Number
Numbering Plan
Type of Number
Access Prefix for a unique NPI/TON combination in the table.
Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement
Lamp status when boss's set has BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (WINK), FLSH, LIT or DARK
Lamp status when boss's set has BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (FLSH), WINK, LIT or DARK
Lamp status when boss's set doesn't have BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (DARK), WINK, LIT or FLASH
Lamp status when boss's set doesn't have BSFE active and is busy, where aaaa = (LIT), WINK, FLASH or DARK
Automatic Redial number of attempts
Analog Semi-Permanent Connection re-connection
Timer
Flexible Services
MADN of MIMS card 1
282 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: FTR (Features and options)
Prompt
DFLT_LANG
STS_MSG
MSG1
MSG2
MSG3
MSG4
MSG5
MSG6
MSG7
MSG8
Response
a...a
(NO) YES a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
Comment
Default language for M3900 on Remote Office.
Where a...a = (ENG), FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA,
NOR, SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,
RUS, LAT, TUR.
Modify Set-to-Set Messages
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 283
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
MSG9
Response
a...a
Comment
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
MSG10 a...a
Set-to-Set Message
Where:
• <CR> = keep current message
• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters
VO_ALO
PCA
TPDN
VO_ALOHR
(NO) YES
(OFF) ON yyyy
(0)-23
Enable Virtual Office Automatic Logout.
Personal Call Assistant
Target PCA DN
MLPPSD xxxxxx
Virtual Office Automatic Logout time using 24 hour clock.
Default MLPP service domain used when no value is entered for the MLPPSD prompt in Overlay 87.
Where xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range 000000 to FFFFFF, used to signify a 24 bit binary integer. Default is 000000.
VO_CUR_ZONE_TD (Virtual Office: Current Zone for Time and Date option)
(NO) YES If VO_CUR_ZONE_TD is YES, Current Zone
(CUR_ZONE) is used for Time and Date, otherwise
Configured Zone is used. It allows the VO user to have the local time and date displayed on the IP phone used for VO login to a home call server.
VO_CUR_ZONE_ZDM (Virtual Office: Current Zone for Zone-based Digit Manipulation option)
(NO) YES
ZBD (NO) YES
If VO_CUR_ZONE_ZDM is YES, Current Zone
(CUR_ZONE) is used for ZDM, otherwise Configured
Zone is used. It allows VO users to use either local
PSTN connections of the call server where they are physically located (Current Zone), or remote PSTN connections of the call server where their VO TNs are configured (Configured Zone) depending on customers' preferences.
Enable/disable the Zone Based Dialing feature.
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
284 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)
Prompt
- DIALPLAN
Response
aaa
Comment
Configure the on-net dial plan (public or private) when
ZBD feature is enabled (controls DN/CLID processing).
Where:
• aaa = PUB (public on-net dial plan)
E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone
• aaa = PRV (private on-net dial plan)
7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
HSP_DATA Hospitality Management xx Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
FRAN
SRAN
IDR
AUTR
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
First RAN number for first PCR threshold
Second RAN number for second PCR threshold
Identification Error RAN number
Authcode Error RAN number
RLCR
FRAN
CLS1
0-511
0-511 aaa
NCS1
TGR1
CLS2
NCS2
TGR2
(0)-99
(0)-31 aaa
(0)-99
(0)-31
Relocation FFC Error RAN number
First RAN number for first PCR threshold
Class of Service 1 (aaa = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,
SPE, or TLD)
Network Class of Service
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Class of Service 2 (aaa = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,
SPE, or TLD)
Network Class of Service
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 285
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data Block: ICP (Intercept Computer Update)
- ICDN
- ECDN
- ICWN
- ICPS
- ICPR
- ICDL
- ICPD
- ICTD
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
ICP_DATA xx
Intercept Computer
Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
ICP
- APL
- NIPN
- ICCR
(NO) YES
0-15
0-(99)
Change Intercept Computer
Auxiliary Processor Link number used for ICP
Number of Intercept Positions that can be configured
(NO) YES Intercept Position Canceling Reply is sent if transfer is canceled from Intercept computer
- ICMM 0-9 Message number shown when the transfer is caused by a maintenance program
Internal Call DN x...x
x...x
(0)-511
External Call DN
Intercept Computer Owner aaa ICP Printer Search (aaa = (CIR) or COM)
0-<NIPN> ICP Printer number
3-(4)-7
(0)-9
CP DN Length
ICP Padding Digit
(NO) YES Intercept Computer Terminal Dial from directory
Data Block: IMS (Integrated Message Service)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
Comment
Change existing data block
IMS_DATA Change Integrated Messaging System features
CUST
IMS xx Customer number
(NO) YES Change Integrated Message System
286 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments)
Prompt Response
- SAMM (NO) YES Standalone Meridian Mail
Comment
- IMA
- - APL
(NO) YES
0-15
Integrated Messaging System enabled
Auxiliary Processor Link number for IMS
- UST
- - APL
- UMG
- - APL
(NO) YES
0-15
User Status Update enabled
Auxiliary Processor Link number for UST
(NO) YES User-to-User Messaging enabled
0-15 Auxiliary Processor Link number for UMG
Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments)
CTRC
- RANR
CLDN
- RANR
NINV
- RANR
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ACCD
- RANR
Response
CHG
INT_DATA xx
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
CTVN
- RANR
MBNR
- RANR
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(OVF NAP OVF NAP) x...x
(NAP OVF NAP NAP) x...x
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
Comment
Change existing data block
Change Intercept Treatment
Customer number
Access Denied
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Call To Vacant Number
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Maintenance Busy Numbers
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Restricted Call
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Calls to Listed Directory Number
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Invalid NARS/BARS call
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 287
LD 15: Customer Data Block
- RANR
CONG
DLT
LLT
DNDT
MFVO
- RANR
MFVN
- RANR
MFCG
- RANR
LCKT
- RANR
Prompt
NITR
- RANR
Response
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
NRES
- RANR
NBLK
- RANR
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
UBRI
- RANR
RCLE
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x
(BSY BSY BSY BSY) x...x
(OVF NAP NAP NAP) x...x
(ATN OVF ATN ATN) x...x
aaa aaa aaa aaa
Comment
NARS/BARS Invalid Translation
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
NARS/BARS Restricted calls
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
NARS/BARS Blocked calls
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
MFC Call to Vacant Office
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
MFC Call to Vacant Number
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
MFC Congestion
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Call to a Lockout set
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Universal BRI
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Redirection Count Limit Exceeded as defined by
TRCL
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Congestion tone for all trunks busy condition (aaa
= (OVF) or BSY)
Direct Inward System Access Lockout treatment
(aaa = (OVF), ATN, or OFA)
Flexible Line Lockout treatment (aaa = (OVF),
ATN, or OFA)
Do Not Disturb intercept Treatment (aaa = (BST),
ATT, or RAN)
288 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers)
Prompt
- RRT
PINT
- PHIP
- RANR
PBLK
- RANR
PFAN
- RANR
PFNA
- RANR
PICP
- RANR
CPAS
0-511
Response Comment
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
(NO) YES Change Precedence Intercept treatment
(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Precedence dialed is higher than allowed x...x
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Call presented has higher precedence x...x
(ATN) RAN CPAS x...x
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer (Call Waiting)
(ATN) RAN CPAS
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer x...x
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Intercept treatment if called party cannot be preempted x...x
xxxx
Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number
Central Precedence answering station listed DN
Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
LDN_DATA Listed Directory Numbers xx Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
OPT
DLDN
LDN0
LDA0
LDN1 a...a
xxxx
1-63 ALL x...x
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
(NO) YES Departmental Listed Directory Numbers
Listed Directory Number 0
Attendant consoles associated with LDN0
Listed DN 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 289
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
LDA1 a...a
LDN2
LDA2 x...x
a...a
LDN3
LDA3
LDN4
LDA4 x...x
a...a
x...x
a...a
LDN5
LDA5
LDBZ
ICI
Comment
Attendant consoles associated with LDN1 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)
Listed DN 2
Attendant consoles associated with LDN2 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)
Listed DN 3
Attendant consoles associated with LDN3 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)
Listed DN 4
Attendant consoles associated with LDN4 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL) x...x
a...a
Listed DN 5
Attendant console associated with LDN5 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL) n n n n n n Listed Directory Number Buzzing assigned groups(n = 0-5)
0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Indicators
Data Block: MON (Set-based Monitoring)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
USBM
MON
Comment
Change existing data block
Set-based monitoring
(NO) YES UIPE Set-based monitoring
Where:
(NO) = all previously configured TNs are flushed, and subsequent prompts are not prompted.
YES = accept and prompt the next prompts.
<CR> = previously stored value taken.
TN1
TN2
TN3
TN4 l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
290 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations)
Prompt Response
TN5 l s c u c u
Comment
Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
TN6 l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and
CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations)
- RALL
- CDTO
IFLS
MHLD
PCDS
- CNFD
- TGLD
- DISD
CCDO
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
FMOP
- RGNA
- AOCS
- RCY1
- RCY2
AFCO
- ACNS
Response
CHG
MPO_DATA Multi-Party Operations
Comment
Change existing data block xx
(NO) YES xxx yyy xxx yyy
1-(6)-15
1-(4)-15
Customer number
Flexible Misoperation Options
Ringing No Answer treatment
All Other Cases
Number of Cycles of Re-ringing before forwarding or disconnecting
Number of Cycles of Ringing before forwarding to transferring station
(NO) YES
2-(14)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Mandatory recall is required prior to dialing control digits
Control digit timeout; in multiples of two seconds
Ignore Switchhook Flash signal from 500/2500 sets
Manual Hold after inquiry enabled
(NO) YES Programming of Control Digits required
0-(1)-9, *, # Control Digit for Conference
0-(2)-9, *, # Control Digit for Toggle
0-(3)-9, *, # Control Digit for Disconnect
(NO) YES
(YES) NO aaa
Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment
(Automatic)/Manual Forced Camp-On
Attendant Clearing during Night Service (aaa = (NO), EXT, or
ALL)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 291
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data Block: NET (Networking)
AC2
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
OPT
Response
CHG
Comment
Change existing data block
NET_DATA Networking xx Customer number a...a
aaaa
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
Access Code 2 as defined in LD 86 (aaaa = NPA, NXX,
INTL, SPN, or LOC)
FNP
ISDN
VPNI
- PNI
- CLID
- - SIZE
- - INTL
- - ENTRY
- - - HNTN
- - - HLCL
- - - DIDN
- - - DIDN_LEN
- - - HLOC
- - - LSC
- ESA_APDN
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(0)-16283
(0)-16283
(NO) YES (Do not allow) Allow Calling Line Identification option
0-(256)-4000 CLID entry size
0-9999 xx
Country code (1-4 digits)
CLID entry to be configured
0-999999
0-99 ... 99
Enable Flexible Numbering Plan for customer
Integrated Services Digital Network
Virtual Private Network Identifier
Private Network Identifier a...a
0-7
0-x...x
0-x...x
(YES) NO
National code for home national number (1-6 digits)
Local code for home local number or Listed DN (1-12 digits)
Use DN as DID (a...a = YES, NO or SRCH)
Number of last few DN digits which needs to be sent over the network when DIDN is YES
Home location code (ESN) (1-7 digits)
Local steering code (1-7 digits)
- ESA_HLCL
- ESA_INHN
- CLASS_FMT x..x
(NO) YES aaa
Append the originating Directory Number after the Home
Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls
Home Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls
Home National Number in front of Home Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls
Send information to a CLASS set as the calling number
292 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: NET (Networking)
- - PCMC
- SATD
OCLI
TIDM
DASC
ROPT
DITI
TRNX
Prompt
- PINX_DN
- MBG
- BSGC
- PFX1
- PFX2
- HNPA
- HNXX
- CNTP
- RCNT
- PSTN
- - TNDM
EXTT
FTOP
APAD
Response
xx....x
(0)-65535
0-(65535) xxxx xxxx
200-999
100-9999 aaa
0-(5)
(NO) YES
0-(15)-31
0-(15)-31
0-(1)-5 aaa
(NO) YES xxxx aaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(FRES)
TBFT FTTB
FTLY x y
Comment
Node DN
Multi-location Business Group
Business Sub Group Consult-only
Prefix 1
Prefix 2
Home Number Plan Area code defined in LD 90
Prefix for Central Office defined in LD 90
Calling Number Type (aaa = (PDN) or LDN)
Redirection Count for ISDN calls
Public Service Telephone Networks
Tandem Threshold/Loop Avoidance Limit value permitted in a network connection
Pulse Code Modulation Conversions permitted, µ-Law to
A-Law or A-Law to µ-Law, in a network connection
Satellite Delays
CLID information for incoming/outgoing calls
Trunk Identity Meaningful
Display Access Code
Route Optimization (aaa = (NRO), RAX, ROA, or ROX)
DID to TIE connections allowed
(Prevent) Allow transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across the network
(Prevent) Allow unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.
Enter YES to indicate that a caller can transfer a call made to one outgoing trunk to another outgoing trunk without restrictions based on supervision. Trunk to trunk connection features such as TGAR/TARG and Trunk
Barring still apply as appropriate.
Enter NO to indicate that the transfer is allowed only if conditions regarding supervision are met. This prompt only applies to situations involving two calls originated by the same caller.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connection Option
Alternative Pad
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 293
LD 15: Customer Data Block
VNR
- RLI
NIT
Prompt
DMWM
MWNS
- REQ
- MFID
- - NOTI
- - MSSC
- - PRMT
- - CANC
- FLEN
- CDPL
- UDPL
NAS_ATCL
NAS_ACTV
FOPT
ARDL_ACCEPT
0-(20)-60
ARDL_RETRY 10-(30)-60
CNDN 0-x...x
- CNIP
CNAT
HMDN
CNTC
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa a
(NO) YES a aaa
YES NO
(NO) YES
0-1999
1-(16)
1-(10)
1-(19)
2-(8)
(YES) NO
(YES) NO
0-(6)-30
(YES) NO
0-x...x
xxxx x
Comment
Enable the output of DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication error messages
Message Waiting Indication Non Specified Information string to recognize.
Message Waiting Indication Non Specified Information table
Manufacturer Identifier
Non Specified Information string for Message Waiting
Notification a = any alphanumeric character
Subsequent Non Specified Information string for
Message Waiting notification
Non Specified Information string for Message Waiting
Cancellation
Vacant Number Routing
Route List Index as defined in LD 86
Flexible length of digits expected
Flexible length of VNR CDP
Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing (VNR) Uniform
Dialing Plan digits (UDP). Enter the maximum number of
UDP digits expected by VNR.
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) Interdigit
Timer
Network Attendant Service Attendant Control allowed
Network Attendant Service routing Activated
Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer
Automatic Redial Acceptance Timer in seconds
Automatic Redial Retry Timer in seconds
Customer Calling Number Identification DN on outgoing
MFC calls
Calling Number Identification Presentation
CNI Attendant DN on outgoing MFC calls
Home DN
Country Code
294 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: NIT (Night Service)
Prompt
NATC
INTC x
Response
xxx
Comment
National Access Code
International Access Code
For more information about configuring MALT VNR, see Element Manager System Reference
- Administration, NN43001-632 and IP Peer Networking Installation and Commissioning,
NN43001-313.
Data Block: NIT (Night Service)
NIT3
TIM3
NIT4
TIM4
RPNS
ENS
- NWT
- NNT
- NSO
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
NIT_DATA xx
Night Service
Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
NIT1
TIM1
NIT2
TIM2 x...x
hh mm x...x
hh mm
First Night Service DN by Time of Day
Hour and Minute for First Night Service DN
Second Night Service DN by Time of Day
Hour and Minute for Second Night Service DN x...x
hh mm x...x
hh mm
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-253
(NO) YES
Third Night Service DN by Time of Day
Hour and Minute for Third Night Service DN
Fourth Night Service DN by Time of Day
Hour and Minute for Fourth Night Service DN
Recall With Priority During Night Service
Enhanced Night Service enabled
Night Call Waiting Tone enabled
Night Number Table
Enhanced Night Service enabled
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 295
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data Block: OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security)
ODN4
ODN5
ODN6
ODN7
ODN8
ODN9
ASTM
HDOPT
HDTM
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ODN0
ODN1
ODN2
ODN3
Response
CHG
Comment
Change existing data block
OAS_DATA Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options xx Customer number xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
OHAS Security DN for zone 0
OHAS Security DN for zone 1
OHAS Security DN for zone 2
OHAS Security DN for zone 3 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
OHAS Security DN for zone 4
OHAS Security DN for zone 5
OHAS Security DN for zone 6
OHAS Security DN for zone 7 xxxx xxxx
OHAS Security DN for zone 8
OHAS Security DN for zone 9
1-(30)-63 OHAS off-hook or interdigit timeout timer in seconds
(0)-10 CONT OHAS Half Disconnect Treatment Options
1-(30)-600 OHAS Half Disconnect Timer in seconds
Data Block: PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE: PPM_DATA Periodic Pulse Metering
Comment
Change existing data block
CUST
HMTL
PCDL
UCST xx
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(0)-9999
Customer number
Hotel/Motel environment
PPM output on CDR Link
Unit Cost for Periodic Pulse Metering
296 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: PWD (Password)
Prompt Response
ATCH (NO) YES
Comment
Attendant display of call Charge
SCDL
- WKDY
(0)-3
1-7
Schedule for printing Message Registration and PPM data
Week Day for weekly printout; 1 = Sunday
- DAY
- HOUR
- MCLR
- PTTY
0-28 hh
Day of month for printout; 0 = last day of month
Hour of day for printout hh hh Two printouts per day allowed when SCDL = 1
(NO) YES Meter Clear after printing
(0)-15 PPM TTY number for printing meters (one per switch)
Data Block: PWD (Password)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE: PWD_DAT
A
CUST
SPWD
- PWD2
ATAC
- PWD2 xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Comment
Change existing data block
Password
Customer number
Secure data password for LD 88 authcodes and LD 24 DISA
Second level administration Password
Attendant Administration Access code
Second level administration Password
Data Block: RDR (Call Redirection)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
OPT
Response
CHG
RDR_DATA xx a...a
Comment
Change existing data block
Call Redirection
Customer number
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 297
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
FNAD
FNAT
FNAL
CFTA
CCFWDN
CFNA
Response
aaa aaa aaa
(NO) YES x...x
1-(4)-15
Comment
Call Forward No Answer treatment for DID calls (aaa =
(HNT), ATT, NO, or FDN)
Call Forward No Answer treatment for external Trunk non-
DID calls (aaa = (HNT), ATT, NO, or FDN)
Call Forward No Answer treatment for All other calls including trunk calls marked as internal (aaa = (HNT), ATT,
NO, or FDN)
Call Forward to Trunk Access code allowed
Customer Call Forward DN (maximum: 23 digits)
Number of normal ringing cycles for Call Forward No
Answer (CFNA)
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 0
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 1
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 2
CFN0
CFN1
CFN2
CRTOD
- CRT0
- CRT1
- CRT2
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
(NO) YES Change Call Redirection by Time Of Day alternate time options
SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 0, denotes time when Alternate
Redirection DN is used. (SH SM = Start time, EH EM = End time)
SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 1 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)
SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 2 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)
- CRT3 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 3 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)
(NO) YES Call Redirection by Day CRDAY
- DAY0
- DAY1
- DAY2
- DAY3
CRHOL
- DATE
DFN0 n n n n n n n Days for day option 0 for which alternate treatment is given n n n n n n n Days for day option 1 for which alternate treatment is given n n n n n n n n n n n n n n aaa dd mm yyyy
- - HOL_OPT 0-3
NMDR (0)-4
1-(4)-15
Days for day option 2 for which alternate treatment is given
Days for day option 3 for which alternate treatment is given
Redirection Holiday(s)
Date of the holiday
Holiday redirection option for which the date applies
Number of normal ring cycles for DNDR
Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 0
298 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement)
Prompt
DFN1
DFN2
DMDR
DNDH
MDID
NDID
MWFB
TRCL
DFNR
FCWD
Response
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
(0)-14
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-7
(0)-15
(0)-126
Comment
Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 1
Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 2
Number of distinctive ringing cycles for DNDR
Do Not Disturb Hunting allowed
No Answer DID calls routed to Message Center
No Answer non-DID calls routed to Message Center
DID calls to busy telephones routed to Message Center
Total Redirection Count Limit
DID Forward No Answer Ring cycles
Number of seconds a DID call should wait on a set before being forwarded to the attendant
Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
OPT
FRRT
- FRT
SRRT
- SRT
WAIT
- MURT
RICI
Response
CHG
Comment
Change existing data block
ROA_DATA Recorded Overflow Announcement xx a...a
Customer number
Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)
0-511 First RAN route
0-(20)-2044 Time delay in seconds for the first RAN route
0-511 Second RAN route number for ROA
2-(40)-2044 Time delay in seconds for the second RAN route aaa
0-511
0-19
Treatment during Waiting time for ROA (aaa = (RGB), MUS, or SIL)
Music Route
ICI key numbers that may receive ROA
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 299
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Data block: SLS (SIP Line Services)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
SIPL_ON (NO) YES
SIPD x...x
UAPR x...x
NMME
Response
CHG
Comment
Change existing data block
SLS_DATA SIP Line Services xx Customer number
(NO) YES
Enable SIP Line Services.
SIP Line domain name.
Prefix used to auto-generate the User Agent DN (UADN) for
SIPL clients of the specified customer.
Enable Multimedia Service.
Data Block: TIM (Timers)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
CUST
TIM_DATA xx
Timers
Customer number
Comment
Change existing data block
FLSH
SDFL xxx yyy Switchhook Flash timing
384-(1024)-2048
Signal Destination Flash timing
1-(30)-63 Permanent Hold Timer PHDT
DIND
DIDT
LDTT
DLAT
BOTO
DBRC xxx yyy zzz Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets xxx yyy zzz Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets
2-(6)-30
(0)-120
2-(14)-60
Line disconnect tone timer for 500/2500 telephones in seconds
Delayed Answer Timer
Busy tone/Overflow tone Timeout
2-(60)-120 Duration Between Reminder Cadences for Audible Reminder of Held Call
300 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Data Block: TST (Test lines)
Prompt Response
RTIM
Comment
xxx yyy zzz Recall Timers for Slow Answer, Camp-On and Call Waiting
ATIM
AQTT
(0)-126
0-(30)-255
Attendant Alternative Answering Timer
Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds
ADLD
AFNT
AFBT
(0)-20
(0)-126
Auto Dial Delay in seconds
Attendant Forward No Answer Timer (must be an even number)
(0)- AFNT Attendant Forward Buzz Tone (Your entry can be equal to or less than your response to the AFNT prompt and must be an even number)
(0)-63 Night Forward No Answer or ring cycles NFNA
NFNS
ADHT
HWTT
NIT
FOPT
PRNG
PRMT
(0)-504
(0)-14
0-(300)-600 Length of Howler Tone in seconds
2-(8) Network Alternate Route Selection Interdigit Timer
0-(6)-30
Night Forward No Answer in seconds
Attendant Delay on Hold Timer in seconds
Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer
0 - (40) - 60 Precedence ringback timer in seconds.
0 - (60)-120 Duration of preemption tone before set goes to line lock out.
Data Block: TST (Test lines)
Prompt Response
REQ: CHG
TYPE:
Comment
Change existing data block
TST_DATA Test lines for transmission testing
CUST
T100
REF0
TST0 xx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Customer number
DN for Type-100 test line
DN for Reference trunk 0
DN for Test trunk 0
REF1
TST1
REF2
TST2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
DN for Reference trunk1
DN for Test trunk 1
DN for Reference trunk 2
DN for Test trunk 2
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 301
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
REF3 xxxx
TST3 xxxx
DN for Reference trunk 3
DN for Test trunk 3
Comment
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ABDN
AC2
ACCD
ACNS
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Activation of the Attendant Blocking of DN
Prompted with Semi-Automatic Camp-On
(SACP) package 181.
Pack/Rel
abdn-20
Access Code 2
E.164 National
E.164 Subscriber
International
Special Number
Location Code
For DPNSS1, only SPN and LOC values apply.
Enter call types that use Access Code 2 (AC2)
Multiple responses are permitted. If a numbering plan is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to Access Code1
(AC1).
This prompt applies to both ISDN and non-
ISDN calls if you have Network Message
Services (NMS) package175.
pri-15 basic-1 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)
Access Denied
(NO)
EXT
ALL
Attendant Clearing during Night Service
No automatic treatment
External calls only
All calls mpo-20
302 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ACT_BUSY (FLSH)
ACT_IDLE
ADDG
ANDN
ADHT
ADLD
AFBT
Response
WINK
LIT
DARK
(WINK)
FLSH
LIT
DARK
0-(8)-99..99
0-99..99
X
(0)-14
(0)-120
(0)-2-AFNT
Comment
This prompt appears when the Multi-Party
Operations (MPO) package is equipped,
MPOP = YES and FMOP = YES.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp is on.
LCD Lamp is off.
Pack/Rel
bfs-24
LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp is on.
LCD Lamp is off.
bfs-24
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than
ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).
Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0. Up to 15 digits can be entered.
remove ANDN
Attendant Delay on Hold Timer
Prompted with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
supp-9
Auto Dial Delay
Time in two-second interval.
Prompted with the Flexible Feature Codes
(FFC) package 139. 0 = Auto Dial does not take place.
ffc-20
Attendant Forward Buzz Tone
The number of seconds in 2 second intervals that the attendant is buzzed at full volume.
Odd entries are rounded down to the next valid afna-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 303
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
AFCO
AFNT
ALDN
ALRM
Response
(YES) NO
(0)-2-126 x...x
(NO) YES
AML_DATA (NO) YES
ANAT
ANI_DATA
ANLD x...x
(NO) YES xxxxx
Comment
entry. If entry is 0, the original volume is in effect.
(Automatic)/Manual Forced Camp-On
Prompted with Priority Override (POVR) package 186.
Pack/Rel
povr-20
Attendant Forward No Answer Timer
The number of seconds in 2 second intervals that the call is presented to the attendant before Attendant Forward No Answer (AFNA) is attempted. Odd entries are rounded down to the next valid entry. If entry is 0, the call is not forwarded.
Prompted with Attendant Forward No Answer
(AFNA) package 134.
afna-14
Alarm Directory Number
Must be a Single-Appearance 500-set DN.
Precede with X to remove.
emct-20
Malicious Call Trace Alarm for internal or external calls
ALRM has to set to YES if the alarm is to be rung for any call (external or internal) when
MCT is activated.
emct-20
Change Application Module Link options basic-21
ANI Attendant Billing Number
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. In either case, together with ANLD (ANI listed
DN), the total number of digits must be seven.
Prompted with Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) package 12.
ani-1
Change Automatic Number Identification options basic-21
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Listed
Directory Number ani-1
304 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AOCS
AODN
APAD
X xxx yyy x y
Response
x...x
Comment
can be 0-5 digits, depending on the length of
ANAT. The combined number of digits for
ANAT and ANLD must be 7. Prompted with
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) package 12.
Enter the letter X to clear the field
Pack/Rel
All Other Cases
Where: xxx is for internal calls and yyy or ATN is for external calls
Valid entries for xxx and yyy are: mpo-20
• AAR - forward to attendant or Night Service after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles
• ATN - forward to attendant or Night Service
(ATN is the default for yyy or external calls)
• DAR - disconnect after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles
• DIS - disconnect default for xxx or internal calls
• OVF - provide overflow tone
• STD - standard operation.
Attendant Overflow DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry. Prompted with Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) package 56.
aop-1
Alternative Pad. Where: x = trunk pad selection and y = conference pad selection
Valid inputs for x are:
• (0) = default North America
• 1 = Australia
• 2 = New Zealand
• 3 = Italy
• 4 = China EPE or EPE/IPE systems
• 5 = China pure IPE system
• 6-7 = future usage currently set to default
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 305
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
APL
AQTT
0 - 15
0-(30)-255
ARDL_ACCEPT
0-(20)-60
ARDL_ATTEMPT
1-(30)-60
ARDL_RETRY
ASPCT
Response
10-(30)-60
Comment
Valid inputs for y are:
• (0) = default North America
• 1 = Alternative Conference pads selected
The default = 0 when REQ = NEW. The default is the existing value when REQ =
CHG.Alternative Conference pads are only provided on specific Conference cards.
Pack/Rel
Auxiliary Processor Link number apl-10
Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds basic-1 ardl-22
Automatic Redial Acceptance Timer in seconds. An odd-numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number, and the following message is printed: "ARDL_ACCEPT
ROUNDED TO XX." (where: xx = the even number).
This is the maximum allotted time for the originator response on a successful automatic redial call. Prompted if Automatic Redial
(ARDL) package 304 is equipped.
ardl-22
Automatic Redial number of attempts
Any single ARDL call is automatically redialed up to the number of retries entered at this prompt. Prompted if Automatic Redial (ARDL) package 304 is equipped.
ardl-22
Automatic Redial Retry Timer in seconds. An odd-numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number, and the following message is printed: "ARDL_ACCEPT ROUNDED TO XX."
(where: xx = the even number).
This timer controls successive automatic redial retry dialing. Prompted if Automatic
Redial (ARDL) package 304 is equipped.
Analog Semi-Permanent Connections reconnection Timer basic-24
306 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ASTM
10
Response
180
1-(30)-63
ATAC
ATCH
ATDN
ATIM
ATRC xxxx
(NO) YES
(0)-x...x
(0)-126
(NO) YES
Comment
minimum value in seconds maximum value in seconds
Pack/Rel
OHAS Off-Hook or interdigit timeout timer
This timer is applied to telephones with Alarm
Security Allowed (ASA) Class of Service.
When the timer expires, the telephone is intercepted to the OHAS DN.
ASTM applies to all OHAS DNs. If the telephone has Alarm Security Denied (ASD)
Class of Service, the normal dial tone and interdigit timers are used. See LD 15 prompts
DIND and DIDT.
basic-18
Attendant Administration Access Code
The entered code is not actually accepted until the correct password is entered in the next prompt.
Prompted with Attendant Administration (AA) package 54.
aa-1
Attendant display of call Charge
Attendant Directory Number
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Calls timed for recall by the DPNSS1 redirection feature are redirected to this number when the timer expires.
supp-15 basic-1
Attendant Alternative Answering Timer
This timer is in increments of two seconds, odd numbers are rounded down to the next valid input. Use ATIM = 0 to disable AAA. Prompted with Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) package 174.
aaa-15
Attendant Recall allowed
A YES response enables Attendant Recall for unanswered Automatic Wake Up (AWU) call attempts.
awu-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 307
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
ATT_DATA (NO) YES
AUTR
AWU
0-511
X
(NO) YES
X
AWU_DAT
A
(NO) YES
AXID (NO) YES
Comment
The number of Wake Up tries is defined at the
TAWU prompt. The number of rings for a Wake
Up call is defined at the NRWU prompt.
Pack/Rel
Change Attendant Console options
Authcode Error RAN number
To disable the RAN basic-21 disa-16
Enable Automatic Wake-Up
All AWU related data is removed from CDB.
Prompted with Automatic Wake-Up (AWU) package 102.
Change Automatic Wake Up options awu-10 basic-21
BCAP
BDI
BOTO
BPSS
BSFE
BSGC
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
2-(14)-60
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(65535)
Auxiliary Identification output in CDR record cdr-1
Auxiliary Identification provides the TN when the call involves a multiple appearance DN.
Bearer Capability in CDR
Buffer Data Interface for CDR
Busy tone/Overflow tone Timeout
Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.
cdr-24 dba-24 basic-10
Block Pretranslation on System Speed Call lists when dial accessed.
Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement pxlt- 23 ssc- 23 ffcsf-24
Business Sub Group Consult-only. Where:
• 0 = no indication
• 1 - 65535 = Subgroup identifier
This value is sent as the Multi-location
Business Group Subgroup (MBGS) identifier or tenant number when an existing call has more than two different MBGSs. In this case a consultation connection is allowed, but tens-16
308 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CAC0
CAC1
CAC2
CAC3
CAC4
CAC5
CAC6
Response
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
Comment
completion of a call modification, conference or transfer, is disallowed.
If BSGC = 0 then Call Transfer and Call
Modifications can be restricted under certain circumstances. Ensure BSGC is not 0 if Call
Transfer and Call Modifications to be allowed.
Pack/Rel
MFC value corresponding to CIS 0.
Reserved.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 1.
Residential or business subset with the access to automatic regional, toll and international network".
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 2. Hotel subset with the access to automatic regional, toll international network.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 3.
Residential, business or Hotel subset with the access to local network only.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 4. Business subset with the access to regional, toll, international network and to special service numbers; preferential access to regional and toll network.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 5. Business subset of telecommunication administration with the access to automatic regional, toll, international network and to special service numbers free of charge.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 6. Toll Coin box and public call paystation with the access cist-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 309
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
CAC7
CAC8
CAC9
CACC
CANC
CAS
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
0-(3)-9
(NO) YES
YES NO
CAS_DATA (NO) YES
CCDO
CCFWDN
Response
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES x...x
Comment
to automatic regional and toll network also the general purpose coin box with the access to local and toll network (paying in cash) and the coin box with access to special services only.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6.
Pack/Rel
MFC value corresponding to CIS 7. Business or residential subset with automatic access to regional, toll and international network plus to chargeable service numbers.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 8. Business subset for data, facsimile and electronic mail with automatic access to regional, toll and international network.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8.
cist-24
MFC value corresponding to CIS 9. Local call coin box.
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9.
cist-24
CAC Conversion table option
Non Specified Information string for Message
Waiting Cancellation.
dmwi- 23
Centralized Attendant Service
Prompted with Centralized Attendant Services
(Main) (CASM) package 26 or Centralized
Attendant Services (Remote) (CASR) package 27.
casm-1 basic-21 Change Centralized Attendant Service options
Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment is not required
Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment is required mpo-20
Customer Call Forward DN.
Maximum of 23 digits allowed (0-23) basic-21
310 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CCRS
CDPR
Response
CCS_DATA (NO) YES
ZBD
CDPL
(UNR)
CTD
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
(NO) YES
1-(10)
(NO)
YES
Comment
CCFWDN allows subscribers to forward their phones to a central answering service by dialing a FFC. CCFWDN activates the regular
Call Forward All Calls function, but without having to specify the DN to which calls is forwarded. Customer Call Forward is only applicable to 500-type sets.
Pack/Rel
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS)
Restricted Service. This applies when CCRS is active. If CCRS is inactive, the set defaults to the TN class of service access restriction.
Allowed access restrictions are:
Unrestricted
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditional Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Prompted with Controlled Class of Service
(CCOS) package 81.
ccos-7
Change Controlled Class of Service options basic-21
Enable/disable the Zone Based Dialing.
zbd-6.00
Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing
(VNR) Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) cdp-10
Coordinated Dialing Plan Record option.
CDPR appears with Coordinated Dialing Plan
(CDP) package 59. Applies only to trunk routes with OPD = NO.
Replace the Distant Steering Code (DSC) or
Trunk Steering Code (TSC) with the Access
Code (ACOD). The format is: ACOD + concluding digits
Insert ACOD ahead of DSC or TSC. The format is : ACOD + DSC or TSC + concluding digits cdp-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 311
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
CDR
Response
(NO) YES
CDR_DATA (NO) YES
CDTO
CFNA
CFN0
CFN1
CFN2
CFTA
CHDN
CHLN
CHMN
2-(14)
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
(NO)
YES x...x
(0)-23
(1)-CHLN
Comment
Change Call Detail Recording record
Prompted with Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4.
Change CDR and Charge Account options
Control digit timeout in multiples of 2 seconds.
Pack/Rel
cdr-1 basic-21 mpo-20
Number of normal ringing cycles for Call
Forward No Answer
If the Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125 is equipped, this interval is tied to the number of cycles of NCAD ringing. Refer to 553-2711-180 Flexible Tone and Digit
Switches.
basic-1
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA,
Option 0
CFNA has three ringing cycle options. This assigns the normal ringing cycles for Option 0.
Refer to Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning this feature.
uscr-19
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA
Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA
Call Forward to Trunk Access code not allowed
Call Forward to Trunk Access code allowed
CAS silent Hold DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Charge Account Number Length
Prompted with Charge Account (CHG) package 23 uscr-19 uscr-19 optf-12 casm-1 fca-1
Minimum number of digits for FCA code
The range is from 1 to CHLN, where CHLN =
Charge account Number Length.
fca-1
312 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CIS_ANI
CIS_ENT
CLASS_FMT
CLDN
CLID
CLS1
Response
(NO) YES
(0)-31
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
(DN)
LCL
NTN
Comment
ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message.
Pack/Rel
cist-24
CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into
MFC CAC
CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified cist-24
CAC conversion table entry to be deleted
CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be deleted.
For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable. An ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.
For all subprompts, if 0 is configured, the value configured for non-tie trunks in the outgoing
R2MFC table (LD 94) is used.
cnumb- 23
Send internal Directory Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.
Send Local Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.
Send National Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.
(NAP OVF NAP NAP)
Calls to LDN
(NO)
YES basic 1
Do not allow Calling Line Identification option isdn-22
Allow Calling Line Identification option
Calling Line Identification does not require
ISDN.
(UNR)
CTD
CUN
FR1
FR2
Class of Service
Unrestricted
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditional Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2 basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 313
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
FRE
SRE
TLD
CLS2
CNAT
(UNR)
CTD
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
0-9999
CNCS
CNDN
CNFD
CNFFIELD
X
0-99
X
0-9999
0-99999999
X
0-(1)-9, *, #
(NO) YES
Fully Restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Comment Pack/Rel
Class of Service
Unrestricted
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditional Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied supp-16
CNI Attendant DN on outgoing Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling (MFC) calls.
To remove
Prompted with Multifrequency Compelled
Signaling (MFC) package 128 mfc-9
Controlled NCOS
CNCS allows the user to select a controlled
NCOS to be used when the set is locked.
When a set is locked, the NCOS defined at this prompt is used as the set NCOS when a trunk call is made.
Precede entry with X to remove.
ffc -21
Customer Calling Number Identification on outgoing MFC calls. Prompted with
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128
Customer CNI sent
Customer CNI not sent
Precede with X to remove mfc-9
Control Digit for Conference
Enable Conference Count Display Field.
mpo-20 basic- 23
314 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CNF_NAME
Response
(CONF)
CNI
CNIP
CNTC
CNTP aaaa
(DGTS)
CLID
NONE
(YES)
NO x
(PDN)
LDN
Comment Pack/Rel
Change Conferees Count Display Field
Name.
aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.
basic- 23
Calling Number Identification (R2MFC)
Your CNI response determines which field of the CDR record contains the Calling Number
Identification for this customer.
CNI is recorded in the digits field
CNI of R2MFC is recorded in CLID field
CNI do not be recorded in CDR
CNI is prompted if :
• CDR = YES
• FCDR, CLID, and MFC packages are equipped
• FCDR = NEW in LD 17
• CLID = YES in LD 17 basic-22
Calling Number Identification Presentation
Send Customer Calling Number Identification
(CNDN) + Trunk ID (TKID) if Calling Line ID
(CLID) = NO in LD 17
Respond to Calling Number Identification
(CNI) request with End-of-CNI R2MFC level 1 forward signal (ECNI) basic-22
Country Code for CS 1000S, Where: x = 1 for
Canada basic-2
Calling Number Type
The Calling Line ID (CLID) feature displays the set's Prime DN
The CLID feature displays the customer's
Listed Directory Number (LDN)
This determines the default Calling Line ID
(CLID) Class of Service(CLS) for all sets except those configured differently in LD 10 pri-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 315
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
CONF loop
CONF_DS
P
(NO) YES
CONG
CPAS
CPCI
CRDAY
CRHOL
CRT0
CRT1
(OVFL)
BUSY xxxx
(NO)
YES
Comment
and LD 11. Attendant consoles only have a
Listed Directory Number (LDN).
Conference loop number
Change Conference Display configurations.
Pack/Rel
awu-10 basic-23
Congestion tone for all trunks busy condition basic-1
Overflow tone for all trunks busy condition
Busy tone
Central Precedence answering station listed
DN basic-21
Called Party Control on Internal Call is not allowed for the customer
Called Party Control on Internal Call is allowed for the customer
CPCI package 310 is required.
cpci-22
(NO) YES
NEW
CHG
OUT
OUT ALL
SH SM EH EM
Call Redirection by Day
Add holiday(s)
Change holiday(s)
Remove holiday(s)
Deletes all holidays in the list
Alternate time option 0, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.
Where:
• SH SM = Start time
• EH EM = End time
Both entries are in international time format and are entered as HH MM (hour = 00-23; minute = 00-59). The default value is 00 00 00
00. The default disables CRTOD for that alternate time option.
basic-24 basic-24 basic-22
SH SM EH EM basic-22
316 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CRT2
CRT3
CRTOD
CTRC
CTVN
CUST
CWBZ
Response
SH SM EH EM
Comment
Alternate time option 1, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.
See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.
Pack/Rel
basic-22
Alternate time option 2, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.
See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.
SH SM EH EM basic-22
Alternate time option 3, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used. See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.
(NO)
YES
Call Redirection by Time Of Day
Do not change CRTOD alternate time options
Change CRTOD alternate time options
(OVF NAP OVF NAP)
Restricted Call basic-22 basic-1
(OVF OVF OVF ATN)
Call to Vacant Number
0-99
0-31
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Customer number for Large Systems
For CS 1000E
For Small Systems
For CS 1000S
For MG 1000B
For MG 1000T basic-1 basic-1 basic-4.00
basic-1.0
basic-2.0
basic-4.00
Call Waiting Buzz
First field-Provide two second buzz on exceeding upper CWCL or CWTM threshold.
Second field-Buzz on first call entering queue.
basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 317
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
CWCL
CWTM
CWUP
DACT_BUSY
Response Comment Pack/Rel
Call Waiting Call Limit basic-1
(0)-255 (0)-255
Lower and upper thresholds.
The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when number of calls in the queue exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the number of calls in queue is less than the lower threshold. Enter 0 to disable this feature.
(0)-1000 (0)-1000
Lower and upper thresholds defined as a percentage of the active consoles when OPT
= FACA.
When the FACA/FACD option is changed, a new value for CWCL must be set or the default values are used. The CWCL values for the tenant-level are set equal to the customerlevel values. CWCL is also prompted in LD
93.
(0)-511 (0)-511
Lower and upper thresholds for Call Waiting
Time.
The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when the call in the queue exceeds the upper threshold.
The lamp continues to flash until the wait time is less than the lower threshold. Enter 0 to disable this feature.
basic-1
(NO) YES
(LIT)
WINK
FLSH
Call Waiting queue Update
Prompted with M2250 Attendant Console
(DCON) package 140. The M2250 type consoles can be notified every time there is a change to the Call Waiting queue.
dcon-15
Boss's Lamp status when BSFE is disabled and set is busy.
LCD Lamp is on.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.
ffcsf-24
318 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DARK
DACT_IDLE
LCD Lamp is off.
Comment
DAPC
DASC
DATE
DAY
DAY0
(DARK)
WINK
LIT
FLSH
(NO) YES xxxx dd mm yyyy
0-28 n n n n n n n
ALL
Xn
Pack/Rel
Boss's Lamp status when BSFE is disabled and set is idle.
LCD Lamp is off.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.
LCD Lamp is on.
LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.
ffcsf-24
Dial Access Prefix on CLID table entry option isdn-24
Display Access Code
Enter the access code which is to be placed on displays before Originating Line Identities
(OLI) and Terminating Line Identities (TLI) are received from the ISDN.
The default is no code, when creating a new data block. Prompted with Multi Language
Wake Up (MLWU) package 206 and
Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.
mlwu-16
Date of the holiday
Where: dd = day mm = month yyyy = year
(optional, if no year is entered the holiday is repeated every year.
basic-24
Day of month for printout. Where 0 = last day of month supp-15
Days for day option 0 for which alternate treatment is given.
Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3
(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)
Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week
Precede the day number with X to remove basic-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 319
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
Xn Xn Xn
DAY1
DAY2
DAY3
DBRC n n n n n n n
ALL
Xn
Xn Xn Xn n n n n n n n
ALL
Xn
Xn Xn Xn n n n n n n n
ALL
Xn
Xn Xn Xn
2-(60)-120
Comment
Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.
Pack/Rel
Days for day option 1 for which alternate treatment is given
Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3
(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)
Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week
Precede the day number with X to remove
Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.
basic-24
Days for day option 2 for which alternate treatment is given
Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3
(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)
Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week
Precede the day number with X to remove
Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.
basic-24
Days for day option 3 for which alternate treatment is given
Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3
(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)
Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week
Precede the day number with X to remove
Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.
basic-24
Duration Between Reminder Cadences for audible reminder of held call basic-14
320 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DCMX
DFLT
DFLT
Response
1-255
(NO)
YES
0-(3)-9
0-(6)-10
Comment
Odd entries are rounded up to a valid multiple of two seconds.
Pack/Rel
Digit Conversion Maximum number of tables idc-12
The sum of the values for MAXT and DCMX cannot exceed 255 or MAXT + DCMX = 255.
casr-1 Default
CAS do not be activated after a SYSLOAD.
CAS is activated after a SYSLOAD.
CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or MFC CAC received is not in the
MFC CAC list of this table.
CIS value used when CIC CAC has not been received, or MFC CAC received is not in the
CIC CAC list of this table.
cist-24
DFLT_LANG a...a
Default language for M3900 on Remote Office ponw-25.4
Where: a...a = (ENG), FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA,
NOR, SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN,
JAP, RUS, LAT, or TUR.
DFLT_SCPW
(NO) YES
DFNA
DFN0
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
Allow or deny Default Station Control
Password for IP Phones.
When DFLT_SCPW = YES, the system automatically assigns a SCPW when a new IP
Phone is programmed. An SCPW is not automatically assigned to an existing IP Phone until it receives a service change.
Number of Distinctive Ringing Forward No
Answer cycles
Prompted with Distinctive Ringing (DRNG) package 74.
Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for
CFNA, Option 0 drng-4 uscr-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 321
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
DFN1
DFN2
DFNR
DGRP
DIALPLAN
DIDN
Response
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
(0)-15
(0)-2046 aaa
(YES)
NO
SRCH
Comment
CFNA has three ringing cycle options. This assigns the Distinctive Ringing cycles for
Option 0. Refer to Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning this feature
Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for
CFNA, Option 1
Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for
CFNA, Option 2
Pack/Rel
uscr-19 uscr-19
DID Forward No Answer Ring cycles
Defines the Number of ringing cycles before a
DID call is Slow Answer Recalled to the attendant console after the last stage of CFNA or hunt treatment has been completed (the maximum number of CFNA or hunt steps is two).
If DFNR = 0, then DID CFNA enhancement is disabled. DID Call Forward No Answer is the
Master Timer. Prompted if the FNAD prompt is not ATT or NO.
ffc-16
Maximum number of Dial Intercom Groups
(DIG)
Prompted with Dial Intercom (DI) package 21 di-1
Configure the on-net dial plan (public or private) when ZBD feature is enabled (controls
DN/CLID processing).
Where:
• aaa = PUB (public on-net dial plan)
E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone
• aaa = PRV (private on-net dial plan)
7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone zbd-6.00
Precede the DN of the active DN key with the digits in HLCL
Use digits in HLCL
Find a DN key of the set from key 0 which has
DIDN of a CLID entry set to YES isdn-22
322 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DIDN_LEN 0-7
DIDT
DIND xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz
Comment
Number of last few DN digits which needs to be sent over the network when DIDN is YES
Pack/Rel
supp-9
Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets.
Where: xxx = 0-(14)-60; yyy = 0-(14)-60; zzz =
0-(14)-60 when International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.
The 1st parameter is the time before first digit or the dial tone time. The 2nd parameter is the time between the first and second digits. The
3rd parameter is the time between digits after the second digit.
Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.
Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets.
when International Supplementary Features
(SUPP) package 131 is not equipped.
Where: xxx = 0-(14)-60; yyy = 0-(14)-60; zzz =
0-(14)-60 when International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.
Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.
Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets when International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.
Where: xxx = 0-(30)-60; yyy = 0-(30)-60; zzz =
0-(30)-60;
The 1st parameter is the time before first digit or the dial tone time. The 2nd parameter is the time between the first and second digits. The
3rd parameter is the time between digits after the second digit.
Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.
Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets when International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 is not equipped.
Where: xxx = 0-(30)-60; yyy = 0-(30)-60; zzz =
0-(30)-60; basic-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 323
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
DISD
DITI
Response
0-(1)-9, *, #
(NO) YES
DLAT
DLDN
DLT
DMWM
DNDH
DNDL
DNDT
(0)-120
(NO) YES
(OVF)
ATN
OFA
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(BST)
ATT
RAN
Comment
Control digit for Disconnect
Pack/Rel
mpo-20
DID to TIE connections allowed
To connect external DID and internal network
TIE trunks for the customer (which allows an external trunk to be transferred across an internal network TIE trunk), set DITI = YES.
supp-10
Delayed Answer Timer.
Where 0 = no time limit. In seconds for internal calls. Call disconnected if not answered.
Prompted with Operator Call Back (OPCB) package 126.
opcb-14
Departmental Listed Directory Numbers.
Prompted with Departmental Listed Directory
Number (DLDN) package 76.
dldn-5
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Lockout treatment
Overflow tone
Attendant
Overflow then attendant disa-1
Enable the output of DPNSSI Message
Waiting
Indication Non Specified Information error messages (ERR0001, ERR0002, ERR0003).
dmwi- 23
Do Not Disturb Hunting allowed
Prompted with Meridian Hospitality Voice
Services (MHVS) package 179.
hvs-16
Do Not Disturb Lamp on 500/2500 telephones dndi-10
Prompted with Do Not Disturb Individual
(DNDI) package 9.
dndi-1 Do Not Disturb intercept Treatment
Busy Tone
Attendant
RAN trunk
324 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DNLG
DTMF
ECC1
ECC2
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
UNR
Response
0-(4)-15
(NO)
YES
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
Comment
Prompted with Do Not Disturb Individual
(DNDI) package 9
DN Length
Pack/Rel
End-to-End Signaling feedback tone
Use the improved EES for single tone feedback
Use the current EES for DTMF feedback tone ees-19
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 1 eccs-15
ECC1 is prompted with Enhanced Control
Class of Service (ECCS) package 173.
This access restriction applies when CCRS is active. When CCRS is inactive, the set reverts to the Access Restrictions defined in LD 10 or
LD 11. Allowed access restrictions are:
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditional Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Unrestricted
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 2 eccs-15
ECC2 is prompted with Enhanced Control
Class of Service (ECCS) package 173.
This access restriction applies when CCRS is active. When CCRS is inactive, the set reverts to the Access Restrictions defined in LD 10 or
LD 11. Allowed access restrictions are:
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditional Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 325
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
ECDN
Response
SRE
TLD
UNR x...x
ECDR
EESD
EEST
EFLL
ELPL
ENS
ENTRY
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
(NO)
YES
(0)-8064
1-15
(NO) YES xx
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Unrestricted
Comment Pack/Rel
External Call DN
DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and Multi-Tenant are not on intercept position.
The DN is used for intercept treatment for external calls. Up to13 digits allowed.
icp-16 ees-19 Print End-to-End Signaling digits in CDR record
End-to-End Signalling Digit Display
No End-to-End Signalling Digit Display
Display End-to-End Signalling Digits ees-24
End-to-End Signaling Tone to originating party ees-19
No feedback tone to the originator
Send feedback tone to originator
When EEST = NO or when EEST = YES and
DTMF = NO, Improved End-to-End Signaling is used. When EEST = YES and DTMF = YES,
Enhanced End-to-End Signaling is used.
EEST is prompted with End-to-End Signaling
(EES) package 10.
Efficiency Factor Loading Level
Prompted with Network Attendant Services
(NAS) package 159 nas-14
Electronic Lock Password Length (number of digits) basic-12
Enhanced Night Service enabled
Prompted with Enhanced Night Service (ENS) package 133.
ens-20
CLID entry to be configured.
CLID entries must be between 0 and the value entered at the SIZE prompt - 1. Precede entry isdn-22
326 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ESA_APD
N
E
(YES) NO
ESA_HLCL x..x
ESA_INHN
EXTFIELD
EXT_NAM
EXTT
FCAF
FCNC 0-99
FCR_DATA (NO) YES
FCWD
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(E) aaaa
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
(0)-126
Comment
or entries with X to delete. ENTRY is repeated until a <CR> is entered.
Pack/Rel
Append the originating Directory Number after the Home Local Number for Emergency
Services Access calls.
esa- 23 esa_clmp-
23
Home Local Number for Emergency Services
Access calls.
esa- 23
If the system is Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) packaged, then up to 12 digits are accepted.
If the system is not FNP packaged, then up to
7 digits are accepted. 'X' deletes the data.
Insert Home National Number in front of Home
Local Number for Emergency Services
Access calls.
esa- 23
Enable Total External Conferees Count display field.
basic- 23
Change Total External Conferees Count field name. aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.
basic- 23
Prevent unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.
Allow unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.
basic-22
Forced Charge Account active
Prompted with Forced Charge Account (FCA) package 52 fca-1
FCA Network Class of Service
Change New Flexible Code Restriction options fca-1 basic-21
Forwarded No Answer Call Waiting DID feature.
FCWD determines the number of seconds a
DID call should wait on a set before being forwarded to the attendant frta-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 327
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
FFC_DATA (NO) YES
FFCS
FLEN
FLSH
FMOP
FNAD
FNAL
Response
(NO) YES
1-(16) xxx xxx yyy
(NO)
YES
(HNT)
ATT
FDN
NO
Comment
If (0) is chosen, the call is not forwarded to attendant. Valid entries are even numbers between 0-126, odd numbers are rounded down.
Prompted with French Type Approval (FRTA) package 197
Pack/Rel
Change Flexible Feature Code options basic-21
Change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing indicator ffc-15
Flexible length of digits expected
Switchhook Flash timing.(format Where: xxx =
20-(45)-768 when International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package
131 is not equipped)
Minimum and maximum switchhook flash time in milliseconds (format when International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package
131 is equipped) basic-1
Where: xxx = 20-(45)-768; yyy = xxx-
(896)-1500
The timing specified is used for EPE equipment only. XPE equipment uses the
FLSH specified in LD 97.
Flexible Misoperation options are not required mpo-20
Flexible Misoperation options are required
Call Forward No Answer treatment for DID calls
Hunt DN, defined in telephone data block
CFNA to attendant
Flexible CFNA DN, defined in telephone data block
CFNA not allowed basic-2
Call Forward No Answer treatment for all other calls including trunk calls marked as internal.
basic-10
328 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FNAT
FNP
FOPT
FRAN
(HNT)
ATT
FDN
(HNT)
ATT
FDN
NO
(YES) NO
0-511
X
Response
NO
0-(6)-30
Comment
An internal trunk call is a trunk call in which LD
16 prompt RCLS = INT. If FNAL = HNT, no answer calls are forwarded to the Hunt DN.
Hunt DN (defined in telephone data block)
CFNA to attendant
Flexible CFNA DN (defined in telephone data block)
CFNA not allowed
Pack/Rel
Call Forward No Answer treatment for external
Trunk non-DID calls.
An external call is defined as a trunk call in which LD 16 prompt RCLS = EXT. If FNAT =
FDN or HNT, then Call Forward by Call Type
(CFCT) handles the call.
Hunt DN, defined in telephone data block
CFNA to attendant
Flexible CFNA DN, defined in telephone data block
CFNA not allowed basic-10
Enable Flexible Numbering Plan for customer.
fnp-23
Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer
The number of seconds in two second intervals that CFW should be suspended on a set that has just forwarded a call off-node. Odd entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.
A response of 0 disables FOPT.
nas-20
The number of seconds in two second intervals that CFW (Call Forward) or ACR
(Alternate Call Routing) should be suspended on a phone that has just forwarded or routed a call off-node. Odd entries are rounded up to the next valid entry. A response of 0 disables
FOPT.
basic-7.00
First RAN number for first PCR threshold
To disable the RAN supp-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 329
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
FRRT
Response
0-511
FRT 0-(20)-2044
FTR_DATA (NO) YES
FTOP
GPXX
(FRES)
TBFT
FTTB
FTLY x
Comment
First Recorded Announcement or RAN Route for Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA).
Prompted with Recorded Overflow
Announcement (ROA) package 36 and OPT =
ROI. Enter X to remove
Pack/Rel
roa-14 frt-1 First RAN Time seconds before first RAN given.
Change Features and options basic-21
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Options.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Restricted. FTT feature is inactive.
Trunk Barring Flexible Trunk to Trunk
Connections. FTT adds new restrictions on connections not barred by TBAR
Flexible Trunk to Trunk connections Trunk
Barring. FTT lifts TBAR restrictions for routes barred by TBAR. FTT cannot add any new restrictions for non-barred routes.
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Only. All set based trunk to trunk connections for
Transfer and Conference are controlled by
FTT only.
basic-23
Unsolicited status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
Unsolicited status events are used with
Meridian Link applications. Enter the message to be sent to the host computer for telephones in the group, where: mlm-19
• 0 = No status messages monitored
• 1 = On-Hook
• 2 = Off-Hook
• 3 = Ringing
• 4 = Active
• 5 = Disconnect
• 6 = Unringing
Precede the value with an X to remove a status from the Group report.
330 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
GP02
GP03
Response
n n n n n n n n n n
Comment
The prompts GP02 through GP15 appear when Meridian Link package is equipped.
Default values are in Group 0 and Group 1:
• Group 0 = sends no messages
• Group 1 = sends all messages
Groups 0 and 1 cannot be entered or changed here, but can be entered in response to the
IAPG prompt in LD 10 and LD 11.
Pack/Rel
Group 2 status events
The following comment applies to prompts
GP03 through GP15:
Unsolicited status events are used with
Meridian Link applications. Enter the message to be sent to the host computer for telephones in the group, where: iap3p-13
• 0 = No status messages monitored
• 1 = On-Hook
• 2 = Off-Hook
• 3 = Ringing
• 4 = Active
• 5 = Disconnect
• 6 = Unringing
Precede the value with an X to remove a status from the Group report.
Default values are in Group 0 and Group 1:
• Group 0 sends no messages
• Group 1 sends all messages
Groups 0 and 1 cannot be entered or changed here, but can be entered in response to the
IAPG prompt in LD 10 and LD 11.
The prompt GP02 through GP15 are presented only with Integrated Services Digital
Network Application Module Link for 3rd Party
Vendors (IAP3P) package 153 equipped.
Group 3 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned iap3p-13
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 331
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
GP04
Response
n n n n n
GP05
GP06
GP07
GP08
GP09
GP10
GP11
GP12
GP13
GP14
GP15
HCC
HDOPT n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
(NO)
YES
XFER
Comment
Group 4 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 5 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 6 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 7 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 8 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 9 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 10 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 11 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 12 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 13 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 14 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Group 15 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned
Held Call Clearing, prompted with
International Supplementary Features
(SUPP) package 131.
feature not activated feature activated feature activated and set to transfer
Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect
Options iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 supp-9
Pack/Rel
iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 basic-24
332 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
HDTM
HLCL
HLOC
HMDN
HMTL
HNPA
HNTN
HNXX
(0)
Response
1-10
CONT
1-(30)-600
0-99 ... 99
100-9999
Comment
No Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect treatment
Number of Off-Hook Alarm Security Half
Disconnect treatments
Continuous Off-Hook Alarm Security Half
Disconnect treatment
Pack/Rel
Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect
Timer in seconds basic-24
Local code for home local number or Listed directory number (1-12 digits). Precede with X to remove.
isdn-22
100-99999999 Home Location Code (ESN) as defined in LD
90 pri-12
Up to 7 digits with extended code. Prompted when ISDN=YES, or with Digital Private
Network Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123.
xxxx
(YES) NO
200-999
Home DN
Hotel/Motel environment basic-21 hosp-21
Home Number Plan Area code defined in LD
90
Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206. Not prompted with
International Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.
nanp-19
0-999999 National code for home national number (1-6 digits). Precede with X to remove.
isdn-22
Prefix for Central Office defined in LD 90.
Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206. Not prompted with
International Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.
Allow for digit insertion between HNXX and the
DN. If HNXX is 4 digits long, only the last 3 digits of the DN are displayed in the Calling
Line ID CLID.
mlwu-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 333
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
HOL_OPT 0-3
HOSP
HOUR
HRCL
HWTT
ICCR
ICDN
ICDL
ICI
ALL
X0-3
(NO) YES hh hh hh
0-512
HSP_DATA (NO) YES
0-(300)-600
(NO) YES xxxx
3-(4)-7 x aaa x CAy
Comment Pack/Rel
Holiday redirection option for which the date applies
Date applies to all holiday options
Precede the option number with X to remove the date from that option list basic-24
Hospitality Management or Hospitality allowed hosp-21
Prompted with HOSP package 166.
Hour of day for printout
Two printouts per day allowed when SCDL =
1
Hold Recall timer
Change Hospitality Management options casm-1 basic-21
Length of Howler Tone in seconds. Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU) package 206, and Operator Callback (OPCB) package 126.
Where: 0 = continuous tone mlwu-12
Intercept position Canceling Reply is sent if transfer is canceled from Intercept computer icp-10
Internal Call DN
DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and Multi-Tenant are not on intercept position.
The DN is used for intercept treatment for internal calls. Up to 13 digits allowed.
icp-16
ICP DN Length
Length of DN to and from the ICP computer.
icp-10
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
Where: x = 0-9 if OPT = IC1, or x = 0-19 if OPT
= IC2. Where: aaa = ICI function name.
Multiple responses can be entered for the same key.
basic-20
ICI number, Station Category Indication priority level, (where y = 1-7)
334 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
x NCO x NDID x NFEX x NTIE x NUL x NWAT x RDI x RLL x Ryyy Ryyy x TRK x IAT x IEN x INT x LCT x LD0 x LD1 x LD2 x LD3 x LD4 x LD5 x MTR x MWC
Prompt Response
x CFB x CFN x DF0 x DL0 xx IADN
Comment
ICI number, Call Forward Busy
ICI number, Call Forward No Answer
ICI number, dial 0 fully restricted
ICI number, dial 0 xx = ICI key number (0 - 19)
ICI key for individual attendant DN.
ICI number, Inter-Attendant call
ICI number, Idle Extension Notification
ICI number, Intercept
ICI number, lockout intercept
ICI number, listed DN0
ICI number, listed DN1
ICI number, listed DN2
ICI number, listed DN3
ICI number, listed DN4
ICI number, listed DN5
ICI number, Meter Recall
ICI number, Message Waiting Calls
ICI number, Network CO trunk
ICI number, Network DID trunk
ICI number, Network FEX trunk
ICI number, Network TIE trunk
ICI number, remove ICI appearances
ICI number, Network WAT trunk
ICI number, RDI intercept
ICI number, Recall
ICI number, one or more Route numbers
ICI number, Trunk types and local route numbers
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
basic- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 335
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
ICMM
Response
0-9
ICP
ICP_DATA
ICPD
ICPR
ICPS
ICTD
ICWN
IDBZ
IDCA
IDEF
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-9
0-<nipn>
(CIR)
COM
(NO) YES
(0)-511
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Message number shown when the transfer is caused by a maintenance program
Pack/Rel
icp-14
Intercept Computer available
Prompted with Intercept Computer Interface
(ICP) package 143. Must be defined in LD
17.
Change Intercept Treatment options icp-10 basic-21
ICP Padding Digit
Padding digit for DNs shorter than specified in
ICDL.
icp-10 icp-10 ICP Printer number. Prompted if ICPS =
COM.
ICP Printer Search
Circular search
Common printer for all consoles
Type of Intercept Computer printer search, done when more than one console is used.
icp-10 icp-10 Intercept Computer Terminal Dial from directory
This prompt allows an intercept position of attendant type to dial an extension DN from the Intercept Computer Terminal.
Intercept Computer Owner
Prompted with Multi-Tenant Service (TENS) package 86. Tenant that owns the intercept computer.
Enable Individual Attendant DN Buzzing.
Incoming DID Digit Conversion Allowed
NFCR must = YES before IDCA can = YES.
Prompted with Incoming Digit Conversion
(IDC) package 113
Internal/external definition tens-9 basic- 23 idc-12 basic-22
336 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
IDR
IFLS
IMA
IMPH
IMS
IMS_DATA
INT
INTFIELD
X
Response
(NO)
YES
0-511
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Network wide INY/EXT definition for Call
Forward/Hunt by Call Type, Internal Call
Forward, and Break In Indication Prevention.
A call do not be treated as internal or external according to the network wide definition of internal and external calls. When IDEF = NO, information that can be entered previously at the IDEF prompt in LD 16 do not influence call treatment.
A call is treated as internal or external according to the network wide definition of internal and external calls.
Changing IDEF to NO and then back to YES do not reset the data entered in LD 16.
Pack/Rel
Identification Error RAN number
To disable the RAN supp-16
Allow switchhook flash signal from 500/2500 sets
Ignore switchhook flash signal from 500/2500 sets
If YES then sets require ground buttons.
mpo-20 ims-1
Integrated Messaging System enabled
Prompted when OPT=MCI
CDR for Incoming Packet data call
Change Integrated Messaging System features
Prompted with Integrated Message System
(IMS) package 35.
mph-19 ims-1
Change Integrated Message Service options basic-21
Internal Malicious Call Trace Alarm
If the alarm is to be rung when MCT is activated against internal calls ALRM = YES and INT = YES.
emct-20
Enable Internal Conferees Count display field.
basic- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 337
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
INTL
Response
0-9999
INTC
INT_DATA (NO) YES
INT_NAME (I) aaaa
INTR
IRFP xxx
(NO) YES x....x
Comment
Country code (1-4 digits). Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
isdn-22
International Access Code for CS 1000S,
Where: xxx = 011 for Canada
Change Intercept Treatment options basic-2 basic-21
Change Internal Conferees Count display field name.
aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.
basic- 23
Change Intercept Treatment
Intercept treatments determine the action performed when a user makes an invalid call.
Each intercept prompt requires four entries representing the type call:
• first entry = station/DISA
• second entry = attendant extended
• third entry = TIE trunk
• fourth entry = CCSA/DID trunk
One of the following responses is required for each entry: basic-1
• ATN = Intercept to Attendant
• BSY = Busy Tone
• NAP = Not Applicable
• OVF = Overflow Tone
• RAN = Intercept to Recorded
Announcement
• SRC1-SRC8 = Announcement Source
Channel
The defaults are shown for each Intercept prompt. If RAN is specified, you are prompted for the RAN route number.
Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward
Password
The password length is 1-8 digits. The password is numeric only.
arfw-20
338 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
IRFR
Response
(NO) YES
IRNG
ISDN
ITH1
ITH2
ITH3
LA11
LA32
LA41
LA42
LA51
LA12
LA21
LA22
LA31
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
1-255
1-255
1-255
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
0-511
Comment
Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward
Password Required
Intercom Ring
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom
Visual Indication Threshold 3 calls in queue > ITH3
Primary RAN route for Language 1
Prompted with Multi-Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206.
Pack/Rel
arfw-20 drng-4
Integrated Services Digital Network allowed for customer
Prompted when ISDN signaling package 145 is equipped and either the Integrated Service
Digital Network BRI Trunk Access (BRIT) package 233 is equipped or at least one PRA link is configured.
isdn-12 bacd-8 Visual Indication Threshold 1
TH1 ? calls in queue ? ITH2
Visual Indication Threshold 2
ITH2 ? calls in queue ? ITH3 bacd-8 bacd-8 mlwu-16
Secondary RAN route for Language 1
Primary RAN route for Language 2
Secondary RAN route for Language 2
Primary RAN route for Language 3
Secondary RAN route for Language 3
Primary RAN route for Language 4
Secondary RAN route for Language 4
Primary RAN route for Language 5 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 339
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
LA52
LADN
LCKT
LDA0
LDA1
7LDA2
LDA3
LDA4
LDA5
LDBZ
Response
0-511 x...x
Comment
Secondary RAN route for Language 5
Pack/Rel
mlwu-16
Local Attendant Directory Number
This must be different from the DN entered for
ATDN. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
casr-1 isdn-15
(BSY BSY BSY BSY)
Call to a lockout set
1-63
ALL
Attendant consoles associated with LDN0
Allow LDN0 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.
basic-5
1-63
ALL
1-63
ALL
1-63
ALL
Attendant consoles associated with LDN1
Allow LDN1 on all attendants. Precede with X to remove.
basic-5 basic-5 Attendant consoles associated with LDN2
Allow LDN2 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.
Attendant consoles associated with LDN3
Allow LDN3 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.
basic-5
1-63
ALL
1-63
ALL n n n n n n
ALL
X
Attendant consoles associated with LDN4
Attendant consoles associated with LDN4
Attendant console associated with LDN5
Attendant console associated with LDN5 nldn-20 nldn-20
Listed Directory Number Buzzing groups
0,1,2,3,4, or 5.
The Departmental Listed Directory Number groups which should be buzzed when a Listed
Directory Number/Code Blue call is in the attendant queue.
Precede with 'X' to remove.
basic-23
340 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
LDN_DATA (NO) YES
LDN0
LDN1
LDN2
LDN3
LDN4
LDN5
LDNT
LDTT x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
(NO) YES
2-(6)-30
Comment
Change Departmental Listed Directory
Numbers
Listed Directory Number 0
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
LDN0 must be defined for ISDN PRI DID service. The length of LDN0 determines the number of trailing digits translated as the dialed DN on PRI DID routes.
Listed DN 1
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
Listed DN 2
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
Listed DN 3
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
Listed DN 4
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
Listed DN 5
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove an entry.
Listed Directory Number Tone
Special tone to CAS main attendant when presented with LDN calls.
Line disconnect tone timer for 500/2500 telephones in seconds
Pack/Rel
basic-21 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 nldn-20 nldn-20 casr-12 basic-17
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 341
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
LEC
Response
0-99..99
X
LEND
LFFD
LFTN
LINK
LLT
(NO)
YES x00..x00
l s c u c u
(NO) YES
(OVF)
ATN
OFA
Comment
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
Remove LEC
Pack/Rel
List Entry Number Delimiter
A delimiter (*) is neither required nor allowed between the list entry number and telephone number
A delimiter (*) is required between the list entry number and telephone number.
LEND is prompted with packages scc-1 or ssc-34 ssc-22
First DN of lamp field array for ILF.
The system shows the status of the next 150 consecutive DNs. Last two digits of first DN must be 00. First DN must start on even 100
(e. g., 3400 is acceptable, but 3450 is not).
Precede with X to remove. Prompted when
OPT = ILF.
basic-1
Lamp Field array Terminal Number
LFTN is prompted again for a second lamp field array. For Supervisory Console, when assigning lamp field array to show Attendant status, enter the secondary TN of the console.
To remove the second LFTN, enter "0". To remove both LFTNs, enter XLF in response to prompt OPT. Prompted when OPT = ILF. Not allowed for 2000/3000 series telephones.
For Small System basic-1 dnis-10 ACD DNIS Link option. Prompted if OPT =
DNI.
Flexible Line Lockout Treatment
Overflow tone
Attendant
Overflow, then Attendant basic-4
342 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
LOCL
Response
1-(10)
LSC
MAIN
MATT
MAXT
MBG
1-9999999
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
1-255
(0)-65535
Comment
Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing
(VNR) Location digits (LOC). Enter the maximum number of LOC digits expected by
VNR.
Pack/Rel
fnp-14
Local Steering Code. LSC can be one to seven digits.
cdp-12
LSCs are required if the CDP DNs are longer than the local PDNs. The CLID sent for a CDP call is composed of the LSC defined in LD 15 plus the PDN of the calling set.
Various ISDN network features depend on the
CLID as the return address for sending feature control messages. Multiple LSCs can be defined in LD 87 for CDP but only one LSC can be defined here for the CLID.
The LSC prompt appears only if the user has a five or six digit dialing plan, or if the DPNSS software package is equipped. LSC is prompted here if ISDN = NO, otherwise LSC is a sub-prompt of ISDN.
Precede with X to remove
CAS Main
Consoles used as Message Center
Prompted with Message Waiting Center
(MWC) package 46 and OPT = MCI.
casm-1 mwc-1
Maximum number of NFCR translation tables nfcr-2
Once defined a lower value cannot be entered for MAXT. The sum of the values for MAXT and
DCMX cannot exceed 255 or MAXT + DCMX ?
255 per customer.
tens-16 Multi-location Business Group. Where:
• 0 = no indication
• 1 = reserved for public network
• 2-65535 = Business Group Identifiers
This parameter is used to define the Multilocation Business Group. It is not currently
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 343
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
MBNR
MCDC
MCLR
MCRT
MDID
MFAC
MFC_ENT
Response Comment
used by the MSL-1, but is added for interfacing with systems that require it.
Pack/Rel
(OVF OVF OVF ATN)
Maintenance Busy Numbers
MAIL MAIL MAIL MAIL
Mail intercept treatment configuration basic-1 sipe-25
(NO) YES
(NO) YES xxxx
Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed
Meter Clear after printing mct-10 supp-15
Malicious Call Trace Recorder route number as defined in LD 16.
emct-20
(NO) YES x
No Answer DID calls routed to Message
Center
Prompted with Message Waiting Center
(MWC) package 46 and OPT = MCI.
mwc-1
Mobile Extension Feature Activation Code.
Enables a mobile telephone connected to another telephone in a CS 1000 system, to signal the CS 1000 system for activation of various Call in Progress features (FFCs).
Enables a mobile phone user to Conference in, or Transfer a call to, a third party. Places the mobile phone on HOLD and provides a dial tone to connect to the third party. Used in combination with the Conference and Transfer
FFCs (LD57) for mobile telephones.
Where x = 1 character code.
• Nortel recommends that "*" be used as the
Mobile Feature Activation Code. You must coordinate with the Mobile and Public
Network providers to ensure this PBX configuration does not conflict with their feature interface.
• The MFAC code does not have to be unique with the customer number planning, as it is only dialed during established calls and is not valid in a dialing state.
mobx-5.50
CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC
344 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MFCG
MFID
MFVN
MFVO
MHLD
Response
(0)-31
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
<CR>
Comment
CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified
CAC conversion table entry to be deleted
CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be deleted.
Exit MFC CAC conversion table, gives
CIS_ENT prompt.
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered as response.
For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.
An ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.
Pack/Rel
(OVF OVF OVF ATN)
MFC Congestion a opcb-14
Manufacturer Identifier. a = an alpha character representing a Manufacturer
The MFID is stored in the Non Specified
Information (NSI) table.
dmwi- 23
Note:
The first entry in the table is sent in NSI. The
NSI table must be configured with the proper MFID to send.
To delete a Manufacturer Identifier from the
NSI table, enter 'X' in front of the Manufacturer
Identifier.
'XALL' to remove all the existing Message
Waiting Indication Non Specified Information tables.
opcb-14 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)
MFC Call to Vacant Number
(OVF OVF OVF ATN)
MFC Call to Vacant Office
(NO)
YES
Manual Hold after inquiry is not required
Manual Hold after inquiry is required opcb-14 mpo-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 345
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
MLDN
Response
<MAIL DN>
MLPPSD xxxxxx
MPH (NO) YES mail DN
Comment Pack/Rel
sipe-25
Default MLPP service domain used when no value is entered for the MLPPSD prompt in
Overlay 87.
Where: xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range (000000 to FFFFFF) used to signify a
24 bit binary integer. Default is (000000).
atvn-25.47
CDR for Meridian Packet Handler
This is the Call Detail Records for an incoming packet data call from the Public Switched
Packet Data Network to the Meridian Packet
Handler mph-19
MPO_DATA
(NO) YES
MPOP
(NO)
YES
MSCD
MSG1
MSG2
(NO)
YES a...a
a...a
Change Multi Party Options basic-21
Multi-Party Operations
Do not define certain multi-party options
Define certain multi-party options
Prompted with Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package 141.
mpo-20
Mandatory Speed Call Delimiter
End of dial speed call delimiter is optional
A delimiter is required to store the number. A confirmation tone is given if this option is configured.
MSCD is prompted with package scc-1.
ssc-22
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message
346 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MSG3
MSG4
MSG5
MSG6
MSG7
MSG8
MSG9
Response
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
Comment
a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters)
Pack/Rel
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Set-to-Set Message
Where: basic-25.4
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 347
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
MSG10
MSRN
MSSC
MTAR
MURT
MUS
MUSR
MWFB
Response
a...a
x...x
a
(NO)
YES
0-511
X
(NO) YES
(0)-511
(NO) YES
Comment
a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters)
Pack/Rel
Set-to-Set Message
Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4
Media Services Routing Number a = any alphanumeric character
Manufacturer-specific service character for
Message Waiting Notification.
basic-7.00
dmwi- 23
Disable Meridian Mail Trunk Access
Restriction
Enable Meridian Mail Trunk Access
Restriction
MTAR is prompted if OPT = MCI and Message
Center (MWC) package 46 is equipped.
mwc-22 mus-1 Music Route
Prompted if WAIT = MUS.
To remove.
Music for Sets
Prompted with Enhanced Music (EMUS) package 119.
emus-12
Music Route for Sets
The default is route "0" which is not normally a music route. Enter X to remove. Prompted if
MUS = YES.
emus-12
DID calls to busy telephones routed to
Message Center
Prompted with Message Waiting Center
(MWC) package 46 and when OPT = MCI.
mwc-1
348 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MWNS
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Message Waiting Indication DPNSSI Non
Specified Information string to recognize.
Pack/Rel
dmwi- 23
NAS_ ACTV
NATC
NAUT
NBLK
NCOS
(YES) NO
NAS_ ATCL (YES) NO x
Network Attendant Service routing Activated nas-20
Network Attendant Service Attendant Control allowed nas-20
National Access Code for CS 1000S, Where: x = 1 for Canada basic-2
YES
(NO)
Network Authorization Code prompt is given for every leg of a conference.
Network Authorization Code prompt is given for first leg of a conference.
naut-1 esn-1 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)
NARS/BARS blocked calls
(0)-99 Network Class of Service for all Attendant consoles in this customer.
Prompted with Network Class of Service
(NCOS) package 32.
ncos-1
NCS1
NCS2
NDID
(0)-99
(0)-99
(NO) YES
NET_DATA (NO) YES
NFCR
(NO)
YES
Network Class of Service
Network Class of Service ncos-1 ncos-1
No Answer non-DID calls routed to Message
Center
Prompted with Message Waiting Center
(MWC) package 46 and when OPT = MCI.
mwc-1
Change ISDN and ESN networking options basic-21
New Flexible Code Restriction
Do not enable New Flexible Code Restriction
Enable New Flexible Code Restriction
To build an IDC table in LD 49, NFCR and
IDCA must be set to YES. NFCR is prompted with New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) package 49.
nfcr-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 349
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
NFNA
NFNS
NIT4
Response
(0)-63
(0)-504 x...x
Comment Pack/Rel
Night Forward No Answer ring cycles
The number of times a DID/DOD and CO trunk call rings a set before being disconnected during Night Service. Prompted if OPT =
DNCA.
afna-14
Night Forward No Answer Seconds
If a value is entered for this prompt all outgoing
CO/DOD trunk calls in a waiting state, and all incoming CO/DID trunk calls in the answered state is disconnected after the time in seconds expires as entered in this prompt. The entered value must be a multiple of 8.
Prompted if OPT = DNCS.
afna-14
NINV
NIPN
NIT
NIT_DATA
NIT1
(OVF OVF OVF
ATN)
Invalid NARS/BARS call
2-(8)
2-(8)
(NO) YES x...x
Number of Intercept Positions that can be configured
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)
Interdigit Timer
Change Night Service options esn-1 icp-14 basic-21
First Night Service DN by time of day
DN can be defined as a PLDN
Up to four night service DNs can be defined.
The time of day is specified by the prompts
TIM1 to TIM4.
A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. Up to
4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
basic-12
NIT2 x...x
Second Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12
NIT3 x...x
Third Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12
Fourth Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12
350 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NIT5
NITR
NMME
Response
x...x
Comment
Network Alternate Route Selection Interdigit
Timer
(OVF OVF OVF
ATN)
NARS/BARS invalid translation
(NO) YES Enable/disable Multimedia Services for SIP
Lines.
Pack/Rel
fnp-20 esn-1 basic-6.00
NNT
NOTI
NPI
NRES
NRWU
NSCP
NSO
NWT
0-253
(NO) YES
E163
E164
NATL
PRIV
TELX
UNKN
X121
Night Number Table
Speed Call List number designated to be used as the Night Number Table ens-20
Non Specified Information string for Message
Waiting Notification.
dmwi- 23
Numbering Plan based on E163
Numbering Plan based on E164
National
Private
Telex
Unknown
Data X121 isdn-24
(OVF OVF OVF ATN)
NARS/BARS calls which are restricted by
Supplemental Digit Restriction (SDRR) intercept treatment. See prompt INTR for details.
2-(5) Number of Rings for Wake Up before recall to attendant esn-1 awu-10
(NO) YES
0-9
(NO) YES
OAS_DATA (NO) YES
OCB1
Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed sco-20
Night Service Option number
Night Call Waiting Tone enabled ens-20 ens-20
Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options
Outgoing Call Barring level 1 basic-21 basic-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 351
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
OCB2
OCB3
OCLI
ODN0
ODN1
ODN2
Response Comment
(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level
1. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.
The default entry to OCB1 is zero (0).
255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
Pack/Rel
Outgoing Call Barring level 2
(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level
2. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.
The default entry to OCB2 is zero (0).
255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
basic-21
Outgoing Call Barring level 3
(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level
3. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.
The default entry to OCB3 is zero (0).
255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.
basic-21
(NO)
EXT
ALL
NO manipulation is done on outgoing CLID for calls forwarded to EuroISDN link.
Last forwarding DN is sent as CLID information for incoming UIPE DID or CO calls landing on G/W node and forwarded back to this link.
The scenario described above still applies.
Moreover, last forwarding DN is sent as CLID for internal calls on ISDN tie except DPNSS
(MCDN/QSIG.) or local calls (Sets) redirected from G/W node to UIPE DID or CO link. If the redirection does not occur on G/W node, redirecting information number is sent as CLID if present in the incoming SETUP message received on G/W node from private network.
basic-23 xxxx xxxx xxxx
OHAS Security DN for zone 0
OHAS Security DN for zone 1
OHAS Security DN for zone 2 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18
352 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ODN3
ODN4
ODN5
ODN6
ODN7
ODN8
ODN9
OHAS
Response
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
(NO) YES
OMPH
OPT
(NO) YES aaa
(ABDD)
ABDA
(AHD)
AHA
(AMD)
Comment
OHAS Security DN for zone 3
OHAS Security DN for zone 4
OHAS Security DN for zone 5
OHAS Security DN for zone 6
OHAS Security DN for zone 7
OHAS Security DN for zone 8
OHAS Security DN for zone 9
Off-Hook Alarm Security
Enter X to remove the OHAS DNs for the following zones.
basic-18
This is the Call Detail Records for an outgoing packet data call from the Meridian Packet
Handler to the Public Switched Packet Data
Network
CDR for outgoing packet data call mph-19
Options
Multiple options separated by spaces are allowed in response to the OPT prompt. The last option must be followed by a carriage return <CR>. The <CR> inputs the options selected and is followed by either the next prompt or a system message.
basic-1 supp-6 Attendant Busy Display Denied
Attendant Busy Display Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
Autohold on Loop Key Denied
Autohold on Loop Key Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
Attendant Monitor Denied misop-20 china-21
Pack/Rel
basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 353
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
AMA
(ATDA)
ATDD
(BIND)
BBIN
EBIN
(BIXA)
BIXD
(BLA)
BLD
(BOHD)
BOHA
(BWTD)
BWTA
(CCBD)
CCBA
(CFO)
CFF
Comment
Attendant Monitor Allowed
Only with China Attendant Monitor (CHINA) package 285.
Attendant Through Dialling Allowed.
Attendant Through Dialling Denied.
Break-In Indication Denied
Basic Break-In Indication
Extended Break-In Indication
Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package
127.
Break-In to external call Allowed
Break-In to external call Denied
Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package
127.
Pack/Rel
basic- 23 bki-9 bki-9
Break-In to Line Lockout Set Allowed
Break-In to Line Lockout Set Denied
Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package
127.
Position Busy with Calls on Hold Denied
Position Busy with Calls on Hold Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
bki-9 supp-6
Breakin Warning Tone Denied
Breakin Warning Tone Allowed
Collect Call Blocking Denied
Collect Call Blocking Allowed ponw-25.4
ccb-21
Call Forward Originating
Call Forward Forwarding
Either the Originating or Forwarding party's
Class of Service is used to determine access to services or features on Call Forward.
basic-1
354 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(CFRD)
CFRA
(CHDD)
CHDA
(COX)
COP
(CPD)
CPA
CPN
(CTD)
CTA
(CUI)
MTI
(CWRD)
CWRA
(CXOD)
CXOA
(DBD)
Comment
Call Forward Reminder tone for 500/2500 telephone Denied.
Call Forward Reminder tone for 500/2500 telephone Allowed.
Charge Display Denied at end of call
Charge Display Allowed at end of call
Pack/Rel
cfrt-19 supp-16
Central Office call No Priority for Ringing
Central Office call Priority for Ringing
Number Pickup or RNPU and Group Call
Pickup GPUA dcp-12
Call Park Denied
Call Park Allowed. Call Park (CPRK) package
33 must be equipped.
CPN enables the Call Park Network wide
(CPRKNET) option. CPRKNET package 306 must be equipped.
cpk-2 basic-1 Camp-On Tone Denied
Camp-On Tone Allowed
CI lamps show Attendant Console Group
(ACG) information for incoming calls
CI lamps show Multi-Tenant Service (MTS) information for incoming calls
Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169 coop-14
CFNA treatment for Call Waiting calls on a DN
Denied
CFNA treatment for Call Waiting calls on a DN
Allowed basic-21
No Override of Call Forward External
Overrides Call Forward External Denied
(CFXD) to allow call forward to a CDP Distant
Steering Code (DSC)
Flexible Incoming Tones Denied on digital sets basic-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 355
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
DBA
(DNCA)
DNCS
(DNX)
DNI
(DRE)
DRT
(DSX)
DSI
(DSTD)
DSTA
Comment
Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed on digital sets
Pack/Rel
If DNCA is entered, all DID/CO or DOD calls are disconnected after the number of ring cycles defined by the response to the NFNA prompt while the system is in Night Service.
If DNCS is entered, outgoing CO/DOD calls or incoming CO/DID calls in the answered state, and waiting on a set are disconnected after the number of seconds defined in response to the
NFNS prompt expires.
Only with Attendant Forward No Answer
(AFNA) package 134.
afna-14
ACD Dialed Number Identification Service feature excluded
ACD Dialed Number Identification Service feature Included
Only with Dialed Number Identification Service
(DNIS) package 98 dnis-10 coop- 5 Queue thermometer REST Excludes Inter-
Attendant calls, Recalls and Metered calls
Queue thermometer REST Includes Inter-
Attendant calls, Recalls and Metered calls
Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169
Data Services or server IS Excluded
Data Services or server IS Included
Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package
127.
bkil-8
DID call to Second degree busy Treatment
Denied
DID call to Second degree busy Treatment
Allowed
If Allowed DID calls forwarded to a busy set are disconnected. If Denied DID calls forwarded to a busy set follow the set's CLS
(FBA/FBD) treatment.
supp-6
356 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
(FKA)
FKD
GPAA
(GPAD)
(HLPD)
HLPA
(HRLD)
HRLA
(HTU)
HTR
Response
(FACD)
FACA
(HVD)
HVA
(IC1)
IC2
(IHD)
IHA
(LLCD)
LLCA
Comment
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
Flexible Attendant Call Waiting (ACW) thresholds Denied
Flexible Attendant Call Waiting (ACW) thresholds Allowed
If allowed, the Call Waiting thresholds are expressed as a percentage of the active consoles.
Forward Key Allowed
Forward Key Denied
Group Pickup Alert Allowed
Group Pickup Alert Denied
Individual Hold Lamp Option Denied.
Individual Hold Lamp Option Allowed.
Pack/Rel
supp-15 basic-6 basic-7.0
dhld- 23
Individual Hold Release Option Denied.
Individual Hold Release Option Allowed.
dhld- 23
Hot Line access Unrestricted
Hot Line access Restricted
If Restricted only Hot Line calls may terminate on Hot Line DNs. Only with Enhanced Hot Line
(HOT) package 70.
hot-10 hva-19 Handsfree Voice call Denied
Handsfree Voice call Allowed
Incoming Call Indicator key/lamp strips
One key/lamp strip = 10 ICIs
Two key/lamp strips = 20 ICIs basic-1
Individual Hold Denied
Individual Hold Allowed basic-1
Line Load Control commands in LD 2 Denied llc-10
Line Load Control commands in LD 2 Allowed
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 357
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
(LOD)
LOA
(LRD)
LRA
(MCTD)
MCTA
(MCX)
MCI
(MKRA)
MKRL
(MWUD)
MWUA
(NCD)
NCA
(PCMD)
PCMA
Comment Pack/Rel
Lockout Denied
Lockout Allowed
LOA locks an attendant out of re-entering an established call on the console Hold key. The attendant can override with the Barge-In feature.
basic-1
Last Number Redial Denied
Last Number Redial Allowed
Only with Last Number Redial (LNR) package
90.
Inr-8
Malicious Call Trace signal Denied
Malicious Call Trace signal Allowed
Only with Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package
107 mct-10 mwc-1 Message Center Excluded
Message Center Included
Multiple Key Ring All
Multiple Key Ring Lowest
Message Waiting Unconditional Denied
Message Waiting Unconditional Allowed basic_7.00
ffc-14
When an Attendant Console Group (ACG) is in Night Service, redirection of attendant calls is denied.
coop-5
When an Attendant Console Group (ACG) is in Night Service, redirection of attendant calls is allowed.
Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169.
Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail Denied nas-14
Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail Allowed
Must have PCMA to output PCMM prompt in
LD 23. Requires International Supplementary
358 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(PSD)
PSA
(PVCA)
PVCD
(RECA)
RECO
Comment
Features (SUPP) package 131 and Network
Attendant Services (NAS) package 157.
Presentation Status selection Denied on attendant consoles
Presentation Status selection Allowed on attendant consoles
Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169
Pack/Rel
coop- 5
Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward Allowed arfw-20
Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward Denied
Attendant calls is redirected when all but one console is busy.
Attendant calls is redirected when all consoles are busy.
coop-5
(REA)
RED
(RND)
RNA
(ROX)
ROI
(RTD)
RTA
Note:
Attendant calls are redirected when there is no presentation status to other consoles in the console group. Console Operations
(COOP) package 169 is required.
Release on Exclusion Allowed
Release on Exclusion Denied misop-20
Ring Again No Answer Denied
Ring Again No Answer Allowed misop-20
Recorded Overflow Announcement Excluded roa-2
Recorded Overflow Announcement Included
This treatment applies exclusively to congested consoles with Recorded Overflow
Announcement (ROA) package 36.
Coordinated Dialing Plan routing feature
Denied
Coordinated Dialing Plan routing feature
Allowed cdp-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 359
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
(RTR)
ROR
(SBD)
SBA
(SDDE)
SDAL
(SIAD)
SIAA
(SLD)
SLA
(SYD)
SYA
EHS
(THPD)
THPA
Comment
RTA allows DID routing with Distant Steering
Codes over CO and WATS trunks. Only with
Call Detail Recording (CDP) package 59.
Pack/Rel
Terminating side of call determines ringing or buzzing cadence used
Originating side of call determines ringing or buzzing cadence used
Only with Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125.
ftc-14
Flexible Incoming Tones Denied for SL-1 telephones
Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed for SL-1 telephones
Only with Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125.
ftc-14
Single Digit Access to Hotel Services (Denied)
Allowed
Single Digit Access to Hotel Services (Denied)
Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
supp-6
Source Included when Attendant dials Denied supp-18
Source Included when Attendant dials Allowed supp-6 Slow Answer Recall Enhancement Denied
Slow Answer Recall Enhancement Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
basic-1 Secrecy Denied
Secrecy Allowed
Enhanced Secrecy Allowed
ACD Threshold Percentage Denied
ACD Threshold Percentage Allowed
Only with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
supp-5
360 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(TOA)
TOD
OTCR
(TTAD)
TTAA
(VOBD)
VOBA
(XBL)
IBL
(XDP)
IDP
(XLDN)
NLDN
(XLF)
ILF
(XTG)
ITG
(NO) YES
Comment
Attendant Monitor Tone Allowed
Attendant Monitor Tone Denied
Only with China Attendant Monitor Package
(CHINA) package 285.
Pack/Rel
china-21
Time To Answer and Abandoned call records
Denied
Time To Answer and Abandoned call records
Allowed
Only with New Format CDR (FCDR) package
234.
fcdr-8
Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override
Enhancement Denied
Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override
Enhancement Allowed basic-20
Exclude Enhanced Busy Lamp Field
Include Enhanced Busy Lamp Field
IBL and ILF cannot be used together. Only with
M2250 Attendant Console (DCON) package
140.
dcon-15 ddsp-1 Exclude Digit Display
Include Digit Display
Network-wide LDN denied
Network-wide LDN allowed nldn-20
Exclude Lamp Field array
Include Lamp Field array
Exclude key/lamp expansion module
Include key/lamp expansion module
Used as Trunk Group Busy field or supervisory lamp field basic-1
CDR provided, based on Originally Dialed
Trunk Route supp-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 361
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
PANI
Response
(NO) YES
PBLK
PBUZ
PCA
(ATN)
RAN
CPAS
OVF xx yy
(OFF) ON
Comment
M911 Pseudo ANI display where:
• No = no display pseudo ANI
• Yes = display pseudo ANI
Pack/Rel
basic-25
Call presented has higher precedence.
Attendant
Ran trunk
Central Precedence answering station
Overflow tone basic-21
Priority Buzzing cadence for IADN and Code
Blue calls.
xx - priority buzz-on phase yy - priority buzz off phase
Range is from 2 to 16 seconds. If the value entered is an odd number between 2 and 16, it is truncated to the next lowest even integer.
basic- 23
Personal Call Assistant, where:
OFF = Turns PCA off at the customer level
ON = Turns PCA on at the customer level pca-3.0
PCDL
PCDS
PCMC
PELK
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
0-(15)-31
(NO)
YES
Note:
Configuration of the PCA is preserved and enabled regardless of whether or not the feature is enabled.
PPM output on CDR Link. An additional three words is added to tape record.
supp-15
Programming of Control Digits is not required mpo-20
Programming of Control Digits is required
Pulse Code Modulation Conversions permitted in a network connection, µ-Law to A-
Law or A- Law to µ-Law, in a network connection esn-14
Do not enable Electronic Lock on Private Lines ffc-21
Enable Electronic Lock on Private Lines
362 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PFAN
PFNA
PFX1
PFX2
PHDT
PHIP
Response
(ATN)
RAN
CPAS
(ATN)
RAN
CPAS x...x
x...x
1-(30)-63
(ATN)
RAN
CPAS
OVF
Comment
Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer (Call waiting)
Attendant
Ran trunk
Central Precedence answering station
Pack/Rel
basic-21
Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer
Attendant
Ran trunk
Central Precedence answering station basic-21
Prefix 1. Prefix or area code for International
PRA. First element of Calling Party Number.
PFX1 + PFX2 + DN cannot exceed 8 numbers for AXE-10. Prompted with International
Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.
pri2-15
Prefix 2. Central Office Prefix for International
PRA. Second element of Calling Part
Number.
pri2-15
PFX1 + PFX2 + DN cannot exceed 8 numbers for AXE-10. Prompted with International
Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.
ss25-4 Permanent Hold Timer
Number of two second intervals between reminders, for example: 30 = 60 seconds. If
Audible Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) is enabled then DBRC takes precedence over
PHDT.
Prompted with 2500 Set Features (SS25) package 18.
Precedence dialed is higher than allowed.
Attendant
Ran trunk
Central Precedence answering station
Overflow tone basic-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 363
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
PICP
(ATN)
RAN
CPAS
OVF
PINT (NO) YES
PINX_DN xx...x
PKND (1)-3
(1)-4
PNI
Response
1-16283
Comment
Intercept treatment if called party cannot be preempted.
Attendant
Ran trunk
Central Precedence answering station
Overflow tone
Change precedence Intercept treatment.
Node DN
Pack/Rel
basic-21 basic-21 basic-21
Number of digits Dialed for Group Pickup
Prompted with Directed Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.
To determine the number of digits, count the number of digits of the highest number RNPG group.
dcp-12
Private Network Identifier
Each customer data block must have a unique
PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.
The PNI in the CDB functions as a logical customer number for routing incoming noncall-associated Transaction Capability
Application Part (TCAP) facility messages to the appropriate ESN translations.
PNI = 1 is typical for customer 0. It must be matched by the PNI in the far end RDB.
Default PNI = 0 prevents the operation of features such as NRAG, NACD and NMS.
Within one network, use the same value for
PNI in both LD 15 and LD 16. When interworking with different networks, the LD 15 PNI is for the local system and the LD 16 PNI is for the target or remote switch.
PORT 0-15
<CR>
Note:
Requires package 148 (NTWK)
CDR port
Stop PORT prompt cdr-1
364 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PPMD
PPM_DATA (NO) YES
PREF
PREO
PRMT
PRNG
0-9999
(0)
1
Response
(0)-15
(YES) NO
#
X aaa
0 - (40) - 60
Comment
To remove a CDR port, change CDR = NO.
Exit and re-enter LD 15, select CDR = YES, then add only the desired CDR port numbers.
Precede with X to remove.
Serial Data Interface Port Monitor (Features and Options Data Block)
One Serial Data Interface Port Monitor per customer is recommended.
Pack/Rel
Periodic Pulse Metering
Prompted with Message Registration (MR) package 101.
Change Periodic Pulse Metering options mr-10 basic-21
Up to 4 digit Access Prefix for a unique NPI/
TON combination in the table.
Wild character for replacement of any digit.
The entry of # for wild card character is stored as *.
Reset the access prefix value to nil isdn-24
Pretranslation Option
Disabled
Enabled
To enable the Pretranslation feature, the
Pretranslation data block or Calling Group to
Speed Call correlation must be configured in
LD 18.
Prompted with Pretranslation (PXLT) package
92.
pxlt-8 aaa = sequence of any alphanumeric character. max of 126 characters.
Subsequent Non Specified Information parameters for Message Waiting notification.
'PRMT" is re-prompted until <CR> is entered, then the next prompt 'CANC' is prompted.
dmwi- 23
Precedence ringback timer in seconds.
atvn-25.47
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 365
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
PRMT
Response
0 - (60)-120
PSTN
PTTY
(NO) YES
(0)-15
Comment
Duration of preemption tone before set goes to line lock out.
Pack/Rel
atvn-25.47
Public Service Telephone Networks
Limit the number of PSTNs allowed in a network connection to one PSTN. The default
(NO) puts no limit on the number of PSTN connections.
isdn-14
PPM TTY number for printing meters (one per switch)
Precede with X to remove.
Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206. TTY must be defined with USER = BGD in LD 17.
mlwu-16
PWD_DATA
(NO) YES
PWD2 x...x
R2BN
R2ED
RALL
RAN1
0-23 0-59
0-23 0-59
(NO)
YES x...x
Customer related passwords basic-21
Second level administration Password
Password length is 4-16 characters and is defined in LD 17. The SPWD password is not updated unless the PWD2 password is entered correctly. PWD2 must be entered before new ATAC is accepted.
basic-1
RAN2 Begin time
RAN2 End time awu-10 awu-10
Mandatory Recall is not required prior to dialing control digits
Mandatory Recall is required prior to dialing control digits mpo-20
Primary Ran route, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E
Use RAN1 as the Primary route for Language
0 in a Multi Language AWU application. The route must be unique. TYPE must = AWR in
LD 16.
mpo-20
366 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RAN2
RANF
RANR
RCLE
RCNT
RCY1
RCY2
Response
x...x
x...x
x...x
Comment Pack/Rel
Secondary RAN route, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E
Use RAN2 as the Secondary route for
Language 0 in a Multi Language AWU application. The route must be unique. TYPE must = AWR in LD 16.
mpo-20
Music route, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E
TYPE must = AWR in LD 16.
awu-10
RAN Route number, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E ran-1
(ATN OVF ATN ATN)
Redirection Count Limit Exceeded as defined by TRCL
TN is not allowed for attendant calls. NAP is not allowed for any field for RCLE.
isdn-15
0-(1)-5
1-(6)-15
1-(4)-15
Redirection Count for ISDN calls
Maximum number of inter-node hops allowed in a network redirection call, only enforced when ISDN = YES. This field must be set to greater than 0 for a network redirection to take place.
esn-14 mpo-20 Number of Cycles of Re-ringing before forwarding to attendant or disconnecting.
Applies only if RGNA = DAR or AAR.
Number of Cycles of Ringing before forwarding to transferring station
Valid only for the RGNA option.
mpo-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 367
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response
RDR_DATA (NO) YES
RECD (NO)
YES
REF0
REF1
REF2
REF3 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
R_ENTRY aa
REQ:
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
<CR>
?
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
Comment
Change Call Redirection
Pack/Rel
basic-21
Malicious Call Trace Recorder is not activated emct-20
Malicious Call Trace Recorder is activated
Not prompted when defining a new customer.
DN for Reference trunk 0
DN for Reference trunk 1
DN for Reference trunk 2
DN for Reference trunk 3 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1
ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified
ANI entry for an incoming route to be deleted
ANI entries for an incoming between aa and bb to be deleted.
Exit
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered as response.
ANI entries must be between 0 and
(R_SIZE-1).
For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.
An R-ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.
cist-24
Request
A colon following a prompt indicates enhanced processing. Enhanced processing allows a user to either view a list of possible responses or input an abbreviated response.
Get a list of possible responses
Change existing data block
Exit overlay program
Add new data block to the system
Remove data block basic-1
368 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RGNA
Response
(NEW)
CHG
OUT xxx yyy
Comment
The REQ prompt appears under the NET:
Networking gate opener and the following responses is valid with respect to the DPNSSI
Message Waiting Indication feature.
Pack/Rel
dmwi- 23
Create a new Message Waiting Indication Non
Specified Information table.
Change a Message Waiting Indication Non
Specified Information table.
Delete a Message Waiting Indication Non
Specified Information table.
Ringing No Answer treatment
Where xxx is for internal calls and yyy is for external calls. Valid entries for xxx and yyy are: mpo-20
• AAR - Forward to Attendant or Night Service after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles
• ATN - Forward to Attendant or Night Service
• DAR - Disconnect After Re-ringing for RCY1 cycles
• DIS - Disconnect
• OVF - provide Overflow Tone
• (STD) - Standard Operation (this is the default)
RICI
RLA
RLCR xx
0-511
0-511
X
ICI key numbers that may receive ROA
Where: x = 0-9 if OPT = IC1 or 0-19 if OPT =
IC2
Precede with X to remove.
roa-2 casr-1 Release Link route number.
Route 31 can be designated an exclusively private route in LD 16.
Relocation FFC Error RAN number
To disable the RAN supp-16
RLI 0-999 0-1999
ROA_DATA (NO) YES
Route List Index fnp-20 basic-7.00
Change Recorded Overflow Announcement basic-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 369
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
ROPT
Response
(NRO)
RPA
RPNS
RR
R_SIZE
RTIM
RAX
ROA
ROX
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-511
1-512 xxx yyy zzz
Comment
No Route Optimization This option can be used to suppress Route Optimization on switches which already have high traffic.
Route optimization is performed on calls which have experienced alternative routing, been transferred or have been extended by an attendant.
Route Optimization after Alternative routing
Route Optimization after Transfer and extension by an attendant
Pack/Rel
dnwk-16
Radio Paging Allowed
Recall with Priority during Night Service rpa-20 supp-15
RAN route number.
ran-1
Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.
If <CR> is entered when REQ=NEW (new customer, it defaults to 1.
After conversion it defaults to the number of
ANI entries for incoming route created during conversion.
The R_SIZE can't be decreased if the entries are not empty cist-24
Recall. Where:
• xxx = 0-(30)-378 (for Slow-Answer)
• yyy = 0-(30)-510 (for Camp-On)
• zzz = 0-(30)-510 (for Call waiting)
These timers indicate in seconds the elapsed time before attendant recall. Slow Answer must be a multiple of six seconds while Camp-
On and Call Waiting must be a multiple of two seconds, with odd numbers are rounded down.
To change one timer all three fields must be input.
For recalls timed at the local node using the redirection feature developed for DPNSS, no basic-1
370 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
RTSA
SACP (NO)
SNGL
ALL
SAMM
SATD
SBLF
SBUP
SCDL
SCPL
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Alphabetical list of prompts
April 2011 371
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt Response Comment
data dump and SYSLOAD are required to implement a change in the password length.
Signal Destination Flash Timing
Pack/Rel
basic-21 SDFL
S_ENTRY
SIPD
384-
(1024)-2048
(1)-2000 x...x
Entry of ANI table applying to a set
Configure SIP domain name, where x...x =
1-16 characters.
Allowable values:
• 0-9
• A-Z
• a-z
• . (period) basic-6.00
SIPL_ON
SIZE
SPRE
SPVC
SPWD
(NO) YES Enable/disable SIP Line Services.
Where:
• NO = disable SIP Lines Services
• YES = enable SIP Line Services basic-6.00
0-(256)-4000 Specify maximum number of CLID entries needed.
Recommended Maximum Ranges settings for machine types:
• Small System and CS 1000S - 125 entries
• Options 51C and 61C - 1000 entries
• Option 81C - 4000 isdn-22 xxxx
(0)
1-63 xxxx
Special Prefix number (1-4 digits)
Precede with X to remove. The prefix must not conflict with the numbering plan.
basic-1
Supervisory console
No Supervisor console
Attendant number of Supervisory console
Prompted with Supervisory Attendant Console
(SPVC) package 93.
Secure Data Password
Precede with X to remove. This password is entered when using LD 88 for authorization codes and LD 24 for Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) block.
bacd-8 disa-1
372 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SRAN
Response
0-511
X
SRCD
SRRT
SRT
S_SIZE
STCB
STE
STRG
STRL
T100
TAWU
TBL
TFDR
TGLD
TGR1
TGR2
(0000)-9999
0-511
X
2-(40)-2044
0-2000
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
(#), xxx
1-3 xxx...x
1-(3)
1-15
(NO) YES
0-(1)-9, *, #
(0)-31
(0)-31
Comment
Second RAN number for second PCR threshold
To disable the RAN
Set Relocation Security Code Prompted with
Set Relocation (SR) package 53.
Precede with X to remove.
Second RAN Route for ROA.
Enter X to remove.
Pack/Rel
supp-16 sr-1 roa-2
Second RAN Time, in seconds before second
RAN given
Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.
The SIZE can't be decreased if the entries are not empty.
ran-1
Station Camp-On Busy allowed
Standard Time Entry not allowed
Standard Time Entry allowed. The entry can be 3 or 4 digits long. STE is prompted if WUD
= YES.
sco-20 awu-22
String to indicate end-of-dialing
Up to three characters are allowed as defined by STRL. Valid entries are: digits 0 through 9, asterisk or *, and octothorpe or #. Default is
(#).
The default (#) cannot be used with the
Outpulsing, Asterisk, and Octothorpe (OPAO) feature package 104.
String Length of end-of-dial indicator ffc-15 ffc-15 basic-1 awu-16
DN for Type-100 test line
Number of Tries for an unanswered AWU call
This defines the number of times an unanswered AWU call is presented before recall to the attendant for manual Wake Up calls.
Table Number
Trunk Failure Display Required
Requires M2250 console. Prompted with
Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package 182.
isdn-24 tfm-15
Control digit for Toggle
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Trunk Group Access Restriction mpo-20 supp-16 supp-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 373
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
TIDM
Response
(NO)
YES
TIM_DATA
TIM1
TIM2
TIM3
TIM4
TIME
TMON
TN1
TN2
TN3
TN4
(NO) YES hh mm hh mm hh mm hh mm
0-(15)
(NO) YES l s c u c u l s c u c u l s c u c u l s c u c u
Comment
Trunk Identity Meaningful
PBX Reference Number is to be displayed without the Trunk Group Reference Number
Trunk Group Reference Number of a Trunk
Identity (TIDY) in LD 16, is meaningful
Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206 and Digital Private
Network Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123.
Change Timers
Hour and Minute for First Night Service DN.
Enter the hour and minute for First Night
Service DN.
Where: hh = 0-23, mm = 0-59
Enter X to remove the time. TIM1 should be set earlier than TIM2, 3 and 4. If no time is entered here, the system assumes a 24-hour clock.
Time for Second Night Service DN
Time for Third Night Service DN
Pack/Rel
supp-16 basic-21 basic-12
Traffic Monitoring
Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up
(MLWU) package 206 and Traffic Monitoring
(TMON) package 168.
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete basic-12 basic-12 basic-12 Hour and Minute for Fourth Night Service DN
For all of the entries in the Night Service Time of Day (NSTOD) feature, entering X for the DN deletes the existing value for that entry.
Entering <CR> allows the user to select an existing entry, or skip to another entry.
Malicious Call Trace Alarm Time emct-20 mlwu-14 basic-3.0
basic-3.0
basic-3.0
basic-3.0
374 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TN5
Response
l s c u c u
TN6
TNDM
TON
TPDN
TRCL
TRCR
TRNX
TST_DATA l s c u c u
0-(15)-31
ECDP
ELOC
ESPN
INTL
LOCL
NATL
UNKN yyyy
(0)-7
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Terminal Number For Large Systems For
Small Systems and CS 1000S
Enter X to delete
Tandem threshold/loop avoidance limit
This is the value permitted in a network connection. If the value entered is greater than
25, then 25 is used for DPNSS calls.
Prompted when Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN) package 245 and ISDN
Supplementary Features (ISDN INTL SUP) package 161, or Digital Private Signaling
System Network Services (DNWK) package
231 is equipped.
Pack/Rel
basic-3.0
basic-3.0
isdn-14
ESN_CDP
ESN_LOC
ESN_SPN
International
Local
National
Unknown
Target PCA DN, where: yyyy = the primary DN
TPDN is prompted only if PCA is set to ON.
If there is no DN configured against the HOT
P key in LD 11, this value is used to extend the call using the PCA feature.
Enter X to remove. However, if there is at least one PCA with no target DN configured in LD
11, then this operation does not succeed.
isdn-24 pca-3.0
Total Redirection Count Limit
Number of times that a call can be redirected before being intercepted. (0) means that redirection is not limited by this feature, but is limited by various configurations.
Carriage Return sent after each CDR message
Prevent transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across a private network
Allow transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across a private network
Change Test lines isdn-15 cdr-1 basic-22 basic-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 375
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
TST0
TST1
TST2
TST3
TSTL
Response
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
(NO) YES
TTBL
TYPE:
(0)-31
CDB
DEFAULT
?
AML_DATA
ANI_DATA
ATT_DATA
AWU_DATA
CAS_DATA
CCS_DATA
CDR_DATA
FCR_DATA
FFC_DATA
FTR_DATA
HSP_DATA
ICP_DATA
IMS_DATA
Comment
DN for Test Trunk 0
DN for Test Trunk 1
DN for Test Trunk 2
Pack/Rel
basic-1 basic-1 basic-1
DN for Test Trunk 3
Test Lines for this customer
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
The following prompts are used for transmission testing. Refer to NTP
553-2001-325 Transmission Capabilities.
Tone Table number
Table 0, North American default values, is created when the first customer is created.
Refer to the Flexible Tone and Digit Switches
NTP for other tables.
Prompted with Flexible Tones and Cadences
(FTC) package 125.
Type of data block
Customer Data Block
Default Customer Data Block (when REQ =
NEW)
Get list of possible responses
You may directly access a given data block by entering the first three or all the letters of one of the responses listed below.
A colon following a prompt indicates enhanced processing. Enhanced processing allows a user to either view a list of possible responses or input an abbreviated response.
You may view the revised Prompts and
responses sequence for LD 15 on Customer data block
on page 268.
Gate openers:
Application Module Link options
Automatic Number Identification numbers
Attendant Console options
Automatic Wake Up options
Centralized Attendant Service options
Controlled Class of Service options
CDR and Charge Account options
New Flexible Code Restriction options
Flexible Feature Code options
Features and options
Hospitality Management options
Intercept Computer update basic-1 basic-1 ftc-13 basic-1
376 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
UAPR
UBRI
UCST
UDPL
UMG
USBM
UST
VNR
VO_ALO
VO_ALOH
R
VPNI
Response
INT_DATA
MON_DATA
MPO_DATA
NET_DATA
NIT_DATA
OAS_DATA
PPM_DATA
PWD_DATA
RDR_DATA
ROA_DATA
TIM_DATA
TST_DATA
LDN_DATA
SLS_DATA x...x
(OVF NAP NAP
NAP)
(0)-9999
1-(19)
Comment
Integrated Message Service options
Intercept treatment options
Departmental Listed Directory Numbers
Set-based monitoring
Multi-Party Options
ISDN and ESN Networking options
Night Service options
Off-Hook Alarm Security options
Periodic Pulse Metering options
Customer related Passwords
Call Redirection
Recorded Overflow Announcement options
Timers
Test lines
SIP Line Services options
SIP Lines services
SIP Line User Agent prefix.
Universal BRI
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
basic-6.00
basic-6.00
basic-6.00
basic-20
Unit Cost for periodic pulse metering
Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing
(VNR) Uniform Dialing Plan digits (UDP).
Enter the maximum number of UDP digits expected by VNR.
User to User Messaging enabled
UIPE Set Based Monitoring Where: (NO) = all previously configured TNs are flushed, and subsequent prompts are not prompted. YES = accept and prompt the next prompts. <CR> = previously stored value taken.
supp-15 fnp-14 ims-4 basic-3.0
User Status Update enabled
Vacant Number Routing
Prompted with Flexible Tones and Cadences
(FTC) package 160.
ims-4 fnp-20
(NO) YES
(0)-23
(0) - 16283
Note:
FNP must be configured to YES to allow configuration of VNR.
Enable Virtual Office Automatic Logout basic-25.4
Virtual Office Automatic Logout time using 24 hour clock.
basic-25.4
Virtual Private Network Identifier for CS 1000S basic-2
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 377
LD 15: Customer Data Block
Prompt
VSID
WAIT
WKDY
WUD
XRFP
XRFR
Response
0-127
(RGB)
MUS
SIL
1-7
(NO)
YES x...x
(NO) YES
Comment
<CR> = No Change
Enter X to remove the VPNI.
Value added Server Identifier
Enter the identifier number of the Value-Added
Server or VAS providing the services such as
Voice Messaging.
Enter X to remove the VSID.
Treatment during waiting time for ROA
Ringback
Music
Silence
Pack/Rel
usm-7 roa-2
Week Day for weekly printout. Where 1 =
Sunday.
Wake-up Delimiter is not required
Wake-up Delimiter is required
A time entered during use of the Automatic
Wake Up FFC Delimiter feature is valid only if the user enters "#" at the end of the time digits.
External Attendant Remote Call Forward
Password
The password length is 1-8 digits. The password is numeric only.
External Attendant Remote Call Forward
Password Required supp-15 awu-22 arfw-20 arfw-20
378 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 15: LD 16: Route Data Block,
Automatic Trunk Maintenance
This Overlay program allows data for trunk routes, ATM schedule hours, or ATM routes to be created or modified.
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:
RDB000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx RAN RTE AVAIL:
(U/P): xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx
The range for route numbers are system dependent:
• 0-511 for Large Systems and CS 1000E
• 0-127 for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T
After making any changes to the route data block, IPE trunk cards must be downloaded with ENLC l s c command in LD 32.
The License header includes Recorded Announcement Broadcast (RAN RTE) information. This information is updated each time a new RAN route is configured.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
on page 380
ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block on page 396
SCH: ATM Schedules data block on page 397
Meridian 911 Route data block on page 397
NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block
on page 398
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 379
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Section
Other Information:
Table 3: Release Mechanism Options
on page 398
RDB: Route data block
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DMOD
ROUT
DES
Prompt
TKTP
M911P
M911_ABAN
M911_TONE
ABTR
VTRK
ZONE
NODE
PCID
Response
aaaa
RDB xx
1-127 x...x
x...x
a...a
Comment
Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)
Type of data block = RDB (Route data block)
Customer number associated with this route
Default Model number for this route (Small Systems,
CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T)
Route number, where x...x =
0-511: Large System and CS 1000E System
0-127: Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T
Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs.
Trunk Type (TKTP responses begin on Trunk Type You must respond to this prompt when REQ = NEW.)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
M911 Trunk Type for MCDN Network.
optional call abandon treatment YES = abandoned call treatment for route NO = no abandoned call treatment for route optional call abandon tone YES = tone given on answer NO= silence given on answer
(15) Range 0 - 30
Timer (in minutes) to block the disconnect from being tandemed across to the target node. Default value:
15minutes. This timer value can be added in increments of 1 minute.
Virtual Trunk route (NO) YES
0–255 0–8000 Zone for codec selection and bandwidth management xxxx Node ID a...a
Protocol ID for the route.
380 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
CRID
TW_ROUTE
- NACC
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaaa
M911_ANI (NO) YES
- M911_TRK_TYPE aaaa
- M911_FORM (1) 2
-- ANI2_CLID (NO) YES
Comment
Allow or deny CDR record for SIP to include correlation
ID.
Taiwan R1 route
Network access control (aaaa = (PGNR), PGNC, or
PGNU)
Receive ANI digits for Meridian 911 routes
Meridian 911 ANI trunk types (aaaa = (911T) or 911E)
Automatic Number Identification Format
Optional ANI2 display for CLID ANI2 display (not) required with CLID Display. This prompt is only printed when M911_FORM is set to 2.
Optional call abandon treatment
Optional call abandon tone
CNVT
- DDMI
- ATDN
SAT
RCLS
IDEF
DTRK
- BRIP
- DGTP
- M911_ABAN (NO) YES
- M911_TONE (YES) NO
- NPID_TBL_NUM
PRIV
RPA
ESN
SIGL
0-7
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
(NO) YES
(0)-255
(0)-x...x
(NO) YES aaa
(NET) LOC
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
- IFC
- - CNTY
- CBCR a...a
a...a
(NO) YES
Meridian 911 route table index
Private Line Route
Radio Paging Route
Electronic Switched Network or ESN pad control
Layer 3 Signaling (a...a = APNS, BEL, DAS, DPN,
NT4, or NTS)
Conventional (applies only to Tie trunks)
Digit Manipulation Index
Attendant DN
Satellite used for trunk route via earth orbiting satellite
Route Class (aaa = (EXT) or INT)
Internal/external definition
Digital Trunk Route
ISDN BRI Packet handler route
Digital Trunk Type (a...a = BRI, DTI, DTI2, JDMI, PRI, or PRI2)
Interface type for route (IFC responses are listed on )
Country (CNTY responses can be found on )
Service route indicator
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 381
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
- CLID
- PROG
- SBN
- SIDE
- CNEG
- OVLR
- DIDD
- OVLS
- OVLT
- NASA
- MBGA
- PGPN
- RCAP
- - MWTO
- - MWRT
- -MQC_FEAT aaaa
BCOT
INTC
ISDN
(0) - 4000
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
- SDID
- - CTON
(NO) YES
(NCHG)
UKWN
Response
OPTx a...a
(NO) YES aaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-15
(NO) YES
(0)-8
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-15 a...a
(15) - 30
0 - (2) - 15
Comment
Calling Line Identification (x = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5)
Progress signal (a...a = NCHG, MALE, or MCON)
Send Billing Number
Meridian SL-1 Node Type (aaa = (NET) or USR)
Channel Negotiation
Overlap Receiving
Digits ignored for DID call during Overlap Receiving
Overlap Sending
Inter-INFO Timer during Overlap Sending
Network Attendant Service Allowed
MBG Interface on the D-channel
Protocol Set Group Number
Remote Capabilities (RCAP responses can be found on )
Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either
QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL PROCEEDING message.
Message Waiting Retry Timer.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either
QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.
MCDN QSIG Feature type, where aaaa = NAS, NACD or NMS
B-channel Overload Control timer
Speech calls to data sets are rejected (NO) or intercepted (YES) by an attendant.
Dedicated Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) route.
Send DID number instead of internal DN.IDC table with SDID Yes must be configured.
Calling Party Number
Call Type not changed.
Unknown call type.
382 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- MODE
- DCH
- DCHI
- IFC
- - CNTY
- MBXR
- - SIND
- SBN
- SRVC
Prompt
- - SRPM
- - PNI
- PR_TRIGS
- PR_RTN
- NCNA
- NCRD
- - TRO
- INAC
- - SPN
INC_T306
OUT_T306
(0) - 31
0-(15)-255
(0)-32700 aaa xx
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(2)-T306
0-(30)-T306
Response
INTL
NATL
LOCL a...a
0-159
1-15 a...a
a...a
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
International call type.
Comment
National call type.
Subscriber call type.
Mode of operation (a...a = APN, ISLD, or PRA)
D-channel number
DCHI port number
Interface type for route (IFC responses are listed on )
Country (CNTY responses can be found on )
Mobile Extension route (package 412 [MOBX] must be equipped).
Screening Indicator for the Mobile Extension route
(package 412 [MOBX] must be equipped).
Send Billing Number
Service type for AT&T ESS connections (SRVC responses can be found on Service type provisioned for AT&T ESS connections (where IFC = ESS#4 or
ESS#5) Prompted if ISDN = YES and IFC = ESS4 or
ESS5. Prompted with Inter Exchange Carrier (IEC) pkg 149.)
Service provisioned for National ISDN PRI (Rel 23 and later)
Service Parameter
Private Network Identifier (requires package 148
(NTWK))
Path Replacement Triggers
Retain option for far end PINX
Network Calling Name Allowed
Network Call Redirection
Trunk Route Optimization
Insert ESN Access Code to incoming private network call
SPN's AC is inserted first to search for a valid UDP number
Incoming T306 timer value in 2 second increments
Outgoing T306 timer value in 2 second increments
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 383
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
- - TGAR
CPUB
- IEC
DAPC
- TBL
CPFXS
HNTN
HLCL
ADDP
- DSEL
- INAC
- ISAR
- - RTN
- - FACY
- - SID
- - MIN
- - MAX
- - PTUT
- - PRIM
- - NCOS
- - CLS
Prompt
- FALT
- NSF
- COTR
- TIER
- WATR
- CHTY
- CTYP
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-511
0-511
0-511 a...a
a...a
Comment
Recognition of DTI2 ABCD FALT signal for ISL
Network Service Facility
DID/CO Trunk Reference route number
Tie Reference route number
Wide Area Telephone Service or WATS Reference route
Channel Type (a...a = (BCH) or ABCH)
Call Type for outgoing direct dialed TIE route (a...a =
(UKWN), CDP, INTL, LOC, NPA, NXX, or SPN)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-511
(NO) YES
0-511
0-510
1-510
0-510
Insert ESN Access Code
Integrated Service Access Route
Route Number
Facility indicator
Service Identification
Minimum number of channels
Maximum number of channels
Preference Trunk Usage Threshold
(YES) NO
(0)-99 a...a
Primary
Network Class of Service group number
Class of Service (a...a = (CTD), CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,
SRE, TLD, or UNR)
Trunk Group Access Restrictions xx
(OFF) ON, LDN Conversion to public number feature.
001-999 Inter-Exchange Carrier ID
(NO) YES
(0)-15
(YES) NO
0-9999
Display of Access Prefix on CLID
Prefix table number to be associated with this route
Customer-defined Prefixes
Home National Number
0-9999
(NO) YES aaa
Home Local Number
Add Public Prefixes
Data Selection (aaa = (VOD), DTA, TDN, 3DTA, 7DTA,
7VOD or 3VCE)
384 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
AUTO
- ACMP
- LGTH
- GRD
REP
POST
STRT
WAIT
- MRT
BDCT
- DNIS
- - NDGT
- - WDGT
- - DDLY
- - DCDR
IANI
RTYP
- TITH
- NCTH
RANH
Prompt
PTYP
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES xx a
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa
4-(60)- 7200 aaaa
1-15 aaa aaa
(RGB) MUS
0 - 511
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(0) - 300
(0) - 100 x...x
Response
a...a
Comment
Port Type at far end (PTYP responses begin on Port
Type at far end The response to this prompt is used in determining the required transmission level. Refer to
Transmission Parameters Reference (NN43001-282) for more information.)
Auto terminate
Automatic Camp-On Calls to Busy Auto Terminate
Line
ACD DNIS route
Number of DNIS Digits
First or last 4 DNIS digits to be sent on APL and HSL
(a = (L) or F)
DNIS Interdigit Delay
Include DNIS number in CDR records
In-Band Automatic Number Identification route
Recording device for RAN trunks (aaa = AUD, CAP,
CK2, CKM, CON, DGT, LVL, or PUL)
Maximum message length in seconds
Ground Start Arrangement (aaaa = (PLAY) or IDLE)
Repetitions of recorded announcements
RAN Post announcement treatment (aaa = DIS or
ATT)
Start arrangement (aaa = IMM or DDL)
Ringback for calls queueing for RAN trunk
Music route for RAN queueing
Enable broadcast capability for this route.
For CS 1000E, the default is YES
Waiting Time Threshold (seconds)
Number of Calls Waiting Threshold
RAN or Music route which is used after post treatment, where:
• x...x = 0 - 511 for Large System and CS 1000E
• x...x = 0 - 127 for Small System, CS 1000S, MG
1000B, and MG 1000T
Precede with x to remove.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 385
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
SIGL
Prompt
ASUP
FORM
AUDN
ICOG
PREM
TW_INC_CLID (NO) YES
RANX
- RANR
- TCPP
- DTPI
- DPPI
- PII
- DTPO
- DPPO
AUXP
SRCH
TRMB
STEP
FACN
BAND
ACOD
CLEN
CPP
Response
aaa aaa aaa xxxx aaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES x...x
aaa
(YES) NO
0-511
(0) - 99999
(0) - 99 x...x
0 - (1)- 3999
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(*67) nnnn
(1167) nnnn
(NO) YES
(*82) nnnn
(1182) nnnn
(NO) YES
Comment
Answer Supervision returned by RAN to originator
(aaa = (NO), YES, or CO)
Signaling interface for CAMA trunks (aaa = BEL, NT4, or NT5)
Format for CAMA trunk signaling (aaa = M1A, M2B, or
M3C)
Auto termination DN for ISA service routes
Incoming and Outgoing trunk (aaa = IAO, ICT, or OGT)
Preemption allowed on this route. If SLP package is equipped, then COT, DID, FX, ISDN and Tie trunk types can be preemptable.
CLID Option on an incoming TWR1 route
RAN for calls diverted to external trunks
RAN Route number for the desired RAN route, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG
1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E
Search method for outgoing trunk member (aaa =
(LIN) or RRB)
Tromboning
Alternate trunk route for outgoing trunks
Tie or FX facility number
OUTWATS band number
Access Code for the trunk route
CLID entry number
Calling Party Privacy/Calling Party Privacy Override
Flag
CPP/CPPO flag for incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route
Privacy indicator for a digitone trunk
Privacy indicator for a dial-pulse trunk
Privacy Indicator Ignored
Privacy Override Indicator for a digitone trunk
Privacy Override Indicator for a dial-pulse trunk
Auxiliary processor applications
386 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
IDC
- DCNO
- NDNO
- DEXT
- - DNAM
LID
- LCNO
ANTK
SIGO
IABS
CAT
ID
STRK
SPTO
ANKP
INST
JDGT
- STYP
MFC
MFSS
TCRS
Prompt
TARG
BILN
- BLEN
- BNUM
- BDSP
ATGT
ASTP
SGRP
OABS
Response
0-(1)-31
(NO) YES
1-(10)-16
0-x...x
(NO) YES
(0)-60
1-(2)-15
(0)-999
0-9
(0)-3
00-99
(0)-9
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-99999999
1-(4)
(NO) YES
(0)-254
0-254
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-2
0-255 x...x
a...a
aaaa
(NO) YES
(B1) B2 B3
(YES) NO
Comment
Trunk Access Restriction Group
Billing Number Required
Billing Number Length
Billing number (1 to 16 digits depending on BLEN)
Billing Number Displayed
ADM Trunk Guard Timer
ADM Step-Forward ring cycles
Scheduled Access Restriction Group
Actual outgoing toll digits to be ignored for Code
Restriction
Number of incoming digits to be absorbed
CAMA trunk route category digits
Identification digit for CAMA trunk routes
Super Trunk group feature
Super Trunk Option
KP signal suppressed
Insert
Japan central office Digits
Incoming DID Digit Conversion on this route
Day IDC tree number
Night IDC tree number
Display External dialed digits
Display IDC Name
Line Identities option
Line identities Conversion tree number
ANI identifier number
Signaling arrangement (a...a = (STD), ESN2, ESN3,
ESN5, ETN, or EN19)
Standard Signaling Type (aaaa = (SDAT) or STDN)
Multifrequency Compelled or MFC Signaling
First MFS digit request backward signal
Toll Category Request Supported
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 387
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
MFCI
R2MD
- DIG#
SGL
BSSU
MFCO
EMGY
OPP
SWP
ICIS
ICDN
ICNP
Prompt
INDMF
- CLEN
MFEI
AUTM
- DIGS
SGL
MFEO
MFEA
MFED
MFKI
AUTM
DIGS
MFKO
LOCD
CHRG
1-127
(NO) YES
1-(4)-9
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
1-127
(NO) YES aaa a...a
(YES) NO x...x a...a
a...a
Response
(NO) YES
1 - (10) - 16
(0)-127
(NO) YES
(4)-5
(NO) YES
(0)-127
(YES) NO
0-(1)-9
1-127
(NO) YES
4-(5)
1-127 x aaaa
Comment
Indian R2MFC Operations
Maximum number of CNI digits requested for India
Phase 2 feature
MFE table number for Incoming calls
MFE Automatic Mode
Number of Digits expected
Signal
MFE table number for Outgoing calls
Access code signals are used in the signaling
First digit of special service call
MFK table number for Incoming calls
MFK Automatic Mode
Number of Digits expected
MFK table number for Outgoing calls
Number of digits used in a local call by the far end
Central Office (aaa = (6) or 7)
Charge DOD calls by line of by Block (aaaa = (BLOK) or LINE)
MFC Incoming table number
R2 modification
Number of digits
Signal
Backward Signal Suppression for undefined signal
MFC Outgoing table number
Emergency Route
Operator originated calls receive normal treatment for busy and intercept situations (aaa = (OPP) or ATT)
Subscriber with Priority (a...a = (NORM) or ATT)
Incoming Identifier Send
Incoming route DN (x...x = 1-7 digit CLID DN; a...a =
(NO) or CLID entry of 0-125 for trunk DN)
Incoming Numbering Plan (a...a = (UKWN), PUB, or
PRV)
388 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
ICNT
ICPS
OGIS
OGDN
OGNP
OGNT
OGPS
CCNI
CNTL
- TIMR
- SST
- DTD
- - TABL
- - XTDT
- - MDTD
- - DTDF
- - SCDT
- - 2 DT
- NEDC
- FEDC
CPDC
SPCT
DLTN
- TOV
- PSEL
- OPE
- - PSDS
- - TRAN
Response
a...a
(YES) NO
(YES) NO x...x a...a
a...a
a...a
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa xxx xx y
(NO) YES
0-31
0-7
1-(5)-31 x y
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa aaa
(NO) YES aaa
(NO) YES
(0)-3 aaaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
Comment
Incoming Numbering Type (a...a = (UKWN), INTL,
NTN, LCL, LOC, CDP or SPN)
Incoming Presentation Status
Outgoing Identifier Send
Outgoing route DN (x...x = 1-7 digit CLID DN; a...a =
(NO) or CLID entry of 0-125 for trunk DN)
Outgoing Numbering Plan (a...a = (UKWN), PUB, or
PRV)
Outgoing Numbering Type (a...a = (UKWN), INTL,
NTN, LCL, LOC, CDP or SPN)
Outgoing Presentation Status
Call Number Indicator or CNI enabled on route
Changes to Controls or timers
Trunk Timers (TIMR range definitions begin on aaa xxx)
Seizure Supervision Timer in seconds
Dial Tone Detection
Flexible dial tone detection table number
Extended Tone Detector Table Number
Minimum Dial Tone Detection delay in seconds
Dial Tone Detector Fail threshold
Secondary Dial Tone detection is used on route
Secondary Dial Tone
Near End Disconnect Control (aaa = ORG or ETH)
Far End Disconnect Control (aaa = (ORG), ETH, JNT, or FEC)
SL-1 is the only Controlling Party on incoming calls
Speech Path Cut-Through (aaa = (IMM) or DLY)
Dial Tone on originating calls
Data Time-out Value
Protocol Selection (aaaa = (DMDM) or TLNK)
Change data port Operating parameters
Public Switched Data Service option
Transmission mode (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 389
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
- - PAR
- - DEM
- - PBDO
ANDT
HOLD
SEIZ
RGFL
RVSD
ILLR
- - DTR
- - DUP
- - DCD
- - MOD
- - INT
- - CLK
- - V25
- - HDLC
SVFL
OPCB
- IMBI
- IMCB
- TOBO
- BTCG
- IHT
- OHT
- OHTT
- SRT
- CGPC
- CDCT
DDO
Response
a...a
(OFF) ON aaaa
(ON) OFF
(NO) YES
(OFF) ON
(OFF) ON
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa
(OFF) ON
(NO) YES ic dc ht ic dc ic dc ic dc ic dc ic dc
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
2-(30)-62
0-(30)-126
0-(30)-62
1-(30)-1023
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Parity for data port (a...a = (SPAC), EVEN, MARK, or
ODD)
Data Terminal Ready
Duplex for data port (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)
Data Carrier Detect
Mode for synchronous operation
Interworking
Clock source for synchronous operation
V.25 bis option for synchronous operation
High Level Data Link Control
Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)
Port Busy upon DTR Off
Automatic Number Identification Dial Tone
Hold failure threshold
Seize failure threshold
Ring Failure threshold
Reversed wired CO trunk threshold
Illegal Ring threshold
Supervision Failure
Operator Call Back
Perform Immediate Break-In on this route
Perform Immediate Call Back on this route
Toll Operator Break-Out
Busy Tone to Calling Party disabled
Number of seconds in increments of two
Off-Hook Timer (2 second increments)
Toll Outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnect
Number of minutes on an outgoing CDPC call that a set is kept on-hold to a trunk (in increments of two)
Calling Party Control
Called Party Control
Delay Digits Outpulsing for DOD and CO trunks
390 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
DRNG
NDRI
BTUA
CDR
- INC
- LAST
- TTA
- - ABAN
- - CDRB
- QREC
- OAL
- - OTL
- - AIA
- - OAN
- - OPD
- - NDP
- CDRX
- CDRY
OPA
CCO
NATL
- TDG
SSL
CFWR
- IDOP
VRAT
MUS
- MRT
Response
(NO) YES
(0)-4
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(NO) YES aaa 0-32
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(YES) NO x...x
1-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-511
Comment
North American Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls
Network Distinctive Ringing Index
Block Transfer of Unanswered Call
Call Detail Recording
CDR records generated on incoming calls
CDR record printing content option for redirected calls
Time To Answer output in CDR
Abandoned call records output for this route
Abandoned call on busy tone records
CDR ACD Q initial connection records to be generated
CDR on outgoing calls
CDR on Outgoing Toll calls
Answered call Identification Allowed
CDR timing starts On Answer supervision of outgoing calls
Outpulsed Digits in CDR
Number of Digits Printed (aaa = INC or EXC)
Print CDRX records on multiple call transfer for non-
PPM outgoing calls
CDR Public Network Feature Invoke records is generated
Generates CDR or CDAS record for PPM pulses
Printing of CDR records for no PPM or AOC count
North American Toll scheme
Toll Digits
Special Service List number
Call Forward Restriction
Identify Originating Party
Answer an Attendant Extended Call over VNS immediately on the incoming bearer trunk
Music On-Hold
Music Route number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 391
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
MR
Prompt
A1MR
MANO
EQAR
- GCR
- - NTOL
- - ITOL
- SCR
DSPD
PANS
RACD
RUCS
RURC
RUCF
MULT
DSPT
RPPM
DTOS
FRL
OHQ
OHQT
CBQ
NDIG
AUTH
TDET
TTBL
PNNC
- PNDL
- SLCT
Response
aaa
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
0-9999 x y x y
(NO) YES
0-(10)-60 xxx
Comment
Message Registration (aaa = (NO), DURC, ENDC,
PPM, RVB, STAC, or XLD)
Real Time AOC Display
Pseudo Answer
Route traffic information in ACD Reports
Route Unit Cost
Route Unit Reference Cost
Route Unit Conversion Factor
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Multiplier for Charge Information
Charge Display Timer
Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering polling time in seconds
Answer is First Meter pulse
Manual Outgoing trunk route
Enable Equal Access Restrictions
(NO) YES General Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal Access calls
(DENY) ALOW North American Toll calls (example, 1+calls)
(DENY) ALOW International Toll calls (example, 011+calls)
(NO) YES Selective Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal Access calls
(NO) YES
0-7 0-254
Dial Tone on Outgoing Seizure
Facility Restriction Level
(NO) YES
(0)-63
(NO) YES
(2)-7
Off-Hook Queuing
Off-Hook Queue Threshold
Call Back Queuing
Number of Digits
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-31
(NO) YES
2-(6)-10
TONE MSG
Authcode
Tone Detector required
Tone Table number
Process Notification Networked Calls
Process Notification Delay Timer in seconds
Select Tone or Message
392 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
ACNI
OHT
OHTD
PLEV
OPR
OPDL
- AAT
--AATO
--ADAY
--AHOL
--AATB
Prompt
- NRT
- NMSG
- PNPS
ATAN
- ATBL
-AAAO
Response
0-511
(0)-30
(0)-30
(NO)
YES
PSTN
0 -31
(NO) YES
(0) - 3
(0) - 3
(0) - 3
0 - 31
(NO)
CAA
CAF
(NO) YES
0-(30)-126
(NO) YES
0-(2)-7
(NO) YES
(0)-8064
Comment
Notification Route number
Number of times Message is repeated
Interval between messages (2 seconds increments)
Attendant Announcement.
No Attendant Announcement.
Enable Attendant Announcement on this route.
Enable Attendant Announcement on this route on
PSTN calls only (For MCDN trunks only).
Attendant announcement is available on DID/TIE and
COT trunks only.
Announcement profile table
Uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay
56
Disable Alternative PC Attendant Announcement
Enable Alternative PC Attendant Announcement.
Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Time of Day
Option for this Route
Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Day of Week
Option for this Route
Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Holiday
Option for this Route
Announce profile table
Uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay
56
Alternative PC Attendant Announcement, where:
(NO) = No call answer is given
CAA = Call answer is given on announcement
CAF = Call answer is given forced
This prompt is for tone announcement valid only.
Accept Call Number Identification
Off-Hook Timer (2 seconds increments)
Off-Hook Timer Delay
Priority Level
Outpulsing Route
Outpulsing Delay in milliseconds
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 393
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
NADT
MON
TIDY
ATRR
TRRL
- FRIN
- - FRRC
- - FRRS
- - - FRRD
- - - RRBS
CNIE
CNIT
BTT
ACKW
PECL
DCTI
Prompt
PRDL
EOS
DNSZ
RCAL
MCTS
- MCCD
- MCDT
- MCTM
- MTND
FGNO
CDPC
ALRM
NCNI
(0)-255
(NO) YES xxxx yyyy
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(4)-15
(NO) YES
128-(384)
(NO) YES
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-7 aaa
(NO) YES
0-8
(0)-4
(0)-30
(NO) YES
(0)-127
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-7
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
2-(30)-254
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-511
Comment
Partial Dial timing
End-of-Selection Signal
Number of digits expected on DID routes
Recall (aaa = (NO), ATT, or DRA)
Malicious Call Trace Signal
Malicious Call Trace request string
Malicious Call Trace Delay Time in seconds
Malicious Call Trace request Timer id
Malicious Call Trace Tandem Disconnect delay
Feature Group D block number
Called Party Control
Malicious Call Trace Alarm is allowed for external calls
Request CNI after the defined number of digits are received
Request CNI after an ESN code is dialed
Call Number Identification Trace
Busy Tone Time
Acknowledgment seizure signal
Periodic Clearing Signal
Time (in seconds) that an extension is allowed to ring or be On-hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected
No Answer Disconnect Timer in seconds
Monitoring for route
Trunk Identity
AC15 Timed Reminder Recall
Recall signal (may not) can be received and transmitted on this route
Forward Release Indefinitely
Forward Release Repetition Count
Forward Release Repetition Seize
Forward Release Repetition Delay in milliseconds
Repeat Release Before Seize
394 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- RLSM
CCB
- CCB1
- ADDG
- ANDN
- DTOC
- CTOC
- COAT
- CACD
- CACC
- AANI
- CCB2
CCBA
ARDN
CTBL
ANIE
CISR
- ANSZ
- ANIC
- LEC
- ANFT
- - ITDN
-CAC_CONV
CAC
CAC_CIS
Response
(0)-15
(NO) YES
512-
(1536)-4992
Release Mechanism
Comment
Collect Call Blocking enabled
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 in milliseconds
500-
(1520)-2550
(NO) YES
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 in milliseconds
Collect Call Blocking Allowed
(NO) YES RPO Allow last Re-Directing Number
(0)-256 CLID manipulation index
(0)-x
(NO) YES
(7)-15
(NO) YES
0-9999999
ANI table Entry for Route (configured in LD 15)
CIS Route
Size of the ANI information
ANI Composing
(0)-31
Local Exchange Code (used for building ANI messages)
Additional Digit to be used in ANI sequences 0-(8)-9
0-9999999
(NO) YES aaaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(CONT) FAIL
ITDN xxxx
ANI DN
Direct Toll Connection
CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria
Continue Outpulsing After ATO Timer expires
(NO) BEF AFT Defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of the set/console.
(NO) BEF AFT Defines how the CAC is stored in the CDR.
Defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the CIS CO to the trunks within this route.
Defines the ANI Failure Treatment option.
Intercept DN (up to 8 digits) defines the DN to transfer the incoming calls which failed to provide ANI.
CAC conversion table number for CIS gateway, configured against MFC_ENT in LD 15.
Prompted only for non-outgoing R2MFC route
0-(3)-9
0-(3)-9
Specifies ANI category for an incoming trunk
CIS ANI Category Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 395
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
RDNL
Response
0-(4)-7
Comment
Route DN length for ANI
ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
DES
- TST
- PADL
EML
LMNL
LOUT
DSBL
MXTI
T100
PADT
STND
NMNL
NOUT
NTOF
- REF x...x
n...n
0-63
0-15
0-15
0-15
(0)-100
0-(5)-15 n...n
0-63
(YES) NO
27-90
27-90
(YES) NO n...n
Response
aaaa
ATM xx x...x
Comment
Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)
Type of data block = ATM (Automatic Trunk
Maintenance)
Customer number associated with this route
Route number
Where x...x =
0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T
Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)
T100 test line DN (2 to 10 digits)
Pad factor for T100 test line in dB
Standard T100 test line
Noise Maintenance Limit
Noise out-of-service limit
Near To Far measurement
Reference loop around DN (2 to 10 digits)
Test loop around DN
Pad factor for loop around
Expected Measured Loss
Loss deviation Maintenance Limit
Loss out-of-service deviation limit
Percentage of trunks to be Disabled
Maximum Time
396 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
SCH: ATM Schedules data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
HOUR
ROUT
DES
MDMP
- MRAT
DTYP
ADCP
OAMP
IAMP x...x
(NO) YES
5-30 aaa
(NO) YES
0-127
0-127
Response
aaaa
SCH xx
0-23 x...x
Comment
Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)
Type of data block = SCH (ATM Schedules)
Customer number associated with this route
Hour to start Automatic Trunk Maintenance test
Route number
Where x...x =
0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T
Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)
Modem Data Module Pair
Modem Ring Again Timer
Inbound/Outbound Data Port (aaa = (IOP), IDP, or
ODP)
All-Digital Connection Prefix
Outbound Modem Pool route number
Inbound Modem Pool route number
Meridian 911 Route data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
Response
aaaa
RDB xx x...x
Comment
Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)
Type of data block = RDB (Route data block)
Customer number associated with this route
Route number
Where x...x =
0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 397
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
DES
Prompt Response
x...x
TKTP
M911_ANI
M911_TRK_TYP
E
M911_FORM
DID
YES aaaa
(1) 2
M911_ABAN
M911_TONE
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
NPID_TBL_NUM 0-7
Comment
Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)
DID trunk types must be used for M911 route
Receive ANI digits for M911 route
Meridian 911 ANI trunk type (aaaa = (911T) or 911E)
Automatic Number Identification Format
Optional call abandon treatment
Optional call abandon tone
Meridian 911 route table index
NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
IDTB
NPID
TRMT
-NPA
Response
aaaa
NPID
0-7
0-9 a...a
nnn
Comment
Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)
Type of data block = NPID
ID table index
Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit
NPID Treatment (a...a = (NONE), FAIL, TEST, or NPA)
Numbering Plan Area
Release Mechanism Options
The following table indicates whether a release signal is acknowledged or not. YES indicates the release signal is acknowledged, NO indicates the release signal is not acknowledged.
Table 3: Release Mechanism Options
RLSM
Option
0
1
Incoming Calls
Originator On-
Hooks first
Terminator On-
Hooks first
NO
NO
NO
NO
Outgoing Calls
Originator On-
Hooks first
Terminator On-
Hooks first
NO
NO
NO
YES
398 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
10
11
12
7
8
9
13
14
15
4
5
6
2
3
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Incoming Calls
NO
NO NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
Alphabetical list of prompts
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
Outgoing Calls
NO
YES YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
2DT
A1MR
Response
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Comment
Secondary Dial Tone
Pack/Rel
xpe-16
Answer is First Meter pulse
Meter pulses are counted from the moment of seizure of the outgoing trunk. When the trunk answers, the PPM count is left unchanged.
Meter pulses received before Answer are invalid. Answer is taken as the start of the first charging period (example, when an answer signal is received the PPM count is incremented). Meter pulses mark the start of the subsequent charging periods.
A1MR is prompted when DTRK = YES,
DGTP = DTI2, and MR = PPM.
pemd-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 399
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
AAAO
AANI
AAT
AATO
AATB
ABAN
ABTR
ACKW
ACMP
ACNI
Response
(NO)
CAA
CAF
Comment
Alternative Attendant Announcement
No call answer is given 0-31.
Call answer is given on announcement.
Call answer is given forced.
This prompt is for tone announcement valid only.
Pack/Rel
atan-25.4
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the CIS CO to the trunks within this route.
cist-24
Disable Alternative Attendant
Announcement.
Enable Alternative Attendant
Announcement.
atan-25.4
(0) - 3 xx Announce profile table.
Where xx = 0-31
0-31 uses announcement profile AANN defined in
Overlay 56 atan-25.4
Abandoned call records output for this route fcdr-18 (NO) YES
(15) Range 0 - 30
Timer (in minutes) to block the disconnect from being tandemed across to the target node. Default value: 15 minutes. This timer value can be added in increments of 1 minute.
(NO) YES Acknowledgment seizure signal is expected after seizure of a DID/DOD trunk xpe-16
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Alternative Attendant Announcement Time of Day
Option for this Route.
atan-25.4
Automatic Camp-On calls to busy auto terminate Line
Accept Call Number Identification dpnss-20
400 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ACOD
ADAY
ADDG
ADDP
Response Comment
This DPNSS route (does not allow) allows
R2MFC CNI sent as an OLI string in the initial message (ISRM).
Prompted when:
• IDA package equipped
• MFC package equipped
• TKTP = IDA
• SIGL = DPN/APNS x...x
(0) - 3
0-(8)-9
(NO)
Pack/Rel
Access Code for the trunk route
The ACOD must not conflict with the numbering plan. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
basic-1
Alternative Attendant Announcement Day of
Week
Option for this Route.
atan-25.4
Additional digit(s) to be used in ANI sequences.
If LEC and the DN to be transmitted consist of less than seven digits, ADDG is used as the last digit(s) of the ANI sequence.
Prompted if:
1. Commonwealth of Independent States
(CIST) package 221 is equipped
2. ICOG = OGT
3. TKTP = COT (for analog trunks, TKTP must = DID)
4. DGTP = DTI2 cist-21
If ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.
It is used to complete ANI DN if LEC+ANI DN consists of less than ANSZ digits.
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
Can be from 1 up to the ANSZ length.
cist-24
Add Public Prefixes
The prefixes 0 (National) or 00
(International) are not added to the Calling euroisdn-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 401
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
ADCP
AHOL
AIA
ALRM
ANDN
Response
YES
Comment
Party Number if the Type of Number (TON) is Public on the set/attendant displays.
The prefixes 0 (National) or 00
(International) are added to the Calling Party
Number if the Type of Number (TON) is
Public on the set/attendant displays.
(NO) YES
(0) - 3
All-Digital Connection Prefix assigned to customer
Alternative Attendant Announcement
Holiday Option for this Route.
Pack/Rel
basic-5 atan-25.4
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Answered call Identification Allowed
Enter YES to output an "A" in the CDR TerID field to indicate answered calls.
Prompted when OAL = YES or OTL = YES.
cdr-13
Malicious Call Trace Alarm is allowed for external calls mct-10
0 - 9999999 ANI DN
ANDN is used for building ANI messages.
ANDN is prompted if Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIST) package 221 is equipped.
ANDN is not prompted if the route is outgoing only (ICOG = OGT) and TKTP is not COT (for analog trunks, not DID).
Incoming route:
If ANDN is defined, it is used as ANI DN in
CDTI2/ CSDTI2 ANI messages when this incoming trunk is the originator of an outgoing CDTI2/ CSDTI2 call. If ANDN is not defined, the the ANDN of the outgoing
CDTI2/ CSDTI2 trunk is used.
Outgoing route:
Default ANI DN in CDTI2/ CSDTI2 ANI messages. If the ANI DN of the call originator cannot be used, then ANDN for the outgoing
CDTI2/ CSDTI2 route is used. This occurs for sets with CLS DNAD and for incoming routes if ANDN is not defined.
can be from 0 up to the ANSZ length.
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
cist-21 cist-24
402 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ANDT
ANFT
ANI2_CLID
ANIC
X
Response Comment
Used for building ANI message if ANIC=NO and DN of set is not allowed to be sent (CLS
DNAD).
Also used if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured, and DN of set is not allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).
Remove ANDN
(NO) YES
(CONT)
FAIL
ITDN
Pack/Rel
Automatic Number Identification Dial Tone ani-1
Defines the ANI Failure Treatment option.
cist-24
Provide call to the required destination
Drop the call
Transfer call to the intercept DN defined by the ITDN prompt
(NO)
(NO) YES
Optional ANI2 display for CLID
Prompted when M911_FORM is set to 2.
m911-7.00
ANI Composing
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
If ANIC=NO, old ANI composing is used: if the originator of the call is a set, ANI message consists of the CAC of the originator + the LEC of the outgoing route + the DN of the originator or the ANDN of the outgoing CIS route, depending on the class of service (DNAA/DNAD) of the set. If the originator of the call is an incoming route, the components of the ANI message are retrieved from default ANI entries and/or from the data block of the outgoing CIS route.
If ANIC=YES, the following is done:
If no entry is associated with the calling set
(ANIE=0), then old ANI composing is used.
If an ANI entry is associated with the calling set (ANIE has a non-zero value), but the associated ANI entry is not configured, then old ANI composing is used.
If an ANI entry is associated with the calling set (ANIE has a non-zero value), and the associated ANI entry is configured, then ANI table is used for building the ANI message: none of the components of the ANI message cist-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 403
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
ANIE
ANKP
ANSZ
ANTK
ARDN
Response Comment
is retrieved from the data block of the outgoing CIS route.
(0)-x
Pack/Rel
ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY, LD 15) x= R_SIZE-1
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be configured. (R-SIZE is defined in
LD 15) cist-24
(NO) YES
(7)-15 x...x
(NO)
YES
RPO
KP signal suppressed cam-1
Size of the ANI information
This is the length of LEC+ANI DN.
For analog routes, the only valid response is
7.
cist-24
ANI identifier number
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. In either case, together with ANLD and ANI
Listed DN in LD 15, the total number of digits must be no less than 7.
ani-1
Allow last redirecting Number, where:
(NO) = treatment for originally called number.
YES = treatment for last redirecting number.
RPO = treatment for last redirecting number if OCN is Public.
basic-4.5
Note:
If ARDN = NO, the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number
+ Originally called number + Orignal diversion reason.
Note:
If ARDN = NO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the originally called number's mailbox.
Note:
If ARDN = YES, the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number
404 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ASTP
ASUP
Response
1-(2)-15
Comment
+ last redirecting number + last diversion reason.
Note:
If ARDN = YES, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the last redirecting party's mailbox.
Note:
If ARDN= RPO, if the Type of NUmber and Numbering plan indicator( TON &
NPI) of the origianlly called number is public, then the display on the terminating set would be the calling Number + last redirecting number + last diverting reason.
Note:
If ARDN= RPO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the last redirecting party's mailbox.
Note:
If ARDN= RPO, and the Type of NUmber and Numbering plan indicator( TON &
NPI) of the origianlly called number is private, then the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number
+ Originally called number + Orignally diverting reason.
Note:
If ARDN= RPO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against Originally called number's mailbox.
ADM Step-forward ring cycles
Pack/Rel
adm-12
(NO)
YES
CO
Do not return Answer Supervision by RAN to originator
Return Answer Supervision by RAN to originator
Return Answer supervision only if the originator is a CO trunk
The operation of answer supervision is affected with FCC Compliance for DID
Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223.
Refer to FCC Compliance for DID Answer ran-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 405
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
ATAN
ATBL
ATDN
ATGT
ATRR
ATVR
AUDN
AUTH
AUTM
Response Comment
Supervision, in Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106.
(NO)
YES
PSTN xx
(0)-x...x
(0)-60
(NO) YES
Add on Data Module (ADM) Trunk Guard
Timer
Two-second increments up to one minute, odd entries are rounded down to the next valid number.
AC15 Timed Reminder Recall. Prompted with AC15
Recall (ACRL) package 236.
Pack/Rel
Attendant Announcement.
No Attendant Announcement.
Enable Attendant Announcement on this route.
Enable Attendant Announcement on this route on PSTN calls only (For MCDN trunks only).
Attendant announcement is available on
DID/TIE and COT trunks only.
atan-25.4
atan-25.4
Announcement profile table.
Where xx = 0-31
0-31 uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay 56.
Attendant DN of conventional main, ESN main, ESN node or ETN node.
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
casm-5 adm-12 arcl-20
(NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES
(NO)YES
Present call has higher precedence (called party cannot be preempted) atvn
Auto termination DN for ISA service routes
Prompted when ISAR = YES and AUTO =
YES. This must be an existing DN, and cannot be deleted. When DNIS = YES, it must be an ACD DN.
Authcode to be prompted for incoming
NARS/BARS calls baut-1
Automatic Mode for MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 mfc-9
406 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AUTO
AUXP
BAND
BCOT
Response
YES
(NO)
Comment Pack/Rel
Auto-Terminate
The route members terminate on DN defined by response to ATDN prompt in LD 14.
basic-1
The route members terminate normally at the console.
Only ACD DNs or DISA DNs support Auto-
Terminate trunks. In order to set AUTO =
YES for TIE, DID and CCSA trunks, all members of the route must have STRI = IMM in LD 14.
YES
Auxiliary processor applications.
Send the Calling Line Identification and
Calling Party Name (if available) to auxiliary applications like Contact Center Manager
(CCM).
if the Calling Line Identification (CLID)
Presentation Indicator and the Calling
Party name Display (CPND) Indicator for an incoming ISDN call are received as
"restricted/denied", they are changed to
"allowed" cppe-6.0
(NO)
(0) - 99
(0) - 4000
Note:
If the Privacy Indicator Ignore (PII) prompt is configured to YES, the AUXP prompt is configured to YES automatically by the system, and cannot be changed.
Do not send the Calling Line Identification and Calling Party Name to auxiliary applications like Contact Center Manager
(CCM).
if the Calling Line Identification (CLID)
Presentation Indicator and the Calling
Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator for an incoming ISDN call are received as
"restricted/denied", they remain as such
OUTWATS band number.
cbc_pkg- 23
B-channel Overload Control timer value indicates the delay the M1 PBX introduces
(in milli seconds) before starting the actual disconnect sequence.
isdn- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 407
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
BDCT
BDSP
BILN
BLEN
BNUM
BRIP
BSSU
BTCG
BTT
BTUA
CAC
(NO)
YES
(NO)
YES
Response
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
Comment Pack/Rel
Enable broadcast capability for this route.
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23
For CS 1000E, the default YES cannot be changed.
CS 1000E only supports broadcast trunks.
Billing Number is not displayed at the CO basic-21
Billing Number is displayed at the CO
Billing Number is not required
Billing Number is required basic-21
1-(10)-16
0-9999
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Billing Number Length basic-21
Billing Number
Depending on your response to BLEN,
BNUM can be from 1 to 16 digits.
If BLEN is changed, a new BNUM must be entered. If the BNUM entered is less than the
BLEN specified, the BNUM is padded with leading zeros.
basic-21
ISDN BRI Packet handler route
BRIP is set to NO by default as this is not applicable to 911P routes.
bri-18
Backward Signal Suppression for undefined signal mfc-9
(NO) YES
2-(30)-254
(NO) YES
0-(3)-9
Busy Tone to Calling Party disabled
Busy Tone Time
Length of busy/overflow to be returned on
DTI routes in seconds.
Block Transfer of Unanswered call opcb-14 xct1-16 pra-14
Specifies ANI category for an incoming trunk.
CAC is used to build ANI messages on an outgoing trunk connected to this trunk. CAC is prompted if Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIST) package 221 is equipped.
cist-21
408 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CACC
CAC_CIS
Response Comment
However, CAC is not prompted if the route is outgoing only (ICOG = OGT) and TKTP is not COT (for analog trunks, not DID).
(NO)
BEF
AFT
0-(3)-9
Defines how the CAC is stored in the CDR.
The options are
Do not store CAC
Store CAC before the ANI
Store CAC after the ANI cist-24
CIS ANI Category Code range and default values
Pack/Rel
cist-24
CAC_CONV (0)-31
CACD
CAT
CBQ
CBCR
CCB
(NO)
BEF
AFT
00-99
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
CAC conversion table number for CIS gateway, configured against CIS_ENT in LD
15
Prompted only for non-outgoing CIS DTI2 route cist-24 cist-24 Defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of the set/console. The option also controls presentation of the CAC in the messages to the auxiliary processors
Do not display CAC
Display CAC before the ANI
Display CAC after the ANI
CAMA Trunk route category digits
Prompted if SIGL = NT4 or NT5
Call Back Queuing
Use only for incoming TIE calls.
Service route indicator cama-1 bque-1 cbc_pkg-23
Collect Call Blocking disabled on incoming route
Collect Call Blocking enabled on incoming route
The route must be: ccb-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 409
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
CCB1
CCB2
CCBA
CCNI
CCO
Response Comment
1. either incoming or incoming and outgoing
2. COT, DID, FEX, or WAT
3. neither ISDN nor M911
This prompt appears with Collect Call
Blocking (CCB) package 290.
Pack/Rel
512-(1536)-4992
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 (ms). The input is rounded to the next multiple of 128 ms.
ccb-21
500-(1520)-2550
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 (ms). The input is rounded to the next multiple of 10 ms.
If any CCB route members (trunks) are using firmware timing (FWTM = YES in LD 14), the
CCB2 timer do not change until the new timer value is downloaded to the card. This can be done by either enabling the card or initializing the switch. CCB2 is prompted when CCB = YES.
ccb-21
(NO)
YES
Collect Call Blocking denied (regular answer signal transmits)
Collect Call Blocking Allowed (CCB answer signal transmits)
CCBA is used for outgoing routes when a call tandems out on this route. For example, collect calls do not be accepted on a RAN or
TIE route when CCBA = YES. When CCBA
= NO, these routes can accept collect calls.
This prompt appears with Collect Call
Blocking (CCB) package 290.
ccb-21
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Call Number Indicator enabled on route
Printing of CDR records for no PPM or AOC count Prompted when OAL = YES or OTL =
YES mfc-15 cdr-10
410 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CDCT
CDPC
CDR
CDRB
CDRX
CDRY
CFWR
CGPC
CHRG
CHTY
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Called Party Control is not enabled on incoming calls when MFC IDCT signal is sent
Called Party Control is enabled on incoming calls when MFC IDCT signal is sent
Pack/Rel
opcb-14
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
Called Party Control is not enabled when
MCT feature is activated.
Called Party Control is enabled when MCT feature is activated.
Prompted when OPCB = YES supp-14
Call Detail Recording Set and change CDR options for this route.
cdr-1
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Abandoned call on busy tone records.
cdr- 23
Print CDRX records on multiple call transfer for non-PPM outgoing calls.
This prompt appears if CDRX package is equipped and MR is not equal to PPM. Also
CDR = YES, TKTP = COT or DID for
International DID/DOD and ICOG cannot be
ICT.
cdrx-20
CDR Public Network Feature Invoke records is generated ddsp-20
Call Forward Restriction supp-10 opcb-14 Calling Party Control on incoming calls on this route is not enabled
Calling Party Control on incoming calls on this route is enabled
(BLOK)
LINE
(BCH)
ABCH
A DOD Call over this MFK route must signal the CO that it wishes to be charged by block.
A DOD Call over this MFK route must signal the CO that it wishes to be charged by line.
kd3-20
Channel Type
B-channel
A/B bit signaling pra-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 411
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
CISR
CLEN
CLK
CLS
CLID
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
UNR
Response Comment
Prompted when DTRK = YES, ISDN = YES and Mode = PRA.
OPT0
OPT1
OPT2
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES CIS Route.
cist-24
0 - (1)- 3999 CLID entry number.
This prompt is given only for non-ISDN routes (where ISDN = NO and ISAR = NO).
1 - (10) - 16 Maximum number of Calling Number
Identification digits to request for India
Phase 2 feature.
esa-23
(OFF)
ON
External Clock source
Internal Clock source
Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN = SYN basic-18
Class of Service access restriction.
Prompted if TKTP = TIE.
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditionally Unrestricted
Fully restricted class 1
Fully restricted class 2
Fully restricted
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Unrestricted isa-12
Calling Line Identification. CLID is prompted only for UIPE-based protocols.
Prefix = 0 for North American dialing plan.
OPT0 is the default for ESIG and ISIG interfaces.
euroisdn-22
Prefix = 1 for international PFXs in CLID. Any numbering type is supported. OPT1 is the default for all EuroISDN interfaces.
Prefix = 2, for international PFXs in CLID.
CCITT numbering types supported are:
UKWN, INTL, NPA, and NXX. OPT2 is the default for CO/DID routes for the Telecom
New Zealand interface. For an interworking scenario, when the CLID option is OPT2, and the CPFXS prompt is NO, then the calling number is built based on the originating calling number type.
412 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CNEG
CNIE
CNIT
Response
OPT3
OPT4
OPT5
Comment
Prefix = 3 for international PFXs in CLID.
Only the NXX number type is supported.
OPT3 is the default for TIE routes for the
Telecom New Zealand interface.
For international COs, if the call originates from a CO trunk type, add nothing.
Otherwise, add PFX1 and PFX2. OPT4 is the default for all Asia Pacific interfaces.
This is the same as OPT4, except it supports a maximum of 10 digits in the CLID. OPT5 is the default for the Austrian interface.
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Channel Negotiation
Channel Negotiation not allowed
Channel Negotiation allowed
CNEG is prompted if IFC = 1TR6, Numeris,
APAC or D70.
bri-20
Request CNI after an ESN code is dialed.
The ESN code can be a Distant Steering
Code (DSC), Trunk Steering Code (TSC),
NARS Access Code 1 (ACI) or NARS
Access Code 2 (AC2).
If NCNI > 0 and CNIE = YES, CNI is requested when either one of the conditions is first met. CNIE is prompted when the following occur: dpnss-20
• MFC package is equipped
• TKTP = DID or TIE
• MFC Table = R2MF
• MFC signaling table is defined for the route
(NO) YES Call Number Identification Trace
Request MFC Call Number Identification digits only if dialed station has MCTA Class of Service.
Prompted when the following occur: supp-15
1. MCT and MFC packages are equipped
2. TKTP = DID or TIE
3. MFC = R2MF
4. MFC signaling table is defined on the route
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 413
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
CNTL
CNTY
POR
SING
SWE
SWI
TAIW
TCNZ
INDI
INDO
ITA
JAPN
MSIA
NET
NOR
PHLP
DUT
EAUS
EIR
ESP
FIN
FRA
GER
HKNG
(ESTI)
AUS
AUST
BEL
CHNA
CIS
DEN
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Changes to controls or timers
Country
ETS 300-102 basic protocol
Austria
Australian UIPE PRI
Belgium
China
Commonwealth of Independent States
Denmark
Holland
Australia
Ireland
Spain
Finland
France
Germany
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Italy
Japan ISDN UIPE connectivity
Malaysia connectivity
ETSI network side protocol
Norway
Philippines
Portugal
Singapore
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
New Zealand BRI
Pack/Rel
basic-1 supp-9 basic-23 euro- 23 ipra-24 euro- 23 isdn-24 basic-23 basic-23 basic-23 isdn-24 isdn-24
414 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CNVT
COAT
COTR
CPDC
CPFXS
CPP
CRID
Response
THAI
UK
Thailand
United Kingdom
Comment
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Conventional switch route
Prompted with Network Signaling (NSIG) package 37.
Continue Outpulsing After ATO Timer expires
0-511
(NO) YES
(YES)
NO
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
nars-5 cist-24
DID/CO Trunk Reference route number
Determines how incoming public call types are handled for the associated Integrated
Service Access route or ISA. Prompted when TKTP = ISA and IFC = D100 or SL-1 and NSF = NO or YES. Precede with X to delete.
pra-12
SL-1 is the only controlling party on incoming calls. If CPDC = YES, the connection stays up until it is disconnected by SL-1. This is used for 911 emergency services.
basic-1
Customer-defined Prefixes option.
When constructing the Calling or Connected
Line Identification, the prefixes are retrieved from the Customer Data Block via the PFX1 and PFX2 prompts in LD 15, as is currently done.
When constructing the Calling or Connected
Line Identification, the prefixes are retrieved from the Route Data Block via the HNTN and
HLCL prompts in LD 16.
euroisdn-22
Calling Party Privacy/Calling Party Privacy
Override Flag provisioned for this route
A response of YES indicates that the CPP feature is recognized in this trunk route. CPP is prompted only if:
CPP package 301 is equipped trunk is either OGT or IAO non-ISDN option trunk route type = COT, DID, FEX or WAT cpp-24
Allow or deny CDR record for SIP to include correlation ID.
sip-4.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 415
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
CTBL
CTOC
CTON
CTYP
CUST
Response Comment
Prompted when VTRK = YES and PCID =
SIP and CDR is turned on for this route.
(0)-256
(DTDO)
AADT
ANIO
AODT
(NCHG)
UKWN
INTL
NATL
LOCL
Pack/Rel
CLID manipulation index
If CTBL=0 then that route is not associated with any flexible CLID manipulation table basic-7.00
cis-24 CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria
Dial Tone Detection only
Automatic Number Identification And Dial
Tone Connection
Automatic Number Identification Only
Automatic Number Identification Or Dial
Tone Connection
Calling Party Number
Call type not changed.
Unknown call type.
International call type.
National call type.
Subscriber call type.
basic-25.4
(UKWN)
CDP
INTL
LOC
NPA
NXX
SPN xx
Call Type for outgoing direct dialed TIE route pra-15
Unknown Call type
Coordinated Dialing Plan
International number
Location code
National number
Subscriber number
Special Number for other than international number format
The CTYP is used by the receiving switch so that it can associate a call with a call type and perform ESN access code insertion. This option only applies to direct dialing using trunk access codes. NARS and BARS dialing do not apply here.
If you intend to respond YES to prompt
ISAR, use the default <CR> for this prompt.
If ISAR = YES, then CTYP prints UNWN and does not permit you to enter a response.
Customer number associated with this route as defined in LD 15 basic-1
416 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DAPC
DCD
DCDR
DCH
DCHI
DCNO
DCTI
DDLY
DDMI
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Display of Access Prefix on CLID
(ON)
OFF
Data Carrier Detect
Data Carrier Detect lead follows state of lead on device to which it is connected.
Data Carrier Detect lead forced active.
Prompted if TKTP = R232 or MCU.
Pack/Rel
isdn-24
(NO) YES
0-159
1-15
(0)-254
(0)-511
Include DNIS number in CDR records
This prompt appears for ISDN routes to support Network ACD.
D-channel number dnis-19 isdn-16
DCHI Port Number. Prompted when MODE
= ISLD.
DCHI Port number must be defined in LD 17 pra-12
Day IDC tree number
Time, in seconds, that an extension is allowed to ring or be On-Hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected.
Respond with a value equal to the number of seconds a set is to ring after recall, plus the value of the Call Park Recall Timer. The
Call Park Recall Timer is defined in LD 50 in response to the CPTM prompt. Default or
<CR> means that the condition goes on indefinitely. The value stored - which is the closest lower multiple of four - is echoed back upon entry.
idc-12
(NO)
YES
(0)-127
(0)-255
DNIS Interdigit Delay
A fixed interdigit delay of 4 seconds is assigned to all digits until NDGT is reached.
A fixed interdigit delay of 12 seconds is assigned to the first three digits, and a delay of 4 seconds is assigned to all subsequent digits.
dnis-26
Digit Manipulation Index
Basic Alternate Route Selection
Network Alternate Route Selection nars-5
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 417
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
DDO
DEM
DES
DEXT
DGTP
Response Comment
Prompted with either Basic Alternate Route
Selection (BARS) package 57 or Network
Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package
58.
(NO) YES
(DCE)
DTE x...x
Delay Digits Outpulsing for DOD and CO trunks
Prompted with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 and ICOG =
OGT or IAO.
supp-15
Data Equipment Mode. Prompted if TKTP =
R232 basic-18
Data Carrier Equipment
Data Terminal Equipment
Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs. (this is an optional entry)
Pack/Rel
basic-22
(NO)
YES
BRI
DTI
DTI2
JDMI
PRI
PRI2
Display External dialed digits.
Do not display original digits
Display original digits pre converted
Prompted if AUTO = NO, DNIS = NO and
IDC = YES.
icd-12
Digital Trunk Type for route. ISL routes that use Phantom Trunk TNs must be configured as DTI2 routes.
Basic Rate Interface (Allowed if TKTP = TIE,
COT or DID and BRIP = NO)
1.5 Mb/s DTI (If BRIP = NO, then default is
DTI)
2.0 Mb/s DTI
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface. This response is allowed if either 2 Mbit Digital
Trunk Interface package 129 or 2 Mbit
Primary Rate Interface package 154 is equipped.
ISDN 23B + D (If BRIP = YES, then default is PRI)
ISDN 30B + D pra-14
418 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DIDD
DIG#
DIGS
DLTN
DMOD
DNAM
DNIS
DNSZ
DAPC
DPPI
DPPO
Response
(0)-15
Comment
Note:
Valid responses for this prompt are PRI/
PRI2 if M911P prompt is set YES.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
Number of leading digits ignored for DID call during Overlap Receiving brit-18
1-(4)-9
4-(5)
(NO) YES
Number of Digits
Number of Digits mfc-9 mfc-9
1-127
Dial Tone on originating calls
Provide dial tone to the far end when the trunk has been accessed from the far end.
basic-1
Default Model number for this route (Small
Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T) basic-16
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Display IDC name
Prompted with Calling Party Name Display
(CPND) package 95. Prompted following
NDNO if DNIS = YES.
dnis-17
ACD DNIS route
Prompted with Automatic Call Distribution
Package D (ACDD) package 50, and the
RTYP = TIE or DID.
dnis-10
(0)-7 Number of digits expected on DID routes
0 indicates no fixed number
Display of Access Prefix on CLID (NO) YES
(1167) nnnn Privacy indicator for a dial-pulse trunk.
Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits can be entered. If CPP prompt is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered, DPPI defaults to 1167.
supp-10 isdn-24 cpp-21
(1182) nnnn Privacy Override Indicator for a dial pulse trunk.
nnnn = any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits in length. DPPO is defaulted to
1182 if CPP is changed from NO to YES and
<CR> is entered cpp-23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 419
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
DRNG
DSBL
DSEL
DSPD
(VOD)
DTA
TDN
VCE
3DTA
3VCE
7VOD
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
North American Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls
Japan Distinctive Ringing
For TIE trunks to provide normal ringing
(example, make/ break/ make/ break, 0.25
sec./ 0.25 sec./ 2.25 sec. to incoming calls terminating on stations)
For CO trunks to provide distinctive ringing
(example, make/break, one second/two seconds to incoming calls terminating on stations).
Distinctive Ringing only applies to CAM,
COT, DID, FEX, TIE and WAT trunks. These trunks cannot be configured as outgoing only for prompt ICOG.
Pack/Rel
drng-8 drng-9
(0)-100
7DTA
(NO)
YES
Percentage of trunks to be disabled if loss or noise reaches the out-of-service limit atm-7
Data Selection
Voice or Data route
Data-only route
Transparent Data Network
Voice-only route
Data route and 3.1 kHz
Voice route and 3.1 kHz basic-19
Route supports voice or data calls and the telephony 7 khz/Video telephony teleservices
Route supports data calls and the telephony
7 khz/Video telephony teleservices
Prompted if DGTP = DTI, DTI2 or JDMI.
euro-24
Real Time Advice Of Charge Display.
Do not display charge information during call
Display charge information during call
DSPD applies to Aries sets (M2006, M2008,
M2016, M2216, and M2616) on a per route basis. To activate this feature, the prompt
MR must be set to either DURC or ENDC.
isdn-22
420 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DSPT
DTD
DTDF
DTOC
DTOS
DTPI
DTPO
DTR
DTRK
Response
0-(10)-60
Comment
Charge Display Timer in seconds
DSPT determines how long charge information is display at the end of the call.
Pack/Rel
isdn-22
(NO) YES x y
Dial Tone Detection dtd-10
Dial Tone Detector Fail threshold. Where: dtd-10
• x = increment threshold = 1-(2)-15
• y = decrement threshold = 1-(2)-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(*67) nnnn
(*82) nnnn
(OFF)
ON
(NO) YES
Direct Toll Connection
Dial Tone on Outgoing Seizure.
Prompted if SIGL = DAS.
dass2-16
Privacy indicator for a digitone trunk
Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits can be specified. Only the first digit can be an asterisk (*). If CPP prompt is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered, DTPI defaults to *67.
cpp-21
Privacy Override indicator for a digitone trunk.
nnnn = Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits in length. The Asterisk (*) can only be entered as the first digit. DTPO is defaulted to *82 if CPP is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered cpp-23 basic-18 Data Terminal Ready. Prompted if TKTP =
R232 or MCU.
DTR lead follows state of the lead on the device to which it is connected
DTR lead always forced active dti-5 Digital Trunk Route.
Prompted with PBX Interface for:
• DTI/CPI (PBXI) pkg 75
• 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) pkg
129
• Japan Digital Multiplex Interface (JDMI) pkg 136
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 421
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
DUP
EMGY
EML
EOS
EQAR
ESN
FACN
Response Comment
• ISDN Primary Rate Access (PRA) pkg
146, or
• 2 Mbit Primary Rate Interface (PRI2) pkg
154
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
(FULL)
HALF
(NO) YES
0-15
(NO)
YES
BSY
(NO) YES
Note:
if M911P is set to YES, DTRK is set to
YES by default and is not configurable.
Duplex for data port.
Full duplex
Half duplex
Prompted if TKTP = MCU.
Emergency Route
Expected Measured Loss (in dB) basic-18 basic-24 atm-7
No End-of-Selection signal on DID routes
End-of-Selection signal is enabled
EOS and busy signals are enabled supp-10
Enable Equal Access Restrictions Prompted when TKTP = CO, FEX, WAT, or ISA, and
ICOG = OGT, or IAO.
eqa-17
(NO) YES Electronic Switched Network pad control for
NT8D15 XEM card.
xpe-15
This only applies to trunk routes whose members may use 4-wire E&M or DX signaling on an Electronic Switched
Network. This prompt is the replacement for the ESN switch setting on the QPC237 circuit card.
When YES is selected, a 1 dB improvement in loss levels is provided on trunk to trunk calls using the NT8D15 units.
Prompted with Network Alternate Route
Selection (NARS) package 58 and Meridian
1 Extended Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package 203.
(0) - 99999 Tie or FX facility number.
cbc_pkg-23
422 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FACY
FALT
FEDC
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Facility indicator for Private or TIE connection.
Tie connection in the NSF IE
Private connection in the NSF IE
Trunk routes to a DMS-250 automatically have FACY set to YES. All others default to
NO.
FACY is prompted when TKTP = TIE, ISAR
= YES, and IFC = D100, D250 or S100.
Pack/Rel
isa-17
(NO) YES Recognition of DTI2 ABCD FALT signal for
ISL
Prompted for DTI2 ISL routes.
pedm-18
(ORG)
ETH
FEC
Far End Disconnect Control
This entry should correspond to the type of disconnect control used by the far end apparatus of this trunk route. Loop start trunks can be assigned either ORG or
ETH.
Originating end control
The apparatus recognizes conditions on the near end only for calls originated by the
Meridian SL-1. This does not allow trunk to trunk connections.
Either end control
Conditions at the near end are recognized for both incoming and outgoing calls. This allows trunk to trunk connections subject to normal access restrictions. (e.g., TGAR) basic-1
Note:
If SUPP (131) package is disabled, then outgoing trunk to trunk transfer is allowed only when the response for FEDC and
NEDC is ETH.
Far end control
FEC allows trunk to trunk connections. FEC involves the following sequences for disconnect at the near end:
When the near end goes on-hook first, the
DSI (half disconnect) timer starts. If the far end of the trunk goes on-hook before the DSI timer runs out, then the trunk is idled immediately and the DSI timer is cancelled.
If the DSI timer expires, the trunk is locked
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 423
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
FGNO
FORM
FRIN
FRL
FRRC
FRRD
Response
JNT
Comment
out until an on-hook is received from the farend, at which time the SL-1 idles the trunk.
Joint control
JNT disallows trunk to trunk connections.
(0)-127
M1A
M2B
M3C
Feature Group D block number
Format 1 for CAMA trunk signaling
Format 2 for CAMA trunk signaling
Format 3 for CAMA trunk signaling
Pack/Rel
fgd-17 cama-1
(NO)
YES
0-7 0-254
Forward Release Indefinitely
Forward Release is not resent.
Forward Release is resent every time the
Disconnect Supervision timer expires and the Disconnect Supervision timer is restarted.
Prompted if DTRK = YES and DGTP =
DTI2.
Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and New
Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) tree number for this route pedm-18 basic-1
0-(4)-15 Forward Release Repetition Count
This represent the number of times a
Forward Release signal is resent before an error message is printed, if an acknowledgment is expected but not received.
The length of time the software waits for acknowledgment before re-sending the signal is given by the Disconnect
Supervision timer.
Prompted if FRIN = YES.
pedm-18
128-(384)-1920
Forward Release Repetition Delay in milliseconds
This is the delay between sending the seize message and the Forward Release. The accuracy of this timer is governed by the accuracy ofthe 128 millisecond timing queue.
Prompted if FRIN = YES and FRRS = YES.
pedm-18
424 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FRRS
GCR
GRD
HDLC
HLCL
HNTN
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Forward Release Repetition Seize
Do not re-seize the trunk before re-sending the Forward Release.
Re-seize the trunk before re-sending the
Forward Release.
Prompted if FRIN = YES.
Pack/Rel
pedm-18
(NO) YES
(PLAY)
IDLE
(NO) YES
General Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal
Access calls.
eqa-19
Ground Start Arrangement
RAN machine send ground signal when playing.
RAN machine send ground signal when idle.
ranbrd-23 ran-23
High level Data Link Control
Prompted if TKTP = MCU and V25 = YES.
basic-18
0-9999
0-9999
Home Location Number
This number is similar to PFX2 number prompted in LD 15. It is added to this overlay so that this prefix can be configured on a route basis as required in some countries
(e.g., Italy).
As is the case with PFX2, the HLCL prefix can be from one-to-four digits long. This prompt is displayed only if CPFXS = NO.
If only a <CR> is entered, this prompt keeps its previous configuration. If no value was configured previously, no value is configured.
Enter X to delete the digits.
euroidsn-22
Home National Number
This number is similar to the PFX1 number prompted in LD 15. It is added to this overlay so that this prefix can be configured on a route basis as required in some countries
(e.g., Italy).
As is the case with PFX1, the HNTN prefix can be from one-to-four digits long. This prompt is displayed only if CPFXS = NO.
If only a <CR> is entered, this prompt keeps its previous configuration. If no value was configured previously, no value is configured.
euroidsn-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 425
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
HOLD
HOUR
IABS
IANI
ICDN
ICIS
Response Comment
Enter X to delete the digits.
ic dc ht
0-23
Pack/Rel
Hold failure threshold. Where:
• ic = increment counter = 1-(2)-31
• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31
• ht = minimum hold time = 1-(40)-127 seconds
The failure to hold applies to trunks which are not properly seized but disconnected sooner than the minimum hold or ht.
See prompt ILLR for a description of increment count (ic) and decrement count
(dc) values. The default for AID trunks is 2 1
40.
basic-1
Hour to start Automatic Trunk Maintenance test
The system outputs xx:15 indicating the test start times are performed 15 minutes after the hour to avoid interactions with traffic reports.
atm-7
(0)-3
(NO) YES xxxx xxx xxxx (NO)
(YES)
NO
Number of Incoming digits to be Absorbed
For CCSA trunks only.
ccsa-1
In-band Automatic Number Identification route
ISDN must be (NO) for this feature to be enabled. Prompted if AUTO = YES.
ani-15
CLID DN for incoming route (1-7 digits) and
CLID entry (0-125) for trunk DN
CLID DN for incoming route (1-7 digits) and
CLID is not generated for trunk DN
ICDN is prompted if ICIS = NO or if the trunk route is not ISDN.
mfc/isdn-22
Incoming Identifier Send
Use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/R2MFC trunk
Do not use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/
R2MFC trunk
ICIS is prompted for incoming routes when
ISDN = YES or if the table type of MFCI =
R2MF.
mfc/ isdn-22
426 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ICNP
ICNT
ICOG
ICPS
ID
IDC
IDEF
Response
(UKWN)
PRV
PUB
Comment
Incoming Numbering Plan
Unknown
Private
Public
ICNP is prompted if table type of MFCI =
R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICNP is prompted only if the CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.
(UKWN)
INTL
NTN
LCL
LOC
CDP
SPN
Pack/Rel
mfc-22
Incoming Numbering Type
Unknown
International
National
Local
Location
Coordinated Dialing Plan
Special number
ICNT is prompted if table type of MFCI =
R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICNT is prompted if
CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.
mfc-22
IAO
ICT
OGT
(YES)
NO
Incoming and/or Outgoing trunk
Incoming and Outgoing
Incoming only Trunk
Outgoing only Trunk basic-1
Incoming Presentation Status
Provide Trunk DN
Do not provide Trunk DN
ICPS is prompted if table type of MFCI =
R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICPS is prompted if the CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.
mfc-22
(0)-9
(NO) YES
(NET)
LOC
Identification digit for CAMA trunk routes cama-1
Incoming DID Digit Conversion on this route idc-12
Internal/external definition
Use network information to define a call as internal or external. Calls over the selected route receive a network treatment as defined by available network information.
Use local data to define a call as internal or external. Internal calls receive an internal treatment if RCLS = INT. External calls basic-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 427
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
IEC
IFC
Prompt
IDOP
IDTB
CPUB
Response Comment
receive an external treatment if RCLS =
EXT.
IDEF is prompted in LD 16 if IDEF = YES in
LD 15.
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Identify Originating Party
Call Detail Recording for Internal calls to identify forwarding station originating party.
Prompted when CFWR = NO supp-10
0-7
(OFF) ON
LDN
ID table index to be used by this Meridian
911 route
Conversion to public number feature.
No conversion; CLID remains in private number format. Send the NPA and NXX associated with LOC (in LD 90) or DSC (in
LD 87). Send the LDN of this node.
Valid Input: (OFF), ON, LDN Default: OFF m911-19
001-999
(0) - xxx
(0) - xxxxx
(SL1)
1TR6
APAC
AXEA
Inter-Exchange Carrier ID.
Precede with X to remove entry. If no value is entered "???" is printed in the route data block.
Prompted when TKTP = COT, FEX or WAT.
This value is used for information purposes only.
Inter-Exchange carrier providing the service.
Prompted if IFC = NI2 and SRVC is 0 - 16,
18, 21 - 31.
pra-12
Interface type for this PRI route. The IFC of an ISA route and its service route must match.
Meridian SL-1 pra-12 basic-5.00
Note:
If M911P is set to YES, IFC is set to SL1 by default and i3001s not configurable.
1 TR 6 for Germany
Asia-Pacific ISDN interface for Australian
BRI UIPE PRI, China, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Japan BRI UIPE PRI, Malaysia,
Singapore & Thailand.
Ericsson AXE-10 for Australia
428 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
IHT
Prompt Response
AXES
Comment
Ericsson AXE-10 for Sweden
D70
D100
D25O
E403
Interface to Japan D70
Meridian DMS-100
Interface to Meridian DMS-250
EuroISDN interface for ETS 300 403
Q Reference Signalling Point interface EGF4
ESIG
ESGF
ESS4
ESS5
EURO
ISGF
ETSI Q reference signalling point (QSIG)
Interface ID. ESIG interface with GF platform.
ESGF can be entered if QSIG and QSIG GF packages are both equipped. If the Digital
Route Type is BRI, then the associated
DSLs must be removed before changing the interface type to ESGF.
Interface to AT&T ESS#4
Interface to AT&T ESS#5
EuroISDN interface
ISIG interface with GF platform.
ISGF can be entered if QSIG and QSIG GF packages are both equipped. If the Digital
Route Type is BRI, then the associated
DSLs must be removed before changing the interface type to ISGF.
Pack/Rel
euro-24 qsig gf-24
ISIG
JTTC
NI2
NUME
S100
SS12
SWIS
TCNZ
2-(30)-62
ISO Q reference signalling point (QSIG)
Interface ID
JAPAN TTC DCH interface ID
NI-2 TR-1268 interface type
Numeris for France
Meridian SL-100
SYS-12 for Norway
SwissNet for PRI2 (SN2)
Telecom New Zealand (NEAX-61)
Outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnect after the far end disconnects.
Number of seconds in increments of two after which an incoming Calling Party
Control call disconnects after the far end disconnects.
jttc- 23 opcb-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 429
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
ILLR
Response
ic dc
Comment Pack/Rel
Illegal Ring threshold. Where:
• ic = increment count = 0-(2)-15
• dc = decrement count = 0-(2)-15
ILLR specifies illegal ringing on a seized trunk.
ILLR is only prompted for COT, FEX and
WAT trunks.
The increment count (ic) and decrement count (dc) control the rate at which detected failures exceed the trunk error threshold. A counter (initially set to zero) records trunk successes and failures. The counter is incremented by the IC value each time a failure is detected, and by the DC value when a valid trunk condition is detected.
When the counter value exceeds the trunk threshold value (30), the overflow indicator is set, and a TRKxxx message displays. A high IC value increases the counter more rapidly than a low IC value, thus causing the counter to exceed the threshold with fewer detected failures.
The threshold counter only preserves positive values. If the counter contains a negative value, it automatically resets to zero. The next detected failure immediately increases the counter toward the threshold value, enabling quicker trunk failure detection.
ic dc = threshold percentage
• 41 = 20%
• 21 = 33%
• 32 = 40%
• 22 = 50%
• 24 = 67%
• 13 = 75%
• 14 = 80%
• 17 = 88%
The RSET command in LD 36 resets the threshold counters to zero.
basic-1
430 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
IMBI
IMCB
INAC
INC
INC_T306
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Immediate Break-In
Line signal is required before Break-In.
Prompted when MFC = R2MF, MFCI = a valid MFC table.
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
opcb-14
Immediate Call Back
Desired party is re-rung if IMCB = YES.
Prompted when MFC = R2MF, MFCI = a valid MFC table.
opcb-14
Insert ESN Access Code to incoming private network call
INAC permits an ESN access code to be automatically added to an incoming ESN call from a private network.
If INAC = YES, then digit insertion (INST) for
NARS or BARS calls is bypassed and
Access Code 1 (AC1) is used for all call types. However, calls can be specifically defined to use Access Code 2 (AC2) in LD
15 at the AC2 prompt.
INAC is prompted when the route type is either a TIE trunk or an IDA trunk with
DPNSS1 signaling.
pra-21
(NO) YES
0-(2)-T306
CDR records generated on incoming calls cdr-1
Incoming T306 timer value T306 is the variable timer for received DISCONNECT messages on incoming calls. This T306 allows in-band tones sent by the network to be heard.
This timer is stored in 2 second increments.
Listed below are region-specific T306 values: bri-20
APAC region T306 max value (in seconds)
Australia 60
China 30
Hong Kong 30
Indonesia 30
Japan 30
Malaysia 30
New Zealand 30
Singapore 30
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 431
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
INDMF
INST
INT
Prompt
INTC
IPUB
ISAR
ISDN
ITDN
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Thailand 30
Indian R2MFC Operations Disabled.
Indian R2MFC Operations Enabled.
Insert. Not prompted when DNIS = YES.
0-99999999 Digits to be inserted before leading digit
<CR> No digits are entered
X Precede with X to remove entry
(OFF)
ON
Interworking
Far end data unit is not a DMS-100 or
SL-100 Data Unit
Far end data unit is a DMS-100 or SL-100
Data Unit
Prompted if TKTP = MCU.
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
mfc- 23 basic-1 basic-18
Do not intercept voice calls which call data sets to an attendant
Intercept voice calls which call data sets to an attendant euroisdn-22
0-511
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES xxxx
Incoming Public Network call service route. cbc_pkg-23
Integrated Service Access Route denied
Integrated Service Access Route allowed
This prompt indicates whether this route is to be used as a service or reference route for the Integrated Service Access or ISA feature. ISAR can only be YES when there are no trunk assignments in LD 14.
pra-12
Integrated Services Digital Network
Defaults to YES when DGTP = PRI or PRI2 and REQ = NEW. Prompted for BRI routes when REQ = CHG. Prompted when ISDN =
YES in LD 15 and with ISDN package 145.
Select YES to allow MLPP over N1-1 PRI trunks pra-12 atvn-25.47
Intercept DN (up to 8 digits)
The DN, to which incoming calls which failed to provide ANI, are transferred.
cist-24
432 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ITOL
JDGT
LAST
LCNO
LEC
LGTH
LID
Response
(DENY)
ALOW
Comment
Deny International toll calls (example,
011+calls)
Allow International toll calls
1-(4)
(NO)
YES
0-255
Pack/Rel
eqa-17
Japan central office Digits
This indicates the number of address digits sent from the CO to the Meridian 1. If the number of digits is not known, set the parameter to (4).
CDR record printing content option for redirected calls.
The Terminating ID field in the CDR record contains the record before the last party.
The Terminating ID field in the CDR record contains the last party.
xutj-16 cdr-1
Line identities Conversion tree Number
Enter tree number for DCNO tree in LD 49, to be used for converting Line Identities.
Prompted if LID = 2.
dass2-16
0 - 9999999 Local Exchange Code
LEC is used for building ANI messages. LEC is prompted if: cist-21
1. Commonwealth of Independent States
(CIST) package 221 is equipped
2. ICOG = OGT
3. TKTP = COT (for analog trunks, TKTP must = DID)
4. DGTP = DTI2
Allowed from 0 up to the ANSZ length.
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
Used for building ANI message if ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.
4-(60)- 7200
(0)-2
Maximum message length in seconds. For fault detection purpose. Applicable to MPUL,
MLVL & MCON RAN machine types.
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23
Line Identities option. Where: dass2-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 433
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
LMNL
LOCD
LOUT
MANO
MAX
MBGA
MBXR
MCCD
Response Comment
• 0 = do not send ISDN Line Identities
• 1 = send ISDN Line Identities
• 2 = convert and send ISDN Line Identities
Prompted with Integrated Digital Access
(IDA) package 122 and SIGL = DAS
0-15
(6) 7
Loss deviation Maintenance Limit (in dB)
Pack/Rel
atm-7
Number of digits used in a local call by the far end Central Office mfc-9
0-15
(NO) YES
1-510
Loss Out-of-Service deviation limit (in dB) atm-7
Manual Outgoing trunk route
Define the manual DN in LD 14 at prompt
MNDN.
basic-1
Maximum number of channels allowed on the ISA route, service dependent. The value entered is the maximum number of trunks limited by this service route. This value must match the one assigned at the CO.
For example, if MAX = 8 for Tie routes, no more than 8 channels can be used simultaneously for Tie calls. Prompted when: isa-12
1. ISAR = YES and IFC = ESS4, or
2. NSF = YES and IFC = SL-1 or D100 for the selected ISA route defined by response to RTN prompt.
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0- 8
MBG Interface on the D-channel
Prompted if Network Tenant Service feature active.
brit-18
Mobile Extension route.
Where:
• YES = route is mobile extension
• NO = route is not mobile extension mobx-5.50
The call trace request string can be 0-8 digits in length.
Valid digits are 0-9, *, #.
emct-20
434 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MCDT
MCTM
MCTS
MDMP
MDTD
MFC
MFCI
MFCO
MFEA
MFED
MFEI
Response
(0)-4
Comment
Digit string delay time is in seconds.
Granularity is 1 second.
(0)- 30
Pack/Rel
emct-20
Malicious Call Trace request timer id (in seconds)
This is the disconnection delay which is used when the far end goes on hook. Granularity is 1 second. Prompted if interface type for the D-channel is AXE-10 Australia.
mct-10
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
1-(5)-31
(NO)
YES
CMFS
MFE
MFK5
MFK6
1-127
1-127
(YES) NO
0-(1)-9
(0)-127
Malicious Call Trace Signal
Modem Data Module Pair
ADM only route
Modem Data Module Pair route
Minimum Dial Tone Detection delay emct-20 adm-5 dtd-10
Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Signaling mfc-9
No MFC Signaling
Multifrequency Compelled or MFC Signaling
CIS MFS route. This response is allowed only if both the CIST and CSMFS packages are equipped and only for the outgoing CO
DTI2 routes and for the incoming DID DTI2 routes.
cismfs-23
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling for
Socotel
2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling mfe-10 kd3-20 kd3-20 mfc-9 MFC Incoming table number
Where 0 = Remove outgoing table
MFC Outgoing table number
Where 0 = Remove outgoing table mfc-9
Access code signals are used in the signaling
First digit of special service call
Precede with X to remove.
MFE table number for Incoming calls mfe-10 mfe-10 mfe-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 435
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
MFEO
MFKI
MFKO
MFSS
MIN
MOD
MODE
Response Comment
Where 0 = Remove incoming table
(0)-127 MFE table number for Outgoing calls
Where 0 = Remove outgoing table
Pack/Rel
mfe-10
1- 127
1- 127
MFK table number for Incoming calls
MFK table number for Outgoing calls kd3-20 kd3-20
(B1) B2 B3 Specifies the first MFS digit request backward signal used by the incoming
CDTI2-MFS trunk for the requesting the next digit from the outgoing CIS CO party. The
MFSS is prompted only if the MFC is set to
CMFS only for incoming routes.
cismfs-23
0-510 Minimum number of channels allowed on the
ISA route, service dependent
For example, if MIN = 2 for Tie routes, at least two channels is available for Tie calls.
Prompted when: isa-12
• ISAR = YES and IFC = ESS4
• NSF = YES and IFC = SL1 or D100 for the selected ISA route defined by response to
RTN prompt.
(NO)
YES
APN
ISLD
PRA
Network Mode for synchronous operation
Modem Mode for synchronous operation
Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN =
SYN.
basic-18
Mode of operation
Analog Private Network
APN is allowed only with Integrated Services
Digital Network Signaling Link (ISL) package
147 and Digital Private Signaling System 1
(DPNSS) package 123.
Route uses ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)
ISLD is allowed only if ISDN = YES, and the
Integrated Services Digital Network
Signaling Link (ISL) package 147 is equipped. ISLD is allowed only on ISA and
TIE trunks.
ISDN/PRA route, DTRK must be YES
PRA allowed only if ISDN = YES.
pra-12
436 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
MR
Prompt
MON
MQC_FEAT
Response
<CR>
Comment
Note:
Valid response for this prompt is PRA if
M911P prompt is set to YES and VTRK is set to NO.
Default is NULL for service/reference routes
If you enter YES to prompt ISAR, then use the default <CR> for this prompt. If ISAR is
YES, then MODE prints NULL and does not allow a response.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
(NO) YES
NAS
NACD
NMS
Monitoring for route basic-12
MCDN QSIG Feature type
Prompted if RECAP = MQC
Precede MQC Feature type with X to remove meet-24
MCDN NAS functionalities are supported over QSIG
MCDN NACD functionalities are supported over QSIG
MCDN NMS - MC functionalities are supported over QSIG
(NO)
DURC
ENDC
PPM
RVB
STAC
Message Registration
If a 1TR6 trunk route is created where TKTP
= COT or DID, MR is automatic and is not prompted. However, if TKTP = TIE, then MR is not applicable to the route and is not prompted.
The route is not metered. If MR is set to NO, the trunk should have a Polarity Insensitive
Class of Service in LD 14. (CLS = PIP) mr-10
The AOC information is decoded during and at the end of the call. IFC must be set to
NUME or SWIS.
The AOC information is decoded at the end of the call
Buffered PPM signals to be counted on this route
Reverse Battery signal from PSTN for CO interrupted as supervisory signal and used as MR on this route.
Activation of the AOC-S sub-service
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 437
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
MRT
MTND
MULT
MUS
MWRT
MWTO
Response
XLD
Comment
M & MM Lead non-buffered is used. The only metering type allowed for TKTP = IDA and
SIGL = DAS.
MR is not prompted for Danish and Swedish
EuroISDN interfaces as AOC is not supported for those countries.
0-511
Pack/Rel
Music Route number
Route 31 can be configured an exclusively private route in LD 16.
MRT defines the Music Route number for
Recorded Announcement queueing.
mus-1 ranbrd-23 ran-23 mus-23
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Malicious Call Trace Tandem Disconnect delay for AXE10 interface
If set to YES the disconnect operation is delayed at the node closest to the CO for up to MCTM time when the call is a tandem call.
emct-20
Multiplier for Charge Information
Do not change calculation of charge information.
Provide the exact cost of charge information if the RURC exponent is configured to the value of the multiplier.
The response to MULT is YES when the
Central Office sends charge information in one hundredth of currency and the currency multiplier is less than 1. The multiplier exponent can be equal to the RURC exponent. This is only used with functional protocol.
isdn-22
(NO) YES
0 - (2) - 15
(15) - 30
Music on Hold mus-1
Message Waiting Retry Timer.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.
qsig-ss-25.4
Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started qsig-ss-25.4
438 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MXTI
M911_ABAN
M911_ANI
M911_FORM
Response Comment
when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL
PROCEEDING message.
0-(5)-15
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Maximum Time to wait for the far end to connect to test line (in seconds) atm-7
Meridian 911 Call Abandon
Abandoned call treatment is not used on this route
Abandoned call treatment is used on this route m911-21
(1)
2
Receive ANI for Meridian 911 routes.
The M911_ANI prompt acts as a gate opener for Meridian 911 prompts and always set to
YES. Prompted with Meridian 911 (M911) package 224 and TKTP = DID.
m911-19
Automatic Number Identification Format
1 = NPD (1 digit) +7-digit ANI
2 = II (2 digits) +10/20-digit ANI m911-25
M911_TONE
M911_TRK_T
YPE
(YES)
NO
Meridian 911 Tone
Tone given on answer
Silence given on answer
Meridian 911 ANI trunk types m911-21 m911-19
NACC
NADT
(T911T)
911E
(PGNR)
PGNC
PGNU
(0)-255
E911 tandem connections
End office connection
Network access control
Paging route is PAGENET restricted
Paging route is PAGENET controlled
Paging route is PAGENET uncontrolled
NACC is prompted if TKTP = PAG and
PAGENET package 307 is equipped.
pagenet-22
No-Answer Disconnect Timer (in seconds)
Only for 2.0 Mb/s DTI trunks.
isdn-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 439
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
NASA
NATL
NCNA
NCNI
NCOS
NCRD
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Network Attendant Service Allowed
Only prompted if IFC is SL1
(YES) NO
(YES) NO
(0)-7
(0)-99
(NO)YES
Pack/Rel
nas-20
North American Toll scheme; a toll call has 0 or 1 as first or second digit.
If NXX second digit is "1" set NATL to "NO" and answer "0" "1" to TDG. All toll digits for
TDG prompt can be removed by a YES response if REQ = CHG. Repeat LD 16 with a NO response to add toll digits.
cdr-13
.
Network Calling Name Allowed
Prompted if ISDN = Yes
Request CNI after the defined number of digits are received.
If NCNI = 0, CNI request does not depend on the number of digits received.
If NCNI is defined to be greater than the number of digits required for routing the call,
CNI do not be requested but the call is routed.
Prompted when the following occur: pra-13 dpnss-20
• Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
(MFC) package is equipped
• TKTP = DID or TIE
• MFC Table = R2MF
• MFC signaling table is defined for the route
Network Class of Service group number.
Prompted if TKTP = TIE.
Network Call Redirection allowed
YES allows Network Call Redirection messages to be sent or blocked if NCRD =
(NO).
Network Call Redirection can occur without having NCRD = YES. This prompt only controls the sending of Network Call
Redirection messages, not the actual redirection of the call.
When NCRD = YES, the message supplied provides information for the CLID display.
When NCRD = (NO), the call is redirected without the CLID redirection information if
CLID is enabled.
pra-13 pra-14
440 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NCTH
NDGT
NDIG
NDNO
NDP
NDRI
NEDC
Response
(0) - 100
Comment
Number of Calls Waiting Threshold.
Prompted only if BDCT = YES and for Start/
Stop RAN machine with STRT = DDL.
Default value zero means no threshold applies.
Pack/Rel
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23
1-(4)-7
1-(4)-31
(2)-10
Number of DNIS Digits expected
Number of DNIS digits required on the route
The extension to 31 digits is only available for DID, TIE or IDA routes.
dnis-10 dnis-24
Number of Digits in numbering plan at conventional main switch.
Prompted if SIGO = STD and CBQ = YES.
casm-1
0-254
INC 0-32
EXC 0-32
<CR>
(0)-4
(ORG)
ETH
Night IDC tree number
When REQ = NEW default is the DCNO tree defined. Otherwise, there is no default value.
idc-14
Number of Digits Printed
NDP affects dialed digits including EES digits with one exception. When both ECDR
= YES in LD 15 and OPD = YES in LD 16,
NDP affects only the outpulsed digits; the
EES digits are not affected.
Output the first 0-32 digits
Suppress the last 0-32 digits
If REQ = NEW, output all digits and suppress none.
isdn-15
Network Distinctive Ringing Index
(0) = Default/undefined edrg-16
Near End Disconnect Control
This entry determines the type of control exercised by the Meridian SL - 1 on trunk disconnections.
Originating end control The far-end on-hook condition is recognized only for incoming calls. Far end conditions are ignored for outgoing calls. ORG is default for TIE, DID and CCSA trunks.
Either end control If the far end goes on-hook for either incoming or outgoing calls, the onhook condition is recognized and the call is basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 441
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
NMNL
NMSG
NODE
NOUT
NPA
NPID
Response Comment
disconnected. ETH is the default for all trunks except TIE, DID and CCSA trunks.
27-90
Pack/Rel
Note:
If SUPP (131) package is disabled, then outgoing trunk to trunk transfer is allowed only when the response for FEDC and
NEDC is ETH.
Noise Maintenance Limit (in dBrn) atm-7
(0)-30 a...a
27-90 nnn
0-9
Number of this items Message is repeated mfc-24
Node ID.
For CS 1000S system.
The Node ID can have a maximum of 4 numeric characters.
NODE ID associated with the SS dedicated for 911P trunks.
basic-2
Note:
Remove all trunks associated with the node before you change the NODE field.
Noise Out-of-Service limit (in dBrn) atm-7
Numbering Plan Area
Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit
If <CR> is entered, the NPID table is created.
m911-19 m911-19
NPID_TBL_NUM
NRT
NSF
NTOF
0-511
0-7
(NO) YES
(YES) NO m911-19
Meridian 911 route table index
The ID table must be created before this prompt can be answered.
Notification Route number
Near To Far measurement
See prompts REF, TST and PADL.
mfc-24
Network Service Facility
Prompted when TKTP = ISA and IFC = D100 or SL1. When NSF = YES, the ATB traffic counter is incremented when the MAX value is reached in the service route.
pra-12 atm-7
442 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NTOL
OABS
OAL
OAN
OGDN
OGIS
OGNP
Response
(DENY)
ALOW
Comment Pack/Rel
Deny North American Toll calls (example, 1+ calls)
Allow North American Toll calls eqa-17
0-9 Actual outgoing toll digits to be ignored for
Code Restriction
OABS is frequently used with 1+calls.
Precede with X to remove.
basic-1
(NO) YES
(YES) NO xxxx xxx xxxx (NO)
CDR on outgoing calls
If answer supervision is defined for the trunk,
CDR records are generated only on call completion.
cdr-1
CDR timing starts On Answer supervision of outgoing calls
Prompted if OAL or OTL = YES. This prompt only applies to trunks with answer supervision CLS = PSP, or SUPN = YES.
With International Supplementary Features
(SUPP) package 131, the default is NO.
Without SUPP package 131, the default is
YES.
CLID DN for outgoing route (1-7 digits) and
CLID entry (0-125) for trunk DN
CLID DN for outgoing route (1-7 digits) and
CLID is not generated for trunk DN
OGDN is prompted if ICIS = NO or if the trunk route is not ISDN.
mfc/isdn-22
(YES)
NO
(UKWN)
PRV
Outgoing Identifier Send
Use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/R2MFC trunk or from the calling set. If OGIS = YES and the incoming trunk is R2MFC, the CNI form the incoming trunk CLID/CNI is used in the CLID.
Do not use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/
R2MFC trunk or from the calling set.
OGIS is prompted for outgoing routes when
ISDN = YES or if table of MFCI = R2MF.
mfc/isdn-22
Outgoing Numbering Plan
Unknown numbering plan
Private mfc/isdn-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 443
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
OGNT
OGPS
OHQ
OHQT
OHT
OHTD
OHTT
Response
PUB
Comment
Public
OGNP is prompted only if the CLID entry for
OGDN = 0-125.
(UKWN)
CDP
INTL
LCL
LOC
NTN
SPN
(YES)
NO
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Outgoing Numbering Type
Unknown numbering type
Coordinated dialing plan
International number
Local number
Location number
National number
Special Number
OGNT is prompted if CLID entry for OGDN
= 0-125.
mfc/isdn-22 mfc/isdn-22 Outgoing Presentation Status
Provide Trunk DN
Do not provide Trunk DN
OGPS is prompted if the CLID entry for
OGDN = 0-125.
.
Off-Hook Queuing
Used in NARS for incoming TIE callers ohq-1
(0)-63
0-(30)-126
(NO)
YES
0-(30)-62
Off-Hook Queue Threshold
BARS/NARS availability test. Compare with current P3 calls.
ohq-1
Off-Hook Timer
Number of seconds in increments of two after which an outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnecst after the far end disconnects.
Prompted when CNTL = YES and OPCB =
YES opcb-14 basic-24
Off-Hook Timer Delay
Masks the far end Off-Hook for up to 384 ms measured from the end of the interdigit pause of the digit send out.
Masks the far end Off-Hook for up to 2 seconds.
basic-1
Toll Off-Hook Timer
Number of seconds in increments of two after which a toll outgoing Calling Party pemd-18
444 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
OPA
OPCB
OPD
OPDL
OPE
OPP
OPR
Response Comment
Control call disconnects after the far end disconnects. Toll calls are identified by the responses to TDG and SSL.
Prompted when CNTL = YES and OPCB =
YES.
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Generates CDR or CDAS record for PPM pulses.
isdn-10
Operator Call Back
OPCB features to be assigned to this route.
Prompted when:
• TKTP = DID
• NEDC = ETH
• FEDC = ETH
• CPDC = NO
• CNTL = YES
• Operator Callback (OPCB) package 126 is equipped.
opcb-14
(YES)
NO
(0)-8064
(NO) YES
(NORM)
ATT
(NO) YES
Outpulsed Digits in CDR
Dialed digits in CDR
System must be initialized for changes to the
OPD settings to take effect. Prompted when
OTL = YES, OAL = YES or OAN = YES.
Outpulsing Delay, in milliseconds
If required for JDMI, OPDL = 3000 milliseconds.
Prompted when DGTP = DTI2 or JDMI.
cdr-12 pra-14
Change data port or operating parameters
Prompted only if TKTP = R232, R422 or
MCU.
basic-18
Operator originated calls receive normal treatment for busy and intercept situations
Operator originated calls routed to attendant for busy and intercept situations mfc-15
Outpulsing Route
All trunk members for an OPR must have
DTN CLS, unless they are on Route 31 or opao-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 445
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
OTL
OUT_T306
OVLR
OVLS
OVLT
PADL
PADT
Response Comment
Private Line Routes. When RPA = YES, the default is YES.
Prompted with Outpulsing of Asterisk "*" and
Octothorpe "#" (OPAO) package 104, and prompted when TKTP = COT, DID, FEX,
TIE, or WATS.
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
CDR on Outgoing Toll calls
If answer supervision is defined for the trunk,
CDR records are generated only on call completion. Prompted when OAL = NO and
Route = CAMA, CO, DID, FX, or WATS.
cdr-1
0-(30)-T306
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-8
Outgoing T306 timer value
T306 is the variable timer for received
DISCONNECT messages on outgoing calls.
This T306 allows in-band tones sent by the network to be heard.
This timer is stored in 2 second increments.
Listed below are region-specific T306 values:
APAC region T306 max value (in seconds)
Australia 60 China 30 Hong Kong 30
Indonesia 30 Japan 30 Malaysia 30 New
Zealand 30 Singapore 30 Thailand 30 bri-20
Overlap Receiving allowed
Not prompted if IFC = Numeris.
ovlp-15
Overlap Sending allowed. This prompt appears for the following APISDN interfaces which support Overlap Sending: AUST,
HKNG, SING, TCNZ, THAI. OVLS is not prompted if IFC = Numeris.
ovlp-15
Inter-INFO Timer during Overlap Sending.
This prompt appears only for APISDN interfaces which support Overlap Receiving:
THAI.
ovlp-15
0-63
0-63
Pad factor for loop around (in dB)
This is the far end tone level, plus the total pad loss at both ends on two trunks.
atm-7
Pad factor for T100 test line (in dB) atm-7
446 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
PII
Prompt
PANS
PAR
PBDO
PCID
PECL
PGPN
Response Comment
This is the near end tone level, plus the total pad loss at both ends.
(YES)
NO
(SPAC)
EVEN
MARK
ODD
Pack/Rel
Pseudo-Answer can be sent on some types of trunks as soon as end of dialing is detected.
supp-14
Pseudo-Answer is not sent on any type of trunk.
SUPN in LD 14 can be YES, or PANS = YES has no meaning.
Data port Parity
Space
Even
Mark
Odd
Prompted if TKTP = R232, R422 or MCU.
basic-18
(OFF) ON xxxx
Port Busy upon DTR Off
Prompted if TKTP = R232, DEM = DCE and
DTR = OFF.
basic-18 basic-2 Protocol ID for the route.
Where xxxx:
H323 = non-SIP route
SIP = SIP route
SIPL = SIP Line route basic-4.00
basic-6.00
(NO) YES
0-15
(NO)
YES
Periodic Clearing Signal
Not supported on XCOT.
Protocol Set Group. This entry must be consistent with Protocol Group Number
(PGPN) entry in LD 27.
supp-14 mph-18
Privacy Indicator Ignored
Calling Party Privacy Indicator is honored and the existing functionality is maintained.
The Calling Party Privacy Indicator is ignored. When PII is set to YES, the CLID
Presentation Indicator field in the Calling
Party Number IE is changed from restricted to allowed and the CPND Indicator field in cpp-23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 447
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
PNDL
PNI
Prompt
PLEV
Response
[CR]
Comment
the Display IE is changed from denied to allowed.
Leave the feature setting as it was prior to the active service change.
Pack/Rel
Note:
The PII prompt applies to all ISDN interfaces.
• Euro ISDN (All variants)
• APAC (All variants)
• QSIG (ISO and ETSI)
• MCDN Enterprise networking variants
(including the peer-to-peer variant-SL1 and the enterprise UNI variant- SL100)
• H323 and SIP (they use the MCDN peer-to-peer variant-SL1 between the call server and the signaling server) cppe-6.0
0-(2)-7
2-(6)-10
(0)-32700
Priority Level
Priority Level 2 sets can override sets of
Level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of Level 2-7.
Prompted with Priority Override/Forced
Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or
Enhanced DPNSS1 Services (DPNSS_ES) package 288.
povr-20
Process Notification Delay Timer in seconds mfc-24
Private Network Identifier
Each customer data block must have a unique PNI when equipped with the multicustomer option. PNI = 1 is typical for customer 0. It must match the PNI in the far end CDB to support such features as NRAG,
NACD and NMS.
The PNI in the RDB functions as a logical customer number for routing outgoing noncall-associated Transaction Capability
Application Part or TCAP facility messages to the appropriate ESN translations within the far end PBX.
Using the default value of PNI = 0 prevents operation of features such as NRAG, NACD and NMS.
pra-12
448 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PNNC
PNPS
POST
PRDL
PREM
PRIV
PROG
Response
(NO) YES
(0)-30
DIS
ATT
(NO)
YES
BSY
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
NCHG
MALE
MCON
Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
Requires package 148 (NTWK)
Process Notification Networked Calls
Interval between messages (2 seconds increments)
RAN Post announcement treatment
Disconnect after maximum repetitions
Route to attendant after maximum repetitions
No Partial Dial timing on DID routes
Partial Dial timing is equipped using EOD
Busy signal is sent on time-out
Preemption allowed on this route. If SLP package is equipped, then COT, DID, FX,
ISDN and Tie trunk types can be preemptable.
mfc-24 mfc-24 ran-1 supp-10 atvn-25.47
Route is not a Private line route
Route is a Private line route
Any COT route can be a private route.
Prompted if TKTP = COT and REQ =
NEW.
basic-14
Progress
Send a PROGRESS signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
NCHG is the default for all interfaces except
Australian and Austrian. NCHG is not supported with Japan interface.
Send an ALERT signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
MALE is the default for Japan interface.
Send a CONNECT signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a euroisdn-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 449
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
PR_RTN
PR_TRIGS
PSDS
PSEL
PTUT
PTYP
Response Comment
progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
MCON the default for Australian and
Austrian interface.
(NO) YES
DIV xx y
CNG xx y
CON xx y
Pack/Rel
Path Replacement Retain Option is supported by the far end Private Integrated
Services Network Exchange.
qsig ss- 23
Path Replacement Triggers are set to their default values:
DIV 2 3
CNG 2 3
XCON 2 3
2 Path Replacement attempts with a delay of 3 minutes for Diversion and Congestion triggers but Connected number is not a trigger.
Diversion is used to trigger Path
Replacement.
Congestion is used to trigger Path
Replacement.
A Connected number different from a called number is used to trigger Path
Replacement.
xx = 0 - 15, the number of Path Replacement attempts.
y = 1 - 7, the delay between two Path
Replacement attempts in minutes.
Precede with X to remove.
qsig ss-23
(NO) YES
(DMDM)
TLNK
0-510
Public Switched Data Service
Prompted if TKTP = MCU.
basic-18
DM-DM Protocol Selection
T-link Protocol Selection
TLNK protocol is used by SL-100 and DMS data devices, DM-DM is used by Meridian 1 data devices such as ASIM, AIM, ADM,
SADM, Asynch Data Option or ADO, and
MPDA. MCA uses both protocols. PSEL is prompted if TKTP = R232, R422, or MCU.
basic-18
Preference Trunk Usage Threshold
Port Type at far end mfc-24 basic-5
450 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
QREC
R2MD
RACD
Response Comment
The response to this prompt is used in determining the required transmission level.
Refer to Transmission Parameters
Reference (NN43001-282) for more information.
Analog TIE trunk routes:
(ATT)
AOT
Analog TIE trunks
Analog TIE trunk, used instead of ATT whenever the PBX has one or more digital satellite trunk routes or DST to any digital satellite PBX which includes OPX telephones.
AST Satellite PBX TIE or ESN trunks if SAT =
YES
Digital TIE trunk routes:
(DTT)
DCT
DST
Digital or combination TIE trunk
Combination satellite PBX TIE trunk
Digital satellite PBX TIE trunk (allowed if
SAT = YES or NO)
Analog CO trunk routes:
(ACO)
ATO
Analog CO trunk
Analog toll office trunk
Digital CO, FEX, DID, and WAT trunk routes:
(DCO)
DTO
Digital or combination CO port
Digital or combination Toll Office trunk
1.5 Mb/s PRI TIE trunk routes:
(PRI)
DTT
DCT
DST
B-channel port classification
Digital or combination TIE trunk
Combination satellite PBX TIE trunk
Digital Satellite PBX TIE trunk
1.5 Mb/s PRI CO, FEX, DID, and WAT trunk routes:
(PRI)
DCO
DTO
B-channel port classification
Analog CO trunk
Analog toll office trunk
(NO) YES CDR ACD Q initial connection records to be generated
Pack/Rel
cdr-1
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
R2 modification
Route traffic information in ACD Reports mfc-9 acd-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 451
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
RANH
RANR
RANX
RCAL
Response Comment
Enter YES only if the route is used as the
Interflow DN of at least one ACD DN and the
Interflow Trunk traffic is desired.
Prompted for COT, TIE, DID, WAT, FEX and
RAN trunk types.
Actual ACD Report format output examples are included in the ACD Management
Reporting NTP.
x...x
x...x
Pack/Rel
RAN or Music route which is used after post treatment, where:
• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS
1000E
• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T
Precede with x to remove.
atan-25.4
RAN Route number for the desired RAN route, where:
• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS
1000E
• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S,
MG 1000B and MG 1000T ranx-20
(NO)
YES
(NO)
ATT
DRA
RAN for calls diverted to external trunks
RAN not requested when a call is forwarded to this route.
RAN requested when a call is forwarded to this route.
Prompted when:
1. TKTP = COT
2. RPA = NO
3. DSEL = VCE or VOD
4. ICOG = IAO or OGT ranx-20
Deny Manual Service Recall
Allow Manual Service Recall
DID Recall to Attendant for DTI2 trunks
RCAL is prompted when TKTP = DID or
COT supp-10
452 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RCAP
Response
BRI
CCBI
CCBO
CCBS
CCNI
CCNO
CCNR
COLP
CTI
CTO
XCOLP
Comment
Remote Capabilities. Precede with X to remove a configured capability. This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.
Pack/Rel
supp-10
ISDN Line/Trunk interworking. Default for all
Asia Pacific interfaces.
Call Completion to busy subscriber using integer value for operation coding
CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive.
qsig ss-24
Call Completion to busy subscriber using object identifier for operation coding
CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber for
QSIG and EuroISDN BRI interfaces.
CCBS is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package 316 is equipped.
Call Completion on no response using integer value for operation coding.
CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.
Call Completion on no response using object identifier for operation coding.
CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.
qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24
Call Completion to No Reply for QSIG and
EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCNR is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package
316 is equipped.
Connected Number IE Presentation is supported on far end. COLP is supported on
Indonesian interfaces, not as a default because it can be configured.
Default value for ESIG, ISIG, NI2 and
EUROISDN interfaces except for AUS, EIR,
DUT, BEL and FRA interfaces.
qsig ss-24 basic- 23
Call Transfer Integer
CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.
Call Transfer Object
CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.
Add call transfer notification remote capability to the EuroISDN interface.
Precede with 'X' to remove capability.
Remove COLP
Default value for all APAC, AUS, EIR, DUT,
BEL and FRA interfaces.
qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 bne-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 453
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt Response Comment
This prompt is issued only for UIPE-based protocols.
CPK
Pack/Rel
Network Call Park.CPK is allowed if IFC =
SL1 and CPRKNET package 306 is equipped.
QSIG SS Call Diversion Notification remote capability. Configure sending of QSIG
Diversion Notification Information, treatment of Rerouting request and coding of operations. If coded as Object Identifier, the remote capability ends with 'O", whereas for
Integer Value, the remote capability ends with 'I'. Only one remote capability is allowed.
qsig ss- 23
DV1I
DV1O
DV2I
DV2O
DV3I
DV3O
ECTO
MCID
MQC
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Diversion information is sent to remote switch. Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
EuroI ISDN Call Diversion
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Precede with 'X' to remove capability.
bne-25
Add call transfer notification and invocation remote capability to the EuroISDN
Precede with 'X' to remove capability.
bne-25 etsi ss- 23 MCID = Add MCID as a new remote capability.
Precede with 'X' to remove.
MCDN QSIG Conversion as a Remote capability meet-24
454 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RCLS
Response
NAC
NCT
ND1
ND2
ND3
NDI
NDO
Comment
Network access data.NAC is allowed if IFC
= SL1.
Enter XNAC to remove NAC from Remote
Capabilities.
Network Call Trace
Network Name Display 1
Network Name Display 2
Network Name Display 3. This ensures the same level of service between the MCDN and QSIG name display services.
Name Display - Integer ID Coding
Name Display - Object ID Coding
Pack/Rel
qsig-24 qsig-24
NDS
PRI
PRO
QMWI
QMWO
XQMW
Name Display Services
Add Path Replacement as a remote capability. Only one capability can be configured per link.
The encoding method uses Integer Values.
The encoding method uses Object Identifier
Precede with 'x' to remove capability.
qsig ss- 23
Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability.
The encoding method uses Integer Values.
Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability.
The encoding method uses Object
Identifier.
Remove Message Waiting Indication.
QMWI and QMWO are exclusive and may not be configured at the same time on the same link.
qsig ss-25.4
qsig ss-25.4
qsig ss-25.4
RVQ
UUS1
XUUS
(EXT)
INT
Remote Virtual Queuing
User-to-User Service 1
Decode UUS IE sent by Central Office
Send UUS IE to Central Office
Remove User-to-User Service 1 bne-25 bne-25
Route Class marked as external
Route Class marked as internal
Applies only to CAA, COT, CSA, DID, FEX,
TIE, FGDT, or WATS trunks.
basic-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 455
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
RDNL
REF
REP
REQ
RGFL
RLSM
ROUT
Response
0-(4)-7
Comment Pack/Rel
Remote DN length used to extract the necessary number of DN digits from the
MCDN or QSIG CLID or from the DPNSS
OLI.
Prompted if Commonwealth of Independent
States - Three Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package 221 is equipped for QSIG, MCDN, or DPNSS TIE routes.
cist-21 n...n
1-15
CHG
END
OUT
LCHG
NEW ic dc
Reference loop around DN, range is 2 to 10 digits basic-1
Repetitions of recorded announcements ran-1 basic-1 Request
Change existing data block
Exit overlay program
Remove data block
Print date and time that a trunk data block was last changed. The change can be the result of a NEW, OUT, or CHG command.
Add new data block to the system
(0)-15 x...x
Ring Failure threshold. Where:
• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31
• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31
RGFL specifies the percentage threshold for trunks which fail to produce the expected ringing and ground changes. See prompt
ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.
RGFL is not prompted for AID, CAM, CSA,
RLM, RLR and TIE trunks The default for
RAN and MUS trunks is 12 6.
basic-1
Release Mechanism.
Refer to Table 3: Release Mechanism
Options on page 398. RLSM is prompted if
DTRK = YES and DGTP = DTI2.
pedm-18
Route number
Where x...x =
0-511: Large System
For CS 1000E System basic-1 basic-4.00
456 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RPA
RPPM
RRBS
RTN
RTYP
Response Comment
0-127: Small System
For MG 1000B and MG 1000T
(NO) YES
(0)
10-250
251
Pack/Rel
Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering polling time (in seconds)
Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering do not operate
1-9 Rounded up to 10
Rounded down to 250 basic-4.00
Radio Paging Route
If this prompt is set to NO, the route is not allowed to be used for Radio Paging.
Prompted with Radio Paging (RPA) package
187 and TKTP = TIE or COT.
rpa-20 pedm-16
(NO)
YES
Repeat Release Before Seize
Seize the trunk normally.
A release signal is sent followed by the seize signal.
RRBS allows a FRLS signal to be sent immediately before a SEZ signal on a DTI2 trunk. RRBS is prompted if DTRK = YES,
DGTP = DTI2 and FRRS is not set to YES.
pedm-18
0-511
AUD
CAP
CK2
CKM
CON
DGT
LVL
MCON
MLSS
MLVL
MPUL
Route Number for any configured ISA route
RTN is the Route Number of the associated
Call-By-Call master route.
Prompted if TKTP = TIE.
pra-12
Recording device for RAN trunks
Audichron or Cook 212, required for XUT trunks
Code-a-Phone
Cook 201 or QAY1
Cook 201 Multichannel
NT7M Digital Recorders
213300 and 213400 Digital Recorders ran-1
Level start/stop (Enhanced Universal Trunk cards)
Continuous mode, multichannel.
Multi-channel Level Start/Stop. (Enhanced
Universal Trunk cards) Maximum length of message = 608 seconds.
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 457
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
RUCF
Response
PUL
Comment
Level start/stop, multichannel.
Pulse start/stop, multichannel.
These modes supports independent RAN trunks.
Request the RAN broadcast package.
Pulse start/stop (Enhanced Universal Trunk cards)
The Enhanced Universal Trunk cards word with CAP, CK2, or AUD RAN interfaces. The
Pulse and Level start/stop options are used in conjunction with the RAN interface selected.
The maximum length of the message allowed by software:
• AUD = 64 seconds
• CAP = 608 seconds
• CK2 = 64 seconds
• CON = 608 seconds
• DGT = 256 seconds x y
Pack/Rel
Route Unit Conversion Factor
Formula for Route Unit Conversion Factor is:
X*10
(-Y)
Where:
• x = 0-(1)-9999
• y = (0)-3 isdn-15
This results in a range of .001 to 9999.
If the Central Office sends the call charge in
AOC units (instead of AOC currency), RUCF is used to convert this charge into PPM format.
Call Charge scenarios:
1. When call charge in sent in currency:
Displayed charge = (Received charge/
RURC) * RUCS
2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:
Displayed charge = (Received charge *
RUCF) * RUCS units
RUCF is not prompted for Danish and
Swedish EuroISDN.
458 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RUCS
RURC
RVSD
Response
0-9999
Comment Pack/Rel
Route Unit Cost
RUCS can be used in Motel/Hotel type environments to calculate the margin the
Meridian 1 administrator wants to make per unit.
Call Charge scenarios: basic-10
1. When call charge in sent in currency:
Displayed charge = (Received charge/
RURC) * RUCS
2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:
Displayed charge = (Received charge *
RUCF) * RUCS units
When REQ = NEW, RUCS defaults to the
UCST value in CDB. RUCS is prompted when MR = PPM or XLD. Not prompted for
Danish and Swedish EuroISDN.
x y ic dc
Route Unit Reference Cost
Formula for Route Unit reference Cost is: X
* 10
(-Y)
Where:
• x = 0 - 9999
• y = (0) - 3 basic-20
This gives a range from.001 to 9999.
Call Charge scenarios:
1. When call charge in sent in currency:
Displayed charge = (Received charge/
RURC) * RUCS
2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:
Displayed charge = (Received charge *
RUCF) * RUCS units
The default value for x is identical to the previously entered RUCS value. Not prompted for Danish and Swedish
EuroISDN.
Reversed wired CO trunk threshold.
Where:
• ic = increment count = 1-(8)-31
• dc = decrement count = 1-(31) basic-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 459
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
SAT
SBN
SCDT
SCR
SDID
SEIZ
SGL
SGRP
Response Comment
RVSD specifies the percentage threshold for
CO trunks which have tip and ring or other trunk wiring problems. See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.
Prompted for COT, FEX and WATS trunks.
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Satellite used for trunk route via earth orbiting satellite
This prompt has no relation to the trunk route function connecting a main PBX to a satellite
PBX.
esn-1 basic-21 Do not send Billing Number on this route
Send Billing Number on this route
Secondary Dial Tone detection dtd-10
YES (NO)
Selective Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal
Access calls
New Flexible Code Restriction is enabled.
NTOL and ITOL must both be ALOW.
eqa-19
Send DID number instead of internal DN.
IDC table with SDID Yes must be configured.
basic-25.4
ic dc
(NO)
YES
(0)-999
Seize failure threshold. Where:
• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31
• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31
SEIZ specifies the percentage threshold of trunks which request seizure but are not seized (either no response from the far end or response is too late).
See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.
The default for AID trunks is 2 1. The default for RAN and MUS trunks is 12 6.
basic-1 mfe-10 Signal
Return normal MFE signal
Return MFE idle signal
Scheduled access restriction group sar-20 pra-15
460 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
SID
Prompt
SIDE
SIGL
SIGO
Response Comment
Prompted with Scheduled Access
Restrictions (SAR) package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.
0-511
(NET)
USR
Pack/Rel
Service Identification for the route
Used to poll switches for traffic, ACD or CDR reports. Allows NSF to be turned on or off.
The service route ID must match the far end.
Prompted if NSF = YES and TKTP = TIE/
WAT/FX/COT.
Meridian SL-1 Node Type
Network
User
SIDE defaults to NET if IFC = SL1. SIDE defaults to USR if IFC = 1TR6, NUME,
APAC, EUROISDN or D70. Prompted if IFC
= SL-1.
basic-22
BEL
NT4
NT5
APNS
DAS
DPN
(STD)
ESN2
ESN3
ESN5
ETN
EN19
Signaling interface for CAMA trunks
Bell method
NT400 method
NT500 method
Layer 3 Signaling
APNSS signaling
DASS2 signaling, allowed with Digital
Access Signaling System 2 (DASS2) package 124
DPNSS signaling, allowed with Digital
Private Network Signaling System 1
(DPNSS) package 123 cama-1
Signaling arrangement
Standard signaling arrangement
Supports NCOS, TCOS and CCBQ call types
Supports network call transfer, Satellite Link
Control and all ESN2 call types. It does not support DTI calls. Either ESN2 or ESN3 is recommended for ISA
Supports DTI data calls plus all other types
Electronic TIE Network signaling arrangement esn-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 461
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
SIND
SLCT
SPCT
SPN
SPTO
SRCH
SRPM
Response Comment
ESN Transparent Data Networking data call.
Allowed when TKTP = TIE for PRI and DTI trunks.
(NO) YES Screening indicator for Mobile Extension route.
Prompted if MBXR = YES.
Where:
• YES = CLID is user provided and verified.
• NO = CLID is user provided and not verified.
Pack/Rel
mobx-5.50
TONE
MSG
(IMM)
DLY
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
(LIN)
RRB
0-(15)-255
Note:
If MBXR = NO, SIND is set to NO by default.
Select Tone
Select Message mfc-24
Speech Path Cut-Through
Immediate cut-through
Delayed cut-through basic-1
If yes is entered, the SPN's AC is inserted first to search for a valid UDP number. SPN is prompted when the route type is an IDA trunk with DPNSS1 signaling and when
INAC = YES.
pra-21
Super Trunk Option
7-10 digit outpulsing on ANI calls
3 digit outpulsing on ANI calls
Response must be YES for outpulsing to begin after three digits.
cam-1
Linear Hunting Search method for outgoing trunk member. Start with the highest trunk number, used for 2-way trunks.
Round Robin Hunting Search for outgoing trunk member. Start with next lower trunk than the one seized, used for outgoing trunks.
Service Parameter. Prompted if SRVC =
WATB.
basic-1 pra-16
462 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SRT
SRVC
SSL
Response Comment
1-(30)-1023 Number of minutes on an outgoing CDPC call a set is kept on hold to a trunk
(NNSF)
ACC
I800
IWAT
LDS
M800
MEG
Q900
SDN
WATB
WATM
(0) - 31
1-15
Pack/Rel
opcb-14
Service type provisioned for AT&T ESS connections (where IFC = ESS#4 or ESS#5)
Prompted if ISDN = YES and IFC = ESS4 or
ESS5. Prompted with Inter Exchange
Carrier (IEC) pkg 149.
No Network Specific Facility or NSF IE sent.
NSF refers to the services provided on a
Call-by-Call basis.
pra-12
Accunet Data service
International 800 service
In-WATs service for AT&T interface
Long Distance Service
MEGACOM 800 service
MEGACOM service
ATT&T Multiquest 900 service
Software Defined Network service
Wide Area Telephone Service Parameter
Band for AT&T ESS#5
Wide Area Telephone Maximal service for
AT&T ESS#5
Service provisioned for National ISDN PRI.
Prompted if IFC is NI2.
Decimal value of the service is entered here:
0 - No NSF IE (public network call)
One service route for incoming public network call and multiple service routes for outgoing public network call. The service route number for incoming public call has to be specified in IPUB prompt in the master route.
17 - INWATS selection
18 - OUTWATS selection
19 - Foreign Exchange Selection
20 - Tie Trunk Selection
AT&T defines services other than the one defined in the Bellcore CBC specification.
These values (defined in the facility coding field in the NSF IE) can be entered here to allow M1 to recognize the AT&T proprietary service.
cbc_pkg- 23
Special Service List number opcb-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 463
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
SST
STEP
STND
STRK
STRT
STYP
SVFL
Response Comment
Used to identify special service calls on this
PSTN for CO route, list must be previously defined in LD 18.
xx y
0-511
Pack/Rel
Seizure Supervision Timer
Timer for trunks with delay dial or DDL, wink or WNK and ground or GRD start arrangements. Where: xx = minimum value. Therefore: basic-18
• xx = 1-(3)-15 seconds for GRD start
• xx = 5 seconds for DDL and WNK y = increment value of 0-7 seconds
Alternate trunk route for outgoing trunks
STEP cannot be defined for an ISA route.
Route 31 is no longer an exclusively private route, unless configured as one in LD 16.
For dataport, it is only possible to step to a similar ADM data route.
Precede with X to delete.
basic-1
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
IMM
DDL
(SDAT)
STDN ic dc
Standard T100 test line (STND is 5.5
seconds and is followed by silent termination at the far end) atm-7
Super Trunk group feature cam-1
Start arrangement
Immediately connect call to recording
Delay call connection until start of recording ran-1
Standard Signaling Type
Standard Data signaling for voice and data
(DM-DM, non-tandem PSDS).
Standard Transparent Data Networking for voice and data and TDN calls. STDN is applicable to calls on DTI trunks only.
This prompt appears when SIGO = STD.
tdn-19
Supervision Failure. Where:
• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31
• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31 basic-1
464 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SWP
T100
TABL
TARG
TBL
TCPP
TCRS
Response Comment
SVFL specifies the percentage threshold for trunks which fail to obtain supervision. See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.
Prompted for only AID, CAM, CSA, RLM,
RLR and TIE trunks. The default for AID trunks is 2 1.
(NORM)
ATT
Subscriber With Priority calls receives normal treatment for busy and intercept situations.
Subscriber with priority calls routed to attendant for busy or intercept situations
Pack/Rel
mfc-15 n...n
0-31
0-(1)-31
(0)-15
T100 test line Directory Number, 2 to 10 digits basic-1
Flexible dial tone detection Table number dtd-14
Trunk Access Restriction Group range
Enter the list of all TGAR in LD 10, LD 11 and
LD 14 which have restricted access to this route.
Multiple groups can be defined or deleted.
To delete entries, enter Xnn. List all entries to be deleted (Xnn, Xnn, ...). Entries must be separated by a space.
basic-1
Prefix table number to be associated with this route isdn-24
(NO)
YES
(YES) NO
CPP flag for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route.
An incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route carries the Privacy
Override indicator.
The call is marked as a CPPO call.
An incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route carries the Privacy indicator
The call is marked as a CPP call.
cpp-24
The Toll Category Request Supported option is defined for the incoming TOLL CDTI2-
MFS routes. Setting the TCRS to NO means that the CIS TOLL exchange does not support the TOLL Call Category Request cismfs- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 465
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
TDET
TDG
TFD
TGAR
TIDY
TIER
TIMR
Response Comment
MFS signal (B11). The TCRS is prompted only if the MFC is set to the CMFS only for the incoming routes.
(NO) YES x... x
Tone Detector required
Pack/Rel
basic-1
Toll Digits. Where: x = 0-9
Actual digits after the trunk access code which indicate toll calls. Precede with X to remove. If all digits are removed, the digits revert to the North American toll scheme.
Prompted when NATL = NO.
cdr-13
(0) - 3600
0-(1)-31 xxxx yyyy
0-511 aaa xxx
Timed forced disconnect for paging trunks
(30 second increments). TFD must be defined individually for each route.
basic-15
Trunk Group Access Restrictions
Prompted if TKTP = TIE, ISAR = YES, and
ISDN = YES.
basic-12
Trunk Identity.
Where:
• xxxx = PBX Reference Number The xxxx default is LSC as defined in LD 15, combined with route access code truncated to four digits.
• yyyy = Trunk Group Reference Number
The yyyy default is route number truncated to four digits.
Each of the two numbers can be one to four digits. Prompted if Digital Private Network
Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123 equipped and SIGL not DPN.
dass2-16
Tie Reference route number
Determines how incoming TIE or private call types are handled for the associated
Integrated Service Access route or ISA.
Precede with X to delete. Prompted when
TKTP = ISA, IFC = D100 or SL-1 and NSF =
YES.
pra-12
Trunk Timers.
Where: basic-1
466 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• aaa = timer mnemonic
• xxx = timer value in milliseconds unless stated otherwise
Pack/Rel
AAD (384)-2048
Address Acknowledge Delay timer
AAD is the minimum time for the system to delay before sending the address acknowledge signal to the central office.
Inputs are in increments of 128 ms. Allowed only if Japan trunks and Meridian 1 packages are equipped.
ARD 512-(1024)-2048
ANI Request Duration Timer in 256ms increments
ARP 1-(3)-255 jpn-9
Autoguard Repeat Prevention timer
Only valid for Loop start COT. Inputs are in one second increments. International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package
131 and Meridian 1 XPE (XPE) package 203 required. Recommended value for Australia is 200.
ATO 128-(4992)-6528 xpe-18 ani-1 ANI Time-out timer in milliseconds.
For CIS outgoing trunk routes, the
ATO value defines the time delay which follows toll access code outpulsing. During this time delay, further outpulsing is halted until a special card firmware message confirms that the ANI response/ request interaction has been successful.
CRD 0-(512)-639
DDL 0-(70)-511
CO Release Delay timer.
Dial Delay timer
DSI 128-(34944)-499200 basic-18 basic-1
Disconnect Supervision timer
EESD 0-(1024)-4992
End to End Signalling Delay timer.
basic-1 arcl-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 467
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt Response Comment
The outpulsing DTMF tone using EES
(or IEES) is delayed "EESD" ms after the sending of the first recall signal to the
Norstar. If EESD = 0, the timer is not started and the buffered digits do not be outpulsed.
The EESD timer is accepted if
ACRL package 236 is equipped and if the route is analog TIE.
Pack/Rel
EOD 128-(13952)-32640
End-of-Dial timer, non-digitone trunks
For DID incoming calls in the U.S., to comply with FCC regulations, the EOD timer expires at 19,968 ms, even if configured otherwise.
All other call types utilize the configured timer parameters.
Refer to Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106for complete details concerning the FCC Compliance feature.
basic-1
FLH 0-(510)-32640
Hook Flash timer (in msec.)
The range for Centrex Switchhook flash timer is 256-(512)-1536. For CAS, it is recommended that the timer be set at 768 or greater.
This timer must be at least 256 ms shorter than the remote OGF timer and 256 ms shorter than the ICF timer.
thf-20
• 60-89 ms = Digit 1 is sent
• 90 ms = Hard coded for XFCOT hook flash
• 91-255 ms = Digit 1 is sent
• 256-1536 ms = Existing software controlled hook switch flash
Range for Centrex Switchhook flash timer is
60-(510)-1536 msec (the value is rounded to the nearest 10 msec).
Software controlled Centrex/Trunk Switch
Flash timer range of 60- 127 msec is done by sending digit 1.
The range of 128-1536 msec is already controlled by Centrex Switchhook Flash feature.
468 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Firmware flash user can enter any value from 60 to 1536.
FWTM must be YES in LD 14 for the trunk associated with this route, if firmware timing is to be used.
GRD 0-(896)-32640
Guard timer (response disallowed)
Pack/Rel
basic-1
GTI 0-(896)-32640
Incoming Guard timer (ms)
For DTI2 trunk routes, guard timer of 0 may be defined (meaning that timing is not necessary).
An Incoming Guard Timer on the
ISPC SLAVE side (when SMAS = NO) must be set to 0.
xct1-16
GTO 128-(896)-32640
Outgoing Guard timer
ICF 0-(512)-32640
Incoming Flash timer
IENB 2-(5)-10 xct1-16 basic-1
Idle Extension Notification Block timer (in minutes)
Semi-Automatic Camp-On (SACP) package
181 and Network Attendant Services (NAS) package 159 must be equipped.
nas-18
LCT 0-128-32640
Loop Calling detection timer Default for COT trunks = 128
Default for all others trunks = 256 basic-1
LEXT 50-(100)-350
Loop Extender timer (timer is in milliseconds)
The minimum amount of time the Meridian 1 waits to determine whether the tip is ground.
When the time is expired, the loop is closed to outpulsing.
tip-19
MAD 0-(500)-1000
Minimum Answer Delay timer
The minimum amount of time the Meridian 1 remains On-Hook after the called party is xujt-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 469
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt Response Comment
first alerted. Inputs are in steps of 100 ms, numbers are rounded up to next valid entry.
Allowed only if Japan trunks and Meridian 1 packages are equipped.
MFC 128-(12032)-65408
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) timer
MFE 128-(14976)-65408
MFC Interdigit timer
Pack/Rel
mfc-9 mfe-10
MFID (0) - 25088
R2MFC Interworking timer.
This timer is in the range of 0 - 25 seconds, in 128ms increments. A value of 0 indicates that the timer is disabled and existing timing functionality is used.
MFK 128-(4992)-32640
First backward signal awaiting timer basic-23 kd3-20
MFKM 45- (90)-180
Timer value in seconds representing the total amount of time the signal exchange equipment can be occupied in a call expressed in seconds.
MFO (0)-16256
MFC Transmit timer
If 0, then use current value of MFC Timer.
MFR128-(2048)-16256
MFC Reception timer
MFX128-(4096)-16256
MFC Transmission timer kd3-20 kd3-20 kd3-20
NBL 128-(4096)-32640
Enblock Long dialing timer
Long timeout period set to check if all digits have been entered.
NBS 128-(2048)-32640
Enblock Short dialing timer
Short timeout period set to check if all digits have been entered.
basic-12 basic-12
470 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NRAG (30)-240
Comment
Network Ring Again timer or DPNSS duration for T6 and T7 timers, in minutes.
Currently, only 30 minutes is supported.
NRD 128-(10112)-32640
No Ringing Detector change
OBA 2-(120)-510
Outgoing B-Answer timer
Time in seconds to wait for B-answer on outgoing ATL trunks for Sweden.
ODT 256-(4096)-16128
End-of-dial timer for DIGITONE trunks
OGF 0-(512)-32640
Outgoing Flash timer
OOD 1-(3)-3
Pack/Rel
pra-13 basic-1 supp-15 basic-1 basic-1
Optional Outpulsing Delay timer
Allowed for CO, FEX, WATT trunks.
RAS 128-(13952)-32640
Receipt of Answer Signal timer
RGV 128-(640)-1920
Ring Validation timer
Ring Validation timer for Japan Information.
Notification Service set as 256.
RMA 1024-32640
Receipt of Message Acknowledgment
Default = 5120 for SIGL = DPN.
Default = 20480 for SIGL = DAS
RTD 0-(12)-60 basic-1
Tone Detector Response Timer in seconds.
An odd numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number.
ardl-22
SFB 3-(3)-255
Seize Fail Busy timer
This timer controls the time that a trunk is held busy following a seize acknowledge failure or call collision. The recommended value for trunks with seizure supervision is
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 471
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
TITH
TKTP
Response
SRM 1024-(32640)
Service Request Message timer
TFD (0)-3600
Comment
25 seconds. The recommended value for trunks with no seizure supervision is 3 seconds.This value applies to all analog trunks except those which use the ARP timer.
Pack/Rel
Timed Forced Disconnect, in 30 second increments.
TFD applies to CO, DIC, FEX, PAG, TIE and
WATS routes.
basic-15
TTO (128)-7040
Taiwan Time Out value
VGD 0-(6)-31
VNS Guard timer
The time allowed for the trunk call to disconnect in seconds. This is the guard timer on the associated VNS DN.
VSS (0)-1-2-1023
Set Speechpath Timer. Where: twr1-24 vns-20 vns-20
• 0 = Do not answer the bearer channel until the terminating party answers
• 1 = Answer the bearer channel immediately on arrival
• 2-1023 = Answer the bearer channel after the specified seconds (rounded down to 2second multiple) if the terminating party has not already answered.
(0) - 300
ADM
Waiting Time Threshold (seconds).
Prompted only if BDCT = YES and for Start/
Stop RAN machine with STRT = DDL.
Default value zero means no threshold applies.
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23
Trunk Type
You must respond to this prompt when REQ
= NEW.
Add-on Data Module associated with a Data
Interface Card example, DLC, 4PDLC, AILC basic-5
472 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
AWR
CAA
CAM
CBCT
COT
CSA
DIC
DID
FEX
FGDT
IDA
IMUS
ISA
MCU
MUS
PAG
R232
Comment
Not supported on Small System.
Automatic Wake Up trunk block for RAN/
Music
Requires Automatic Wake Up (AWU) package 102.
Common Control Switching Arrangement
Automatic Number Identification data block
Requires Automatic Number Identification
(ANI) package 12.
Central Automatic Message Accounting trunk data block
Call by call master route
Central Office Trunk data block
Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.
Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data block
Dictation trunk data block
Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block
Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.
Foreign Exchange trunk data block
Feature Group D trunk
Integrated Digital Access
Requires Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.
IP Music route data block
Integrated Service Access route or Call-by-
Call route type
For ISDN applications, only TIE or ISA
Trunks can connect a SL-1 directly to another SL-1. Requires Call-by-Call service
(CBC) package 117. Must have ISDN configured in LD 15 and LD 17.
Meridian Communications Unit port
Music trunk data block
Requires Music (MUS) package 44.
Paging trunk data block
DAC for NT7D16 on RS-232 port
Pack/Rel
awu-10 basic-1 basic-1 cbc_pkg-23 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 fgd-17 ida-16 basic-06.50
isl-12 basic-18 mus-1 basic-1 basic-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 473
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt
TOBO
TOV
TRAN
2
3
(0)
1
Response
R422
RAN
RCD
RLM
RLR
TIE
TIE ATL
TIE SEMI
TIE AUTO
TIE TONE
WAT
Comment
DAC for NT7D16 on RS-422 port
Recorded Announcement trunk data block
Requires Recorded Announcement (RAN) package 7.
Emergency Recorder trunk data block
Requires Basic Automatic Call Distribution
(BACD) package 40.
Release Link Main trunk data block
Requires Centralized Attendant Services
(Main) (CASM) package 26.
Release Link Remote trunk data block
Requires Centralized Attendant Services
(Remote) (CASR) package 27.
TIE trunk data block
Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.
TIE ATL data block for Sweden
Semi-automatic TIE trunk data block
Automatic TIE trunk data block
Tone TIE trunk data block
Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block
Pack/Rel
basic-18 ran-1 bacd-1 casm-1 casr-1 basic-1 supp-15 opcb-14 opcb-14 opcb-14 basic-18
(NO)
YES
(ASYN)
Toll Operator Break-Out. TOBO is prompted if DTRK = YES, DGTP = DTI2, MFC = YES and OPCB = YES.
OPCA signals received after a toll operator break in operation is ignored.
An OPCA signal received after a toll operator break-in operation has been completed, results in the toll operator being removed from the call.
pedm-18 basic-18 Data Timeout Value
No timeout
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Prompted if TKTP = R232, R422 or MCU.
Asynchronous Transmission mode basic-18
474 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TRMB
TRMT
TRO
TRRL
TST
TTA
TTBL
TW_INC_CLID
Response
SYN
Comment
Synchronous Transmission mode
If PSDS = YES, then TRAN must be SYN.
Prompted if TKTP = MCU.
Pack/Rel
(YES)
NO
Tromboning allowed. Incoming call on route can be routed directly back out on the same route.
tat-21
Tromboning denied. Incoming trunk call on route may not be routed directly back out on the same route.
Only applies to calls routed using NARS/
BARS or CDP. Does not apply to calls redirected by HUNT, Forward All Calls, or
Forward No Answer.
(NONE), FAIL, TEST, NPA)
Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit treatment
FAIL = Interrupts the NPD/ID as an ANI failure
TEST = Interrupts the call as a 911 test call
(for 922T calls only)
This prompt appears when the Meridian 911
(M911) package 224 is equipped.
m911-19
(NO) YES Trunk Route Optimization
Prompted if NCRD = YES and IFC = SL-1.
tro-16
(NO)
YES n...n
(NO) YES
(0)-31
Recall signal can be received and transmitted on this route.
Recall signal can be neither received nor transmitted on this route.
TRRL appears if ACRL package 236 is equipped and the route is analog TIE.
arcl-22
Test loop around DN, range is 2 to 10 digits basic-1
Time To Answer output in CDR fcdr-18
Tone Table number
Table (0), North American default values, is created when the first customer is created.
Refer to LD 56 for other tables.
ftc-13
CLID Option on an incoming TWR1 route twr1-24
(NO) YES
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 475
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
Prompt Response
TW_ROUTE (NO) YES Taiwan R1 route
Comment
TYPE
ATM
NPID
RDB
SCH
Pack/Rel
twr1-24
Route type
Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block.
Requires Automatic Trunk Maintenance
(ATM) package 84.
Numbering Plan or Information Digit table.
Requires Meridian 911 (M911) package
224.
Route Data Block.
ATM Schedule block. Requires Automatic
Trunk Maintenance (ATM) package 84.
atm-19
V25 (NO) YES
VRAT
VTRK
WAIT
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(RGB)
MUS
V.25 bis option for synchronous operation
Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN =
SYN.
Answer an attendant extended call over
VNS immediately on the incoming bearer trunk basic-18 vns-20
Virtual Trunk route
YES = Supports IP Peer facilities
For CS 1000S system basic-2.0
Provide ringback for calls queueing for RAN trunk.
ranbrd- 23 ran- 23 mus- 23 Provide music for calls queueing for RAN trunk.
Prompted only for RAN route when RAN broadcast package is equipped.
WATR
WDGT
0-511
(L) F
Wide Area Telephone Service or WATS
Reference route number
Determines how incoming WATS call types are handled for the associated Integrated
Service Access route or ISA. Precede with X to delete.
Prompted when TKTP = ISA, IFC = D250 or
SL-1 and NSF = YES.
pra-14
First or last 4 DNIS digits to be sent on APL and HSL link.
WDGT has no effect on AML links. All DNIS digits is sent for AML.
dnis-20
476 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
XTDT
ZONE
Response Comment
Prompted if NDGT is greater than 4. Also used for CDR when the New Format CDR
(FCDR) package 234 is disabled.
0-7
0-255 0–
8000
Pack/Rel
Extended Tone Detector Table number
If a table other than 0 is entered, it must have already been configured in LD 97. Must be the same value as defined in LD 13.
Prompted with Meridian 1 Superloop
Administration (XCT1) package 205.
xct1-16
Zone for codec selection and bandwidth management
For CS 1000S system basic-7.00
basic-2.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 477
LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance
478 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 16: LD 17: Configuration Record 1
SyMWIstem configuration defines system hardware and software parameters. Overlay program 17 is used to modify the following:
• password options
• interface and transmission mode
• common equipment
• overlay automatic maintenance routines
• value added server configuration
• transmission parameters of Meridian Modular / Aries Telephone
• alarm filter
When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:
CFN000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx DCH
AVAIL: XX USED: XX TOT: 64 AML AVAIL: XX USED: XX TOT: 16
Notes on ISDN configuration
ISDN configuration can be changed by adding the primary D-channel followed by the optional backup D-channel. Be sure to observe the following:
• Primary and back-up D-channels must be on the same card type (DCHI or MSDL)
• Primary D-channel parameters are automatically copied to the back-up D-channel.
• Disable both ends of a D-channel before making any changes to the D-channel.
• Changes to the D-channel pair can be made to the primary D-channel first (except for
BCHL and RCVP).
• The backup D-channel must be removed prior to removing the primary D-channel.
• When a backup D-channel is configured for a primary D-channel, the USR of the primary can be changed from SHA to ISLD or PRI, but not from ISLD to PRI or SHA.
• The ADAN DCH MOVE command allows the primary D-channels to move to a new logical number (NDCH), card type (CTYP), device number (DNUM), and port designation
(PORT) when adding MSDL cards. You do not need to remove any D-channels or Bchannels when using this command with MSDL cards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 479
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
D-Channel Expansion
The D-channel Expansion feature increases the total number of possible D-channels in a multiple group Meridian 1 system. The number of physical I/O addresses permitted for Dchannel application to 16 for each network group. For each MSDL physical I/O address, up to four ports are available for D-channel use. With the D-channel Expansion feature, the software supports up to 255 D-channels.
For more information on the D-channel Expansion feature, refer to the Networking Features
and Services Fundamentals, 553-2901-301.
Prompts and responses
Configuration record 1
Prompt Response
REQ:
TYPE:
ADAN
PWD
CHG
CFN
Change
Configuration Record
Comment
aaa bbb x Action Device And Number (aaa = NEW, CHG, MOV or OUT ;
bbb = I/O device type ; x = port number) (see Gate Opener:
ADAN (Action Device and Number)
on page 481)
(NO) YES
Change Password options (see Gate Opener: PWD
PARM
CEQU
OVLY
VAS
(NO) YES
Parameters for Interface and transmission mode (see Gate
Opener: PARM (System Parameters)
on page 491)
(NO) YES
Change to Common Equipment (see Gate Opener: CEQU
on page 488)
(NO) YES Overlay (see
Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay) on page 491)
(NO) YES
Value added server configuration (see Gate Opener: VAS
(Value Added Server) on page 496)
ATRN
ALARM
(NO) YES Change Transmission Parameters of MeridianModular / Aries
Telephone (see Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)
on page 488)
(NO) YES Change Alarm Filter (see
480 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
ESA (NO) YES
Comment
Change Emergency Services Access Settings (see
Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)
on page 490
Gate Opener: ADAN (Action Device and Number)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
- ADAN
TTY_TYPE
CAB
CAB_TYPE
- NUMD
- FTYP
- SIZE
- PDCH
- TTY
- -IPMG
- CTYP
- GRP
Response
CHG
ADAN aaa bbb xx a...a
x a...a
1-(2) aa
(0)-65534
0-63
0-15 supl sh a...a
x
Comment
Request
Action Device And Number
Add, change, move or out an I/O device where:
• aaa = NEW/CHG/MOV/OUT
• bbb = I/O device type AML, BDCH, DCH, HST, PRT,
TRF, TTY
• x = port number 0-15 (for PRT or TTY)
TTY logical type for Small System or Media Gateway
1000S (MG 1000S), where a...a is:
(SDI), LSL, or PTY
Cabinet number for Small System or MG 1000S, where x is:
(0), 1, 2,3 or 4
Cabinet Type, where a...a is:
• IP = IP (Intelligent Peripheral) Expansion Cabinet or
MG 1000S
• FIBR = Fiber Expansion Cabinet
Number of floppy disk drives
Floppy Type (aa = (3), 3S, or 5)
Size of History File buffer in characters
Primary D-channel associated with a backup Dchannel
Pre-defined MSDL-SDI terminal number
The IPMG on which the TTY is being configured, superloop and shelf
Card Type (CTYP responses can be found on )
Network group number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 481
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt
- CDNO xx
Response
- DNUM 0-15
- ADMIN_PORT 0
- LANGUAGE ENGLISH
- ADDITIONAL_PORT aa
- PORT 0-15
- DES
- BPS
- PARY
- STOP
- BITL d...d
xxxxx aaaa
(1)-1x5-2 x
Comment
Card number (Small System or MG 1000S)
Device number for I/O ports
Administration Terminal Port number
English Language supported on STA
Additional Port for the Single Terminal Access (aa =
P1, P2, or P3)
Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT)
Designator
Bits Per Second
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system. For example, BPS
9600.
Parity type (aaaa = (NONE) ODD, or EVEN)
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current PARY configuration on the system. For example, PARY
NONE.
Number of Stop bits (To configure value of 1.5, enter
1x5)
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP
1.
Data Bit Length (aaa = (5), 6, 7, or 8)
482 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- FLOW
- FLOW_TYPE
- -BCST
- PARM
- FUNC
- USER
- XSM
- TTYLOG
BANR
- CUST
- SSUP
- - APRT
Response
(NO) YES a...a
(NO) YES aaaa bbb aaa a...a
(NO) YES
0-65534
(YES) NO xx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BITL configuration on the system. For example, BITL 8.
Flow Control
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current FLOW configuration on the system. For example, FLOW
NO.
Flow control type for Small System or CS 1000S.
Where a...a is:
NONE, XON, MAIL, or HWR)
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current
FLOW_TYPE configuration on the system. For example, FLOW_TYPE NONE.
Broadcast ports affected by Flow Control
Parameters for Interface and transmission mode
(aaaa = R232 or R422 ; bbb = DCE or DTE)
MSDL card function (aaa = ABC, FCL, MOD, LME, or
SCN)
Output message types (USER responses begin on )
Extended System Monitor
Log buffer size
Optional Security Banner option
Customer number associated with this function
Senior Supervisor
ACD Printer
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 483
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
- STOP
- DPNS
- MWIF
- USR
- IFC
Prompt
H323
- OVLR
- OVLS
OVLT
Response
(1)-1x5-2
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa a...a
YES
YES
0-(1)-8
Comment
Number of Stop bits (to configure value of 1.5, enter
1x5)
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP
1.
Digital Private Network Signaling
Message Waiting Interface (aaaa = (STD) or ISDM)
User (aaaa = ISLD, PRI, SHA, SHAV, or VNS)
Interface type for D-channel (IFC responses can be found on BAD LINK "TYPE")
Indicates overlap signaling prompts for H.323
Overlap Receiving
Overlap Sending
Overlap Timer (in seconds) The timer controls the interval between the sending of INFORMATION messages. Defaults to 1 for D-channel over IP.
- - BSRV
- - BSRC
- -CNTY
CLID
PROG
CO_TYPE
- RCVP
- - ISLM
(NO) YES
1- (2) - 4
- - PINX_CUST 0-99
- - ISDN_MCNT 60-(300)-350
Note:
OVLT applies only to Overlap Sending (OVLS =
YES).
B channel Service messaging.
B channel Service Re-transmission Counter.
This customer number is used for the DN address translation associated with call independent connection messages received on this D-channel.
Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.
aaaa
OPTx a..a
aaa
Country (CNTY responses can be found on Country)
Calling Line Identification (x= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5)
Progress signal (a..a = NCHG, MALE, or MCON)
Central Office switch type (aaa = (STD) or ATT)
(NO) YES Recovery to Primary
0-(1792)-4000 Integrated Services Signaling Link Maximum.
484 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- PARM
- CLOK
- SIDE
- SEMT
- CNEG
- RLS
- QCHID
Prompt
- - SSRC
- - VNSM
- - VNSC
- - VNSP
- - VCNA
- - VCRD
- - VTRO
- - VSIG
- - DCHL
- BCHL
- PRI
- PRI2
- OTBF
- DRAT
- BPS aaaa bbb aaa aaa
(1)-5 x xx
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-255
0-254 loop x
0-255 2-15
1-(32)-127 aaa xxxxx
Response
0-(3700)
0-300
(0)-xx
0-32700
(NO) YES
Comment
Signaling Server Resource Capacity
Virtual Network Services Maximum
Virtual Network Services Customer number associated with the D-channel
Virtual Network Services Private Network Identifier
Virtual Network Services Network Call Party Name
Display available over this D-channel
Virtual Network Services Network Call Redirection available over this D-channel
Trunk Route Optimization before answer available over this D-channel for VNS
Virtual Network Services Network Signalling option
D-Channel PRI loop number
PRI loop number for Backup D-channel
Primary Rate Interface
Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence
Output request Buffers
D-channel transmission Rate (aaa = (56K), 64KC, or
64KI)
Bits Per Second
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system. For example, BPS
9600.
Parameters for Interface and transmission mode
(aaaa = R232 or R422 ; bbb = DCE or DTE)
Clock (aaa = EXT or INT)
Meridian 1 node type (aaa = (USR) or NET)
Number of Status Enquiry Messages sent within 128 ms from the network side
Channel Negotiation option (x = (1) or 2)
Release ID of the switch at the far end of the D-channel
Map channel number to timeslots on a PRI2 loop
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 485
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt
- RCAP
- - MWTO
- - MWRT
- - MQC_FEAT aaaa
- - PR_RTN (NO) YES
- - PR_TRIGS aaa xx
- OVLR (NO) YES
- - DIDD
- OVLS
- - OVLT
- MBGA
- NASA
- TIMR
- - T310
- - INC_T306
- - OUT_T306
- LAPD
- - T23
- - T200
- - N200
Response
a...a
(15) - 30
0 - (2) - 15
(0)-15
(NO) YES
(0)-8
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
10-(30)-60
110-(120)
0-(2)-240
0-(30)-240
(NO) YES
1-(20)-31
2-(3)-40
1-(3)-8
Comment
Remote Capabilities (see RCAP options in
Alphabetical list of prompts on page 500)
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either
QMWI or QMWO. The value entered (in seconds) is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, callindependent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL PROCEEDING message.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either
QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.
MCDN QSIG Feature type
Retain option supported by the far end PINX
Path Replacement Triggers
Overlap Receiving
DID Delete
Overlap Sending
Overlap Timer, in seconds
Multilocation Business Group Allowed
Network Attendant Service Allowed
Change protocol timer value
Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state
Timer range for PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks
Variable timer for received disconnect message on incoming calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network
Variable timer for received disconnect message on outgoing calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network (entered in 2 second increments)
Link Access Protocol for D-channel Change LAPD parameters
Interface guard Timer or DCHI only
Retransmission Timer
Maximum Number of retransmissions
486 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- RADR
- LCTL
- - T1
- - T2
- - T3
- - N1
- - N2
- - K
- LTHR
- - RXMT
- - CRC
- - ORUR
- - ABOR
- ENL
- DPNS
- DCHI
- CDNO
- PORT
Prompt
- - N201
- - T203
- - K
- - N2X4
- IADR
4-(8)-16
1-(7)
(NO) YES
1-(5)-20
1-(10)-20
1-(5)-255
1-(5)-255
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
0-15
1-9 xx
Response
4-(260)
2-(10)-40
1-(7)-32
0-(10)-20
0-(3)-255
0-(1)-255
(NO) YES
2-(4)-20
0-(10)-255
2-(5)-255 xxx
Comment
Maximum Number of octets in information element
Maximum Time allowed without frames being exchanged
Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames
Maximum Number of status inquires when remote is busy only applies to 1TR6
Individual Address for the data link level HDLC protocol
Remote Address for the data link level HDLC protocol
Change Link Control system parameters
Retransmission Timer. Range in units of 0.5 seconds,
(4) = two seconds
Maximum Time allowed without a frame being exchanged
Timer for initial link setup in units of 0.5 seconds for
ESDI only
Maximum Number of octets per HDLC information frame (xxx = 32, 64, 128, or (512))
Maximum Number of retransmissions in steps of 1
Maximum number of outstanding frames
Link Threshold. Change link performance thresholds for ESDI only
Retransmission Threshold
CRC threshold
Overrun/Underruns out-of-service threshold
Number of Aborts before an out-of-service
Enl / Dis error messages (Small System or MG 1000S)
Digital Private Network Signaling
D-channel Interface port number
Card Number where DCHI resides (Small System or
MG 1000S)
Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 487
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
- CODE
- SOLR
- ROLR
- AOLR
- TOLR
- AGCD
- VOLR
- HRLR
- HTLR
Response
CHG
ATRN
(0)-2
0-(1)-4
(0)-63
(0)-12 32-50
(0)-63
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-8, 32-40
(0)-11, 32-54
Comment
Request
Aries Transmission
CODEC Coding Law
Sidetone Objective Loudness Rating
Receive Objective Loudness Rating
2216 ACD set Objective Loudness Rating
Transmit Objective Loudness Rating
Automatic Gain Control Disabled
Volume Reset
Handsfree Receive Objective Loudness Rating
Handsfree Transmit Objective Loudness Rating
Gate Opener: CEQU (Common Equipment)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
- MPED
- TERM
- REMO
- TERD
- REMD
- TERQ
- REMQ
- DDCS a...a
a...a
a...a
a...a
Response
CHG
CEQU aa a...a
a...a
0-159
Comment
Request
Change to Common Equipment parameters
Maximum Peripheral Equipment Density (aa = (SD),
DD, 4D, or 8D)
Single Density Terminal equipment loop or loops
Single Density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops
Double Density Terminal equipment loop or loops
Double Density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops
Quadruple Density Terminal equipment loop or loops
Quadruple density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops
Loop number for DPNSS/DASS hardware
488 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- DTCS
- XCT
- MGTDS
- MGCONF
- IPMG
- TDS
- CONF
- MFSD
- DTDT
- - CODE
- - TN
- DLOP
- MG_CARD
- MODE
- - TMDI
- - LCMT
- - YALM
- - TITE
- - TRSH
- - DTIC
- PRI2
- APVL
- DTI2
- JDMI
- EXT0
- - CNI
Response
1-159 a...a
aaa bbb
Comment
Digital Trunk Channel Switches
Extended Conference/TDS/MFS
Configuring 2 Media Gateway TDS loops simultaneously.
aaa bbb ccc ddd Configuring up to 4 Media Gateway conference loops simultaneously.
supl sh Superloop and shelf of IPMG on which the MGTDS is associated.
a...a
a...a
0, 2, 4...255
aaa x xx xx xx l s c u
Tone and Digit Switch
Conference loop
Multifrequency Sender loop
Dial Tone Detector Test (aaa = NO, TDS, or EXT) lll dd ff
Code (CODE response is defined on x xx xx xx)
Valid Terminal Number that when accessed returns a test tone
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll = loop number
0 - 255, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)
MG card assigned to superloop supl sh card aaaa
(YES) NO aaa aaa
(0) 2
0-15
0, 4, 8,...254
0-255
0-159
Mode of operation (aaaa = LINK, PRI, or TRK)
TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK)
Line Coding Method (aaa = (B8S) or AMI)
Yellow Alarm Method (aaa = (FDL) or DG2)
T1 transmit Equalization
Threshold
Starting network loop slot for PRI/DTI card
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface or PRI loop number
0-255
0-255 x aaa bbb s p g
Analog Private Virtual Loop for virtual TN or channel
ID
2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface or DTI loop number
Japan Digital Multiplexer Interface loop number
Extenders for CPU 0 to Network (EXT0 ranges are defined on x aaa bbb)
Core to Network Interface card location To delete use: s p xg
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 489
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt
- EXT1
- - CNI
- SYNM
- - MSDT
- - SSDT
- SMEM
- PFTR
- VXCT
Response
x aaa bbb s p g
(0)-5
0-159
0-159
(NO) YES
YES NO lll
Comment
Extenders for CPU 1 to Network (EXT1 ranges are defined on x aaa bbb)
Core to Network Interface card location To delete use: s p xg
Synchronization Mode
Main Synchronization DTSL
Standby Synchronization DTSL
Short Memory test
Prioritize Fast Transfer feature enabled or disabled
Virtual XCT loop number
Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)
Table 4: Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)
REQ
TYPE
LIS
Prompt
SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP
DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT 5-(180)-1440
DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE
EX_DM_UPDT_TIMEOUT
CHG
ESA
Response
(NONE) INT or SUB EXT or
DM
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
5-(15)-1440 0
Comment
Change
Emergency Services Access gate opener.
The Location Information
Service to use:
• NONE
• INTERNAL LIS
• EXTERNAL DM
Look up the IP address of an
IP Phone behind NAT.
The period in minutes before a dynamic ELIN mapping is timed out.
Reuse the oldest ELIN.
Timeout in minutes before an unconnected External DM causes an alarm. No alarm is generated.
490 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
- SID
- BKGD
- FR44
- PBXH
- TODR
- DROL
- MID_SCPU
- TRLL
- CY45
Response
CHG
OVLY xxxx xx xx
1-4
00-23
0-23 xx xx
(NO) YES
1-31 1-31
(0)-31
- MULTI_USER (OFF) ON
Comment
Request
Change Overlay area options
System ID number
Background Overlay task
Frequency control of Overlay 44 in background
Hour to perform Message Waiting lamp maintenance
Time of Daily Routines
Daily Routine Overlays
Midnight Switch Cores Allow or deny Midnight Switch
Cores, where: Deny causes the system to perform the
3PE test during the Midnight routine instead of switching CPUs. Allow causes the system to switch
CPUs during the Midnight routine instead of performing the 3PE test.
Note:
Applicable to CPP systems only.
Test RPE Local Loop back
Cycles LD 45 can be run whenever a fault is detected
Multi-User Log In
Gate Opener: PARM (System Parameters)
The following values can be set at the factory. However, it is recommended that these values be reviewed during initial system installation.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
- LPIB
Response
CHG
PARM
96-7500
Comment
Request
Change system parameters
Low-Priority Input Buffers (range depends on system type)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 491
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
- NCR
- MGCR
- CSQI
- CSQO
- TUBO
- AXQI
- AXQO
- TRNS
Prompt
- RCAP
- HPIB
- 500B
- SL1B
- RPEB
- DTIB
- DTOB
- NCPU
- CFWS
- PCML
- ALRM
- ERRM
- DTRB
- ABCD
- TMRK
- FCDR x
(NO) YES aa
(NO) YES aaa xxx
(NO) YES xxx
Response
a...a
96-7500
16-5000
16-2048
16-1000
(35)-1000
(4)-100 x...x
0-NCR
(20)-255
(20)-255
(NO) YES
(20)-255
(20)-255 aaaa aaa
Comment
Remote Capabilities (See RCAP options in
Alphabetical list of prompts on page 500)
High-Priority Input Buffers (range depends on system type)
Output buffers for single line and digital telephones, and trunks (range depends on system type)
SL-1 Buffers
Remote Peripheral Equipment Buffers, 2.0 Mb/s RPE
Digital Trunk Input Buffers
Digital Trunk Output Buffers per Digital Trunk
Signaling Link
Number of Call Registers, range depends on system type
Maximum number of Call Registers used by AUX messaging
Maximum number of Call Registers for CSL input queues
Maximum number of Call Registers for CSL/AML output queues
Double message processing speed on AML
Size of Auxiliary Input Queue
Size of Auxiliary Output Queue
Selects which messages are going to be translated
(aaaa = (NONE), HELP, or BOTH)
Number of CPUs (x = 1 or (2))
Call Forward Saved on SYSLOAD
Pulse Code Modulation Companding Law (aa = (MU) or A)
Minor Alarm displayed on attendant consoles
Error Messages (aaa = ERR, BUG, or AUD)
Digitone Burst time in ms (xxx = 50, 60, 70, or (100))
16-tone DTMF operation enabled
Length of cadence increments in ms (xxx = 96 or
(128))
Format for Call Detail Recording (aaa = (OLD) or
NEW)
492 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- DCUS
- MSCL
- PMSI
- - MANU
- - PMCR
- - PORT
- - XTMR
- - XNUM
- - PMIN
- - PTMR
- NDIS
Prompt
- PCDR
- TPO
- TSO
- CLID
- DUR5
- MLDN
- NDRG
- MARP
- IPIE
- FRPT
0-5
0-8191
(NO) YES aaaa a
0-15
(0)-6
(1)-4
(NO) YES
(0)-31
(20)-255
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(NO) YES aaaa
Priority to CDR
Traffic Period Option
Trunk Seizure Option
Comment
Calling Line ID in the CDR
Duration 0.5
Multiple Loop DN
New Distinctive Ringing
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime feature allowed
Enhanced Unsolicited Status Message (USM) IE
(Deny) or allow Access to incoming calls by FRE station (aaaa = (NEFR) or OLFR)
Maximum number of ACD-ADS customers
Maximum Speed Call Lists
Modify Property Management Systems parameters
PMS interface (aaaa = (PMS1), PMS2, or PMS3)
Number of Call Registers used for PMSI
Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT).
PMS acknowledgment time
Number of retransmissions per message for PMSI
Minor alarm when the PMSI link is not responding
Polling timer for PMSI
Number of Display messages for Background
Terminal
Support the Original Carrier Access Code format
Message Registration or Periodic Pulse Metering (aaa
= (MR) or PPM)
- OCAC
- MTRO
(NO) YES aaa
-
SBA_ADM_INS
0-(2)-63
- SBA_USER
- BCAP
0-(100)-500 a...a
Maximum Administrator and/or Installer Log Ins allowed at one time
Maximum User Log Ins allowed at one time
Bearer Capability (a...a = SPEE or 31KH)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 493
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt
- NORTEL_BRAND
Response
YES NO
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
- MODIFY (NO) YES
Comment
"NORTEL" Electronic Brandlining is displayed.
Current customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is for information only
Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text
Broadcast Configuration
Note:
MODIFY prompt is available to ADMIN2 user only.
- SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY
(YES) NO
- - IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
- OK (YES) NO
- -IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh
Change customized text string by text string input
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
- OK (YES) NO
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
- MODIFY (NO) YES
- PWD2 x...x
- SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY
(YES) NO
- - IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
Enter customized text string by text string input
This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt
Confirm customized text string
Change customized text string character by character, where: xx = (01 to 24) c = one supported character hh = 2 hexadecimal digits representing a supported character
DLE_DISP_CHAR customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt
Confirm customized text string
Current customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is for information only
Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text
Broadcast Configuration
Password 2
Change customized text string by text string input
Enter customized text string by text string input
This is infromation only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt
494 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- OK
Prompt Response
(YES) NO
- - IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
- OK
- MSEC
- MSSD
- NKEY
- TKEY
- DLAC
Comment
Confirm customized text string
Change customized text string character by character, where: xx = (01 to 24) c = one supported character hh = 2 hexidecimal digits representing a supported character
IDLE_DISP_CHAR customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt
(YES) NO
(ON) OFF
Confirm customized text string
Enable Media Security for the system. Disable Media
Security. The device level settings are not effective when this option is set for the system.
(MSNV), MSBT Media Security System Default (Never) or Best Effort.
Changing this parameter affects all TNs that have the
CLS MSSD.
1-(31) Number of packets that can be secured by the same master KEY.
8-(24)-168
(NO) YES
Time in hours for session KEY.
Change Call Log Option, where:
YES - Log all calls
NO - Log unanswered calls
Gate Opener: PWD (Password)
The PWD2 prompt appears immediately following the TYPE = PWD entry, unless the LAPW password Multi User Login are enabled. To view LAPW prompts, LAPW package 149 must be equipped. LAPW users can change their passwords by entering the current password at prompt LPWD and entering the new password at the NLPW prompt.
REQ:
Prompt
TYPE:
PWD2
PSWD_COMP
FPC
Response
CHG
PWD a...a
(OFF) ON
(NO) YES
Change
Configuration Record
Comment
Enter valid password
Turns on or off the password complexity check for the
ADMIN, LAPW and PDT passwords.
Force Password Change
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 495
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt
LOUT
FLTH
LOCK
Response
1-(20)-1440
0-(3)-9
0-(60)-270
FLTA
AUDT
- SIZE
LLID
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(50)-1500
(NO) YES
ACCOUNT_REQ aaa
PWD_TYPE aaa
- PWTP
USER_NAME
PASSWORD
CONFIRM
PDT
OVLA
LEVL
CUST
HOST
MAT
OPT
(OVLY)
SBA a...a
a...a
a...a
(NO)
PDT1/PDT2 xx xx ... xx aaaa aaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
Comment
Logout, Inactive Session Logout Time in minutes
Failed Login Threshold
Lockout time
Failed Log In Threshold Alarm
Audit Trail for password usage
Word Size of Audit Trail buffer
Last Log In Identification
Account Request, where: aaa = (END), NEW, CHG, or OUT
Specifies the user type being added to the system, where: aaa = PWD2, PWD1, LAPW
Type of LAPW account, where: (Overlay) Password
Access Type
Set-Based Administration Password Access Type
Unique user name - up to 11 characters
Password for validating the users credentials on login, 4 to 16 characters
Confirm the typed in password
PDT access. This prompt is available only when adding or modifying LAPW, Level 1 (PWD1) and
Level 2 (PWD2) users.
Overlays Allowed
Access Level for Set Based Administration password, where; aaaa = (INST) or ADMN
Customer to be accessible by way of PWnn
Enable HOST mode Log In for password PWnn
Enable MAT Log In for password PWnn
Options for password PWnn
Gate Opener: VAS (Value Added Server)
REQ:
Prompt Response
CHG Request
Comment
496 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
TYPE:
VAS
- VSID
- DLOP
- ELAN
Prompt
- AML
- - SECU
- - INTL
- - MCNT
- - CONF
- APPL
- -CUST
- - DATA_CORRECT
- - AUTO_AUDIT
- - SATN
- - IDLP
- DLOP
- CMS
- - SECU
- - INTL
- - MCNT
- - CONF
- - SATN
- - IDLP
Prompts and responses
Response
VAS aaa
Comment
Value Added Server configuration
Value Added Server data block (aaa = NEW, CHG or OUT)
VAS Identifier 0-127 lll dd ff ...
x
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll = loop number, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)
Associate Value Added Server ID (VSID) x with
Application Module Link over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) x
0-15 Application Module Link
(NO) YES Security for Meridian Link applications
1-12
10-9999
Interval for checking Meridian Link for overload in five second increments
Threshold for number of Meridian Link messages per time interval aaa CSL Configuration (aaa = DIR or IND) aaa VMBA Application (aaa = NEW, CHG, or OUT; VMBA =
Voice Mailbox administration) xx Customer number
(OFF) ON Enable Voice Mailbox Database correction
(ON) OFF Enable the Automatic Voice Mailbox database audit ls c u SADM/Data Line Card TN
0-254 lll dd ff ...
DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll= loop number, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)
0-15 ESDI port number used for the CSL
(NO) YES Security for Meridian Link applications
1-12
10-9999
Interval
Message Count Threshold aaa ls c u
0-254
CSL Configuration (aaa = DIR or IND)
SADM/Data Line Card TN
IND DTI Loop
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 497
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
11
12
13
14
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
Offset ROLR/AOLR
0 +45.00
1
2
+45.85
+46.70
+47.55
+48.40
+49.25
+50.10
+50.95
+51.80
+52.65
+53.50
+54.35
+55.20
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
-39.50
-39.50
-38.50
-38.50
-38.00
-38.00
-37.00
-37.00
-36.50
-36.00
-35.50
-35.50
-42.50
-42.00
-41.50
-41.50
-41.00
-40.50
-40.00
-40.00
TOLR
-45.00
-44.50
-44.50
-44.00
-43.50
-43.00
-43.00
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
55
56
57
58
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
Offset ROLR/AOLR
32 +45.00
33
34
+44.15
+43.30
35
36
37
38
+42.45
+41.60
+40.75
+39.90
+39.05
+38.20
+37.35
+36.50
+35.65
+34.80
+33.95
+33.10
+32.25
+31.40
+30.55
+29.70
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
-50.50
-51.00
-51.50
-52.00
-52.00
-52.50
-53.00
-53.50
-54.00
-54.00
-54.50
-55.00
-47.50
-48.00
-48.50
-49.00
-49.00
-49.50
-50.00
-50.50
TOLR
-45.00
-45.50
-46.00
-46.00
-46.50
-47.00
-47.50
498 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Offset ROLR/AOLR
27 N.A.
28
29
N.A.
N.A.
30
31
N.A.
N.A.
TOLR
-35.00
-34.50
-34.00
-34.00
-33.50
Note:
ROLR values are for reset volume.
HRLR / HTLR Offsets and Values
Offset ROLR/AOLR
59 N.A.
60
61
N.A.
N.A.
62
63
N.A.
N.A.
TOLR
-55.00
-55.50
-56.00
-56.50
-56.50
HRLR / HTLR Offsets and Values
+47.10
+47.95
+48.80
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HRLR
+42.00
+42.85
+43.70
+44.55
+45.40
+46.25
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
16
17
Offset
0
1
4
5
2
3
-42.00
-41.50
-41.00
-40.50
-40.50
-40.00
N.A.
N.A.
HTLR
-44.00
-43.50
-43.50
-43.00
-42.50
-42.00
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
46
47
48
49
Offset
32
33
34
35
36
37
+36.90
+36.05
+35.20
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HRLR
+42.00
+41.15
+40.30
+39.45
+38.60
+37.75
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
-46.50
-46.50
-47.00
-47.50
-48.00
-48.00
-48.50
-49.00
HTLR
-44.00
-44.50
-45.00
-45.00
-45.50
-46.00
-49.50
-49.50
-50.00
-50.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 499
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
29
30
31
25
26
27
28
Offset
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HRLR
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HTLR
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
61
62
63
57
58
59
60
Offset
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HRLR
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
HTLR
-51.00
-51.00
-51.50
-52.00
-52.50
N.A.
N.A.
Note:
All values are OLR ratings measured without inserted loss/gain for trunk card interfaces and computed per IEEE methods. Receive ratings are at a maximum volume. Transmit ratings are measured in an anechoic environment with less than 25 dBA room noise.
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
500B 16-2048
Comment
Output buffers for single line and digital telephones, and trunks Buffers for single line telephones, trunks and Digital telephones
Small System has a value of 500 allocated by the system and cannot be changed.
These can be set higher but have no affect on the system operation other than consuming memory.
Refer to the Memory Calculations Appendix in the Planning and engineering NTPs.
Pack/Rel
basic-19
ABCD (NO) YES 16-tone DTMF operation enabled abcd-14
500 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
<CR>
Comment
Original value is left unchanged
ABOR 1-(5)-255 Number of aborts before an out-of-service.
Enter in units of 1, the number of aborts in
15 minutes before an out-of-service is enforced.
csl-7
Pack/Rel
ACCOUNT REQ
ADAN aaa Account Request, where aaa is:
(END) Exit overlay program
NEW Add a new user
CHG Change existing user
OUT Remove a user basic-4.50
Action Device And Number
NEW aaa x Add I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port
CHG aaa x Change I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port
MOV aaa x Move I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port
OUT aaa x Remove I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port
Where, aaa and x can be any of the following: basic-19
• AML 0-15 = Application Module Link
• BDCH 0-63 = Backup primary D-channel
• DCH 0-79 = primary D-channel
• FDK 0 = Floppy Disk unit, only ADAN CHG
HDK allowed (not applicable for Small
System, Option 81C or CS 1000S)
• ELAN 16-31 = Application Module Link over Ethernet
• HDK 0 = Hard Disk unit, only ADAN CHG
HDK allowed (not applicable for Options
11C or 81C)
• HST = History file
• PRT 0-15 = Printer port number
• STA 0-15 = Single Terminal Access port number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 501
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
• TRF = Traffic Log file
• TTY 0-15 = Teletype port number
Pack/Rel
Note:
You cannot configure more than 16 TTY and HST files. If a HST file is one of 16
TTY files configured and a new TTY is defined, the HST file is deleted because the TTY has higher priority than HST.
The MOV command is not supported for
AML, BDCH, HST, PRT, or TTY.
MOV command not supported for moving
MSDL D-channels and PRI D-channels due to complexity of restrictions and the risk of data corruption if restrictions not adhered to.
Limited usefulness.
Changes to I/O devices are saved before
ADAN is reprompted. To indicate the data has been saved, one of the following is output: basic-25.4
• ADAN DATA SAVED
• ADAN DATA CHGED
• ADAN DATA REMOVED
• ADAN DATA MOVED
Entering 4 asterisks (****) after the ADAN prompt saves the changes and exits the overlay.
Where aaa is the primary D-channel and
• x = 0-254 for multi-group systems
• x = 0-63 for single-group systems
• x = 0-79 for Small System and CS 1000S basic-25
ADDITIONAL_PORT
P1 P2 P3 Additional port number for STA terminal
This is the port for the Single Terminal
Access regular terminal, or the STA system monitor connection. This prompt repeats until <CR> is entered. There can be up to 3 ports for each STA application. Precede with
X to delete the port.
sta-19
502 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADMIN_PORT
0
Comment
This is the port used to connect the Single
Terminal Access Administration Port. This must be 0 (zero).
Prompted if ADAN = STA
A_FILTER
NEW
CHG
OUT
Add New Alarm Filter entry
Change an Alarm Filter entry
Remove an Alarm Filter entry
This is reprompted for subsequent Alarm
Filters. Up to 50 Alarm Filters can be configured. Entering <CR> moves on to the
E_FILTER prompt. Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
sta-19 alarm-19
AF_STATUS
(OFF) ON
AGCD
ALARM
ALRM
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES alarm-19
This prompt enables (disables) the alarm and exception filtering. <CR> retains the current filtering status
Automatic Gain Control Disabled
Change Alarm filters
Must have Alarm Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package 243.
alarm-19
Minor Alarm displayed on attendant consoles.
(NO) disables the minor alarm on consoles.
alarm-12
AML
AOLR
APPL
0-15 Application Module Link msdl-18
(0)-12 32-50 2216 ACD set Objective Loudness Rating
The default value for the AOLR prompt is the same default value as for ROLR prompt.
ee ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and
on page 498to determine the decibel level which corresponds to your response to
AOLR.
basic-22
Application
This prompt allows the user to add, change, or remove an application associated with the vmba-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 503
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
VAS ID. The APPL prompt appears when
VAS = NEW or CHG.
NEW VMBA
Add Voice Mailbox
CHG VMBA
Change Voice Mailbox
OUT VMBA
ISAP
Pack/Rel
Remove Voice Mailbox
User application type: Meridian Link ISDN/
AP iap3p-13
APRT (NO) YES
APVL l c c c
ACD printer
APRT cannot be YES if prompt SSUP =
YES.
acdc-1
Analog Private Virtual Loop for virtual TN or channel ID
For Large System dpnss-16 l = 0-159
For CS 1000E System basic-4.00
i = 0, 4, 8-252
For Option 11C c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For Option 11C Chassis lse-24 c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
For CS 1000S system basic-1 c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
Format for MG 1000B Chassis basic-4.00
c = 0-4, 7-10
Format for MG 1000B Cabinet c = 0-10
Format for MG 1000T, where:
504 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,
47-50
• u = 0-31
Precede with X to remove.
ATRN (NO) YES
AUDT (NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Aries Transmission
Change Transmission parameters for
Meridian Modular or Aries telephones
These transmission parameters are downloaded to Meridian Modular telephones:
• after sysload (except during parallel reload)
• when enabling the loop, shelf or card
• when the telephone is plugged in.
These values determine the loudness of the receiver and transmitter.
areaway
Note:
Before changing these values, refer to
Transmission Parameters,
553-3001-182.
Audit Trail for password usage
Prompted for PWD1 and PWD2.
lapw-16
AUTO_AUDIT
AXQI
AXQO
(ON) OFF
(20)-255
(20)-255
Automatic Voice Mailbox database correction
When enabled, the Voice Mailbox data is audited every 5 days to ensure consistency between the Meridian Mail and Meridian 1 databases. The audit takes place during the daily routines every 5 days.
vmba-19 basic-1 Size of Auxiliary Input Queue
Maximum lesser of 25% of the maximum number of call registers defined for the system, or 255.
Size of Auxiliary Output Queue
Maximum lesser of 25% of the maximum number of call registers defined for the system, or 255.
basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 505
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
BANR
(YES) NO
Comment
Optional Security Banner option. BANR is prompted when USER = SCH and/or MTC.
Enable security banner printing option
Disable security banner printing option
If BANR = YES, the following Security
Banner is printed at the time a login is attempted, whether or not the login is successful:
"Warning: The programs and data stored on this system are licensed to or are the property of NT/BNR and are lawfully available only to authorized users for approved purposes. Unauthorized access to any program or data on this system is not permitted. THis system can be monitored at any time for operational reasons. Therefore, if you are not an authorized user, DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO LOG IN."
The programmer do not modify an existing I/
O block by hitting carriage return (<CR>) in response to BANR.
Pack/Rel
basic-22
BATT (NO) YES basic-18
BCAP
BCHI
(SPEE)
31KH
1-15
Battery backup for memory installed on
Option 21E and STE only
Bearer Capability
Speech
3.1 KHZ
Backup D-channel port number.
Precede with "X" to remove.
euroisdn-22 pri-12
BCHL l c
PRI loop number for Backup D-channel.
Prompted when ADAN = BDCH.
For Large System l = 0-159
For CS 1000E System l = 0, 4, 8-252
For Option 11C c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For Option 11C Chassis pri-12 lse-24 basic-4.00
506 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
c c
0-255
Comment
c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
For CS 1000S system
Pack/Rel
basic-1 c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50
Format for MG 1000B Chassis c = 0-4, 7-10
Format for MG 1000B Cabinet basic-4.00
basic-4.00
c = 0-10
Format for MG 1000T, where:
• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,
47-50
• u = 0-31
PRI loop number for Backup D-channel on
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Precede with X to remove.
fnf-25
BCST (NO) YES
BITL (5), 6, 7, 8
Only this broadcast port is affected by flow control
All broadcast ports of the same user type are affected by flow control.
Use this prompt with caution. For example, if BSCT = YES, and a maintenance port receives an X-off command, system output to all maintenance ports are eventually blocked.
This prompt appears only if FLOW = YES.
BSCT is not prompted for TTY_TYPE =
LSL.
basic-18
Bit length. Prompted for asynchronous ESDI ports.
For Small System, BITL is not prompted for
CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =
PTY.
cls-7
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call
Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux
Base layer. The prompt displays the
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 507
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
current BITL configuration on the system.
For example, BITL 8.
5 / 6 / 7 / (8) For release 5.0: Default data bit length for all three remote TTYs on an MGC is 8.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
BKGD 30, 33, 34, 35,
36, 37, 38, 40,
41, 43, 44, 45,
46, 53
Background overlay task
Enter the diagnostic program number 30, 33 and so on, to run sequentially in background when the overlay area is idle.
The data dump routine LD 43 can be reserved for the DROL to preserve data integrity. Programs 33, 45, 46 and 53 are not applicable to Small System.
basic-1
BPS
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
48000
56000
64000
Asynchronous baud rates (bits per second): cls-7
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call
Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux
Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system.
For example, BPS 9600.
1200 Bits Per Second
2400 Bits Per Second
4800 Bits Per Second. Default for AML ports.
9600 Bits Per Second. Default for MGC
19200 Bits Per Second. Maximum port speed for Release 5.0
48000 Bits Per Second
56000 Bits Per Second
64000 Bits Per Second. Default for ISL Dchannels.
If the baud rate is set differently (e.g., 4800) the system returns to the default
TEMPORARILY if it is manually initialized.
The entered baud rate returns when the initialization is complete.
basic-5.00
508 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
For Small System, BPS is not prompted for
CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =
PTY.
BSRV
BSRC
(NO) YES
1- (2) - 4
B channel Service messaging.
B channel Service Re-transmission
Counter.
Pack/Rel
basic 25.4
basic 25.4
CAB
(0)
1
2
3
4
Cabinet number for Small System
For CS 1000S where Main Cabinet is Call
Server and Expansion Cabinet is MG 1000S
Main cabinet
Expansion cabinet 1
Expansion cabinet 2
Expansion cabinet 3
Expansion cabinet 4
Note the following:
1. LSL is only supported on the main cabinet. When TTY_TYPE = LSL, CAB is not prompted. Instead, CAB 0 is printed automatically.
2. Pseudo TTY does not belong to any cabinet. Hence, for TTY_TYPE = PTY,
CAB is not prompted.
basic-22 basic-1 lse-24 lse-24
CDNO 0-15
1-50
1-9 11-19
21-29 31-39
41-49
0-10
Serial Data Interface (SDI) Card number
Number the SDI cards logically with the system. Keep a paper record of the number and physical location of each SDI card. Enter
0 if you are not using CDNO to keep track of
SDI ports and cards.
DCHI Small System Card number
MSDL application Small System Card number xpe-15 lse-24
SDI, LSL or PTY Small System Card number
Expansion cabinets only support one TTY port which is on the Fiber Receiver Card.
When CAB = 1 or 2, CDNO is not prompted.
Pseudo TTY does not belong to any card.
basic-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 509
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
0-50
1-50
Comment
When TTY_TYPE = PTY, CDNO is not prompted.
Pack/Rel
SDI, LSL or PTY Small System Card number lse-24
AML application Small System Card number lse-24
CEQU (NO) YES
CFWS (NO) YES
Change to Common Equipment parameters basic-1
Call Forward Saved on SYSLOAD and reactivate on completion. To save information, set CFWS = YES.
basic-20
CLID (NO) YES
OPT0
OPT1
OPT2
OPT3
OPT4
OPT5
Calling Line ID in the CDR
If CLID = NO, "XXXXXXXXXXXX" is printed in CLID field of CDR record. Prompted when
CDR = YES and the Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN) package 145 is equipped.
Prefix = 0 for North American dialing plan.
OPT0 is the default for ESIG and ISIG interfaces.
Prefix = 1 for international PFXs in CLID. Any numbering type is supported. OPT1 is the default for all EuroISDN interfaces.
Prefix = 2, for international PFXs in CLID.
CCITT numbering types supported are:
UKWN, INTL, NPA, and NXX. OPT2 is the default for CO/DID routes for the Telecom
New Zealand interface. For an interworking scenario, when the CLID option is OPT2, and the CPFXS prompt is NO, then the calling number is built based on the originating calling number type.
Prefix = 3 for international PFXs in CLID.
Only the NXX number type is supported.
OPT3 is the default for TIE routes for the
Telecom New Zealand interface.
For international COs, if the call originates from a CO trunk type, add nothing.
Otherwise, add PFX1 and PFX2. OPT4 is the default for all Asia Pacific interfaces.
This is the same as OPT4, except it supports a maximum of 10 digits in the CLID. OPT5 is the default for the Austrian interface.
pri-12 euroisdn-22
510 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CLOK
EXT
INT
Comment
Source of primary clock is either internal or external.
Prompted for ISL D-channels and ESDI synchronous ports. Other D-channels are automatically set to EXT.
External Clocking.
When USR = ISLD, CLOK can be set to
External. Default for ISL D-channels is
EXT.
Internal Clocking.
INT is used only during D-channel loopback tests, where one side is set to INT, the other is set to EXT. Default for ESDI AML ports is
INT.
Pack/Rel
pri-12
CMS 0-15
CNEG
(1)
2
ESDI port number used for the CSL
Synchronous ESDI port number used for the
CSL. This must be the same value as the port number defined at the ADAN prompt.
Precede with X to remove. Prompted when
SYNC and USER = CMS.
clews
Channel Negotiation option
Channel is indicated and no alternative acceptable, exclusive. Default value for all
EuroISDN interfaces except FRA interface.
Channel is indicated and any alternative acceptable, preferred. Default value for all
EuroISDN interfaces except FRA interface.
CNEG is prompted when IFC = APAC,
AXEA, AXES, D70, NUME, SS12, ESIG,
ISEG or TCNZ.
ipra-15
CNI
CNTY s p g
(ETSI)
Core to Network Interface card location. To
OUT a CNI card, it must be hardware disabled and located in the inactive CPU.
For systems with Fibre Network Fabric: s = slot 9-12; p = port 0-1; g = group 0-7
Both ports (0 and 1) can be used to configure network switching groups for card slot 9. No
CNI cables are required for port 0 of card slot
9.
basic-21
Country
ETS 300 =102 basic protocol supp-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 511
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
AUS
AUST
CHNA
CIS
DEN
DUT
EAUS
EIR
ESP
FIN
FRA
GER
HKNG
INDI
INDO
ITA
JAPN
MSIA
NET
NOR
PHLP
POR
SING
SWE
SWI
TAIW
TCNZ
THAI
Comment
Austria
Australia
China
Commonwealth of Independent States
Denmark
Holland
Australia
Ireland
Spain
Finland
France
Germany
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Italy
Japan UIPE based interface
Malaysia
ETSI network side protocol
Norway
Philippines
Portugal
Singapore
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
New Zealand, defined as APISDN
Thailand
CODE x xx xx xx
Pack/Rel
basic-23 euro- 23 euro-24 euro- 23 isdn-24 basic-23 basic-23 basic-23 isdn-24 isdn-24
Code, prompted when DTD = TDS.
A valid Hex Code for access to a flexible TDS table for a test tone, used to check a Dial
Tone Detector or DTD.
basic-14
512 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(0)
1
2
Comment
This code only applies when the tone generator is a TDS. If an XCT is used to generate the test tone the value in CODE is ignored and the XCT generates the dialtone specified in the FCT Table number 0 in LD
56.CODEC Coding Law
Mu or ?-Law for North America. This parameter is only used by the Meridian digital sets as part of the transmission parameters.
A Law, inverted for Sweden only
A Law, even-bit interleaved
Pack/Rel
basic-14
CONF DIR
IND
0-158
0-255
29-31
D0-D158
S0-S158
29 30
31
62
31 94
Direct link CSL Configuration
Indirect link CSL Configuration
Conference loop
Use even-numbered loops for Conference.
You may configure more than 16 Conference loops; however, enabling more than 16
Conference loops may cause the system to lock-up. Precede with X to remove.
Conference loop, systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
Small System, 31 is for Expansion Module
Dealer Conference loop
Spare dealer Conference loop is in the same group as the units planned to use this loop.
Small System base conference capability
For CS 1000S IP daughterboards
Small System Provided on the first single port expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S
IP daughterboard
Small System Provided on the second single port expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S
IP daughterboard
Small System Line Size Expansion Provided on the first dual port fiber expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S IP daughterboard basic-1 fnf-25 ohol-20 ohol-20 basic-1 lse-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 513
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
62 95
Comment
Provided on the second dual port fiber expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S IP daughterboard
CONFIRM a...a
CO_TYPE
CRC
CSQI
(STD)
ATT
1-(10)-20
(20) - x
Pack/Rel
basic-4.50
Confirm the typed in password ni2-21
Central Office switch type. Prompted if IFC
= NI2.
100% compatible with Bellcore standard
AT&T 5ESS
CRC threshold. Enter in units of 5 per cent.
CRC establishes the % of Cyclic
Redundancy Code (CRC) errors detected in
15 minutes before an out-of-service threshold is enforced.
CRC = (# of packets retransmitted) ÷ (total # packets sent).
cls-7
Maximum number of call registers for CSL input queues. Where: x = 25% of NCR
If AST is enabled, set CSQI equal to the larger value of the following:
• Number of ACD agents or AST sets to be controlled by the host computer, or
• 50.
cls-7
CSQO (20) - x
Note:
These call registers are used for
Command and Status Link applications such as Meridian Link.
Maximum number of call registers for CSL/
AML output queues. Where: x = 25% of NCR
If AST is enabled, set CSQO equal to the larger value of the following:
1. Number of ACD agents or AST sets to be controlled by the host computer , or
2. 50.
cls-7
514 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CTYP
CPSI
DCHI
DCIP
ESDI
ELAN
MGC
MGX
MSDL
MSPS
PTY
SDI
SDI2
SDI4
SPDC
SDI4
TMDI
XSDI
Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
These call registers are used for
Command and Status Link applications such as Meridian Link.
Card Type (Input/output port card type)
Call Processor card (Option 81C)
D-channel Interface card (limited to 15 for
DPNSS)
D-channel over IP
Enhanced Serial Data Interface
AML over Ethernet card
TTY on IPMG controlled by MGC
TTY on IPMG controlled by MG XPEC
Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (for
Downloadable D-channel on Small System)
Misc./SDI/Peripheral Signaling card
Pseudo TTY (Option 81C)
Single port SDI card
Dual-port SDI card
Four-Port SDI card
Single Port DCH card
Four port SDI card
D-channel configuration on TMDI (NTRB21) card
SDI paddle board msdl-18 basic-4.00
basic-5.00
basic-6.00
basic-24
CUST
XSM xx
Note:
CTYP may printout as being set as QSDI from previous software, but CTYP must be set to SDI4 when configuring data.
TTYas terminal for extended system monitor pack basic-6.00
Customer number associated with this function (as defined in LD15) lapw-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 515
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
xxx
ALL
<CR>
Comment
Customer to be accessible by way of
PWnn.
Enter the customer (0-99) and the associated Tenant numbers (entered at the
TEN prompt) to have access with PWnn to overlays specified at prompt OVLA.
All customers and associated tenants have access with this password.
No change to previous definitions.
Precede with X to remove.
CY45 (0)-31
DATA_CORRECT
(OFF) ON
Pack/Rel
Cycles LD 45 can be run whenever a fault is detected
If any number from 1 to 31 is entered, that is the number of times LD 45 runs under fault conditions.
If 0 is entered the system performs as before without limiting the number of LD 45 runs.
supp-16 vmba-19
Voice Mailbox Database Correction
In enabled state, the Meridian Mail database is updated to match the Meridian 1 database when the database audit discovers a discrepancy.
DCHI
DCHL
0-15 D-channel Interface port number
When adding a D-channel the MEM AVAIL data is output after this prompt indicating the channel has been added. You can therefore abort the program and save the changes without going to the REQ prompt.
Precede with X to remove.
pri-12
0-159 PRI loop number
0-159 1-126 PRI loop number and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = D70 or CNTY =
JAPN.
0- 159 (0)-3 PRI loop number and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = TCNZ or CNTY =
MSIA.
0-159 2-15 PRI loop number and interface identifier for all other interfaces pri-12
516 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
0 - 255 xx yyy
Comment
PRI loop number, systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
PRI card number.
For Small System. Where: xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For CS 1000S. Where: xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
For Small System and CS 1000S. Where:
• yyy = (0)-3, Small System PRI card number (D channel loop) and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = TCNZ or
CNTY = MSIA.
• yyy = 1-126, Small System PRI loop number and interface identifier for the
DCH when IFC = D70 or CNTY = JAPN.
• yyy = 2-15, Small System PRI loop number and interface identifier for all other interfaces.
One DCH can support up to 16 PRIs, except for D70 and JAPN (9 PRIs) and TCNZ and
MSIA (4 PRIs).
Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
fnf-25 basic-1
DCUS
DDCS
0-5
0-159
DENS
DES xx
SDEN
DDEN
4DEN d...d
Maximum number of ACD-ADS customers acdd-1
Loop number for NT DPNSS/DASS hardware
For Small System DPNSS PRI card number.
Where xx is: 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For CS 1000S DPNSS PRI card number.
Where xx is: 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
Precede with X to remove.
dpnss-16 lse-25 basic-1 basic-15 Single ports on SDI card
Double ports on SDI card
Quad ports on SDI card
Designator msdl-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 517
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
DES is used to identify the link and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters: 0-9, and upper case (A-Z) including spaces separating inputs. Characters * and # are not allowed.
Spaces are removed by the system. For example: CAB 5 PORT 2 becomes
CAB5PORT2. Use the underscore character
(_) instead, for example: CAB_5_PORT_2.
DES can be left blank or changed as required. If DES is already defined for a link, the system outputs the current name and reprompts DES.
Precede the existing DES with X to remove.
Example: XCAB_5_PORT_2.
DIDD (0)-15
DLAC (NO) YES
DID Delete
Number of leading digits to delete when receiving digits from DID trunk.
Change Call Log Option, where:
YES - Log all calls
NO - Log unanswered calls
Pack/Rel
isdn-16 basic-7.00
DLOP lll dd ff
L1 L2 Ln
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops.
Where: lll = 0-159 dti-5 lll = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 Small
System lse-25 lll = 0-255 systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 lll = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S basic-1 lll is 0-255 for CS 1000E system and no dd or ff dd = maximum number of simultaneous voice or data calls 0-(24) ff = frame format D2, D3, D4, or ESF
The default for frame format ff is ESF if prompt MODE is set to PRI; D3 if MODE is set to DTI or LINK. Loop must be removed before a change to ff can be made.
X to delete the loop.
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops
Loop numbers of the DTI Loops associated with this VAS. Loops must have previously
518 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
been defined as MODE = LINK. Precede with X to remove.
DNUM 0-15
DPNS
DRAT
(NO) YES
(56K)
64KI
Pack/Rel
Device number for I/O ports.
All ports on the MSDL card share the same
DNUM. The MSDL card address settings must match the DNUM value. For all other ports such as SDI, DCHI, etc., the device number is to match the port address switch settings.
To configure a D-channel on an even number port the card type must be SPDC or
MSDL.
msdl-18
Digital Private Network Signaling dpnss-16
D-channel transmission Rate 56 kb/s when
LCMT is AMI 64 kb/s clear. Allowed if LCMT
= B8S for SL-1 to SL-1 only. Default for
PRI2.
64 kb/s inverted HDLC, 64 kb/s restricted
DRAT must match the far end. DRAT is not prompted when configuring the ISLDchannel because speed is controlled by the modem baud rate.
pri-12
DROL
DTCS
DTDT
30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 43, 44, 45, 46, 51, 53,
60, 61
Daily Routine Overlays. Daily or midnight routine programs are run once a day at the time specified by prompt TODR.
Programs 33, 45, 46 and 53 are not applicable to Small System.
basic-1
1-159 Digital Trunk Channel Switches (Loop numbers for GPT hardware)
Precede with X to remove.
Not required for NT5K75AA. Prompted with
Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package
122.
DTCS does not apply to Small System.
supp-16
NO
TD
Dial Tone Detector Test
No DTD tests are required
The DTD is to be tested against a tone from the TDS dtd-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 519
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
EXT
Comment
The DTD is to be tested against an external source
DTI2
DTIB
Pack/Rel
0-159
N0-N159
0-255
2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface loop number ipra-14
2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface phantom loop number. Precede loop number with an
"N" to configure this loop as a phantom loop for trunks.
DTI2 loop number, systems with Fibre
Network Fabric fnf-25
Small System format for DTI2 loop number lse-24 1-9 11-19
21-29 31-39
41-49
11-14, 21-24,
31-34, 41-44
Small System format for DTI2 phantom loop number. Precede loop number with an "N" to configure this loop as a phantom loop for trunks. On an Option 11C, a Phantom loop can be included between 1-9.
For CS 1000S basic-1
Precede any DTI2 entry with X to remove.
(35)-1000 Digital Trunk Input Buffers
Required for IDA trunks. Prompted with
Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package
122. Used with NT5K75AA DCHI operating in mode 0 or 1.
dass2-1 6
DTIC 0, 4, 8,...156
Starting network loop slot for PRI/DTI card di-5
0, 4, 8,...254
DTOB (4)-100 systems with Fibre Network Fabric
On non-Network loops, enter return <CR> and ignore the SCH2035 message. Do not input loop numbers that take the system out of its bounds. Number must be even for all systems.
Not prompted for Small System.
fnf-25
Digital Trunk Output Buffers per Digital Trunk
Signaling Link
Required for IDA trunks. Prompted with
Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package dass2-16
520 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
122. Used with NT5K75AA DCHI operating in mode 0 or 1.
DTRB
DUPX
DUR5
(100)
50
60
70
(FULL)
HALF
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
Digitone Burst time in ms
100 ms bursts of DTMF with 100 ms interdigit pause
50 ms bursts of DTMF with 50 ms interdigit pause
60 ms bursts of DTMF with 90 ms interdigit pause
70 ms bursts of DTMF with 70 ms interdigit pause
This determines the DTMF burst and interdigit pause for the Tone and Digit Switch or TDS.
Burst time of 50 ms is used for the Fast TDS;
100 ms is used for the standard TDS. Burst time of 60 ms and 70 ms is used for international requirements.
Full Duplex mode
Enter FULL if each end can simultaneously send and receive.
Half Duplex mode csl-7
CDR call duration with 0.5 second accuracy.
DUR5 does not apply to CDR data link.
CDR call record output on TTY with 2.0
second duration accuracy.
CDR call record output on TTY with 0.5
second duration accuracy for Japan.
0.5 second duration accuracy is available for outgoing trunks with answer supervision outside Japan.
cdr-8
DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT
5-(180)-1440
The period in minutes before a dynamic
ELIN mapping is timed out.
basic-5.00
DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE
(YES) NO Reuse the oldest ELIN or fall back to the
Locator when all dynamic ELINs for an ERL basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 521
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
are in use and another emergency call occurs.
ELAN x
Pack/Rel
Application Module Link (AML) over
Ethernet
Associate Value Added Server ID (VSID) x with AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) x.
The configured VSID of the ELAN subnet is used to distinguish the connection between the Meridian 1 and each application in a multiple application Ethernet environment. If the Nortel Symposium Call Center (NGCC) package 311 is not equipped, a maximum of
16 ELAN subnets can be configured and supported in the range of 16 to 31.
nxcc-22
ENL
ERRM
ESCALA
TE
(YES)
NO
ERR
BUG
AUD
0-(2)-127
ENL error message for Small System
DIS error message for Small System ains-16
Error Messages (prompted when USER =
MTC)
Error monitor-hardware
Error monitor-software
Software Audit
The messages, if enabled here, are output on the maintenance port. Precede with X to remove.
basic-1
Alarm occurrence threshold (prior to escalating)
This determines the number of times a major alarm may occur before it becomes critical.
Entering 0 disables the alarm escalation.
This applies to major alarms only.
alarm-19
ESDI YES NO
EX_DM_UPDT_TIMEOUT
Enhanced Serial Data Interface
Default is as previous if ADAN = CHG. The default is NO if ADAN = NEW and no ports on the card are configured, or if the other port is configured and is not ESDI. The default is
YES if the other port is configured and is
ESDI.
basic-5.00
522 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
External DM Update Timeout alarm delay if the External DM did not connect to the system to perform a location update or periodic audit.
5-(15)-14400
0 = No alarm is generated.
EXT0 x aaa bbb
EXT1 x aaa bbb
Pack/Rel
Extenders for CPU 0
Not prompted for Small System.
Identifies the types of extenders that connect the Central Processing Unit or CPU to the various Network shelves. Where: basic-19
• x = Group number
• aaa = extender type located on the CPU shelf
• bbb = extender type located on the
Network shelf
Valid inputs:
• x = 0-4
• aaa = NIL for ACB cables or passive Bus
Extender on CPU shelf 0.
• aaa = SBE for Segmented Bus Extender on CPU shelf 0 cabled to Network shelf
3PE or Network shelf backplane connectors ACB.
• bbb = NIL if Network shelf not equipped.
• bbb = 3PE for 3 Port Extender on a
Network shelf cabled to a SBE on CPU shelf 0, or cabled to CPU shelf 0 backplane connectors ACB.
fnf-25
Note:
bbb must be 3PE for core side 0 for
Network Capacity Expansion
Extenders for CPU 1
Identifies the types of extenders that connect the Central Processing Unit or CPU to the various network shelves. Where: basic-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 523
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
• x = Group number
• aaa = extender type located on the CPU shelf
• bbb = extender type located on the
Network shelf
Valid inputs:
• x = 0-4
• aaa = NIL for ACB cables or passive Bus
Extender on CPU shelf 1
• aaa = SBE for Segmented Bus Extender on CPU shelf 1 cabled to Network shelf
3PE or Network shelf backplane connectors ACB.
• bbb = NIL if Network shelf not equipped.
• bbb = 3PE for 3 Port Extender on a
Network shelf cabled to a SBE on CPU shelf 1, or cabled to CPU shelf 1 backplane connectors ACB.
EXT1 is not prompted for SmallSystems.
E_FILTE
R
FCDR
NEW
CHG
OUT
(OLD)
NEW
Pack/Rel
Note:
bbb must be 3PE for core side 1 for
Network Capacity Expansion
Add an Exception Filter entry.
alarm-19
Change an Exception Filter entry.
Remove an Exception Filter entry.
This is reprompted for subsequent exception filters. Up to 50 Exception Filters can be configured. Entering <CR> to complete exception filter entries. Precede with X to remove.
Format for Call Detail Recording
OLD format
Information field location varies according to which features are equipped.
NEW CDR format.
Information field locations are fixed.
fcdr-20
524 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Prompted when New Format CDR (FCDR) package 234 is equipped.
FLOW (NO) YES
FLOW_TYPE
NONE
XON
HWR
Pack/Rel
Flow control capability This prompt appears for Options: 51C, 61C, and 81C.
For Small System, FLOW is not prompted when TTY_TYPE = LSL.
csl-7 basic-22
Flow control type for Small System.
FLOW_TYPE is prompted when TTY_TYPE
= LSL.
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call
Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux
Base layer. The prompt displays the current FLOW_TYPE configuration on the system. For example, FLOW_TYPE
NONE.
No flow control
XON/XOFF flow control
Mail style flow control protocol
Hardware flow control protocol
FLOW_TYPE must be MAIL for the LSL used for Meridian Mail administration / maintenance access. When TTY_TYPE =
LSL and CARD = 0, only NONE and XON are valid responses.
FLTA
FLTH
(NO) YES
0-(3)-9
Failed Log In Threshold Alarm
Activate minor alarm in the event of FLTH being reached. Prompted with International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package
131.
supp-18
Number of times a user has to attempt a login before the account is locked out. 0 means never lock out the accounts.
Prompted for PWD2 users.
lapw-16
FMT_OUTPUT
Alarm Filters Formatted printing alarm-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 525
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
(OFF)
ON
<CR>
Comment
This prompt disables formatting for the alarm/exception output.
This prompt enables formatting for the alarm/exception output.
Retains the current formatting status.
FPC
FR44
(NO) YES
(1) - 4
Pack/Rel
Allow or deny Force Password Change
Note:
Do Not set the FPC to YES until the system security manager is ready to change the default passwords. This prompt can be used by the system security manager to change all four system passwords. The Response is not retained in the database.
Multiplication factor, frequency of Overlay 44 running in background less than other background overlay.
basic-4.00
FRPT (NEFR)
FTYP
FUNC
OLFR
(3)
3S
5
ABD
FCL
MOD
LME
SCN
Access to incoming calls by FRE station denied
Access to incoming calls by FRE station allowed
If FRPT = OLFR, then a FRE station can do
Ringing Number Pickup, Night Answer and receive modified calls.
basic-1 basic-20 3.5 inch high density floppy type
3.5 inch super density floppy type
5.25 inch floppy type
Prompted if ADAN = FDK or HDK. Not prompted for Small System.
MSDL card Function. This prompt is used when applying the MSDL card to the SDI application.
msdl-19
Autobaud
Flow Control (XON/XOFF handling)
Modem support
Line Mode Editing
Character Screening
526 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Precede with X to delete.
GRP 0-4
0-7
Pack/Rel
Network Group number (Option 81C)
Group numbers cannot be changed until the
I/O devices associated with that group are disabled.
The option 61C supports 1 network group
(0). Option 81C supports up to 8 network groups (0-7).
For Option 81C:
Port 0 of the CNI card in slot 8 in the NT6D60
Core Module must be configured as "group
5." This configuration is not equivalent to a network switching group (groups 0-4).
"Group 5" extends the inter-processor section to the interface bus, within the Core
Module, through the CNI card in slot 8 and the 3PE card in slot 7.
systems with Fibre Network Fabric
81-19 fnf-25
HOST
HPIB
(NO) YES
16-1000
96-7500
Enable HOST mode Log In for password
PWnn.
When a HOST user logs in, the outputs defined for the port are only output to that port. For example, two ports are defined by prompt USER to output BUG and SCH messages. When a HOST user logs in to one of these ports, the other port does not output
BUG and SCH messages until the HOST user logs out.
This removes the restriction that ports with the same output must operate at the speed of the slowest port. This feature is primarily used by applications such as Meridian
Manager.
lapw-17
High-Priority Input Buffers
High-Priority Input Buffers for System
Options 51C, 61C, and 81C.
Recommended for attendant consoles and
DID/TIE trunks. High priority line or trunk cards are placed in slot 1 and assigned have
CLS = HPR in LD 10, 11, 12 or 14.
Superloops do not require any line or trunk cards assigned as high priority.
Refer to Appendix 553-2201-151.
basic-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 527
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
HRLR (0)-8, 32-40
Comment Pack/Rel
Handsfree Receive objective Loudness
Rating
The HRLR value is downloaded to Meridian
Modular telephones after sysload, except when performing a parallel reload. Refer to
Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182
before adjusting this value.
The default is 0. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are
provided on HRLR / HTLR Offsets and
on page 499 hfdl-20
HTLR (0)-11, 32-54
IADR
ICON
0-(3)-255
(NO) YES
Handsfree Transmit Objective Loudness
Rating
The HTLR value is downloaded to Meridian
Modular telephones after sysload, except when performing a parallel reload. Refer to
Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182
before adjusting this value.
The default is 0. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are
provided on HRLR / HTLR Offsets and
on page 499 hfdl-20 cls-7 Individual Address for the data-link level
HDLC protocol.
The IADR and RADR prompts must be coordinated with the far end. If IADR is defined as 3, then RADR must be 1.
M3900 Full Icon Support Where: (NO) = feature disabled YES = feature enabled
ICON-PACKAGE
3.0
IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh
Change customized text string character by character, where xx (01 to 24) is the position of the character in the customized text string.
Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast
(EBLN ISM value of 2).
The IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt is only prompted if SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY =
NO and is re-prompted until a <CR> is basic-23
528 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
entered or xx = 24th character has been entered, thus allowing additional characters to be entered. Where: c = one supported character. hh = 2 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f) representing a supported character.
IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa Enter customized text string by text string input. A maximum of 24 characters are accepted and validated. Enter <CR> for a blank Electronic Brandlining display.
Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast
(EBLN ISM value of 2).
Pack/Rel
basic-23
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa
IDLP 0-158 xx
0-255 basic-23
IDLE_DISP_STRING entered customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. This information is shown under three scenarios:
• to show the current EBLN Terminal Text
Broadcast customized text string before the MODIFY prompt to let the user decide if a change is required.
• To show the customized text string entered in response to the IDLE_DISP_STRING prompt for confirmation with the following
OK prompt.
• To show the customized text string entered in response to the IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt (s) for confirmation with the following OK prompt.
Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast
(EBLN ISM value of 2).
IND DTI Loop
DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop. See
DLOP prompt.
Defines DTI card number used for IND CSL,
Small System
DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop, systems with Fibre Network Fabric csl-7 fnf-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 529
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
IFC
Comment Pack/Rel
Interface type for D-channel. Note that when
USR = ISLD or SHA, the interface is automatically entered as SL1.
pri-17
(D100)
1TR6
APAC
AXEA
AXES
D250
D70
EGF4
E403
ESGF
ESIG
ESS4
ESS5
EURO
ISGF
Meridian DMS-100
1 TR 6 for Germany
Asia-Pacific ISDN interface for Australian
BRI UIPE PRI, China, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Japan BRI UIPE PRI, Malaysia,
Singapore & Thailand
Ericsson AXE-10 for Australia
Ericsson AXE-10 for Sweden
Interface to Meridian DMS-250
Interface to Japan D70
Q Reference Signalling Point interface
EuroISDN interface for ETS 300 403
ESIG interface with GF platform (allowed if
QSIG and QSIGGF packages are both equipped)
ETSI Q reference signalling point (QSIG)
Interface ID. Allowed only if the new Dchannel is configured on the MSDL card.
Interface to AT&T ESS#4 AT&T ESS#5 If
IFC = EURO, the MOV command (REQ =
MOV) may only be used to move an MSDL card to another MSDL card. For example, when IFC = EURO, an MSDL card cannot be moved to a DCHI card.
Interface to AT&T ESS#4
AT&T ESS#5
EuroISDN interface
If IFC = EURO, the MOV command (REQ =
MOV) may only be used to move an MSDL card to another MSDL card. For example, when IFC = EURO, an MSDL card cannot be moved to a DCHI card.
ISIG interface with GF platform (allowed if
QSIG and QSIGGF packages are both equipped) qsig gf-24 euro-24
530 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ISIG
JTTC
NI2
NUME
S100
SL1
SS12
SWIS
TCNZ
Comment
ISO Q reference signalling point (QSIG)
Interface ID. Allowed only if the new D channel is configured on the MSDL card.
Interface ID for JAPAN TTC; This input is only valid if the new D-channel is configured on the MSDL card
NI-2 TR-1268 interface type
Numeris for France
Meridian SL-100
Meridian SL-1
SYS-12 for Norway
SwissNet
Telecom New Zealand (NEAX-61)
Pack/Rel
jttc- 23
INC_T306
0-(2)-240 ddsp-20
INTL 1-12
Variable timer for received disconnect message on incoming calls, allowing inband tone to be heard when sent by the network (entered in 2 second increments).
The network stops sending tone after this timer expires. Default values for this timer include:
30 for China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia,
Hong Kong, Singapore, New Zealand, and
Thailand.
60 seconds for Australia PRI.
Note:
Message PWD GLOBAL SETTINGS
SAVED displayed when any changes made to the Password Gate Opener prompts and indicates to the user that the changes have been saved in protected memory. Ending the program with **** or
** do not reset the changes.
Interval
Time interval for checking Meridian Link for overload in five second increments
This is the interval for counting the number of messages on a Meridian Link. See prompt
MCNT.
iap3p-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 531
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
IPCONF 0-255
Comment
Virtual IP conference loop.
The maximum number of loops is 64. You can add multiple loops at the same time.
Precede a loop number with X to remove it.
You can remove multiple loops at the same time.
Pack/Rel
basic-6.50
Note:
Before a loop can be removed, it must first be disabled.
IPIE (NO) YES Allow or deny Enhanced Unsolicited Status
Message (USM) Information Elements (IE).
basic-4.00
IPMG supl sh
ISDN_MCNT
60-(300)-350
The IPMG on which the TTY is being configured. Enter the superloop and shelf of the IPMG. sl is the superloop number for the
IPMG and is in the range: 0 - 252 and sh is the shelf number and is: 0 or 1 There is no default value for IPMG.
basic-5.00
qsig-22
Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.
ISLM
JDMI
K
1-382
(4000)
0-159
0-255
1-(7)-32
Integrated Services Signaling Link
Maximum.
Maximum number of ISL trunks controlled by the D-channel. There is no default value.
The maximum number of ISL trunks controlled by the D-channel.
isl-12 basic-4.00
Note:
ISLM prompt is hidden for D-Channel on
IP and would be defaulted to 4000
Japan Digital Multiplexer Interface loop number
JDMI loop number, systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
Precede with X to remove. Not for Small
System.
jdtm-14 fnf-25
Maximum number of outstanding frames cls-7
532 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
This value can be the same for the Meridian
1 (near-end) and the host processor (farend). Where:
• 7 = recommended value for AUX applications
• 2 = recommended value for CCITT
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
LAPD (NO) YES
LAPW
LCMT
LCTL
LEVL
LIS
0-99
<CR>
(B8S)
AMI
(NO) YES
(INST)
ADMN
(NONE)
INT SUB
Pack/Rel
sta-19
Language supported on STA
Link Access Protocol for D-channel
Change LAPD parameters.
pri-12
Enter Limited Access to Overlays Password number to be created, modified or deleted.
No more password changes
Precede with X to remove.
LAPW is reprompted after the OPT prompt, thus allowing multiple Limited Access to
Overlays Password users to be created.
If the overlay is exited after the OPT prompt the LAPW information is saved. If the overlay is exited before the OPT prompt, the information is not saved.
lapw-16
B8ZS Line Coding Method
Alternate Mark Inversion, B7 Line Coding
Method
The default is B8ZS when the frame format is ESF. When the frame format is D2, D3, or
D4, the default is AMI.
pri-19
Change Link Control system parameters cls-7
Access Level for Set Based Administration password Installer.
Access Level for Set Based Administration password Administrator adminset-21
The Location Information Service to use:
NONE
INTernal SUBnet LIS basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 533
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
EXT DM
Comment
EXTernal DM.
SUBNET LIS or EXTERNAL DM can only be selected if the corresponding packages are unrestricted.
LLID (NO) YES
LNAME_OPTION
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Last Log In Identification
Identification display of last Log In and failed
Log In attempts message allowed.
Prompted with International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
supp-18 lapw-19
Require Log In name for password access
If the option is changed to YES, each password currently in the system is given a default name which is used until new names are assigned.
The default names applied to the passwords are:
• ADMIN1 is applied to the current PWD1
• ADMIN2 is applied to the current PWD2
• USER0 is applied to the current Password
00
• USER1 is applied to the current Password
01
• (and so on to USER 99)
The following message is output before reprompting REQ: DEFAULT LOGIN
NAMES SAVED.
To login to the system with the
LNAME_OPTION enabled, use: LOGIN
ADMIN2 <CR>
PASS (prompted by the system)
Enter the current second level administration password.
If the option is changed from YES to NO, random passwords are assigned by the system to ensure no password duplication.
The default password for PWD2 is output to the terminal when this option is disabled.
The following message is output:
WARNING: PASSWORDS is CHANGED
TO DEFAULT VALUES.
534 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
OK? (Y/N)
If Y is entered, the following appears:
DEFAULT PASSWORDS SAVED
PWD2 = <pwd2 password>
Note that entering YES forces the user to define passwords. If NO is entered, Log In name may still be entered, but is not required.
To find the other default passwords assigned by the system, Load Overlay 22 and print
PWD.
With Multi-user Log In enabled, it is possible for more than one user to be logged in with the same name/password combination.
However, no two Log In names can have the same password associated with them.
Pack/Rel
LOCK 0 -(60)-270
LOGIN_NAME aaa . . . . aaaa
Log In name for password access
When LNAME_OPTION is YES, the names must be associated with each Log In password. This can be up to 11 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z).
lapw-19
LOUT 1-(20)-1440
Lockout time, prompted for PWD1 and
PWD2 users.
The time, in minutes, that a port is locked out when the Failed Log In Threshold or FLTH has been exceeded.
Messages of the lockout are displayed on maintenance terminals and supervisory stations.
lapw-16
LPIB 96-7000
96-1000 supp-18
Logout, Inactive Session Logout Time
The number of minutes after which the system logs out if no information has been exchanged. Prompted with International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package
131.
Low-Priority Input Buffers for Large systems
Low-Priority Input Buffers for Small systems.
Most stations and trunks are defined as low priority. See prompt HPIB. Refer to the basic-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 535
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
Memory Calculations Appendix in the
Planning and Engineering NTPs.
LPWD aaaa
LTHR
MANU
MARP
<CR>
(NO) YES
(PMS1)
PMS2
PMS3
(YES) NO
Pack/Rel
Enter current LAPW password to change user password.
Leave Log In password unchanged
This prompt appears only for LAPW users logged in with a LAPW password. This prompt is used by Limited Access to Overlay users to change their password.
lapw-16 cls-7 Link Threshold
Change link performance thresholds for
ESDI only.
Standard PMS interface
Requires <CR> HOD to recognize input message
Updated RMS message is followed by the old RMS when a room DN checks IN or
OUT.
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime feature allowed.
pmsi-19 marp-18
MAT (NO) YES
MAT_READ_ONLY
(NO)
YES
Enable MAT 5.0 Log In for password PWnn
Mat 5.0 users can remote log in from a PC to perform Alarm Management and
Maintenance operations through a graphical interface. PWD1 and PWD2 users always have MAT 5.0 access.
mat-22 mat-22
Do not restrict MAT 5.0 write access for password PWnn
Restrict MAT 5.0 write access for password
PWnn
Read only provides MAT 5.0 users access to
Alarm Management and Equipment View windows. However, read only users cannot clear or acknowledge alarms, and can only perform status commands.
PWD1 and PWD2 users always have MAT
5.0 write access.
536 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MBGA (NO)
YES
Comment
Multilocation Business Group, for tenant, messages are allowed to be sent on this Dchannel.
Multilocation Business Group, for tenant, messages are allowed to be sent on this Dchannel.
Pack/Rel
isdn-16
MCNT
MFSD
10-9999 Message Count Threshold
Threshold for number of Meridian Link messages per time interval. The recommended setting is 400. With INTL = 4 and MCNT = 400, the maximum flow is 20 messages per second.
iap3p-12
0, 2, 4...158
Multifrequency Sender loop. Use evennumbered loops for Multifrequency Sender.
1-9 Small System
Precede with X to remove.
0, 2, 4... 254 Multifrequency Sender loop, systems with
Fibre Network Fabric basic-1 fnf-25
MG_CARD supl sh card
IPMG 403
Physical MGC card for the digitial loop association to the IPMG. The format is superloop shelf card.
MGCONF aaa bbb ccc ddd
Allow configuring up to 4 Media Gateway conference loops simultaneously. a b c d = 0
- 255
X to delete the loop.
basic-5.00
MGCR 0-NCR
MGTDS aaa bbb
Maximum number of call registers used by
AUX messaging.
MGCR is associated with the NCR prompt.
It is the maximum number of call registers that can be queued for use by AUX messaging before extra processing time is allocated to handle them.
basic-1
Allow configuring 2 Media Gateway TDS loops simultaneously. Where a b = 0 - 255 basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 537
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
X to delete the loop
MID_SCPU
(NO) YES
MLDN (NO) YES
Pack/Rel
basic-3.0
Midnight Switch Cores
Allow or deny Midnight Switch Core, where:
Deny causes the system to perform the 3PE test during the Midnight routine instead of switching CPUs.
Allow causes the system to switch CPUs during the Midnight routine instead of performing the 3PE test.
Note:
Applicable to CPP systems only.
Multiple Loop DN. MLDN allows multiple appearance DNs to be on different loops.
basic-1
MODE LINK
PRI
TRK
MODIFY (NO) YES
MPED (SD)
DD
4D
8D
MQC_FEAT
Mode of operation
Digital Link mode (Not supported for Small
System)
Primary Rate Interface mode
Digital Trunk mode dti-8
Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text
Broadcast configuration. Prompted if the
Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).
basic-23
Single (Maximum Peripheral Equipment
Density)
Double (Maximum Peripheral Equipment
Density)
Quadruple (Maximum Peripheral Equipment
Density)
Octal (Maximum Peripheral Equipment
Density)
Set to 8D for superloops. See LD 97. For
Small System, MPED = 8D in the default data and must remain at this value for the peripherals to work.
basic-7 meet-24
538 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NAS
NACD
NMS
Comment
MCDN QSIG Feature type
Prompted if RCAP = MQC Precede MQC
Feature type with X to remove
MCDN NAS functionalities are supported over QSIG
MCDN NACD functionalities are supported over QSIG
MCDN NMS - MC functionalities are supported over QSIG
MSCL (0)-8190
MSDT 0-159
Maximum number of Speed Call Lists that can be defined on the system
Main Synchronization DTSL.
Enter number of DTSL used for main synchronization.
Prompted if SYNM = 1, 2 or 4.
Pack/Rel
optf-13 supp-16
MSEC [ON]
MSSD
OFF
[MSNV],
MSBT
Enable the Media Security feature for the system with the end device security CLS set to MSNV (Never) unless the CLS for the TNs is MSSD
Disable the Media Security. The device level settings do not be effective when this option is set for the system.
basic-5.00
Media Security Security System Default for
TNs configured in LD11. This parameter has a default value of MSNV or “Never”. The administrator can choose to change this setting to MSBT or “Best Effort”. Changing this parameter affects all TNs that have the
CLS MSSD.
basic-5.00
Message Registration
Periodic Pulse Metering mr-20 MTRO (MR)
PPM
MULTI_USER
(OFF) ON
MWIF
(STD)
ISDM
Multi-User Log In multi-19
Message Waiting Interface
Standard Message Waiting Interface
Plessey ISDX switch with remote message notification capability samm-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 539
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
MWTO (15) - 30
Comment Pack/Rel
Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL
PROCEEDING message.
qsig ss-25.4
MWRT
N1
N2
0 - (2) - 15
32, 64, 128, (512)
Maximum Number of octets per HDLC information frame. An entry of 128 or 512 is recommended for ELAN subnets.
csl-7
4-(8)-16
Message Waiting Retry Timer.
This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.
qsig ss-25.4
N200
N201
N2X4
NASA
NCPU
1-(3)-8
4-(260)
0-(10)-20
(NO)
YES
1-(2)
Maximum Number of retransmissions in steps of 1.
Maximum Number of retransmissions
Network Attendant Service not allowed
Network Attendant Service allowed
Network Attendant Service signaling messages are sent on this D-channel.
Number of CPUs
This value is normally programmed at the factory.
pri-12
Maximum Number of octets in information element pri-12 pri-12
Maximum Number of status inquires when remote is busy (N2X2 only applies to 1TR6) ovlp-16 nas-20 basic-18
NCR xx Number of Call Registers, range depends on system type. Where: basic-19
540 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• xx = 26-2047 for System Option 51C
• xx = 26-20000 for System Option 81C
• xx = 26-65000 for System CS1000M or
CS1000E
The maximum number of call registers can be limited by the amount of system memory.
In this case the number of call registers is the amount of protected memory available divided by the number of words per call register.
For memory calculations, see
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian
1: Large System Planning and Engineering,
NN43021-220.
NDCH 0 - 63
Pack/Rel
Move the primary D-Channel to this logical number.
The ADAN MOV command is supported for
D-channels.
pri-18
NDIS (20)-255
NDRG
NKEY
NLPW
(NO) YES
[31]
X...X
<CR>
Number of Display messages for the
Background Terminal (BGD).
The NDIS entry determines the queue length for display messages for the BGD application.
bgd-10
New Distinctive Ringing
Prompted if Distinctive Ringing (DRNG) package 74 equipped, and if packages
ATVN 68, FTC 125 and JTDS 171 are turned off.
drng-10
The number of packets that can be secured by the same master key (2^n is the number of packets, 2^31 by default). Current default is the maximum allowed by SRTP for
SRTCP packets. Valid range for user is 1-31
(0 is ignored and mapped to the default of
31).
basic-5.00
New Limited Access to Overlay log on password for the user
Leave Log In password unchanged
Length is 4-16 characters with Limited
Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.
Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z.
lapw-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 541
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
NORTEL_BRAND
NPW1
(YES)
NO x...x
<CR>
Comment Pack/Rel
basic-23
"NORTEL" Electronic Brandlining display option. Prompted only if the EBLN ISM parameter value is set to "0" or "1".
Show the "NORTEL" Electronic brandline.
Show a blank brandline along with the Time and Date on an idle MDT set.
New Password 1(PWD1 Log In password) basic-1
No change
Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z. Length is 4-16 characters with Limited Access to
Overlays (LAPW) package 164.
Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).
NPW2 x...x
<CR>
New Password 2 (PWD2)
No change
Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z. Length is 4-16 characters with Limited Access to
Overlays (LAPW) package 164.
Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).
basic-1
NUMD 1- (2)
OCAC
OK
(NO) YES
Number of floppy disk drives
Prompted if ADAN = FDK or HDK. Not prompted for Small System.
basic-15
Support the Original Carrier Access Code format The expanded CAC format is automatically supported.
OCAC can be set to YES before and during the interim period. If OCAC is not set properly, Equal Access screening do not function.
fcc-20
Confirm validated Terminal Text Broadcast customized text string "aaaa" entered at the
IDLE_DISP_STRING or at the
IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompts. Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).
basic-23
542 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(YES)
NO
Comment
Keep the new text sting.
Re-enter a new text string.
OPT
(CFPA)
CFPD
Pack/Rel
Options for password PWnn. Multiple entries must be separated by a space.
Configuration Prompts Allowed
Configuration Prompts Denied CFPD allows access to prompts LPWD and NLPW to change one’s own password.
lapw-16
(DTD)
DTA
(FEAD)
FEAA
(FORCD)
FORCA
(LLCD)
LLCA
Deny DN-TN correspondence (administrator access only)
Allow DN-TN correspondence
(administrator access only) adminset-2 1
Deny Change Set Features (administrator & installer access)
Allow Change Set Features (administrator & installer access) adminset-21
Deny the Force command
Allow the Force command muli-19
(LOSD)
LOSA
(MOND)
MONA
(NAMD)
Line Load Control Denied
Line Load Control Allowed
Access to Line Load Control commands in
LD 2.
lapw-16 xpe-20 Loss Plan Customization Denied
Loss Plan Customization Allowed
Deny the Monitor command
Allow the Monitor command muli-19
NAMA
(PROD)
Deny Change CPND Names (administrator and installer access)
Allow Change CPND Names (administrator and installer access) adminset-21
Print Only Denied lapw-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 543
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
PROA
Comment
Print Only Allowed
(PSCA)
PSCD
(RDBD)
RDBA
Pack/Rel
Restricts overlay access to printing functions only.
Printing of Speed Call lists Allowed
Printing of Speed Call lists Denied lapw-16
Printing Speed Call lists can be allowed even though the overlay is restricted for all other functions.
Access to Resident Debug Denied
Access to Resident Debug Allowed
Access to Resident Debug (denied) allowed
Must have International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
lapw-15
ORUR
(TADD)
TADA
(TOLD)
TOLA
(TRKD)
TRKA
1-(5)-255
Deny Set Time and Date (administrator and installer access)
Allow Set Time and Date (administrator and installer access)
Deny Change Toll Restrictions
(administrator and installer access)
Allow Change Toll Restrictions
(administrator and installer access) adminset-21 adminset-21
Deny Change Trunks (Opt 11E administrator access only)
Allow Change Trunks (Opt 11E administrator access only) adminset-21 basic-4.50
Note:
Message PWD ACCOUNT SETTINGS
SAVED displayed when user input information is complete. Once complete the user information is saved to protected memory. Ending the program with **** or
** abort do not reset the changes.
Overrun/Underruns out-of-service threshold
Enter in units of 1, the number of overrun/ underrun in 15 minutes before an out-ofservice is enforced.
basic-1
544 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
OTBF 1-(32)-127
OUT_T306
OVLA
0-(30)-240
1-99
ALL
XALL
<CR>
Comment
Output request buffers
Pack/Rel
pri-12 ddsp-20
Variable timer for received disconnect message on outgoing calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network.
The network stops sending tone after this timer expires. Default values for this timer include:
30 for China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia,
Hong Kong, Singapore, New Zealand, and
Thailand.
60 seconds for Australia PRI.
List of Overlay programs from 1 to 99 to be accessible by way of password PWnn
Overlay number
To allow access to all overlays
To deny access to all overlays
No change to previous definitions
Multiple entries must be separated by a space and the last entry must be followed by a carriage return. Precede with X to remove.
lapw-16
OVLR
OVLS
OVLT
OVLY
PARM
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-8
(NO) YES
PASSWORD a...a
(NO) YES
Overlap Receiving
Overlap Sending ovlp-15 ovlp-15
Overlap Timer (in seconds)
This timer controls the interval between the sending of INFORMATION messages.
ovlp-15
Overlay basic-1 basic-4.50
Sets or accepts the users password.
Acceptable Characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, ! %
$ % ^ & () _ - + = {} | : ;"’ < , > . ? /.
Note:
Note: Spaces ~ ‘ * @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.
Gate opener for System Parameters.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 545
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
R232/R422 DCE/DTE
Comment
Parameters for Interface and transmission mode, prompted for MSDL ports.
The RS-422 parameters are established with switch settings on the MSDL card. This prompt is used to verify those settings prior to enabling the card.
RS-232 parameters are set both on the card and at this prompt. Both values must be entered even if only one of them is being changed. For example "R232 DCE."
Default for AML is R232 DCE. Default for Dchannels is R422 DTE.
Pack/Rel
msdl-18
PARY
(NONE)
ODD
EVEN
Parity type. Prompted for asynchronous
ESDI ports.
For Small System, PARY is not prompted for
CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =
PTY.
basic-19
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call
Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux
Base layer. The prompt displays the current PARY configuration on the system. For example, PARY NONE.
No parity bit
Odd parity bit
Even parity bit
Default parity type for all three remote TTYs on a IPMG is NONE.
PBXH 0-23
PCDR
PCML
X
(NO) YES
(MU)
Hour to perform Message Waiting lamp maintenance
X = No test to be performed.
Priority to CDR
YES gives CDR priority over call processing.
mwc-15 cdr-1
Pulse Code Modulation companding Law for the system
?-Law (use ?-Law for North America) basic-1
546 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
A
Comment
A-Law. This takes precedence over the response to the INTN prompt in Overlay 97 for Small System DTI/PRI.
PDCH 0-63
PDT (NO)
PDT1/PDT2
Pack/Rel
Primary D-channel associated with a backup
D-channel
Both D-channels must be on the same card type that is DCHI or MSDL. Prompted if
ADAN = BDCH msdl-18
PDT access. This prompt is available only when adding or modifying LAPW, Level 1
(PWD1) and Level 2 (PWD2) users.
basic-5.00
PINX_CUST
0-99
PMCR
PMIN
PMSI
PORT
5 - 1023
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
PORT
0-1 qsig-22
This customer number is used for the DN address translation associated with call independent connection messages received on this D-channel. Prompted when IFC =
ISGF or ESGF.
Number of call registers used for PMSI.
Minimum number of call registers to be configured is 5 Maximum is lesser of either
1023 or 25 percent of the total system call registers
For example, if you enter 65, but 25 percent of the system total is 45, the number entered by the system is 45.
pms-19
Minor alarm when the PMSI link is not responding.
This is not prompted if XTMR = 0. When this prompt is Yes, the attendants minor alarm is activated when the PMSI link does not respond. Note that when the link responds again, the alarm is not cleared.
pms-19
Modify Property Management Systems parameters
This is prompted is Property Management
Systems Interface (PMSI) is enabled.
pms-19
Port number for MSDL cards, Option 81C I/
O devices, or PMSI ports:
Port number for the CP card basic-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 547
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
0-3
0-7
0-15
0-1
0-2
0-2
0-3
1, 3
0, 1 or 2
Comment
Port number for the MSDL card
Port number for Pseudo TTYs
This prompt appears for Property
Management Systems Interface (PMSI) port configuration.
Prompted only when CTYP = MSDL (Multipurpose Serial Data Link), CPSI (Option 81C
CP card), or PTY (Option 81C Pseudo
TTY).
Port number for Option11 systems:
Small System TDS/DTR Port number
Small System System Core port number.
Port 0 is configured on System Core but cannot be modified.
Small System, prompted for CAB 1-4 if
CAB_TYPE = IP
Small System DCHI/SDI Port number or
Small System pseudo TTY port number
For Small System:
Pack/Rel
sipe-25
1. Expansion cabinets only support one
TTY port which is on the Fiber Receiver
Card. When CAB = 1 or 2, PORT is not prompted.
2. The maximum number of pseudo TTY supported is 4.
3. For TTY_TYPE = LSL, Card 0 Port 0 is not allowed.
DCHI Port number
If D-channel is on PRI/PRI2 card, the valid
Port number is 1. If D-channel is on NTAK02 card, Ports 1 and 3 are valid.
SDI port number on the MGC or MGX. There is no default port number.
basic-5.00
PRI
Note:
Port 2 is not allowed for CTYP of MGX.
Primary Rate Interface
ISDN PRI architecture is composed of three protocol layers providing different services: pri-12
548 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
loop x card x
Comment
• layer 1: physical layer
• layer 2: link layer
• layer 3: network layer
Pack/Rel
These layers provide a standard interface for voice and data communication. Each layer uses the services provided by the layer below, and builds on these services to perform functions for the layer above. Each layer or block can be modified without affecting the protocols in another layer.
Enter loop number for additional PRI loops using the same D-channel and the interface
ID for the additional loop numbers. Where: fnf-25
• loop = 0-159 for PRI loop number
• loop = 0-255, systems with Fibre Network
Fabric
• x = 2-15 for Interface ID or 1-126 if IFC=
D70 or CNTY = JAPN
The PRI prompt is used to assign the PRI loops controlled by the D-channel. Each loop is given an Interface ID.
The PRI loop carrying primary D-channel
(DCHI) and backup D-channel (BCHI) are assigned an Interface ID 0 and 1, respectively. The 14 remaining PRI loops that can be assigned to the D-channel are defined here and given an Interface ID of
2-15.
For Small System
Where:
• card = 1-9 for PRI card number
• card = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 with
Survivable IP
• card = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS
1000S
• x = 2-15 for Interface ID or 1-126 if IFC=
D70 or CNTY = JAPN
Precede with X to remove. This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.
sipe-25 basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 549
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
PRI2 0-159 2-15 card 2-15
0-159 0-3 xx 0-3
0-159 xx
0-255
Comment
Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence, when IFC = SL-1 and DCHL is a
PRI2 loop.
Small System Secondary PRI2 loops for nB
+ D, plus sequence, when IFC = SL-1 and
DCHL is a PRI2 loop. Where card is: 1-9
11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number
Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence, when IFC = TCNZ or CNTY =
MSIA. The D-channel is not necessarily on
IFC ID 0. This is set by service change.
Small System when IFC=TCNZ and or
CNTY=MSIA. Where xx is:
• 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number
• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S
Pack/Rel
ipra-14 basic-1
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface or PRI loop number Small System Where xx is
• 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number
• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S basic-1
PRI2 loop number, systems with Fibre
Network Fabric
Precede with X to remove.
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.
fnf-25
PRIM
PROG
0-15
NCHG
MALE
Primary PMS port. To remove port, enter X. pms-19
Progress
Send a PROGRESS signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
NCHG is the default for all interfaces except
Australian, Austrian and Japan interface.
Send an ALERT signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
euroisdn-22
550 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MCON
Comment
MALE is the default for Japan interface.
Send a CONNECT signal when a CALL
PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.
MCON the default for Australian and
Austrian interface.
Pack/Rel
PR_RTN qsig ss- 23
(NO) YES The prompt PR_RTN is printed only if the
RCAP is set to PRI or PRO.
Retain option is (is not) supported by the far end PINX.
PR_TRIGS
<CR>
DIV xx y CNG xx y CON xx y
Path Replacement Triggers are set to their default values: DIV 2 3 CNG 2 3 XCON 2 3 CTR2 2
3 2 Path Replacement attempts with a delay of 3 minutes for Diversion and Congestion and Call Transfer (triggered from secondary end) but Connected number is not a trigger.
Diversion is used to trigger Path
Replacement. Congestion is used to trigger
Path Replacement. A Connected number different from a called number is used to trigger Path Replacement.
CTR1 xx y
CTR2 xx y
Call Transfer is used to trigger Path
Replacement.
The Path Replacement Propose is triggered from the Primary End of transfer.
Call Transfer is used to trigger Path
Replacement.
The Path Replacement Propose is triggered from the Secondary End of transer.
Precede with X to remove. CTR1 and CTR2 are mutually exclusive. xx = 0 - 15, the number of Path Replacement attempts. y =
1 - 7, the delay between two Path
Replacement attempts in minutes.
qsig ss-23 qsig ss-25 qsig ss-25
PRTY xx xx xx Priority overlay programs to be stored in cache memory basic-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 551
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
Priority overlays stay in cache memory when a new overlay is loaded. Enter one or more commonly used overlay program numbers.
Priority can be set only for the number of overlays specified in the CACH. xx = the overlay number.
Precede with X to remove an overlay program number.
PSWD_COMP
(OFF) ON Turns on or off the password complexity check for the ADMIN, LAPW and PDT passwords, where: password contains a combination of at least eight alphanumeric characters, of the following type:
- lowercase alphabetic
- uppercase alphabetic
- numeric
• password does not contain the user ID or a portion of the user ID, in normal or reverse form
• password does not contain three or more letters in forward or reverse alphabetic sequence, ASCII sequence, or keyboard
(QWERTY) sequence
• password does not contain three or more consecutive characters
• password does not match the default password
Pack/Rel
basic-4.50
PTMR
PWD
PWD2
(0)-31
(NO) YES x...x
Polling Timer for PMSI
This is the polling timer, in minutes. When
PTMR = 0, polling does not occur.
Change Password options pms-19 basic -19
Password 2
Enter current second level administration password. This password is required to change existing passwords PWD1, PWD2,
LAPW passwords and to change the
Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text
Broadcast customized text string.
basic-1
552 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Acceptable Characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, ! %
$ % ^ & () _ - + = {} | : ;"’ < , > . ? /.
Length is 4-16 characters with Limited
Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.
Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).
Note:
Spaces ~ ‘ * @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.
PWD_TYPE
PWD2
PWD1
LAPW
Specifies the user type account being added to the system
Password 2
Password 1
Limited Access to Overlays Password
Pack/Rel
basic-4.50
PWnn x...x
PWTP
QCHID
(OVLY)
SBA
(YES)
Password
Length is 4-16 characters with Limited
Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.
Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z.
Where: nn = number entered in response to
LAPW prompt.
Enter the LAPW password to be used for
PWnn.
lapw-16
Note:
If the LAPW password is a Set Based
Administration (SBA) password
(PWTP=SBA), the PWnn response length is 4-16 numeric characters, where the valid characters are digits 0-9 only.
OVLY Password Access Type
SBA Password Access Type adminset-21
This rule is applicable for both encoding and decoding of Channel Identification IE
Timeslot values 17 to 31 of the PR12 loop associated with channel number 17 to 31 of the Channel Identification IE (previous behavior) qsig gf-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 553
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
NO
Comment
Timeslot values 17 to 31 of the PR12 loop associated with channel number 16 to 30 of the Channel Identification IE
RADR 0-(1)-255
RCAP
BRI
CCBI
CCBO
XCCB
CCBS
Remote Address for the data-link level
HDLC protocol
The IADR and RADR prompts must be coordinated with the far-end. If IADR is defined as 3, then RADR must be 1.
Remote Capabilities. Enter one or more values to define the capabilities of the farend.
Basic Rate Interface (when IFC = APAC,
SL1, D70, ESS4, or ESS5)
Call Completion to busy subscriber using integer value for operation coding
CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive.
Call Completion to busy subscriber using object identifier for operation coding
CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive
To remove remote capability.
CCNI
XCCN
CCNO cls-7
Pack/Rel
pri-19 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber for
QSIG and EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCBS is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package 316 is equipped.
Call Completion on no response using integer value for operation coding
CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.
To remove remote capability.
qsig ss-24
XCCN
CCNR
CPK
Call Completion on no response using object identifier for operation coding
CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.
To remove remote capability.
Call Completion to No Reply for QSIG and
EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCNR is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package
316 is equipped.
qsig ss-24
Network Call Park. CPK is allowed if:
554 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• IFC = SL1
• CPRKNET package 306 is equipped
COLP
XCOL
CTI
CTO
DV1I
DV1O
DV2I
DV2O
DV3I
Pack/Rel
Connected Line Identification Presentation
Connected Number IE Presentation is supported on Indonesian interfaces.
Default value for ESIG, ISIG, NI2,
EUROISDN and Indonesian interfaces except AUS, EIR, DUT, BEL, FRA interfaces.
to remove Connected Number IE
Presentation Default value for all APAC,
AUS, EIR, DUT, BEL and FRA interfaces.
Call Transfer Integer
CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.
Call Transfer Object
CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.
QSIG SS Call Diversion Notification remote capability. Configure sending of QSIG
Diversion Notification Information, treatment of Rerouting request and coding of operations. If coded as Object Identifier, the remote capability ends with 'O", whereas for
Integer Value, the remote capability ends with 'I'. Only one remote capability is allowed.
Add "call transfer notification" remote capability to the EuroISDN interface.
Precede with 'X' to remove capability.
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
EuroI ISDN Call Diversion basic- 23 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 qsig ss- 23 bne-25 bne-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 555
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
DV3O
Comment
Diversion information is sent to remote switch.
Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.
Precede with 'X' to remove capability.
ECTO XCTO Add call transfer notification and invocation remote capability to the EuroISDN
Use "XCTO" to remove capability
Pack/Rel
bne-25
MCID XMCI MCID = Add MCID as a new remote capability.
MQC
To remove remote capability.
MCDN QSIG Conversion as a Remote capability
MSL
MWI
NAC
Remote D-channel is on a MSDL card
Message Waiting Interfacing with DMS or with Virtual Dchannels
Network Access data. Enter XNAC to remove NAC as a remote capability. NAC is allowed if:
• the D-channel is defined on an MSDL card
(example CTYP=MSDL)
• the D-channel interface type is SL1
(IFC=SL1) etsi-ss- 23 meet-24
NCT
ND1
ND2
ND3
Network Call Trace supported
Network Name Display method 1
Network Name Display method 2
Network Name Display method 3. ND3 ensures the same level of service between the MCDN and QSIG name display services.
NDI
NDO
Name Display - Integer ID Coding
Name Display - Object ID Coding
NDS XNDS NI-2 Name Display Option.
Remove NDS Option.
qsig-24 qsig-24 qsig ss-25.4
556 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Add Path Replacement as a remote capability. Only one capability can be configured per link.
PRI
PRO
QMWI
QMWO
XQMW
The encoding method uses Integer Values.
The encoding method uses Object
Identifier.
Precede with 'x' to remove capability.
Pack/Rel
qsig ss-23
Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability. The encoding method uses
Integer Values.
Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability. The encoding method uses
Object Identifier.
Remove Message Waiting Indication (using the Integer Values encoding method) as a remote capability.
qsig ss-25.4
qsig ss-25.4
qsig ss-25.4
RLTI
RVQ
TAT
RLT Interworking over IP on the signaling server for all TAT invokes through a
CS 2x00.
Note:
RCAP TAT is also required for the RLT feature to be invoked on call modification.
It is automatically enabled.
Remote Virtual Queuing
RCAP is prompted until only <CR> is entered in response. Precede a value with X to remove.
ND1 and ND2 are used with Network Call
Party Name Display or NCPND. Both ends must have NCPND.
ND2 requires SL-100, DMS with BCS32 and later. Prompted with Remote Virtual Queuing
(ORC_RVQ) package 192.
basic-5.00
Invoke Trunk Anti-Tromboning operation using the correct variant if the far end switch supports this feature.
TAT can be input if the Trunk Anti-
Tromboning (TAT) package 293 is equipped, and one of the following is true:
• The IFC is SL1 and the CTYP used is either MSDL or a legacy card type still
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 557
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
supported for PRI and ISL (enterprise version of TAT is supported)
• The IFC is SL1 and the CTYP is DCIP, where the IP protocol is H.323 or SIP
(enterprise version of TAT is supported)
• The IFC is S100, D100, or D250 and the
CTYP used is either MSDL or a legacy card type still supported for PRI (carrier version of TAT is supported)
RCVP
UUI
XUUI
UUS1
XUSS
XRLT
XTAT
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
Remote capability where Use- to-User
Information is supported.
Remove UUI capability.
User-to-User Service 1
Decode UUS IE sent by Central Office
Send UUS IE to Central Office
Remove User-to-User Service 1 uui-3.0
bne-25
Use TAT on the signaling server.
basic-5.00
Note:
RCAP TAT is required for the TAT feature to be invoked on call modification.
Disable TAT, and disable RLT.
basic-5.00
Note:
RCAP TAT is required for the RLT feature.
Without TAT, no RLT invokes can ever be sent. RLT is disabled when TAT is disabled
Auto-recovery to primary D-channel option.
RCVP is supported on SL-1 to SL-1 connections only.
When RCVP = YES, the primary D-channel is automatically forced to be the active channel after it is brought up from a released state.
This option must be coordinated with the far end. Both sides must be either YES or NO.
If the two sides do not match, both sides default to NO. When IFC = SL-1, RCVP changes to NO.
For Backup DCH only.
pri-13
558 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
REMD
Comment
Double Density Remote Peripheral
Equipment loop(s)
0, 1, 2,...159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
G0,G1...G159
GEC loop or loops
T0,T1...T159
0-255
TVT loop or loops
Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be
TDS, CONF or MFSD.
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
REMO
0, 1, 2, ...159
G0,G1...G159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
GEC loop or loops
T0,T1...T159
Single Density Remote Peripheral
Equipment loop(s)
0-255
TVT loop or loops
Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be
TDS, CONF or MFSD
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
REMQ Quadruple density Remote Peripheral
Equipment loop(s)
0, 1, 2, ...159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
G0, 1...G159
GEC loop or loops
T0,T1...T159
TVT loop or loops
Precede loop number with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
rpe-1 fnf-25 basic-1 fnf-25 rpe-7
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 559
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
REQ CHG
END
Comment
Request: Change existing data block
Request: Exit overlay program
RLS xx
ROLR (0)-63
Pack/Rel
basic-1
Release ID of the switch at the far-end of the
D-channel.
This is the software release at the far-end. If the far-end has an incompatible release, it prevents the sending of application messages.
Shown below is the relationship between the
ISDN application, equipment and the software release ID or BCS at the far-end.
Application Far-End Minimum
RLS pri-19
Network
Ring Again
SL-1 SL-100
DMS-100/250
12 26 26
Network
ACD
SL-1 SL-100 15 29
Network Breakin and Force Disconnect
25
Network Message Service - Message
Center
SL-1 15
Network Message Service - Meridian Mail
SL-1 16
Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS-100
SL-1 DMS-100 19 36
The Release ID information is required and supported for connection to Nortel equipment only. For connections to AT&T
ESS#4 and ESS#5, set RLS = 1.
pomw-25.4
Receive Objective Loudness Rating
The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are
provided on ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values
on page 498 arie-14
560 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
The ROLR value is downloaded to Meridian
Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload. Refer to
Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182
before changing these values. Not prompted when United Kingdom (UK) package 190 is equipped.
RPEB 16-1000
RXMT 1-(5)-20
Pack/Rel
Remote Peripheral Equipment Buffers, 2.0
Mb/s RPE rpe-15
Retransmission Threshold
Enter in units of 5 per cent. RXMT is the % of retransmissions allowed in 15 minutes before out of service is enforced, or:
RXMT = (# of packets retransmitted) Ö (total
# packets sent).
basic-1
SATN l s c u
SBA_ADM_INS
0-(2)-64
SBA_USER
0-(100)-500
TN of SADM/Data Line Card associated with
IND CSL. For SL-1 telephone with CLS =
CMSA.
cls-7 l = 0-255, Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 adminset-21
Maximum Administrator and/or Installer Log
Ins allowed at one time.
adminset-21
SECU
SEMT
SEVERITY
(NO) YES
(1)-5
Maximum User Log Ins allowed at one time.
Security for Meridian Link applications
When set to NO, the host computer must specify both the TN and DN of the associate set in connect, answer and release messages.
Prompted when the Integrated Services
Digital Network Application Module Link for
Third Party Vendors (IAP3P) package 153 is equipped for ISDN/AP Third Party.
iap3p-12
Number of Status Enquiry Messages sent within 128 ms from the network side msdl-24 alarm-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 561
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
(NONE)
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
<CR>
Comment
Alarm Severity of a particular alarm entry
No rating (default status)
System operation is in jeopardy
Serious condition, the system is operational
Error condition detected, system operation not affected
Retains current value
SID
SIDE
SIZE
Pack/Rel
xxxx
(USR) NET Meridian 1 node type Slave to the controller
Network, the controlling switch
Prompted only if IFC = SL-1, ESIG or ISIG.
Opposite sides of the PBX-to-PBX interface must be set as NET or USR. The call processing software uses these labels to handle call collision.
pri-12
(0)- 65534
System ID number
The SID is used for polling an SL-1 for ACD,
CDR and traffic reports. It can also be printed and changed using LD 2.
basic-1
(50)-1500
Size of History File buffer in characters
The History File stores system messages in
Protected Data or P data and uses an SDI port address. The History File survives initialization, but is lost when SYSLOAD occurs or the length of the file is changed.
The History File cannot be created if all 16 I/
O ports are defined. Prompted if ADAN =
HIST or TRF
Word Size of Audit Trail buffer
The Size entered here must be a multiple of
50 for correct memory storage.
hist-18 lapw-16
SL1B 16-2048
SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP
SL-1 Buffers
Small System does not require SL-1B buffers. If set higher than default they only consume memory. Refer to the Memory
Calculations Appendix in the Planning and
Engineering NTPs.
basic-1
Look up the Private IP address or Public IP address of an IP phone behind NAT.
Prompted only if LIS = SUBNET.
basic-5.00
(NO) YES
562 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
SMEM (NO) YES
Comment Pack/Rel
Short Memory test
On a manual SYS load the memory is tested on one pass, if (NO), memory is tested with normal six pass test. Not prompted on
Option 81C.
smem-19
SOLR 0-(1)-4 Sidetone Objective Loudness Rating
The SOLR value is downloaded to Meridian
Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload.
Before changing these values, refer to
Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182.
arie-14
SSDT
SSRC
2
3
(1)
0
4
12 dB
7 dB
17 dB
22 dB sidetone disabled
The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value.
The default value is 1 (12 dB). The recommended North American value for all releases is 1 (12 dB). Does not apply to
M2216.
Note:
The switch will print the actual dB value in overlay 22. However it will only accept a number in the range 0-4 in overlay 17.
0-159
0-(3700)-4000
Standby Synchronization DTSL
Enter the number of the DTSL used for
Standby Synchronization. Prompted if
SYNM = 2 or 5.
Signaling Server Resource Capacity
Note:
If the entered SSRC value exceeds the
SSRC value received from the Signaling
Server, then a warning is provided to the administrator indicating that the Virtual
Trunks registration may fail due to capacity mismatch.
basic-16 sip-4.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 563
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
SSUP (NO) YES
Comment
Senior Supervisor
Device assigned used by senior supervisor/ load manager. Cannot be YES if prompt
APRT is YES.
Pack/Rel
acdc-1
STOP
(1)-2
(1)-1.5-2
Number of stop bits
Note:
This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call
Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux
Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP 1.
Large Systems. Prompted for asynchronous
ESDI ports.
Small Systems. To enter 1.5, use 1X5. STOP is not prompted for CARD 0 PORT 0 or when
TTY_TYPE = PTY.
Default number of stop bits for all three remote TTYs on an MGC is 1.
cls-19
SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY
(YES) Change customized text string by text string input. Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining
ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text
Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).
Input by text string and
IDLE_DISP_STRING is prompted.
NO Input character by character and
IDLE_DISP_CHAR nn is prompted.
basic-23
SUPPRESS
0-(5)-127 alarm-19
Alarm occurrence threshold (prior to suppressing)
Determines the number of times an alarm may occur before it is no longer output.
Entering 0 indicates that all alarm occurrences are output (no suppression)
SYNC (NO)
YES
Asynchronous mode of operation for ESDI port
Synchronous mode of operation for ESDI port csl-7
564 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
SYNM
(0)
1
2
3
4
5
Comment
Synchronization Mode
No synchronization
Main input from Digital Trunk Signaling Link or DTSL
Main input and standby input from DTSL
Main input from external clock
Main input from DTSL; standby input from external clock
Main input from external clock; standby input from DTSL
SYNM is prompted with Integrated Digital
Access (IDA) package 122.
Pack/Rel
ida-16
T1 2-(4)-20 Retransmission Timer
Range in units of 0.5 seconds, (4) = two seconds cls-7
T2 0-(10)-255 cls-7
T200
T203
T23
T3
2-(3)-40
2-(10)-40
1-(20)-31
2-(5)-255
Maximum Time allowed without a frame being exchanged.
Retransmission Timer
Entry is in units of 0.5 seconds.
Maximum Time allowed without frames being exchanged
Interface guard Timer or DCHI only
This timer checks how long the interface takes to respond. Entry is in units of 0.5
seconds.
Timer for initial link setup in units of 0.5
seconds for ESDI only.
pri-12 pri-15 pri-12 cls-7
T310
TDS
110-(120) Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the
QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state.
This range applies to PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks qsig-20
0, 2, 4...158
Tone and Digit Switch (TDS or Fast TDS service loop)
Use even-numbered loops for Tone and Digit
Switch (TDS). Precede with X to remove.
basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 565
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
1-9 11-19
21-29 31-39
41-49
Small System
Comment Pack/Rel
lse-24
TEN
TERD
TERM
0-255 xxx
ALL
<CR>
Note:
For Small System, all XTD/DTR units must be removed from the SSC card (card
0) before TDS 0 can be removed.
Tone and Digit Switch loop, Systems with
Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Tenant to be accessible by way of PWnn
All Tenants allowed
No change to previous definitions.
Precede with X to remove.
lapw-16
Double Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20
0, 1, 2,...159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
G0,G1...G159
GEC loop or loops
N0,N1,...N159
Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications
T0, T1...T159
TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket.
X0,X1,...X159
0-255
Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be
TDS, CONF or MFSD
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Single Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20
0, 1, 2, ...159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
566 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
G0,G1...G159
Comment
N0,N1,...N159
GEC loop or loops
Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications
T0, T1...T159
TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket
X0,X1,...X159
0-255
Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be
TDS, CONF or MFSD
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
TERQ
Pack/Rel
fnf-25
Quadruple Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20
0, 1, 2, ...159
Meridian 1 loop or loops
G0,G1...G159
GEC loop or loops
N0,N1,...N159
Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications
T0, T1...T159
TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket
X0,X1,...X159
Precede loop number with X to remove.
TIMR
TMDI
TITE
(NO) YES
(YES)
NO
(0)
2
Change protocol timer value
T1 transmit Equalization
0 - 200 feet
200 - 400 feet basic-1
TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK) Small
System
Other Card basic-24 basic-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 567
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
TKEY [24]
Comment Pack/Rel
Validity time for session key (in hours). Min.
value is 8 hrs, maximum is 168 hrs. Default is 24 hrs.
basic-5.00
TMRK 96, (128)
TN l s c u c u
Length of cadence increments in ms
Refer to the Flexible Tone and Digit Switch cards in the Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106. See CLN prompt in LD 56.
basic-13
Valid Terminal Number that when accessed returns a test tone
Valid Terminal Number, Small System
Prompted when DTDT = EXT.
basic-1
TODR
TOLR
0-23
(0)-63
TPO (NO)
YES
TRIGGER a...a
Time Of Daily Routines
Do not enable Traffic Period option
Enable Traffic Period option basic-1
Transmit Objective Loudness Rating
The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are
provided on ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values
on page 498
The TOLR value is downloaded to Meridian
Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload. Refer to
Transmision Parameters (553-3001-182) before changing these values.Not prompted when UK package is equipped arie-14 basic-21 alarm-19
Trigger string for alarm tables
The trigger string can be up to 10 alphanumeric characters. At least one character must be alphabetic (a-z). Plus sign
(+) can be used to indicate the "wild card" entry.
For example, BUG++++ includes all BUG system messages. The mnemonics supported for this prompt are lists at the beginning of this overlay. A value must be entered; <CR> is not accepted
568 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TRLL 1-31 1-31
Comment
Test RPE Local Loop back
Perform complete 2.0 Mb/s RPE loop testing, including local loop back, in the RPE groups as part of daily routine. Not supported for Small System. Precede with X to delete.
Pack/Rel
rpe2-15
TRNS
(NONE)
HELP
BOTH
Selects which messages are going to be translated
Help and Option 81C specific system messages are printed in English version
Help is printed in translated version and
Option 81C specific system messages in
English
Help and Option 81C specific system messages are printed in translated version mlms-20
TRSH
TSO
TTY
0-15
(NO)
YES
0-15
Threshold
Digital Trunk Interface Threshold set defined in LD 73.
pri-19 basic-21 Do not enable Trunk Seizure option
Enable Trunk Seizure option
Pre-defined MSDL-SDI terminal number
Prompted if ADAN = STA sta-19
TTY_TYPE
TTYLOG
TUBO
(SDI)
LSL
PTY
0-65534
(NO)
YES basic-22
TTY logical type for Small System.
TTY_TYPE is only prompted when adding or changing TTY devices. For a PRT device,
TTY_TYPE is fixed as SDI.
Standard TTY type (default)
Low speed Link type
Pseudo TTY type muli-19
Log buffer size
When 0 is entered, there is no log file
Regular message processing speed on AML basic-25
Double message processing speed on AML
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 569
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
TYPE
ADAN
ALARM
ATRN
CEQU
CFN
OVLY
PARM
PWD
VAS
Comment
Type of data block
All input/output devices (includes Dchannels)
Alarm filter configuration data
When TYPE = ALARM, the system automatically prints out the current alarm and exception filters Must have Alarm
Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package 243.
Aries Transmission
Common Equipment parameters
Configuration data block
Overlay area options
System Parameters
System Password and Limited Access to
Overlay Password
When entering yes, the PWD2 is prompted unless LAPW is used and Multi-User Log In is enabled.
Value Added Server
Pack/Rel
basic-19 alarm-19 basic-19 basic-19 basic-1 basic-19 basic-19 basic-19 basic-19
USER
ACD
ADM
Output message types
When ADAN = HST, users can be BUG,
MCT, MTC, SCH and TRF. Prompted when
ADAN is PRT, TTY or, HST.
For Small System: basic-20
• LSL is not a valid response for the USER prompt
• USER is not prompted if TTY_TYPE =
LSL.
When TTY_TYPE = PTY, the response to
USER must be one of the following: MTC,
BUG, SCH, FIL, TRF, MCT
Automatic Call Distribution printer for reports
APL
Administrator SBA access level to be stored in the history file. Precede with X to remove.
Auxiliary Processor Link for IVMS
570 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
BGD
Comment
Background Terminal
Mutually exclusive with ACD, APL, CDL,
CMC, CMS, HSL, and LSL.
ACD
ADM
Software error
CDR Data Link
APL
BGD
BUG
CDL
CMC
CMS
Communications Management Center
Command and Status Link
Port must be defined as a synchronous ESDI
Customer Service Changes: Automatic Set
Relocation and Attendant Administration
Software error
CDR Data Link
Communications Management Center
Command and Status Link
Port must be defined as a synchronous ESDI
Pack/Rel
adminset-21
CSC
CTY
FIL
Customer Service Changes: Automatic Set
Relocation and Attendant Administration
CDR TTY port to output CDR records
This is a special response which applies to
Alarm Filtering message output.
When a port is assigned this User type, only
Alarm Filtered messages is output. The messages listed at the TRIGGER prompt are the messages that appear for this user type.
When AF_STATUS = OFF, no system messages are output to the port with FIL type.
The output appears as shown below. The field definitions follow.
<severity> <report id> <time> <date>
<sequence number> <event> <tab>
Operator data: <data> <tab> Expert data:
<data> alarm-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 571
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
Where: severity:
• **** = Critical
• *** = Major
• ** = Minor
• blank = None report id: The system message character string (BUG1234, ERR5683, etc.) time: hh:mm:ss date: dd/mm/yy sequence number: The sequence the message appears. The range is 0-65535, and the numbers are right justified. Meridian
1 and auxiliary processor messages have separate sequence numbers.
event: This indicates the type of event that is being output: MSG (message), SET (set alarm), CLR (clear alarm).
tab: 6 character indent
Operator data: This contains additional information to help clear the fault. This field contains the additional message information
(TN, loop number, etc.) that the message contains. Up to 30 characters appear.
Expert data: This field may not always appear. It contains system expert information.
HSL
ICP
INS
ACD/D High-Speed AUX link
Intercept Computer Link
Installer SBA access level to be stored in the history file. Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
adminset-21
LSL
MCT
ACD/D Low-Speed AUX link
Small System uses LSL for Meridian Mail administration/maintenance access
Malicious Call Trace TTY port along with other users mct-20
572 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MTC
Comment
Maintenance includes AUD, BUG and ERR if enabled by prompt ERRM in PARM. Use
MTC for the system monitor or XSM.
NOO
OSN
No Overlay allowed
OSN output device
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
PMS
SCH
TRF
USR
Property Management System interface
Service Change or any data base change
Traffic
User SBA access level to be stored in the history file.
Precede with X to remove.
adminset-21
USER_NAME a...a
USR
VAS
VCNA
ISLD
PRI
SHA
SHAV
VNS
NEW
CHG
OUT
<CR>
(NO) YES basic-4.50
Name assigned to user, up to 11 characters
User. Precede any of the following with X to remove.
Integrated Services Signaling Link
Dedicated.
D-channel for ISL only, in dedicated mode, without using the PRI channel.
Primary Rate Interface. D-channel for ISDN
PRA only.
Shared mode. D-channel used for both
ISDN PRA and ISL. D-channel must be using a PRI channel.
Shared Virtual Network Services. D-channel shared between PRA, VNS and ISLD.
Virtual Network Services. D-channel used for Virtual Network Services or for ISLD.
New Value Added Server
Change Value Added Server
Remove Value Added Server
End VAS prompting sequence pri-12 cls-7
Virtual Network Services Network Call Party
Name Display available over this D-channel vns-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 573
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response
VCRD (NO) YES
Comment
Virtual Network Services Network Call
Redirection available over this D-channel
VNSC (0)-xx
VNSM
VNSP
1-300
0-32700
Pack/Rel
vns-16
Virtual Network Services Customer number associated with the D-channel.
Customer number is defined in LD 15.
Customer 0 is the default for the D-channel.
Ensure customer 0 is not actually a user of the D-channel before changing.
vns-16 vns-16 Virtual Network Services Maximum controlled by the D-channel
Virtual Network Services Private Network
Identifier (PNI) for the far-end customer vns-16
VOLR (NO) YES
VSID
VSIG
VTRO
0-127
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Handset Volume Reset
To have handset volume reset whenever the user hangs up or uses handsfree, set VOLR
= YES.
agcr-20
VAS Identifier
Identifier for the VAS providing the services, this includes IS, Data Services, Voice
Messaging, Alpha terminals.
The value entered here is associated with the value which can be entered at the ELAN prompt. By responding to VSID, you are preparing to associate a link with a Value
Added Server ID to allow message transmission.
cls-7
Virtual Network Services Network Signalling denied/allowed.
VSIG=YES equal Signalling arrangement
=ESN5
VSIG=NO equal Signalling arrangement
=STD basic-23
Trunk Route Optimization before answer available over this D-channel for VNS.
1. Advanced Network Services (NTWK) package 148 is equipped
2. Trunk Anti-Tromboning (TAT) package
293 is not equipped
3. VCRD = YES vns-21
574 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
VXCT
0, 2, 4, ... 252
Comment
Virtual XCT loop number. ‘X’ to remove existing VXCT
XCT
0, 2, 4,...158
XNUM
XSM
D0-D158
S0-S158
0-254
(1)-4
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
xct-15
Extended Conference/TDS/MFS
Loop number for NT8D17 Conference/TDS/
MFS card. Enter an even network loop number for TDS/MFS functions. The
Conference function is automatically assigned the next higher or odd loop number.
System prints: TDS n MFS n CNF n+1
This indicates that TDS and MFS functions are configured on the even loop "n" and conference function is configured on the next higher odd loop.
Precede with X to remove. Both loops must be disabled first. Since TN 0 0 0 0 cannot be used in non-multigroup systems, it is recommended that Conference/TDS/MFS card be placed in loop 0.
You may configure more than 16 conference loops; however, enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the system to lock-up.
Dealer conference loop
Spare dealer conference loop
Place in the same group as the units planned to use this loop.
XCT loop number for NT8D17 Conference/
TDS Card, Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric ohol-20 ohol-20 fnf-25
Number of retransmissions per message for
PMSI.
If XTMR = 0, this prompt does not appear.
pms-19
Extended System Monitor
This is the SDI port for the Extended System
Monitor. Prompt USER must be set to MTC
(maintenance messages) for the system xpe-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 575
LD 17: Configuration Record 1
Prompt Response Comment
monitor port. Only one port can be XSM =
YES.
XTMR (0)- 6
YALM (FDL) DG2
Pack/Rel
PMS acknowledgment time (the time measured in seconds to wait for the acknowledgment message from the PMS)
Where: 0 = no retransmission.
pms-19
Yellow Alarm Method
Prompted only if the frame format is ESF. If
YALM is not prompted, DG2 was set automatically. If YALM is prompted the response varies between countries.
The default is FDL when the frame format is
ESF. When the frame format is D2, D3, or
D4, the default is DG2.
pri-19
576 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 17: LD 18: Speed/Group Call,
Pretranslation, Special Service,
16-Button DTMF and Hotline
This overlay allows data for Speed Call, System Speed Call, Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, and Enhanced Hotline and 16-Button DTMF to be created or modified. The data can be printed using
Overlay 20.
The overlay allows the ability to add and copy multiple Speed Call lists and System Speed Call lists. The number of lists allowed by each system is subject to the system type and memory available. Refer to
Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning speed call requirements.
The Pretranslation List configuration takes place in this program. To enable the Pretranslation feature in
LD 15, the list must be configured here using the XLAT prompt.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by task:
Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records on page 578
on page 578
on page 579
Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list
on page 579
Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists
on page 580
Configure Special Service List on page 580
Move from one group or list to another on page 581
on page 581
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 577
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
on page 582
Section
Other Information:
Flexible feature code information
on page 583
Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records
Use this prompt sequence to determine if there are enough memory and disk records for new
Speed Call and Hot Line lists. Compare the output with the "MEM AVAIL" and "DISK RECS
AVAIL" values output before the REQ prompt. See also "System memory and disk space" at the beginning of this document.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
NOLS
DNSZ
SIZE
Response
COMP aaa
1-8191
4-(16)-31
1-1000
Comment
Request = COMP (Compute disk and memory required for new lists)
Type of data block, where: aaa = SCL, SSC or HTL
(Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line estimation)
Number of lists to be added
Maximum DN size (length) of digits allowed for new lists
Maximum number of DNs allowed in new lists
Configure Group Call lists
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
GRNO
GRPC
STOR
Response
aaa
GRP xx
0-63
(YES) NO xxx yyy...y
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = GRP (Group Call list)
Customer number associated with this data block
Group number for group call
Allow or deny group call control to the originator
Entry number (0-19) and the digits stored with it
Entry number (0- 5) and digits stored with it for Small
System
578 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Configure Speed Call lists
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
LSNO
TOLS
NCOS
DNSZ
SIZE
WRT
STOR
WRT
Response
aaa aaa
0-8190
0-4095
0-8190
(0)-99
4-(16)-31
1-1000
(YES) NO xxx yyy...y
(YES) NO
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block, where aaa = SCL or SSC (Speed
Call list or System Speed Call list)
List Number for Speed Call (SCL)
List Number for System Speed Call (SSC)
To List (New speed call list number)
Network Class of Service for SSC
Maximum DN size (length) for Speed Call lists
Maximum number of DNs in Speed Call list
Data is correct and can be updated in the data store
Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it
Data is correct and can be updated in the data store
Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
XLAT
- PRE
- PST
- SDA
Response
aaa
PRE xx
0-254 0-8191
0-254 8191
0-8190
0-8190
0-8190
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = Pretranslation calling group assignment
Customer number
Pretranslation list (Calling group to Speed Call list correlation)
If list number 8191 is assigned to a group then pretranslation is removed for that group
Pretranslation Speed Call List number
Post-translation Speed Call List number
Single-Digit Access Speed Call List number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 579
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
LSNO
NCOS
DNSZ
SIZE
WRT
STOR
WRT
Response
aaa
HTL xx
0-8190
0-4095
4-(16)-31
1-1000
(YES) NO xxx yyy...y
(YES) NO
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = Hot Line list
Customer number
List Number for Hotline (one for customer)
Network Class of Service for HTL
Maximum DN size (length) allowed for Hot Line list
Maximum number of DNs in Hot Line list
Data is correct and can be updated in the data store
Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it
Data is correct and can be updated in the data store
Configure Special Service List
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
SSL
SSDG
- CDPC
- TOLL
- ALRM
- TNDM
- SSUC
- NDGT
- SSDG
Response
aaa
SSL
1-15 xxxx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0) - 15
<CR>
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = Special Service list
Special Service List number
Special Service Digit or Digits
Called Party Control is enabled
Toll number
Alarm is enabled
Tandem
Special Service Unanswered Call Mark
Number of digits collected before the seizure of the outgoing CIS MFS trunk
Special Service Digit or Digits
580 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Move from one group or list to another
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
LSNO
TOLS
GRNO
TOGR
Response
MOV aaa xx xxxx
0-254 xx
0-63
Comment
Request = MOV
Group or List Type (aaa = GHT, GRP, SCL, SSC, or
SSL)
Customer number
List Number
To List
Group Number
To Group
Configure Group Hunt
GRNO
GRPC
DNSZ
SIZE
STOR
WRT
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
LSNO
CUST
PLDN
PLAT
Response
aaa
GHT
0-254 xx xxxx
1-254 0-8191
0-63
(YES) NO
4-(16)-31
1-1000 xxx yyy...y
(YES) NO
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = Group Hunt
List Number
Customer Number
Pilot DN
Post-translation calling group and list number
Group Number for group call
Group Call originator (does) does not have control
Maximum Directory Number Size (length)
Size of list
Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it
Data is correct and can be updated in the data store
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 581
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Configure ABCD data block
- C
- D
- *
- #
- B
- C
- D
- *
- #
CONT
- A
- B
- B
- C
- D
- *
- #
- RCAL
POST
- A
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TBNO
DFLT
PRED
- A aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa
Response
aaa
ABCD
1-254
1-254
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa
ADL x...x
(NO) YES aaaa
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block = ABCD (16 Button DTMF)
Table Number
Default function table number
Pre-Dial
A key assignment
B key assignment
C key assignment
D key assignment asterisk key assignment
# key assignment
Recall button assignment
Post-dial
A key assignment
B key assignment
C key assignment
D key assignment asterisk key assignment
# key assignment
Control
A key assignment
B key assignment
C key assignment
D key assignment asterisk key assignment
# key assignment
582 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Flexible feature code information
Flexible feature code information
Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions
Button
A
B
C
D
*
#
RCAL
Pred
RGAD
SNR
CFWA
SPCU
NUL
NUL
NUL
Post
RGAA
SNS
NUL
NUL
NUL
NUL
Control
CNFD
TGLD
DISD
NUL
NUL
NUL
Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics
Function
ADL x...x (maximum 31 digits)
Authorization Code
Automatic Set Relocation
Automatic Wake Up Activate
Automatic Wake Up Deactivate
Automatic Wake Up Verify
Busy Number Redial Activate
Busy Number Redial Deactivate
Busy Number Redial Toggle
Call Detail Recording Charge Account
Call Forward All Calls Activate
Call Forward All Calls Deactivate
Call Forward All Calls Verify
Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Call Forward Hunt Override
BNRD
BNRK
CDRC
CFWA
CFWD
CFWV
CFDD
CFHO
Pre-dial mode mnemonic
ADL x...x
AUTH
ASRC
AWUA
AWUD
AWUV
Post-dial mode mnemonic
ADL x...x
BNRA
BNRK
CDRC
Control mode mnemonic
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 583
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Function Pre-dial mode mnemonic
Call Park
Call Park Access CPAC
Carriage return (use default from Table 7) <CR>
Conference Diagnostics
Conference Digit 1
COND
Conference 6 Trunk Disconnect
Customer Call Forward Activate
Customer Call Forward Deactivate
Customer Call Forward Toggle
CCFA
CCFD
CCFK
DEAF Deactivate RGA/LND/SNR/CFW
Disconnect Digit 3
Electronic Lock Activate
Electronic Lock Deactivate
Group Hunt Pilot DN
Incoming Call Indicator Activate
Incoming Call Indicator Deactivate
Incoming Call Indicator Override
ELKA
ELKD
GRHP
ACAI
ICID
Incoming Call Indicator Print
Integrated Message System Access
Last Number Redial
Maintenance Access
Malicious Call Trace
NUL (leave key without an assigned function)
ICIP
IMSA
RDLN
MNTC
NUL
Override
Paging and Radio paging code
Permanent Hold
Pickup DN
Pickup Group
Pickup Ringing Number
Ring Again Activate
PAG x...x
PUDN
Post-dial mode mnemonic
CPRK
<CR>
C6DS
ICPO
RDLN
MTRC
NUL
OVRD
PAG x...x
HOLD
PUGR
PURN
RGAA
Control mode mnemonic
<CR>
CNFD
DISD
NUL
584 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Function
Ring Again Deactivate
Ring Again Verify
Room Status
Speed Call Controller
Speed Call Erase
Speed Call User
Store Number (Erase)
Store Number (Redial)
Store Number (Save)
System Speed Call User
Terminal Diagnostics
Toggle Digit 2
Trunk Answer From Any Station
Trunk Verification
User Status
User for set based administrator
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pre-dial mode mnemonic
RGAD
RGAV
RMST
SPCC
SPCE
SPCU
RDNE
RDSN
RDST
SSPU
TRMD
Post-dial mode mnemonic
SPCU
RDSN
RDST
SSPU
Control mode mnemonic
TGLD
TFAS
TRVS
USTA
USER
Alphabetical list of prompts
*
#
Prompt Response
aaaa
Comment
# key assignment. For more information, see Table 5:
Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature
on page 583.
Pack/Rel
abcd-14 aaaa
A aaaa
Asterisk key assignment. For more information, see
Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature
Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible
on page 583.
abcd-14
A key assignment. For more information, see
5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 585
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Prompt Response Comment
functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature
on page 583.
Pack/Rel
ALRM
B
(NO) YES aaaa
Alarm is enabled
B key assignment. For more information, see Table
5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature
on page 583.
basic-1 abcd-14
C
CDPC
CONT
CUST aaaa
(NO) YES Called Party Control is enabled
(NO)
YES
Control; default mnemonics are used. For more
information, see Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics
on page 583.
Modify control mode table. For more information, see
Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature
basic-1 basic-1 xx
C key assignment. For more information, see Table
5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature
on page 583.
abcd-14
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.
Prompted when REQ = NEW or CHG and LSNO =
<CR> basic-1
D
DFLT
DNSZ aaa
1-254
<CR>
4-(16)-31
D key assignment. For more information, see Table
5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature
on page 583.
abcd-14
Default function table number
Prompted if a table has been defined for the customer.
No table is to be used as the default.
basic-1
Directory Number Size
Maximum length of DN allowed for Speed Call list or
Group Hunt list. Range is 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 31.
For Speed Calling the default = 16. Numbers between
1 and 30 are rounded up to the next valid number.
Once defined DNSZ should not be changed. Instead, print out the list, remove it with REQ = OUT and optf-1
586 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
rebuild the list with the new DNSZ. Prompted when
REQ = NEW and TYPE = GHT.
GRNO 0-63
GRP 0 - 4095
GRPC
<CR>
X
(YES)
Group Number for group call
Pack/Rel
grp-20
Ringing Number Pickup Group (RNPG) using this speed call list. Repeat for all groups sharing the same list.
grp-1
To reprompt "LSNO"
To remove
LSNO
NO
0-4095
0-8190
<CR>
Group Call originator does have control
If GRPC = YES in the Group Call List, the originator has control: when the originator goes on hook, the call is terminated. If GRPC = NO and the originator goes on hook, the Group Call acts like a conference call: the call remains active until all members go on hook.
grp-20
Group Call originator does not have control
List Number for Speed Call, System Speed Call,
Group Hunting and Hotline.
System Speed Call and Hot Line lists
A Speed Call list associated with Call Pickup network wide groups.
to end
Use only when REQ = CHG and TYPE = GHT.
List numbers exceeding four digits have the left most digits truncated, and only the right most digits is accepted. A Hot Line list uses a System Speed Call list entry, only one Hot Line list is allowed per customer.
MSCL must be defined in LD 17.
optf-1
NCOS (0)-99
NDGT (0) - 15
Network Class of Service
Prompted when TYPE = SSC or HTL.
basic-17
Number of digits which can be collected before the seizure of the outgoing CIS MFS trunk.
Number of digits to be accepted from the incoming
MFS trunk.
If the outgoing call is recognized as MFS call then the trunk will not be seized until the number of the user cismfs- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 587
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Prompt Response Comment
dialed digits equals to the NDGT or EOD timer expires or the OCTO ('#') is dialed.
If the incoming MFS call is recognized then the trunk should be requested to issue the BX MFS signal to the CIS CO party until the number of the accepted from the trunk digits equals to NDGT.
Pack/Rel
NOLS 1-8191 Number of lists to be added. Prompted if REQ =
COMP
PLAT
PLDN
POST
PRE
PRED
PST
1-254 0-8191 xxxx
Post-translation calling group and list number
List number 8191 is used to remove the group from being post-translated.
Pilot DN. Prompted when LSNO = <CR>.
pldn-15 pldn-15
(NO)
YES
0-8190
Do not modify Post-dial table
Default mnemonics are used; see Table 7.
Modify Post-dial table abcd-14
(NO)
YES
0-8190
Pre-translation Speed Call List number
Precede with X to remove.
pxlt-15
Do not modify Pre-dial pre-dial function table. Default mnemonics are used. For more information, see
Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature
abcd-14
Modify the pre-dial function table. For more
information, see Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics
on page 583.
Post-translation Speed Call List number
Precede with X to remove.
pxlt-15
RCAL
REQ
ADL x...x
NUL
CHG
COMP
Recall button assignment
Autodial, where x...x is the autodial number to a maximum of 31 digits.
To leave the RCAL button without an assigned autodial number
Request
Change existing data block
Compute memory and disk requirements for new
Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line lists abcd-14 basic-19
588 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CPY xxx
END
MOV
NEW xxx
OUT
Comment
Copy speed call data. Where: xxx = 1-100.
The ability to copy multiple Speed Call and System
Speed Call lists is supported.
Exit overlay program
Move data block from one group or list to another.
Pack/Rel
MOV command can be used to renumber one group call or speed call list to another.
basic-25.4
Add new data block. Where: xxx = 1-100.
The ability to create multiple speed Call and System
Speed Call lists is supported.
Remove data block.
SDA 0-8190
SIZE 1-1000
1-96
Single-digit Access Speed Call List number
Precede with X to remove.
pxlt-15
Maximum number of DNs in Speed Call or Hot Line lists
Maximum number of DNs in Group Hunt list
Once defined, SIZE should not be changed. Instead, print out the list in LD 20, remove it with REQ = OUT and rebuild the list with the new SIZE. SIZE is not prompted for TYPE = GRP or PRE.
optf-1
SSDG
SSL
SSUC
STOR xxxx
<CR>
X
Special Service Digitone Digit or Digits (1-4 digits) opcb-14
To proceed past SSDG prompt.
Precede SSDG entry with X to remove it.
The SSDG prompt, followed by the CDPC, TOLL and
ALRM prompts, reappears after each ALRM prompt until the list contains 100 entries or a <CR> is entered for SSDG. Precede with X to remove.
Special Service List number
Precede with X to remove.
supp-14 1-15
X
(NO) YES Special Service Unanswered Call mark
If the outgoing call is recognized as SSUC (that is, if the first 1 - 4 digits outpulsed to the trunk = SSDG with
SSUC = YES), then such a call requires some specific disconnect treatment.
cist-21
Store xxx yyy ... y For TYPE = SCL, SSC, or HTL the input format is entry number and digits stored against it. Where: optf-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 589
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Prompt Response
xx yyyy
Comment
• xxx = list entry number from 000 to 999
• yyy ... y = digits stored with each list entry number xxx
For TYPE = GRP the input format is member number and member DN. Where: xx yy
• xx = member number (00-19 for 51C, 61C, and 81C or 0-5 for Small System)
• yyyy = member DN
If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped, up to seven digits are allowed; otherwise, only four digits can be entered.
For TYPE = GHT the input format is Group Hunt entry and digits stored against it. Where:
• xx = GHT entry number from 00 to 95
• yyyy = digits stored
<CR> Stop STOR prompt
For Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line the member number must conform with SIZE and the number of digits must conform to prompt DNSZ.
Digits may include "*" and "#" if the Outpulsing, asterisk and octothorpe (OPAO) package 104 is equipped.
xxx <space> <CR>
Remove entry
Pack/Rel
TBNO
TNDM
1-254 Table Number
The number of the ABCD table to be added, changed or removed abcd-14
(NO) YES Send MFC H tandem signal
Prompted when the International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131 and Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128 are equipped.
supp-14
TOGR
TOLL
0-63 To Group
New group call group number.
(NO) YES Toll number
The SSDG entry is a toll number grp-1 opcb-14
590 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TOLS 0-8190
Comment
To List
New speed call list number.
TYPE
ABCD
CPNW
GHT
GRP
HTL
PRE
SCL
SSC
Type of data block
16-Button DTMF data block
Call Pickup Network Wide data
Group Hunt data block
Group call data block
Hot Line data block
Pretranslation data block
Speed Call List or pretranslation data block
System Speed Call data block
WRT
XLAT
Pack/Rel
optf-1 basic-1
(YES) NO Write
Data is correct and can be updated in data store.
The Prompt WRT follows prompts SIZE and STOR asking you to confirm the correctness of the data just entered. If data is correct, enter "YES" or <CR>.
A response of "NO" causes the data just entered to be ignored and SCH3213 is output.
A response of "****" aborts the program. Only the last
STOR value is lost. All previous values to which WRT was "YES" or <CR> are saved.
The following information is output with the WRT prompt:
ADDS: MEM: xxxxx DISK: yy.y
Where: optf-1
• xxxxx = the amount of protected memory
• yy.y = the number of disks records required for the new Speed Call list
Check the "MEM AVAIL" and "DISK RECS AVAIL" output values before the REQ prompt. See also
"System memory and disk space" at the beginning of this document.
xxx yyyy Calling group number to translation Speed Call list number correlation. Format if International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is not equipped, where: pxlt-8
• xxx = Pretranslation group number, 0-254
• xxx = Group 0 is used for trunks.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 591
LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline
Prompt Response
xxx
Comment
• xxx = Group 1 is used for attendant consoles.
• xxx = Groups 2-254 can be used for other calling groups.
• yyyy = List number to be used for Pretranslation,
0-8191. 8191 is used to remove the group from pretranslation.
Pretranslation group number. Format if International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped, where:
<CR>
• xxx = Group 0 is used for trunks.
• xxx = Group 1 is used for attendant consoles.
• xxx = Group 2-254 can be used for other calling groups.
End the prompt group.
Pack/Rel
592 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 18: LD 19: Code Restriction
Overlay program 19 allows data for code restrictions to be created or modified.
Code Restriction is used to control the digits that can be dialed on a COT or FEX trunk route by a Toll
Denied (TLD), Conditionally Toll Denied (CTD) or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN) Class of Service telephone. See also New Flexible Code Restriction in LD 49.
Route 31 is not an exclusively private route. It can be configured as a private route in LD 16.
For small systems, Overlay program 19 is replaced by Overlay 49.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block
on page 593
CRB: Code Restriction data block
on page 594
FGDB: Feature Group D data block on page 594
ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block
Prompt Response
REQ: aaa
TYPE:
ANII
ANI
0-31
ANIT
NPA xxx
200- 999
Comment
Request
Type of data block = ANI (Automatic Number Identification)
ANI Data Block Index
Invalid ANI treatment
First 3 ANI digits in NPA format
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 593
LD 19: Code Restriction
Prompt Response
3ANI xxx
SLV3
NXX
NXX xxx yyy
SLV6
- SUB
Comment
3 Digit ANI (denied) allowed
Number of digits for screening
Range of end-office numbers xxx Number of digits for screening xxxx yyyy Range of subscriber numbers
CRB: Code Restriction data block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
NCOS
CUST
ROUT
TORT
CLR
ALOW
DENY aaa
CRB
0-99 xx
0-511
0-511
Response Comment
Request
Type of data block = CRB (Code Restriction)
NCOS value for subscribers
Customer number associated with this data block
Route number
To Route aaaa Codes (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)
200-999... 200-999 NXX, NPA codes allowed
200-999... 200-999 NXX, NPA codes denied
FGDB: Feature Group D data block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
FGNO
CIC
CCLS
PRES
OVLP
Response
aaa
FGDB
0-127
0000-9999 a...a
(YES) NO
(YES) NO
Comment
Request
Type of data block = Feature Group D
Feature Group D block number
Carrier ID
Carrier Class (a...a = IC, INC, or CONS)
Presubscription
Overlapped outpulsing by Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC)
594 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
SAC
ANII
CDAN
SHAN
PRTD
LDAC
LAAC
OPER
IITP
CPAR
INIT
ENBL
ENBS
IFTO
DGTO
MONT
Prompt
CCAN
INTR
ADFT
IIT
Response
aaa bbb xxx xxx xxx
0-31
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) ALL aaa
Comment
Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening
(aaa = NAM, NA0, INT, IN0, OPR, SAM, SAX, SA0,
CUT, or (ALL); bbb = (YES) or NO)
Service Access Codes
ANI Data Block Index
ANI Digits in CDR Records
Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays
Printout Control for Invalid II or ANI Digits
Long Distance Access Code (aaa = AC1 or AC2) aaa Local Area Access Code (aaa = AC1 or AC2)
DN nnn ... nnn RAN nnn
(NO) YES
Treatment for 0+, 0- calls
Intercept Treatment
(OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn ... nnn
Intercept Treatment for Invalid Address Format
(OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn ... nnn
Intercept Treatment for Invalid IIs xx yyyy zz
(NO) YES
Valid II, II Type, and NCOS for ANI screening bypass
Call Processing parameters
(NO) YES
1-(12)-30
1-(5)-30
2-(120)-254
128-(640)-5000
0-(256)-2048
Length of Initial String of dialed digits on outgoing calls
Long Enbloc dialing timeout
Short Enbloc dialing timeout
Inter-field FGD timeout in increments of 2 seconds
Interdigits timeout
Minimum On-Hook Time
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
3ANI (DENY)
Comment
3 Digit ANI denied
Apply invalid ANI treatment
Pack/Rel
fdg-17
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 595
LD 19: Code Restriction
Prompt Response
NCOS xx
Comment
3 Digit ANI allowed
Use this NCOS value (0-99)
Pack/Rel
ADFT (OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn . . . nnn
Intercept Treatment for Invalid Address format
ALOW 200-999 ... 200-999
NXX, NPA codes Allowed
<CR> Proceed to next prompt.
Prompted when CLR = DENY or <CR>.
ANII 0-31 ANI Data Block Index
When ANII = 0, there is no ANI screening; 1-31 is the
ANI block index number.
fgd-17 basic-1 fgd-17
ANIT fgd-17
CCAN
(OVF)
RAN xxx
DN xxxx
NCOS xx
Invalid ANI treatment
Overflow tone
RAN route (0-511)
Internal or external DN (1-16 digits)
Network Class of Service value (0-99)
IN0
OPR
SAM
SAX
SA0
CUT
(ALL) aaa (YES) Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening provided.
aaa NO Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening not provided.
NAM
NA0
INT aaa can be any of the following:
1 + (inside World Zone 1)
0 + (inside World Zone 1)* (see note below)
1 + (outside World Zone 1)
0 + (outside World Zone 1)* (see note below)
0 - calls
1 + (Embodied SAC)
1 + (External SAC)
0 + (External SAC)* (see note below)
Cut-Through
All call types (Default when REQ = NEW) fgd-17
596 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
CCLS
CDAN
CIC
CLR
IC
INC
CONS
ALOW
<CR>
Note:
aaa entries marked with the symbol * use zero; not the letter O. If the letter is entered in place of the number zero, no error appears. However, NAM and SAM is overridden.
Inter-Exchange Carrier Class
International Carrier Class
Consolidated Carrier Class fgd-17
(NO) YES ANI Digits in CDR Records fgd-17
0000-9999 Carrier ID. Response must be three or four digits.
fgd-17
DENY Denied codes.
If CLR = DENY all NPA/NXX codes are denied except those entered in response to prompt ALOW
(only ALOW is prompted).
Allowed codes.
If CLR = ALOW all NPA/NXX codes are allowed except those entered in response to prompt DENY
(only DENY is prompted).
Proceed to next prompt when REQ = CHG
When changing a CRB, if CLR = <CR> then both
ALOW and DENY are prompted.
For a new CRB, CLR must = ALOW or DENY.
basic-1
CPAR
CUST
(NO) YES Call Processing Parameters xx Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15 fgd-17 basic-1 basic-1 DENY 200-999 ... 200-999
NXX, NPA codes Denied
<CR> Proceed to next prompt
Prompted when CLR = ALOW or <CR>
DGTO 128-(640)-5000
Interdigits timeout
The maximum time between two digits within the same field, in multiples of 128 milliseconds. 5000 rounds down to 4992.
fgd-17
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 597
LD 19: Code Restriction
Prompt Response
ENBL 1-(12)-30
Comment
Long Enbloc dialing timeout
Before initial string is complete on outgoing calls.
ENBS
FGNO
IFTO
Pack/Rel
fgd-17
1-(5)-30
0-127
2-(120)-254
Short Enbloc dialing timeout
After initial string is complete on outgoing calls.
fgd-17
Feature Group D block number
The system automatically assigns FGNO numbers in sequential order when REQ = NEW.
fgd-17 fgd-17
Inter-field FGD Timeout in increments of 2 seconds
The maximum time between two fields on incoming calls (in seconds).
IIT (OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn. . .nnn
Intercept Treatment for Invalid IIs.
Where:
• OVF = Overflow tone
• RAN nnn = RAN route
• DN nnn . . . nnn = Network or local DN fgd-17
IITP xx yyyy zz Valid II, II Type, and NCOS for ANI screening bypass.
Where: xx = II in range 00-99 yyyy = one of the following II types:
• REGU = Regular
• 4A8P = 4 or 8 party
• HOTL = Hotel/Motel
• CLES = Coinless
• TST3 = Test 3
• AIOD = Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing
• COIN = Coin
• TST7 = Test 7 zz = optional NCOS number defining ANI screening bypass (00-99) fgd-17
598 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
When IITP = <CR> and REQ = NEW, the following shows the default arrangement. International codes
(12-19) are left undefined.
xx = 00, 01, 06, 07, 10, 20, 27, 95 yyyy = REGU, 4A8P, HOTL, CLES, TST3, AIOD,
COIN, ST7 zz = No is default
Pack/Rel
INIT
INTR
LAAC
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Length of Initial String
Intercept Treatment fgd-17 fgd-17 fgd-17
LDAC
AC1, AC2 Local Area Access Code
Prompted with Network Alternate Route Selection
(NARS) package 58.
AC1, AC2 Long Distance Access Code
Prompted with Network Alternate Route Selection
(NARS) package 58.
fgd-17
MONT 0-(256)-2048
Minimum On-hook Time
The minimum amount of time between acknowledgment wink and answer off-hook signal, in multiples of 128 milliseconds.
fgd-17
NCOS 0-99 NCOS value for subscribers
Reprompts current level NPA, NXX, or SUB.
fgd-17
NPA
NXX
OPER
200-999 First 3 ANI digits in NPA format. Only 3 digits are allowed, even when using 1+ dialing.
Return to REQ <CR> xxx yyy Range of end office numbers
Prompted if SLV3 = NXX. Where:
• xxx = starting or only NXX
• yyy = ending NXX (optional)
Reprompts NPA <CR>
DN nnn. . . nnn RAN nnn
Treatment for 0+, 0- calls. Where: nanp/ fgd-17 fgd-17 fgd-17
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 599
LD 19: Code Restriction
Prompt Response Comment
• DN nnn . . . nnn = 1-16 digit network or local DN
• RAN nnn = RAN route (0-511)
OVLP
PRES
PRTD
REQ
ROUT
SAC
SHAN
SLV3
Pack/Rel
(YES) NO Overlapped outpulsing by Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC)
(YES) NO Presubscription
(NO)
ALL
REJ fgd-17 fgd-17
Printout Control for Invalid II or ANI Digits
No printout
Printout for all invalid ANI and II digits
Printout all invalid II digits. Printout invalid ANI when not mapped to NCOS.
fgd-17
CHG
END
MOV
NEW
OUT
PRT
0-511
Request
Change the existing data block
Exit overlay program
Move data block to a new route
MOV command can be used to move code restriction data blocks to a new route.
Add new data block to the system
Remove the data block
Print FGD or ANI data block
Route number xxx xxx xxx . . . xxx
Service Access Codes.
Default codes: 700, 800, 900, 601.
(NO) YES Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays basic-1 basic-25.4
basic-1 fgd-17 fgd-17
NXX
NCOS xx
Number of digits for screening
6 or 10 digit screening. NXX prompt follows.
NCOS xx = 3 digit screening (0-99), all NPA map to
NCOS value, NPA is reprompted.
fgd-17
600 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
SLV6 SUB
NCOS xx
Comment
10 digit screening level, SUB prompt appears next.
Not allowed if an ending NXX level (yyy) was entered at NXX prompt.
Pack/Rel
fgd-17
6 digit screening level, reprompts NXX. All XXXX numbers under the NPA map to NCOS value (0-99)
SUB xxxx yyyy Range of subscriber numbers. Where:
• xxxx = starting or only subscriber number
• yyyy = ending subscriber number (optional) fgd-17
TORT
TYPE
0-511
ANI
CRB
FDGB
To Route
New route number
TORT is prompted when REQ = MOV.
Type of data block
ANI screening data block (for Feature Group D)
Code Restriction data Block
Feature Group D data Block basic-1 basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 601
LD 19: Code Restriction
602 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 19: LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide
Table 7: Print Reports in LDs 20, 21, and 22
on page 603 documents only those print reports that can be obtained in LDs 20, 21, and 22. In the Alphabetical list of many other Administration Overlays, you can find print options at the REQ and TYPE prompts.
To obtain a list of telephones that have particular features, refer to LD 81. Consult LD 93 to print data for
Attendant Console groups. Consult LD 95 to print information for the Call Party Name Display (CPND) data block.
Table 7: Print Reports in LDs 20, 21, and 22
Print Report
2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data
on page 610
on page 610
Application Module Link (AML) data
on page 646
Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data on page 611
Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15
on page 647
Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business on page 612
on page 662
Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data on page 611
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data on page 647
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data on page 647
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data on page 648
Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data on page 648
Communication Set (BCS) data on page 612
Call Detail Recording (CDR) data
on page 648
Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data
on page 613
on page 648
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data
on page 649
Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key
on page 649
Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital on page 613
Code Restriction (CRB) data on page 649
on page 663
LD
20
21
20
21
21
21
20
21
22
20
21
21
21
21
20
20
21
20
21
20
22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 603
LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide
Print Report
Communication Set (BCS) data on page 612
Configuration Record (CFN) data on page 663
Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data on page 649
Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems
on page 663
Customer data block (CDB) on page 650
Data access card (DAC) data on page 614
Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data on page 615
Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data on page 615
Digital Communications Set data
on page 616
Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data on page 616
on page 616
Directory number (DNB) data on page 617
Directory number (DNB) range data
on page 617
Directory number (DNB) selection on page 618
Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data on page 650
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data
on page 651
Hospitality Management (HSP) data on page 651
Hot Line List (HTL) data on page 618
Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data on page 619
Input/output device (ADAN) data on page 664
Integrated Message Service (IMA) data on page 664
Integrated Message Service (IMS) data on page 651
Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data
on page 651
Intercept Treatments (INT) data
on page 652
ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data
on page 652
on page 665
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data
on page 652
Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data on page 620
on page 653
on page 620
Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data on page 621
21
21
21
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
20
20
20
20
20
22
21
22
20
21
20
20
21
22
21
22
22
21
21
21
LD
604 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Print Report
Overlay area (OVLY) data on page 665
on page 665
Password (PWD) data on page 666
Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data
on page 666
on page 621
on page 655
Special Service List (SSL) data
on page 622
on page 622
System Limits (SLT) data on page 666
on page 666
System Patch (ISSP) data on page 667
on page 622
Tape ID (TID) data on page 667
Template (TEM) data on page 622
Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks on page 623
Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data on page 624
Test lines (TST) data on page 655
on page 655
Tone Detector (TDET) data on page 624
on page 625
on page 655
Trunk data: Specific Trunk types on page 625
Universal Extension (UEXT) data on page 626
on page 627
Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data
on page 627
on page 627
Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data on page 628
on page 667
on page 629
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
20
22
20
20
21
20
20
22
22
22
22
20
22
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
20
20
LD
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 605
LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide
606 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 20: LD 20: Print Routine 1
Overlay program 20 allows data to be printed for the following blocks:
• all hunting
• group calls
• speed calls
• template data blocks
• terminal numbers
• pre-translation
Data Access Card (NT7D16)
By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC.
If a specific TN is entered, the current settings are uploaded from the unit and printed with the database settings. This is useful if parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modify procedures.
Templates
Templates store telephone information in system memory. Telephones with the same configuration of keys and Class of Service share the same template. This makes efficient use of Protected Data Store. Template Audit (LD 1) is used to remove unused templates.
Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP)
When printing the TN block, "MARP" is output next to a DN appearance if it is the MARP TN for that DN. When printing the DN block, "MARP" is output prior to the DES if it is the MARP
TN. Refer to Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for an explanation of the
MARP feature.
The security password can be required to print telephone and TN information. The password
(SPWD) is required if the Station Security Authcode package (229) is equipped and the password is defined.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 607
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Linked Overlay programs
Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load another.
The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:
1. a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or
2. an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.
Prompts and responses
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
MODL
TBNO
TN
CDEN
CUST
BUID
MOTN
GRP
MPHI
SPWD
TEN
DN aa xx xx x...x
l s c u
1-4095
YES NO xxxx x...x
x...x
Response
a...a
a...a
xxx
1-254 l s c u
Comment
Request (REQ responses begin on )
Type of data block (Type responses begin on Type of data block)
Model number for Small System and CS 1000S (1-3 digits)
Table Number for 16-Button DTMF
Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on Terminal
Number)
Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)
Customer number
Media Gateway 1000B (MG 1000B) User ID
Main Office TN
Group number to be printed
Meridian Packet Handler Interface
Security Password
Tenant (0 or 1-511)
Directory Number
608 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
HTNO
DGRP
DMEM
FOR
KEY
CSDN
GRNO
Prompt
DATE
Response
dd mmm yyyy
Date
Comment
PAGE (NO) YES Data printed on a per-page basis
- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
Adjust Paper so that printing starts at top of sheet
Designator DES d...d
IP_PHONE_MODEL xxxxxx
KEM_RANGE
CTYP
<startKEM
>
<endKEM>
<CR>
(XDLC)
EDLC
IP Phone model as defined in LD 11
Specifies range of keys to print for the IP Phone 1200 Series
KEMs attached to an IP Phone 1220, or 1230.
<CR> = Print all IP Phone 1200 Series KEM keys.
Card type is 16 port DLC Card type is 24 port DLC
NACT
AACS
SCNO
LSNO
RNGE
(NO) YES Next Activity
NO YES
0-8190
0-8190
Application acquired set
Speed Call list Number
Speed Call or System Speed Call List Number xxxx yyyy Range of list entries to be printed, inclusive from first entry number to last entry number.
xxxx Hunt Number
INFO
TEM
EHNO
EMULATED
XTRK
0-2045
0-99
Dial Intercom Group
Dial Intercom Group (DIG) Member number a...a
Print template data for telephone type.
(NO) YES Print data for multi-line telephones x..x
0-63 aaa x...x
x...x
Print the Converged Service Directory Number
Group Call Group Number
Information for templates (aaa = FRM, USE, USS, or DEF)
Template
YES / NO Display IP Phones registered in Emulation Mode / nonaaa
External Hunt DN
Emulation Mode.
aaa = DB32, DB96 or M32S
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 609
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Alphabetical list of print reports
2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
DT2 l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Comment
2.0 Mb/s DTI output
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Customer number
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Analog set (500 and PBX) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
CUST
NUMZONE 0-1023
TEN
DATE
PRT
500
PBX xx
Response
l s c u
SD, DD, 4D, 8D
0-511 dd mmm yyyy
ACT
Comment
500/2500 type analog sets
Private branch exchange sets
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density
Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Tenant
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
PAGE
DES
(NO) YES d...d
Data printed on a per page basis
Print all units with DES "d...d'
610 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Prompt Response
d+
<CR>
Comment
Print all units starting with "d"
Disregard DES
Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data
REQ:
TYPE:
Prompt
TN
CDEN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
DES
NACT
PRT
ASTS
PBX
Response
l s c u,...
SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx xx dd mmm yyyy
(NO) YES d...d, d+, +
(NO) YES, END
Comment
Associate (AST) Sets
Private branch exchange sets
Terminal Number (Up to 6
TNs can be entered)
Card Density
Customer number
Print data from date specified
Data printed on a per page basis
Designator
Next Activity
Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
PRI2 l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Comment
ACD Priority Agents
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Customer number
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 611
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
PRT
Response
2250 l s c u
SD, DD, 4D, 8D
CUST xx
NUMZONE 0-1023
M2250 Console
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density
Customer number
Numbering zone
Comment
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
DATE
PAGE dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Communication Set (BCS) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
CUST
TEN
DATE
PAGE
DES
PRT
Response
BCS
Comment
Business Communication Sets l s c u Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx
0-511 dd mmm yyyy
ACT
Customer number
Tenant
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
(NO) YES d...d
d+
<CR>
Data printed on a per page basis
Print all units with DES "d...d'
Print all units starting with "d"
Disregard DES
612 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
PRT
Response
CPNW xx
Comment
Call Pickup Network Wide data
Customer number
Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
RAC
VAC
VDC l s c u dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Real Analog Channels
Comment
Virtual Analog Channels
Virtual Digital Channels
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Class Modem unit data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
CMOD l s c u dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Comment
CLASS modem unit
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 613
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Calling Line ID Verification data
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
PRT
Response
CLIDVER xx
SORTBY
DN
(DN) TN x...x
TN l s c u
ESA_ONLY (YES) NO
SHORT (YES) NO
Comment
Calling Line ID Verification
Customer number as defined in LD 15. (See CUST response on xx xx)
Data printed is sorted by DN or TN
Print for Directory Number. If no value is entered, the report includes all Directory Numbers.
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Print data for ESA call type only or print data for all call types.
Print data in short (80 characters) or long format.
Data access card (DAC) data
By responding R232, R422 or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, the configured parameters for each port or the entire DAC can be printed.
If a specific TN is entered, the current settings are uploaded from the unit and printed with database settings. This is useful if parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modifying procedures.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CUST
TEN
DATE
Response
PRT, LTN, LUU
DAC
R232
R422 l s c u xx
0-511 dd mmm yyyy
ACT
Comment
Print data, TN, or unit for the TN specified
Print data for whole DAC
Print data for the RS-232-C ports
Print data for the RS-422 ports
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Customer number
Tenant
Print data from the date specified
Print data from the last Activity
614 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Prompt
PAGE
DES
Response
(NO) YES d...d
d+
<CR>
Comment
Data printed on a per-page basis
Print all units with DES "d...d'
Print all units starting with "d"
Disregard DES
Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DGRP
DMEM
PRT
Response
DIG xx
0-2045
0-99
Comment
Dial Intercom Group
Customer number
Dial Intercom Group
Dial Intercom Group Member number
Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
DTD
XTD l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Comment
Dial Tone Detector data
Extended Dial Tone Detector
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Customer number
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 615
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Digital Communications Set data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DMC
PRT
Response
DCS xx l s c
Comment
Digital Communications Set
Customer Number associated with this data block
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT)
Mobility Controller Location
Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
PRT
Response
a...a
Comment
TN
CDEN
CUST l s c u
SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx
NUMZONE 0-1023
Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density
Customer number
TEN
DATE
0-511 dd mmm yyyy
ACT
Type of data block (Type responses begin on page
Alphabetical list of prompts on page 629)
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Tenant
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
PAGE (NO) YES Data printed on a per page basis
Digitone Receiver (DTR) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
PRT
Response
DTR l s c u
Digitone Receiver data
Comment
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
616 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Prompt
CDEN
DATE
PAGE
Response Comment
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Directory number (DNB) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DN
DATE
PRT
Response
DNB xx x...x
dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES PAGE
DES d...d
d+
+
<CR>
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR>
Directory number data block
Customer number
Print for Directory Number
Print data from the date specified
Print data from the last Activity
Data printed on a per-page basis
Print all units with DES "d...d'
Print all units starting with "d"
Print units with no DES assignment
Disregard DES
Comment
Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet
Directory number (DNB) range data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DN
PRT
Response
DNB xx xxxx-xxxx
Comment
Directory Number block
Customer number
Directory Number range
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 617
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Directory number (DNB) selection
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DN
DATE
PRT
Response
DNB xx xxxx,xxxx,..
dd mmm yyyy
ACT
PAGE
DES
(NO) YES d...d
d+
+
<CR>
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR>
Comment
Directory Number block
Customer number
Up to 8 DNs can be entered (separated by a comma)
Print data from the date specified
Print data from the last Activity
Data printed on a per-page basis
Print all units with DES "d...d'
Print all units starting with "d"
Print units with no DES assignment
Disregard DES
Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet
Group Call (GRP) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
GRNO
PRT
Response
GRP
0-63
Comment
Group Call
Group Call Group Number
Hot Line List (HTL) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
PRT
Response
HTL
Hot Line List
Comment
618 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Prompt
CUST
RNGE
Response
xx xxxx...xxxx
<CR>
Comment
Customer number
Range of Hot Line list entries (0-1000) to be printed for this customer
Print all entries in the Hot Line list
Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
HTNO
EHNO
PRT
Response
HNT
EHT
GHT xx x...x
x...x
Comment
Hunting
External Hunting
Group Hunting
Customer number
Hunt Directory Number
External Hunt Directory Number
IP Phone Model (ISET) data
Prompt
REQ:
Response
LTN PRT
TYPE:
TN
CUST
ISET l s c u xx
NUMZONE 0-1023
TEN
DATE
PAGE
0, 1-511 dd mmm yyyy
(NO) YES
DES d...d, d+, +
IP_PHONE_MODEL
Comment
List TN of TYPE specified Print data block for the TYPE specified
Enable filtering by IP Phone model name
Terminal Number associated with the unit
Customer number
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Tenant
Print data from date specified
Date printed on a per page basis
Designator
IP Phone model as defined in LD 11.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 619
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
MRCD
Response
xxxxxx
N/A
Comment
IP Phone model associated with the report.
Display the list of key numbers corresponding to the
USER IDs registered for Call Recording
Mobile Extension (MOBX) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
UXID
PRT
Response
MOBX
<CLID>
Comment
Print.
Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit
Calling Line ID of Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit
Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
MFC
MFE
MFR
MFVE
MFK5
MFK6
Comment
Multifrequency compelled sender/receiver
Multifrequency signaling for Socotel sender/receiver
Multifrequency receiver (for Feature group D)
Multifrequency versatile units
2/5 Spanish KD3 MF signaling
2/6 Spanish KD3 MF signaling l s c u l ch
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
DTI/PRI loop and channel s ch DTI/PRI shelf and channel
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
620 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
PRT
Response
OOSSLT
OOSMLT l s c u
Comment
Single line TNs that are Out-of-Service
Multi-line TNs that are Out-of-Service
Terminal Number associated with the unit
Power (PWR) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
PWR l s c u
Comment
Power data block
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy Print data from date specified
ACT
(NO) YES
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Pretranslation (PRE) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
PRT
Response
PRE xx
Pretranslation
Customer number
Comment
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 621
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Special Service List (SSL) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
SSL
PRT
Response
SSL
1-15
Comment
Special Service List
Special Service List number
Speed call lists (SCL) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
LSNO
RNGE
PRT
Response
SCL
0-8190
<CR> xxxx xxxx
<CR>
Comment
Regular and System Speed Call Lists
List Number for Speed Call or System Speed Call
Print for all lists
Range of Speed Call entries (0-1000) to be printed
Print all entries
Tandem Connection (TCON) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
PRT
Response
TCON
Comment
Tandem Connection for Meridian Packet Handler and
PRI connections
Template (TEM) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
PRT
Response
TEM
Templates
Comment
622 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Prompt
FOR
INFO aaa
Response
FRM
USE
TEMP
USS
DEF xxxx
<CR>
Comment
Telephone type
Print key/feature assignments template.
Print number of users of the template
Note:
Valid with the INFO prompt only when "500", "BCS",
"SL1","1210", "1220", or "1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.
Print TN using the template
Print number of templates defined and the number of templates allowed
Note:
Valid with the INFO prompt only when "500", "BCS",
"SL1","1210", "1220", or "1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.
Telephone template number.
Print all templates
Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
PRT
Response
TNB l s c u,...
Comment
Terminal Number Block
Terminal Number (Up to 6 TNs can be entered)
CDEN
CUST
SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx xx
NUMZONE 0-1023
Card Density
Customer number
MPHI YES, NO
Numbering zone
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Meridian Packet Handler Interface
SPWD
TEN
DATE
PAGE
DES xxxx
0, 1-511 dd mmm yyyy
(NO) YES d...d, d+, +
Security Password
Tenant
Print data from date specified
Date printed on a per page basis
Designator
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 623
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
NACT
AACS
ASID
SFNB
SFRB
USFB
CALB
SMCB
SMOO
MRCD
Response
(NO) YES, END Next Activity a...a
x...x
Comment
Application acquired set (a...a = (NO), AGTH, or AGT)
Application Service ID
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
Set Feature Notification Bitmap
Set Feature Route Bitmap
Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap
Call Filter Bitmap
1-17
(NO) YES
N/A
Print set message control bitmap
(Do not set) Set message optimize option
Display the list of key numbers corresponding to the
USER IDs registered for Call Recording
Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
PRT
Response
TNB l s c u-l s c u
Comment
Terminal Number Block
Terminal Number Range
Tone Detector (TDET) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
DATE
PAGE
PRT
Response
TDET l s c u dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Comment
Tone Detector data
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
624 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Trunk data: All Trunks
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
CDEN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
PRT
TRK
Response Comment
Trunk data block l s c u Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Customer number
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Trunk data: Specific Trunk types
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
DIC
DID
FEX
FGDT
IDA
ISA
MCU
MDM
PRT
Response
ADM
AWR
CAA
CAM
COT
CSA
Comment
Add-on Data Module
Automatic Wake-Up RAN/Music trunks
Common Control Switching Arrangement
CAMA trunks
Central Office trunks
Common control switching arrangement access line
Dictation trunks
Direct inward dial trunks
Foreign Exchange trunks
Feature Group D trunks
Integrated digital access trunks
Integrated services access trunks (ISDN)
Meridian Communications Unit
Modem/Data Module
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 625
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
TN
CDEN
CUST
DATE
PAGE
Response
MUS
CBCT
PAG
R232
R422
RAN
RCD
Comment
Music trunks
NI-2 CBC trunk
Paging trunks
RS-232 mode data
RS-422 mode data
Recorded announcement trunks
Recorder trunks
RDC
RLM
RLR
TIE
Real digital channel
Release Link Main trunks
Release Link Remote trunks
TIE trunks
WAT l s c u
Wide Area Telephone service trunks
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)
SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx Customer number dd mmm yyyy
ACT
(NO) YES
Print data from date specified
Print data from last activity
Data printed on a per page basis
Universal Extension (UEXT) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
TN
PRT
Response
UEXT l s c u
CUST
UXTY
UXID xx xxxx
<CLID>
Comment
Print.
Universal Extension data
Terminal Number associated with the Universal
Extension unit
Customer number
Type of Universal Extension.
Calling Line ID of Universal Extension.
626 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Unused Card (LUC) data
Prompt
REQ:
TN
LUC
Response
l s c s ch l ch
Comment
List Unused Card data blocks.
Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card)
DTI/PRI shelf and channel
DTI/PRI loop and channel
Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
DN
PRT
Response
LUDN xx xxxx-xxxx
Comment
List Unused Directory Numbers
Customer number
DN range
Unused Units (LUU) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
LUU
Response
500
SL1
2000
DTR
DSL
MCU
TRK
VGW
Comment
List Unused Units
Peripheral equipment requiring TNs:
Single line or analog sets
SL-1 sets
Digital sets and M2250 consoles
Digitone Receiver
Digital Subscriber Loop
Meridian Communications Unit
All trunks
Voice Gateway
Alphabetical list of print reports
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 627
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
TN
Response
1110 1120 1130
1140 1145 1150
1160 2001 2002
2004 2004p1
2004p2 2007
2033 2210 2211
2212 a...a
l s c u
IP Phones
Comment
Any specific trunk type (e.g., COT, DID, FEX, WAT, etc.)
Terminal Number
Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data
Prompt
REQ:
Response
LUVU
LUDU
TYPE:
TN
500
SL1
2000
DTR
DSL
MCU
TRK
1110 1120 1130
1140 1145 1150
1160 2001 2002
2004 2004p1
2004p2 2007
2033 2210 2211
2212 a...a
xx...xxxx
Comment
List Unused Voice Units
List Unused Data Units
Peripheral equipment requiring TNs:
Single line or analog sets
SL-1 sets
Digital sets and M2250 consoles
Digitone Receiver
Digital Subscriber Loop
Meridian Communications Unit
All trunks
IP Phones
Any specific trunk type (e.g., COT, DID, FEX, WAT, etc.)
Terminal Number
628 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Voice Mailbox (VMB) data
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
Response
PRT
VMB
<CR>
DN xxxx
VMB_STATE nnnn
Comment
Voice Mailbox information
Customer number automatically appears. No entry is needed.
Print for Directory Number
Print based on Voice Mailbox State
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AACS
Response
NO
YES
Comment
Application acquired set
The TN is not acquired by an application
The TN is acquired by an application
Pack/Rel
ngcc-22
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
ASID
BUID
<CR> x...x
x...x
basic-1
Adjust paper then <CR> to start printing
Start printing
Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated
The ASID is used for sending the monitor/ control messages to the application. The
ASID value is updated based on the applications's Acquire message for the TN.
Since the AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used to communicate between the Meridian
1 and the application(s), the value of the existing VSID can be used to uniquely identify the application that has acquired this device.
ASID is printed if AACS = YES.
ngcc-22
MG 1000B User ID
For CS 1000S system sbo-2
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 629
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
CALB
CDEN
CSDN
CTYP
CUST
DATE
Response
1 2 ...
Comment
Call Filter Bitmap
CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.
CALB is printed if AACS = YES.
Pack/Rel
ngcc-22 basic-7 SD
DD
4D
8D
<CR> x..x
Single Card Density
Double Card Density
Quadruple Card Density
Octal Card Density
For all card densities
Print the Converged Service Directory
Number sip-4.00
(XDLC)
EDLC xx xx dd mmm yyyy
<CR>
ACT
Card type is 16 port DLC
Card type is 24 port DLC
Note:
EDLC not supported on Small System and
CS 1000S basic-25
Customer number as defined in LD 15 Print data range from first to last customer. Not prompted when:
1. REQ = LUU or LUC
2. TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM
3. a complete TN is entered
If no value is entered, then data blocks are printed for all customers.
basic-1
Print data from date specified.
Where:
• dd = 1-31
• mmm = JAN-DEC
• yyy = year (e.g. 1993)
DATE is prompted for TN related data.
Print data and show last activity date.
Print data from last activity date.
basic-1
630 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DES
DGRP
DMC
DMEM
DN
Response
d...d
d+
+
<CR>
Comment
ODAS Station Designator
Print all units with ODAS designator. Enter a
1-6 alphanumeric character representing an
Office Data Administration System (ODAS)
Station Designator.
Print units starting with ODAS designator d
Print units with no ODAS designator assigned
Disregard ODAS designator
DES is prompted on TN related data The printing of data is subject to restrictions imposed by responses to TN and DATE.
Pack/Rel
odas-1
0-2045
<CR> l s c
Dial Intercom Group
DIG numbers per customer
Print all Dial Intercom Groups for customer
DGRP is prompted when TYPE = DIG
Digital Enhanced Cordless
Telecommunications (DECT) Mobility
Controller Location
Small System and CS 1000S format basic-1 mc32-25 c
0-99
<CR>
Dial Intercom Group (DIG) Member number
Print all DIG member numbers basic-1 xxxx xxxx
<space> x<CR> xx<CR> xxx<CR> x-<CR> x-y<CR> xx-yyy<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx-yyyy
Directory Number
If no value is entered, the report includes all
Directory Numbers.
Print data block for DN
If a space is entered after the Directory
Number the system reprompts for DN. A maximum of six DNs can be stacked and printed at one time.
All DNs starting with first digit x (X000-X999)
All DNs starting with first two digits xx (XX00-
XX99)
All DNs starting with first three digits xxx
(XXX0-XXX9)
All DNs between X000-9999
All DNs between DN X000 through Y999
All DNs between DN XX00 through YYY9
Two specific DNs. Up to a maximum of 8
DNs.
All DNs between XXXX and YYYY basic-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 631
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
EHNO
EMULATED
ESA_HLCL
ESA_INHN
ESA_APDN
ESA_ONLY
FCTB
FOR
Response
xxxx
Comment
External HUNT DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
EHNO is prompted when TYPE = EHT
Print emulated / non-emulated / all IP
Phones .
YES / NO /
<CR> x...x
YES/NO
Home Local Code for Emergency Service
Access (up to 12 digits).
Insert/Do not Insert Home National Code in front of ESA_HLCL.
Append/Do not append DN after
ESA_HLCL.
Pack/Rel
eht-10 basic-5.00
YES/NO
Print data for ESA call type only or print data for all call types.
basic-4.00
(YES) NO
500
2xxx
3xxx
SL1
I2004
I2002
I2050
Feature Control Bitmap
Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature
Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired
TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
FCTB is printed if AACS = YES
Print template information for telephone type basic-1
Print data for 500/2500 telephones.
Print data for 2000 type telephones (specify type).
Print data for 3000 type telephones (specify type)
Print data for SL-1 telephones.
Print data for IP Phone type 2004
Print data for IP Phone type 2002, CS
1000S.
basic-24 basic-25 basic-2
632 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
GRNO
GRP
HTNO
INFO
Response
1210
1220
1230
Comment
Print data for IP SoftPhone type 2050, CS
1000S
Print data for IP Phone type 1210.
Print data for IP Phone type 1220.
Print data for IP Phone type 1230.
0-63
Pack/Rel
basic-5.50
Group Call Group Number. Prompted when
TYPE = GRP
Print all group call groups.
grp-1
<CR>
1 - 4095
<CR> grp-21 x...x
Group number to be printed
All groups assigned to a speed call list are printed.
Hunt Directory Number
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Prompted when TYPE = HNT.
basic-1
FRM
USE
USS
DEF
Information for Templates
Print key/feature assignment template
Note:
Valid with the INFO prompt only when
"500", "BCS", "SL1","1210", "1220", or
"1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.
Print the number of users of the template.
Print the TN using the template.
Note:
Valid with the INFO prompt only when
"500", "BCS", "SL1","1210", "1220", or
"1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.
Print the number of templates defined and the number allowed.
basic-1
IP_PHONE_MODEL xxxxxx
IP Phone model
IP Phone model as defined in LD 11.
basic-4.50
KEM_RANGE <startKEM>
<endKEM>
Specifies range of keys to print from IP Phone
1200 Series KEMs attached to an IP Phone
1220 or 1230.
Where: basic-5.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 633
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
LSNO
MODL
MOTN
MPHI
MRCD
NACT
Response Comment
• <startKEM> = 1-4
• <endKEM> = <startKEM>+1 - 4
If no <endKEM> is specified, only the keys corresponding to the KEM identified in
<startKEM> are printed.
Pack/Rel
<CR>
0-8190 xxx
<CR> l s c u
YES NO
N/A
(NO)
YES
Note:
Only prompted when the value specified at the TYPE prompt is 1220 or 1230.
Print keys from all IP Phone 1200 Series
KEMs configured on IP Phones 1220 or
1230.
Speed Call Lists
When inputting list number for printout, non-
DN input exceeding 4 digits can be truncated.
Only the 4 right-most digits is accepted and printed basic-1
Model number for Small System (1-3 digits)
Model number for CS 1000S (1-3 digits) basic-15 basic-1
Main Office TN
Accept default when CS 1000S is the Main
Office
When Main Office is a Large System or CS
1000E
MG 1000B with MGC, the MOTN TN entered for an IP Phone is 4-field format sbo-2.0
basic-5.00
Meridian Packet Handler Interface.
Prompted when TYPE = MCU. Respond YES if using the MCU for MPH interfaces.
mph-19
Dynamic prompt in IP Phone (ISET) and
Terminal Number Block (TNB) data that displays the IP Phone key numbers associated with USER IDs that are registered with the CR and that are eligible for recording purposes (CLS=ICRA).
basic-6.00
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt odas-1
634 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PAGE
NUMZONE
REQ:
RNGE
SCNO
SFNB
Response
END
Comment
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the
Overlay.
End Overlay program
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
END
LTN
LUC
LUDU
LUU
LUVU
PRT
Pack/Rel
Data printed on a per-page basis
Prompted only on TN related data
Numbering zone basic-1 zbd-6.00
Request
Exit overlay program
List TN of TYPE specified
Print Unused Card data blocks of TYPE specified
List Unused Data Units
Print Unused Units of TYPE specified
List Unused Voice Units
Print data block for the TYPE specified.
The following is a list of valid responses. For further information, consult the appropriate
Overlay program.
LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC DISI
DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS DSXP
ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN ENLS ENLU
ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU LBSY LDIS LIDL
LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT SUPL TRK XNTT
XPCT XPEC
LD 10 or 11: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT basic-1 xxxx yyyy
<CR>
0-253
0-8190
<CR>
1 2 ...
Range of list entries to be printed, inclusive from first entry number to last entry number.
Print All members of a specified SCL or SSC list.
optf-1
Speed Call list Number
Speed Call list Number
Print all lists. Prompted when TYPE = SCL optf-1
Set Feature Notification Bitmap
SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN
(login), SFN (logout), ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A ngcc-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 635
LD 20: Print Routine 1
TEN
Prompt
SFRB
SHORT
SORTBY
SPWD
TBNO
TEM
TEMP
Response Comment
numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
SFNB is printed if AACS = YES.
1 2 ...
Pack/Rel
Set Feature Route Bitmap
SFRB is used for messages such as: SFR
(login), SFR (logout), ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFR messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
SFRB is printed if AACS = YES.
ngcc-22
(YES) NO
(DN), TN xxxx
Print data in short (80 characters) or long format.
The output/report is sorted based on this flag.
If the response is DN, the overlay prompts the user to enter the DN and the output is sorted by the DN.
If the response is TN, the overlay prompts the user to enter the TN and the output is sorted by the TN.
basic-4.00
Security Password.
This prompt appears when:
1. the Station Specific Authcode package (229) is equipped.
2. the security password is defined in
LDs 10 and 11.
ssau-19
1-254 xxxxxxx
<CR> xxxx
<CR>
0
Table Number for 16-Button DTMF
Prompted when TYPE = ABCD
Template number
Print data for all templates.
Prompted when TYPE = TEM
Telephone template number.
Enter <CR> to print all templates.
Tenant
Shared customer resource stations supp-10 basic-1 basic-1 tens-7
636 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
TN
Prompt Response
1-511
<CR>
Comment
Tenant Service stations
Print data blocks for all tenants.
Pack/Rel
loop l s l s c l s c u s l ch card c 0 0 u c u
Terminal Number
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop.
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop and shelf
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf and card
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf, card and unit.
Print data of the specified TYPE for this shelf loop and channel (format for Digital Trunk and
Primary Rate Interfaces).
Print data of the specified TYPE for this card
(Small System and CS 1000S).
For Small System and CS 1000S
Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and unit (Small System and CS 1000S).
c ch n. . . n<space>
Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and channel (digital trunks only) (Small
System and CS 1000S).
<CR> l s c u, l s c u List of TNs (up to 6) l s c u, sl ch A TN and a trunk shelf loop/channel can be entered on the same line l s c, l s c
System prompts for TN. A maximum of six
TNs can be stacked and printed at one time.
Print data for all TNs of the specified TYPE.
l s, ls c u
All units within the specified starting and ending cards
All units, including the specified starting shelf and ending TN l s c u All TNs starting with the specified TN and ending with the last TN
Not prompted when TYPE = SCL, HNT, DIG,
TEM, or GRP basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 637
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
TYPE:
Response Comment
For MG 1000B with MGC, the TN entered for an IP Phone is 4-field format
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
loop, l s l c u, l s c u, l ch l = (0-255) systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Type of data block
500 500 M 500/2500 telephone Small System and CS
1000S Model
1110 1120
1130 1140
1145 1150
1160
2000 I2001
I2002 I2004
2003
2004p1
2004p2
IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120 IP Phone 1130
IP Phone 1140 IP Phone 1145 IP Phone 1150
IP Phone 1160
M2000 type digital telephones IP Phone 2001
IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 2003 Digital telephone
IP Phone 2004 Phase 1
IP Phone 2004 Phase 2
I2050 IP SoftPhone 2050
2006 2006 M M2006 Digital telephone Small System and
CS 1000S Model
2007 IP Phone 2007
2008 2008 M M2008 Digital telephone Small System and
CS 1000S Model
2033
2016
IP Phone 2033
M2016 Digital telephone
IP Phone 2210 IP Phone 2211 IP Phone 2212 2210 2211
2212
2216
2216 M
2250
M2216 Digital telephone (ACD terminal)
Small System and CS 1000S Model
M2250 Console
2317 2317 M M2317 Digital telephone Small System and
CS 1000S Model
2616 2616 M M2616 Digital telephone Small System and
CS 1000S Model
3000 3000 M M3000 Digital Touchphone Small System and
CS 1000S Model
4020 M4020 Model basic-1
638 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ABCD
ADM
ADM M
ARIE
ASTS
ATVN
AWR
AWR M
BCS
CAA
CAA M
CAM
CAM M
CLIDVER
COT COT M
CPNW
16-Button DTMF
Comment
Add-on Data Module Data port interfacing with a data line card
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Aries (M2006, M2008, M2016S, M2216 and
M2616) sets and Meridian Communications
Unit (MCU) data blocks
Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets
Autovon trunks
Automatic Wake Up RAN/Music trunk
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Business Communication Set
Common Control Switching Arrangement
(CCSA) Automatic Number Identification
(ANI) trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
CAMA trunk data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Calling Line ID Verification
Central Office Trunk (PSTN) data block Small
System and CS 1000S Model Call Pickup
Network Wide data
CSA
CSA M
DAC
DCS
Common Control Switching Arrangement access line
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Data Access Card
Digital Communications Set
DIC DIC M Dictation trunk data block Small System and
CS 1000S Model
DID DID M Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block Small
System and CS 1000S Model
DIG
DNB
DSL
Dial Intercom Group
Directory Number Block
Digital Subscriber Loop (S/T or U I/F for ISDN
BRI)
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
mc32-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 639
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt Response
DT2
DTD
DTR
2.0 Mb/s DTI output only
Dial Tone Detector
Digitone Receiver
Comment
EHT External Hunting
FEX FEX M Foreign Exchange trunk Small System and
CS 1000S Model
FGDT
GHT
GRP
HNT
HTL
I2004
IDA ISA
IPAV
ISET
LUDN
MCU
MDM
Feature Group D Trunk
Group Hunt
Group call
Hunting
Hot Line
IP Phone 2004
Integrated Digital Access Integrated Services
Access trunk (ISDN)
IP for AutoVon
IP Phone model name
List Unused Directory Numbers.
MDM M
MFC
MFE
MFK5
MFK6
MFR
Meridian Communications Unit
Modem/Data Module. Data port interfacing with QPC60 500/2500 type card
Small System and CS 1000S Model
Multifrequency Compelled sender/receiver data block
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel sender/ receiver
2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
Multifrequency Receiver (for Feature Group
D)
MFVE Print Multifrequency Versatile units
MUS MUS M Music trunk Small System and CS 1000S
Model
OOSMLT
OOSSLT
Out-of-Service Multi-Line Terminal
Out-of-Service Single Line Terminal
Pack/Rel
basic-25 basic-5.00
basic-4.50
kd3-20 kd3-20 xpe-20 xpe-20
640 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
PAG PAG M Paging trunk Small System and CS 1000S
Model
PBX
PRE
PBX sets
Pretranslation
PRI2
PWR
R232
ACD Priority Agents
Power data block
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-232 Data mode data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model R232 M
R422
R422 M
NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in
RS-422 mode data block
Small System and CS 1000S Model
RAC Real Analog Channel
RAN RAN M Recorded Announcement trunk Small
System and CS 1000S Model
RCD RDC Recorder trunk Real Digital Channel
RLM RLM M Release Link Main trunk Small System and
CS 1000S Model
RLR RLR M Release Link Remote trunk Small System and CS 1000S Model
SCL Regular and System Speed Call Lists
SSL
TCON
Special Service List
Tandem Connection for MPH and PRI connections
TDET
TEM
TIE TIE M
TNB
TRK
VAC
VDC
VGW
VMB
Tone Detector
Template
TIE trunk Small System and CS 1000S Model
Terminal Number
Trunk data block
Virtual Analog Channel
Virtual Digital Channel
Voice Gateway
Voice Mailbox information
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 641
LD 20: Print Routine 1
Prompt
USFB
UXID
UXTY
VMB_STATE
XTRK
Response Comment
WAT WAT M Wide Area Telephone Service trunk Small
System and CS 1000S Model
XTD
1210 1220
1230
Pack/Rel
Extended Dial Tone Detector and Digitone
Receiver
IP Phone 1210 IP Phone 1220 IP Phone 1230 basic-5.50
UEXT
MOBX
<CR>
Universal Extension.
Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit.
Print all mobx-5.50
mobx-5.50
1 2 ...
<CLID> xxxx
Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter
Bitmap
USFB applies to messages such as:
Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,
Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore,
Ready, Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway
Return, Reserved, Unreserved, ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding message set is enabled.
USFB is printed if AACS = YES.
ngcc-22 mobx-5.50
Calling Line ID of Universal Extension unit.
Where <CLID> = the DN of the Universal
Extension unit.
Type of Universal Extension.
Where xxxx = type of Universal Extension.
• MOBX = Mobile Extension Line
• TLSV = Telephony Services
• FMCL = Fixed Mobile Convergence Line
(reserved for future use)
• SIPN = Nortel SIP Line
• SIP3 = Third Party SIP Line mobx-5.50
vmba-19 nnnn aaa
Print based on Voice Mailbox State
Where aaa = basic-5.00
642 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response Comment
• DB32 (32 port DSP Daughterboard)
• DB96 (96 port DSP Daughterboard)
• M32S (32 channel secure media card)
• VTRK (Virtual Trunk)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 643
LD 20: Print Routine 1
644 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 21: LD 21: Print Routine 2
Overlay program 21 allows data to be printed for the following:
• customer data blocks
• code restriction data blocks
• route data blocks
• trunks within a route
• ATM routes
• ATM schedules
• CAS keys
• associated TN
Set Relocation data
This prints the sets which have "relocated out", but have not "relocated back in". With Automatic
Set Relocation, the set's serial number, NT code, color code, and release are also printed.
Input Processing
Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:
• a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt, or
• an abbreviated response, the system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 645
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
REQ aaa
TYPE
CUST a...a
xx
SIZE
RNGE
HOUR
OPR
0-4000 aa ... aa
Comment
Request (aaa = END, LCS, LRT, LTM, or PRT)
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE)
Customer number associated with this data block
CLID table entry size
CLID entry or entries to be printed
0-23 All routes tested by ATM for this hour
(NO) YES Outpulsing Route
ROUT
ACOD
AACR
ASID
SFNB
USFB
CALB
TKTP
0-511 x...x
(NO) YES x...x
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
aaa
Route number
Access Code for route
The route (is not)/is acquired by the application
Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated
Set Feature Notification Bitmap
Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap
Call Filter Bitmap
Trunk Type. aaa = ATVN
Alphabetical list of print reports
Application Module Link (AML) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE AML
CUST xx
Application Module Link
Customer number
Comment
646 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of print reports
Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15
Comment Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ATT
CUST xx
Attendant consoles
Customer number
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data
Prompt Response
REQ
TYPE
CUST
CIS_ANI
PRT
ANI
Comment
Automatic Number Identification xx Customer number
(NO) YES Print (do not print) CIS ANI
R_RANGE xx yy
CACC (NO) YES
ANI entries for set to be printed
CAC Conversion Table Option
- MFC_ENT_R 0
(0)-31 CAC Conversion Table (MFC CAC into CIS CAC)
- CIS_ENT_R 0
(0)-31 CAC Conversion Table (CIS CAC into MFC CAC)
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
ATM xx
0-511
Comment
ATM routes
Customer number
Route number to be printed
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 647
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE SCH
CUST
HOUR xx
0-23
<CR>
Comment
ATM schedules
Customer number
Print all routes tested by ATM for this hour
Print routes tested for all hours
Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE AWU
CUST xx
Automatic Wake Up
Customer number
Comment
Call Detail Recording (CDR) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CDR
CUST xx
CDR and Charge Account
Comment
Customer number
Call Redirection (RDR) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE RDR
CUST xx
Call Redirection options
Customer number
Comment
648 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CAS
CUST xx
Comment
Centralized Attendant Service
Customer number
Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CASK
CUST xx
Comment
Centralized Attendant Service key
Customer number
Code Restriction (CRB) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CRB
CUST
ROUT
ACOD xx
0-511 xxxx
Comment
Code Restriction data
Customer number
Route number to be printed
Access Code
Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CCS
CUST xx
Comment
Controlled Class of Service
Customer number
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Alphabetical list of print reports
April 2011 649
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Customer data block (CDB)
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CDB
Customer data block
CUST xx
Comment
Note:
If you need information regarding System Passwords, print
PWD_DATA field by itself. PWD_data do not be provided by printing CDB.
Customer number
Features and options (FTR) data
-
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
FTR xx
TBL
ZBD
DIALPLAN
(0)-31
Features and Options
Customer number
Tone Table Number
(NO) YES Zone Based Dialing xxx
Comment
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
The type of on-net dial plan (public or private) in use for the ZBD feature.
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE FCR
CUST xx
Comment
New Flexible Code restrictions
Customer number
650 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE FFC
CUST xx
Flexible Feature Code
Customer number
Comment
Hospitality Management (HSP) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE HSP
CUST xx
Comment
Hospitality Management options
Customer number
Integrated Message Service (IMS) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE IMS
CUST xx
Comment
Integrated Message Service
Customer number
Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ICP
CUST xx
Comment
Intercept computer options
Customer number
Alphabetical list of print reports
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 651
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Intercept Treatments (INT) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE INT
CUST xx
Comment
Intercept treatment options
Customer number
ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ISLL
Comment
ISDN Signaling Link trunk TN
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
LDN xx
Comment
Departmental Listed Directory Numbers
Customer number
Multi-Party Operations (MPO) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
MPO xx
Multi-party options
Customer number
Comment
652 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Networking (NET) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE NET
CUST xx
Comment
ISDN and ESN networking options
Customer number
Night Service (NIT) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE NIT
CUST xx
Night Service
Customer number
Comment
Off Hook Alarm Security (OAS) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE OAS
CUST xx
Off-Hook Alarm Security
Customer number
Comment
Password (PWD) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PWD
CUST
PWD2 xx xxxx
Comment
Customer Related Passwords
Customer number
Level 2 Password
Alphabetical list of print reports
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 653
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PPM
CUST xx
Periodic Pulse Metering
Customer number
Comment
Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ROA
CUST xx
Comment
Recorded Overflow Announcement options
Customer number
Route Data Block (RDB)
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE RDB
CUST
ROUT
ACOD
MBXR xx
0-511
<CR> xxxx
- SIND
<yes>,<no
>
<yes>,<no
>
Route Data Block
Customer number
Route number to be printed
Print data for all routes
Route access code
Mobile Extension route.
Comment
Send Indicator for Mobile Extension route.
654 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Set Relocation (SRDT) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE SRDT
Comment
Recent Set Relocation activity
Test lines (TST) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
TST xx
Test lines
Customer number
Comment
Timers (TIM) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
TIM xx
Timer options
Customer number
Comment
Trunk Members (LTM) data
Prompt Response
REQ LTM
CUST
ROUT
ACOD xx
0-511 xxxx
Comment
List Trunk members
Customer number
Route number to be printed
Route Access Code
Alphabetical list of print reports
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 655
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AACR
ACOD
ARDN
ASID
CALB
ZBD
CRID
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
The route is not acquired by the application
The route is acquired by the application x...x
<CR>
Pack/Rel
ngcc-22
Access Code for route
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Print data for all route access codes
This prompt appears when ROUT = <CR> basic-1
(NO)
YES
RPO x...x
1 2 ...
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Allow last Re-Directing Number, where:
(NO) is Treatment for originally called number.
YES is Treatment for last redirecting number.
RPO is Treatment for last redirecting number if
OCN is Public.
basic-4.50
Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated
ASID is used for sending route status messages.
The ASID value is updated based on the application's Acquire message for the route.
Since the AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used to communicate between the Meridian 1 and other applications, the VSID value might be used to uniquely identify the application which has acquired that device.
ngcc-22
Call Filter Bitmap
CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.
CALB is printed if AACR = YES.
ngcc-22
Print status of Zone Based Dialing feature.
Print data of CDR record for SIP.
zbd-6.00
sip-4.00
656 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CUST
Response
xx xx
<CR>
Comment
Customer number
Print data range from first to last customer
Not prompted when:
• REQ = LUU or LUC
• TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM
• a complete TN is entered
Print data blocks for all customers
DAPC
(DAPA)
DAPD
DIALPLAN aaa
Dial Access Prefix on Console
Display Access Prefix Allowed
Display Access Prefix Denied
Pack/Rel
basic-1 isdn-24
The type of on-net dial plan (public or private) in use for the ZBD feature.
Where:
• PUB = public on-net dial plan
E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone
• PRV = private on-net dial plan
7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone zbd-6.00
FTR_DATA (NO) YES
HOUR 0-23
<CR>
MBXR
Change Features and options
All routes tested by ATM for this hour
Print routes tested by ATM for all hours
<yes>,<no> Mobile Extension route, where:
• <yes> = "yes" is printed if route is configured as MBXR in LD 16.
• <no> = "no" is printed if route is not configured as MBXR in LD 16.
mobx-5.50
PCA (NO) YES Personal Call Assistant, where:
OFF = Turns PCA off at the customer level
ON = Turns PCA on at the customer level
Note:
Configuration of the PCA is preserved and enabled regardless of whether or not the feature is enabled.
pca-3.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 657
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Prompt
PCID
OPR
REQ
RNGE
ROUT
SFNB
SIZE
TKTP
TPDN
Response
H323
SIP
Comment
Print Protocol ID for the route.
Print Protocol ID for the SIP route.
(NO) YES Outpulsing Route
This prompt appears when OPOA is equipped.
Prompted on TN related data
END
LCS
LRT
LTM
PRT aa ... aa
Request
Exit overlay program
List Configured Customers
For CS 1000S
List configured Routes associated with a customer
For CS 1000S
Print trunk route by TN and member number
Print data block for the TYPE specified.
0-511
<CR> basic-1 basic-2 basic-2
CLID entry to be printed
You may print one CLID entry or several CLID entries. If you want to print several CLID entries, separate each entry with a comma. Each CLID entry must be between 0 and the number entered for the prompt SIZE in LD 15.
isdn-22
Route number
Print data for all routes
This prompt appears when TYPE = CRB or RDB basic-1
1 2 ...
Pack/Rel
basic-2 basic-4.00
- - aaa yyyy
Set Feature Notification Bitmap
SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN (login),
SFN (logout), ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
SFNB is printed if AACR = YES.
ngcc-22
CLID table entry size.
The SIZE prompt and the SIZE value print out automatically after the CUST prompt.
isdn-22
Trunk Type. aaa = ATVN
Target PCA DN, where: basic-5.00
pca-3.0
658 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TYPE
Response Comment
yyyy = the primary DN
TPDN is prompted only if PCA is set to ON.
If there is no DN configured against the HOT P key in LD 11, this value is used to extend the call using the PCA feature.
Enter X to remove. However, if there is at least one PCA with no target DN configured in LD 11, then this operation does not succeed.
Pack/Rel
Type of data block
AML_DATA Application Module Link
ANI_DATA Automatic Number Identification numbers
ATM Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) data block
AWU_DATA Enable Automatic Wake-up
CASK Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) key data block
CAS_DATA Centralized Attendant Service
CCS_DATA Controlled Class of Service options
CDB Customer Data Block basic-1
Note:
If you need information regarding System
Passwords, print PWD_DATA field by itself.
PWD_data do not be provided by printing
CDB.
CDR_DATA Call Detail Recording
CLID
CRB
Calling Line Identification entry data
Code Restriction data block
FCR_DATA New Flexible Feature code options
FFC_DATA Flexible Feature Codes
FTR_DATA Feature
HSP_DATA Hospitality
ICP_DATA Intercept Positions and interrogation sets.
Prompted when REQ = PRT
IMS_DATA Integrated Messaging System
INT_DATA Alarm ring for Internal calls
ISLL IASL ISDN Signaling Link data block. This prompt appears when REQ = PRT.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 659
LD 21: Print Routine 2
Prompt
USFB
VTRK
Response Comment
LDN_DATA Listed Directory Number
MON_DATA Print Monitor data
MPO_DATA Multi-party options
NET_DATA ISDN and ESN networking options
NIT_DATA Night Service options
NPID Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit table
OAS_DATA Off-Hook Alarm Security options
PPM_DATA Periodic Pulse Metering options
PWD_DATA Print the system Passwords
RDB Route Data Block
A printout of a route with the Night Key for DID
Digit Manipulation (NKDM) active shows * opposite the value for DCNO or NDNO.
RDR_DATA Call Redirection
ROA_DATA Recorded Overflow Announcement
SCH Schedule data block for ATM
SDP
SRDT
Secure data password
Set Relocation Data block
TIM Timer options
TIM_DATA System Speed Call
TST_DATA Loop Test trunk data
1 2 ...
Pack/Rel
Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap
USFB applies to messages such as: ngcc-22
Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,
Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore,
Ready, Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway
Return, Reserved, Unreserved, ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding message set is enabled.
USFB is printed if AACR = YES.
YES NO Virtual Trunk basic-5.00
660 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 22: LD 22: Print Routine 3
Overlay program 22 allows data to be printed for the following:
• Configuration Record
• DN to TN Matrix
• System Password number
• System Loop Limits
• software version
• tape ID
• issue number
• equipped feature packages
• System License parameters
When printing the DN block, "MARP" is output prior to the DES if it is the MARP TN. Refer to Features
and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for an explanation of the MARP feature.
Audit trail for Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW)
You must be logged in with the PWD1 or PWD2 password to print the Audit Trail. Printing of the Audit Trail deletes the Audit Trail information and resets the buffer.
Packages equipped
This prompt sequence prints the equipped software packages. The packages are printed in numerical order by package number, accompanied by the mnemonic. In addition, you can get the status of an individual package.
Issue and release
If the system has a "patch", then a "+" is printed next to the issue number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 661
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE:
PWD2
CUST
DN
DATE
Response
a...a
a...a
xxxx
Comment
Request (a..a = END, IPWD, ISS, ISSP, PRT, PWD,
ROM, SLL, SLT, or TLD)
Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE)
Password 2 xx xxxx dd mmm yyy ACT
Customer number associated with this data block
Print for Directory Number
(NO) YES
Date
Data printed on a per-page basis PAGE
- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR>
DES
NACT
- VHST d...d
(NO) YES aaa
Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet.
Designator
Next Activity
View History File (aaa = (%ON) or %OFF)
Audit trail (AUDT) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE AUDT
Comment
Audit trail. Must be logged in with the PWD1 or PWD2 password. Printing of the Audit trail deletes the Audit trail information and resets the buffer.
662 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Common Equipment (CEQU) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CEQU
Common Equipment data
Comment
Configuration Record (CFN) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CFN
Configuration record
Comment
Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems
Comment Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE CINV
Core Inventory list
History File (VHST) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
VHST
VHST
(%ON)
View the History File
Turn ON display features
Comment
%OFF Turn OFF display features
BFIND aaa Search backward in the History File
BFIND
DOWN
BOT
Repeats the previous backward search
Moves to the top of the file
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 663
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Prompt Response
DOWN
Comment
Move forward 6 lines in the History File
FIND aaaa Search Forward in the history file
FIND Repeats the previous forward search
HELP
HST
List valid responses
View the system history file
NEXT BOT Moves to the end of the file
NEXT x Move forward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between
PREV TOP Moves to the top of the file
PREV x Move backward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between
TRF View the system traffic log file
TTYLOG n View the log file for TTY port n
UP TOP
UP
Moves to the top of the file
Move backward 6 lines in the history file
Input/output device (ADAN) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ADAN
All I/O devices
Comment
Integrated Message Service (IMA) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE
CUST
IMA xx
IMS Message Attendant
Customer number
Comment
664 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Issue and Release (ISS)
Prompt Response
REQ ISS
Comment
Print System Type, System Generic, Issue and Release.
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all
IPMGs configured on the system.
Meridian Modular Telephone (ATRN) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE ATRN
Comment
Meridian Modular Telephone transmission parameters
Overlay area (OVLY) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE OVLY
Overlay area information
Comment
Package (PKG) information
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PKG
PKG xxx
Comment
Software Packages
Check equipped/restricted status of package number xxx
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 665
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Password (PWD) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PWD
PWD2 xxxx
Print System Passwords
Level 2 Password
Comment
Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PSWV
Comment
Peripheral Software Versions downloaded to: NT8D01
Controller cards, NT8D04 Network cards and NT8D018
Network/Digitone Receiver cards.
System Limits (SLT) data
Prompt Response
REQ SLT
Comment
Print System Type, System Generic and System Limits.
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all
IPMGs configured on the system.
System Loop Limit (SLL) data
Prompt Response
REQ SLL Print System Loop Limits
Comment
666 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
System Parameters (PARM) data
Prompt Response
REQ PRT
TYPE PARM
System Parameters
Comment
System Patch (ISSP) data
Prompt Response
REQ ISSP
Comment
Print System Type, System Generic, Patch and Plug-in information.
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all
IPMGs configured on the system.
Tape ID (TID) data
Prompt Response
REQ TID Print Tape ID
Comment
Value Added Server (VAS) data
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
PRT
VAS
Comment
Print Value Added Server data
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 667
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR> Start printing
CUST xx-xx
<CR>
Comment Pack/Rel
basic-1
Customer number
Print data range from first to last customer. Not prompted when: basic-1
1. REQ = LUU or LUC
2. TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM
3. a complete TN is entered
Print data blocks for all customers
DATE dd mmm yyyy Print data from date specified.
Where:
• dd = 1-31
• mmm = JAN-DEC
• yyy = year e.g. 1993
<CR>
ACT
DATE is prompted for TN related data
Print data and show last activity date
Print data from last activity date basic-1
DES
DN d...d
d+
+
<CR>
Designator
DES is prompted on TN related data The printing of data is subject to restrictions imposed by responses to TN and DATE.
Print all units with ODAS designator dddddd
Print units starting with ODAS designator d
Print units with no ODAS designator assigned
Disregard ODAS designator odas-1 basic-19 xxxx
<CR> xxxx <space>
Directory Number
Print data block for DN
Print data blocks for all DN
If a space is entered after the Directory
Number the system reprompts for DN. A
668 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NACT
PAGE
Response
x<CR> xx<CR> xxx<CR> x-<CR> x-y<CR> xx-yyy<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx-yyyy
(NO)
YES
END
(NO) YES
Comment
maximum of six DNs can be stacked and printed at one time.
All DNs starting with first digit x (X000-X999)
All DNs starting with first two digits xx (XX00-
XX99)
All DNs starting with first three digits xxx
(XXX0-XXX9)
All DNs between X000-9999
All DNs between DN X000 through Y999
All DNs between DN XX00 through YYY9
Two specific DNs. Up to a maximum of 8
DNs.
All DNs between XXXX and YYYY
Pack/Rel
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.
End Overlay program odas-1
Data printed on a per-page basis
Prompted only on TN related data basic-1
PWD2
REQ x...x
<CR>
END
IPWD
ISS
ISSP
Enter second level administration password
(Password 2) to print information relating to all passwords.
basic-1
To print only the information regarding the
Limited Access to Overlay password used to login.
PWD2 is prompted when REQ = PWD or
TYPE = PWD.
Request
Exit overlay program
Insecure or Expired Password
Print System Type, System Generic, Issue and
Release.
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.
Print System Type, System Generic, Patch and Plug-in information.
basic-1 basic-4.50
basic-5.50
basic-5.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 669
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Prompt
PRT
PWD
SLL
SLT
Response Comment
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.
Print data block for TYPE specified
Print the system Passwords
Pack/Rel
Print System Loop Limits
Print System Type, System Generic and
System Limits : Licenset (License parameters and keywords).
For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.
basic-5.50
SSRC
TN
TID
Note:
If a License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that
License is not printed. This does not apply to the license for TNs.
Print the Tape ID. (S/W Cart ID and Site ID for
Small System).
0-(3700) Signaling Server Resource Capacity sip-4.00
loop l s l s c
Terminal Number
TN is not prompted when TYPE = SCL, HNT,
DIG, TEM, or GRP.
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop.
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop and shelf
Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf and card l s c u Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf, card and unit.
l s c u, l s c u List of TNs (up to 6) l s c u, sl ch l s c, l s c
A TN and a trunk shelf loop/channel can be entered on the same line
All units within the specified starting and ending cards l s, ls c u All units, including the specified starting shelf and ending TN basic-1
670 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TYPE
Response
l s c u s l ch
Comment
All TNs starting with the specified TN and ending with the last TN
Print data of the specified TYPE for this shelf loop and channel (format for Digital Trunk and
Primary Rate Interfaces).
Print data for all TNs of the specified TYPE.
<CR> card c 0 0 u c u
Print data of the specified TYPE for this card
(Small System).
For Small System
Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and unit (Small System).
c ch Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and channel (digital trunks only) (Small
System).
n. . . n<space> System prompts for TN. A maximum of six
TNs can be stacked and printed at one time.
ADAN
ADAN AML
ADAN DCH
ADAN FDK
ADAN HST
ADAN PRT
ADAN TTY
ADM
ADM M
AHST
APL
ATRN
AUDT
CARD
Pack/Rel
Type of data block
All I/O devices
Application Modules
D-channel and backup D-channels
Floppy Disk units
History Files
System Ports
System Terminals
Add-on Data Module
Data port interfacing with a data line card
Small System and CS 1000S Model
All History File
Auxiliary Processor Links
Print Meridian Modular Telephone
Transmission parameters
Audit Trail buffer
Only system Administrators are allowed to print the Audit Trail. They must first respond to
PWD2 in LD 17 to define the password.
Card data block (used for Automatic Set
Relocation) basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 671
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Prompt Response
CEQU
CFN
CHID
CINV
DCP
DSDN
GHT
GRP
IMA
IPWD
IADN
OVLY
PARM
PHST
PKG
PKG xxx
PLUGIN
PSWV
Common Equipment
Comment
Configuration record data block
Channel ID for ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)
Core Inventory list (CP PIV data)
Directed Call Pickup
Data Services Directory Number or PTE IS
Group Hunt
Group call
IMS Message Attendant
Print account type and status: EXPIRED or
INSECURE
Individual Attendant Directory Number
Print Overlay area information
System Parameters
Previous History File All History File records
Because last request
Packages equipped.
Check equipped/restricted status of package number xxx.
Print details of all enabled plug-ins.
Peripheral Software Version(s) downloaded to:
• NT8D01 Controller cards
• NT8D04 Network cards
• NT8D018 Network/Digitone Receiver cards
Pack/Rel
basic-4.50
basic-4.50
basic-5.50
PWD
REF
RLM
Note:
The version of peripheral software example
PSWV VERSION is not printed here for option 11C. It is printed along with other
Small System specific data in LD 143.
Print the system Passwords.
System prints the PWD block to the user with the new PSWD_COMP prompt and setting.
basic-4.50
Loop Reference trunk data
Release Link Main trunk.
672 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
VHST
Response
RLM M
RLR
RLR M
SCI
SFA
SFD
SLL
VAS
VHST
Comment
Release Link Main trunk - Small System and
CS 1000S Model.
Release Link Remote trunk.
Release Link Remote trunk - Small System and CS 1000S Model.
Station Category Indication data block
Second level Forwarding Allowed
Second level Forwarding Denied.
System Loop Limits.
Value Added Server data
View History File
Pack/Rel
vns-21
(%ON)
% OFF
View the History File
Turn ON display features
Turn OFF display features
This command is used to enable or disable the following three display features: hist-19
• brackets to surround the current index
([])
• percent symbol (%) preceding each
History File line
• relative location within the History File
(in percentage)
VHST accepts abbreviated responses.
BFIND aaaa Search backward in the History File
This command can be used to search backward, starting at the current index location, for the string "aaaa." If necessary, the file wraps until it returns to the same location.
The text string can be up to 12 characters.
Special characters like space, slash (/), and colon (:) are accepted. Leading or trailing spaces are ignored unless enclosed in double quotes. For example, the spaces denoted here are ignored: <SP><SP>INI<SP>. The spaces in this string, however, are included in the search: "<SP><SP>INI<SP>".
When the string is found, the system displays the current index location. Five text lines are shown, with the middle line containing the
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 673
LD 22: Print Routine 3
Prompt Response
BFIND Repeats the previous backward search
DOWN BOT Moves to the top of the file
DOWN
Comment
sought string. The VHST prompt is redisplayed to allow more command use. If the string is not found, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
FIND aaaa
Move forward 6 lines in the History File
This command can be used to move forward in the History File, toward the end. If x exceeds the end of the file, the end is shown.
When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
Search Forward in the History File
This command can be used to search forward, starting at the current index location, for the string "aaaa." If necessary, the file wraps until it returns to the same location.
The text string can be up to 12 characters.
Special characters like space, slash (/), and colon (:) are accepted. Leading or trailing spaces are ignored unless enclosed in double quotes.
For example, the spaces denoted here are ignored: <SP><SP>INI<SP>. The spaces in this string, however, are included in the search: "<SP><SP>INI<SP>".
When the string is found, the system displays the current index location. Five text line are shown, with the middle line containing the sought string. The VHST prompt is redisplayed to allow more command use. If the string is not found, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
Repeats the previous forward search FIND
HELP
NEXT BOT
NEXT x
List valid responses
Moves to the end of the file
Move forward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between.
This command can be used to view lines forward, toward the end of the file. The lines between the current index location, and the new one (x lines down) are displayed.
If you enter only NEXT, the default of 20 lines is used for the move. When the move is
Pack/Rel
674 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
PREV TOP
PREV x
TRF
TTYLOG n
UP TOP
UP
Comment
complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
Moves to the top of the file
Move backward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between
This command can be used to view lines backward, toward the top of the file. The lines between the current index location, and the new one (x lines up) are displayed.
If you enter only PREV, the default of 20 lines is used for the move. When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
View the system traffic log file
View the log file for TTY port n
Moves to the top of the file
Move backward 6 lines in the History File
This command can be used to move backward in the History File, toward the top. If x exceeds the top of the file, the top is shown. When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 675
LD 22: Print Routine 3
676 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 23: LD 23: Automatic Call
Distribution, Management
Reports, Message Center
Overlay program 23 allows Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) data, schedules for management reports and Message Center data to be created, modified, or printed.
ACD groups are also used for Meridian Mail and various server applications. When this overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header. Refer to the introduction of this document for details.
License also provides a header to indicate system configuration limits. For LD 23, the header appears as follows:
ACD DNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx
To prevent Virtual Agent information from appearing on ACD-D reports, do not make changes to Virtual
Agents. If a change to a Virtual Agent is required, out the agent and rebuild it with REQ = NEW.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
Prompts and responses by data block on page 681
ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue Assignment prompts)
on page 682
CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer Controlled Routing)
on page 682
NACD: Network ACD data block on page 684
OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table on page 684
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 677
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
- - VSID
- - APL
- - UMG
- - RAN
- - UMT
AST
DSAC
- PRIM
- VSID
ICP
- ICPS
CUST
ACDN
CALP
ICDD
MWC
- IMS
- - CMS
- - IMA
- - IVMS
- - PCMM
- - DNIS
- - VSID
- - EES
- - APL
- - UST
- ICPR
MAXP
Response
aaa a...a
0-127
0-15
(NO) YES
0-511
2-(6)-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-127
(NO) YES aaa xx x...x
(POS) TER
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-127
(NO) YES
0-15
(NO) YES
0-<NIPN> xxx
Comment
Request
Type of data block (a...a = ACD, ADS, CDN, NACD, or SCB)
Customer number associated with this data block
ACD Directory Number
Calling party identification sent in PCI message
In Calls key Disconnect Deny
Message Waiting Center
Integrated Messaging Service
Command and Status link
Integrated Messaging Allowed
Integrated Voice Messaging System
Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail
Dialed Number Identification Service
Value Added Server ID
End-to-End Signaling
Auxiliary Processor Link number
User Status update
VAS ID of VAS providing VMS
Auxiliary Processor Link number
User-to-User Messaging
RAN route number
Update Message Time
Associated set
Data Services Access Code
Primary DSAC
Value Added Server ID
Intercept Computer Printer
Intercept Computer Printer Search (aaa = (CIR) or
COM)
Intercept Computer Printer
Maximum Positions
678 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
SDNB
BSCW
ISAP
ASID
SRRT
- SRT
NRRT
- NRT
FROA
NCFW
FNCF
CWTT
AACQ
- VSID
ALOG
RGAI
ACAA
FRRT
- FRT
HMSB
ACPQ
FORC
- FCFT
- FADT
- FADR
RTQT
RTQO
SPCP
OBTN
RAO
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
16-31 or (00)
(NO) YES
0-127
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-511
0-2044
0-511
0-2044
0-127
(0)-2044
(NO) YES x...x
(NO) YES
(0)-40-63
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(2)-30
(0)-15
(0)-14
(0)-50
(NRD) MSB
(NO) YES aaa aaa
Comment
Secondary DN Blocking
Block Secondary DN Calls on Walkaway
Integrated Services Application Protocol
Application service identity from which the acquired message originated
Application Acquired Queue
Value Added Server ID
Automatic Log In
Ring Again for Internal calls
ACD Agent while IDN on-hold Allowed
First RAN route number for ACD
First RAN Time
Second RAN route number for ACD
Second RAN Time
Night RAN Route
Night RAN Time
First RAN On Arrival
Night Call Forward
Force Night Call Forward to busy ACD DN
Call Waiting Threshold Time
Hold Make Set Busy (allowed) denied
Answer Call Priority Queue
Force
Flexible Call Force Timer
Force Answer Delay Time
Force Answer Delay timer for Ringback
Return to Queue Timer after no answer in number of ringing cycles
Return to Queue Option
Separate Post Call Processing
Observation Tone (aaa = (NO), AGT, or ALL)
Restricted Agent Observe (aaa = (NO), YES, or FULL)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 679
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
DAL
RPRT
RAGT
DURT
RSND
FCTH
TOFT
HPQ
- OCN
OVDN
IFDN
- BUSY
- AENI
OVBU
Prompt
HSID
CWTH
NCWL
- CWLF
- CWLW
BYTH
OVTH
EMRT
MURT
RTPC
STIO
TSFT
HOML
RDNA
ACNT
NRAC
- NDFL
0-511
0-511
(NO) YES
0, 1, 2, ...15
0-(20)-510
(NO) YES
(NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES xxxx
Response
0-15
0-(1)-2047
(NO) YES
(0)-2047
(0)-2047
(0)-204
0-(2047)
Comment
Host ID
Calls Waiting Threshold
New Call Waiting Lamp options
Call Waiting Lamp Flash threshold
Call Waiting Lamp Wink (fast flash) threshold
Busy Threshold
Overflow Threshold
2-1800
(NO) YES
(NO) YES x...x x...x x...x
Timed Overflow Threshold in seconds
High Priority Queue
Oldest Call in Network
Overflow Directory Number(s) x...x
Interflow Directory Number aaa bbb ccc ddd Busy treatment
(NO) YES Automatically Enable Interflow aaa bbb ccc ddd Overflow Busy
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
2-(4)-30
15-(30)-45
(4)-16
10-(20)-100
Emergency Route
Music Route
Real Time Processing
Status Input/Output devices
Telephone Service Factor Threshold in seconds
Headset Or MSB key Log Out
Restricted DN Access
Account
Enable Not Ready Activity Codes
Not Ready Default code Must be equipped with ACD-
D or NGCC package
Data Agent Log In with the MSB key allowed
Management reporting and status display
Reserve Agent
Duration Timer in minutes
Resend timer
Flow Control Threshold
680 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by data block
Prompt
CRQS
DNRT
CCBA
IVR
- ALOG
- TRDN
CWNT
CWNC
Response
0-(100)-255
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES xxxx l s c u
NO YES
Comment
Call Request Queue Size
Delay Night RAN Treatment
Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent
Interactive Voice Response queue
Provide Automatic Login for agents
Treatment DN for IVR queue
Call Waiting Notification TN
Call Waiting Notification TN control
Prompts and responses by data block
ACD or SCB: Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-D) or Schedule data block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
CPRD
SHR
EHR
DOW
RFRQ
SFRQ
ROPT
PRIO
PAGE
Response
aaa aaa
Comment
Request
Type of data block = ACD or SCB (Automatic Call
Distribution or Schedule data block for ACD management reports) xx Customer number associated with this data block dd mm dd mm Collection Period
0-23
0-23
Start Hour
Hour of day that data reporting ends
1-7
0-7 x
1-4
0-15
(NO) YES
Days of Week for data collection
Frequency that Reports are to be generated
Status display update Frequency (1 or 2)
Report Options
Printer(s) for Output
Start at the top of a new page for each report
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 681
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
AID
Prompt
- IDLB
- IDUB
- LOG
SRPT
TOT4
Response
(NO) YES
(1)-9999
IDLB-(9999)
(0)-999
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Agent ID mode
Agent ID Lower Boundary
Agent ID Upper Boundary
Maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time
Short Report option for report 4 (Agent position)
Totals on report 4
ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue
Assignment prompts)
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
AID
- IDLB
- IDUB
- MQA
- - MQAS
- - MQAP
- - MQCF
- - - MCFD
Response
aaa
ADS xx
(NO) YES
(1)-9999
IDLB-(9999)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-3
Comment
Request
Type of data block = ADS (Auxiliary Data System)
Customer number associated with this data block
Agent ID mode
Agent ID Lower Boundary
Agent ID Upper Boundary
Multiple Queue Assignment
Select a Supervisor ID during login
Select Priorities during login
Automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login
The MQA Call Forwarding Digits attached to the Agent
IDs
CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer
Controlled Routing)
Caution: Corruption results if a CDN is not configured in this overlay before that CDN is associated with or represented in an association table script in the CCR module.
682 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by data block
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
CDN
DFDN
NAME
CMB
CEIL
CLRO
OVFL
CDSQ
FRRT
- FRT
SRRT
- SRT
FROA
MURT
TDNS
RPRT
CNTL
VSID
HSID
CWTH
BYTH
OVTH
STIO
TSFT
ACNT
UUI
Response
aaa
CDN xx x...x
(NO) YES
0-511
0-2044
0-511
0-2044
(NO) YES
0-511 x...x
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(2047)
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-127
0-15
0-(1)-2047
(0)-2047
0-(2047)
0, 1, 2, ... 15
0-(20)-510 xxxx
(NO) YES
Comment
Request
Type of data block = CDN (Control DN)
Customer number associated with this data block
Control DN. The CDN cannot be configured as a mailbox DN.
Deny or allow Converged Desktop Service queue
First RAN route number for ACD
First RAN Time
Second RAN Route number for ACD
Second RAN Time
First RAN On Arrival
Music Route number
Local Default ACD DN
Display CDN name for redirected calls
Deny or Allow redirection to Control DN mailbox
CDN Ceiling value
Calling Line Restriction Override for CDN
Force Overflow Tone to the call when the ceiling threshold has been exceeded
Is DNIS number an original Called Party
Management reporting and status display
Control DN is in control
Value Added Server ID
Host ID
Calls Waiting Threshold
Busy Threshold
Overflow Threshold
Status Input/Output devices
Telephone Service Factor Threshold in seconds
Account
Use- to-User Information
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 683
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
NACD: Network ACD data block
Network ACD provides ACD capabilities over an Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN).
An NACD system distributes ACD activities between several sites. Connected by ISDN voice and data services, different sites can be physically or geographically separated within the network.
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ACDN
TABL
- OUTS
- TRGT
Response
aaa
NACD xx xxxx
(a) s xxxx xxxx xxxx tttt
Comment
Request
Type of data block = NACD (Network ACD)
Customer number associated with this data block
ACD Directory Number
Day, Night or Source Table (a = Day or Night, s =
Source Table)
Routing Table entries to be removed
Target ACD DN and the timer in seconds
OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table
Prompt
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
ADPD
Response
aaa
OBVP xx xx..xx yy..yy
Comment
Request
Observe Password table
Customer number associated with this data block
Supervisor login ID followed by supervisor Observe password (separated by a space)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
AACQ
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Application Acquired Queue
The ACD DN is not acquired by the application
The ACD DN is acquired by the application
Pack/Rel
nxcc-22
684 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ABR
ACAA
ACDN
ACNT
ACPQ
ADPD
AENI
AID
ALOG
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment Pack/Rel
ACD Busy Routing
The agent is not presented with ACD calls when busy with an IDN call.
The agent is presented with ACD calls when busy with an IDN call.
basic-7.00
(NO)
YES
Allow ACD calls to an agent on an Individual DN
(IDN) Call On Hold.
The agent cannot place an IDN Call On Hold, and return to the idle queue.
The agent can put an active IDN Call On Hold and press the in-calls to return to the idle agent queue.
bacd-18 x...x
x...x
ACD Directory Number
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 acda-1
Account (Default activity code)
Maximum 4 digits (0 through 9). The # and * are not allowed. Prompted if the ADS data block is built, and CNTL = YES.
acdc-13
(NO) YES Answer Call Priority Queue
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 must be equipped.
supp-15 oas-3.0
xx..xx yy..yy
Supervisor login ID followed by supervisor
Observe password (separated by a space).
(NO) YES Automatically Enable Interflow
Prompted when IFDN is defined.
acdb-12
(NO)
YES
(NO) YES
Customer operates in Position ID mode.
Customer operates in Agent ID mode.
acdc-2
Provide Automatic Log In for agents on this
DN.
Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. ALOG applies only to Command and Status Link (CMS) and Data Service Access Codes (DSAC).
Prompted if IMS or ISAP = YES.
csl-8
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 685
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
APL
ASID
AST
BSCW
BUSY
BYTH
Response
0-15
Comment
Auxiliary Processor Link number
Prompted if IMA = YES. The APL is defined in
LD 17.
Pack/Rel
lnk-2
16-31 or (00) Application service identity from which the acquired message originated
(NO) YES nxcc-22
Associated set
The Associate Set assignments are performed in LD 10 and LD 11 for each ACD telephone.
iap3p-13
(NO) YES Block Calls to the Secondary DN on Walkaway
The caller to the source DN hears busy tone.
bacd-13 aaa bbb ccc ddd
Interflow Busy Treatment for different originators
Prompted if IFDN is defined. The possible options are: acdb-12
• BSY = caller hears busy tone
• SRC = caller is re-linked to source queue
Enter BSY or SRC for each of the four different originators:
• aaa = Stations
• bbb = Attendants
• ccc = CO, FEX and WATS trunks
• ddd = all other trunk types
Defaults if the IFDN is an ACD DN, internal or external DN are:
BSY BSY SRC BSY (3rd entry cannot be changed)
Default if the IFDN is an attendant console:
BSY SRC SRC BSY (only the 4th entry can be changed)
(0)-2047 Busy Threshold at which the Calls Waiting lamp flashes and this queue ceases to accept overflowed calls.
acdb-1
686 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CALB
CALP
CCBA
Response Comment
When BYTH = 0, overflow calls are not accepted by this target queue unless an agent is available.
To delete existing entry, precede entry with X.
Pack/Rel
1 2 ...
Call Filter Bitmap
CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.
CALB is printed if AACR = YES.
nxcc-22
(POS) TER Calling party identification sent in PCI message, where: basic-4.00
• POS - Sends the POSID+DNIS in the called party DN field in the PCI message.
• TER - Sends the terminating DN in the called
Party DN field in the PCI message.
(NO)
YES
CDN
CDSQ
CEIL
CLRO x...x
(NO) YES
0-(2047)
(NO) YES
Collect Call Blocking Denied
Collect Call Blocking Allowed
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is required.
Control DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
The CDN cannot beconfigured as a mailbox
DN.
Deny or allow Converged Desktop Service queue ccb-21 ear-17 sip-4.00
CDN Ceiling value
CEIL limits the number of unanswered calls a
CDN can have at its default ACD DN at a time.
New calls receive a busy signal when the ceiling is reached (CO trunks do not receive busy).
ear-17
Calling Line Restriction Override for CDN
If CLRO=YES, then Calling Line ID is displayed even if the Calling Line Restriction Feature is activated on the originating end.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 687
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
CMB
Response
(NO) YES
Comment Pack/Rel
Deny or Allow redirection to Control DN Mailbox, where: basic-4.50
• CMB = (NO), For SCCS routed calls, the voice mail would be left against the agent's mailbox.
• CMB = Yes, For SCCS routed calls, the voice mail would be left against the SCCS aquired
CDN's mailbox.
CMS
CNTL
CPRD
CRQS
CUST
CWLF
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Command and Status link
If this ACD DN is to use the CSL, enter YES. Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications csl-8
Control DN is in control.
When CNTL = NO, CDN calls are sent to the
Default ACD DN (DFDN).
ear-17 sm sd em ed Collection Period: Month and day data collection is to start and end. Where: acdc-2
• sm = start month (1-12)
• sd = start day of month(1-31)
• em = end month (1-12)
• ed = end day of month(1-31)
0-(100)-255 Call Request Queue Size
It is recommended that CRQS be approximately
20% higher than the number of trunks available for networking. If the customer selects the OCN option, set this value at 5% over trunking capacity. This avoids reserving agents for calls on the network when trunking facilities are unavailable. Flow Control (FCTH) is typically set at 25% of the call request queue size.
The CRQS must be defined for each ACD DN in the network. CRQS must be greater than FCTH.
CRQS = 0 closes the queue.
nacd-15 xx bacd-1
(0)-2047
Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15.
Call Waiting Lamp Flash threshold
Prompted if NCWL = YES. CWLF must be greater than or equal to CWTH acdb-15
688 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CWLW
CWNC
CWTH
Response
(0)-2047
Comment Pack/Rel
Call Waiting Lamp Wink (fast flash) threshold acdb-15
Prompted if NCWL = YES. CWLW must be greater than or equal to CWLF
NO
YES
I s c u
Alert rings for all calls
Alert rings for only priority calls
CWNC appears when a TN has been entered for
CWNT. There is no default.
m911-19
Call Waiting Notification TN m911-19 l = (0-255) Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
0-(1)-2047
CWTT
DAL
DFDN
DNIS
DNRT
0
X
(0)-40-63
(NO) YES x...x
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Calls Waiting Threshold: The number of Calls
Waiting in queue that triggers the "calls waiting" indication.
acdb-1
To disable
To delete existing entry.
ACD Call Waiting Threshold Time (in 1 second intervals) acnt-15
Data Agent Log In with the MSB key allowed
The data agent must be defined with a DTA
Class of Service in LD 11. DAL is not prompted when IVMS or DSAC are set to "YES".
Prompted if TYPE = SCB or ADS.
acdc-14
Local default ACD DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Calls to the CDN are directed to this ACD DN.
RAN and Music, if provided, are as defined for the CDN. Any other ACD treatment, such as
Night, is applied as if the caller directly dialed the
ACD DN.
ear-17 dnis-12 Dialed Number Identification Service
Send (do not send) ACD/DNIS information across the link. Not prompted for Virtual
Agents.
Delay Night RAN Treatment nacd-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 689
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
DOW
DSAC
DURT
EES
EHR
EMRT
FADR
Response Comment
When DNRT = YES for an ACD DN there is a delay in routing calls to the night RAN. The call is delayed until the call has reached the end of the Night table and there are no outstanding call requests for the call.
Prompted if a NACD Night table and a RAN route have been defined.
Pack/Rel
1-7
(NO)
YES
15-(30)-45
Days of Week for data collection
Where: 1 = Sunday and 7 = Saturday acdc-2
ACD DN is not an IS/Data Service Access Code csl-8
ACD DN is an IS/Data Service Access Code
Prompted when MWC = NO
Duration Timer (in minutes)
DURT indicates how long a Target node honors a call request from the Source node. If the timer expires, the call is removed from the call request queue. If this timer is too large, the network call request queues may become overcrowded. If the timer is too small, waiting customers can be cut off from receiving services.
This timer must be defined only for Target queues.
nacd-15
YES
(NO)
0-23
0-511
IVMS uses End-to-End Signaling to send tone.
ims-2
IVMS (does not use) End-to-End Signaling to send tone.
Prompted when IMA = YES.
Hour of day that data reporting ends
Emergency Recorder Trunk Route.
The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining EMRT. Enter X to remove.
acdc-2 acdb-1
(0)-14 Force Answer Delay timer for Ringback
Cadence
Enter delay time, in increments of two seconds, before call is connected to an agent. This delay timer ensures that a caller, during forced answer, receives at least one ringback cadence before being connected to an agent.
supp-14
690 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FADT
FCFT
FCTH
FNCF
FORC
FROA
FRRT
FRT
Response
(0)-15
Comment
Force Answer Delay Time
Enter Delay time, in increments of one second, between calls when Call Forcing is enabled. This delay timer offers an agent a few seconds break before having to answer the next call.
Pack/Rel
supp-14
0-(2)-30
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Flexible Call Force Timer (the time in seconds before Flexible Call Force is enforced) acdb-16
10-(20)-100 Flow Control Threshold to allow additional calls into the call request queue
The Flow Control option opens and closes the
ACD DN for network calls. Once the number of
Call Requests received over the network meets the call request queue size defined in LD 23, the queue is shut down (INACTIVE) for network calls. For the queue to open for network calls, the pending queue request size must drop to a value equal to the flow calls control.
For example, a call request queue size of 50 with a flow control of 10 allows the queue to become inactive after 50 call requests are pending. After
10 calls or 10 Call Requests have been answered or removed, leaving 40 remaining in queue, the queue reopens.
nacd-15
Force Night Call Forward to busy ACD DN bacd-15
Force
Calls are forced to arrive in answered state.
When FORC = Yes, the call arrives on Key 0 (incalls key) in an answered state. Headsets are recommended for this option.
acdb-1
(NO) YES
0-511
0-2044
First RAN On Arrival (the 1st RAN to be given to incoming calls immediately; FRT time ignored)
If FROA = NO, the call is forced to wait FRT time.
Recorded Announcement is only given if an idle agent is not found.
acda-1 acda-1 First RAN Route number for ACD
The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining FRRT. Enter X to remove.
First RAN Time (the time in seconds allowed before unanswered incoming ACD calls are connected to the first RAN) acda-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 691
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
HMSB
HOML
HPQ
HSID
ICDD
Response Comment
Prompted if FRRT is defined. If a value is not entered FRT defaults to blank and there is no connection to the RAN.
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
Agent cannot activate Make Set Busy if an ACD call is on-hold
Agent can activate Make Set Busy if ACD call is on-hold basic-9
(NO)
YES
(NO)
YES
0-15
(NO) YES
Handset Removal or Make Set Busy key (MSB key) log out.
The HOML option allows an agent to log out by removing the headset or going on hook without using the Make Set Busy (MSB) key. Logout while on Agent Reserve causes a cancellation message.
Log out with only the Make Set Busy key
Log out with either handset removal or Make Set
Busy key activation
HOML is prompted if an Auxiliary Data System
(ADS) or Schedule Block (SCB) exists.
bacd-1
High Priority Queue (preference given to High
Priority trunk calls)
Calls from the source queue's high priority trunks are presented after another queue's Timed
Overflow queue (TOFQ) calls.
Calls from the source queue's high priority trunks are presented before another queue's Timed
Overflow queue (TOFQ) calls.
In an NACD environment, HPQ must be denied to receive the OCN prompt. (HPQ = No) tof-10
VAS ID for the Host Application Module Link.
When the CCR and ML applications are both running, this HSID is the VSID assigned to the
AML for Meridian LInk in LD 17. The VSID prompt in this CDN configuration matches the
VSID for the CCR AML port configured in LD
17.
ccr-17
In Calls key Disconnect Deny. Pressing the In
Calls key while active on an ACD call disconnects the call.
acd-40
692 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ICP
ICPR
ICPS
IDLB
IDUB
IFDN
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Intercept Computer Printer (ACD MC used for
Intercept Printer)
0-<NIPN>
Intercept Computer Printer
Printer number (for ICPS = COM); NIPN is defined in LD 15
Pack/Rel
icp-14 icp-14
Intercept Computer Printer Search (when more than one console is used)
Circular search
One Common printer for ACD group icp-14
(CIR)
COM
(1)-9999
IDLB-(9999) Agent ID Upper Boundary
This prompt is used with the IDLB prompt to determine the maximum number of agents allowed by the system. The number must be within the parameters set by the IDLB and IDUB prompts.
Prompted if TYPE = ADS or SCB and AID = YES acdc-19 x...x
Agent ID Lower Boundary
This prompt is used with the IDUB prompt to determine the maximum number of agents allowed by the system. The number must be within the parameters set by the IDLB and IDUB prompts.
Prompted if TYPE = ADS or SCB and AID = YES acdc-19
X
Interflow Directory Number
The Interflow Directory Number serves as the
DN to which calls interflow. IFDN can be up to 31 digits.
Calls diverted to the IFDN are not routed by
NACD. Network calls diverted to an IFDN lose all the network information, so that information cannot be displayed on the terminating telephone.
A group hunt pilot DN can be entered. If the
OPAO package is equipped, then # can be used in this DN.
To delete existing entry.
IFDN and NFCR are affected by the Outpulsing feature for Japan. Refer to the Feature
Description in Features and Services
Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details.
acdb-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 693
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
IMA
IMS
ISAP
IVMS
IVR
LOG
MAXP
MCFD
Response Comment
Typing four asterisks (****) at the IFDN prompt do not let the user exit Overlay 23.
(NO) YES Integrated Messaging Allowed (ACD DN assigned to IMS) Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.
Pack/Rel
ims-2
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Integrated Messaging Service
Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. IMA must be set to Yes in LD 15.
ims-2
Integrated Services Application Protocol (ACD messages sent across the ISDN/AP link)
Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.
ani-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-999
(0)-999
1-120
(0)
1-3
X
Integrated Voice Messaging System
Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.
ivms-2
Interactive Voice Response queue
An ACD queue must be defined as an IVR queue before the Treatment Request for IVR command can be used in Customer Controlled Routing
(CCR) applications.
Login maximum (the maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time) ivr-18 acdc-18
Login maximum (the maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time) acdc-18
Maximum Number of Agent Positions. The value of the MAXP can be increased to the allowed maximum or decreased to the current number agents.
acda-1
Multiple Queue Assignment (MQA) Call
Forwarding Digits attached to Agent IDs. The digits are used to determine which Phantom TNs are Call Forwarded.
MCFD is prompted if MQCF = YES.
mqa-21
No digits attached to Agent IDs
Limit of digits attached to Agent IDs. Maximum is 3.
No digits attached to Agent IDs
694 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MQA
MQAP
MQAS
MQCF
MURT
MWC
NAME
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Multiple Queue Assignment
No Multiple Queue Assignment functionality
Multiple Queue Assignment functionality
MQA is prompted if AID = YES and MQA package 297 is equipped. Warning: The HSL link must be disabled before you configure or change
MQA.
Pack/Rel
mqa-21 mqa-21
(NO)
YES
(NO)
YES
MQA Priority option
No Priorities selected during login
Select Priorities during login
Prompted if MQA = YES and Priority Agent package 116 is equipped.
Multiple Queue Assignment Supervisor ID option
No Supervisor ID during login
Select a Supervisor ID during login
Prompted if MQA = YES.
mqa-21
(NO)
YES
0-511
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Multiple Queue Assignment Call Forward option mqa-21
No automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login
Automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login
Prompted if MQA = YES and Phantom TN package 254 is equipped.
Music Route number
The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining MURT. Enter X to remove.
acdb-1
Message Waiting Center
(ACD DN is a message center DN)
MWC is set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. Prompted if Message Waiting
Center (MWC) package 46 is equipped.
Display CDN name for redirected calls mwc-1 basic-4.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 695
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
NCFW
NCWL
NDFL
NRAC
NRRT
NRT
OBSC
OBPT
OBTN
Response
x...x
Comment
Night Call Forward DN for ACD calls (up to 23 digits) and Operator Revert DN for Meridian Mail
(IMS, IVMS). NCFW is tracked on reports as interflow.
NCFW can be up to 31 digits. Precede NCFW entry with X to delete.
Typing four asterisks (****) at the NCFW prompt will not exit Overlay 23 with package OPAO enabled.
Pack/Rel
acda-1
(NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES
0-511
New Call Waiting Lamp options
When NCWL = YES, the Busy Threshold and
Overflow Threshold apply only to Overflow by
Number and Interflow conditions, but do not change the lamp states. Calls in the Call
Request and Local Flow-in queues are included when adding up the calls in queue for lamp state updates.
acdb-15 acdd-24 Not Ready Default code
Must be equipped with ACD-D or NGCC package
Enable Not Ready Activity Codes acdd-24
(0)-2044
Night RAN Route number assigned as night announcement for ACD calls.
If NRRT and NCFW are both defined, then
NRRT course first. The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining NRRT. Enter X to remove.
acda-1
Night RAN Time
This is the time in seconds - in increments of 1 before RAN is connected to ACD calls. NRT is prompted if NRRT is defined and International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.
supp-9
(NO) YES xx
(NO)
AGT
ALL
Login/Logout control.
Supervisor Inactivity Timer, in minutes
(Default = 5, Minimum = 2, Maximum = 99)
No Observation Tone given
Audible Observe Tone to Agent only
Audible Observe Tone to all parties oas-3.0
oas-3.0
acdb-1
696 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
OCN
OUTS
OVBU
Response
(NO) YES
Comment Pack/Rel
Accept Oldest Call in Network
This feature determines if the oldest call in the network is answered ahead of calls to the Source location. Use caution with this feature. Because agents are reserved for network calls, agents may remain idle while calls wait in the local queue.
To avoid reserving all the agents for network calls, split the ACD group into two areas: one area for all calls and the second area for a group of agents equal to the number of tie lines between the network locations. This solution allows local calls to overflow by time into the area for all calls.
The OCN option must be defined only for Target queues.
When OCN = YES and HPQ = NO, the system compares calls from queues for that target ACD
DN. The highest priority call that has waited the longest is the call presented to the next available agent.
When OCN = NO and HPQ = NO, the system selects the oldest call from the ACD DN's own
Timed Overflow (TOF) queue. If there are no calls in the Source Timed Overflow queue, the system looks at calls in the Call Request queue and Source Timed Local Flow-in queue.
When OCN = NO and HPQ = YES, the system presents calls from the agent's own TOF queue and High-Priority queues before presenting calls from Source TOF queues and Call Request queues.
OCN is prompted if Network Automatic Call
Distribution (NACD) package 207 equipped.
nacd-15 xxxx xxxx Routing Table entries to be removed
Up to 20 entries at a time can be removed from the Enhanced Overflow (EOVF) or Network ACD
(NACD) routing tables. Only 5 entries can be entered at OUTS at a time. OUTS is prompted until just <CR> is entered.
Prompted if REQ = CHG. Remove routing tables by list entry number, not by ACD DN. Print the
NACD data to see the ACD DN associated with each entry number.
nacd-15 aaa bbb ccc ddd acdb-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 697
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
OVDN
OVFL
Response Comment
Overflow Busy treatment for specific call originator types when IFDN not defined.
Enter the required treatment for Overflow calls:
• LNK = caller is re-linked to source queue (the default value)
• BSY = caller hears busy tone
Enter all four entries at the same appearance.
Enter LNK or BSY for each of the four different originators:
• aaa = Internal calls
• bbb = Attendant calls
• ccc = LNK
• ddd = DID and TIE trunks
Pack/Rel
If busy tone is configured for CO trunk calls, the calling or called party is billed for the duration of the call, which is from the time the PBX returns answer supervision until the time the calling party disconnects.
BSY is not allowed for CO trunks. Prompted if there is no entry for IFDN.
x...x x...x x...x
X
Xxxxx
(NO)
YES acdb-1
Overflow ACD Directory Number(s) (maximum of three responses)
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
To remove ALL OVDNs for the ACD DN
To delete a specific DN.
Any new entry replaces the old data. The
Overflow DN cannot be a CDN.
Overflow Tone
Busy tone is given to call
Force overflow tone is given to call by Mobility switch
OVFL is prompted when a call arrives at a
Controlled DN in default mode and when that call has exceeded the CDN-to-a-default-ACD-DN ceiling threshold.
basic-20
698 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
OVTH
PAGE
PCMM
PRIM
PRIO
RAGT
Response
0-(2047)
Comment Pack/Rel
Overflow Threshold
OVTH represents the value at which the Calls
Waiting lamp winks (Fast flashes), causing calls which are entering the queue to overflow.
When OVTH = 0 overflow is attempted when all agents are busy. Enter X to delete existing entry.
acdb-1
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Start at the top of a new page for each report
Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail
Prompted if OPT = PCMA in LD 15 acdc-2 nas-14
(NO) YES
0-15
2-(4)-30
Primary DSAC csl-8
Printer(s) for Output (establish the number(s) of devices used for output of reports) acdc-2
These output devices must have been defined in
LD 17 as ACD printers. Precede with X to remove a device number.
Number of seconds an agent in a remote target is reserved for an overflow call.
The Reserve Agent Timer keeps the agent reserved until call presentation or timeout. The timer also prevents a situation where an agent can be reserved indefinitely.
When an agent is reserved with Countdown
Allowed (CNTA) CLS as defined in LD 11, the
RAGT countdown is shown on the agent's Digit
Display.
The agent being reserved has a Reserve Agent
Timer with countdown display. The countdown display starts when the Reserve Agent Timer
(RAGT) starts, and counts down by increments of 2 seconds, to zero. If the call is not presented to the Target agent before the Reserve Agent
Timer (RAGT) expires, that call remains at the originating Source queue. The Target agent is returned to the idle agent queue.
nacd-15
If the Reserve Agent Timer is set too high, the agent is reserved waiting for calls. If the Reserve
Agent Timer is set too low, the agent can be freed before the network facility can set up the call.
Different timer settings can be tried through Load
Management. Subsequent calls are presented
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 699
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
RAN
RAO
RDNA
REQ
Response Comment
to agents only after the Reserve Agent Timer has expired.
The RAGT must be defined only for Target queues.
0-511
Pack/Rel
(NO)
YES
FULL
Recorded Announcement Trunk Route Number for calls entering message queue (default NO
RAN) acda-1
Restricted Agent Observe
Restricted Agent Observe on logout disabled
Restricted Agent Observe on logout enabled
Restrict the supervisor from observing any of agents IDN calls even when logged in
(NO)
YES
CHG
DACR
END
LST
NEW
OUT
PRT
Restricted DN Access
Enter NO if use of DN keys is to be allowed without logging in.
Enter YES to restrict agents from making outgoing calls when not logged in.
Prompted if an Auxiliary Data System (ADS) or
Schedule Block (SCB) exists.
acdc-1
Request
Change existing data
Select OUT followed by NEW, instead of CHG when switching resources between virtual and actual ACD DNs to avoid unwanted information on ACD-D reports.
De-acquire ACD Queue and CDN resources
Exit Overlay program
List ACD DNs
(This includes ACD DNs, CDNs and NACD DNs)
Add new data to the system
Remove data block
When removing an ACD DN from the Meridian 1 which is monitored by ACD-MAX, the DN is not automatically deleted from the ACD-MAX configuration.
Print the specified data bacd-18
700 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RFRQ
RGAI
ROPT
RPRT
3
4
1
2
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
7
Response Comment
Report Frequency. See also ROPT prompt for
Report Options.
No reports
All reports hourly on the hour
All reports hourly on the half-hour
All reports half-hourly
Report 3 every quarter-hour, no other reports.
Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports hourly on the hour.
Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports hourly on the half-hour.
Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports every half-hour
Pack/Rel
acdc-2
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Ring Again for Internal calls
When internal caller dials a queue with no available agents, fast ringback is provided. If
RGAI = YES, the caller can activate Ring Again to be presented to the next available agent.
Enter YES for Data Service Access Code.
(DSAC). RGAI must = YES for DSAC.
acda-8
Report Options
Agent group
Queue
Trunk routes
Agent position
Precede with X to disable a report. More than one option allowed. Any new entry replaces the old data.
acdc-2
Information about this ACD-DN (or CDN) is excluded in management reports and status displays.
Information about this ACD-DN (or CDN) is included in management reports and status displays
RPRT is prompted only if a SCB or an ADS block exists for this customer.
acdc-17
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 701
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
RSND
RTPC
RTQO
RTQT
SDNB
SFNB
Response
(4)-16
(NO)
YES
(NRD)
MSB
(0)-50
(NO) YES
1 2 ...
Comment Pack/Rel
Note:
For release 4.0 and earlier, the default is
YES.
Message Resend timer (in seconds)
This is the length of time the Source node waits for a response from the Target node after sending a Call Request message.
When the Resend Timer expires, another message is sent. If the second Call Request message expires without a response, the Call
Request is removed from the network queue.
The Resend Timer should be changed only if the network uses multiple hops and ISL with lower baud rates.
A single hop typically requires 100 ms of real time to set up the call. When the Resend Timer is too large, the control function of the timer to limit traffic to busy nodes is lost. If the Resend
Timer is too small, the access of calls to nodes can be limited unnecessarily.
The Resend Timer must be defined for the
Source node and the Target nodes.
nacd-15
Real Time Processing
The SAGP Load Management command does not take effect in real time.
The SAGP Load Management command takes effect in real time.
supp-9 acd-23 Return to Queue Option
Not Ready
Make Set Busy
Return to Queue Timer after no answer in number of ringing cycles acd-23
Secondary DN Blocking
Block calls to the Secondary DN while busy on
ACD call.
acdb-12
Set Feature Notification Bitmap
SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN
(login), SFN (logout), ...
nxcc-22
702 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SFRQ
SHR
SPCP
1
2
Response Comment
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.
SFNB is printed if AACR = YES.
0-23
(NO) YES
Frequency of Status Display updates
30 seconds
60 seconds
Start Hour
Hour of day that data reporting starts
Pack/Rel
acdc-2 acdc-2
Separate Post Call Processing (to enable separate DCP/PCP indication)
When SPCP = YES, agents in Post Call
Processing (PCP) are separated from agents in
Direct Call Processing (DCP). Changing the
SPCP option for an ACD DN changes all ACD
DNs in the same customer group.
Agent (AGT) key lamp states and display (DAG) field on supervisor telephones are affected by
SPCP as follows:
AGT key lamp steady:
• SPCP = YES; agent is on an ACD call
• SPCP = NO; agent is on an ACD call or not ready (NRD) acdb-1
AGT key lamp fast flash:
• SPCP = YES; agent is on non-ACD call or
NRD
• SPCP = NO; agent is on non-ACD call
DAG Display ACD DN:
• SPCP = YES; displays # of agents on ACD calls
• SPCP = NO; displays # of agents on ACD calls or NRD
DAG Display non-ACD DN:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 703
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
SRPT
SRRT
SRT
STIO
TABL
TDNS
Response Comment
• SPCP = YES; displays # of agents on non-
ACD calls or NRD
• SPCP = NO; displays # of agents on non-ACD calls
The SPCP option is a customer-wide option. A change to SPCP for any ACD queues affects all
ACD queues for that customer.
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES
0-511
Short Report option for report 4 (Agent position) acdc-2
Use the short report when more than one agent, each with a unique agent ID, logs into the same position ID during a report period.
Second RAN Route number for ACD
The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining SRRT. Enter X to remove.
acda-1
0-2044 acda-1
0, 1, 2,...15
Status Input/Output devices
Enter all Input/Output devices assigned for status displays. The device must be first defined in LD 17. Prompted if a Schedule Block (SCB) exits. Enter X to remove.
acdc-2 x
Second RAN Time
Time in seconds before second RAN is connected to ACD calls. Prompted if SRRT is defined. There is no default for SRT.
Table. Where: x =
• D = Day Table
• N = Night Table
• S = Source Table
The Day Table is mutually exclusive with TOFT.
The Night Table is mutually exclusive with
NCFW.
nacd-15
(NO)
YES
DNIS number is not an original Called Party of a defined CDN queue.
basic-20
DNIS number is an original Called Party of a defined CDN queue. TDNS = YES is recommended if a CDN is defined for the Mobility
704 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TOFT
TOT4
TRDN
TRGT
TSFT
TYPE
Response Comment
Control Point (MCP) application to control a
Personal Communication Service (PCS) call.
2-1800
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
Timed Overflow Threshold (in seconds)
Before defining the TOFT value, first delete that
OVDN from its Source ACD DN. Then, enter the time, in seconds, that you want a call to wait in queue before it overflows to an OVDN.
When REQ = CHG, and the OVDNs are answering TOF calls, an error message is output indicating the affected Target ACD DNs.
Enter X to disable the feature. If no value is entered, NONE is printed.
tof-10
Totals on report 4
Averages are output on report 4 (Agent position)
Totals are output on report 4 (Agent position)
Prompted if ROPT = 4. If TOT4 = YES, HDCP column is output on report 1 and 4. Must have
ACD-C enabled.
acdc-10 xxxx xxxx tttt
0-(20)-510
Treatment DN for IVR queue
A treatment DN does not have to be a valid DN in the switch. If Meridian Mail is to be used for both Voice Messaging and IVR, a Treatment DN should not be the same as any Meridian Mail voice box. Enter X to remove.
ivr-18
Target. Where:
• xxxx = Target ACD DN
• tttt = time (0-1800) in seconds
Up to 20 target ACD DNs can be defined. For each target, tttt is the total time from the call entering the ACD queue until a call request is sent to the target. TRGT rounds up to an even number.
nacd-15
Telephone Service Factor Threshold (in seconds)
Prompted if a Schedule Block (SCB) exits.
acdc-1
ACD
Type of data block
Automatic Call Distribution data block bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 705
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
Prompt
UMG
UMT
USFB
UST
Response
ADS
CDN
NACD
OBVP
SCB
Comment
Requires Basic Automatic Call Distribution
(BACD) package 40.
Auxiliary Data System data block
Requires Automatic Call Distribution Package C
(ACDC) package 50. Not valid when REQ =
PRT.
Control Directory Number data block
This is a special DN created to specify a destination ACD DN to which incoming calls are directed. Multiple CDNs can direct calls to the same ACD DN providing different treatments based on the CDN parameters.
Requires Enhanced ACD Routing (EAR) package 214.
Network ACD data block
Requires Network Automatic Call Distribution
(NACD) package 207.
Observe Password table
Schedule data Block for ACD Management
Reports
Requires Automatic Call Distribution, Package C
(ACDC) package 42.
Pack/Rel
acdd-2 nacd-15 oas-3.0
acdc-2
(NO) YES
2-(6)-15
User to User Messaging ims-2
Update Message Time
Silence interval in seconds after message queue alert tone.
ims-2
1 2 ...
(NO) YES
Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap
USFB applies to messages such as:
Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,
Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore, Ready,
Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway Return,
Reserved, Unreserved, ...
This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would be printed only if the corresponding message set is enabled.
USFB is printed if AACR = YES.
nxcc-22
User Status update ims-2
706 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
UUI
VSID
Response
(NO) YES
0-127
Comment
Use- to-User Information
Pack/Rel
uui-3.0
Value Added Server ID of VAS providing VMS csl-8
VASs are external server equipment facilities such as Meridian Mail. Prompted if IMS or ISAP
= YES. Must be defined in LD 17.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 707
LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center
708 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 24: LD 24: Direct Inward System
Access
Overlay program 24 allows data for the Direct Inward System Access (DISA), the Emergency Services
Access (ESA) , and the Mobile Service Access (MSA) features to be created, modified, and printed.
Note:
To manage and print data for the Mobile Service Access feature, package 412 (Mobile Extensions) must be equipped.
Prompts and responses
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) data block
Prompt Response
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
SPWD
DN
CCBA aaa
DIS xx xxxx
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DIS (Direct Inward System)
Customer number associated with this data block
Secure data Password x...x
DISA Directory Number
(NO) YES Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent
SCOD
AUTR
TGAR
NCOS
COS
RANR
- RTMR x...x
0-(1)-15
(0)-31
Security Code
(NO) YES Authorization Code required
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Network Class of Service aaa x...x
Class of Service (aaa = (CTD), FR1, FR2, FRE, CUN, SRE,
TLD, or UNR)
Route number for DISA RAN
(0)-10-300 Route timer
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 709
LD 24: Direct Inward System Access
Prompt Response
DGTS x...x
- DLNT
CRCS
(YES) NO x
Comment
Digits for DISA Digit Insertion
Dial tone needed after digit insertion
Code Restriction Class of Service
Emergency Services Access (ESA) data block
REQ
TYPE
Prompt
CUST
ENTR
- -ESDN
- -ESRT
- -RLI
- -DDGT
- -DFCL
- -OSDN
- -
MISDIAL_PREVEN
TION xxxx x..x
x..x
x..x
YES
Response
aaa
ESA
Comment
Request
Type of data block = ESA (Emergency Services Access)
Customer number associated with this data block xx xx xxxx
0-511
Emergency Services Directory Number
Emergency Services Access route number
Route List Index number
Directing digits
Default ESA Calling Number
On-Site Notification station DN
WARNING The MISDIAL_PREVENTION feature has the potential to suppress actual emergency calls; hence all intercepted emergency calls need to be identified and investigated. System message OSN004 will be printed for the suppressed ESA calls. Refer to NTP for further details.
- -ARE YOU SURE? (NO) YES Disable Misdial feature Enable Misdial feature
- -MISDIAL_DELAY
1-(2)-3-4 Misdial delay, in seconds.
- -ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT
(YES) NO Allow (ignore) last ESDN digit repeat. Deny (trap) last
ESDN digit repeat.
ENTR
VOLO_COUNT
(0) ... xx The number of emergency TNs in the pool.
710 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
VOLO_FIRST_T N
Response Comment
c u l s c u The first TN in the emergency TN pool.
VOLO_CALBK_TIM
900-(1200)-1800
The number of seconds the emergency TN is used after the ESA call is complete.
Mobile Service Access (MSA) data block
Prompt Response
REQ:
TYPE:
CUST
SPWD
DN
SCOD
AUTR
CCBA aaa
MSA xx xxxx x...x
x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = MSA (Mobile Service Access)
Customer number associated with this data block
Secure data Password
Mobile Service Directory Number
Security Code
(NO) YES Authorization Code required
(NO) YES Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ARE YOU
SURE?
AUTR
CCBA
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO)
YES
Comment
MISDIAL_PREVENTION
Enter YES, if prompted
Pack/Rel
basic-5-0
Authorization Code required
If YES, the user enters the authorization code but not the special prefix access code.
disa-7
Collect Call Blocking Denied
Collect Call Blocking Allowed ccb-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 711
LD 24: Direct Inward System Access
COS
Prompt
CRCS
CUST
DDGT
DFCL
DGTS
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
UNR x xx x..x
x..x
Response
x...x
Comment
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package
290 is required.
Pack/Rel
Conditionally Toll Denied Class of
Service
Conditionally Unrestricted Class of
Service
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted Class of Service
Semi-Restricted Class of Service
Toll Denied Class of Service
Unrestricted Class of Service
Code Restriction Class of Service New
Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) must be activated at least once.
disa-1
Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15. Where xx =
• 0-15 ESDN entry.
• 0-31 Small System.
• 0-99 Large System.
• NULL end of entries disa-1
Directing digits (e.g. 1, 11, 911, etc.). Up to 4 digits are accepted.
The configured digits are outpulsed as the called number if the outgoing trunk for the ESA call is a CAMA trunk.
esa- 23
Default ESA Calling Number. The input must be the following lengths:
* On a system that is not FNP packaged,
8 or 11 digits are accepted if the first digit of the input is '1'; otherwise the input must be 7 or 10 digit.
* On a system that is FNP packaged, up to 16 digits are allowed to be entered.
'X' deletes the data.
Note that the prompt does not expect a
CLID entry number.
esa- 23
Digits for DISA Digit Insertion.
dpna-21
712 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
DLNT
DN
ENTR
ESDN
ESRT
Prompt
X
Response
(YES)
NO x...x
0-15 xxxx
0-511
Comment
A maximum of 31 digits can be defined.
Removes existing digits and deactivates DISA Digits Insertion.
Direct Private Network Access (DPNA) package 250 is required.
Pack/Rel
Dial tone needed after digit insertion
Dial tone not needed after digit insertion dpna-21
Directory Number.
Where x..x = 1-4 digit number, or a 1-7 digit number when Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Directory Number.
Mobile Service Access (MSA) Directory
Number.
If DN is a DISA Directory Number
(TYPE = DIS):
• all trunk routes terminating in DISA must auto-terminate (LD 16 prompt
AUTO = YES)
• trunks must have ground start signaling (LD 14 prompt SIGL = GRD)
• DN must be the same as prompt
ATDN in LD 14 disa-1 disa-1 basic-5.50
Entry for new Emergency Services DN
(ESDN).
esa-23
Emergency services DN. Up to 4 digits are accepted.
esa- 23
Emergency Services Access route number. Precede with "X'" to delete the data.
Route number of the following routes types are accepted as valid input:
CAM
COT
DID
FEX
TIE esa- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 713
LD 24: Direct Inward System Access
Prompt
MISDIAL_PREVENTION
(NO)
YES
MISDIAL_DELAY
1-(2)-3-4
ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT
(YES)
NO
NCOS
OSDN
(0)-99 x..x
RANR
(X)
Response
x...x
Comment
WAT
The route number of an ISA service route (LD16, ISAR = YES) can be entered for ESRT as long as the route type of the ISA service route is one of the above.
To configure RLI information in LD 24, enter no values at the ESRT prompt and enter the RLI number at the RLI prompt.
This ensures that only the RLI is active as the routing method.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
Disable Misdial feature
Enable Misdial feature.
basic-5.00
Misdial delay, in seconds.
basic-5.00
Allow (ignore) last ESDN digit repeat.
Deny (trap) last ESDN digit repeat.
Network Class of Service ncos-1
On-Site Notification station DN. The input must be a valid single appearance internal DN.
'X' deletes the data.
The On Site Notification function is dependent on the OSDN to locate and alert the OSN set in the event of an ESA call.
esa- 23
Route number for DISA RAN, where:
• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS
1000E
• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS
1000S, MG 1000B and MG 1000T dpna-21
Removes existing route and deactivates DISA RAN.
This prompt appears with Direct Private
Network Access (DPNA) package 250
714 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
REQ
Prompt
RTMR
SCOD
SPWD
TGAR
TYPE
0-(1)-15
DIS
ESA
MSA
VOLO_COUNT (0) ... xx
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
(0)-10-300 x...x
X
Response
<CR> xxxx
Comment
and Recorded Announcement (RAN) package 7.
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create a new DISA data block
Remove a DISA data block
Print DISA data block
Pack/Rel
disa-1
Route Timer
RTMR = the maximum time (in seconds) that a caller can wait for an available
RAN trunk before being removed from the RAN queue. A caller that has failed to capture a RAN trunk during the
RTMR time limit proceeds with the call as if DISA RAN has completed. Entering
"0" clears the timer and deactivates the
DISA RAN timer.
dpna-21
Security Code
Where x..x = 1-8 digit security access code.
Remove security code.
No security code or code not changed.
disa-1
Secure Data Password
Prompted only if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security code does not print when PRT is requested.
disa-1
Trunk Group Access Restriction disa-1
Type of data block
Direct Inward System Access data block
Emergency Services Access data block
Mobile Service Access data block disa-1 esa-23 mobx-5.50
The number of emergency TNs in the pool. Where xxx = basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 715
LD 24: Direct Inward System Access
Prompt Response Comment
• 32 for System Option 11C
• 255 for System Option 81C
VOLO_FIRST_TN c u l s c u
VOLO_CALBK_TIM
900-
(1200)-1800
The 1st TN in the emergency TN pool.
Prompted if VOLO_COUNT is not 0.
The number of seconds the emergency
TN is used after the ESA call is complete. Input must be an even number. The default value is 1200 seconds. Prompted if the
VOLO_COUNT is not 0.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
basic-5.00
716 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 25: LD 25: Move Data Blocks
Overlay program 25 allows data associated with loops, shelves, or cards to be moved to or interchanged with different loops, shelves, or cards.
The program also allows the data associated with different customers to be moved at the same time as long as all source and destination loops, shelves, and cards are identical for all customers specified.
Move and swap rules
1. Before using MOV or SWP the following hardware should be removed from the system and reconstructed after the MOV is completed:
• Consoles
• Digitone Receivers
• Dial Tone Detectors
• Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC/MFE)
• PRA loops
• ACD telephones
• All lines associated with the loop or card on the destination side
2. Loops must be configured in LD 17.
3. NT8D17 Conference/TDS loop cannot be moved or swapped with LD 25.
4. When moving a card, the units on the source card must match with the card type on the destination side.
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
REQ: aaa
CUST
SRCL xx xx ... xx xxx
Comment
Request (aaa = END, SWP, or MOV)
Customer number
Source Loop number from which data is to be moved
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 717
LD 25: Move Data Blocks
Prompt Response
SRC 1-50
DSTL
DEST xxx
1-50
SHCD
STUN
MVSG
- SHSG
STSG a...a
xx
Comment
Source Card for Small System
Loop number Destination to which data is to be moved
Destination Card for Small System
Shelf Card (a...a format = ss TO ds or ss c TO ds c)
Starting destination Unit Number
(NO) YES Move Segment a...a
Shelf Segment (a...a format = ss sseg TO ds dseg)
0-3 Starting destination Segment
Move and swap rules
Scenario: Move or swap a shelf or card from source loop to destination loop
Single density loop (SD)
Single density loop (SD)
DESTINATION
Double density loop (DD)
Quadruple density loop
(4D)
all cards are SD all cards are SD all cards are SD
SOURCE
Double density loop (DD)
Quadruple density loop
(4D) all cards must be
SD all cards must be
SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be 4D,
DD or SD
Scenario: Move or swap a whole loop from source loop to destination loop
SOURCE
Single density loop (SD)
Double density loop (DD)
Single density loop (SD)
shelf 0-3 all cards on shelf must be SD
DESTINATION
Double density loop (DD)
if only shelf 0 and/or 1 is configured on loop shelf 0-1
Quadruple density loop
(4D)
if only shelf 0 is configured on loop if only shelf 0 is configured on loop
718 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Scenario: Move or swap a whole loop from source loop to destination loop
Quadruple density loop
(4D)
Single density loop (SD)
DESTINATION
Double density loop (DD)
all cards on loop must be SD cards can be DD or SD
Quadruple density loop
(4D)
shelf 0
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CUST xx xx ... xx Customer number
Comment
Enter the customers affected by the move or swap operation. Customer 0 must be specified to move digitone receivers on the source loop.
<CR> All customers affected
The move/swap superloop data on a customer basis is not supported. Enter a return, (<CR>) when moving or swapping superloop data.
Pack/Rel
basic-1
DEST 1-50 Card number Destination to which data is to be moved (not supported for digital cards). If the loop hasD-channel as a backup, REQ = MOV is not supported.
For Small System, card 0 is not supported.
basic-1
DSTL xxx Loop number Destination to which data is to be moved
Where xxx is:
0-159 basic-20
0-255 Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
0-9 Small System
1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49, Small System for
DTI, DTI2, PRI, PRI2 lse-25 basic-1
11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S
If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ =
MOV is not supported.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 719
LD 25: Move Data Blocks
Prompt Response
MVSG (NO) YES
Comment
Move or swap Superloop Segments
REQ
END
MOV
SWP
Pack/Rel
basic-15
Request
Exit Overlay program.
Move data associated with an existing loop to a
vacant loop (see Move and swap rules on
page 718).
basic-1
CAUTION: Before using MOV, consoles and digitone receivers should be removed from the database and reconstructed after the move is completed.
MOV command can be used to move data blocks at a card, shelf or loop level within the following guidelines:
1. Before using the MOV command, the following hardware should be removed from the source and destination loop, shelf or cards and reconstructed after the move is completed.
basic-25.4
• Consoles
• Digitone Receivers
• Dial Tone Detectors
• Multifrequency Compelled Signalling cards
(MFC/MFE)
• PRA loops
• ACD telephones
• All lines associated with the loop or card on the destination side of the move command.
2. Loops must be configured in LD 17
3. NT8D17 Conference/TDS card cannot be moved with LD 25
4. Type of source card must match with the card type on the destination side.
5. Cannot move Superloop data on a customer basis (SCH5235)
Swap (interchange) data associated with existing loops (
Move and swap rules on page 718)
SHCD Shelf Card basic-1
720 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ss TO ds
Comment
Move or interchange data to or between shelves.
ss c TO ds c
Move or interchange data to or between cards.
Where:
• c = card number (0-15)
• ss = source shelf
• ds = destination shelf
Shelf range:
• SD = 0-3
• DD = 0-1
• 4D = 0
• 8D = 0-1 (superloops only)
SHSG
SRC
SRCL
Pack/Rel
ss sseg TO ds dseg
Move/Swap source Shelf Segment to destination
Shelf Segment, where: basic-15
• ss = source shelf
• ds = destination shelf
• sseg = source segment
• dseg = destination segment.
The SHSG command is used to move or swap superloop segments.
1-50 Source Card number from which data is to be moved (not supported for digital cards). If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ = MOV is not supported. For Small System, card 0 is not supported.
basic-1 xxx Source Loop number from which data is to be moved
Where: xxx = 0-159 basic-20 xxx = 0-255 Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 721
LD 25: Move Data Blocks
Prompt Response Comment
xxx = 0-9 Small System xxx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 Small
System for DTI, DTI2, PRI, PRI2
11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S
If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ =
MOV is not supported.
STSG 0-3
STUN xx
Pack/Rel
lse-25 basic-1
Starting destination Segment
For superloops only, if REQ = MOV, enter the starting destination segment to which the shelf is to be moved.
basic-15
Starting destination Unit Number
Enter the starting destination unit number to which the first source unit is to be moved. The source card must not be on a superloop; the destination card must be on a superloop.
The value of xx depends on source loop density.
For 500/2500 and digital line cards: basic-15
• SD, xx = 0, 4, 8, 12
• DD, xx = 0, 8
• QD, xx = 0, 8 (8 for digital line cards only)
For a Digitone Receiver card the destination density is 8D and the source density is:
• SD, xx = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
• DD, xx = 0, 2, 4, 6
• QD, xx = 0, 4
SD, DD trunk cards cannot be moved to Universal or E&M/Dictation Trunk cards.
Different source cards cannot be mixed into
Superloop cards with one destination. Only ALC,
DLC and DTR can be moved to superloops.
722 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 26: LD 26: Group Do Not Disturb
Overlay program 26 allows Do Not Disturb groups to be created, modified, and printed.
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
REQ: aaa
TYPE:
CUST
DND xx
GPNO
TOGP
GRPx
STOR
RMOV
0-99
0-99
0-99 x...x
x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DND (Do Not Disturb Group)
Customer number associated with this data block
Group Number or new Group Number to be formed
Move to Group number
Number of next Group to be moved
DN to be Stored
Remove DN
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CUST xx
Comment
Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15.
GPNO 0-99
<CR>
Group Number or new Group Number to be formed
Print all Group Numbers.
Prompted when REQ = PRT.
GRPx
REQ
0-99
<CR>
Number of next Group to be moved
Proceed to next prompt.
Action Request
Pack/Rel
dndg-1 dndg-1 dndg-1 dndg-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 723
LD 26: Group Do Not Disturb
Prompt Response
CHG
END
MOV
MRG
NEW
OUT
PRT
REM
Comment
Change existing data block.
Exit Overlay program.
Move a DN from one DND Group data block to another
Group data block.
Pack/Rel
Merge existing Group data blocks into a new Group (the old groups still exist) data block.
Create a New data block.
Remove data block.
Print DND Group data block.
Remove an entry from a Group data block.
RMOV x...x
dndg-1
STOR
G0-G99 x...x
G0-G99
Remove DN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Remove Group number
DN to be stored
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Group number to be stored. Numbers can be added when REQ is CHG.
dndg-1
TOGP
TYPE
0-99
DND
Move To Group number
DND Group data block type dndg-1 dndg-1
724 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 27: LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) Administration
Overlay program 27 was introduced to configure ISDN Basic Rate Interface hardware.
If ISDN BRI is being configured for the first time, the following sequence must be used:
1. Configure Protocol group (PROT) data block, Link Access Protocol on D-channel (LAPD) data block.
2. Configure PRI loop, route, and channel data blocks for packet data transmission.
3. Configure Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) data block.
4. Configure Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator.
5. Configure S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) or U Interface Line Card (UILC) data block.
6. Configure Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) data block.
7. Configure Terminal Service Profile on DSL (TSP) data block.
If changing the existing ISDN BRI service this sequence does not have to be followed, but the relationship of one data block to another must be observed. Due to interactions the changing of one data block may require the changing of other data blocks.
Refer to the ISDN BRI Administration NTP for complete details.
Prompts and responses
BRSC: Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
BRSC
BRSC l s c
Comment
Request
Type of data block = BRSC (Basic Rate Signaling
Concentrator)
Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator card
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 725
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt
MISP
Response
x...x
DPSD
- MPHC
- MPH
- PRI_CH l
(NO) YES
(YES) NO l ch
Comment
MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and
MG 1000Ts
D-channel Packet Switched Data
Switch Route D-channel packet data to (Meridian Packet
Handler) or public switched packet data network
Meridian Packet Handler loop
PRI for Packet Handler and BRSC connections
CARD: SILC/UILC card data block
The S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) or U Interface Line Card (UILC) configuration procedures identify the location, the card type, and the MISP network loop for each SILC or UILC installed.
• in the Large System Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) and Common Equipment (CE)
Modules
• in a card slot for each SILC or UILC installed in the Base or Expansion cabinet of a Small
System
• in a card slot for each SILC or UILC installed in a MG 1000S of a CS 1000S system.
After the card configuration block is created, the dedicated D-channels are automatically assigned if the MISP is enabled. When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at the TN prompt prints out information for all the cards in the system.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
TN
MISP
CTYP
Response
aaa
CARD l s c u x...x
aaaa
Comment
Request
Type of data block = CARD (SILC/UILC)
Terminal Number of SILC or UILC
MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and
MG 1000T
Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)
726 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
DNAT: Data Network Address Tables data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
DNAT
DNIC
NTN
Response
aaa
DNAT
1-32 xxxx x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DNAT (Data Network Address Table)
DNA Table to print
Data Network Identification Code
Network Terminal Number
DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIL)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
DSL
APPL
DES
CUST
CTYP
MISP
Response
aaa
DSL l s c dsl
BRIL d...d
xx aaaa x...x
MODE
B1CT
B2CT
LDN
MTEI
MCAL
MTSP aaaa aaa aaa
(NO) 0-5
1-(8)-20
1-(4)-8
1-(8)-16
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DSL (Digital Subscriber Loop)
Digital Subscriber Loop address
Basic Rate Interface Line
DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)
Customer number associated with this function
Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)
MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and
MG 1000T
Mode for DSL (aaaa = NTAS or NTFS)
B-channel 1 Call Type (aaa = (VCE) or (DTA) or PMD or
IPD)
B-channel 2 Call Type (aaa = (VCE) or (DTA) or PMD or
IPD)
NO = No LDN assigned to the DSL 0-5 is the Departmental
Listed Directory Number defined in LD 15
Maximum Terminal Endpoint Identifiers
Maximum Calls allowed per DN when TYPE = DSL
Maximum Terminal Service Profiles
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 727
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt
LAPD
PRID
PDCA
Response
0-15
1-6
1-16
FDN
EFD
HUNT
EHT
TGAR
NCOS
SGRP
CAC_MFC
- CLS x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
0-(1)-31
(0)-99
(0)-999
(0)-10 aaa
Comment
LAPD protocol group number for DSL assignment
Protocol ID. Prompted if REQ = NEW
Pad Category table defined in LD 73. Prompted if PRID =
2 or 4
Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory. Number (1-13 digits allowed)
External Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory
Number (1-13 digits allowed)
Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)
External Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)
Trunk Group Access Restriction number
Network Class of Service
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
MFC CNI Category Code
Class of Service (See
Alphabetical list of prompts on
page 734)
DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIT or BRIE)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
DSL
Response
aaa
DSL l s c dsl
DES
APPL d...d
aaaa
- ISDN_MCNT
60-(300)-350
CUST
CTYP
MISP xx aaaa x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DSL (Digital Subscriber Loop)
Digital Subscriber Loop address
DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)
Basic Rate Interface (aaa = BRIT or BRIE)
Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.
Customer number associated with this function
Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)
MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for SSmall Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and
MG 1000T
728 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
MODE
- MTFM
TKTP
CLOK
- TSET
PDCA
ROUT
TIMR
- T310
B1
- MEMB
- TGAR
- NCOS
- CLS aa
Response
(NO) YES aaa
(NO) YES
0-15
1-16
0-511
(NO) YES
10-(30)-60
110-(120)
(NO) YES
1-510
0-(1)-31
(0)-99 aaa
B2
- MEMB
- TGAR
- NCOS
- CLS
(NO) YES
1-510
0-(1)-31
(0)-99 aaa
Comment
Mode for DSL (aa = (TE) or NT)
Multi-Frame Mode
Trunk Type (aaa = TIE, COT, and DID)
Clock source
Threshold Set for clock errors
Pad Category table (defined in LD 73)
Route number for the Trunk DSL
Change Timer values
T310 Timer value in seconds
T310 Timer range for PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks
Change B-channel 1 configuration
Member number of BRI route
Trunk Group Access Restriction number
Network Class of Service
Class of Service (see
on page 734)
B-channel 2
Member number of BRI route
Trunk Group Access Restriction number
Network Class of Service
Class of Service (see
on page 734)
LAPB: Link Access Procedure - Balanced data block
The Link Access Protocol for B-channels defines the B-channel packet data configuration.
Meridian 1 Packet Handler (MPH) package 248 must be equipped.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
PGPN
Response
aaa
LAPB
0-15
Comment
Request
Type of data block = LAPB (Link Access Procedure -
Balance)
Protocol Group Number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 729
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
- T2
- T3
- N1
- N2
- K
Prompt
USER
LAPB
- T1
Response
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
2-(6)-130
1-(4)-129 xxx
23-(135)- 263
1-(10)-15
(1)-7
Comment
Print groups selected at PGPN prompt
Change Link Access Protocol for B-channels
Response Timer in units of 0.5 seconds
Maximum frame delay in units of 0.5 seconds
Idle Timer in units of 0.5 seconds (xxx = 0 or 3-(12)-131)
Maximum I-frame size in octets
Maximum number of retries
Window size
MISP: Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block
The Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) configuration procedures identify each
MISP in the system and its packet handling capabilities. After the MISP is configured it can be enabled using LD 32. An MISP can support any combination of SILCs and UILCs up to a total of four, which are assigned to the MISP using the SILC/UILC configuration procedure.
When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at the LOOP prompt prints out all MISPs in the system.
When REQ = CHG, the following applies:
• MISP must be disabled when adding/removing D-channel packet capability
• remove Packet Mode Data call type B-channels before removing the B-channel packet capability
• remove Logical Terminal Identifiers (LTIDs) before removing the D-channel packet capability
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
LOOP
CARD
MG_CARD l s c
APPL
PH
- PRI
Response
aaa
MISP
0, 2, 4...158
1-9 a...a
a...a
0, 2, 4...158
Comment
Request
Type of data block = MISP
MISP/SISP loop number
SISP card slot number (valid only for Small Systems, CS
1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T)
The Media Gateway card for the MISP associated to the
IPMG.
Application (a...a = BRI, BRIE, BRIL, or MPH)
Packet Handler (a...a = DCH, BCH, or BDCH)
Primary Rate Interface
730 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- CH
DPSD
- MPHC xx
Response
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
- TN
PRFX
NTNO
DNIC
NWIF
- TN
- RATE
- LAPB
- X25P
- PVC
- IC
- TC
- OC
- DNAT l s c u
0-9
(YES) NO xxxx
1-3 l s c u
(64) 56
(NO) YES
(YES) NO n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2
1-32
Comment
Channel number
D-channel Packet Switched Data
Route D-channel packet switched data to the Meridian
Packet Handler.
Terminal Number
DNA table Prefix
Public Switched Packet Data Network presentation
Data Network Identification Code
MPH Network Interface identifier
Terminal Number
PSDN communication Rate
Change LAPB parameters
Change X.25 parameters
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number range
Incoming Logical Channel number range
Two-way Logical Channel number range
Outgoing Logical Channel number range
DNA Table to print
PVC: Permanent virtual circuit connections data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
PVC
MPH
PVCN
XPVC
- NWIF
NTN1
LCN1 loop
1-4
(YES) NO
1-3 x...x
1-4095
Comment
Request
Type of data block = PVC (Permanent virtual circuit connections)
Meridian Packet Handler loop
Permanent Virtual Circuit Number
External or internal PVC connection
MPH Network Interface identifier
First Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number for NT1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 731
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt
NTN2
LCN2
Response
xx . . . xx
1-4095
Comment
Second Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number for NT2
PROT or LAPD: Protocol or Link Access Protocol data block
The protocol configuration procedures define the protocols used by ISDN BRI DSLs to communicate over ISDN. These protocol groups support various ISDN communication standards used in North America, Europe, and other continents and countries.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
PGPN
LAPD
USER
- T200
- T203
- N200
- N201
- K
- N2X4
PGPN
Response
aaa
PROT
0-15
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(2)-40
4-(20)-80
1-(3)-8
4-(260)
(1)-32
0-(10)-20
<CR>
Comment
Request
Type of data block = PROT or LAPD (Protocol group or Link
Access Protocol on D-channel)
Protocol Group Number
Change Link Access Protocol for D-channels
Print groups selected at PGPN prompt
Retransmission Timer in increments of 0.5 seconds
Maximum Time between transmission frames
Maximum Number of retransmissions
Maximum Number of contiguous octets or bytes in information element
Maximum number of outstanding Negative
Acknowledgment (NAKs)
Number of Status Inquiries when Remote Station is in peer busy for 1TR6
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.
TSP: Terminal Service Profile data block
The Terminal Service Profile (TSP) configuration procedures define the service profiles for
ISDN BRI terminals connected to a DSL. A service profile specifies the type of transmission, the call restrictions, and the features the terminal can use.
Prompt
REQ
Response
aaa Request
Comment
732 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
TYPE
DSL
OPT
USID
MPHC
- SPID
TRMT
TEI
BCH
- LAPB
- X25P
- NTN
- PVC
Response
TSP l s c dsl a...a
(0)-15
(YES) NO a...a
a
0-63 x
(NO) YES
(YES) NO x...x
n1 n2
Comment
Type of data block = TSP (Terminal Service Profile)
Digital Subscriber Loop address
Options (a...a = DN, DNS, SPID, SUID, or USID)
User Service Identifier
Route D-channel packet switched data to the Meridian
Packet Handler
Service Profile Identifier
Terminating Type (D or B)
Static TEI for addressing terminal
Terminal Service Profile association (x = 1 or 2)
Change LAPB parameters
Change X.25 Parameters
Network Terminal Number
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number range
- IC
- TC
- OC
CDR n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2
(NO) YES
Incoming Logical Channel number range
Two-way Logical Channel number range
Outgoing Logical Channel number range
Internal CDR
FEATID
SSRV_NI aaa mmm nnn Feature ID association aaa mmm nnn NI-1 Supplementary Service
SUPL_SVC aaa
DN x..x yyyy
Supplementary Services (aaa = AO3 or AO6)
Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry (yyyy)
- CT
- MCAL
- CLIP
- PRES aaa
1-(4)-8
(YES) NO
(YES) NO
Call Types for the DN (aaa = VCE or DTA)
Maximum Calls allowed per DN
Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming calls
Presentation of CLID to far-end on outgoing calls
- ANIE
COLP
TRANS
FEAT
(0)-n
(NO) YES
(NO) YES a...a
ANI Entry
Connected Line Identification Presentation
Transparent presentation of COLP, CLID coming from S0 terminal without presentation option
Features (see FEAT responses in
Alphabetical list of prompts on page 734)
SSRV_ETSI aaa mmm nnn Supplementary Service
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 733
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt
DFDN
ERL
Response
x...x
(0)-65535
Comment
Default Directory Number
Emergency Response Locator
X25P: X25P packet protocol parameters data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
X25P
Request
Comment
Type of data block = X25P (X.25 packet protocol parameters)
LAPB Protocol Group Number PGPN
X25P
- T10/T20
0-15
(YES) NO
15-(180)-930
- T11/T21 15-(180)-930
- T12/T22 15-(180)-930
Change X.25 Parameters
Request restart Timer in 1 second units
Call request Timer in 1 second units
Reset request Timer in 1 second units
- T13/T23 0-15-(180)-930 Clear request Timer in 1 second units
- PSIZ xxx Default Packet Transmission Size in octets (xxx = 16, 32,
64, (128), or 256)
- WSIZ 1-(2)-7 Default Transmit Window Size in octets
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ANIE (0)-n
Comment
ANI Entry
Where n=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key.
If ANIE is from 1-N:
If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are retrieved from the ANI entry in
Customer Data Block, if configured.
Pack/Rel
cist-24
APPL Application bri-19
734 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
B1
Prompt Response
(BRI)
BRIE
BRIL
BRIT
MOB
MPH
Comment
Basic Rate Interface if Integrated Service Digital
Network BRI Trunk Access (BRIT) package 233 and Basic Rate Interface Line Application (BRIL) package 235 not equipped.
Basic Rate Interface protocol engine
BRIE supports the QSIG and EURO ISDN interfaces and requires BRIT package 233. Any changes in the DSL route has to match the BRIE loadware application.
To configure the appropriate application for the
DSL, the required application must be entered here. To add or delete an application, the MISP must be in a disabled state. To delete an application, all associated DSLs must be removed first.
Precede with an X to remove.
Pack/Rel
brit-20
Basic Rate Interface Line
APPL defaults to BRIL if BRIL package 235 is equipped. Otherwise, BRIT is the default.
Basic Rate Interface Trunk
BRIT supports SL-1, Numeris and 1TR6 interface.
APPL defaults to BRIL if BRIL package 235 is equipped. Otherwise BRIT is the default. BRIT package 233 is required.
Mobility Routing Application
Meridian Packet Handler
BRIL and MPH cannot operate on the same
MISP.
MPH can be deleted only if there are none of the following:
• no D-channel packet data separators
• no B-channel or D-channel terminals
• no network interface
• no PVC connections bri-18
B1CT
(NO) YES Change B-channel 1 configuration
When REQ = NEW B1 do not be prompted.
(VCE)
(DTA)
PMD
IPD
B-channel 1 Call Type
Circuit switched Voice
Circuit switched Data
Packet Mode Data
B-channel Packet Data with MPH bri-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 735
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
B2
Prompt Response Comment
For PMD the B-channel packet data must have been specified at the PH prompt during the MISP configuration procedure. PMD cannot be selected simultaneously with VCE and/or DTA.
Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
B2CT
(NO) YES Change B-channel 2 configuration.
When REQ = NEW and B2 = NO, all B1 parameters except for MEMB is used as default.
When REQ = CHG, BS = NO and a change was made to ROUT on B1, all parameters remains unchanged except for the route member number, which is an unused member. A message is output to inform the user of the new member number assigned.
bri-18
(VCE)
(DTA)
PMD
IPD
B-channel 2 Call Type
Circuit switched Voice
Circuit switched Data
Packet Mode Data
For PMD, the B-channel packet data must have been specified at the PH prompt during the MISP configuration procedure. PMD cannot be selected simultaneously with VCE and/or DTA.
B-channel Packet Data with MPH
Precede with X to remove.
bri-19
BCH
BRSC
1
2 l s c
TSP associated with the B1 DSL Channel
TSP associated with the B2 DSL Channel bri-19
Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator
Only 1 BRSC card can be enabled on a single IPE shelf.
bri-19 loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric fnf-25
CAC
CAC
0-(3)-9
(0) - 10
Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic
Number Information category code Allowed with
Commonwealth of Independent
States-Three Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package
221.
cist-21
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) CNI
Category Code Allowed with Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128.
mfc-9
736 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9
Comment
CIS ANI category code
CAC_MFC
CARD
(0)-10
1-9
MFC CNI Category Code
Pack/Rel
cist-24 cist-24
Card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG
1000B, and MG 1000T ISDN Signalling
Processor (SISP). CARD applies exclusively to
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T.
qsig-22
CDR
CH
CLIP
CLOK
(NO)
YES
1-23
1-30
Turn off Internal Call Detail Recording
Turn on Internal Call Detail Recording
Channel number for PRI
Channel number for PRI2
This channel carries D-channel packet data between the MISP and the packet handler. The
PRI route and channel must have already been defined in LD 16 and LD 14. Prompted if PH =
DCH or BDCH.
(YES) NO Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming calls.
bri-19 bri-18 bri-18
(NO) YES Clock source. Prompted if the following conditions are met: bri-18
• CTYP = SILC
• DSL = 0 or 1 (card dsl number)
• MODE = TE
For Option 11C, the SILC must reside in slot 1-10 of the base cabinet.
For CS 1000S, the SILC must reside in slot 1-4 of the MG 1000S basic-1
CLS
(ABDD)
ABDA
(APN)
APY
Class of Service
You can enter more than one Class of Service by separating each entry with a space.
Abandoned call record and time to answer Denied
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Allowed fcdr-18
ACD Priority not allowed
ACD Priority allowed dpnss-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 737
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response
(BRTD)
BRTA
Brent Denied
Brent Allowed
(ZBDD)
ZBDA
Comment Pack/Rel
basic-3.0
ZBDD denies external station activity records to be generated for the set
ZBDA allows external station activity records to be generated for the set mct-20
(DNAA)
COLP
DNAD
(ICDD)
ICDA
(MRD)
\MRA
(PGND)
PGNA
(PRMD)
PRMA
(THFD)
THFA
(UDI)
RDI
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
SRE
TLD
UNR
DN of the key that makes the call used in ANI messages.
Outgoing CDT/CDTI2 ANDN used as DN in ANI messages.
Commonwealth of Independent States - Three
Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package 221 is required.
cist-21 bri-20 Internal Call Detail Recording Denied
Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed
Message Restriction Denied
Message Restriction Allowed mr-10
Deny PAGENET access
Allow PAGENET access
Deny MLPP Alternate Party Preemption
Allow MLPP Alternate Party Preemption
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) Denied
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) Allowed
Unrestricted DID
Restricted DID
Conditionally Toll Denied (valid for TIE trunks only)
Conditionally Unrestricted (valid for TIE trunks only)
Fully Restricted Class 1 (valid for TIE trunks only)
Fully Restricted Class 2 (valid for TIE trunks only)
Fully Restricted (valid for TIE trunks only)
Semi-Restricted (valid for TIE trunks only)
Toll Denied (valid for TIE trunks only)
Unrestricted
Connected Line Identification Presentation pagenet-22 atvn-25.47
ipra-21 supp-10 bril-22
738 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Optional CONNECTED NUMBER IE and optional connected subaddress IE are not passed from M1 to S0
Optional CONNECTED NUMBER IE and optional
CONNECTED SUB-ADDRESS IE are passed from M1 to S0
Pack/Rel
CT VCE
DTA
CTYP SILC
UILC
Circuit switched Voice Call Type for the DN
Circuit switched Data Call Type for the DN
One or more call types can be entered by separating each entry with a space. The call types entered must have been specified for the B1CT and B2CT prompts during the DSL configuration procedures. Precede with X to remove.
bri-18
S/T Interface Line Card Type
U Interface Line Card Type
This prompt is displayed if only the S/T (SILC) or
U(UILC) Interface Line Card has not been previously configured or when configuring another DSL on the same SILC/UILC.
bri-18
CUST xx
DES
DFDN
DMPH
DN d...d
x...x
(YES)
NO x..x yyyy
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.
bri-18
DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters) bri-18
Default Directory Number
Enter a 1 to 7-digit directory number. This directory number must have been previously defined at the DN prompt. A directory number can be associated with multiple TSPs.
Only one default DN can be defined for a TSP.
This DN is sent in the outgoing setup if the terminal does not send a calling line identification number with the outgoing call.
bri-18
Meridian Packet Handler supports 8 SAPI 16 separators and 19 B-channels.
Meridian Packet Handler supports 3 SAPI 16 separators and 1 B-channels.
bri-19
Directory Number (x..x = 1 to 7 digits) and CLID table entry (yyyy).
bri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 739
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response Comment
Where yyyy is range for CLID table entry (yyyy) is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)]
The Directory Number cannot be shared by a non-
BRI terminal. 1-8 DNs can be assigned to a DSL.
The DN can be assigned to multiple TSPs on a
DSL but cannot be assigned to any other DSL.
Precede with X to remove.
Pack/Rel
DNAT mph-19
DNIC
1-32
<CR> xxxx
DNA Table to print
Prints all Data Network Address (DNA) tables
Data Network Identification Code
Enter a 4-digit DNIC for this item bri-19
DPSD (NO)
DSL
YES l s c dsl c dsl
Route D-channel Packet Switched Data calls to an external packet handler, or Public Switched
Packet Data Network (PSPDN).
Do not route D-channel Packet Switched Data calls to an external packet handler, or Public
Switched Packet Data Network (PSPDN).
mph-19
Digital Subscriber Loop address for Large System
For CS 1000E
Where: bri-20 basic-4.0
• l (superloop) = 0-156 (must be 0 or a multiple of 4)
• s (shelf) = 0-1
• c (card) = 0-15
• dsl (Digital Subscriber Loop) = 0-7
You can assign 31 DSLs for each MISP if you specified DCH or BDCH at the PH prompt during
MISP configuration procedures.
When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at this prompt prints out all DSLs in the system.
fnf-25 l = (0-255) Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric
Digital Subscriber Loop address.
For Small System, where:
• c (card) = 1-9
• c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 lse-25
740 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
For CS 1000S, where: c = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
For MG 1000T, where:
Where: c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 dsl (Digital Subscriber Loop) = 0-7
EFD x...x
EHT
ERL
FDN
FEAT x...x
<CR>
0-65535
X x...x
(CFTD)
CFTA
(CFXD)
CFXA
(DNDY)
DNDN
(DNO3)
DNO1
DNO2
Pack/Rel
basic-1.0
basic-4.00
External Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Directory Number (1-13 digits allowed)
External Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)
Current Emergency Response Locator.
Enter no value to make this TN Auto Update.
Enter a value to statically configure this TN
(Manual Update).
Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.
bri-18 bri-18 basic-5.00
Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory
Number (1-13 digits allowed)
Features
Call Forward by call Type Denied
Call Forward by call Type Allowed
Call Forward to External DN Denied
Call Forward to External DN Allowed. CFXA is valid if PRID = 2 or 6 in DSL.
bri-18 bri-18 isdn-20
Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification without called party's number and name.
qsig ss- 23
Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.
Diversion Notification Option without notification.
Diversion Notification Option without diverted-to party's number and name.
qsig ss- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 741
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
HUNT
IC
Prompt Response
(FBD)
FBA
Comment
Call Forward Busy Denied
Call Forward Busy Allowed
(FND)
FNA
(HBTD)
HBTA
(HTD)
HTA
Call Forward No Answer Denied
Call Forward No Answer Allowed
Hunting By call Type Denied
Hunting By call Type Allowed
Hunting Denied
Hunting Allowed
Always assign HTA if the terminal does have CWT capability.
Pack/Rel
FEATID
(MWD)
MWA
(SFD)
SFA
Message Waiting Denied
Message Waiting Allowed
Second level Call Forward No Answer Denied
Second level Call Forward No Answer Allowed aaa mmm nnn
Feature ID association
This is prompted when PRID = 6, to implement the
ISDN BRI Conferencing capability. Where: bri-19
• aaa = Feature: AO3 = 3-party conference,
AO6 = 6 party conference
• mmm = Feature activation ID (1-127)
• nnn = Feature indication ID (1-127)
This is optional. If nothing is entered, the same value as mmm is used. Feature activation and
Feature indication ID are the feature key assignments on the terminal. The key numbers must also be configured at the terminal level.
Recommended assignments are: M5317TDX:
AO6 15 and M5209TDcp: AO6 9.
x...x
n1 n2
<CR>
Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed) bri-18
Lowest incoming Logical Channel Number range
(1-4095)
Highest incoming Logical Channel Number range
(1-4095) no incoming LCNs bri-19
742 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ISDN_MCNT
60-(300)-350
Comment
Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.
Pack/Rel
qsig gf-22
K
LAPB
LAPD
LCN1
LCN2
(1)-7
(1)-32
Window size
Maximum number of outstanding negative acknowledgment (NAKs) frames.
(NO) YES Change Link Access Protocol for B-channels mph-19
(NO) YES Change Link Access Protocol for D-channels
0-15 bri-18
LAPD protocol group number for DSL assignment bri-19
1-4095 bri-19
1-4095
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel
Number for NT1
Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel
Number for NT2 bri-19 bri-19
LDN
LOOP
(NO)
0-5
No LDN assigned to the DSL
Departmental Listed Directory Number defined in
LD 15 bri-20
0, 2, 4,...158
xx bri-18
MISP loop (must be an even number and the next odd loop number must be unequipped)
When REQ = PRT, enter <CR> to print all MISPs in the system.
SISP loop For Small System, where:
• xx = 1-9
• xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For CS 1000S, where: lse-25 basic-1.0
c = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
For MG 1000T, where: basic-4.00
c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 xxx xxx = (0, 2, 4 ... 254) Systems with Fibre
Network Fabric fnf-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 743
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response
LTEI
Comment
Logical Terminal and Terminal Endpoint
Identifiers.
The Logical Terminal Identifier (LTID) consists of:
Pack/Rel
bri-18 n1 n2 m
Xm
<CR>
• Logical Terminal Group (LTG)
• Logical Terminal Number (LTN)
• Static Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) pair for D-channel packet data transmission
The maximum number of LTID and TEI pairs is defined by MTEI. LTG = 15 and LTN = 1023 is an invalid combination.
Logical Terminal Group (LTG) 1-15
Logical Terminal Number (LTN) 1-1023
TEI (0-63)
Deletes LTID and TEI as a pair for the specified
TEI
Go to the next prompt.
LTEI is prompted if D-channel packet data was specified for the associated MISP.
MCAL
MEMB
2-(16)-32 Maximum number of calls on a DSL at one time when TYPE = TSP. The maximum number of calls includes Active, Waiting, and On-Hold calls.
Warning is received if less than 8 is specified.
1-(4)-8 Maximum Calls allowed per DN when TYPE =
DSL. The maximum number of calls allowed for a directory number includes sum total of Active calls, Call Waiting, and calls On-Hold.
bri-18 bri-18
1-254
1-510
Member number of BRI route
Member number of BRI route
The specified route must match the BRI route type as well as the trunk type specified at the TKTP prompt.
bri-18 bri-24
MG_CARD supl sh card The Media Gateway card for the MISP associated to the IPMG. superloop shelf card.
IPMG 403
MISP 0, 2, 4...158 MISP loop number for large systems For CS
1000E ISDN BRI applications on the MISP must be disabled when changing the MISP loop or card. The SILC or UILC must be disabled before changing the MISP loop number.
bri-19 basic-4.0
744 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
xx
Comment
Prompted if the MISP has not been assigned to the specified SILC or UILC. Eight BRSC cards can be configured per MISP
ISDN signalling processor (SISP) card slot number
For Small System, where: xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For CS 1000S, where: xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
For MG 1000T, where: c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
Pack/Rel
basic-1.0
basic-4.00
MODE
MPH
NTAS
NTFS
(TE)
NT loop
Mode. Prompted when CTYP = SILC.
NTAS and NTFS can be input when APPL = BRI,
BRIL, or MPH. TE and NE can be input when
APPL = BRIT or BRIE.
bri-18
Network Termination Adaptive line Sampling
(extended passive bus, branched passive bus
Point-to-Point bus, U interface DSL)
Network Termination Fixed line Sampling (short passive bus)
Terminal Equipment Mode for DSL
Network Termination Mode for DSL. If CTYP =
UILC, then MODE = NT.
Meridian Packet Handler loop
This is the loop with the dedicated connection from the MISP card. Prompted when B2CT =
IPD.
mph-19 loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric fnf-25
MPHC
MTEI
(YES)
NO
1-(8)-20
Route D-channel packet switched data to the
Meridian Packet Handler
Route D-channel packet data calls to an external packet handler, or Public Switched Packet Data
Network (PSPDN) mph-19
Maximum Terminal Endpoint Identifiers bri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 745
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response Comment
MTEI represents the maximum number of both static and dynamic combined assigned to the logical terminals on a DSL.
MTFM
MTSP
N1
(NO) YES Multi-Frame Mode
Prompted if MODE = TE.
1-(8)-16 Maximum Terminal Service Profiles
23-(135)- 263
Maximum I-frame size (in octets)
N2
N200
N201
1-(10)-15
1-(3)-8
4-(260)
Maximum Number of retries
Maximum Number of retransmissions
Pack/Rel
bri-18 bri-18 mph-19 mph-19 bri-18
Maximum Number of contiguous octets or bytes in information element bri-18
N2X4
NACT
NCOS
NTN
NTN1
NTN2
0-(10)-20 Number of Status Inquiries when Remote Station is in peer busy for 1TR6 ovlp-15 odas-1
(NO)
YES
END
(0)-99
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.
End Overlay program
Network Class of Service bri-18 x...x
x...x
Network Terminal Number
Add the NTN to the DNA table. The NTN can be up to 10 digits; up to 32 NTN entries are supported for each table.
Enter a range of NTNs by separating the numbers with a space. Delete entry by preceding the number with X.
bri-19
First Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the
NTN
Up to 10 digits can be entered.
bri-19 x...x
Second Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN
Up to 10 digits can be entered.
bri-19
746 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NTNO (YES)
NO
Comment
Public Switched Packet Data Network presents only the NTN in the Incoming Call packet's called address field.
Public Switched Packet Data Network presents
NTN and DNIC in the Incoming Call packet's called address field
Pack/Rel
bri-19
NWIF 1-3
<CR>
OC
OPT n1 n2
<CR>
(BRIL)
MPH Network Interface Identifier
Indicates there is no identifier
Delete an identifier by preceding the entry with an
X.
bri-19
Outgoing Logical Channel number range
Lowest Incoming Logical Channel Number range
(1-4095) bri-19
Highest Incoming Logical Channel Number range
(1-4095) no incoming LCNs
PDCA
PGPN
PH
DN
DNS
SPID
SUID
USID
<CR>
1-16
0-15
ALL
<CR>
BRI Line application
This information is NOT downloaded to the DSL.
Terminal Service Profile (TSP) print options (when
REQ = PRT):
Print TSPs with the requested Directory
Number.
Print Directory Number for specified dsl.
Print TSPs with the specified Service Profile
Identifier.
Print Service Profile ID and User Service Identifier map.
Print TSPs with the specified User Service ID.
Print all TSPs defined for the specified dsl.
bri-19 bri-18 bri-18 Pad Category table defined in LD 73
Prompted if PRID = 2 or 4
Protocol Group Number
To remove all protocol groups. You cannot remove a protocol group if it is assigned to a
DSL.
To print all protocol groups and the number of
DSLs in each group
Packet Handler mph/bri-19 bri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 747
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response
(X)
DCH
BCH
BDCH
Comment
No packet data transmission
BRI terminal communicates with the packet handler using multiplexed D-channels over a dedicated BD-channel
BRI terminal communicates with the packet handler using a dedicated B-channel
Both D-channel and B-channel communicate with packet handler
If you select DCH or BDCH, the MISP can support only 31 DSLs because one serial port is dedicated to the packet handler.
Pack/Rel
PRES
PRFX
PRI
(YES) NO Presentation of CLID to far-end on outgoing calls.
0-9 DNA table Prefix.
bri-18 bri-19
0, 2,4,.....158
Primary Rate Interface xx
Loop numbers.
This Primary Rate Interface is connected to the packet handler. The Primary Rate Interface must have already been added in LD 17.
Prompted if B1CT or B2CT = PMD.
Card number
For Small System, where: bri-18 lse-25
• xx = 1-9
• xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49
For CS 1000S, where: basic-1.0
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44
For MG 1000T, where: basic-4.00
c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 xxx xxx = (0, 2, 4 ... 254) Systems with Fibre
Network Fabric fnf-25
PRI_CH loop channel
PRI for packet handler and BRSC connections.
Where: bri-19
748 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
loop (1-159) = the PRI loop number that is connected to the external packet handler channel (1-23) = the PRI channel number where the dedicated BRSC connection terminates
This PRI loop must have been previously assigned in LD 17, and must be dedicated to packet handler connection. The PRI channel must be configured for BRI packet data in LD 14 and
LD 16.
Pack/Rel
loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
PRID
1
2
3
4
5
6
Protocol ID. Prompted if REQ = NEW.
ANSI
ETSI
DMS
NET64
Numeris
NI-1
PRID = 6 allows the ISDN BRI conference feature to be configured in the TSPs of the DSL bri-19
PSIZ
PVC
PVCN
RATE
16 32 64 (128) 256
Default packet transmission Size (in octets) n1 n2 bri-19
Lowest Permanent Virtual Circuit logical channel number range
Highest Permanent Virtual Circuit logical channel number range bri-19
1-4
(64) 56
Permanent Virtual Circuit Number
PSDN communication Rate
This establishes the rate at which the PSDN communicates across the PRI channel network interface.
bri-19 bri-19
REQ
ROUT
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
0-511
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create a new data block
Remove data block
Print data block
Route number for the Trunk DSL bri-18 bri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 749
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response Comment
The specified route must match the BRI route type as well as the trunk type specified at the TKTP prompt. The specified route must be on the
Network (NET) side if MODE = NT for the DSL.
Pack/Rel
SCPW xxxxx
SGRP
SPID
(0)-999 a ... a
Station Control Password
The SCPW entry must equal the Station Control
Password Length (SCPL) defined in LD 15.
SCPW is not prompted if SCPL = 0. Precede entry with "X" to delete.
isdn-20
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number bri-18
SSRV_ETSI
VCFW
DCFW
VID7
Service Profile Identifier
Where: aaa...a = 9-character alphanumeric service profile ID. A maximum of 8 valid SPIDs per
TSP are allowed. Precede with X to remove.
Any combination of 20 characters or less is valid.
Prompted only if the user service identifier is 1-15.
It is repeated until <CR> is entered but only up to
8 SPIDs should be entered. This SPID must be entered in the initializing terminal to associate the terminal with a USID.
bri-18 bri-23
Supplementary Service
Voice Call Forward. VCFW is valid if CT = VCE or if CT = VCE and DTA.
isdn-20
Data Call Forward. DCFW is valid if CT =DTA or
VCE and DTA. Prompted if PRID = 2 (ETSI) in the
DSL.
The ETSI set supports telephony 7 KHz/
Videotelephony teleservices
Precede with X to remove, the service must not be active.
euro-24
SSRV_N1 aaa mmm nnn
NI-1 Supplementary Service. Where:
• aaa = VCFA (Voice Call Forward
Activation) if CT = VCE
• aaa = VCFD (Voice Call Forward
Deactivation) if CT = VCE
• aaa = DCFA (Data Call Forward Activation) if CT = DTA isdn-20
750 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
• aaa = DCFD (Data Call Forward
Deactivation) if CT = DTA
• mmm = Feature Activation ID, 1-127
• nnn = Feature Indication ID, 1-127 (If not defined, mmm is used).
The same mmm value can be assigned to VCFA and VCFD, or to DCFA and DCFD. Precede with
X to remove, not allowed if feature is activated.
Prompted if PRID = 6.
Pack/Rel
isdn-20 SUPL_SVC
T1
AO3
AO6
Supplementary Services
Three-Party Conference
Six-Party Conference
Precede with X to remove.
2-(6)-130 Response Timer (in units of 0.5 seconds)
Default is 3 seconds.
mph-19
T10/T20
T11/T21
15-(180)-930
Request Restart Timer (in 1 second units)
15-(180)-930
Call Request Timer (in 1 second units) mph-19 bri-19
T12/T22
T13/T23
T2
T3
T200
15-(180)-930
Reset Request Timer (in 1 second units)
0-15-(180)-930
Clear request timer (in 1 second units)
1-(4)-129 Maximum frame delay (in units of 0.5 seconds)
Default is 2 seconds. T2 must be less than T1.
3-(12)- 131 Idle Timer (in units of 0.5 seconds)
Default is 6 seconds
0 Turns off the timer.
If this is not 0, it must be greater than T1.
(2)-40 Retransmission Timer
Registered in increments of 0.5 seconds to specify the time delay which occurs before the system retransmits the information.
bri-19 bri-19 mph-19 mph-19 bri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 751
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response
T203 4-(20)-80
Comment
Maximum Time between transmission frames (in increments of 0.5 seconds)
Pack/Rel
bri-18
T310 Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state.
10-(30)-60 Default = (10) seconds for TCNZ
Default = (30) seconds for QSIG
110-(120) This range applies to PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks qsig-20
TC
TEI
TGAR
TIMR n1 n2
<CR>
Lowest two-way Logical Channel Number range
Highest two-way Logical Channel Number range
No two-way LCNs mph-19
0-63 Static TEI for addressing terminal
This is given in units of 1 second.
Trunk Group Access Restriction number 0-(1)-31
(NO) YES Change Timer values. Not prompted for APISDN
AUST.
mph-19 bri-18
TKTP
TN
TIE
COT
DID l s c
TIE Trunk Type
COT Trunk Type
DID Trunk Type
Terminal Number of SILC or UILC. Prompted when B1CT= PMD. Where: bri-20
• l (loop) = 0-156 (must be 0 or a multiple of
4)
• s (shelf) = 0-1
• c (card) = 1-15
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 l (loop) = 0-252 (must be 0 or a multiple of
4)
If REQ = PRT, entering:
• l: prints out information for all cards on this loop
• l s: prints out information for all cards on that loop and shelf
752 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
l s c u loop ch
1-20
Comment
• <CR>: prints out information for all system cards
• card: prints information for this card (Small
Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T only)
Terminal Number
PRI loop and B-channel number
Small System
Pack/Rel
TRANS (NO)
TRMT
TSET
TYPE
YES
D
B
0-15
BRSC
CARD
DNAT
DSL
LAPB
LAPD
MISP
PROT
PVC
TSP
X25P
Restrict presentation of COLP, CLID coming from
S0 terminal without presentation option
If TRANS = NO and if the presentation indicator is set to restricted, the number digits are erased from the information element before it is sent to the S0 terminal.
CONNECTED NUMBER IE received from the
Meridian 1 is sent transparently to S0 terminal, even if restricted bril-22 bri-20 Terminating Type
D-channel terminal type configuration used
B-channel terminal configuration type used
Threshold Set for clock errors tset-7
Type of data block
BRI Signaling Concentrator
S/T (SILC) or U (UILC) Interface Line Card data block
Data Network Address Tables
Digital Subscriber Loop data block
Link Access Protocol on B-channels
Link Access Protocol on D-channel
Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block
Protocol group data block
Permanent Virtual Circuit connections
Terminal Service Profile data block
X.25 Packet Protocol Parameters bri-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 753
LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration
Prompt Response
USER
(NO)
YES
Comment
Print groups selected at PGPN prompt. USER is prompted when REQ = PRT.
Do not print LAPB or LAPD group user information
Print LAPB or LAPD group user information
(LAPB or LAPD groups selected at the PGPN prompt as well as the TSPs or MPH network interfaces which use them)
Pack/Rel
mph-19
USID (0)-15
ALL
User Service Identifier
The total number of TSPs defined for a DSL cannot exceed the maximum number of TSPs allowed for a DSL as specified by the MTSP prompt during the DSL configuration procedures.
Removes all TSPs defined for the DSL. Use only when REQ = OUT.
A default TSP should be configured for noninitializing terminals. This is done by assigning
USID = 0 to the TSP.
bri-18
WSIZ
X25P
XLST
XPVC
1-(2)-7 Default Transmit Window Size (in octets) bri-19
(YES) NO Change X.25 Parameters
If these parameters are changed, all active calls associated with the TSPs and network interfaces for the group is dropped.
bri-19
(0)-254 bri-18
(YES)
NO
Pretranslation group
Prompted if PREO = 1 in LD 15
External PVC connection
Internal PVC connection bri-19
754 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 28: LD 28: Route Selection for
Automatic Number Identification
Overlay program 28 allows data for Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification (RS-ANI) to be created, modified, and printed.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
RSAC
0-RT
0+RT
1RT
CORT
Response
aaa
RSA xx xxxx x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = RSA (Route Selection ANI)
Customer number associated with this function
RS-ANI Access Code digits
0- calls, Route access code (calls to Public Network
Operator
0+ calls, Route access code
1+ or IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) calls
Route access code
Central Office (local calls) Route access code
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
0+RT x...x
Comment
0+ calls Route access code (for toll calls that require
Public Network Operator assistance)
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150
Pack/Rel
ani-1
0-RT x...x
0- calls, Route access code (calls to Public Network
Operator ani-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 755
LD 28: Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification
Prompt Response Comment
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150
1RT x...x
Pack/Rel
1+ or IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) calls,
Route access code
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150 ani-1
CORT x...x
CUST
REQ
RSAC
TYPE xx
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT xxxx
RSA
Central Office (local calls) Route access code
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150 ani-1 ani-1 Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15
Request
Change an existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create a New data block
Remove data block
Print RSA data ani-1
RS-ANI Access Code digits
Route Selection ANI data block ani-20 ani-1
756 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 29: LD 29: Memory Management
Overlay program 29 is used to determine the following:
• determine the amount of unused memory
• determine if sufficient memory is available to accommodate substantial amounts of new data to be added
• respond to messages SCH601 and SCH603 on SL-1 XN & XL
Prompts and responses
REQ
MSG
Prompt Response
aaa x...x
Comment
Request
SCH Message (x...x = 601 or 603 xx)
NEW DATA PLANNED?
(NO) YES New data to be added in this program?
TYNM aaa xx Type and Number (TYNM responses begin on
TYNM)
OPT
MAP
DISPLAY NEW MAP?
SAVE NEW MAP?
aaaa a...a
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Option (aaaa = FULL or FREE)
Active Map or Data Dump (a...a = ACT or DUMP)
Display new map
Save new map
PWD2
CHANGE MAP?
CMD
PGMM
PGBY xxxx Password 2
(NO) YES Change Map a...a
xxx yy
Command (a...a = ASGN or CHK)
Page/Memory Module xxx yyyyy Page/Bytes
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 757
LD 29: Memory Management
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CHANGE MAP?
(NO) YES
Comment
Change map
Prompted when SAVE NEW MAP? = NO or automatic map generator fails (message
MEM150)
CMD
ASGN
CHK
DISPLAY NEW MAP?
(NO) YES
Command
Assign logical page and memory number
Check memory map
MAP
ACT
DUMP
Display new map
Prompted when a new map has been created
Map
Active map
Data dump
Prompted when REQ = PRT
MSG
OPT
601
603 xx
NEW DATA PLANNED?
(NO) YES
FULL
FREE
Pack/Rel
basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1
SCH Message. Prompted when REQ = SCH.
basic-1
Enter 601 when SCH message is 601
Enter 603 followed by the parameters printed with the SCH603 message during an attempt to add data.
basic-1
New data to be added in this program?
Prompted when REQ = SCH
Option
Full map
Free space only basic-1
758 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PGBY
PGMM
Response
xxx yyyyy
Comment
Page/Bytes (used to define logical page size).
Where:
• xxx = Logical Page number (0-254,
256-510)
• yyyyy = size (1-65535)
Prompted only if CMD = ASGN.
xxx yy
Pack/Rel
basic-1
Page/Memory Module (used to determine the
Memory Module where Logical Pages reside or where they are moved). Where: basic-1
• xxx = Logical Page number (0-254,
256-510)
• yy = Memory Module number (00, 01, 02)
Prompted only if CMD = ASGN.
PWD2
REQ xxxx
ADD
CHG
CLR
PRT
END
GEN
SCH
Password 2 (Second level administration password as defined in LD 17) basic-1
Request
Create a new data block
Change existing map (SL-1XN & XL systems only)
Clear map
Print the specified map
Exit Overlay program
Generate a new map. Do not use this response unless ROMs with memory extensions are in place.
Change map in response to error messages
SCH601 and SCH603 basic-1 basic-1 SAVE NEW MAP?
TYNM
(NO) YES Save new map
Prompted when a new map has been created
Type and Number
500 1-12800 Number of new 500/2500 telephones
ACD 0-99 1-240 1-240 basic-1 basic-1 bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 759
LD 29: Memory Management
Prompt Response Comment
Customer number, number of ACD DN, maximum number of positions per ACD DN
AGNT 1-12800
Number of Agent positions
ANI xxx yyyy zzzz
Feature Group D ANI data blocks. Where:
Pack/Rel
bacd-1 fgd-17
• xxx = number of NPAs (1-160)
• yyyy = number of ranges of NXXs
(0-9999)
• zzzzz = number of ranges of XXXXs
(0-30,000)
APRT 1-16 Number of ACD Printers
ATM 1-4096 Number of ATM routes for the system
ATT 1-480 Number of consoles
AUB 1-99 1-5000 1-14
BGD 1-15 1-99
Customer number, number of authcodes, authcode digit length
Number of Background Terminals in the system, and the number of customers in the system
Number of new customers CDB 1-99
CDL 1-16 Number of CDR links
CDP 0-99 1-10000
Customer number, number of steering codes
CONF xxx Number of Conference loops
CPG 1-100 1-63
CPG Level services, customers and average size bacd-1 atm-7 basic-1 baut-1 bgd-10 basic-1 clnk-1 cdp-1 basic-1
CPND xx yy zz
Calling Party Name Display data xx = number of customers with CPND, 1-99 yy = number of CPND names per customer,
1-1000 zz = average size of name string, 5-27 characters
CRB 1-1024 Number of Code Restriction Blocks cpnd-10 basic-1
760 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DGT 1-99 xx xx
Comment
DIS 0-99 1-240
Customer number, number of digit manipulation tables, maximum average number of inserted digits
Customer number, number of DISA DN
DND 1-99 1-100 1-127
Customer number, number of DND groups, average number of numbers per group
DTR 1-126 Number of Digitone Receivers
EBLF xx yy zz
Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Where:
Pack/Rel
basic-1 disa-1 dndg-1 basic-1 basic-14
• xx = the number of customers (1-99) to receive the feature
• yy = average number of hundreds groups per customer
• zz = average DN length (4, 5, 6 or 7 digits)
ESN xx Number of customers with ESN (1-99)
FCAS 1-99 xx yy zz
Customer number, number of Free Calling Area tables, maximum average number of FCAS blocks, maximum average number of different first digit of NXX codes
FGD xxx yyy
FGD data blocks. Where: basic-1 fca-1 fgd-17
• xxx = number of FGD blocks (1-128)
• yyy = average number of II entries
FTC 0-31
MFC xx
MFE xx
Number of Flexible Tone Control tables
Number of Multifrequency Compelled Signaling cards
Number of Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel cards
MFR 1-99 0-126 0-126
Automatic Call Distribution routes ftc10 mfc-9 mfe-10 bacd-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 761
LD 29: Memory Management
Prompt Response Comment
Number of customers, average number of ACD routes per customer, average largest member number per ACD route
MFRR 1-255
Number of Multifrequency Receivers
MFSD xx
MFT xx yy zz
Number of MF Sender loops
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling. Where:
Pack/Rel
fgd-17 basic-1 mfc-9
• xx = number of MFC tables
• yy = number of levels per table
• zz = average number of signals per level
MFET xx yy zz
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel. Where: mfe-10
• xx = number of MFE tables
• yy = number of levels per table
• zz = average number of signals per level
NACD xx yy zz
Network Automatic Call Distribution. Where:
• xx = the number of NACD customers
• yy = average number of source DNs
• zz = average number of target ACD DNs
NCTL 1-99 Number of customers with NTCL
NET 1-99 xx yy
Customer number, number of Network
Translation codes, number of LOC codes
RDB 1-4064 1-126
Number of Routes, average largest member number
REMO xx Number of RPE loops
RLB 1-99 1-256 1-32
RSA 1-99
Customer number, number of Route Lists, maximum average number of entries
Number of customers to get RS-ANI basic-1 esn-1 basic-1 rpe-1 basic-1 ani-1
762 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
SCL 4-31 1-1000 1-8191
Comment
DN size as defined in LD 18, list size as defined in LD 18, number of new lists
SDR 1-99 xx yy
Customer number, number of Supplemental
Digit Restriction blocks, maximum average number of entries
Pack/Rel
optf-1 basic-1
SL1 1-12800 basic-1
SUP 1-16
TAP 1-3
TDS 1-80
Number of new SL-1 telephones
Number of ACD Supervisor TTY
Number of new Tape units
Number of new TDS loops bacd-1 basic-1 basic-1
TENC 1-99 Number of customers that have Tenant Service ten-7
TENR 0-127 Number of routes that is shared by Tenants ten-7 ten-7 TENT 0-512 Number of Tenants that have access to each other
TERM 1-159 Number of new Terminal loops basic-1
TRK 1-6400 Number of new Trunks
TTY 1-16 Number of new TTY basic-1 basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 763
LD 29: Memory Management
764 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 30: LD 49: New Flexible Code
Restriction and Incoming Digit
Conversion
Overlay program 49 allows the building, changing, deleting, moving, and printing of code restriction trees and the cancellation of all New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) data.
Overlay program 49 also allows the building, changing, deleting, moving, and printing of Incoming DID
Digit Conversion (IDC) data.
Prompts and responses
FDID
HOSP
XPDN
SDID
IDGT
AUTH
CRNO
INIT
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
FROM
TO
CUST
DCNO
ALOW
- UPDT
Response
aaa aaa
0-99 0-254
0-99 0-254 xx
0-254
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Request
Type of data block (aaa = FCR or IDC)
Source customer and tree number
Destination customer and tree number
Customer number
Digit Conversion tree Number
Flexible DID IDC tree
Hospitality IDC table
Expand DN length by 1-8 (1-5) digits
Send calling party DID
0-9999 0-9999 Incoming Digits xxxx Authcode
(0)-254 aaaa xxxx
(YES) NO
Code Restriction tree Number
Initial (aaaa = ALOW or DENY) Allow or deny all codes.
Digit sequence to be allowed.
Update Tree
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 765
LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion
Prompt
DENY
- UPDT
FRCE
BYPS
- UPDT
Response
xxxx
(YES) NO
(NO) YES xxxx
(YES) NO
Comment
Digit sequence to be denied.
Update Tree
Force
Digit sequence to be bypassed.
Update Tree
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ALOW
Response
xxxx
AUTH
BYPS
CRNO
CUST xxxx y...y
xxxx xxxx
(0)-254 xx
<CR>
Comment
Allow (Digit sequence to be allowed unconditionally)
Prompted when INIT = DENY.
Digit sequence to be conditionally allowed and maximum number of digits that can follow
A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.
when United Kingdom (UK) package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed. Enter
<CR> to end ALOW prompt.
Pack/Rel
nfcr-2
Authcode associated with the DID directory number printed directly above the AUTH prompt.
ffc-16
Bypass (Digit sequence to be bypassed)
A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.
when UK package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped, a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed. Enter <CR> to end
BYPS prompt.
nfcr-2
Code Restriction tree Number (NFCR tree number)
The maximum number of trees allowed for a customer is defined by prompt MAXT in LD
15.
nfcr-2
Customer number
For all customers nfcr-2
766 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DCNO
DENY
FCSD
FDID
FRCE
FROM
HOSP
Response
0-254 xxxx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-99 0-254
(NO) YES
Comment
Prompted when REQ = PRT.
Digit Conversion tree Number (IDC tree number)
A HOSP IDC tree number cannot be 0. Its valid range is 1-254.
Pack/Rel
idc-12
Deny (Digit sequence to be denied)
A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.when UK package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed.
Prompted when INIT = ALOW.
nfcr-2
Controls the SDID tree structure when an inconsistency occurs between the SDID and
IDC tree. FCSD is printed only when SDID =
YES and inconsistencies are found.
If FCSD = YES then the newly entered
Internal DN is placed in the SDID tree, and some of the existing SDID data is lost.
If FCSD = NO then the existing SDID data is retained and the newly entered input Internal
DN will not be in the SDID tree structure.
Note:
It is not possible to exit the overlay at this prompt using "end" or "****". Only a YES or NO response is acceptable.
Flexible DID IDC tree fdid-24
Force the storage or release of data.
If an entry for ALOW, DENY or BYPS conflicts with existing data, FRCE is prompted.
For example, ALOW = 7 and the existing
ALOW = 7000. In this case enter "NO" to ignore the data, or "YES" to accept the change. A modification of this type may result in the loss of portions of the tree.
If REQ = RLS and FRCE = YES, then all the customer's NFCR data is deleted. Prompt
NFCR in LD 15 must be set to NO first.
nfcr-2
Source customer and tree number
Hospitality IDC table nfcr-2 dnis-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 767
LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion
Prompt
IDGT
Response Comment
0-9999 0-9999 Incoming Digits (DN or range of DNs to be converted)
The external DNs to be converted is output and the users enter the internal DN. For example, to convert the external DN 3440 to
510, enter:
Pack/Rel
idc-12
• Prompt: Response
• IDGT: 3440
• 3440: 510
To convert the external DNs in the range
3440 to 3465, enter:
• Prompt: Response
• IDGT: 3440 3465
• 3440: 444
• 3441: 445
• .
• .
• 3465: 469
This is not a prompt. This is the DID directory number which delineates the following prompt.
To delete a DN or a DN from a range of DNs
• Prompt: Response
• IDGT: 3440
• 3440 x
INIT
REQ
ALOW
DENY
CHG
END
MOV
NEW
Initial
To specify digit strings to be denied
To specify digit strings to be allowed
Entering DNs can be affected by the
Outpulsing feature for Japan.
nfcr-2
Request
Change an existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Move existing data block to a new customer and/or NFCR tree data block
Create a new data block nfcr-2
768 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
OUT
PRT
RLS
RPL
SDID
TO
TYPE
UPDT
XPDN
(NO)
YES
0-99 0-254
FCR
IDC
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
Comment
Remove a specified NFCR tree data block
Print NFCR tree data block
Release all NFCR data blocks for a specified customer
Replace data in the specified NFCR tree data block with new data
Pack/Rel
Send DN of set when calling party number is requested dnis-15
Send DID of set. If no DID for set, then no DN is sent.
Prompted when the International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package is equipped and REQ = NEW
Destination customer and tree number nfcr-2 nfcr-2 Type of data block
NFCR data block
Incoming Digit Conversion data block
Update Tree
Data is correct and can update the NFCR tree.
Expand DN length by 1-8 (1-5) digits.
A response of YES requires twice the memory per DN.
nfcr-2 basic-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 769
LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion
770 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 31: LD 50: Call Park and Modular
Telephone Relocation
Overlay program 50 allows the implementation and administration of the Call Park and Meridian Modular
Telephone Relocation features.
Prompts and responses
Call Park data
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
BLOC
CPTM
RECA
SPDN
MURT
Response aaa
CPK xx
1-5
30-(45)-240
(NO) YES
(0)-50 xxxx
0-511
Comment
Request
Type of data block = CPK (Call Park)
Customer number associated with this function
Call Park block number
Call Park Timer (in seconds)
Recall parked call to attendant
Number of contiguous system park DNs and first DN
Music Route
Meridian Modular Telephone ID change during relocation
The serial number, NT code, color code or release information stored in a Meridian Modular
Telephone can be changed during the relocation sequence. This can be done only after the set has "relocated out" and before it is "relocated in" to the new location. An application of this occurs when the terminal is being replaced with one of the same type and requires the same key configuration.
See Set Relocation Data in LD 21, and IDU: Print set ID command in LD 32.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 771
LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
TN
SER
NTCD
COLR
RLS
Response aaa
MTRT
I s c u xxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx xx
Comment
Request = CHG or OUT
Type of data block = MTRT (Meridian Modular
Telephone Relocation Table)
Terminal Number
Serial number
NT (product) Code
Color
Release
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
BLOC 1-5
ALL
<CR>
Comment
Call Park block number
Where:1-5 allows the system administrator to define the subsequent prompts. After subsequent prompts have been defined, the administrator is returned to the BLOC prompt until a carriage return (<CR>) is entered.
The Primary Call Data Block (block 1) must be defined before any Secondary Call Park Blocks
(2-5) can be added.
Enter ALL when REQ = OUT to remove all Call
Park Blocks
Enter <CR> to return to the REQ prompt.
BLOC is prompted if CPRKNET package 306 is equipped.
Pack/Rel
cprknet-22
COLR xx Color of Meridian Modular Telephone. The color codes are:
• 03 is black
• 35 is chameleon ash
• 93 is dolphin arie-18
CPTM 30-(45)-240
30-(45)-480
Call Park Timer (in seconds)
Call Park recall time (in seconds) if CPRK package 33 is equipped cprk-20
772 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
The amount of time a call is held in the parked state before recalling the parking set or the attendant.
CUST xx
MURT
NTCD
0-511
X xxxxxxxx
Pack/Rel
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 cprk-2 mus-1 Music Route number for parked calls
Remove existing music route.
New NT (product) Code of Meridian Modular
Telephone arie-18
RECA
REQ
(NO)
YES
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
Recall Attendant
Unanswered parked calls recall the parking set
Unanswered parked calls recall the attendant cpk-20
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program.
Create a new Call Park data block (not applicable if TYPE = MTRT)
Remove data block
Print call park data block (not applicable if TYPE
= MTRT) cprk-2
RLS
SER
SPDN xx xxxxxx xx yyyy
New Release of Meridian Modular Telephone
New Serial Number of Meridian Modular
Telephone asr-18 arie-18
System Park DNs
Number of contiguous System Park DNs, and first
DN Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Where: xx = # of contiguous System Park DNs. The range is: yyyy = First Call Park DN
• (0)-50
• (0)-100 when CPRK package 33 is equipped cprk-2
TN l s c u
Terminal Number
Old Terminal Number of set in relocation table arie-18 fnf-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 773
LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation
Prompt Response
c u
Comment
Where: l = 0-254 Systems with Fibre Network
Fabric
Old Terminal Number of set in relocation table
(Option 11C format)
TYPE
CPK
MTRT
Type of data block
Call Park data block
Meridian Modular Telephone Relocation Table
Pack/Rel
cprk-2
774 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 32: LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment
Overlay program 52 defines the 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) group data and system thresholds.
Overlay program 52 is not supported on small systems.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold) on page 775
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)
on page 776
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold)
on page 777
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer) on page 777
Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block
on page 778
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
GRP
TASK
LFAL
Response
aaa
RPE2
1-31
CTHS
0-(5)-255
Comment
Request
Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment)
RPE group number
Counter Threshold
Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 775
LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment
Prompt
FAEL
PCML
LFAR
FAER
PCMR
RPF
LINT
BGTH
Response
0-(5)-255
0-(5)-255
0-(5)-255
0-(5)-255
0-(5)-255
0-(3)-255
0-(2)-255
0-(3)-7
Comment
Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site
Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site
Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Remote site
Remote Processor Failure
Local site Initialization of Remote Peripheral Controller
Background Threshold
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
GRP
TASK
ID
LM0
LM1
LM2
LM3
- SPAR
Response
aaa
RPE2
1-31
GMBR x...x
xxx xxx xxx xxx
(NO) YES
Comment
Request
Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment)
RPE Group number
Group Member
Identifier
Loop number for Member 0 in the group (first primary loop)
Loop number for Member 1 in the group (second primary loop)
Loop number for Member 2 in the group (third primary loop)
Loop number for Member 3 in the group (fourth primary loop or spare loop if SPAR = YES)
Spare loop option
776 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
GRP
TASK
LFAL
FAEL
PCML
LFAR
FAER
PCMR
RPF
Response
aaa
RPE2
1-31
TTHS
2-(10)-999
2-(600)-999
2-(600)-999
2-(10)-999
2-(10)-999
2-(600)-999
128-
(1024)-9999
Comment
Request
Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment)
RPE group number
Timer Threshold
Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site in seconds
Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site in seconds
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site in seconds
Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site in seconds
Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site in seconds
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Remote site in seconds
Remote Processor Failure in milliseconds
2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
GRP
TASK
ERR
NND
Response
aaa
RPE2
1-31
NND
10-(14)-30
0-(56)-1800
Comment
Request
Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment)
RPE group number
No New Data call timer
Error threshold in seconds
No New Data call time in seconds
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 777
LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment
Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
GRP
LOOP
Response
OUT
RPE2
1-31 x xx x
Comment
Remove
Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment)
RPE Group number
Loop numbers for loops to be removed.
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
BGTH 0-(3)-7
Comment
Background Threshold (Unsparing attempts allowed by background)
A response of 0 deactivates the background processing of LD 53 for this RPE group.
ERR
FAEL
FAER
Pack/Rel
rpe2-15
10-(14)-30 Error threshold in seconds
Time after which the NND state is entered.
rpe2-15
2-(600)-999 Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site in seconds
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS
0-(5)-255 Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site
Prompted when TYPE = CTHS rpe2-15
2-(10)-999 Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site in seconds
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS
0-(5)-255 Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site
Prompted when TYPE = CTHS rpe2-15
GRP
ID
LFAL
1-31
<CR> x...x
RPE group number
All RPE group numbers, when REQ = PRT
Identifier (1-16 character alphanumeric group identification) rpe2-15 rpe2-15
2-(10)-999 Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site in seconds rpe2-15
778 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS
0-(5)-255 Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site
Prompted when TYPE = CHTS
LFAR 2-(10)-999 Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site in seconds
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS
0-(5)-255 Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site
Prompted when TYPE = CHTS
LINT
LM0
LM1
LM2
0-(2)-255 Local site Initialization of Remote Peripheral
Controller (RPC)
0-159 Loop number for group member 0 (1st primary loop)
Precede with X to delete a loop number
0-159
0-159
Loop number for group member 1 (2nd primary loop)
Precede with X to delete a loop number
Loop number for group member 2 (3rd primary loop)
Precede with X to delete a loop number
LM3
LOOP
NND
PCML
Pack/Rel
rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15
0-159 x xx x
ALL
Loop number for group member 3 (4th primary loop or spare loop if SPAR = YES)
Precede with X to delete a loop number.
rpe2-15
Loop numbers for loops to be removed.
All loops in the group are removed
If accepted, then the whole group is removed.
rpe2-15
0-(56)-1800 No New Data call time in seconds
The time to stay in the NND state. Time is stored as nearest lower multiple of 8. A response of 0 deactivates the NND error handling system on this
RPE group.
rpe2-15
2-(600)-999 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site in seconds.
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS.
0-(5)-255 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site
Prompted when TYPE = CHTS rpe2-15 rpe2-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 779
LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment
Prompt Response
PCMR
Comment
2-(600)-999 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at
Remote site in seconds.
Prompted when TYPE = TTHS.
0-(5)-255 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at
Remote site
Prompted when TYPE = CHTS
REQ
RPF
Pack/Rel
rpe2-15
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
Request
Change a data block
Exit Overlay program
Create a new data block
When an RPE group is created using REQ = NEW, counter and timer thresholds are initialized to their default values.
Remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block
Print 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block
128-(1024)-9999
Remote Processor Failure (milliseconds) rpe2-15 rpe2-15
RPF
SPAR
TASK
TYPE
0-(3)-255
(NO) YES
CTHS
GMBR
NND
THRS
TTHS
RPE2
Remote Processor Failure
Spare loop option
Counter Threshold
Group Member
No New Data call timer
Threshold data (timer/counter)
Timer Threshold
When REQ = PRT, TASK can only be GMBR or
THRS
Type of data block
2.0 Mb/s RPE group data rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15
780 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 33: LD 56: Flexible Tones and
Cadences
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) is an optional feature that is used to customize the tones provided to telephone users. FTC is primarily intended for international markets where tones which are different from the North American defaults are required.
Overlay program 56 allows the implementation and administration of tone and ringing parameters for one or more customers. If the FTC feature (package 125) is not equipped, North American tones and cadences are used.
An FTC table number can be entered for each trunk route at prompt TTBL in LD 16. Table 0 is the default for all trunk routes and contains the defaults for North America.
What are tones and cadences?
Tones are used to provide call status to telephone users. A tone is defined by both the frequency and volume of the sound.
Tones are provided in on and off phases. One or more cycles of on/off cycles make up a tone's cadence. For example, the default cadence for normal North American ringing is 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, and so on.
Flexible Tone and Cadence (FTC) tables
FTC tables define the tones and cadences used for various calling features. Up to 31 FTC tables can be created. Each table can be associated with one or more trunk routes by entering the table number in response to prompt TTBL in LD 16.
Master Cadence (MCAD) table
The Master Cadence Table (MCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by software. These are used for single line sets (500/2500) and digital sets.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 781
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
The MCAD can have 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases each.
Entry 0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries 1-15 are reserved for ringing cadences.
Most of the software cadences are continuously repetitive unless it is specified that the tone should end after the last phase. There are four exceptions to this rule: prompts ACBT,AOBT,
INTU and OVRD cadences repeat the last 8 phases. This allows a special initial tone burst to be defined. To have the first cycle repeat, it must be defined as both the first and last cycle.
A cadence is defined at the CDNC prompt by entering the time for each on and off phase. The time depends on the settings for the TMRK prompt in LD17 which defines the software cadence increments as 96 or 128 ms. For each phase, enter the closest multiple of 5 ms equal to the multiple of 96 or 128 ms which gives the a time Š the time required.
The range for the first phase is 1-9999. The range for the second phase is 0-9999. Once an
MCAD entry has been created, it can be changed but not removed.
For example, given LD 17 TMRK is set to 128 ms, and a repeating 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off cadence is required.
1. Determine the ON phase (2 seconds = 2000 ms) 2000/128 = 15.625 = 16 (always round up) 128 x 16 = 2048 ms multiple of 5 closet to 2048 ms = 2050 Entry for prompt CDNC = 2050/5 = 0410
2. Determine the OFF phase (4 seconds = 4000 ms). By using the same calculation, the entry for prompt CDNC = 0820.
3. To define the cadence, respond to the prompts as follows:
REQ NEW, CHG TYPE MCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820
To define the cadence: 2 s on, 4 s off, 4 s on, 2 s off, repeat cycle 1 and 2, enter:
CDNC 0410 0820 0820 0410
To define the cadence: 2 s on, then steady off, enter:
CDNC 0410, or CDNC 0410 0000
If an odd number of non-zero phases are entered, software ends the tone after the last ON phase. Once a zero phase has been entered, it cannot be followed by non-zero phases. A carriage return at any phase results in zero for the remaining phases.
Once the cadence is defined, it can be entered in response to the CDNC prompt for a given feature. For example, CDNC is output after the Call Waiting tone prompt.
Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table
The Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by an NT8D17
Conference/TDS/MFS card.
782 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table
The FCAD can have 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases. Entry
0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries 1-15 are reserved for ringing cadences. Each phase is in multiples of 5 ms.
FCAD cadences have the following capabilities:
• Each cadence can be defined to end at the "on" phase, the "off" phase, or repeat after a single pass through the defined on/off cycles. Any or all of the five cycles can be repeated.
• Unique tones can be defined for each "on" phase. These tones are permanently held in the Conference/TDS/MFS firmware.
In order to have the same cadences on 500/2500/digital telephones and SL-1 telephones, the
MCAD and FCAD entries 0-15 are identical. Changes to MCAD entries 1-15 automatically change FCAD entries 1-15. The FCAD entries 1-15 can be changed only by changing the
MCAD entries 1-15.
The Conference/TDS/MFS card must be disabled and then re-enabled to download changed firmware cadences.
Examples of creating firmware cadences:
1. For a cadence of 2 s on, 4 s off, repeat:
REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820
END REPT CYCS 1 (on/off cycles to be repeated) WTON NO (use default tone for this cadence)
2. For a cadence of 2 s on, 4 s off, 3 s on, 5 s off, repeat:
REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820 0614 0998
END REPT CYCS 1 2 (on/off cycles to be repeated) WTON NO (use default tone for this cadence)
3. For a cadence of:
0.1 s on at 950 Hz, 19 dB below overload A-law, 0.1 off 0.1 s on at 1400 Hz, 20 dB below overload A-law, 0.1 off 0.1 s on at 1800 Hz, 20 dB below overload A-law, steady off REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0020 0020 0020
0020 0020
END OFF WTON YES (define tones for this cadence)
TONES 134 135 136 (See NT8D17 Conference/TDS tone table)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 783
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
TDS and NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards
There are two types of cards providing tones and cadences:
• Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) cards
• NT8D17 Conference, TDS and Multi-Frequency (MF) Sender card
There are a variety of TDS cards. Each card provides a different set of tones and cadences.
When a TDS card is used for SL-1 sets, each tone and cadence is identified by a hexadecimal code. The decimal equivalents for these hex codes are entered at the TDSH prompt for each calling feature.
Refer to the Flexible Tones and Cadences NTP for the appropriate codes.
When the NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards are used, the tones and cadences are defined by the following prompts:
• XCAD = 0-255 - entry in the Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD)
• XTON = 0-255 - tone stored in the card firmware
• CDNC = 0-255 - entry in Master Cadence Table (MCAD)
The ringing cadences for all telephones use the Master Cadence Table (MCAD). MCAD entries
1-15 are downloaded to the Peripheral Controller to provide ringing.
Time interval for Call Forward
For Call Forward No Answer (CFNA), the time interval before a call is forwarded is measured by the time interval for one ring cycle (defined at NCAD prompt) times the number of ring cycles
(defined at CFNA prompt in LD 15).
All other types of ringing forward a call after this same time interval regardless of cadence. For example, those with a faster cadence forward after more rings, those with a slower cadence after fewer rings.
Installing FTC
These steps outline the process to install the FTC feature and change the default tones and cadences for one or more calling features.
784 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Installing FTC
To assist in fault clearing, it is recommended that you keep a record of all changes:
• Load Overlay 56
• Define new MCAD cadences
• Define new FCAD tones and cadences
• Create one or more FTC tables (one for each trunk route requiring different tones and cadences)
• Define the non-default tones and cadences for each FTC table
• Enter the FTC table number for each trunk route (LD 16 prompt TTBL)
• If a Conference/TDS/MFS card is equipped, then follow these steps:
- set options in LD 97
- initialize the system (INIT)
- disable and enable each Conf/TDS/MFS card (LD 34)
- disable and enable each Controller (LD 32)
Note:
The Master Cadence Table (MCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by software. These are used for single line sets (500/2500) and digital sets.
MCAD can have up to 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases. Entry
0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries are reserved for ringing cadences.
To define an MCAD cadence, enter the time for each on and off phase. Phases are in 5 ms increments. For example, enter 200 to have a phase last 1 second (200 x 5 ms = 1000 ms =
1 second).
The range for the first phase is 1-9999. The range for the second phase is 0-9999. Once an
MCAD entry has been created, it can be changed but not removed.
Note:
Prompts with the response i bb c tt are prompted only for systems equipped with Tone and
Digit cards.
• i = internal (0) or external (1) source
• bb = burst
• cc = cadence
• tt = frequency/level
Prompts with the response i bb c tt define the Internal/External source, burst, cadence and frequency/level respectively. Enter the decimal equivalent (0-15) of the TDS Hex code (refer to 553-2711-180).
The first field is usually 0. If an external source is used the entry is 1 and the fourth field is 0-7 for the specified channel.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 785
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Note:
The Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by the NT8D17
Conference /TDS/MFS card. These are used for SL-1 sets.
The FCAD can have up to 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on-off phases.
Entry 0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed.
FCAD cadences have the following capabilities:
• each cadence can be defined to end on the ON phase, OFF phase or repeat after a single pass through all defined on-off cycles. Any or all of the five on-off cycles can be repeated.
• a unique tone can be defined for each on phase. These tones are permanently held in the Conference/TDS/MFS firmware.
In order to have the same cadences for 500/2500 Digital and SL-1 sets, the MCAD and FCAD entries 0 through 15 are identical. Changes to MCAD entries 1 through 15 automatically change
FCAD entries 1 through 15. FCAD entries 1 through 15 cannot be changed without changing the MCAD entries.
Note:
The cadences for Software Controlled Cadence Tones AOBT (Agent Observe Tone), INTU
(Intrusion tone) and OVRD (Override tone) do not repeat in the same manner as the other tones. All other tones repeat all on-off cycles from the first up to the fifth if all ten on and off times are programmed. However, these tones reserve cycle 1 for special use, providing a tone burst of a different length if desired, to emphasize the initial iteration of the tone cycle.
Note:
A cycle of 200 3200 50 3200 have a 200 millisecond tone followed by 3.2 seconds of silence.
After this initial burst, the tone repeats in a 50 millisecond on, 3.2 seconds off pattern as long as the time remains valid. However, if the pattern is intended to not have an initial burst, the first two entries must be repeated as the last two entries to obtain the correct sequence.
As an example, if the desired tone is repeating sequence of 50 ms on, 100 ms off, 100 ms on,
50 ms off, 50 ms on, 3500 ms off, the entry must be as follows:
50 100 100 50 50 3500 50 100
Intrusion Tone Note for Small Systems
The following settings are recommended when programming the Intrusion tone on an Small
System.
Prompt Response
INTU XTON 175 XCAD 19 CDNC 19 MCAD 1914 25 14 2000 FCAD 1914 25 14 2000
END REPL CYCS 2
786 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block
on page 787
DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block
on page 788
FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block
on page 789
FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block
on page 789
FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block
on page 789
MCAD: Master cadence data block
on page 795
RART: Route Access Restriction table data block on page 796
RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block
on page 796
TBAR: Trunk Barring data block on page 796
Print a customer defined route ART course on page 797
Other Information:
Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables
on page 798
AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
TBL
-NIPR
Response
aaa
AANN xx
0-31
(NO) YES
Comment
PC Attendant Announcement block.
Customer Number
Announcement table number.
Nightstation announcement priority. If NIPR is set to
YES, ANNS is given for each call to the nightstation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 787
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
-ANQU
-ANAT
-ANNS
-ANFA
-ANFB
-ANSR
-ANXC
-ANOF
Response
(NO) YES aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa
Comment
PC Attendant Announcement is given on calls in PC
Attendant or night service queue only.
Announcement when terminating to the PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement when terminating to night station, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement when CFNA to PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement when CFB to PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement when slow answer recall, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement on calls extended by PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
Announcement on calls overflowed from the PC
Attendant queue, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement
DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
DDGT
- TONE
Response
aaa
DTAD x...x
a...a
Comment
Request
Type of data block = DTAD (Special Dial Tone After
Dialed Number)
Dialed digits (1-5 digits)
Tone to be provided after the dialed digits (a...a =
(DIAL), SPDT, or SRC-SRC8)
788 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
WCAD
CDNC
END
- CYCS
- WTON
- - TONES
Response
aaa
FCAD
0-225 xxxx xxxx ...
xxxx a...a
x x x x
(NO) YES ttt ttt ...
Comment
Request
Type of data block = FCAD (Firmware Cadence)
Cadence Number (0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed)
Cadence
End treatment for cadence (a...a = REPT, ON, or OFF)
Cycles
Define Tones associated with the cadence
NT8D17 tones (0-255) to be used with each phase of the cadence
FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
TABL
ACNO
- OACn
- DTPn
- CNT
DGTS
Response
aaa
FDTD
0-31
1-4 x....x
(YES) NO
(0)-15 x...x
Comment
Request
Type of data block = FDTD (Flexible Dial Tone
Detection)
Table number
Access Code Number
Outgoing Access Code (1-4 digits)
Dial Tone Post-dial
Count
Digits
FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block
An FTC table number can be entered for each trunk route at prompt TTBL in LD16. Table 0 is the default for all trunk routes and contains the defaults for North America.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 789
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
REQ TYPE
TABL USER
DFLT RING
- NCAD - NBCS
- - TDSH - -
XTON
Response
aaa FTC 0-31
(NO) YES
0-31 (NO) YES Default to existing FTC tone table Change the ringing feature definitions
(1)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
- DCAD - DBCS
- - TDSH - -
XTON
0-(2)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
- ICAD - IBCS - -
TDSH - - XTON
0-(5)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
- NDR1 PBX -
NDR1 BCS - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- NDR2 PBX -
NDR2 BCS - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
0-255 i bb c tt 0-
(2)-255 0-
(2)-255
0-255 i bb c tt 0-
(2)-255 0-
(2)-255
Comment
Request Type of data block = FTC (Flexible Tones and
Cadences) FTC Table number Print users of this table and tone table values (tone table value only)
Normal Cadence Normal BCS (SL-1 set) ringing TDS
Hex (Default is 0032) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code
Distinctive Cadence Distinctive BCS (SL-1 set) ringing
TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/
TDS) Tone code
Intercom Cadence Intercom ringing for BCS
(SL-1)sets TDS Hex (Default is 0012) XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Tone code
Network Distinctive Ring 1 cadence for PBX sets
Network Distinctive Ring 1 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS
Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence code
Network Distinctive Ring 2 cadence for PBX sets
Network Distinctive Ring 2 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS
Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence code
- NDR3 PBX -
NDR3 BCS - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- NDR4 PBX -
NDR4 BCS - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- RCAD - RBCS
- - TDSH - -
XTON
- GCAD - GBCS
- - TDSH - -
XTON
- HCAD - HBCS
- - TDSH - -
XTON
0-255 i bb c tt 0-
(2)-255 0-
(2)-255
0-255 i bb c tt 0-
(2)-255 0-
(2)-255
0-(1)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
0-(1)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for PBX sets
Network Distinctive Ring 3 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS
Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence code
Network Distinctive Ring 4 cadence for PBX sets
Network Distinctive Ring 4 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS
Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence code
Recall Cadence Recall for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS Hex
(Default is 0032) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code
Group Call Cadence Group Call for BCS (SL-1) sets
TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/
TDS) Tone code
0-(1)-255 i bb c tt
0-(2)-255
Held call reminder Cadence Held call reminder ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
790 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- PCAD - PBCS
- - TDSH
- - XTON
HCCT
0-(4)-255
(NO) YES
- DIAL - EEST - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-55
- CFWT - -
XTON - - XCAD
- SURV - - XTON
- - XCAD
- SPCL - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
Response
0-255 i bb c tt
0-(3)-255 0-
(19)-255
0-(4)-255 0-
(253)-255
0 00 0 tt 0-
(4)-255 (0)-255
Comment
Recall or Misoperation Cadence Recall or
Misoperation ringing for BCS TDS Hex (Default is
0032)
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
Hardware Controlled Cadences and Tones
Dial tone End-to-End Signaling Feedback Tone TDS
Hex (Default is 0004) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code For EEST, this value is set to 0 no matter what is entered. XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Cadence number (FCAD cadence number)
Conference Warning Tone Conference Warning Tone number. A tone number provided by the tone circuit.
Conference Warning Tone cadence number. The cadence number should be set up under FCAD.
Flexible Survivable Dial Tone Flexible Survivable Dial
Tone Code Flexible Survivable Dial Tone Cadence number
Special dial tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD Cadence number)
- CDT - - TDSH -
- XTON - - XCAD
- CFDT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-255
Control Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Call Forward Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS)
- MWDT - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- CFMW - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- ACTN - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
- BUSY - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
- RGBK - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
0-(17)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
0-(17)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-(7)-255
0-(16)-255 i bb c tt 0-(5)-255
0-(1)-255
Message Waiting Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0024)
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Call Forward Message Waiting tone TDS Hex (Default is 0024) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Active feature Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is special dial tone) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Busy tone TDS Hex (Default is 0017) XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Ringback tone TDS Hex (Default is 0035) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 791
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
- PREM - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
Response
i bb c tt 0-(6)-255
(0)-255
- PRBK - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
- ARBK - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD i bb c tt 0-
(11)-255 0-
(2)-255 i bb c tt 0-
(11)-255 0-
(2)-255
- FFCT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
- LIMT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-255
0-255
Comment
Preemption tone TDS Hex (Default is 0006) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Precedence Ringback tone TDS Hex (Default is
0008D) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
ACD RGA (Ring Again) Ringback tone TDS Hex
(Default is 0008D) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Flexible Feature Code Confirmation Tone TDS Hex
(Default is 0004) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Log In Mode Tone for 500/2500 ACD sets TDS Hex
(Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
- NRMT - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
- AWUT - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255
(0)-255
- OVFL - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD i bb c tt 0-255
0-255 i bb c tt 0-(7)-255
0-(17)-255
Note:
default values for XTON and XCAD should not be used for A-law configuration.
Not Ready (NRDY) Mode Tone for ACD sets TDS Hex
(Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Automatic Wake Up special error Tone TDS Hex
(Default is 0027) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Overflow tone TDS Hex (Default is 0027) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
- TEST - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
- HOWL - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
0 0 0 tt 0-(8)-255
(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-255
0-255
- ERWT - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255
Test tone TDS Hex (Default is 0008) XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Howler tone TDS Hex (Default is Overflow tone) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Expensive Route Warning Tone TDS Hex (Default is
0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
792 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- PCWT - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
Response
0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255
Comment
Precedence Call Waiting Tone TDS Hex (Default is
0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
(FCAD Cadence number)
- ACFT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD
0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255
- TLP - - TDSH -
- XTON - - XCAD i bb c tt (0)-255
(0)-255
ACD Call Force Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
Tone to Last Party TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number
- TLPT - PATI - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD
CAB - TDSH -
XTON - XCAD
(0)-30 i bb c tt
(0)-255 (0)-255
(NO) YES i bb cc tt 0-255 0-255
Tone to Last Party Timer in seconds. No tone = 0
Patience tone Multi-Party Operations TDS Hex
(Default is 0000) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
M911 Call Abandon on Answer tone TDS external, burst, cadence and tone NT8D17 TDS Tone code
NT8D17 Cadence code for FCAD
CAST
- LDN - - TDSH -
- XTON - - XCAD
- - CDNC
(NO) YES i bb c tt (0)-255
0-(24)-255 0-
(16)-255
- DI0 - - TDSH -
- XTON - - XCAD
- - CDNC
- HLDC - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
0-(22)-255 0-
(16)-255 i bb c tt (0)-255
0-(24)-255 0-
(16)-255
Centralized Attendant Service Tones
Listed Directory Number tone TDS Hex (Default is
0346) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
MCAD software Cadence number
Dial 0 Recall tone TDS Hex (Default is 0283) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software
Cadence number
Hold Confirmation tone TDS Hex (Default is 0346)
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software Cadence number
- CPNC - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
0-(21)-255 0-
(17)-255
(NO) YES
Camp-On Confirmation tone TDS Hex (Default is
0243) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
MCAD software Cadence number
Software Controlled Cadences and Tones SCCT
ILIN ILOU
- CAMP - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD - -
CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(17)-255
NSCC pending agent Login tone NSCC pending agent
Logout tone
Camp-On tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 793
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
- RPAW - - CLN
- - TDSH - -
XTON - - XCAD
- - CDNC
- AOBT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC
- INTU - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC
- CWT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC
- OBKT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC
Response
x xx xx xx 1-31 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(19)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(18)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(19)-255
Comment
Radio Paging Warning tone Cadence Length TDS Hex
(Default is 0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Agent Observe Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Intrusion tone (If Small System, see note on Intrusion
Tone Note for Small Systems on page 786.) TDS Hex
(Default is 0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)
Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(20)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(17)-255
Call Waiting Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Observe Blocking Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003)
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
- OVRD - -
TDSH - - XTON -
- XCAD - -
CDNC
- OHQ - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(18)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(3)-255
- SRT - - TDSH -
- XTON - - XCAD
- - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(22)-255
- TMAT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(22)-255
Override tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Off-Hook Queuing tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003)
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Set Relocation Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number
Telephone Messaging Alert Tone TDS Hex (Default is
0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
- TMOT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC
- TSUT - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(23)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255
(0)-255 0-
(23)-255
Telephone Messaging OK Tone TDS Hex (Default is
0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
Telephone Status Update Tone TDS Hex (Default is
0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code
794 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt Response
ABST - XTON -
XCAD - CDNC
PNNC - XTON -
XCAD - CDNC
SRC
- SRC1 - - TDSH
- - XTON - -
XCAD - SRC2 -
SRC3 - SRC4 -
SRC5 - SRC6 -
SRC7 - SRC8
MINT
- CFSN - - TDSH
- CPOQ - -
TDSH - RGAR -
- TDSH - RPCT -
- TDSH - RGAB
- - TDSH -
MWAN - - TDSH
- DNDA - - TDSH
- SSLK - - TDSH
0-(4)-255
(0)-255 0-
(2)-255
(0)-255 (0)-255
0-(2)-255 (NO)
YES i bb c tt (0)-255
(0)-255
PULS
- P10 - ID1 - ID2
- IDD - IDE
RVDL
Comment
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
Authorization Code Conditionally Last Enhancement cadence NT8D17 TDS Tone code NT8D17 TDS
Cadence code MCAD table entry for this cadence
Process Notification for Networked Calls tone NT8D17
TDS Tone code NT8D17 TDS Cadence code MCAD table entry for this cadence Source
Source tone 1 TDS Hex (Default is 0000) XCT
(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) Cadence number Source tone 2
Source tone 3 Source tone 4 Source tone 5 Source tone 6 Source tone 7 Source tone 8
(NO) YES Allow tones or announcements
0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255
0-255 i bb c tt
0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255
0-255 i bb c tt
0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt
(NO) YES
Call Forward All Calls active Third parameter Call is being parked or set is in Off-Hook Queuing state Third parameter Ring Again is applied by another set Third parameter Confirmation Tone replaced by an announcement Third parameter Station Dialed Busy
Third parameter Message Waiting Third parameter Do
Not Disturb Third parameter Set Status Lockout Third parameter
Pulse timers are to be changed
4 (8) 256-
(768)-1024 256-
(512)-1024
256-1024 256-
(384) (0) x
Codes for make/break ratio for 10 pps Inter-Digit 1
Inter-Digit 2 Inter-Digit DTMF EOS interdigital pause in milliseconds Reverse Dial format
MCAD: Master cadence data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
WACD
Response
aaa
MCAD
0-225
Comment
Request
Type of data block = MCAD (Master cadence)
Cadence Number (0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 795
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
CDNC
Response
xxxx xxxx ...
xxxx
Cadence
TBAR: Trunk Barring data block
REQ
Prompt Response
NEW CHG Request
Comment
RART: Route Access Restriction table data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
ART
Response
CHG
RART xx
(0)-127
1-63
Comment
Request. REQ = NEW or OUT is not accepted for
RART.
Type of data block = RART (Route Access Restriction table)
Customer number
Route
Access Restriction Table
RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
COT
DID
TIE
OTH
(0)-63
(0)-63
(0)-63
(0)-63
Response
CHG
RCDT
Comment
Request. When TYPE = RCDT, you cannot enter NEW or OUT at the REQ prompt.
Type of data block = RCDT (Route Category Default table)
COT, FEX, WAT. These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD16.
These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD16
CAA, CAM, CSA, TIE
Other
Comment
796 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
TYPE
ART
DENY
Response
TBAR
1-63 yyy yyy ...
Comment
Type of data block = TBAR (Trunk Barring)
Access Restriction Table
Enter ART number denied to Originating Trunk
Connection (OTC)
Print a customer defined route ART course
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
Response
PRT aaa xx
(0)-127
Request
Type of data block
Customer number
Route
Comment
Default Master Cadence (MCAD) tables
020
021
022
023
005
016
017
018
019
000
WCAD =
001
002
003
004
DEFAULT MCAD TABLE (Master Cadence Table)
CDNC = 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0410 0800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0308 0076 0308 0076 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0205 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0102 0102 0205 0819 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0128 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0051 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0205 3072 0051 3072 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0205 1229 0051 1229 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0051 0026 0051 2048 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0410 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0102 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0512 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 797
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Master Cadence (MCAD) table for Japan
001
002
CDNC = 0050 0050 0050 0450 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
CDNC = 0200 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables
000
WCAD =
001
002
003
004
005
016
017
018
DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Firmware Cadence Table)
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0410
0800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0308
0076 0308 0076 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 2 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0205
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0102
0102 0205 0819 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 2 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100
0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100
0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050
0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0010
0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
798 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables
019
WCAD =
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Firmware Cadence Table)
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0040
0060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0015
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020
0020 0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0060
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020
0000 0020 0000 0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
YES
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0200
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0400
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0125
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =
NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0030
0070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 799
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table for Japan
001
WCAD =
002
017
DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Cadence Table for JAPAN TDS)
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0200
0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 2 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050
0050 0050 0450 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1 SPCL = NO
Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100
0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS
= 1
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ABST
ACFT
ACNO
ACTN
ANAT
Response Comment
Authorization Code Conditionally Last
Enhancement cadence
1-4
<CR> aaa
Pack/Rel
nars-24
ACD Call Force Tone
When defining the hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter zero for the other values (e.g.,
TDSH = 0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx, XCAD =
000).
ftc-13
Access Code Number
Outgoing Access Code to be used (4 codes per table)
Go to DGTS prompt (REQ = CHG) ftc-12
Active feature dial tone ftc-12
Announcement when terminating to the PC
Attendant. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
800 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ANFA
ANFB
ANNS
ANOF
ANQU
ANSR
ANXC
AOBT
Response
aaa
Comment Pack/Rel
Announcement when CFNA to PC Attendant.
Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
aaa aaa
Announcement when CFB to PC Attendant.
Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
Announcement when terminating to night station. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
aaa
(NO) YES aaa
Announcement on calls overflowed from the
PC Attendant queue. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
PC Attendant Announcement is given on calls in PC Attendant or night service queue only.
atan-25.4
Announcement when slow answer recall.
Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
aaa Announcement on calls extended by PC
Attendant. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4
Agent Observe Tone
This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle. For example, a cadence is defined as
3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off.
After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern. In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined ftc-13
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 801
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
ARBK
ART
AWUT
BUSY
CAB
CAMP
CAST
Prompt Response Comment
as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.
1-63
<CR>
Pack/Rel
ACD RGA (Ring Again) Ringback tone ftc-13
Access Restriction Table
Return to REQ prompt
ART remains unchanged Printing of the route category default table occurs ftc-10
(NO) YES
(NO)YES
Automatic Wake Up special error Tone
Busy tone
M911 Call Abandon on Answer tone
Camp-On tone mlwu-16 ftc-13
M911-19 ftc-13
Centralized Attendant Service Tones
Modification to the CAS (Centralized
Attendant Service) tone definition.
For systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/
TDS) cards, each feature requires a firmware cadence (XCAD), a software cadence
(CNDN) and tone (XTON).
Due to the finer resolution of the firmware cadence (5 ms) compared to the software
(96/128 ms), you should allow the software cadence to be long enough to cover the full duration of the XCAD.
For example, to define a cadence of 0.1 s on,
0.1 s off, 0.1 s on, steady off ftc-13
• CDNC0020 0020 0020 0000
• END OFF
• SPCL
The software cadence is then 0.3 s (600 ms).
If the software precision is 128 ms, the software cadence is calculated as follows:
• 600 ms/128 = 4.6 = 5 (rounded up)
• 128 x 5 = 640
Entry to on phase = 640/5 = 0128, and to define the cadence enter 0128 to prompt
CDNC.
802 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CDNC
CDT
CFDT
CFMW
CFWT
CFSN
CLN
Response Comment Pack/Rel
xxxx xxxx ... xxxx
On-off phases for Cadence (ten on-off cycles)
Entries 1 through 15 are reserved for ringing cadences. When defining the cadences in
MCAD each phase entry is in 5 millisecond increments.
The range for the first phase is 1-9999 increments.The range for the second phase is 0-9999 increments. The default is 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0.
See the the default MCAD Tables on
on page 797.
ftc-14
0-(16)-255
0-(17)-255
0-(19)-255
0-(18)-255
0-(20)-255
0-(3)-255
0-(22)-255
0-(23)-255
MCAD software cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
MCAD software cadence number (see Note
5)
MCAD software cadence number (see Note
5)
MCAD software cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
MCAD software cadence number
MCAD software cadence number ftc-14
Control Dial Tone
Call Forward Dial Tone ftc-13 ftc-13
Call Forward Message Waiting tone
Conference Warning Tone (applies only to
Small System) ftc-13 basic-21
0-255 0-255 Call Forward All Calls active
First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15
1-31 Cadence Length (length of the Camp-On tone burst in 96 or 128 millisecond increments)
See TMRK prompt in LD17.
ftc-9
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 803
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
CNT
Prompt
COT
CPNC
CPOQ
CUST
CWT
CYCS
DBCS
DCAD
DDGT
DENY
Response
(0)-15
Comment
Count
Number of digits outpulsed before dial tone detector reconnection (0 specifies that digit counting is not to be used).
Pack/Rel
ftc-12
(0)-63 COT, FEX, WAT. These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD 16.
Camp-On Confirmation tone ftc-13
0-255 0-255 Call is being Parked or set is in Off-Hook
Queuing state.
First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15 xx Customer number as defined in LD15
Call Waiting Tone cust-15 ftc-13 x x x x On-off Cycles (1 to 5) to be repeated. Default is no repeats.
Prompted when END = REPT ftc-14
Distinctive BCS (SL-1 set) ringing ftc-13
0-(2)-255 Distinctive Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set ringing MCAD cadence number. (See Notes 1 and 3)
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt DBCS). DCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-13
Dialed digits (1-5 digits)
To remove
To end pnp-15 xxxxx
X
<CR> yyy yyy ...
ALL xALL
Xyyy Xyyy ..
<CR>
Enter ART number denied to Originating
Trunk Connection (OTC)
Deny all ARTs to OTC
All ART numbers are allowed to OTC
Enter ART numbers allowed to OTC
Return to REQ prompt with no table being stored ftc-10
804 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
DFLT
DGTS
DI0
DIAL
DID
DNDA
DTPn
EEST
END
Prompt
ERWT
Response Comment
The ART is removed unless it is used as a default when REQ = OUT. REQ = NEW or
OUT is disallowed for RART.
0-31
<CR> xxxx
Xxxxx
Pack/Rel
Default to existing FTC tone table
Create tone table without defaulting
Prompted when REQ = NEW ftc-13
Digits
The system waits for dial tone after these additional (1-4) digits.
Remove digit sequence from table
Return to REQ prompt
DGTS prompt repeat until <CR> is pressed.
ftc-12
REPT
ON
OFF
Dial 0 recall tone
Dial tone ftc-13 ftc-13
(0)-63 These route types is assigned the entered
ART when the route is created in LD 16
0-255 0-255 Do Not Disturb
First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15
(YES) NO Dial Tone Post-dial
Dial tone detector is to be reconnected immediately after Outgoing Access (OACn).
ftc-12
End-to-End Signaling feedback Tone
Indicates that the improved EES tone is used.
There is actually no cadence.
When using the Enhanced Conference/TDS card, the XCAD prompt is not printed, and the cadence is set to 0 no matter what is entered.
ees-19 ftc-14 End treatment for cadence
Repeating cycles (defined by the CYCS prompt)
End cadence on the "on" phase
End cadence on the "off" phase
Expensive Route Warning Tone ftc-13
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 805
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
FFCT
GBCS
GCAD
HBCS
HCAD
HCCT
Response Comment
When defining the hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software.
Enter zero for the other values (e.g., TDSH =
0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx, XCAD = 000).
Pack/Rel
Flexible Feature Code Confirmation Tone
This tone allows users of 500/2500 or multiline telephones to receive a confirmation tone after activating/deactivating the following features: ffc-15
• Call Forward activate/deactivate
• Ring Again deactivate
• Store/erase Stored Number Redial
• all Automatic Wake Up codes
• Speed Call store
• any verification code
0-(1)-255
0-(1)-255
(NO) YES
Group Call ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets grp-13
Group Call Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set Group Call Ringing
Cadence MCAD cadence number
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt GBCS). GCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
grp-14
Held call ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-13
Held call reminder Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set held call reminder ringing cadence MCAD cadence number
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt HBCS). HCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-13
Hardware Controlled Cadences and Tones
Modification of the hardware (TDS card) controlled cadence tone definitions allowed.
ftc-13
806 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
HLDC
HOWL
IBCS
ICAD
ID1
ID2
IDD
IDE
ILIN
Prompt
ILOU
Response Comment
For systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/
TDS) cards, each feature requires a firmware cadence (XCAD) and tone (XTON). For other
TDS cards, the tone and cadence is defined by prompt TDSH.
Pack/Rel
Hold Confirmation tone
Howler tone ftc-13 ftc-13
0-(5)-255
Intercom ringing for BCS (SL-1)sets
Distinctive Dial Intercom ringing for BCS
(SL-1) sets ftc-13
Intercom Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set Dial Intercom
Distinctive ringing MCAD cadence number
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt IBCS). ICAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-13
256-(768)-1024
Inter-Digit 1(P10 interdigit pause in milliseconds) ftc-13
256-(512)-1024
Interdigit 2 (P20 interdigit pause in milliseconds)
256-1024 ftc-13
Interdigit DTMF pause in milliseconds
Default is 512 if 100 is the response to prompt
DTRB in LD 17. Otherwise, the default is
384.
ftc-13 ftc-13 256 - (384) EOS interdigital pause in ms.
Prompted if DDD package is equipped and
PULS = YES.
Nortel Symposium Call Center (NXCC) pending agent Login tone
Nortel Symposium Call Center (NXCC) pending agent Logout tone nxcc-22 nxcc-22
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 807
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
INTU
LDN
LIMT
MINT
MWAN
MWDT
NBCS
NCAD
NDR1 BCS
Response Comment
Intrusion tone
This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle.
For example, a cadence is defined as 3 s on,
3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off. After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern.
In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on,
3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.
Pack/Rel
ftc-13
Listed Directory Number tone ftc-13
(NO) YES
Log In Mode Tone for 500/2500 ACD sets
This is the tone setting for ACD services to
500/2500 agent sets. You must have Flexible
Tones and Cadences (FTC) supported for this feature to function properly.
bacd-16
Note:
default values for XTON and XCAD should not be used for A-law configuration.
Allow tones or announcements
(NO- tone default values) mint-15
0-255 0-255 Message Waiting
The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15
(1)-255
Message Waiting Dial Tone
Normal BCS (SL-1 set) ringing ftc-13 ftc-13
Normal Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set ringing MCAD cadence number. (Notes 1 and 3)
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt NBCS). NCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-13
Network Distinctive Ring 1 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16
808 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NDR1 PBX
NDR2 BCS
NDR2 PBX
NDR3 BCS
NDR3 PBX
NDR4 BCS
NDR4 PBX
Response
0-255
Comment
Network Distinctive Ring 1 cadence for PBX sets
500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive
Ringing cadence 1 MCAD cadence number.
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt NDR1 BCS). NDR1 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
Pack/Rel
ftc-16
0-255
Network Distinctive Ring 2 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16
Network Distinctive Ring 2 cadence for PBX sets
500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive
Ringing cadence 2 MCAD cadence number.
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt NDR2 BCS). NDR2 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-16
Network Distinctive Ring 3 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16
0-255
0-255
Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for PBX sets
500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive
Ringing cadence 3 MCAD cadence number.
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt NDR3 BCS). NDR3 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-16
Network Distinctive Ring 4 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16
Network Distinctive Ring 4 cadence for PBX sets
500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive
Ringing cadence 4 MCAD cadence number
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt NDR4 BCS). NDR4 PBX is also used ftc-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 809
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
OBKT
OHQ
OTH
OVFL
OVRD
P10
Prompt
NIPR
NRMT
OACn
Response Comment
for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES xxxx
Xxxxx
Nightstation announcement priority. If NIPR is set to YES, ANNS is given for each call to the nightstation.
atan-25.4
Not Ready (NRDY) Mode Tone for ACD sets
This is the tone setting for the NRDY function within ACD services to 500/2500 agent sets.
You must have Flexible Tones and Cadences supported for this feature to function properly.
bacd-16
Outgoing Access Code (1-4 digits)
Where: n = ACNO response
Remove OACn ftc-12
(0)-63
<CR>
Observe Blocking Tone
Off-Hook Queuing tone ftc-13 ftc-13
Other (ADM, DIC, MDM, PAG, RCD)
These route types is assigned the entered
ART when the route is created in LD 16.
Return to REQ prompt.
Overflow tone ftc-10
Codes for make/break ratio for 10 pps.
Other make/break ratio (Prompt S10P in
LD97) ftc-13
Override tone
This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle.
For example, a cadence is defined as 3 s on,
3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off. After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern.
In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on,
3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.
ftc-13 ftc-13
810 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
PNNC
PRBK
PREM
PULS
RBCS
RCAD
PATI
PBCS
REQ
Prompt
PCAD
PCWT
Response Comment
North American make/break ratio (Prompt
S10P in LD97)
(See also CLS P10 in LD 14)
Pack/Rel
Patience tone multi-party operations frta-21
Recall or Misoperation ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets (default is SL-1 ringing tone TDS code) ftc-12
0-255
(NO) YES
0-(1)-255
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
Recall or Misoperation Cadence
500/2500 and Digital set Recall or
Misoperation ringing cadence MCAD cadence number
It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets
(prompt PBCS). PCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17
Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-12
Precedence Call Waiting Tone
When defining the TDS hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter zero for the other values (e.g.,
0 0 0 xx).
ftc-13
Process Notification for Networked Calls tone mfc-24
Precedence Ringback tone ftc-13
Preemption tone
Pulse timers are to be changed ftc-13 ftc-13
Call Park Recall ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-14
Recall Cadence
500/2500 and digital set Call Park recall ringing cadence MCAD cadence number.
RCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) cards.
ftc-14
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Add new data block to the system
Remove data block ftc-13
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 811
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
RGAB
RGAR
RGBK
RING
ROUT
RPAW
RPCT
RVDL
SCCT
SPCL
Response
PRT Print data block
Comment Pack/Rel
0-255 0-255 Station Dialed Busy (calling party allowed to apply Ring Again)
The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15
0-255 0-255 Ring Again is applied by another set
The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.
Ringback tone
(NO) YES ftc-15 ftc-13
Change the Ringing feature definitions
For systems with NT8D17 Conference/TDS cards, all telephones share the same ringing cadence. SL-1 telephones require an
NT8D17 tone (XTON).
ftc-13
(0)-127
<CR> x xx xx xx
Route
Print routes with non-zero ART numbers, along with the ART number. Return to REQ prompt.
REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for RCDT ftc-10
Radio Paging Warning tone
0-255 0-255 Confirmation Tone Replaced by an announcement
The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-15 ftc-15
(0)
1
2
(NO) YES
Reverse Dial format
No Reverse Dial format
Reverse Dial format 1
Reverse Dial format 2
Software Controlled Cadences and Tones
Modification of the Software Controlled
Cadence Tone definitions allowed ftc-10 ftc-13
Special dial tone Only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter 0 for the other ftc-13
812 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
SRC6
SRC7
SRC8
SRT
SSLK
SRC2
SRC3
SRC4
SRC5
SRC
SURV
TABL
TBL
Prompt
SRC1
Response Comment
values (e.g., TDSH = 0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx,
XCAD = 000).
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES Source tones (SRC1 through SRC8) are required.
Eight intercept Source tones can be defined.
These tones are entered in LD 15 in response to the various intercept treatment prompts.
ftc-13
Source tone 1
Prompts and default values for TDSH, XTON and XCAD are the same for all SRC1 through
SRC8 prompts.
ftc-13
Source tone 2
Source tone 3
Source tone 4
Source tone 5 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13
Source tone 6
Source tone 7
Source tone 8
Set Relocation Tone ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13
0-255 0-255 Set Status Lockout
First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.
ftc-13
0-31
<CR>
0-31
Flexible Survivable Dial Tone ip-25.4
FTC Table number
To associate a FTC table with a trunk route, enter the table number in response to prompt
TTBL in LD 16.
Prints all tables ftc-13
Announcement table number.
atan-25.4
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 813
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
Prompt
TDSH
TEST
TIE
TLP
Response
i bb c tt
Comment
Hexadecimal code for TDS. Internal/
External, burst, cadence and tone (See Note
2)
The default value of a TDSH prompt changes according to the tone-type prompt (e.g.
NBCS, IBCS, HOWL, etc.) which precedes it.
Pack/Rel
ftc-14 ftc-13
(0)-63
Test tone
CAA, CAM, CSA, TIE
These route types is assigned the entered
ART when the route is created in LD16.
Tone to Last Party
TLPT TMAT
TMOT
TONE
TONES
TSUT
TYPE
(0)-30
(DIAL)
SPDT
SRC-SRC8 ttt ttt ...
AANN
DTAD
FCAD
FDTD
FTC
Tone to Last Party Timer in seconds. No tone
= 0.
Telephone Messaging Alert Tone ftc-13
Telephone Messaging OK Tone ftc-13
Tone to be provide after the dialed digits.
Dial tone
Special Dial Tone
Source tones 1-8 (Valid if FTC package [125] is equipped) pnp-15
NT8D17 tones (0-255) to be used with each phase of the cadence.
Default is no tones (0 0 0 0 0).
Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables on
page 798 ftc-14
Telephone Status Update Tone
Type of data block
PC Attendant Announcement data block
Special Dial tone After Dialed number data block
Firmware Cadence data block
Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block
Flexible Tones and Cadences data block ftc-13 ftc-13 atan-25.4
ftc-15 ftc-13
814 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
USER
WCAD
WTON
XCAD
XTON
Response
MCAD
RART
RCDT
TBAR
Comment
Master Cadence data block
Route Access Restriction Table data block
REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for
RART.
Route Category Default Table data block
REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for
RCDT.
Trunk Barring data block
(NO) YES
0-225
(NO) YES
Pack/Rel
ftc-14
Print Users of this table and tone table values
(tone table value only)
Prompted when REQ = PRT ftc-13
Cadence number in the Firmware Cadence table (FCAD)
Cadence number 0 is reserved for continuous tone and is not changeable.
ftc-14
Define tones associated with the cadence.
Prompted for systems equipped with
Conference /TDS / MF Sender cards.
ftc-14
0-(2)-255
0-(2)-255
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD cadence number)
The default range of a XCAD prompt changes according to the tone-type prompt (e.g.
DBCS, HOWL, etc.) which precedes it.
ftc-19
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code ftc-19
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 815
LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences
816 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 34: LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
Overlay program 57 allows the implementation and administration of the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) software and hardware.
Up to 99 user access codes can be entered at a time for one or more different codes. After entering 99 user access codes, SCH8891 is output.
If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped, up to 7 digits are allowed for Flexible
Feature Codes. Otherwise, a maximum of 4 digits can be entered.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
FFCT
CEPT - REP*
ALL
- CODE
- ADMN
- AFTO
- AREM
- ASRC
- ATDA
- ATDD
Response
aaa
FFC xx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES 0-9
(NO) YES aaaa
ADMN xxxx
AFTO xxxx
AREM xxxx
ASRC xxxx
ATDA xxxx
ATDD xxxx
Comment
Request
Type of data block
Customer number associated with this function
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone
Conference European Des Postes Tel defaults
Replacement for the * in the CEPT default codes
Remove all Flexible Feature Codes (only prompted when REQ = OUT).
Specific Flexible Feature Code mnemonic to remove
(only prompted when ALL = NO).
Set-based Administration sequence code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
DSN Flash Precedence code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Automatic Set Removal code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Automatic Set Relocation code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Autodial Activated Enter Flexible Feature Code
Autodial Deactivated code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 817
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
- BNRD
- CCFA
- CCFD
- CDRC
- CFDD
- CFHO
- CFWA
- CFWD
Prompt
- ATVF
- ATVM
- ATVP
- AUTH
- AVNR
- AWUA
- AWUD
- AWUV
- BNRA
- CFWV
- COND
- CPAC
Response
ATVF xxxx
ATVM xxxx
ATVP xxxx
AUTH xxxx
AVNR xxx
AWUA xxxx
AWUD xxxx
AWUV xxxx
BNRA xxxx
BNRD xxxx
CCFA xxxx
CCFD xxxx
CDRC xxxx
CFDD xxxx
CFHO xxxx
CFWA xxxx
CFWD xxxx
CFWV xxxx
COND xxxx
CPAC xxxx
Comment
DSN Immedicate Precedence code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
DSN Priority Precedence code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
DSN Flash Override Precedence code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Authorization code Enter Flexible Feature Code
DSN Routine Call code Enter Flexible Feature Code.
Where xxx = 0-999
Automatic Wake Up Activate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Automatic Wake Up Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Automatic Wake Up Verify code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Busy Number Redial code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Busy Number Redial Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Customer Call Forward code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Customer Call Forward Deactivate code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
CDR Charge Account code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Call forward destination deactivation Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Call Forward/HUNT Override via FFC code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Call Forward All Calls Activate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Call Forward All Calls Verify code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Conference Diagnostics code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Call Park Access Code Enter Flexible Feature Code
818 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- CWGD
- C6DS
- DEAF
- DPVS
- ELKA
- ELKD
- EOVR
- FDIS
- GHTA
- GHTD
- GRPF
- - GRCL
- HIDN
- HOLD
- ICFA
- ICFD
Prompt
- CPP
- CPPO
- CPRK
- CSHF
- CWGA
Response
CPP xxxx
CPPO (*82) xxxx
CPRK xxxx
CSHF xxxx
CWGA xxxx
CWGD xxxx
C6DS xxxx
DEAF xxxx
DPVS xxxx
ELKA xxxx
ELKD xxxx
EOVR xxxx
FDIS xxxx
GHTA xxxx
GHTD xxxx
GRPF xxxx xxxx
HIDN xxxx
HOLD xxxx
ICFA xxxx
ICFD xxxx
Comment
Calling Party Privacy code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Calling Party Privacy Override code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Call Park code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Centrex Switchhook Flash code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Call Waiting Activated code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Call Waiting Deactivated code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Six-Party Conference code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Deactivate Feature code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Data Port Verification code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Electronic Lock Activate code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Electronic Lock Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Enhanced Override code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Forced Disconnect code Enter Forced Disconnect code
Group Hunt Termination Allowed code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Group Hunt Termination Disallowed code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Group Call code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Group Call List number (configured in LD18).
Hospitality Identification (Hospitality Management) code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Permanent Hold code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Internal Call Forward Activate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Internal Call Forward Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 819
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt
- ICFV
- INST
- HREL
- ICPA
- ICPD
- ICPO
- ICPP
- IMS
- ITXX - - RTXX
- LILO
- MCAN
- MCFA
- MCOM
- MLIO
- MNT
- MNTC
- MSBA
- MSBD
Response
ICFV xxxx
INST xxxx
HREL xxxx
ICPA xxxx
ICPD xxxx
ICPO xxxx
ICPP xxxx
IMS xxxx xxxx xxxx
LILO xxxx
MCAN xxxx
MCFA xxxx
MCON xxxx
MLIO xxxx
MNT xxxx
MNTC xxxx
MSBA xxxx
MSBD xxxx
Comment
Internal Call Forward Verify code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Set based administration Installer code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Hospitality Relocation (Hospitality Management) code
Enter Flexible Feature Code
Intercept Computer Interface Activate code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Intercept Computer Interface Deactivate code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Intercept Computer Interface Override code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Intercept Computer Interface Print code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Integrated Message System access code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
For "1xx' Special Services (up to 4 digits) CO route number for the "1xx" service
Log In-Log Out for 500/2500 ACD sets code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Cancel a Transfer or Conference from a mobile phone.
Enter Flexible Feature Code
Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.
Activate a Conference from a mobile phone. Enter
Flexible Feature Code.
Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.
Complete a Conference or Transfer from a mobile phone. Enter Flexible Feature Code.
Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.
Multi-Language I O code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Enter set-based Maintenance sequence code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Maintenance Access code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Make Set Busy Activated code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Make Set Busy Deactivated code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
820 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
- OVRD
- OCBA
- OCBD
- OCBV
- PCAA
- PCAD
- PCAV
- PGAP
- PGIP
- PGSP
- PLDN
Prompt
- MTGL
- MTRC
- MTRN
- MWRA
- MWUA
- MWUD
- NRDY
OVRD xxxx
OCBA xxxx
OCBD xxxx
OCBV xxxx
PCAA xxxx
PCAD xxxx
PCAV xxxx
PGAP xxxx
PGIP xxxx
PGSP xxxx
PLDN xxxx
Response
MTGL xxxx
MTRC xxxx
MTRN xxxx
MWRA xxxx
MWUA xxxx
MWUD xxxx
NRDY xxxx
Comment
Enables a mobile phone use to toggle between the two parties in a Conference or Transfer. Enter Flexible
Feature Code.
Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.
Malicious Call Trace code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Activate the Mobile Extension transfer feature. Enter
Flexible Feature Code.
Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.
Repeat Multiple Wake Up Activated code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Multiple Wake Up Activated code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Multiple Wake Up Deactivated code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Not Ready Activation/Deactivation for 500/2500 ACD sets code
Enter Flexible Feature Code
Override and Priority Override code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Outgoing Call Barring feature code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Outgoing Call Barring Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Verify the Outgoing Call Barring feature code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Personal Call Assistant Activate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Personal Call Assistant Deactivate code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Personal Call Assistant Verify code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Answer Parallel Paging code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Initiate Parallel Paging code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Initiate Serial Paging code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Pilot DN code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 821
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt
- - USE - - LSNO
- - HTYP - -
CFWI - - MQUE
Response
aaaa nnnn aaa
(NO) YES aaaa
- PONW
- PUDN
- PUGR
- PURN
- RCFA
- RCFD
- RCFV
- RDLN
- RDNE
- RDSN
- RDST
- RGAA
- RGAD
- RGAV
- RMST
- RPAN
- RPAX
- SADS
- SAEN
- SALK
- SAUN
- SCPC
PONW xxxx
PUDN xxxx
PUGR xxxx
PURN xxxx
RCFA xxxx
RCFD xxxx
RCFV xxxx
RDLN xxxx
RDNE xxxx
RDSN xxxx
RDST xxxx
RGAA xxxx
RGAD xxxx
RGAV xxxx
RMST xxxx
RPAN xxxx
RPAX xxxx
SADS xxxx
SAEN xxxx
SALK xxxx
SAUN xxxx
SCPC xxxx
Comment
Use (aaaa = GPHT, SCLU, or SCLC) List Number
Hunting Type (aaa = (LIN) or RRB) Call Forward All
Calls have priority over Group Hunting Limit to calls
Queued against pilot DN (aaa = (ALL), 0, 1, or ACTM)
Priority Override Network Wide Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Pick Up DN code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Pick Up Group code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Pick Up Ringing Number code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Remote Call Forward Activate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Remote Call Forward Deactivate code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Remote Call Forward Verify code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Redial Last Number code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Redial Number Erase code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Redial Saved Number code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Redial Store code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Ring Again Activate code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Ring Again Deactivate code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Ring Again Verify code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Room Status code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Radio Paging Answer call code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Radio Paging Access code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
SAR Disable code Enter Flexible Feature Code
SAR Enable code Enter Flexible Feature Code
SAR Lock code Enter Flexible Feature Code
SAR Unlock code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Station Control Password Change code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
822 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
- TFAS
- TNDN
- TRMD
- TRVS
- USER
- USCR
- USTA
- VTLF
- VTLN
Prompt
- SFAC
- SPCC
- SPCE
- SPCU
- SSPU
Response
SFAC xxxx
SPCC xxxx
SPCE xxxx
SPCU xxxx
SSPU xxxx
TFAS xxxx
TNDN xxxx
TRMD xxxx
TRVS xxxx
USER xxxx
USCR xxxx
USTA xxxx
VTLF xxxx
VTLN xxxx
Comment
Secretarial Filtering Access code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Speed Call Controller code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Speed Call Erase code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Speed Call User code Enter Flexible Feature Code
System Speed Call User code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Trunk Answer From Any Station code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
Enter the DN-to-TN conversion utility code Enter
Flexible Feature Code
Terminal Diagnostics code Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Trunk Verification code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Set based administration User code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
User Selectable Call Redirection code Enter Flexible
Feature Code
User Status code Enter Flexible Feature Code
Virtual Office Terminal Logoff Enter Flexible Feature
Code
Virtual Terminal Login Enter Flexible Feature Code
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADMN xxxx
Comment
Enter set-based administration sequence (used to configure trunks)
Pack/Rel
supp-16
ALL (NO) YES Remove all Flexible Feature Codes
Prompted when REQ = OUT.
Choose default (NO) if removing individual
Flexible Feature Codes. Enter the selected code at the CODE prompt and the actual Flexible ffc-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 823
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
AWUD
AWUV
BNRA
BNRD
C6DS
CCFA
CCFD
CDRC
CEPT
Prompt Response Comment
Feature Code when the Flexible Feature Code is displayed.
AREM
ASRC xxxx xxxx
Automatic Set Removal code
Automatic Set Relocation Code
Pack/Rel
supp-16 sr-15
ATDA
ATDD
AUTH
AWUA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Autodial Activated
Autodial Deactivated
Authorization code
Auto Wake Up Activate code ffc-20 ffc-20 baut-15 awu-15
CFBA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Auto Wake Up Deactivate code
Auto Wake Up Verify
Activate the Busy Number Redial feature
Deactivate the Busy Number Redial feature
Six-Party Conference code
Activate the Customer Call Forward feature
Deactivate the Customer Call Forward feature
CDR Charge Account code awu-15 awu-15 ffc-21 ffc-21 awu-15 ffc-21 ffc-21 chg-15
(NO) YES Conference European Des Postes Tel defaults are to be used.
CEPT is prompted when REQ = NEW. If CEPT
= YES, then all CEPT defaults is set up. The default value for CPP is *67 if Calling Party
Privacy (CPP) package 301 is equipped.
basic-15
(NO)
YES
Call Forward Busy Activated
Call Forward to attendant pldn-15
CFDD
CFHO
CFWA xxxx xxxx
Call forward destination deactivation code
Call Forward/HUNT Override via FFC
Call Forward All Calls Activate code chffc ffc-22 optf-15 optf-15
824 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
COND
CPAC
CPP
CPPO
CPRK
Prompt Response
CFWD xxxx
Comment
Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code
CFWI
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
optf-15
Call Forward All Calls have priority over Group
Hunting
Skip idle station with CFW active
Terminate on idle station with CFW active
Prompted when USE = GPHT optf-15
CFWV
CODE xxxx aaaa
Call Forward All Calls Verify code
Specific Flexible Feature Code (FFC) type.
Where aaaa = mnemonic of FFC type to be changed. (e.g., AUTH, CPP, etc.)
Two actions are required to change a specific
FFC:
1. Enter the mnemonic of the FFC to be changed and then enter
<CR>
.
The mnemonic of the FFC is presented.
2. enter the desired numeric value for the FFC
The Flexible Feature Code can be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits when Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package (150) is equipped.
CODE is prompted when ALL = NO.
Example: to change the Flexible Feature Code for Call Park to 88, respond to CODE as follows:
Prompt Response
CODE CPRK <CR>
CPRK <88CR>
CODE <CR> (No further prompts, return to
REQ)
Forced Disconnect.
Priority Override/Breakin Network wide code.
No further prompts, return to REQ.
ffc-15
FDIS
PONW
<CR> xxxx xxxx
Conference Diagnostics code
Call Park Access Code xxxx Calling Party Privacy
(*82) xxxx Calling Party Privacy Override code xxxx Call Park code optf-15 basic-15 cpk-15 cpp-21 cpp-23 cpk-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 825
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt Response
CSHF xxxx
CUST xx
Comment
Centrex Switchhook Flash code
Pack/Rel
thf-15
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 cust-15
CWGA
CWGD
DEAF xxxx xxxx xxxx
Call Waiting Activated
Call Waiting Deactivated
Deactivate Feature (deactivates RDLN, RGA,
CFW, GHD and SNA codes.
Same operation as ATDD, CFWD, MSBD,
CWGD and RGAD ffc-20 ffc-20 optf-15
DPVS
ELKA
ELKD
EOVR
FDIS
FFCT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Data port verifications code
Electronic Lock Activate code basic-15 basic-15
Electronic Lock Deactivate code basic-15
Enhanced Override (manual Forced Camp-On followed by Priority Override) povr-20 xxxx Force Disconnect code.
ponw-25.4
(NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone
This tone allows users of 500/2500 or multi-line telephones to receive a confirmation tone after activating/deactivating the following features:
• Call Forward activate, deactivate
• Ring Again deactivate
• Store/erase Stored Number Redial
• all Automatic Wake Up codes
• Speed Call store
• any verification code ffc-15
GHTA
GHTD
GRCL
GRPF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Group Hunt Termination Allowed
Group Hunt Termination Disallowed pldn-15 pldn-15
Group Call List number (configured in LD18).
ffc-20
Group Call ffc-20
826 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
ICPD
ICPO
ICPP
IMS
ICFA
ICFD
ICFV
ICPA
Prompt Response
HIDN xxxx
Comment
Hospitality Identification
HOLD
HREL
HTYP xxxx xxxx
(LIN)
RRB
Permanent Hold code
Hospitality Relocation
Hunting Type
Linear Hunting
Round Robin Hunting
Prompted when USE = GPHT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Internal Call Forward Activate code
Internal Call Forward Deactivate code
Internal Call Forward Verify code
Intercept Computer Interface Activate code
Pack/Rel
hosp-16 basic-15 hosp-16 pldn-15 icf-19 icf-19 icf-19 icp-10
Intercept Computer Interface Deactivate code icp-10
Intercept Computer Interface Override code icp-10
Intercept Computer Interface Print code
Integrated Message System Access code icp-10 ims-15
INST
ITXX
LILO
LSNO
MCAN xxxx xxxx xxxx nnnn xxxx
Set based administration Installer
For "1xx' Special Services (up to 4 digits) adminset-21 ees-18
Login-Logout for 500/2500 ACD sets
Dialing the number programmed here allows an
ACD Agent on a 500/2500 telephone to toggle between Login and Logout. There is no confirmation tone.
bacd-16
List Number
SCL/SSC/GHT list number
LSNO is prompted when the PLDN response has not been defined as a GPHT pilot DN.
pldn-15
Cancel a Transfer or Conference from a mobile phone.
Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.
mobx-5.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 827
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt Response
MCFA xxxx
Comment
Activate a Conference from a mobile phone.
Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.
MCOM xxxx
MLIO
MNT xxxx xxxx
Complete a Conference or Transfer from a mobile phone.
Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.
Multi-Language I O
Enter set-based maintenance sequence (used to enable or disable trunks).
Pack/Rel
mobx-5.50
mobx-5.50
mlio-16 mlio-16
MNTC
MQUE xxxx
(All)
0
1
ACTM
Maintenance Access code
Limit to calls queued against pilot DN
No limit to the number of queued calls
No calls to be queued
One call can be queued.
Active Members (Allowed with French Type
Approval (FRTA) package 197) basic-15 supp-16
MSBA
MSBD
MTGL
MTRC
MTRN xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Make Set Busy Activated.
Make Set Busy Deactivated.
ffc-20
Enables a mobile phone use to toggle between the two parties in a Conference or Transfer.
Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.
mobx-5.50
Malicious Call Trace code
Activate the Transfer feature from a mobile phone.
Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.
ffc-20 mct-15 mobx-5.50
MWRA
MWUA
MWUD
NRDY xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Multiple Wake Up Activated
Automatic Wake Up (AWU) package 102 must be equipped for the MWU FFC codes to be available.
ffc-20
Repeat Multiple Wake Up Activated.
Multiple Wake Up Deactivated ffc-20 ffc-20
Not Ready activation/deactivation for 500/2500
ACD sets bacd-16
828 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
PURN
RCFA
RCFD
RCFV
RDLN
RDNE
PCAV
PGAP
PGIP
PGSP
PLDN
PONW
PUDN
PUGR
Prompt Response Comment
Dialing the number programmed here allows an
ACD Agent on a 500/2500 telephone to toggle in and out of the Not Ready state like other ACD
Agents. There is no confirmation tone returned.
OCBA
OCBD xxxx xxxx
Activate the Outgoing Call Barring feature
Deactivate the Outgoing Call Barring feature
Pack/Rel
ffc-21 ffc-21
OCBV
OVRD
PCAA
PCAD xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Verify the Outgoing Call Barring feature
Override and Priority Override
Personal Call Assistant Activate code
Personal Call Assistant Deactivate code ffc-21 povr-20 pca-398 pca-398 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Personal Call Assistant Verify code
Answer Parallel Paging code.
Initiate Parallel Paging code.
Initiate Serial Paging code.
Pilot DN
Priority Override Network Wide code.
Pick Up DN code.
Pick Up Group code.
pca-398 ffc-14 ffc-14 ffc-14 supp-15 ponw-25.4
grp-15 grp-15 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Pick Up Ringing Number code.
Remote Call Forward Activate code.
Remote Call Forward Deactivate code.
Remote Call Forward Verify code.
Redial Last Number code.
Redial Number Erase code.
grp-15 optf-15 optf-15 optf-15 lnr-15 snr-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 829
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
RPAN
RPAX
RTXX
SADS
SAEN
SALK
SAUN
Prompt Response
RDSN xxxx
RDST
REP*
REQ xxxx
0-9
<CR>
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
Comment
Redial Saved Number code.
Pack/Rel
snr-15 snr-15 Redial Store code.
One digit replacement for the * in the CEPT default codes.
The CEPT defaults is defined again with this digit used in place of the "*". In addition, the trailing # is omitted. REP* is prompted only when
REQ = NEW and CEPT = YES.
Use <CR> to create only CEPT defaults. Note that digit replacement is blocked for CPP defaults.
No change to defaults ffc-15
Request
Change existing data.
Exit Overlay program.
Create a new data block.
Remove Data Block.
Print Data Block.
ffc-15
RGAA
RGAD
RGAV
RMST xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Ring Again Activate code.
Ring Again Deactivate code.
Ring Again Verify code.
Room Status code optf-15 optf-15 optf-15 rms-15 xxxx xxxx
0-511 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Radio Paging Answer call code
Radio Paging Access code
CO route number for the "1xx" service
SAR Enable code
SAR Lock code
Ring Again Activate code
SAR Unlock code rpa-20 rpa-20 ees-18 sar-20 sar-20 sar-20 sar-20
830 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
TNDN
TRMD
TRVS
TYPE
USCR
USE
Prompt Response
SCPC xxxx
Comment
Station Control Password Change code
SFAC
SPCC xxxx xxxx
Secretarial Filtering Access code
Speed Call Controller code
SPCE
SPCU
SSPU
TFAS xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Speed Call Erase code
Speed Call User code
System Speed Call User code
Trunk Answer From Any Station code xxxx xxxx xxxx
FFC xxxx
GPHT
SCLU
SCLC
Enter the DN-to-TN conversion utility.
Terminal Diagnostics code
Trunk Verification code
Flexible Feature Codes data block
User Selectable Call Redirection
Initiate Group Hunting
SCL/SSC List User
SCL/SSC List Controller
Prompted when the PLDN response has not already been defined.
USER
USTA
VTLF
VTLN xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Set based administration User
User Status code
Virtual Terminal Logoff
Virtual Terminal Login supp-16 basic-15 tvs-15 ffc-15 uscr-19 pldn-15
Pack/Rel
basic-15 ffcsf-15 optf-15 ffc-14 optf-15 optf-15 basic-15 adminset-21 basic-15 arie-25 arie-25
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 831
LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes
832 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 35: LD 58: Radio Paging
Overlay program 58 allows the definition of options on a Radio Paging Access Code (RPAX) basis per customer.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block on page 833
RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block on page 834
RPS: Radio Paging System data block on page 835
TBL: Translation Table access data block
on page 835
RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
SNUM
RPAX
- ROUT
- PANN
Response
aaa
RPAX xx
0-15 nnnn
0-511
(NO) YES
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Radio Paging Access Code data block
Customer number associated with this function
System Number
Radio Paging Access code
Route number
Recorded Paging Announcement
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 833
LD 58: Radio Paging
Prompt
- - RPAR
- INTR
- RANR
Response
0-511 xxxx x...x
- MMDN
- EXTR
- RANR
- BYPS
- OPER
- - INTM
- - TRDN
- PATH
- - TWSP
- - ACPS
- - - ACPT
- DCHR xxxx x...x
(NO) YES aaaa
(0)-1-9
(0)-7
(0)- 16 aaaa aaaa
(YES) NO
(YES) NO xxxx
Comment
Route number that provides the recorded announcement
Treatment for internal calls to pager which is in the rack
Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if INTR = RAN
Meridian Mail DN which provides the recorded announcement or the defined function, prompted if INTR or EXTR = MAIL
Treatment for external calls to pager which is in the rack
Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if EXTR = RAN
Bypass the DN-PSA translation
Operation (aaaa = (AUTO) or MANU)
Internal Mode digit for this RPAX
Transmit this number of digits of caller's DN to paging equipment
Number of digits of caller's DN to paging equipment
Type of path to be provided (aaaa = (NONE), SPCH, or
RNGB)
Two-way Speech Path with a mobile pager allowed (aaaa
= (BOTH) or INT)
Radio Paging System to provide call-in-progress signals
Call Accepted is to be detected
Display Characters
RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block
Promp t
Response
REQ aaa
TYPE RPCD
CUST xx
RPTO a...a
MRPS (NO) YES
TRAN aaa
Comment
Request (CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Radio Paging Customer Data block
Customer number associated with this function
Radio Paging Tone (a...a = (SPCL), DIAL, or NONE)
Multiple Radio Paging Systems
Translation type (aaa = (TAB), TWO, THR, FOR, or NO)
834 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Promp t
Response
DNLN 1-(4)-16
PRET (YES) NO
RCRG 0-(6)-20
RCTI 0-(30)-120
RCAL (NO) YES
TBTR 4-(10)-30
Comment
DN Length
Pretranslation for Radio Paging
Number of Ring Cycles when recall to transferring set, before reroute to attendant
Time to wait for a "BUSY' transferring set to become idle
Recall if busy from RPA
Time between two recall attempts (to an SL-1 set)
RPS: Radio Paging System data block
Promp t
Response
REQ aaa
TYPE RPS
CUST xx
SNUM 0-15
PSAL 1-7
RTIM 0-(60)-630
STO 10-(30)-630
NSTO 10-(30)-630
MTO 0-(150)-630
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Radio Paging System data block
Customer number associated with this function
System Number
Paging System Access code Length
Length of the Recall Timer
Length of time required for Speech Path to be maintained in seconds
Length of time required for paging when No Speech Path is required
Length of the Meet-Me Timeout timer in seconds.
TBL: Translation Table access data block
Promp t
Response
REQ aaa
TYPE TBL
CUST xx
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Translation Table access
Customer number associated with this function
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 835
LD 58: Radio Paging
Promp t
Response
SNUM 0-15
DNPS xxxx yyyy
TABT aaa
RANG xxxx...xxxx
Comment
System Number
The DN to be translated and the number of the paging equipment to which the DN is assigned.
Table Type (aaa = DNP, NPS, or UPS)
Print DN Range from the first DN to the second DN
Alphabetical List of Prompts
Prompt Response Comment
ACPS (YES) NO Radio Paging System to provide the call-in-progress signals
Pack/Rel
rpa-15
ACPT (YES) NO Call Accepted is to be detected.
Prompted when PATH = RNGB or SPCH.
If PATH = RNGB or SPCH and ACPT = YES, then ringback is provided only when the call accepted signal is received. Speech path opens when Start-talk signal is received.
If PATH = RNGB and ACPT = NO, then ringback is provided when all the paging information has been entered.
If PATH = SPCH and ACPT = NO, then speech path is provided when all paging information has been sent
(number processed).
BYPS (NO) YES By-pass the DN-PSA translation
YES means that meet-me is not available and that the trunk is accessed directly; the next prompt is RPAX.
Prompted when MRPS = NO.
rpa-15
CUST
DCHR xx xxxx
(PAGE)
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.
rpa-15
Display Characters. Enter X to remove all characters rpa-15
Characters to be displayed on sets with Call Party
Name Display (CPND) activated (replaces the FFC)
(one per page).
DNLN 0 - (4) - 16 DN Length
Prompted if TRAN = NO, TWO, THR, or FOR rpa-15
836 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical List of Prompts
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
DNPS xxxx yyyy The DN to be translated and the number of the paging equipment to which the DN is assigned. This prompt is repeated to allow multiple entries.
Xxxxx
<CR>
The DN to be deleted from the entry
Stops the DNPS prompt rpa-15
EXTR
INTR
INTM
(BUSY)
ATT
SRC1 -
SRC8
RAN
(BUSY)
ATT
SRC1 -
SRC8
RAN
1-9-(0)
<CR>
MMDN xxxx
Treatment for external calls to pager which is in the rack.
Caller gets busy tone.
Call is routed to the attendant.
Tones or announcement delivered from the TDS card, programmed in Overlay 56.
Call is routed to the RAN machine.
Call is routed to Meridian Mail.
rpa- 23
Treatment for internal calls to pager which is in the rack.
Caller gets busy tone.
Call is routed to the attendant.
Tones or announcement delivered from the TDS card, programmed in Overlay 56.
Call is routed to the RAN machine.
Call is routed to Meridian Mail.
rpa- 23 rpa-15 Internal Mode digit for this RPAX
Default is the mode digit defined in EXTM
Meridian Mail DN which provides the recorded announcement or the defined function, prompted if
INTR = MAIL.
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
rpa- 23
MRPS (NO) YES Multiple Radio Paging Systems
MTO 0-
(150)-630
Length of the Meet-Me Timeout timer in seconds, after the STO or NSTO timer has expired
Where: 0 = no meet-me after STO or NSTO has expired. 10 second resolution.
NSTO 10-
(30)-630
OPER (AUTO)
MANU
Length of time required for paging when No Speech
Path is required. 10 second resolution.
Automatic Operation
Manual Operation rpa-15 rpa-15 rpa-15 rpa-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 837
LD 58: Radio Paging
Prompt Response Comment
PANN (NO) YES Recorded Paging Announcement allowed (denied) for this route
Pack/Rel
rpa-15
PATH (NONE)
SPCH
RNGB
PRET (YES)
NO
PSAL 1-7
No speech path or ringback provided
Speech path provided
Ringback to the calling party provided
Pretranslation for Radio Paging calls Allowed.
Pretranslation for Radio Paging calls Denied.
rpa-15 rpa- 23 rpa-15
RANG xxxx xxxx Print DN Range from the first DN to the second DN.
rpa-15 xxxx
<CR>
Print this DN.
Print all DNs
DNs are those listed in the Radio Paging (RPA) translation table. Prompted when TABT = DNP
RANR x...x
Paging System Access code length
Number of digits that are to be used to identify individual paging devices
Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if EXTR = RAN or if INTR
= RAN, where:
• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS 1000E
• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S, MG
1000B and MG 1000T rpa- 23
RCAL (NO) YES Recall if busy from RPA.
RCRG 0-(6)-20
X
Number of ring cycles when recall to transferring set, before reroute to attendant.
Where: 0 = use value entered in response to CFNA prompt in LD 15
Reroute to attendant (that is, no recall attempts to transferring set).
rpa-15 rpa-15
RCTI
REQ
0-(30)-120 Time to wait for a "BUSY' transferring set to become idle. After this time the call is routed to the attendant.
rpa-15
CHG
END
NEW
Request
Change existing data block.
Exit Overlay program.
Create a new data block.
rpa-15
838 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical List of Prompts
Prompt Response
OUT
PRT
Remove data block.
Print data block.
Comment
ROUT 0-511
RPAR 0-511
Pack/Rel
Route number of the trunk route connected to this paging system.
Route must be defined as PRA in LD 14 and 16.
rpa-15
The route number where the recorded announcement is provided from.
Route must be defined as RAN in LD 16.
rpa-15
RPAX nnnn
<CR>
Radio Paging Access Code
Tis prompt is repeated to allow multiple entries.
Stop RPAX prompt.
Access Codes must previously be defined in LD 57.
rpa-15
RPTO
RTIM
(SPCL)
DIAL
NONE
Radio Paging Tone, which is to be provided after the
RPAX/RPAN
Special dial tone
Normal Dial tone
No tone rpa-15
0-(60)-630 Length of the Recall Timer (in seconds) after the STO or NSTO timer has expired
Where: 0 = no timeout limit. 10 second resolution rpa-15
SNUM 0-15 rpa-15
STO 10-
(30)-630
System Number
Prompted when MPRS = YES
Length of time required for Speech Path to be maintained in seconds. 10 second resolution.
rpa-15
TABT rpa-15
TBTR
TRAN
DNP
NPS
UPS
Table Type
Print the DN-Paging System Access (PSA) entries
Print the unused PSA codes
Print the used PSA codes
Prompted when TYPE = TBL
4-(10)-30 Time between two recall attempts (to an SL-1 set)
(TAB)
TWO
THR
FOR
Translation type
Translation lookup table
Last two digits of DN
Last three digits of DN
Last four digits of DN rpa-15 rpa-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 839
LD 58: Radio Paging
Prompt Response
NO
Comment
No translation (DN sent as PSA code)
Prompt is not given if MRPS = YES. TRAN is then forced to TAB.
TRDN (0)-16
Pack/Rel
Transmit this number of digits of the caller's DN to the paging equipment rpa-15
TWSP
TYPE
(BOTH)
INT
RPAX
RPCD
RPS
TBL
Two-way speech path with a mobile pager allowed rpa-15
Both internal and external calls
Internal calls
Prompted when PATH = SPCH
Type of data block
Radio Paging Access Code data block
Radio Paging Customer Data block
Radio Paging System data block
Translation Table access data block rpa-15
840 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 36: LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Overlay program 73 allows the implementation and administration of the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) software and hardware.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
on page 844
DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI)
on page 846
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI) on page 847
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI) on page 847
Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package 167) on page 849
Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/
on page 851
Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on
page 851
Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)
on page 852
Table 11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)
on page 853
Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt on page 854
Signaling category assignment and modification
on page 854
Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category on page 856
Table 13: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (In_Out Calls)
on page 860
Table 14: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Incoming Calls) on
page 860
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 841
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Section
Table 15: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Outgoing Calls) on
page 861
Prompts and responses by data block
DDB: Digital data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
MGCLK
- PREF
- - SREF
CEQP
CLKN
- PREF
- - SREF
CC0
PREF CC0
SREF CC0
Response
aaa
DDB sl s c c c
(NO) YES xx xxx xxx xx
1-9
1-9
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block = DDB (Digital data block)
Superloop, shelf, and card number of Clock Controller for IPMG.
Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.
Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.
Secondary Reference card. The Secondary
Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.
Clock Controller Equipped (Small System)
Card number for Clock Controller (Small System)
Primary Reference
Secondary Reference
Card number for Clock Controller 0 (Small System)
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference, Where xx is:
• 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet
• 1-4 for Option 11C main Chassis
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference, Where xx is:
842 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by data block
CC1
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
CC2
PREF CC2
SREF CC2
CC3
Prompt
PREF CC3
SREF CC3
CC4
PREF CC4 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Response Comment
• 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet
• 1-4 for Option 11C main chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 1
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference, Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP (Intelligent Peripheral) expansion cabinet 1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 843
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
CTRR
TRSH
RALM
BIPC
LFAC
BIPV
SRTK
SRNT
LFAL
AUTO
SRAR
SRGT
SRIM
SRMM
ICS
Prompt
SREF CC4 xx
Response Comment
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis
(NO) YES
0-15
1-(3)-128
0-(2)-128
0-(3)-128 Loss of Frame Alignment Counter
1-(3)-4 1-(2)-4 Bipolar Violation maintenance and out-of-service threshold
Slip Rate Tracking mode maintenance 1-(5)-24 1-
(30)-3600
1-(15)-1024 1-
(3)-1024
Slip Rate Non-Tracking
1-(17)-10240
Clock tracking recovery in case of Blue Alarm on reference loops (Small System)
Threshold set
Remote (yellow) Alarm clear threshold
Bipolar violation Count threshold
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
1-(15)- 127
(1)-127
1-(2)-127
0-159
Loss of Frame Alignment maintenance and out-ofservice thresholds
Automatic recovery for frame slippage
Slip Rate Automatic Recovery
Slip Rate Guard Time in minutes
Slip Rate Improvement Monitoring time in minutes
Slip Rate Maintenance Maximum
Multi Purpose Serial Data Link Idle Code Selection
PRI2 data block ( LPTI)
The following prompts and associated responses define the grade of service timers for the DTI card. Group I problems are treated individually. They are bipolar violations, bit error rate (frame alignment) problems and slips.
844 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by data block
FAP
GP2
MNG1
NCG1
OSG1
MNG2
NCG2
OSG2
PERS
CLEA
Group II problems are treated as a group. They are bit 3 of TS0 (far-end out-of-service), bit 6 of TS16 (far-end lost multiframe alignment), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), loss of frame alignment and loss of multiframe alignment.
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
FEAT
LOOP
MFF
ACRC
ALRM
RAIE
SLP
NOOS
BPV
RATS
CRC
OOSC aaa
Response
PRI2
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block = PRI2
LPTI loop aaa
(NO) YES aaa
Feature = LPTI (Loop timer)
Loop number for PRI2
Multiframe Format (aaa = (AFF) or CRC)
Automatic reporting of CRC-4 error
Default alarm handler selected (aaa = (REG) or
ALT)
RAIE Group II alarm state enabled or disabled (NO) YES mc mt oc ot
(NO) YES
Slip count
The grade-of-service feat
Bipolar Violation thresholds 1-(128) or
(122)-255
1-(10)-15 The number of consecutive seconds the firmware has to check and validate error rate condition x...x
Cyclic Redundancy Check threshold [x...x = 1-(201) or (97)-255)]
1-(28)-255 (1)-255 Frame Alignment thresholds
T2 mt dt ct ot nnnM nnnM nnnM nnnS nnnS nnnS
0-(50)-254
0-(100)-256
0-(5)-127
Group 2 error thresholds
Maintenance Guard time Group 1
No New Calls Guard time Group 1
Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1
Maintenance Guard time Group 2
No New Calls Guard time Group 2
Out-of-Service Guard time Group 2
Group 2 Persistence timer and clearance timer
Clearance timer for Group II problems in 2 ms increments
Out -of-Service Counter
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 845
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI)
LCLB
UCFS
TGLR
MFF
CRC
BPV
FAP
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa aaaa
FEAT
LOOP
LPTI loop
CDTI2 (NO) YES
P DIGT (S) abcd
P METR (R) abcd
- EDGE x
- TIME
- MINP
40-(240)-480
(8)-256
Metering (Bits P, X or U are selectable)
Edge of pulse (0 or 1)
Maximum time METR signal can be on
Minimum Pulse length for a Meter Pulse
- PPMD
- ITPP
-MINP
-ITBP
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
8-(72)-248
8-(72)-248
PPM Parameter Download required
Italian PPM option allowed
Minimum time a PPM pulse is active
Idle time between PPM pulses
SASU
MFAO
SZNI
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block = DTI2 or JDMI
Feature = LPTI (Loop timer)
Loop number for DTI2
CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card
Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U are selectable)
SLP
GP2
FRFW
0-8064
YES NO
(NO) YES
Seize Acknowledge Supervision period
Multiframe Alignment Option
PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of MFAS and far-end fault states allowed
Lockout Clear Back option for DID trunks (NO) YES xxxx
(NO) YES
Unequipped Channel Fault Signal
Toggle Reserve bits in Frame 0 aaa Multiframe Format (aaa = (AFF) or CRC)
NC mt dt ct ot Cyclic Redundancy Check error counts
NB mt dt ct ot Bipolar Violation error counts
NF mt dt ct ot Frame Alignment Problem thresholds
NS mt dt ct ot Slip count maintenance threshold
T2 mt dt ct ot Group 2 error thresholds
(NO) YES DTI2 loop is equipped with special Firmware for France
846 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses by data block
Prompt
CISFW
-MFSL
-500L
Response
aaa
(0)-3
(0)-1
Comment
Defines the CDTI2/CSDTI2 card's FW option to be used
The MFS signals transmission level.
ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
FEAT
MAND
MGCLK aaa aaaa
Response
SYTI
0-(15)-1440 sl s c
NCSD
OSGD
OOSC
PERS
DBNC
CLKN
PREF
SREF
CC0
0-(15)-1440
1S-59S
0-(15)-1440
0-(5)-127
0-(100)-254
(10)-32
0-4 l s c c c
1-4 l s c
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type (aaaa = DTI2, PRI2, or JDMI)
Feature = SYTI (System timers)
Maintenance Guard time
Superloop, shelf, and card number of Clock
Controller for IPMG.
Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.
New Call Suppression Guard time
Out-of-Service Guard time in minutes
Out-of-Service Counter
Persistence timer
Debounce timer
Card number for Clock Controller. Where:
• 0-4 is for Small Systems
• l s c is for CS 1000E
Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.
Secondary Reference card. The Secondary
Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.
Card number for Clock Controller 0. Where:
• 0-4 is for Small Systems
• l s c is for CS 1000E
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 847
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
PREF CC0
SREF CC0
CC1
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
CC2
PREF CC2
SREF CC2
CC3
PREF CC3
SREF CC3
CC4
1-9
Response
1-9 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Comment
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference for the main cabinet
(Option 11C)
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the secondary clock reference for the main cabinet
(Option 11C)
Card number for Clock Controller 1
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 2
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 3
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number for Clock Controller 4
848 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses for setting pad values
Prompt
PREF CC4
SREF CC4
CCGD
CCAR
EFCS xx
Response
xx
0-(15)-1440
0-(15)
(NO) YES
Comment
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis
Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis
Clock Controller free run Guard time
Clock Controller Audit Rate
Enable Fast Clock Switching
Prompts and responses for setting pad values
Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package
167)
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
FEAT
PDCA
TNLS
DFLT
Response
aaa aaa
PAD
1-16
(NO) YES
1-16
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block = DTI or PRI
Pad Category
Pad Category table. PDCA 1 and PDCA 16 are preconfigured. See the Note below for further details.
Terminal Number List
Use default codes from this pad category table for the following prompts if <CR> is entered at the prompt
Note:
For the following prompts, x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit). You may assign receive and transmit dB values to the following prompts by entering a code which corresponds to a dB value. Code options and their corresponding dB values are listed in
Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 849
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
XEM
BRIL
BRIT
MCM
TOLT
TOLL
DTO
VNL
SATT
ACO
ATO
PRI
PRI2
XUT
Prompt Response Comment
codes.
To find the default values for Pad Category 1 when TYPE = DTI or PRI, refer to
Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167)
on page 851. To find default values for Pad Category 1 when TYPE = BRIL, BRIT, DTI2, or PRI2, refer to
Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)
on page 852. To find default values for Pad Category 16 when TYPE = JDMI, refer to
11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)
on page 853.
ONP
DSET x y x y
On-Premises Extension
Meridian Digital Set
OPX
DTT
SDTT
DCO x y x y x y x y
Off-Premises Extension
Digital TIE Trunks
Satellite Digital TIE Trunks
Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks x y x y x y x y x y x y x y x y
1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI Digital TOLL Office trunks
Via Net Loss (Analog TIE)
Satellite Analog TIE Trunks
Analog COT and WATS trunks
Analog TOLL Office trunks
1.5 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk
2.0 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk
Extended Peripheral Equipment Universal Trunk x y x y x y x y x y x y
Extended Peripheral Equipment E&M Trunk
Basic Rate Interface Line
Basic Rate Interface Trunk
M1 CT2 mobility pad value
Toll call pad data on DTI2 card
Toll call pad data on line card (Do not refer to
Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/
BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/JDMI on page 851 for TOLL
values. Refer instead to Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt
on page 854).
850 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses for setting pad values
Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/JDMI
Code
0
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
Value (dB)
0.0‡
+1.0‡
+2.0‡
+3.0‡
+4.0‡
+5.0‡
+6.0‡
+7.0
+8.0‡
Code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Value (dB)
+9.0
+10.0‡
+11.0
+12.0‡
+13.0
+14.0
-1.0‡
-2.0‡
-3.0‡
Code
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Value (dB)
-4.0‡
-5.0
-6.0‡
-7.0
-8.0
-9.0
-10.0
Idle‡
+0.6‡
Note:
PRI/DTI pad category prompts require GPRI package 167.
Note:
Dagger Represents pad values supported by DTI2 for large systems.
Note:
Small System supports all pad values for DTI2.
Note:
Positive dB represents loss and negative dB represents gain.
Note:
Code 0, pad value 0.0, is equivalent to no pad. It is used for DTA (Data only) and VOD (Voice or Data) call types and supported by DTI2.
Note:
"Idle" means that PCM signals are converted to silence.
Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167)
Connection type
ONP
DSET
Rx code
6
6
Rx PAD (dB)
+6.0
+6.0
Tx code
0
0
Rx PAD (dB)
0.0
0.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 851
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Connection type
OPX
DTT
SDTT
DCO
DTO
VNL
SATT
ACO
ATO
PRI
PRI2
XUT
XEM
BRIL
BRIT
MCM
Rx code
6
0
0
6
6
6
3
3
0
6
0
6
3
0
0
0
Rx PAD (dB)
+6.0
+6.0
+6.0
+6.0
0.0
0.0
+6.0
0.0
+3.0
+3.0
0.0
+6.0
+3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0000
Tx code
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rx PAD (dB)
Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)
Rx code Rx PAD (dB) Tx code Rx PAD (dB) Connection type
ONP
OPX
DTT
DCO
NTC
TRC
DTR
VNL
ACO
AFX
ADD
17
4
4
4
4
0
4
4
17
17
0
-3.0
+4.0
+4.0
+4.0
+4.0
-3.0
-3.0
0.0
0.0
+4.0
+4.0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
852 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Connection type
PRI
DSET
BRIL
BRIT
MCM
TOLT
TOLL
Rx code
0
0
0
0
16
0
6
Rx PAD (dB)
0.0
+6.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Prompts and responses for setting pad values
Tx code
Table 11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)
Rx code Rx PAD (dB) Tx code
VNL
ACO
AFX
ADD
PRI
DSET
BRIL
BRIT
Connection type
ONP
OPX
DTT
DCO
NTC
TRC
DTR
MCM
TOLT
TOLL
+4.0
+4.0
+4.0
+4.0
0.0
+6.0
0.0
0.0
-1.0
-3.0
0.0
0.0
+4.0
+4.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6
0
0
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
16
4
4
0
15
17
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
30
1
1
- - -
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0
0
Rx PAD (dB)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
- 7.0
Rx PAD (dB)
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
+1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
+8.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
+1.0
+1.0
- - -
0.0
0.0
- 7.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 853
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt
10
11
12
13
7
8
5
6
9
Code
0
1
2
3
4
+3.0
+2.5
+2.0
+1.5
+5.5
+5.0
+4.5
+4.0
+3.5
dB Value
>= +8.0
+7.5
+7.0
+6.5
+6.0
24
25
26
27
19
20
21
22
23
Code
14
15
16
17
18
-4.0
-4.5
-5.0
-5.5
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5
-3.0
-3.5
dB Value
+1.0
+0.5
0.0
-0.5
-1.0
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Code
28
29
30
31
32
dB Value
-6.0
-6.5
-7.0
-7.5
-8.0
-8.5
-9.0
-9.5
-10.0
-10.5
-11.0
<= -11.5
Signaling category assignment and modification
What can be entered for the abcd response?
Prompts which show the response abcd, such as IDLE (S), require a four field response to indicate the status of four bits: a, b, c and d. The abcd response represents a trunk supervisory message. The bit states within the message are determined by using the appropriate input.
Allowable inputs for each bit are: 0, 1, C, P, U, X, N. These input options are explained as follows:
• 0 - Bit is a steady state 0 (LOW) e.g. 0000 bits abcd are all steady state 0.
• 1 - Bit is a steady state 1 (HIGH) e.g. 0101 bits b and d are steady state 1 while bits a and c are steady state 0.
• C - Bit is pulsed and present continuously (Continuous pulsing of two or more bits is not allowed.).
854 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Signaling category assignment and modification
• "C" can be entered only for signals that have "C" in front of them when the signal is prompted; the signals are: "C CLRB (S), C CLRB (R) and C SUPO (S) UNUSED"
• "C" cannot be mixed with 0 or 1 or P in the ABCD pattern. Therefore, the entry must look like CXXX, XCXX, etc.
• "C" can be entered only once in the ABCD pattern
• C cannot be entered for the CLRB (R) or CLRB (S) prompts if the pulsed E&M package
(232) PEMD is equipped P - Bit is pulsed. e.g. PC10 bit a is pulsed, bit b is pulsed and sent continuously, bit c is steady state 1 and bit d is steady state 0.
• U - Bit is a don't-care bit (for received signals only) e.g. U10U bits a and d are don't-care bits, bit b is steady state 1 and bit c is steady state 0.
• X - Bit is not to be changed (used in conjunction with Pulsed or Continuously pulsed bit) e.g. XPXX bits a, c and d are unchanged, bit b is set to steady state 1 and bit c is set to steady state 0.
Another input to the signal name prompt is allowed. The other allowable input is:
N - The signal is not required.
How to tell if the signal is pulsing, pulsed or steady?
The signal type is identified by a single character followed by a blank space preceding the signal name. For example, the prompt E SEZ(R) indicates that the Seize signal can be either
Pulsed or steady state. The signal type identifiers are:
• C - Continuous Pulsing, Pulsed or steady state
• E - Pulsed or steady state
• P - Pulsed (single pulse unless otherwise indicated)
• No preceding character indicates the signal is steady state only
Pulsed signals output the TIME prompt. This prompt is described for each of the signals that may prompt it.
How to determine signal direction?
The direction of the signal is indicated by a single character in brackets at the end of the signal name:
• (R) - Indicates that the signal is to be received by the switch
• (S) - Indicates that the signal is to be sent by the switch
For example, E SEZ (R) indicates that the Seize signal can be either Pulsed or steady state and that the signal is to be received by the switch.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 855
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
How to tell if the prompt incoming or outgoing, or both
ABCD prompts correspond to incoming calls, outgoing calls or both incoming and outgoing calls. Prompts IDLE (S) to P RRC correspond to incoming/outgoing calls. Prompts E SEZ (R) to P FRLS (R) correspond to incoming calls. Prompts E SEZ (S) to C SUPO (S) correspond to outgoing calls.
A note about JDMI
For Japan Digital Multiplex Interface (JDMI), the signal requires only a bit signaling. All four bits is allowed to be programmed as the software uses all four bits for call processing. The
JDMI hardware defaults the bcd bits to 101 for sending signaling changes. Therefore, if any changes are made to received signals, the bcd bits must be set to 101; otherwise, these signals do not be recognized.
Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
FEAT
SICA
TNLS
DFLT
Response
aaa aaa
ABCD
2-16
(NO) YES
(1)-16
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block
Feature = ABCD
Signaling Category
Terminal Number List
Default signaling category to be used for Default values
Note:
The following prompts have default values for Signalling Category 1 and 16 which can be found in
Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/
Prompts for Incoming/Outgoing Calls
IDLE (S) abcd Idle
IDLE (R)
FALT (S)
FALT (R) abcd abcd abcd
Idle
Fault (DTI out-of-service)
Fault (DTI out-of-service)
856 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category
Prompt
P RRC (S)
- TIME
Response
abcd Register Recall
Comment
10-(100)-630 Time of RRC (S) in milliseconds
TIME (0)-1920
Prompts for Incoming Calls
Persistence Time required before signal is accepted
E SEZ (R) abcd
- TIME
Seize for voice or data calls from a non-SL-1
16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000
Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration
SEZD (R)
- SEZV (R) abcd
P CALL (R) abcd
- TIME abcd Seize for data calls between SL-1s
Seize for voice calls
Signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk
1-(2)-15 1-(8)-15
SEZA (S)
- TIME abcd
50-80-90
PRCS (S) abcd
WNKS (S) abcd
P WNKS (S) abcd
Pulse on time, pulse off time
Seize Acknowledgment
Time delay prior to sending SEZA
PRCS
Wink Start
Wink Start
- TIME 10-(220)-630 Time for P WNKS (S)
P DIGT (R) abcd Decadic pulses
NRCV (S) abcd
P EOSF (S) abcd
Number Received
End of Selection Free
- TIME
- P EOSB
(S)
- - TIME
(100)-150 abcd
(100)-150
P OPC (R) abcd
- TIME
- TIME
64-(128)-192
Time for EOSF (S)
End of Selection Busy
Time for EOSB (S)
Operator Calling
Time of OPCA (R) pulse
16-(96)-1000 16-(160)-1000
Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration
- REPT (1)-5
CONN (S) abcd
E CON (S) abcd
Number of OPCA (R) pulses
Connect
Connect
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 857
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
- TIME
Response
Connect
Comment
10-(150) 630 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments
CONN (R) abcd
P BURS (S) abcd
P BURS (R) abcd
- TIME
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking
64-(128)-192 Time for BURS (R) pulse
CLRB (S) abcd
C CLRB (S) abcd
- TIME
Clear Back
Clear Back
10-(600)-2000 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments
- P RCT (S) abcd
- - TIME
Release Control
100-(150) 300 Time value is stored in 10 ms increments
- - P RCOD
(S) abcd Release Control Originating party Disconnect
- - - TIME 150
P OPRS (R) abcd
- TIME xxxx yyyy
P NXFR (S) abcd
P ESNW (S) abcd
P CAS (S) abcd
Timer value in milliseconds is fixed
Operator manual recall
Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS (R)
Network Transfer
ESN Wink
Centralized Attendant
CLRF (R)
- SOS abcd abcd
Clear Forward
Special Operator Signal
P BRLS (S) abcd
- TIME
Backward Release
10-(600)-2000 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments
P FRLS (R) abcd
- TIME
Forward Release
16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration
Prompts for Outgoing Calls
E SEZ (S) abcd
- TIME 10-(150)-630
Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1
Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments
SEZD (S) abcd Seize for Data calls
- SEZV (S) abcd
SEZA (R) abcd
Seize for Voice calls
Seize Acknowledgment
858 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category
Prompt
- TIME
Response
xxx
Comment
Delay time for the SEZA signal (xxx = 50, 80, 90, (150), or
800)
WNKS (R) abcd
- TIME
Wink Start
20-(140)-500 20-(290)-500
Minimum and maximum length of WNKS (R) pulse
P WNKS (R) abcd
- TIME
Wink Start
16-(136)-504 16-(288)-504
Minimum and maximum length of P WNKS (R) pulse
P EOS (R) abcd
- TIME
End of Selection
(64)-320 64-(256)-320
Length of EOS (R) pulse
CONN (S) abcd
CONN (R) abcd
E CONN (R) abcd
- TIME
Connect
Connect
Connect
16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000
P OPRC (R) abcd
P BURS (S) abcd
Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments
Operator Recall for special services
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking
P BURS (R) abcd
- TIME 64-(128)-192
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking
Time for BURS (R) pulse
CLRB (R) abcd
C CLRB (R) abcd
- TIME
Clear Back
Clear Back
16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
- P RCTL (R) abcd
- - TIME
Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments
Release Control
96-(128)-320 96-(256)-320
P NXFR (R)
- TIME abcd
P ESNW (R) abcd
P CAS (R) abcd
CLRF (S) abcd
(0)-800
Time stored in 8 ms increments
Network Transfer
ESN Wink
Centralized Attendant Service
Clear Forward
Time in milliseconds
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 859
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
- SOS
Response
abcd
P FRLS (S) abcd
C SUPO (S) abcd
Special Operator Signal
Comment
Forward Release
- TIME 10-(600)-2000 Only prompted for pulsed signals
P BRLS (R) abcd Backward Release
- TIME 16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments
Complex Supervision to Operator Signal used for KD3 signaling. Note that the input for a must be C.
Table 13: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (In_Out Calls)
IDLE (S)
IDLE (R)
FALT (S)
FALT (R)
TIME
P RRC (S)
In/Out Calls SICA 1
1001
1001
1101
1101
0
UNUSED
SICA 16
1101
1101
0101
0101
0
UNUSED
Table 14: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Incoming Calls)
SICA 1 SICA 1 SICA 16 Incoming
Calls
E SEZ (R)
SEZD (R)
SEZV (R)
P CALL (R)
SEZA (S)
TIME
PRCS (S)
P WNKS (S)
TIME
P DIGT (R)
NRCV (S)
0001
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
150
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
SICA 16
0101
Incoming
Calls
CONN (R)
UNUSED P BURS (S)
UNUSED P BURS (R)
UNUSED C CLRB (S)
UNUSED P RCTL (S)
P RCOD (S)
UNUSED P OPRS (R)
PXXX P NXFR (S)
220 P ESNW (S)
PXXX P CAS (S)
UNUSED CLRF (R)
0001
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
0101
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
860 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category
Incoming
Calls
P EOSF (S)
P EOSB (S)
P OPCA (R)
E CONN (S)
SICA 1
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
0101
SICA 16 Incoming
Calls
UNUSED SOS (R)
UNUSED P BRLS (S)
UNUSED P FRLS (R)
0101
SICA 1
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
SICA 16
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
Table 15: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Outgoing Calls)
Outgoing Calls
E SEZ (S)
SEZD (S)
SEZV (S)
SEZA (R)
P WNKS (R)
TIME
P EOS (R)
CONN (S)
E CONN (R)
P OPRC (R)
P BURS (S)
P BURS (R)
C CLRB (R)
P RCTL (R)
P NXFR (R)
P ESNW (R)
P CAS (R)
CLRF (S)
SOS (R)
P FRLS (S)
P BRLS (R)
SICA 1
0001
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
UNUSED
UNUSED
0001
0101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
0101
0101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
1101
UNUSED
UNUSED
SICA 16
0101
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
PXXX
136 288
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 861
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
500L
ACO
ACRC
ADD
AFX
ALRM
Response
(0)-1
Comment
ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level.
The prompt appears when only CISFW is set to MFA.
The transmission level can be set to the following values:
0 (default) = -7.3 DB
1 = -3.5 DB
Pack/Rel
x y
<CR>
(NO)
YES
Analog COT and WATS trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14
No reporting of CRC-4 error
Automatic reporting of CRC-4 error during transmission
ACRC is printed only for PRI2 loops and if
MFF = CRC.
euro-20 x y
<CR> x y
<CR>
(REG)
Analog Direct Inward Dial trunks. Where x =
Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14
Analog Foreign Exchange trunks. Where x =
Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14
Regular firmware alarm handler (RAI transmission is controlled by software) dti/pra-14
862 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
ATO
Prompt
BIPC
BIPV
Response
ALT
Comment
Alternate firmware alarm handles (Immediate transmission of RAI by firmware)
An error rate less than 10 is reported as a
Group 1 alarm message.
Pack/Rel
x y
<CR>
0-(2)-128
Analog Toll Office trunks. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Bipolar violation Count threshold
This is the maximum number of times a DTI/
PRI loop can be taken out of service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.
Refer to the Digital Trunk Interface
maintenance NTP or the PRI and DCHI maintenance NTP for details.
If "0" is entered, there is no limit on number of times trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.
The method of bit rate monitoring depends on the loop configuration: dti/pra-14
1. For DTI mode: bipolar violation threshold
2. For PRI mode with D2, D3, or D4 framing format: bipolar violation threshold
3. For PRI mode with Extended Superframe
Format (ESF): Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) threshold
1-(3)-4 1-(2)-4
Bipolar Violation maintenance and Out-of-
Service threshold
This is the maximum number of times a DTI/
PRI loop can be taken out of service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually. Refer to the Digital Trunk Interface maintenance
NTP or the PRI and DCHI maintenance NTP for details.
dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 863
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
BPV
BPV
Prompt Response Comment
If “0” is entered, there is no limit on number of times trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.
The method of bit rate monitoring depends on the loop configuration:
1. For DTI mode: bipolar violation thresholds
2. For PRI mode with D2, D3, or D4 framing format: bipolar violation thresholds
3. For PRI mode with Extended Superframe
Format (ESF): Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) thresholds
Pack/Rel
1-(128)-255 1-(122)-255
Bipolar Violation Maintenance and Out-of-
Service thresholds. The values entered are multiplied by 16 to obtain the actual count, giving an actual range of 16-4080.
dti/pra-14
NB mt dt ct ot
Bipolar Violation error counts. Where:
• NB = Error count values are in the range 1-
(205)-255
• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)
• (default = 10S)
• dt = No new data calls threshold time
(NNDC) (default = 3S)
• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)
• (default = 3S)
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)
• (default = 1S)
Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:
Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.
Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:
• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments
• 1S–240S = 1 second increments dti/pra-14
864 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
BRIL
BRIT
C CLRB (R)
C CLRB (S)
CCAR
Response Comment
• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments
• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments
Important note: The following requirements must be met:
• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot
• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.
Pack/Rel
x y
<CR> x y
<CR> abcd
N abcd
N
0-(15)
Basic Rate Interface Line. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Basic Rate Interface Trunk. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Clear Back. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
If C CLRB (R) not required, when IDLE would be used abcd-18
Clear Back. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854. If
Clear Back is configured as continuous pulsing then a 100 ms pulse is sent very 333 ms.
If CLRB (S) not required (IDLE signal is used) abcd-18
Clock Controller Audit Rate
The time, in minutes, between normal CC audits. Only programmable on units equipped with 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.
supp-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 865
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
CC0
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC4
Prompt
CCGD
CDTI2
CEQP
Response Comment
Before programming clock controller references, the QPC775 clock controller card(s) must be plugged in, and the switches on the system's QPC441 3 Port Extender appropriately set.
Unless this is done, the PREF and SREF prompts are not given.
Pack/Rel
1-9 Card number for Clock Controller 0 (Option
11C with Survivable IP). Where xx is:
• 1-9 for main cabinet
• 1-4 for Option 11C main chassis sipe-25 xx xx
Card number for Clock Controller 1. Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 1
• 11-14 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 2
• 21-24 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
xx xx
0-(15)-1440
Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 3
• 31-34 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 4
• 41-44 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
supp-15
Clock Controller free run Guard time (in minutes)
(NO)
YES
No CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card
CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card
(NO) YES Clock Controller Equipped dti/pra-14 dti/pra-14
866 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CISFW
CLEA
CLKN
CLRB (R)
CLRB (S)
Response Comment
Prompted only for SL-1 M, MS or S.
Pack/Rel
YES
(NO)
DP
MFS
MFA
0-(100)-256
CISFW defines the CDTI2/CSDTI2 card's FW option to be used.
cist-21
YES means that this loop is CIS DTI trunk. NO means that the given loop must be considered as DTI2.
Prompted with CIST package 221 and CDTI2
= YES.
Non CIS DTI2 signalling protocols on the
NTCG01AA/NTCG02AA or NTCG01AB/
NTCG02AB card.
cismfs-23 cist-24
Dial Pulse CIS signalling protocol on the
NTCG01AA/NTCG02AA card.
Both the CIS Dial Pulse and the CIS MFS signalling protocols on the NTCG01AB/
NTCG02AB. Minimum card vintages are specified.
CIS Firmware type is MFA - which means that the Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling
+ ANI Reception + Firmware Dial Tone
Detection capabilities are supported euro-20
Clearance timer for Group II problems in 2 millisecond increments. CLEA is printed only for PRI2 loops.
xx l s c abcd
N abcd
Card number for Clock Controller (Option
11C) Where: xx = 1-9
Superloop, Shelf, Card number of Clock
Controller supp-18 basic-5.00
Clear Back. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
CLRB (R) not required, when IDLE would be used abcd-14
Clear Back. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 867
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
CRC
Prompt
CLRF (R)
CLRF (S)
CONN (R)
CONN (S)
Response
N
Comment
CLRB (S) not required (IDLE signal is used) abcd
N abcd
N abcd
Pack/Rel
Clear Forward. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
CLRF (R) not required abcd-18
Clear Forward. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
CLRF (S) not required abcd-18 abcd
Connect. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14
Connect. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
x...x
NC mt dt ct ot
Functionality depends on datablock in use.
pri2-14
In the DTI2 and JDM1 datablocks, CRC configures the Cyclic Redundancy Check threshold, where x...x = 1-(201) or (97)-255
In the PRI2 datablock, CRC configures the
Cyclic Redundancy Check error counts.
Where:
• NC = Error count values are in the range 1
- 255
• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
Default = 10S.
• dt = No new data calls threshold time
(NNDC). Default = 3S.
• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
Default = 3S.
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS).
Default = 1S.
Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:
Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.
Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:
868 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
C SUPO(S)
CTRR
DBNC
DCO
DFLT
Response Comment
• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments
• 1S–240S = 1 second increments
• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments
• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments
Important: The following requirements must be met:
• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot
• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.
Pack/Rel
abcd
N
(NO)
YES
(10)-32 x y
<CR>
(1)-16
Complex Supervision to Operator signal used for KD3 signalling calls to Special Services with Hold. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Note that the input for the a field must be C.
SUPO not required kd3-20
Clock tracking recovery in case of Blue Alarm on reference loops (Small System).
Software controlled clock reference tracking recovery is disabled in case of Blue Alarm on the reference loops.
Software controlled clock reference tracking recovery is enabled in case of Blue Alarm on the reference loops.
basic-4.50
Debounce timer (in milliseconds) For DTI2 only.
pedm-18
Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.
Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code
(transmit). Response range for x and y is:
0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14
Default signaling category to be used for default values.
dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 869
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
DTO
DTT
Prompt
DSET
Response
<CR>
Comment
When REQ = NEW, default is SICA 1 for DTI2 and SICA 16 for JDMI.
Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with
on page 851 shows the default values for both Signaling Categories 1 & 16.
A carriage return configures default values, according to your configuration:
DTI/PRI - default pad codes from Table 9:
Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1)
on page 851 on
Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values
(PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on
page 851. (PDCA 1). Must be equipped with
GPRI package 167.
BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2 - default pad codes
from Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values
(PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2) on
page 852 on Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg
JDMI - default pad codes from
Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16)
on page 853 on Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt on page 854. (PDCA
16)
Pack/Rel
x y
<CR> x y
Meridian Digital Set. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
<CR> x y
1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI Digital TOLL Office trunks.
Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code
(transmit). Response range for x and y is:
0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Digital TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on gpri-18
870 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
FAP
Prompt
E CONN (R)
E CONN (S
E SEZ (R)
E SEZ (S)
EDGE
EFCS
FALT (R)
FALT (S)
Response
<CR>
Comment
page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values
Pack/Rel
abcd abcd
Connect. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14
Connect. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14 abcd abcd
Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-18
Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-18
0
1
(NO) YES Enable Fast Clock Switching
EREF option in LD 60 must be chosen to enable this prompt.
abcd
N abcd
Edge of pulse
PPM bit counted when changed from 1 to 0
PPM bit counted when changed from 0 to 1
Fault (DTI out-of-service). For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
If FALT not required dti/pra-14 dti/pra-18 abcd-14 abcd-14
N
Fault (DTI out-of-service). For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
If FALT not required
1-(28)-255 (1)-255
Frame Alignment thresholds dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 871
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
FEAT
Response
NF mt dt ct ot
Comment
Frame Alignment Problem thresholds
Where:
• NF = Error count values are in the range: 1-
(32)-255
• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)
• (default = 4S)
• dt = No new data calls threshold time
(NNDC)
• (default = 1S)
• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)
• (default = 1S)
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)
• (default = 100T)
Pack/Rel
dti/pra-14
Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:
Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.
Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:
• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments
• 1S–240S = 1 second increments
• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments
• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments
Important note: The following requirements must be met: mt = >dt = >ct = >ot
Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.
ABCD
PAD
Feature
ABCD bit signaling category Valid response when TYPE = DTI2 or JDMI. Refer to NTP
553-2911-200 for default ABCD table with suggested values.
Pad category Valid response for all types.
This prompt is not applicable for DPNSS and
DASS2 applications. For DPNSS, the pad values are automatically set to zero (0) for dti/pra-14
872 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
GP2
Prompt
FRFW
Response
LPTI
SYTI
Comment
both transmit and receive. For DASS2, the loss pad values are set to zero (0) for transmit and four (4) for receive.
If TYPE = BRIL or BRIT, then PAD is the only response allowed.
Loop Timers
Valid response when TYPE = DTI2, JDMI or
PRI2.
System Timers and counter (only one set per system)
Valid response when TYPE = DTI2, JDMI or
PRI2.
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES This DTI2 loop is (is not) equipped with special Firmware for France.
dti/pra-18
T2 mt dt ct ot
Group 2 error thresholds
Where:
• T2 = Error count values in range: 1-
(20)-255. The T2 entry defines the maximum time that can occur before software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32,640 msec and rounds them to the closest multiple of 128 msec.
• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)
• (default = 100S)
• dt = No new data calls threshold time
(NNDC)
• (default = 12S)
• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)
• (default = 12S)
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)
• (default = 4S)
Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:
Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.
Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows: dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 873
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
ICS
Prompt
IDLE (R)
IDLE (S)
ITBP
ITPP
LCLB
LFAC
LFAL
Response Comment
• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments
• 1S–240S = 1 second increments
• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments
• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments
Important note: The following requirements must be met:
• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot
• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.
Pack/Rel
0-159 abcd abcd
Multi Purpose Serial Data Link Idle Code
Selection
Loop number for which IDLE PCM code has to be sent Precede loop number with X to remove pra-24 abcd-14 Idle. For information about your response
options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Idle. For information about your response
options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14
8-(72)-248 Idle Time between PPM pulses in milliseconds
(NO)
YES
Italian PPM option denied
Italian PPM option allowed kd3-20 kd3-20
(NO) YES Lockout Clear Back option for DID trunks
0-(3)-128 Loss-of-Frame-Alignment Counter
This is the maximum number of times a DTI/
PRI loop can be taken out-of-service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.
If "0" is entered, there is no limit on number of times that trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.
dti/pra-14
1-(17)-10240 1-(511)-10240 dti/pra-14
874 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
LOOP
LOOP
MAND
MCM
MFAO
MFF
Prompt
MFSL
Response Comment
Loss-of-Frame-Alignment maintenance and out-of-service thresholds for a 24 hour period
The maintenance threshold must be greater than the out-of-service threshold.
Pack/Rel
dti/pra-14 loop card loop
PRI2 Loop number
PRI2 or DTI2 card slot for Option 11C only
DTI Loop number
Must be defined in LD 17.
dti/pra-14
0-(15)-1440 x y
<CR>
YES
NO
<CR> dti2-14
Maintenance guard time (in minutes). For
DTI2 only.
M1 CT2 Mobility Pad value. . Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values mcmo-20
Multiframe Alignment Option
DTI card sets bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of
Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs
(JDMI default)
DTI card do not set bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of
Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs
(DTI2 default)
No change is required.
dti/pra
(AFF)
CRC
(0)-3
Multiframe Format
The prompt appears only if CDTI2 = YES.
CRC4 or Alternate Frame Format can be chosen. In the previous design, this prompt was issued for SDC2 (Option 11C DTI2) loops.
Alternative Frame Format
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC 4). CRC is prompted for Small System. For Large
System, only AFF is supported.
dti/pra-14
The MFS signals transmission level. The prompt appears when CISFW is set to MFS
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 875
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
MGCLK
MINP
MNG1
MNG2
NCG1
NCG2
NCSD
NOOS
Response Comment
or MFA and the CISMFS package is equipped.
The transmission level can be set to the following values:
• (0) = -7.3 db
• 1 = -5.0 db
• 2 = -3.5 db
• 3 = 0 DB
Pack/Rel
sl s c Superloop, shelf, and card location of the
Clock Controller (NTAK20) for the IPMG.
Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.
To remove the configured Clock Controller on a particular IPMG, precede the Prompt arguments with an "X". For example, "MGCLK
Xsl s". Note that the "c" (card) parameter is not required for the removal.
ipmg-5.0
kd3-20 8-(72)-248 Idle time between PPM pulses (in milliseconds) nnnM Maintenance Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M.
dti/pra-14 nnnM nnnM
Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M. No
New Calls
Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M.
dti/pra-14 nnnS
(NO)
YES
No New Calls Guard time Group 2, where nnn
= 1-(15)-240. Default = 15S.
dti/pra-14
0-(15)-1440 1S-59S
New Call Suppression Guard time in minutes and seconds. For DTI2 only.
dti2-14
The grade of service feat
Enable current grade of service feat
Alternate grade of service feat dti/pra-18
876 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NRCV (S)
NTC
ONP
OOSC
OPX
OSG1
OSG2
OSGD
P BRLS (R)
Response
abcd
N
Comment
Number Received. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
NRCV (S) not required
Pack/Rel
abcd-14 x y
<CR> x
<CR>
0-(5)-127
Non-Transmission Compensated (Analog
TIE). Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit). Response range for x and y
is: 0-26. See DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14
On-Premises extension. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14 x y
<CR> nnnM nnnS
Out-of-Service Counter (Counts out-ofservice occurrences since midnight) (DTI disabled) For DTI2 only.
dti2-14
Off-Premises Extension. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values dti/pra-14 dti2-14 Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1, where nnn = 1-(15)-240.
Out-of-Service Guard time Group 2, where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15S.
dti2-14
0-(15)-1440 abcd dti2-14
Out-of-Service Guard time (in minutes). For
DTI2 only.
Backward Release. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling
abcd-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 877
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
P BRLS (S)
P BURS (R)
P BURS (S)
P CALL (R)
P CAS (R)
P CAS (S)
Response
N
Comment
category assignment and modification on
page 854.
This signal is mutually exclusive with the P
RCTL (R) signal.
P BRLS (R) not required abcd
N abcd
N abcd
Pack/Rel
Backward Release. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
This signal is mutually exclusive with P RCTL
(S) and RCOD (S) signals.
P BRLS (S) not required abcd-18
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
BURS (R) not required abcd-14
N abcd
Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Uses switchhook flash timer for pulse duration time.
BURS (S) not required abcd-14
Signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk. For information about your response
options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-14 abcd
N abcd
Centralized Attendant Service (DTI2 only).
For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
CAS (R) not required abcd-14
Centralized Attendant. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
Pulse time not variable. Prompted for DTI2 only.
abcd-14
878 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
P DIGT (R)
P DIGT (S)
P EOS (R)
P EOSB (S)
P EOSF (S)
P ESNW (R)
P ESNW (S)
Response
N
Comment
CAS (S) not required abcd
N abcd
N abcd
N abcd
Pack/Rel
Decadic pulses. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
DIGT (R) not required abcd-14
Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U).
For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
JDMI default = PXXX
DIGT (S) signal not required abcd-14
End of Selection. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
EOS (R) not required abcd-14
N abcd
N abcd
End of Selection Busy. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
EOSB (S) not required abcd-14
End Of Selection Free. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
EOSF (S) not required abcd-14
N abcd
N
ESN Wink. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
ESNW (R) not required abcd-14
ESN Wink. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854
Pulse time not variable.
ESNW (S) not required abcd-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 879
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
P FRLS (R)
P FRLS (S)
P METR (R)
P NXFR (R)
P NXFR (S)
P OPCA (R)
Response
abcd
N
Comment
Forward Release. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
This signal is mutually exclusive with CLRF
(R) the signal.
P FRLS (R) not required
Pack/Rel
abcd-18 abcd
N abcd
N
Forward Release. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
This signal is mutually exclusive with the
CLRF (S) signal.
P FRLS (S) not required abcd-18
ABCD bits value for received metering pulses.
For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Bits P, X or U are selectable. Only two P bits can be selected. P METR (R) is prompted only when COT and DID trunks are equipped.
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) package 101 is required.
METR (R) signal not required
N must be selected when either a CDTI2 or a
CSDTI2 cards is equipped. These cards do not support PPM.
ppm-14 abcd
N abcd
N abcd
N
Network Transfer. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
NXFR (R) not required abcd-14
Network Transfer. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Pulse time not variable.
NXFR (S) not required abcd-14
Operator Calling. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
OPCA (R) not required abcd-14
880 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
P OPRC (R)
P OPRS (R)
P RCOD (S)
P RCTL (R)
P RCTL (S)
P RRC (S)
P WNKS (R)
Response
abcd
N
Comment
Operator Recall for special services. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854. Minimum three
pulses of 160 milliseconds each
OPRC (R) not required abcd
N abcd
N abcd
Pack/Rel
abcd-14
Operator manual recall. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
OPRS (R) not required abcd-14
Release Control Originating party
Disconnect. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
This signal is another pulsed SL-1 signal sent on incoming trunks when the originating party disconnects first.
RCOD (S) not required abcd-15
N abcd
N
Release Control. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
RCTL (R) not required abcd-14
Release Control. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854
abcd-14
RCTL (S) not required
Prompted when CLRB is unused or is defined the same as IDLE.
abcd
N abcd
N
Register Recall (activated by Malicious Call
Trace). For information about your response
options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
RRC(S) not required abcd-14
Wink Start. For information about your
response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
P WNKS (R) not required abcd-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 881
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
P WNKS (S)
PDCA
PERS
PPMD
PRCS (S)
PREF
Response
abcd
N
Comment
Wink Start (corresponds to a pulsed seize.
For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
acknowledgment).
P WNKS (S) not required
P WNKS (S is prompted when SEZA (S) is not required.
Pack/Rel
abcd-18
1-16
<CR>
Pad Category table (Pad Category Table1 cannot be changed or deleted)
Print all the pad category tables dti/pra-14
0-(100)-254 Persistence timer in milliseconds for far-end problems For DTI2 only.
0-(50)-254 Group 2 Persistence timer and clearance timer (in 2 millisecond increments) dti2-14
(NO)
YES abcd
N
0-159
0-254 l s c
PPM Parameter Download not required
PPM Parameter Download required kd3-20
PRCS. For information about your response
options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
PRCS (S) not required abcd-14
Primary Reference
Source loop for clock controller (Large
System format)
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Source from a Basic Rate Interface Trunk
(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) (Large
System format)
Where: dti/pra-14 fnf-25
• l = 0-156 (loop number must be zero or a multiple of four)
• s = 0-1
• c = 0-15
The SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
882 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PREF CC0
PREF CC1
Response
1-9
<CR> l s c c loop
1-9
1-4
0-254
<CR>
X
Comment
Source card for clock controller (Option 11C format)
The response must be the same as CLKN above, or <CR> for free run.
If source is a Basic Rate Interface Trunk
(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
If REQ = NEW and carriage return is entered, then Primary Reference is free-run mode.
If REQ = CHG, then Primary Reference is not changed.
The loop or card must already be defined in
LD 17 (prompt DLOP). Use <CR> for freerunning mode. Free-running mode uses loop
255. If <CR> is used, you are not prompted for the Secondary Reference (SREF).
Precede with X to remove
Pack/Rel
Prompted only if the l-s-c entered against
CLKN is a MISP loop. The SILC TN (for primary reference) is accepted in sl-s-c format.
Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.
basic 5.0
ipmg-5.0
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller zero (non-Small System). The clock controller derives its primary clock pulses from the loop selected here.
Card number containing the primary clock reference for the main cabinet (Option 11C) dti/pra-14
Card number containing the primary clock reference for the main chassis
If a BRI trunk (BRIT) is the reference source then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
ipmg-5.0
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Primary Reference remains at current setting
Primary Reference reverts to the free-run mode fnf-25 loop Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one. The response is the loop from dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 883
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
PRI
Prompt
PREF CC2
PREF CC3
PREF CC4
Response
0-254
<CR>
X xx
Comment
which the clock controller is deriving its primary clock pulses. (Large System)
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Primary Reference remains at current setting
Primary Reference reverts to the free-run mode
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis
Pack/Rel
fnf-25 sipe-25 basic-1.0
xx xx
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
xx x y
<CR>
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
1.5 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
884 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PRI2
RAIE
RALM
RATS
REPT
REQ
SASU
SATT
Response
x y
<CR>
Comment
2.0 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk. Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values
Pack/Rel
gpri-18
(NO)
YES
1-(3)-128
Disable reporting of RAIE Group II alarm state with continuous CRC error information reporting
Enable reporting of RAIE Group II alarm state with continuous CRC error information reporting euro-20
Remote (yellow) Alarm clear threshold
This is the number of "remote alarm clear" signals received in 24 hours. If the threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.
dti/pra-14
1-(10)-15
(1)-5
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
0-32256 x y
<CR>
The number of consecutive seconds the firmware has to check and validate error rate condition.
dti/pra-18
Number of OPCA (R) pulses dti/pra-14 dti/pra-14 Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create a new data block
Remove data block
Print the specified data block
Seize Acknowledge Supervision period (in milliseconds)
DTI2 default = 1920; JDMI default = 4992 sasu-18
Satellite Analog TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 885
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
SDTT
SEZA (R)
SEZA (S)
SEZD (R)
SEZD (R)
SEZD (S)
SEZV (R)
Response
x y
<CR>
Comment
Satellite Digital TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values
Pack/Rel
gpri-18 abcd abcd-14
N abcd
N abcd
Seize Acknowledgment. For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
SEZA (R) not required
Seize Acknowledgment. For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
SEZA (S) not required abcd-14 abcd
N abcd
Seize for voice or data calls from a non-SL-1.
For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
abcd-18
Seize for data calls between SL-1s. For information about your response options,
refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
SEZD (R) signal not required abcd-18 abcd-14
N abcd
N
Seize for data calls (only recommended for
SL-1 to SL-1 applications). For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
SEZD (S) not required
Seize for voice calls. For information about
your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on
page 854.
SEZV (R) signals not required abcd-14
886 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SEZV (S)
SICA
SLP
Response
abcd
N
Comment
Seize for voice calls (only recommended for
SL-1 to SL-1 applications). For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
SEZV (S) not required
Pack/Rel
abcd-14
2-16
1
<CR>
Signaling Category
If REQ = PRT, then 1 must be input to print default table
If REQ = PRT, all signaling tables are printed abcd-14 mc mt oc ot Slip count. Where:
• mc = Maintenance threshold slip count 1-
(5)-255
• mt = Maintenance threshold time default =
24H
• oc = Out-of-service threshold slip count 1-
(30)-255
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time default =
1H
Threshold times must be one of the following: dti/pra-14 nnnnT, nnnS, nnnM, or nnH
Where:
• nnnn is an integer
• T,S,M, or H show the increments of use
The time values are as follows:
• nnnnT = 20 millisecond increments (nnnn =
20-5000)
• nnnS = 1 second increments (nnn = 1-240)
• nnnM = 1 minute increments (nnn = 1-240)
• nnH = 1 hour increments (nn = 1-24)
NS mt dt ct ot
Slip count maintenance threshold. Where:
• NS = Error count values are in the range: 1-
(20)-255
• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT) dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 887
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
SOS
Prompt
SREF
Response Comment
• (default = 30S)
• dt = No new data calls threshold time
(NNDC)
• (default = 10S)
• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)
• (default = 10S)
• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)
• (default = 6S)
Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:
Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.
Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:
• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments
• 1S–240S = 1 second increments
• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments
• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments
Important note: The following requirements must be met:
• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot
• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.
Pack/Rel
abcd
N
0-159
0-254
Special Operator Signal. For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Undefined
Prompted when OPRC = N.
abcd-14
Secondary Reference. Prompted when PREF is not free-run.
Source loop for clock controller (non-Option
11C format)
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric dti/pra-14 fnf-25
888 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SREF CC0
X c
Response
l s c
1-9
<CR>
Comment
Source from a Basic Rate Interface Trunk
(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) (non-
Option 11C format)
Clock controller card for CS 1000E.
Where:
• l = 0-156 (loop # must be 0 or a multiple of
4)
• s = 0-1
• c = 0-15
The SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
Source card for clock controller (Option 11C format)
If source is a Basic Rate Interface Trunk
(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
The loop or card must already be defined in
LD 17 at the DLOP prompt.
Free-running mode. Loop 255 is reserved for free-running mode.
Precede with X to remove
Pack/Rel
ipmg-5.0
Secondary Reference card. The Secondary
Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.
ipmg-5.0
loop
0-254
1-9
1-4
Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller zero (non-Small System). The response is the loop from which the clock controller is deriving its secondary clock pulses.
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric dti/pra-14 fnf-25 sipe-25 Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the secondary clock reference for the main cabinet (Option 11C)
Card number containing the secondary clock reference for the main chassis ipmg-5.0
If a BRI trunk (BRIT) is the reference source then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 889
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
SREF CC1
SREF CC2
SREF CC3
Response
<CR>
X
Comment
Secondary Reference remains at current setting
Secondary Reference reverts to the free-run mode loop
0-254
<CR>
X xx xx
Pack/Rel
Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one. The response is the loop from which the clock controller is deriving its secondary clock pulses. (Large System) dti/pra-14
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Secondary Reference remains at current setting
Secondary Reference reverts to the free-run mode
The clock controller prompts only appear for clocks which are valid for the machine type being configured.
The prompts only appear if the system is in a valid state for the definition of the DTI2/PRI2/
BRIT clock controller data (example, the 1.5
Mb/s DTI clock references must be unused or in a free-run mode).
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
1
• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis fnf-25 sipe-25 basic-1.0
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
2
• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
xx Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
3
• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0
890 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
SREF CC4
SRIM
SRMM
SRNT
SRTK
Response
xx
Comment
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/
SILC containing the primary clock reference.
Where xx is:
• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet
4
• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis
Pack/Rel
sipe-25 basic-1.0
(1)-127
1-(2)-127
Slip Rate Improvement Monitoring time (the amount of time in minutes before returning trunks either to service or to the SRGT state)
After the tracking or non-tracking mode frame slippage out-of-service threshold is exceeded, the slip rate is monitored for improvement.
If the non-tracking maintenance threshold exceeds SRMM or fewer times in the duration of this timer, then the trunks are returned to service. Otherwise, this timer is reset and monitoring continues.
dti/pra-15
Slip Rate Maintenance Maximum
Number of times the Slip Rate exceeds the maintenance limit while waiting for Slip Rate improvement during the time window specified at the SRIM prompt.
dti/pra-14
1-(15)-1024 1-(3)-1024
Slip Rate Non-Tracking mode maintenance and out-of-service thresholds
These are frame slip rate thresholds for the non-tracking mode.
The first value is the maintenance threshold in seconds. The second value is the out-ofservice threshold in seconds, the amount of time in which 10 slips occur.
dti/pra-14
1-(5)-24 1-(30)-3600
Slip Rate Tracking mode maintenance (in hours) and out-of-service thresholds (per hour)
These are frame slip rate thresholds for the tracking mode.
The first value is the maintenance threshold or the elapsed time (in hours) between frame slips. The default is 1 slip in 5 hours. The second value is the out-of-service threshold dti/pra-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 891
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
Prompt
SZNI
TGLR
TIME
TIME
Response Comment
or the number of slips per hour. The default is 30 slips in 1 hour.
(NO) YES PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of
MFAS and far-end fault states allowed
(NO) YES Toggle reserves bits in Frame 0, Timeslot 0.
Prompted for JDMI loops. jdmi-14
Pack/Rel
1-(2)-15
1-(8)-15
Pulse on time
Pulse off time
(100)-150 Time for EOSF (S) (in milliseconds)
64-(128)-192
Time of OPCA (R) pulse (in milliseconds) abcd-14 abcd-14
10-(100)-630 emct-20
Time of Register Recall signal timer {RRC (S)} in milliseconds. This defines the flash duration for 2.0 Mbit DTI trunks.
64-(128)-192 abcd-14
Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds)Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds) xxxx yyyy Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS
(R) (in milliseconds). Where: abcd-14
• xxxx = 8-(48)-2040
• yyyy = xxxx-(128)-2040 abcd-14 abcd-14 50 80 90 (150) 800
Delay time for the SEZA signal (in milliseconds)
20-(140)-500 20-(290)-500
Minimum and maximum length of WNKS
(R) pulse (in milliseconds).
64-(128)-192
Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds)
40-(240)-480
Maximum time METR signal can be on (in milliseconds) abcd-14 abcd-14
892 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
(0)-800
Comment
Milliseconds
Prompted when the abcd bits entered in response to the CLFR (S) prompt are different from the abcd bits of the IDLE signal
Pack/Rel
abcd-14
100-(150) 300
Time value is stored (in multiples of
10 milliseconds)
150 Timer value in milliseconds is fixed
(64)-320 64-(256)-320
Length of EOS (R) pulse (in increments of
8 milliseconds)
96-(128)-320 96-(256)-320
Time (stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds)
10-(220)-630
Time for P WNKS (S) (in increments of 10ms)
16-(96)-1000 16-(160)-1000
Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration (in increments of 8 ms)
10-(150) 630 abcd-18
10-(600)-2000
Prompted for pulsed signals (in increments of
10 ms)
10-(600)-2000
Prompted for pulsed signals (in increments of
10 ms)
Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)
16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration (in increments of 8 milliseconds)
10-(150)-630
Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)
16-(136)-504 16-(288)-504
Minimum and maximum length of P WNKS
(R) pulse (in increments of 8 milliseconds) abcd-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 893
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
TRC
Prompt
TNLS
TOLL
TOLT
Response
16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000
Comment
Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 8 milliseconds)
16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
10-(600)-2000
Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 8 milliseconds)
Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)
16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000
Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length(in increments of 8 milliseconds)
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
Terminal Number List (for the PRT command) dti/pra-14 do not print the list of trunk TNs using the requested table (pad category or SICA) following the table number.
Print the list of trunk TNs using the requested table (pad category or SICA) following the table number.
x y x y x y
Toll call pad data on line card. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x = 0 - 31 and y = 8-39.
The values entered are pad values to be used for the 500/2500 TN on the line card connected to the DTI2 call. Valid codes and their corresponding dB values are listed in
Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt
on page 854.
chtl-21
Toll call pad data on DTI2 card. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
chtl-21
Transmission Compensated (Analog TIE).
Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code
(transmit). Response range for x and y is:
0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
dti/pra-14
894 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
VNL
Prompt
TRSH
TYPE
UCFS
Response
<CR> Initial values
0-15
Comment Pack/Rel
Threshold set Enter this number in LD 17 when defining a DTI/PRI loop. Use X0-15 to remove TRSH.
dti/pra-19
Note:
The LD 17 DLOP/TRSH associated with this LD 73 TRSH must be removed first.
Precede with X to remove.
BRIL
BRIT
DDB
DTI
DTI2
JDMI
PRI
PRI2 abcd x y
Type of data block
Basic Rate Interface Line data block with
Basic Rate Interface Line Application (BRIL) package 235
Basic Rate Interface Trunk data block with
Integrated Service Digital Network BRI Trunk
Access (BRIT) package 233.
dti/pra-14
1.5 Mb/s DTI data block
1.5 Mb/s DTI with International 1.5/ 2.0 Mb/S
Gateway (GPRI) package 167 data block
2.0 Mb/s DTI data block dti/pra-14 grpi-18
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface data block
(not supported on Option 11C) jdmi-12
1.5 Mb/s PRI data block with International 1.5/
2.0 Mb/s Gateway (GPRI) package 167
2.0 Mb/s PRI data block grpi-18
Unequipped Channel Fault Signal - ABCD bits to be sent on unequipped channel.
The default is 1101. Allowable input for each of the four fields is 0 or 1. For information about your response options, refer to
Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.
Via Net Loss (Analog TIE). Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
dti/pra-14
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 895
LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface
XUT
Prompt
XEM
Response
<CR> Initial values x y
<CR> x y
Comment Pack/Rel
Extended Peripheral Equipment E&M Trunk
(Analog TIE trunk). Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.
Initial values gpri-18
Extended Peripheral Equipment Universal
Trunk (Analog CO trunk). Where x = Rx code
(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).
Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See
Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values
(PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on
page 851 for more information about x and y codes.
gpri-18
896 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 37: LD 74: Digital Private Network
Signaling System Link
Overlay program 74 allows data blocks for Digital Private Network Signaling System Number 1 (DPNSS1) and Digital Access Signaling System Number 2 (DASS2) protocols to be created or modified.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
LSSL
RATE
S2
HTYP
DDSL
DTSL
SIGL
DDCS
DTCS
PRIV
- SIDE
- MWIF
- SAT
- - NT2
L2_RST
(0)-1 aaaa
0-n
0-159
DA x...x
0-159
(YES) NO aaa a...a
(NO) YES
1-(26)-100
(YES) NO
Response
aaa aaaa xx a...a
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block (aaaa = DDSL, DTSL, LSSL, LSRC, or LSVC)
Low Speed Signaling Link
Baud rate for Low Speed Signaling Link (aaaa =
(EXT), 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19K, 56K, or 64K)
Switch 2 mode
Hardware Type (aaaa = DCHI, DCHX, or MSDL)
DPNSS link number
Digital Trunk Signaling Link number
Level 2 Signaling (DASS2)
Loop for DPNSS Channel Switch
Digital Trunk Channel Switch loop number
Private link
Side for Termination (aaa = (AET) or BNT)
Message Waiting Interface (a...a = (STD) or ISDM]
Satellite
Post retransmission acknowledgment delay.
Indicates if Layer 2 can bereset during a system initialize.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 897
LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link
Prompt
FLOW CNTL
- BRST PARM
- - REPL PARM
CNTL
- ALRM
- CNTR
(NO) YES xx x
Response Comment
Flow Control
Burst Parameter set on public network (xx = (0) 4, 8,
16, or 32)
Replenishment Parameter set on public network (x =
1, 2, 4, or 8)
(NO) YES Change Control timers and counters aaa pp mm cc Alarm timers (aaa = AIS, DAI, FAE, HER, LOI, TBF, or
TSF; pp = persistence time; mm = monitor time; cc = repeat threshold time) aaa x Counter threshold (aaa = CRT, TMT, or SCT; x = threshold value)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ALRM
Response
AIS pp mm cc
Comment
Alarm timers.
For the following response alternatives, pp = Persistence time, mm = Monitor time and cc = Repeat count threshold.
Alarm Indication Signal
Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-
(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(4)-15.
DAI pp mm cc
FAE pp mm cc
Distant Alarm Indication
Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-
(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(5)-15.
Frame Alignment Error
Where: pp = 0-(2)-15 seconds, mm = 0-
(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(4)-15.
HER pp mm cc High Error
Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-
(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(10)-15.
LOI pp mm cc Loss Of Input
Where: pp = (0)-15 seconds, mm =
(0)-24hours and cc = (0)-15.
TBF pp mm cc Transmit Buffer Full
Where: pp = 0-(5)-15 seconds, mm =
(0)-24hours and cc = 0-(1)-15.
Pack/Rel
dpnss1/dass2-16
898 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
TSF pp mm cc
Comment
Transmit Signaling Failure
Where: pp = (0)-15 seconds, mm =
(0)-24hours and cc = (0)-15.
Pack/Rel
BRST PARM
CNTL
CNTR xx
Burst Parameter set on public network.
dpnss1/dass2-16
You may respond with: (0), 4, 8, 16, or
32.
dpnss1/dass2-16
(NO) Do not change Control timers and counters
Change Control timers and counters YES
Counter threshold
CRT 0-(120)-255 Channel Reset Threshold
TMT 0-(50)-255 Test Message Threshold
SCT 0-(20)-255 Stop Count Threshold
If 255 is entered, the threshold is set to infinity.
dpnss1/dass2-16
MPT
1-(100)-255
Monitoring Period Timer: during which
NMT messages must be received before overload is detected.
NMT
512-(2048)-
16384msec
OTH 1-(5)-255
Number of Messages Threshold: the number of messages to be received by
Layer 3 before overload is detected. This threshold can only be exceeded after the
MPT time has elapsed.
Note:
If NMT = 255 then Overload
Protection mechanism disabled, regardless of OTH/DTH.
Overload ThresHold: the number of times overload must be detected before any action is taken on the link. Once this threshold exceeded, the link is temporarily disabled for LDT seconds.
Note:
If OTH = 255 and if NMT < 255,
Overload is monitored - Link is permanently disabled when DTH is exceeded, as long as DTH is not 255
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 899
LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link
Prompt
DDCS
DDSL
DTCS
DTSL
Response Comment Pack/Rel
LDT
16-(32)-1024sec
Note:
If OTH < 255 & NMT < 255, Overload is monitored, link is disabled for LDT time, and brought back into service.
Link Disable Timer: defines the amount of time in seconds that must elapse before the link is brought back into service, after having been disabled due to overload.
DTH 1-(5)-255 xxx
Disable THreshold value: the limit of the number of times the link can be disabled.
When this threshold is exceeded, the link is permanently disabled.
Note:
If DTH and OTH = 255 and NMT <
255, Overload Protection is disabled.
Loop for DPNSS Channel Switch Where xxx is:
DDCS is prompted when TYPE =
DDSL.
dpnss1/dass2-16
• 0-159
• 1-9, 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 (Small
System)
• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-45 for CS
1000S sipe-25 basic-2
0-n
0-159
0-159
DPNSS link number. Where:
• n = 15 for NT5K35AA or NT5K75AA in standard mode (S2 = 0)
• n = 159 for NT5K75AA in expanded mode (S2 = 1)
DDSL: is prompted when TYPE =
DDSL.
dpnss1/dass2-16
Digital Trunk Channel Switch loop number
Prompted when TYPE = DTSL. (Large
System) dass2-16
Digital Trunk Signaling Link number.
dass2-16
900 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
Prompted when TYPE = DTSL. (Large
System)
FLOW CNTL
(NO) YES
HTYP
L2_RST
LSSL
MWIF
NT2
DCHI
DCHX
MSDL
(YES) NO xx
(STD)
ISDM
1-(26)-100
Pack/Rel
Flow Control FLOW CNTL is prompted if
PRIV = NO.
dpnss1/dass2-16
Hardware Type
DPNSS1, DASS2 or APNSS link configured with the NT5K35 DCHI card or on the NT5K75 DCHI card in standard mode.
dpnss_es-21
DPNSS1 or DASS2 link configured with the NT5K75 DCHI card in the expanded mode.
DPNSS1, DASS2 or APNSS link configured with the MSDL card.
Indicates if Layer 2 can bereset during a system initialize. On certain systems, for example System Y and SX2000, established calls would be released if the
Layer 2 is reset during an initialize. This prompt should only be set to NO when using NTAG54AA type Dual DCH
Daughter board on a NTCK43AB DCH
PRI card.
ida- 23
Note:
If this Option is set to NO on an
NT6D11 type card, the card would be left disabled after the initialize.
Low Speed Signaling Link
Link number identifying the D-channel to be used for APNSS.
dpnss1-18 samm-20 Message Waiting Interface
Standard message waiting interface
Plessy ISDX switch with remote message notification
Minimum post retransmission acknowledgment delay.
dpnss_es-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 901
LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link
Prompt
PRIV
RATE
(EXT)
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19K
56K
64K
REPL PARM x
REQ
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
S2
(YES)
NO
Response Comment
This is the minimum period of time after the expiry of NL and NTI that the system waits for acknowledgment before reporting a retransmission failure to level
3 in 20 ms units.
For a Private link to another PBX
For a link to the public exchange
Not prompted for APNSS.
Pack/Rel
dpnss1/dass2-16
Baud Rate for Low Speed Signaling Link dpnss1/dass2-18
110 bits per second
150 bits per second
300 bits per second
600 bits per second
1200 bits per second
2400 bits per second
4800 bits per second
9600 bits per second
19 kilobits per second
56 kilobits per second
64 kilobits per second
Replenishment Parameter set on public network.
You may enter: 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Request
Change existing data block.
Exit Overlay program
Create a new data block
Remove data block
Print data block dpnss1/dass2-16 basic-1
Switch 2 mode (the mode selected with the switch S2 located on the NT5K75AA
DCHI card) dpnss1/dass2-16
902 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
(0)
Response
1
SAT
SIDE
SIGL
TYPE
(NO) YES
(AET)
BNT
DA
DDSL
DTSL
LSSL
LSRC
LSVC
Comment
NT5K35AA DCHI card or NT5K75AA
DCHI card operating in standard mode
NT5K75AA DCHI card operating in expanded mode
Satellite
A Side (Exchange Termination)
B Side - PBX Termination
Pack/Rel
dpnss_es-21 dpnss1/dass2-16
Level 2 Signaling (DASS2)
Type of data block
DPNSS Link (NT hardware) data block
Digital Trunk Signaling Link (GPT hardware) data block. Not supported on
Small System.
Low Speed Signaling Link data block.
Required for APNSS.
Low Speed Channel data block.
Accepted when REQ=PRT.
Low Speed Virtual Channel data block.
Accepted when REQ=PRT.
dpnss1/dass2-16 dpnss1/dass2-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 903
LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link
904 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 38: LD 79: Virtual Network Service
Overlay program 79 allows the implementation of Virtual Network Services feature.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
VNDN
CONF
Response
aaa aaa xx
Request
Type of data block
Customer number
Comment
1-4000 n...n
Number of contiguous VNS Directory Numbers
When REQ = OUT and VNDN = XALLVNDNS., the switch outputs the following:
REMOVE ALL VDN BLOCKS?
The following prompt then appears:
(NO) YES (Deny) Confirm intent to remove all VDN blocks
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CONF
(NO)
YES
Comment
Confirm
Deny intent to remove all VDN blocks
Confirm intent to remove all VDN blocks
CONF is prompted if REQ = OUT and VNDN =
XALLVNDNS.
CUST xx
REQ
CHG
Pack/Rel
vns-22
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 basic-1
Request
Change existing data block basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 905
LD 79: Virtual Network Service
Prompt Response
DIS
END
ENL
NEW
OUT
PRT
Comment
Disable a block of contiguous VDN to prevent the use of a VDN in this block
Exit Overlay program
Enable a block of contiguous VDN
Create Virtual Network Service data block
Remove Virtual Network Service data block
Print Virtual Network Service data block
Pack/Rel
TYPE
VNDN
VNS
Type of data block
Virtual Network Service data block basic-1
1-100 n...n
Number of contiguous VNS Directory
Numbers, and first VNS DN x...x
Individual VDN. This entry is accepted if REQ =
NEW, OUT, DIS or ENL.
1-4000 xxxxxxx
Number of contiguous VDNs and first VDN. This entry is accepted if REQ = NEW.
XALLVDNS Remove all VNS data blocks. This entry is accepted if REQ = OUT.
VNDN is reprompted until a carriage return is entered.
vns-16
906 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 39: LD 81: Features and Station
Overlay program 81 is used to print a list or count of telephones with selected features. It also allows last service change date information to be printed.
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) is indicated by an "M" following FEAT
(when TYPE = MCN, SCN, MCR, or SCR).
Prompts and responses
HMDN
SGRP
RNPG
LSNO
NCOS
ZONE
REQ
Prompt
CUST
DATE
PAGE
DES
FEAT
NZON
Response
aaa xx xx a...a
(NO) YES d...d
aaaa
0-1023 x..x
0-999 xx yy xx yy xx yy
0–255 0–8000
0–255 0–8000
<CR>
Comment
Request (aaa = LST, CNT, or END)
One Customer or a range of Customer numbers
Print data from activity date specified (You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)
Data printed on a per page basis
1-6 alphanumeric character Office Data
Administration System
Features requested (see FEAT responses in
Alphabetical list of prompts on page 908).
Numbering zone or range of numbering zones
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Home Directory Number
Station Group
Ringing Number Pick Up Group
List Number
Network Class of Service
MG 1000B Zone Range of Zones All Zones
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 907
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt Response
- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
NACT
<CR>
(NO) YES
Starts printing
Next Activity
Comment
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADJUST PAPER THEN
<CR>
<CR>
Comment
Starts printing
Prompted when PAGE = YES
CUST xx xx
DATE
<CR> dd mmm yyyy
Pack/Rel
basic-1
One Customer or a range of Customer numbers associated with this function as defined in LD 15
All Customers basic-1
Print data from activity date specified. Where: basic-1
DES
ACT
<CR> d...d
• dd = day (0-31)
• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)
• yyyy = year
Print data from last Activity date.
Disregard date restrictions.
dddd d+
+
<CR>
1-6 alphanumeric character Office Data
Administration System (ODAS) Station
Designator
Print data for stations with specific DES.
Print data for stations with a DES starting with d.
Print data for all stations with no DES.
Print data for all stations.
odas-1
ECL
ERL
Emergency Caller Location. List or count the
TNs by ECL.
Emergency Response Location. List or count the TNs by ERL.
basic-5.00
basic-5.00
908 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FEAT
AAA
AAD
AAG
AAK
ABDA
Response
2000
3000
500
3900
ISET
Comment Pack/Rel
Features requested
Enter a specific feature mnemonic or one of the following for groups of features: ALL, COS,
DNK, SETS, SCL, RNP or 500.
FEAT is repeated until <CR> is entered.
All M2000 telephones.
basic-1 dset-7
M3000 Touchphone
500/2500 type telephone tset-7 basic-1 basic-24 M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904, M3905 telephones
Print both MNL and DIP telephones. 2500 type telephones are requested by DTN entry.
All IP telephones basic-3.0
aab-1
ABDD
Automatic Answerback Allowed
Automatic Answerback Denied
Answer call from Agent key
Automatic Answerback Key
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Allowed
Abandoned call record and time to answer
Denied supp-18
ACD
ACNT
ADD
ADL
ACD in calls key
Assignment of activity codes allowed
Automatic Digit Display equipped
Autodial key bacd-1 bacd-13 ddsp-1 optf-1
AGN AGT ACD Agent ACD Agent's key
AGTA
AGTD
ACD services for 500/2500 telephone Allowed
ACD services for 500/2500 telephone Denied bacd-1 bacd-16
AHA AHD
ALL
Automatic Hold Allowed Automatic Hold Denied supp-10
All features
When REQ = LST, only the features actually programmed on telephones are listed along with basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 909
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt
BNRA
BNRD
C6A
C6D
CA
CAS
CCBA
CCBD
CCOS
CCSA
CCSD
AUTD
AUTR
AUTU
AWC
BFEA
BFED
BFS
Response Comment
the associated TN. Features not listed are
RNPK, DIP and MNL.
When REQ = CNT, features available in the system software are listed even if they are not programmed on any telephone. Not listed are
RNPK, 500, 2500, SL-1, 2000, and 3000.
AMG
AO3 AO6
ARC
ACD Answer/Monitor Emergency call key
Three-party conference key Six-party conference key Attendant Recall key
Pack/Rel
supp-14 basic-1 basic-1
ARHA
ARHD
ASCA
ASCD
ASP ATW
Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed Audible
Reminder of Held Call Denied basic-14
Alarm Security Allowed Alarm Security Denied ohas-18
ACD Answer Supervisor call key ACD Call
Waiting time indication key iani-14
Authorization Code Denied Authorization Code
Restricted Authorization Code Unrestricted ssau-19
ACD Calls Waiting display key
Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement Allowed
Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement Denied ffcsf-24
Busy Forward Status key
Busy Number Redial Allowed
Busy Number Redial Denied
Six-Party Conference Allowed
Six-Party Conference Denied
Combined No Hold Conference and Autodial bfs-20 ffc-21 basic-10
Centralized Attendant Service
Collect Call Blocking Allowed Collect Call
Blocking Denied
Controlled Class of Service key Controlled
Class of Service Allowed Controlled Class of
Service Denied basic-14 casm-1 ccb-21 ccos-7
910 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CDCA
CDCD
Comment
Conferee Display Count Allowed Conferee
Display Count Denied
ZBDA
ZBDD
ZBDR
ZBDO
ZBDV
Station Activity Records Allowed Station Activity
Records Denied
Converged Desktop Multimedia restricted
Converged Desktop Multimedia only Converged
Desktop Multimedia and voice
Pack/Rel
basic-23 mct-20 sip-4.00
CFHA
CFHD
List/count sets with CFHA CLS List/count sets with CFHD CLS
CFTA CFTD Call Forward by Call Type Allowed basic-10 Call
Forward by Call Type Denied
CFW
CFXA
CFXD
Call Forward key
Call Forward number to External DN Allowed
Call Forward number to External DN Denied cfho-20 basic-1 basic-10
CHD
CHG
CHL
Combined No Hold Conference and Direct Hot
Line basic-14
Charge Account key fca-1
Combined No Hold Conference and Hot Line list basic-14
CLT Callers List key basic-25.4
CLTA CLTD Network Call Trace Allowed Network Call Trace
Denied basic-17
CMSA
CNAA
CNAD
CNDA
CNDD
Command and Status link Allowed
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format
Allowed.
CLASS Calling Name Denied.
csl-8 cname- 23
Call Party Name Display Allowed Call Party
Name Display Denied cname- 23 cpnd-10
CNIA CNID Call Number Identification Allowed Call Number
Identification Denied pra-12
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 911
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt Response
CNTA
CNTD
Comment
Network ACD Countdown Allowed Network
ACD Countdown Denied
CNUA
CNUD
CNUS
COS
Pack/Rel
nacd-15
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format
Allowed.
cnumb- 23
CLASS Calling Number Denied. CLASS Calling
Number Single Data Format Allowed.
cnumb- 23 cnumb- 23
CPFA
CPFD
CPN
Print stations with Class of Service restrictions.
These are telephones with equipped with C6A,
C6D, CMSA, CNDA, CNDD, CTD, CUN, DSI,
FRE, FR1, FR2, NCOS, SFA, SFD, SRE, TLD,
TTA, TTD, UNR and VMA.
basic-1 povr-15 Forced Camp-On from another set Allowed
Forced Camp-On from another set Denied
Display Calling Party Number key cpnd-10
CPTA
CPTD
Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed Forced
Camp-On to another set Denied
CRA CRD Continuous Ring Allowed Continuous Ring
Denied ffc-15 basic-14
CS
CSD
Combined No Hold Conference and Speed Call
Conferee Selectable Display key basic- 23 basic-1 CTD CUN Conditionally Toll Denied Conditionally
Unrestricted
CWA CWD
CWT
Call Waiting Allowed Call Waiting Denied Call
Waiting key basic-1
DAG
DAPA
DAPD
DCFW
DDGA
DDGD
ACD Display Agents key
Display of Access Prefix Allowed Display of
Access Prefix Denied bacd-1 isdn-24
Default call forward for Phantom TNs Report includes Virtual and Host terminals phtn-20 arie-25
DN Display on other set Allowed DN Display on other set Denied sdd-21
912 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DRG1
DRG2
DRG3
DRG4
DSH
DSI
DSP
DTA
DPU
DPUA
DPUD
DRC
DRDA
DRDD
Response
DDS
Comment
Digit Display allowed
DDV Data port Verification denied
DELA DELD Dealer Allowed Dealer Denied
DIG
DIP
DLO
DNAA
DNAD
DNDA
DNDD
DNK
Dial Intercom Group
Dial Pulse telephone (500 type)
Pack/Rel
ddsp-1 amp-5 ohol-20 di-1 basic-1
Digital Long line COS ftc-16
ANI DN used as the customer Listed Directory number
Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route used as DN in
ANI message cist-21 cpnd-13 Dialed Name Display Allowed Dialed Name
Display Denied
Telephones with MCN, MCR, SCN, and SCR keys basic-1
DN Pickup key
DN Pickup Allowed DN Pickup Denied grp-1 dcp-12
DID Route Control
Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number
Allowed. Distinctive Ringing by Directory
Number Denied.
basic-14 edrg-24
Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (high/fast)
Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (high/slow)
Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (low/fast)
Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (low/slow)
Digital Short line COS
Data Service access or IS Server TN allowed
Digit Display key
Data set drng-7 ftc-16 xcti-16 ddsp-1 basic-5
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 913
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt Response
DTN
Comment
Digitone dial telephone (2500 type)
DWC
ELA ELD
ACD Display Waiting Calls key
Erase Lists Allowed Erase Lists Denied
Pack/Rel
basic-1 bacd-1 basic-25.4
EOVR
FAXS
FBA FBD
FEDA
FEDD
Enhanced Override key
Facsimile servers povr-15 faxs-18
Call Forward Busy Allowed Call Forward Busy
Denied optf-1
Far End Disconnect Allowed for Digital Cordless
Set. Far End Disconnect Denied for Digital
Cordless Set.
mc32-25
FITA FITD Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed Flexible
Incoming Tones Denied
FLXA FLXD Flexible voice/data TN allowed Flexible voice/ data TN denied
FNA FND Call Forward No Answer Allowed Call Forward
No Answer Denied basic-14 digital_set-2
2 basic-1
FR1 FR2
FRE
Fully Restricted class 1 Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted basic-1
(FRA) FRU
FRD
Flexible Registration class of service Allowed
Flexible Registration class of service Upgrade
Flexible Registration class of service Denied basic-5.00
FRN French language display for M2317 dlt2-12
FTTC FTTR
FTTU
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections
Unrestricted basic-23 basic-23 basic-23
GHD
GPU
GPUA
GPUD
Group Hunt Denied key
Group Call Pickup key
Group call Pickup Allowed Group call Pickup
Denied grp-1 dcp-12 dcp-12
914 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
GRC Group Recall key
Comment
HBTA
HBTD
HFA HFD
Hunt by call Type Allowed Hunt by call Type
Denied
Handsfree Allowed M2616 Handsfree Denied
M2616
LOGIVOX Telephone Hold key HLD
HOTD
HOTL
HPR
Enhanced Hot Line, Direct entry method
Enhanced Hot Line, List entry method
High Priority station
Pack/Rel
grp-1 supp-10 arie-14 supp-10 hot-10
HSPA
HSPD
HTA HTD
HTL
I2004
IAMA
ICDA ICDD
ICF
Hospitality Management Allowed Hospitality
Management Denied
Hunting Allowed Hunting Denied
Hot Line
IP Phone 2004
ICP Answering Machine Denied/Allowed
Internal CDR Allowed Internal CDR Denied
Internal Call Forward key basic-1 hosp-16
IMA
IMM
IPNA
IRA IRD
IMS or IVMS Allowed
Immediate
Intercept Position Allowed
Incoming Ringing line preference Allowed
Incoming Ringing line preference Denied
IRGA
KLS
Interrogation Set Allowed
Key/lamp Strip icp-14 basic-1
LDTA LDTD Line Disconnect Tone allowed Line Disconnect
Tone denied basic-17 basic-1 hot-10 basic-25 icp-16 icdr-10 icf-19 ims-2 xct1-16 icp-14
1sel-4
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 915
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt Response
LLC1 LLC2
LLC3 LLCA
LLCN
Comment
Line Load Control level 1 Line Load Control level
2 Line Load Control level 3 Line Load Control
Allowed Line Load Control off
Pack/Rel
11c-10
LMPN
LMPX
LNA LND
LNK
LOL
LPA LPD
Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN vmba-24
Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN and non-PDNs
1nr-8 Last Number Redial Allowed Last Number
Redial Denied Last Number Redial Key
Long Line Class of Service
Message Waiting lamp Allowed Message
Waiting lamp Denied xops-20 mwc-1 mwc-1
LPR
LSPK
Low Priority station
Loudspeaker key basic-1 ohol-20
LVXA LVXD LOGIVOX Telephone Allowed LOGIVOX
Telephone Denied
MBXD
MBXA
Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind Transfer
Denied. Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind
Transfer Allowed. Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package 141 must be equipped to enter MBXD or MBXA.
supp-10 mpo-21
MCBY
MCBN
MCD MCK
MCN
MCR
Set linked to a MICB line card. Set linked to a non-MICB line card.
basic-25
Message Center DN Message Cancellation Key
Multiple Call Non-Ringing DN
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance
Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).
mwc-1 basic-1
Multiple Call Ringing DN
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance
Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).
basic-1
916 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MCRA
MCRD
Comment
Multiple Call Arrangement Allowed Multiple Call
Arrangement Denied
Pack/Rel
supp-15
MCTA
MCTD
MIK
Malicious Call Trace Allowed Malicious Call
Trace Denied
Message Indication Key mct-10 mct-19 mwc-1
MINA MIND Message Intercept Allowed Message Intercept
Denied mint-15
MLNG
MMA MMD
Language Selection
Multimedia Allowed Multimedia Denied basic-25.4
ngen-24 ngen-24 basic-1 MNL Manual service
MMA MMD Multimedia Messaging Allowed Multimedia
Messaging Denied
MON TN(s) Monitored by at least one BFS key
MPTA
MPTD
Modem Pass Through Allowed Modem Pass
Through Denied
MRA MRD Message Registration Allowed Message
Registration Denied
MSB Make Set Busy key bfs-20 basic-5.50
mr-10
MTA
MWA MWD
MWK
Maintenance set Allowed
Message Waiting Allowed Message Waiting
Denied Message Waiting key msb-1
MSID MSIA Make Set Busy Improvement Denied Make Set
Busy Improvement Allowed basic-5.50
basic-1 mwc-1 sdd-21 NAMA
NAMD
NCOS
NDD
Name display on other set Allowed Name display on other set Denied
Network Class of Service (COS)
No Digit Display ncos-1 ddsp-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 917
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt
NSVC
NUID
NZON
OBV
OCBA
OCBD
OLA
OLD
ONS OPS
OSN
Response
NHC
Comment
No Hold Conference
NIA NID Incoming non-ringing line preference Allowed
Incoming non-ringing line preference Denied
Notification Key Lamps NKL
NRCA
NRCD
NRD
Forced Camp-On night class restriction Allowed
Forced Campon night class restriction Denied
ACD Not Ready key
Pack/Rel
basic-14
1se1-4
1se1-4 drng-7 supp-16 bacd-1
NROA
NROD
NRWA
NRWD
Priority override night class restriction Allowed
Priority override night class restriction Denied
Call Waiting Night class restriction Allowed Call
Waiting Night class restriction Denied supp-16 supp-16
OVB
OVDA
OVDD
OVR
ACD Night Service key for Supervisor Control bacd-12
Network User Identifier. Temporary IP Users
Numbering zone
ACD Observe agent key
Outgoing Call Barring Allowed Outgoing Call
Barring Denied
Outgoing Line preference Allowed
Outgoing Line preference Denied basic-5.00
On Premise Station Off Premise Station On Site
Notification key.
OSN is accepted as valid input only if the system is ESA and ESA_SUPP package equipped.
xops-20 xops-20 esa-
23
Attendant Overflow position
Override Allowed (500/2500 telephone)
Override Denied (500/2500 telephone)
Override key zbd-6.00
ccb-21
1se1-4 aop-1 ffc-15 basic-1
918 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RBHA
RBHD
RCBA
RCBD
RCC
RCK
RDI
RDL
RDLA
RDLD
RGA
Response
PEPE
Comment
Prints all TNs and cards configured on IPE/EPE shelves.
Pack/Rel
basic-3.0
pagenet-22 (PGND)
PGNA
PHD
POA POD
Deny PAGENET access Allow PAGENET access
Permanent Hold
Optional Privacy Allowed Optional Privacy
Denied basic-4 basic-1
PRK
PRS
Park key
Privacy Release key cprk-2 basic-1
PRSA
PRSD
PUA PUD Call Pickup Allowed Call Pickup Denied
PVN PVR
Priority Call Pickup Allowed Priority Call Pickup
Denied
Private Line Non-ringing phantom DN Private
Line Ringing phantom DN supp-15 grp-1 basic-1
RAG RBDA
RBDD
ACD Call Agent key Redirection By Day Allowed
Redirection By Day Denied basic-24
Redirection By Holiday Allowed Redirection By
Holiday Denied basic-24
Recall to boss Allowed
Recall to boss Denied basic-5.50
Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls
Ringing Change Key
Restricted from receiving DID calls
Stored Number Redial supp-10 rck-15 supp-10 basic-14
Automatic Redial call Allowed Automatic Redial call Denied ardl-22
Ring Again key optf-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 919
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt
SAR
SCC
SCI
SCL
SCN
Response Comment
RLFA RLFD Reversed Lamp Flash Allowed Reversed Lamp
Flash Denied
Pack/Rel
supp-10
RLS
RLT
RMMA
RMMD
RMMO
RMWK
RNP
Release key
Redial List key
Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed
Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied Allow
Remote Monitoring of Messages and to
Override, if it is being already monitored
Remote Message Waiting indication key
Ringing Number Pickup (includes PUA, PUD and RNPK) basic-1 basic- 25.4
vmba-24 vmba-24 grp-1
RNPK
RPA
RTDA
RTDD
Ringing Number Pickup key
Radio Paging Allowed
Call Redirection by Time of day allowed Call
Redirection by Time of day denied grp-1 rpa-15 basic-22
SCR
SCU
SDNA
SDND
Scheduled Access Restriction
Speed Call Controller
Station Category Indication Priority Level
Speed Call (includes SCU and SCC) sar-20 optf-1 sci-7 optf-1
Single Call Non-ringing DN
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance
Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).
Single Call Ringing DN
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance
Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).
Speed Call User basic-1 basic-1 optf-1
Phantom DN as SDN allowed. Phantom DN as
SDN denied.
basic-5.50
920 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
SETS
SFA SFD
All telephones
Comment Pack/Rel
basic-1
Second level Forwarding Allowed Second level
Forwarding Denied optf-10
SHL
SIG
SIPL
SL1
Short Line Class of Service
Buzz key to phantom DN
SIP Line TN
SL-1 stations xops-20 basic-1 basic-6.00
basic-1
SMSA
SMSD
SMWD
SMWA
SNR
Standalone Mail Server Allowed Standalone
Mail Server Denied samm-20
Extended message waiting indication denied.
Extended message waiting indication allowed.
mw-24
SPKA
SPKD
SPV
SRE
Stored Number Redial
Speaker Class of Service Allowed Speaker
Class of Service Denied
ACD Supervisor
Semi-Restricted
SSC SSU System Speed Call Controller System Speed
Call User ffc-15 ohol-20 acdb-1 basic-1 optf-1
SWA
SWD
TAD
TDD
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed
Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied
Time And Date key
Touchphone Display basic-8 ddsp-1 tset-7
THF THFA Centrex Trunk Switchhook Flash Centrex Trunk
Switchhook Flash Allowed (500/2500 telephones)
THFD Centrex Trunk Switchhook Flash Denied
(500/2500 telephones) thf-14
TLD Toll Denied basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 921
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt
UST
VCC
VCE
VDN
VMA
VOLA
VOLD
Response
TRC
Comment
Malicious Call Trace key
TRN
TSA
Call Transfer key
Three-Party Service Allowed
TVA TVD
UCC UDI
Trunk Verification Allowed Trunk Verification
Denied
Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls
Unrestricted from receiving DID calls
Universal Extensions UEXT
ULAA
ULAD
User Level Access Allowed for set based administration
User Level Access Denied for set based administration
Unrestricted UNR
USR USRA
USRD
User Selectable Call Redirection key User
Selectable Call Redirection allowed User
Selectable Call Redirection denied
(VOUD)
VOUA
VSIT
Telephone Status feature
Voice Call to phantom DN
Voice set
LOGIVOX telephone Volume Down
Pack/Rel
mct-10 basic-1 mpo-21 basic-1 basic-1 supp-10 basic-5.50
adminset-21 basic-1 uscr-19 iap3p-13 basic-1 basic-5 supp-10
Server Voice Messaging Allowed csl-8
Virtual Office login operation is allowed on this
TN Virtual Office login operation is denied on this
TN For CS 1000S basic-2 basic-2 Deny other user to virtually login onto this TN
Allow other user to virtually login onto this TN
DECT visitors msmn-25
922 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
HMDN
LSNO
MANU
MLNG
NACT
NCOS
Response
VUP WTA
WTD
Comment
LOGIVOX telephone Volume Up Warning Tone
Allowed Warning Tone Denied
Pack/Rel
supp-10 basic-1
WUK
XFA XFD
Guest entry of Automatic Wake Up key
Call Transfer Allowed Call Transfer Denied gewu-16 basic-1
XHA XHD Exclusive Hold Allowed Exclusive Hold Denied dhld-4
XMWK Extended Message Waiting indication key vmba-24
XRA XRD Ring Again Allowed Ring Again Denied
ZONE MG 1000B zone(s) For CS 1000S optf-1 basic-2 x..x
Home Directory Number
List Number.
0-8190 0-8190
One Speed Call List Number or a range of list numbers
<CR> Print all lists.
LSNO is prompted when FEAT is SCL, SCU,
SCC, SSC, SSU or CS.
msmn-25 basic-1
Manual Update flag. Llist or count the IP phones that are Manual Update.
basic-5.00
a...a
To print telephones with a language selection matching the language in the response to the
MLNG prompt.
Where: a...a = ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR,
SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,
RUS, LAT, TUR.
basic-25.4
(NO)
YES
END
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt.
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.
End Overlay program.
odas-1
Network Class of Service. NCOS is prompted when COS or NCOS.
basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 923
LD 81: Features and Station Print
Prompt
NZON
PAGE
REQ
RNPG
SGRP
ZONE
Response
0-3 0-3
0-7 0-7
0-15 0-15
0-99 0-99
Comment
One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when CDP equipped
One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when BARS or NFCR equipped
One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when NARS equipped
One NCOS group number, or a range of group numbers for all features
Pack/Rel
0-1023
0-1023
0-1023
<CR>
Numbering zone
One numbering zone
Range of numbering zones
All numbering zones
(NO) YES Data printed on a per page basis zbd-6.00
CNT
END
LST
Request
Print a count of telephones equipped with the features specified in response to the FEAT prompt.
Exit Overlay program.
List telephones equipped with the features specified in response to the FEAT prompt.
basic-1 basic-1
Ringing Number Pickup Group.
0-255 0-255 One Ringing Number Pickup Group number or a range of group numbers
0-4095 0-4095
Ringing Number Pickup Group:
<CR> Print all groups.
RPNG is prompted when RNP, RNPK, PUA,
PUD, DPU, DPUA, DPUD, GPU, GPUA or
GPUD.
basic-1
Station Group
0-999 0-999 One station group number or a range of station group numbers.
sar-20
Print Zone
924 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response
<CR>
(0)-255
(0)–8000
All zones, sorted by TN.
Specified zone.
Comment
(0)-255 (0)-255
(0)–8000 (0)–8000
Range of zones, sorted by zone.
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
basic-7.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 925
LD 81: Features and Station Print
926 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 40: LD 82: Print Hunt Chain,
Multiple Appearance Group
Overlay program 82 allows the printing of hunting patterns and Multiple Appearance groups for system stations.
Refer to the Office Data Administration System Fundamentals, NN43001-552 for detailed information regarding printouts for multiple appearance DNs, single appearance DNs appearing on telephones with multiple appearance DN, and hunting patterns.
A TN which is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) is indicated by an "M" preceding the
TN in the output.
Prompts and responses
Prompt
REQ
CUST
Response
aaa xx xx
Comment
Request (aaa = EHT, END, HNT, MAG, MAP)
Customer number or range of customer numbers
DATE a...a
(NO) YES a...a
xxxx
Print data from activity date specified or last activity date
(You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)
Data printed on a per-page basis PAGE
DES
DN
Print all telephones with DES "dddddd"
Print specific DN
- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR> Starts printing
NACT (NO) YES Next Activity
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 927
LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR>
Comment
Starts printing. Prompted when PAGE = YES
CUST xx xx
<CR>
Customer number or range of customer numbers
Print data for all customers.
DATE
DES
DN
Pack/Rel
basic-1 basic-1 dddddd d+
+
<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx
ALL
<CR> dd mmm yyyy Print data from activity date specified. Where: basic-1
ACT
<CR>
• dd = day (0-31)
• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)
• yyyy = year
Print data from last activity date.
Disregard date restrictions.
Print all telephones with DES "dddddd"
Print all telephones with DES "d"
Print all telephones with no DES assignment
Disregard DES odas-1
Print specific DN
Print range of DNs
Print data when REQ = MAG or MAP
Print data for all DNs
DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with
Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package
150.
basic-1
NACT
(NO)
YES
END
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.
End Overlay program odas-1
928 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
PAGE
REQ
Response
(NO) YES
EHT
END
HNT
MAG
MAP
Comment
Data printed on a per-page basis
Pack/Rel
basic-1
Request
External Hunting pattern (except regular and short hunting)
Exit Overlay program
Hunting pattern (except short hunting and EHT)
Multiple Appearance Groups Print Multiple
Appearance Groups including all Single
Appearance DNs assigned on telephones having Multiple Call Assignments.
Multiple Appearance Print Multiple Appearance
DN and associated TNs. The hunt pattern displayed shows only the first TN in a MADN hunt group.
basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 929
LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group
930 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 41: LD 83: Terminal Number Sort and Print
Overlay program 83 allows the printing of a list of TNs and of TN blocks in Designation (DES) order.
"MARP" is output after the DN when printing the TN block (NOT when using the LST command) if the TN is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
CUST
NUMZONE
CSDN
DATE
Response
aaa x...x
x...x
x...x
a...a
PAGE (NO) YES
- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR>
NACT (NO) YES
Comment
Request (aaa = END, LST, TNB)
Customer number or range of customer numbers
Numbering zone or range of numbering zones
Print the Converged Service Directory Number
Print data from activity date specified or last activity date (You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)
Data printed on a per-page basis
Starts printing
Next Activity
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>
<CR> Starts printing
Comment Pack/Rel
odas-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 931
LD 83: Terminal Number Sort and Print
Prompt
CUST
Response
xx xx
END
LST
TNB
Comment
Customer number or range of customer numbers
Print data date for all customers
CSDN
DATE
NACT
NUMZONE x...x
PAGE
REQ
<CR> x...x
dd mmm yyyy Print data from activity date specified. Where: odas-1
ACT
<CR>
• dd = day (0-31)
• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)
• yyyy = year
Print data from last activity date
Disregard date restrictions
(NO)
YES
END
(NO) YES
Next Activity
Return to REQ prompt
Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.
End Overlay program odas-1
Numbering zone or range of numbering zones basic-6.00
Data printed on a per-page basis odas-1 odas-1 Request
Exit Overlay program
Print List of TNs in designator order
Print list of TN blocks in designator order
Pack/Rel
odas-1
Print the Converged Service Directory Number sip-4.00
932 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 42: LD 84, 85: Set Designation Entry
(ODAS)
Overlay program 84 allows the addition of line designators to existing single line (500/2500) sets.
Overlay program 85 allows the addition of line designators to existing multi-line (SL-1, M2000, etc.) sets.
If currently active on a call, the station is disconnected after the last <CR>.
Prompts and responses
TN
DES
Prompt Response
l s c u d...d
Comment
Terminal Number
1-6 character alphanumeric designator
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DES d...d
TN l s c u c u
END
Comment
1-6 character alphanumeric Office Data
Administration System (ODAS) Station
Designator.
Terminal Number Small System Exit Overlay program
Pack/Rel
odas-1 basic-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 933
LD 84, 85: Set Designation Entry (ODAS)
934 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 43: LD 86: Electronic Switched
Network 1
Overlay program 86 allows data defining the NARS/BARS/CDP features to be created, modified, and printed.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by feature:
FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation) on page 937
FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network) on page 937
FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion) on page 939
FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)
on page 939
FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)
on page 940
FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier) on page 941
FEAT equal to CMDB (flexible CLID manipulation)
Response
REQ
CUST
Prompt
a...a
xx
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END,
LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 935
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
FEAT
Prompt
CMDB
Response
TBNO
RLNO
MNUM
MID
MNPI xxx
0–15 a...a
XXXXXXXX a...a
MTON a...a
MDR
MNOD
DEL
INST
RNPI
RTON a...a
X
XX
XXXXXXXX a...a
a...a
Comment
Feature = CMDB (flexible
CLID manipulation data block)
CLID manipulation Index numbers (1-256)
Rule number
Matching Number Type (a...a
= CLNG, CONN, REDN,
OCN, DC)
Matching initial digits
Matching Numbering Plan
Indicator (a...a = E164, PRIV,
E163, TELE, X121, NATL,
DC)
Matching Type of Number
(a...a = UKWN, INTL, NATL,
SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP,
CSS7, DC)
Matching digit relation (a...a
= GT, LT, EQ, DC)
Matching number of digits
(0-32)
Number of leading digits to be deleted (1-32)
Insert up to 8 digits
Replacement Numbering
Plan Indicator (a...a = E164,
PRIV, E163, TELE, X121,
NATL, NCHG)
Replacement Type of
Number (a...a = UKWN,
INTL, NATL, SPN, LOCL,
ELOC, CDP, CSS7, NCHG)
936 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
DMI
DEL
ISPN
INST
CTYP
Response
a...a
xx
DGT
(0)-1999
(0)-19
(YES)
NO x...x
x...x y...y
#...# a...a
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = DGT (Digit manipulation)
Digit Manipulation Index numbers
Number of leading digits to be Deleted
Special IP Number
For off-net calls
For on-net calls
Insert leading digits
For Specialized Common Carriers (SCC). Insert digits including access number, delimiter*, authorization code
Insert alphanumeric characters
Call type to be used by the call. This call type must be recognized by the NRS and far-end switch. This is critical for correct CLID behavior.
If ISPN=NO, the CLID is based on this field. Is
ISPN=YES, the CLID is based on the call type before digit manipulation.
FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
MXLC
Response
a....a
xx
ESN
0-999
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = ESN (Electronic switched network)
Maximum number of Location Codes (NARS only)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 937
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
MXFS
CDP
- MXSC
- NCDP
MSCC
AC1
AC2
DLTN
ERWT
- ERDT
TODS
RTCL
NMAP
ETOD
TGAR
MXSD
MXIX
MXDM
MXRL
MXCM
MXFC
Prompt
0–255
(YES) NO
0-32000
3-7
0-7 xx xx
(YES) NO
Response
0-16000 xxx xxx
0-2000 xxx xxx
0-256
(YES) NO
0-(6)-10 aa-aa
(DIS) YES xx yy
1-7
(NO) YES
Comment
Maximum number of Location Codes (with the ESN
Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)
Maximum number of Supplemental Digit restriction blocks
Maximum number of Incoming Trunk Group exclusion tables
Maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables
Maximum number of Route Lists
Maximum number of CLID manipulation lists (1-256)
Maximum number of Free Calling area screening tables
Maximum number of Free Special number screening tables
Coordinated Dialing Plan feature for this customer
Maximum number of Steering Codes
Number of digits in CDP DN (DSC + DN or LSC + DN)
Maximum number of Special Common Carrier entries
One or two digit NARS/BARS Access Code 1
One or two digit NARS Access Code 2
NARS/BARS Dial Tone after dialing AC1 or AC2 access codes
Expensive Route Warning Tone
Expensive Route Delay Time
Time of Day Schedules
Routing Controls
NCOS Map
Extended Time of Day schedule
Check for Trunk Group Access Restrictions
938 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
ITEI
RTNO
Response
a...a
xx
ITGE
1-127
0-127
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion)
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index number
Route Number associated with index
FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
TBL
ALT
ID
TODS
- PER
- DAYS
ALST
DBK
QUE
Response
a...a
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function xx
NAS
(0)-63
1-7 x...x
1-7
1-7
Feature = NAS (Network Attendant Service)
NAS routing Table 0 is the customer routing table
Attendant Alternative number
Digits (up to 16) dialed to reach a remote attendant
1-31 Schedule period to be changed hh mm hh mm The start and stop times for the schedule period
Days assigned to the currently defined schedule period.
Alternatives List
(N) Y
(N) Y
Drop Back busy option
Queuing to a route
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 939
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
ROUT
SCNV
TDET
- TYPE
EXP
FRL
DMI
CTBL
ISDM
FCI
- TONE
TOD
VNS
- VDCH
- VDMI
- VTRK
CNV
FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
RLI
ENTR
LTER
- CONA
0-511
(NO) YES
(NO) YES aaa a...a
0-7
(NO) YES
1-15 xxx
1-(20)-254
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-7
(0)-1999
(0)-256
(0)-255
(0)-255
Response
a...a
xx
RLB xxxx xxx
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = RLB (Route list)
Route List Index to be accessed
Entry number for NARS/BARS Route list
Local Termination entry
Continuation Allowed. Attempts the next entry of the
Route List Block (RLB) if local termination fails for a
NARS call. Prompted when LTER = YES This operation cannot be used for Trunk Steering Code
(TSC) or Distant Steering Code (DSC) configuration.
Route number
Skip Conventional signaling
Tone Detector used
Type of tone detector application (aaa = TIE, CC1, or
CC2)
Tone type expected from SCC (a...a = DIAL or SCC)
Time of Day schedule
Entry is a VNS route
VNS D-channel number
VNS Digit Manipulation Index
VNS Trunks
Conversion to LDN
Expensive route
Facility Restriction Level
Digit Manipulation Index
CLID manipulation index
ISL D-channel Down Digit Manipulation index
Free Calling Area Screening Index number
940 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
FSNI
BNE
DDV
DDI
SBOC
PROU
- COPT
IDBB
IOHQ
OHQ
CBQ
ISET
NALT
MFRL
OVLL
Response
(0)-1-255
(NO) YES
(YES) NO
(YES) NO aaa
(1) 2
(1) 2 aaa
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(0)-8
1-(5)-10 aaa
(0)-24
Comment
Free Special Number Screening Index
Business Network Extension Route
DPNSS Diversion Validation
DPNSS Diverting Immediate
Step Back on Congestion (aaa = (NRR), RRO, or
ROA)
Preferred Routing. The default value is 1.
QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for (1), 2
ISDN Drop Back Busy (aaa = (DBD), DBA, or DBI)
ISDN Off-Hook Queuing option
Off-Hook Queuing allowed
Call Back Queuing
Initial Set
Number of MCDN alternate routing attempts
Set Minimum Facility Restriction Level (aaa = (MIN) or
0-7)
Overlap Length
FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier)
REQ
Prompt
CUST
FEAT
MXLC
SCCI
LDN2
RBTD
Response
a...a
xx
SCC
0-999
0-16 000
(0)-7
(0)-10
(0)-30
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or
PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = SCC (Special Common Carrier)
Maximum number of LOC codes (NARS only)
Maximum number of LOC codes (with the ESN
Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)
Special Common Carrier Index
Number of digits in SCC type 2 LDN
Ringback Tone Delay time
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 941
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
AC1 xx xxxx
Comment
One or two digit NARS/BARS Access Code 1
One to four digit Flexible Numbering Plan Access
Code 1
The access code cannot conflict with the numbering plan.
Pack/Rel
b/nars-1
AC2 xx xxxx
ALST 1-7
One or two digit NARS Access Code 2
One to four digit Flexible Numbering Plan Access
Code 2
The access code cannot conflict with the numbering plan.
nars-1
Attendant Alternatives List (up to 4 for each schedule period)
If no attendants are placed on the list, local attendant service is given. Precede with X to remove an alternative attendant.
The order of the input determines which entry in the alternative list is being changed. For example, to change the third alternative, both the first and second alternatives must be entered.
nas-15
ALT
BNE
CBQ
1-7
X1-X7
<CR>
Attendant Alternative number
Clear the alternative number (zero ID store); allowed only if there is no schedule period associated with it.
Stop ALT prompt, go to TODS prompt.
nas-15
(NO) YES Business Network Express/Name Display, Private
CLID and COLP allowed/denied.
bne-25
(NO)
YES
Note:
BNE is output only if the route of the RLI entry is
EuroISDN.
Call-Back Queuing not allowed
Call-Back Queuing allowed
This prompt should not be used with NARS
DPNSS1. CBQ is not prompted if LTER = YES.
fcbq-1
942 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CDP (YES) NO
Comment
Coordinated Dialing Plan feature for this customer
Pack/Rel
cdp-1
CNV
CONA
COPT
(NO) YES Conversion to LDN required (NARS). Not prompted if route is TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES nars-1
(NO) YES Continuation Allowed to attempt the next entry of the
Route List Block if local termination fails for a NARS call. Prompted when LTER=YES This operation cannot be used for Trunk Steering Code (TSC) or
Distant Steering Code (DSC) configuration.
basic-7.00
(1)
2
QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for the following causes:
• cause 34 "No channel / circuit available"
• cause 38 "Network out of order"
• cause 42 "Congestion"
QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for the following causes:
• cause 3 "No route to destination"
• cause 27 "Destination is out of service"
• cause 34 "No channel / circuit available"
• cause 38 "Network out of order"
• cause 41 "Temporary failure"
• cause 42 "Congestion"
CTBL
CTYP
(0)-256
(NCHG)
INTL
NPA
NXX
LOC
CLID manipulation index
If CTBL=0, then RLB is not associated with any flexible CLID manipulation table.
Call type to be used by the call. This call type must be recognized by the NRS and far-end switch. This is critical for correct CLID behavior.
If ISPN=NO, the CLID is based on this field. Is
ISPN=YES, the CLID is based on the call type before digit manipulation.
Call type not changed
Special number in International format
NPA
NXX
Location Code pra-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 943
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Prompt Response
CDP
SPN
UKWN
Comment
Coordinated Dialing Plan
Special Number other than International
Unknown call type
CUST xx Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15
Pack/Rel
basic-1
DAYS 1-7
DBK (NO)
YES
Days assigned to the currently defined schedule period
To remove days from the schedule period precede the number representing the day with X. Up to 7 entries, separated with a space, can be input
(Where: 1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday).
nas-15
Drop Back busy option disabled
Drop Back busy option enabled
Up to four entries one for each of the attendant alternatives in this schedule period.
If both sides of the ISDN trunk are set to N the remote node accepts the call and reroutes it, thus one side of the trunk must be set to Y.
If a node has all the NAS routes with DBK = Y it is considered by the network as "Centralized Night DN
Node". This permits all other nodes in night to reject all attempts of this specific node, even in night, thus the call can be inserted only in this local night DN que.
The order of the response to this prompt must correspond to the order of response to the ALST prompt.
nas-15
DDI
DDV
(YES) NO DPNSS Diverting Immediate
YES = Send the Diverting Immediate information to the far end.
NO = Far end is not M1 and does not handle
Diverting Immediate message. Do not send the
Diverting Immediate information to the far end.
basic-5.50
(YES) NO DPNSS Diversion Validation.
YES = Process the messages sent from the far end.
NO = Far end is not M1 and does not handle
Diversion Validation messages for CFW. Ignore the messages from the far end and allow setting of
CFW.
basic-5.50
944 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DEL (0)-19
(0)-32
Comment
Number of leading digits to be Deleted
Pack/Rel
b/nars-1
Number of leading digits to be deleted (1-32) in case of CMDB basic-7.00
DLTN
DMI
(YES) NO NARS/BARS Dial Tone after dialing AC1 or AC2 access codes
(0)
(0)-31
(0)-255
(0)-999
(0))-1999 b/nars-1
Digit Manipulation Index numbers
No digit manipulation required
CDP
NARS/BARS b/nars-20
NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160
The maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables is defined by prompt MXDM. DMI is not prompted if route TKTP = ADM.
zbd-7.00
DORG (NO) YES The CLID information of the original caller is sent in the setup message. If it is set to No, there is no change in function of the feature and the CLID information of the transferring telephone is sent.
basic-5.00
ENTR esn-1 0-63
0-6
X
Entry number for NARS/BARS Route List
Route list entry number for CDP
Precede with x to remove
ERDT 0-(6)-10 Expensive Route Delay Time (in 2 second intervals) b/nars-1
ERWT (YES) NO Expensive Route Warning Tone
Note:
ERWT is not supported on TIE trunks.
ERWT defaults to of three bursts of tone, but can be modified in LD 56 if Flexible Tones and Cadences
(FTC) package 125 is equipped, to indicate that the call is placed over an expensive route.
The user has 3 choices:
1. go On-Hook and abort the call
2. remain On-Hook and accept the call
3. activate Ring Again b/nars-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 945
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Prompt Response
ETOD 1-7
X1-X7
Comment
Extended Time of Day schedule (day(s) of the week for special TOD schedule) Where:1 = Sunday and =
Saturday.
To remove a day
Pack/Rel
b/nars-1
EXP
FCI
FEAT
DGT
ESN
ITGE
NAS
RLB
SCC
(NO) YES Expensive route
Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES
Free Calling area screening Index numberUse 0 if no FCAS is required. Not prompted if route TKTP =
ADM.
(0)-127
(0)-255
BARS
NARS b/nars-1 b/nars-1 esn-1 Feature
Digit manipulation data block
ESN data block
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion data block
Network Attendant Service data block
Route List data Block
Special Common Carrier data block
FRL
FSNI
ID
IDBB
INST
(0)-7
(0)-1-255 x...x
<CR>
(DBD)
DBA
DBI x...x
x...x y...y
Facility Restriction Level
Free Special Number screening Index b/nars-1 fnp-20
Digits (up to 16) dialed to reach a remote attendant nas-15
Leave ID unchanged, go to ALT prompt.
orc/orq-16 ISDN Drop Back Busy
Drop Back Disabled
Drop Back if All routes busy
Drop Back if Initial set busy.
IDBB appears if ISDN=YES in LD 15
Insert leading digits. Where x...x is: up to 31 leading digits b/nars-1
For Specialized Common Carriers (SCC), up to 23 leading digits can be inserted including: access number, delimiter*, and authorization code.
946 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
#...#
X...X
Comment
Insert alphanumeric characters. Where #...# is: an alphanumeric string of up to 31 characters Allowed characters are: c = country code p = numbering zone prefix x = precede with x to delete previously defined value
Insert up to 8 leading digits in case of CMDB
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
basic-7.00
IOHQ
ISDM
(NO) YES ISDN Off-Hook Queuing option
Prompted if ISDN = YES in LD 15.
(0)-255
(0)
(0)-31
(0)-127
(0)-999
(0)-1999 ohq-16
ISL D-channel Down Digit Manipulation Index number.
Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES
No digit manipulation required
CDP
NARS/BARS
NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.
When the ISL D-channel goes down, this Digit
Manipulation Index is used to perform the Digit
Manipulation which includes the ESN access code insertion capability.
This is used only when the ISL reverts back to conventional signaling. When the D-channel is up the existing DMI is used to perform digit manipulation.
This DMI is used only when the ISL D-channel is down. Any valid DMI can be entered. The ISDM is intended to be a DMI which inserts an ESN access code.
is1-17 zbd-7.00
ISPN
ISET
ITEI
(YES) NO Special IP Number.
If ISPN = YES then CLID format is determined by the call type specified during digit analysis. If ISPN
= NO then CLID format is specified by call type
(CTYP).
basic 4.0
(0)-64 Initial Set. Number of entries in Initial Set for route list block.
b/nars-1
1-127
1-255
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index
BARS
NARS b/nars-5
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 947
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Prompt Response
LDN2 (0)-10
Comment
Number of digits in SCC type 2 LDN
LTER
MFRL
(NO) YES
(MIN) 0-7
Local Termination entry
Set Minimum Facility Restriction Level used to determine autocode prompting.
Use default of MIN to set to the minimum FRL value.
Pack/Rel
b/nars-1 fgd-17 b/nars-1
MID XXXXXXXX Matching initial digits
MNOD X Matching number of digits (0-32)
MNPI a...a
Matching Numbering Plan Indicator (a...a = E164,
PRIV, E163, TELE, X121, NATL, DC) basic-7.00
basic-7.00
basic-7.00
MNUM a...a
MTON
MSCC
MXCM a...a
0-7 xxx
Matching Number Type (a...a = CLNG, CONN,
REDN, OCN, DC)
Matching Type of Number (a...a = UKWN, INTL,
NATL, SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP, CSS7, DC) basic-7.00
basic-7.00
Maximum number of Special Common Carrier
(SCC) entries nars-1
Maximum number of CLID manipulation lists (1-256)
If MXCM = 0, the system do not allow the creation of any CLID manipulation lists.
basic-7.00
MXDM
MXFC
MXFS
0-32
0-256
0-1000
0-2000
0-127
0–255
0–255
Maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables (you must count Table 0 for the system)
CDP
NARS/BARS
NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 equipped esn-1 zbd-7.00
b/nars-1 Maximum Free Calling area screening tables
Prompted when NARS/BARS equipped
BARS
NARS
Maximum number of Free Special Number
Screening tables b/nars-1
948 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
MXIX
0-127
0–255
Comment
Maximum number of Incoming Trunk Group
Exclusion tables (use "0" if not required)
BARS
NARS
MXLC 0-999
MXRL
0-16 000
0-128
0-128
0-256
0-1000
0-2000
MXSC 0–8000
Pack/Rel
b/nars-5
Maximum number of LOC codes (NARS only) nars-1 locx-4.0
Maximum number of LOC codes (with the ESN
Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)
Note:
Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG
1000T display a warning message when you configure the MXLC prompt to a value greater than 4000. Nortel recommends that you increase the LOCs in sets of 50, and regularly check on the available memory.
Maximum number of Route Lists
If MXRL = 0, the system do not allow the creation of any route lists.
esn-1
CDP
BARS
NARS
NARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package
160 equipped zbd-7.00
MXSD
NALT
0-10000
0-32000
(0)-1500
1-(5)-10
Maximum number of Steering Codes for Small
System
Maximum number of Steering Codes in North
America
Maximum number of Steering Codes outside North
America cdp-1
Maximum Supplemental Digit restriction blocks b/nars-1
Number of MCDN alternate routing attempts (MALT retries only).
Prompt appears once per RLI.
brte-24
Note:
This prompt is introduced to limit the number of
MALT retries. The retries include only those that
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 949
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Prompt Response
NCDP
3-7
3-10
Comment
are retried as a result of MALT Feature invoked.
MALT retry count will only be incremented for such retries. The retries performed as a result of disabled routes or busy routes do not form a part of MALT Retry. For example: if the retry to ENTRY
2 is performed because the route in ENTRY 1 is either busy or disabled, then this retry is not considered as a MALT retry and the MALT retry count will not be incremented for such attempts.
Pack/Rel
Define DN length for CDP
A Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) consists of the
CDP code and the Directory Number (DN). This dialing plan does not need an access code because the CDP code is part of the internal dialing plan.
The CDP code is one of the following: the Distant
Steering Code (DSC) or the Local Steering Code
(LSC) cdp-1
Number of digits in CDP DN (DSC + DN or LSC +
DN)
Number of digits in CDP DN with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150
NMAP xx yy NCOS Map (NCOS numbers to be applied for routing controls). Where:
• xx = current NCOS number
• yy = NCOS number to be applied for
BARS/CDP or NARS when routing control is in effect.
NCOS ranges: 0-99 ncos-1
OHQ
OVLL
PER
(NO)
YES
(0)-24
Off-Hook Queuing not allowed
Off-Hook Queuing allowed
This prompt should not be used with NARS
DPNSS1. OHQ is not prompted if LTER = YES.
bars-1
Overlap Length
Number of digits dialed (after the ESN access code) before SETUP message is sent or outpulsing begins. If OVLL = 0, Overlap Sending is controlled by the number of digits in the ESN or CDP steering codes (e.g. FLEN).
ovlp-16 hh mm hh mm
The start and stop times for the schedule period the start time must be less than the stop time)
950 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
QUE (NO)
YES
Comment
Queuing to a route disabled
Queuing to a route enabled
Up to four entries one for each of the attendant alternatives in this schedule period. The order of the response to this prompt must correspond to the order of response to the ALST prompt.
Pack/Rel
RBTD (0)-30
REQ
CHG
END
LCHG
NEW
OUT
PRT
Ringback Tone Delay time in seconds for SCC (only even numbers is accepted) nars-1 esn-1 Request
Change existing data block.
Exit Overlay program.
Print date and time that each data group was last changed (data groups include: ESN, DGT, NAS,
RLB, SCC, and ITGE)
Create new data block.
Remove data block.
Print data block.
RLI
RLNO
RNPI
0-127
0–255
0-999
0-1999
0-15 a...a
Route List Index to be accessed
CDP and BARS
NARS
FNP esn-20 basic-7.00
basic-7.00
basic-7.00
ROUT
RTCL
RTNO
0-511
(DIS)
YES
0-511
Rule number in CMDB block
Replacement Numbering Plan Indicator (a...a =
E164, PRIV, E163, TELE, X121, NATL, NCHG)
Route number
Not prompted if LTER = YES.
Disable Routing Controls.
Enable or modify Routing Controls.
Route Number associated with index
Precede with X to delete an existing route.
esn-1 esn-1 b/nars-5
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 951
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
Prompt Response
RTON a...a
Comment
Replacement Type of Number (a...a = UKWN, INTL,
NATL, SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP, CSS7, NCHG)
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
SBOC dpnss1-16
SCCI
(NRR)
RRO
RRA
(0)-7
Step Back on Congestion
No Reroute
Reroute if originating node, step back if transit node.
Reroute all.
Special Common Carrier Index into the SCC data table
Use "0" if not required.
nars-1
SCNV
TBL
TBNO
TDET
(NO) YES Skip Conventional Signaling.
(0)-63 NAS routing table. 0 is the customer routing table. It is also associated with Attendant Console Group 0.
nars-16 xxx CLID manipulation Index numbers (1-256) in CMDB block basic-7.00
(NO) YES Tone Detector used
Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER =
YES.
nars-1
TGAR
TOD
TODS
(NO)
YES
0-1
0-7
1-31
0
0-1
0-7
Check for Trunk Group Access Restrictions
Ignore TGAR/TARG when call is placed through
BARS.
Examine TGAR/TARG when call is placed through
BARS.
esn-1 esn-1 Time of Day schedule
CDP
NARS/BARS
Precede with X to turn off schedule.
Time of Day schedule
Schedule period to be changed.
Catch-all period. Start and stop times are not relevant for this period. The next prompt is ALST.
CDP
NARS/BARS esn-1
952 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
0-7 hh mm hh mm
Comment
Schedule number, start hour, start minute, end hour, end minute for NARS/BARS.
0-1 hh mm hh mm
X1-X31
X0
<CR>
Schedule number, start hour, start minute, end hour, end minute for CDP.
Remove the schedule period
Remove/clear all alternatives associated with period
0. This leaves the catch-all treatment as local attendant treatment.
End NAS feature data setup and return to REQ prompt.
Pack/Rel
TONE
TYPE
VDCH
VDMI
SCC
DIAL
CC1
CC2
TIE
1-15
SCC dial tone expected
Normal dial tone type expected
SCC Type 1 tone detector application
SCC type 2 tone detector application
On-network call tone detector application
VNS D-channel number vns-16
VNS
(0)
1-31
1-255
0-999
0-1999
VNS Digit Manipulation Index number for the Dchannel (ESN routing)
No digit manipulation required
CDP
NARS/BARS
With Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160
(NO) YES Entry is a VNS route
Prompted for DID,TIE and CO.
vns-16 basic-7.00
vns-16
VTRK 1-(20)-254 VNS Trunks (maximum number of VNS Trunks to be used by this route list entry) vns-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 953
LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1
954 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 44: LD 87: Electronic Switched
Network 2
Overlay program 87 allows data which define the NARS/BARS/CDP features to be created, modified and printed.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by feature:
CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)
on page 955
FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)
on page 956
FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)
on page 957
on page 957
CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TYPE
LSC
Response
a...a
xx
CDP aaa x...x
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)
Type of steering code (aaa = LSC, DSC, or TSC)
Local Steering Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 955
LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2
- CCBA
- NPA
- NXX
TSC
- FLEN
- ITOH
- CCBA
- RLI
Prompt
- DMI
- DEL
DSC
- FLEN
- DSP
- RRPA
- RLI
Response
0-31
0-4 x...x
(0)-24 aaa
(NO) YES xxx
(NO) YES xxxxxxx xxxxxxx x...x
(0)-24
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-1999
Comment
Digit Manipulation Index for LSC
Number of digits to be deleted
Distant Steering Code
Flexible Length number of digits
Display (aaa = LSC, LOC, or DN)
Remote Radio Paging Access
Route List to be accessed for Distant Steering Code
Collect Call Blocking maximum 7 digit NPA code allowed maximum 7 digit NXX code allowed
Trunk Steering Code
Flexible Length number of digits
Inhibit Time-out option
Collect Call Blocking
Route List to be accessed for trunk steering code
FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
FCI
GKCF
NPA
NXX
- DENY
- ALOW
Response
a...a
xx
FCAS xxx
(0)-255 xxx aaaa xxx xxx xxx xxx
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)
Free Calling Area Screening Index number
Gatekeeper Cost Factor
Three-digit NPA code to be screened
NXX codes for NPA (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)
NXX code or range of codes to be Denied
NXX code or range of codes to be Allowed
956 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
FSNI
SPN
XXX
- DENY
- ALOW
Response
a...a
xx
FSNS
1-255 x...x
aaaa xxx xxx xxx xxx
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)
Free Special Number screening Index
Special Number code to be screened
Routing codes (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)
Routing code or range of codes to be Denied
Routing code or range of codes to be Allowed
NCTL (Network Control)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
SOHQ
- OHTL
SCBQ
- CBTL
Response
a...a
xx
NCTL
(NO) YES
2-(10)-60
(NO) YES
10-(20)-30
- RANE
- RANC
NRNG
NCOS
0-511
0-511
0-99 1-99
(0)-99
MLPPSD xxxxxx
ARDL a
- MPL
- EQA aaaa
(NO) YES
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NCTL (Network Control)
Off-Hook Queuing option
Off-Hook Queue Time Limit
Call-Back Queuing option
Call-Back Queue Time Limit
RAN route number for CBQ offer to ESN stations
RAN route number for CBQ offer to Conventional main
NCOS Range
Network Class of Service group number
MLPP Service Domain class of service.
ARDL network route selection is allowed from both initial and extended route sets or only the initial route set (a = (A) or I)
Maximum Precedence Level
Equal Access associated with this NCOS group
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 957
LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2
Prompt
- FRL
- RWTA
- NSC
- - LIST
- OHQ
- CBQ
- RETT
- RETC 4-(5)-16
- - ROUT a
- - RADT
- SPRI
(0)-30
(0)-3
- MPRI
- PROM
TOHQ
(0)-3
(0)-30
0-7
Response
(0)-7
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-253
(YES) NO
(NO) YES
2-(10)-30
Facility Restriction Level
Comment
Expensive Route Warning Tone
Network Speed Call access allowed
List numbers to which System Speed Call has access
Off-Hook Queuing eligibility
Call Back Queuing eligibility
Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Timer
Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Counter
Call Back Queuing on Initial or All Routes (a = (I) or A)
Route Advance Timer
Starting Priority in CBQ
Maximum Priority attainable in CBQ
Priority Promotion timer
TCOS OHQ eligibility
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ALOW xxx xxx
<CR>
Comment
Routing code (NXX) code or range of codes to be allowed
Stop ALOW prompt
Pack/Rel
b/nars-20
ARDL
CBQ
CBTL
I
(A) ARDL network route selection is allowed from
ALL (both initial and extended) route sets
ARDL network route selection is allowed only from initial route set
(NO) YES Call Back Queuing eligibility ardl-22 bque-1
10-(20)-30 Call Back Queue Time Limit (in 2 second increments)
This is the time in which the user must respond to
Ring Again feature to accept the CBQ call.
Applies to multi-line sets only.
b/nars-1
958 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
CCBA (NO)
YES
Comment
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) Denied
Collect Call Blocking Allowed
CCBA is prompted when TYPE =TSC or DSC.
CCBA is prompted with CCB package 290.
CUST xx
Pack/Rel
ccb-21
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 esn-1
DEL 0-4
0-7
DENY
DMI
DSC xxx xxx
<CR>
0-31
0-999
0-1999 xxxx
Number of digits to be Deleted
Up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150 cdp-1 b/nars-20 Routing (NXX) code or range of codes to be denied
Stop DENY prompt.
Digit Manipulation Index for LSC
With Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package
160 b/nars-20 basic-7.00
DSP
(LSC)
HLOC
DN
Distant Steering Code
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until
<CR> is entered.
cdp-19 fnp-20 Display
Local Steering Code
Home Location code
Directory Number to be used for CLID
Prompted with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 and ISDN are equipped.
EQA
FCI
FEAT
(NO) YES Equal Access associated with this NCOS group eqa-18
1-127
1-255
Free Calling area screening Index number
BARS
NARS
Table 0 is network reserved to indicate that no
FCAS is applied.
b/nars-1
CDP
FCAS
FSNS
NCTL
Feature
Coordinated Dialing Plan
Free Calling Area Screening
Free Special Number Screening (allowed with
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160)
Network Control esn-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 959
LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2
Prompt Response
FLEN (0)-24
Comment
Flexible Length number of digits
Prompted with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.
FRL (0)-7
FSNI
GKCF
ITOH
LIST
1-255
(0)-255
(NO) YES
0-4095
<CR>
Inhibit Time-out option
List numbers to which System Speed Call has access
All lists
Precede with X to remove SSC list.
Pack/Rel
fnp-20
Facility Restriction Level
FRL is assigned to each NCOS. It determines the entries in a Route List (RLI) to which it has access.
0 is the most restrictive, 7 is the least restrictive and can access more entries.
b/nars-1
Free Special Number screening Index fnp-20
Gatekeeper Cost Factor, where:
• 0 = not required for Gatekeeper configuration
• 1-255 = a higher number represents a more expensive call
For CS 1000S basic-2.0
fnp-20 ssc-2
LSC
MLPPSD xxxx xxxxxx
Local Steering Code
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until
<CR> is entered.
cdp-19
MLPP Service Domain class of service.
Where: xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range (000000 to FFFFFF) used to signify a 24 bit binary integer. Default is taken from
Overlay 15.
Precede with x to remove.
atvn-25.47
MPL
MPRI
NCOS aaaa
(0)-3
(0)-99
Maximum Precedence Level
Maximum Priority attainable in CBQ
Network Class of Service group number bque-1 ncos-1
960 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NPA xxx xxx yyy xxxxxxx
Comment Pack/Rel
Three-digit NPA code to be screened (the first digit must be 2-9; the second and third digits can be 0-9). Omit the "1" in 1 + NPA format.
xxx = 200-999. Only 3 digits are allowed, even when using 1 + dialing.
BARS allows up to 15 NPA codes per table.
NARS allows up to 15 NPA codes per table with a maximum of 800 NXX codes each.
Area code or extended NPA code translation
Where: nanp-19 xxx & yyy = 200 - 999. FCAS accepts only three digits for the NPA, even if 1 + dialing in use.
Numbering Plan Area Code basic-25
7 digits are allowed when TYPE = DSC
NRNG
NSC
NXX
0-99 1-99 NCOS Range (starting and ending number for
NCOS printing)
<CR> Pressed without defining the ending number, then only the NCOS with the starting number defined is printed.
Prompted when REQ = PRT.
ncos-14
(NO) YES
DENY
ALOW xxxxxxx
Network Speed Call access allowed
NXX codes to be denied for NPA
NXX codes to be allowed for NPA
Public Network Exchange Code
7 digits are allowed when TYPE = DSC nsc-2 b/nars-1 basic-25
OHQ
OHTL
(YES) NO Off-Hook Queuing eligibility
2-(10)-60 Off-Hook Queue Time Limit (in 2 second increments)
This is the maximum amount of time a user remains off-hook for OHQ before it times out.
After timeout the system searches once before going to Network Blocking Intercept treatment.
If an odd number is entered, it is rounded up to the next even number.
ohq-1 b/nars-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 961
LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2
Prompt Response
PROM (0)-30
Comment
Priority Promotion timer (in 30 second increments, where: 1 = 30 seconds and 30 = 15 minutes)
Pack/Rel
pque-1
RADT (0)-30 Route Advance Timer (in 30 second increments, where: 1 = 30 seconds and 30 = 15 minutes) bque-1
RANC
RANE
REQ
RETC
RETT
0-511
0-511
RAN route number for CBQ offer to Conventional main
Enter X to remove RAN route.
nars-1
RAN route number for CBQ offer to ESN stations
Enter X to remove RAN route.
nars-1
CHG
END
LCHG
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Print date and time that each data group level was last changed (data groups include: NCTL, FCAS,
FSNS, LSC, DSC, and TSC)
Create new data block
Delete existing data block
Print data block esn-1
NEW
OUT
PRT
4-(5)-16 Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Counter.
This is the number of times the initial set should be searched before the scanning includes the extended set. Once the retry counter threshold is met, each node in the network searches its extended set.
rvq-18
2-(10)-30 Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Timer in seconds.
This is the number of seconds between forward scanning attempts.
rvq-18
RLI
ROUT
0-31
0-127
0-255
0-999
0-1999
(I)
Route List accessed for trunk or distant steering code
CDP
BARS
NARS
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) (Release 20 & later) cdp-20 basic-7.00
Call Back Queuing on Initial routes
The system offers queuing only after examining
ISET (Initial Set) entries.
bque-2
962 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
A
Comment
Call Back Queuing on All routes
The system examines all entries in the route list, both ISET (Initial Set) and ESET (Extended Set) before offering queuing.
RRPA
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES Remote Radio Paging Access (Remote Radio
Paging FFC is being used).
Prompted if a CDP, TSC or DSC is being added or changed.
rpa-20
RWTA
SCBQ
SOHQ
SPN
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(NO) YES x...x
Expensive Route Warning Tone
Call Back Queuing option
Off-Hook Queuing option
Special Number code to be screened.
xxx = 1-19 digits b/nars-1 b/nars-1 b/nars-1 fnp-20
SPRI
TOHQ
TSC
TYPE
XXX
(0)-3
0-7
<CR> xxxx
LSC
DSC
TSC
FSNS
ALL
DENY
ALOW
Starting Priority in CBQ pque-2
TCOS OHQ eligibility
Which TCOS (example, FRL) are OHQ eligible
(Up to 8 entries).
No TCOS are OHQ eligible
Precede with X to remove OHQ eligibility from a
TCOS.
b/nars-1
Trunk Steering Code
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number
Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until
<CR> is entered.
cdp-19 fnp/ cdp-20 Local Steering Code
Distant Steering Code
Trunk Steering Code
Free Special Number Screening Index
All steering codes
Routing codes to be denied
Routing codes to be allowed fnp-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 963
LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2
964 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 45: LD 88: Authorization Code
Overlay program 88 allows data for Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) and Network Authorization Code
(NAUT) to be created, modified and printed.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block
on page 965
AUT: Authcode entries data block
on page 966
SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block on page 967
AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block
REQ
TYPE
Prompt
CUST
SPWD
ALEN
ACDR
Response
aaa aaaa xx xxxx
1-14
NO YES
AUTHCOD_ALRM (OFF) ON
RANR x...x
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type = AUB (Authcode) or RAUB (Room Authcode)
Customer number associated with this function
Secure Data Password
Authcode Length
Activate CDR for authcodes
Authcode Alarm
RAN Route number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 965
LD 88: Authorization Code
ACLE
Prompt
BRST
RTRY
- RAN2
CLAS
- COS
- TGAR
- NCOS
- CAC_CIS
AUTO
- SECR
- NMBR
- CLAS
0-(10)
(NO) YES x...x
(0)-115 a...a
0-(1)-31
(0)-99
0-(3)-9
YES NO
0000-9999
1-50000
(0)-115
Response
(NO) YES
Comment
Authorization Code Conditionally Last
Enhancement
Number of initial bursts of tone to be given
(Disable) Enable Authcode - last Retry
Route number for Authcode - last Retry RAN
Class code value assigned to authcode
Class of Service
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Network Class of Service
CIS ANI category code
Automatically generate authcodes
Security password (NAUT)
Number of authcodes to be generated automatically
Class code to be automatically assigned
AUT: Authcode entries data block
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
SPWD
CODE
SARC
- SERV
- SGRP
CLAS
SECR
Response
aaa
AUT xx xxxx xxxx
NO YES nnn...nnn
0-999
(0)-115
0000-9999
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type = AUT (Authcode entries)
Customer number associated with this function
Secure Data Password
Authcode
Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) Code
SAR Service functions for SARC
SGRP number
Class code
Security password
966 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block
OFFP
- STAR
- STOP
- DAYS
- COS
- TGAR
- NCOS
ICR
LOCK
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
CUST
SPWD
SGRP
SCDR
Response
aaa
SAR xx xxxx
0-999
(NO) YES
1-8 hh mm hh mm d ... d a...a
0-(1)-31
(0)-99
(NO) YES
(1)-8
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type = SAR (Scheduled Access Restriction)
Customer number associated with this function
Secure Data Password
SAR Group number
Activate CDR for the SAR code feature
Off-hour Period number
Start time
Stop time
Respond with a new set of days to be used
Class of Service
Trunk Group Access Restriction
Network Class of Service
Incoming Calls are Restricted.
Lock period
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
ACDR NO YES
Comment
Activate CDR for authcodes.
There is no default.
ACLE
ALEN
(NO) YES Authorization Code Conditionally Last
Enhancement
1-4
1-7
Authcode Length (all authcodes are the same length).
Room Authcode
NAUT
Pack/Rel
cdr-1 nars-24 baut-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 967
LD 88: Authorization Code
Prompt Response
1-14 BAUT
AUTHCOD_ALRM
(OFF)
ON
AUTO YES NO
Comment Pack/Rel
basic-21
Disable Authcode Alarm
Enable Authcode Alarm
Automatically generate authcodes.
Prompted when Network Authorization Code
(NAUT) package 63 is equipped and REQ =
"NEW". ALEN must be a minimum of four digits.
naut-1
BRST 0-(10)
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9
CLAS (0)-115
CODE
COS
CUST
X
<CR> xxxx
ALL
(CTD)
CUN
FR1
FR2
FRE
IPNA
IRGA
SRE
TLD
UNR xx
Number of initial bursts of tone to be given
CIS ANI category code nars-24 cist-24
Class code value assigned to authcode. Cycle continues with CODE. Prompted when SARC =
NO.
When TYPE = "AUT", enter X to have authcode be an exempt code. When this data is printed, the month in which authcode was deactivated is output. Default is "0" when adding authcode entries.
Exempt authcode
End of input baut-1
Authcode (number of digits must equal the ALEN response).
Delete all Authcodes if Network Authorization
Code (NAUT) package 63 is equipped and codes were automatically generated.
baut-1
Class of Service
Conditionally Toll Denied
Conditionally Unrestricted
Fully Restricted class 1
Fully Restricted class 2
Fully Restricted
Intercept Position
Interrogation set
Semi-Restricted
Toll Denied
Unrestricted baut-1
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 esn-1
968 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
DAYS d...d
Comment Pack/Rel
Respond with a new set of days to be used d...d = maximum of seven entries in range of 1-7 sar-20
ICR
LOCK
NCOS
(NO) YES
(1)-8
0-99
Incoming Calls are Restricted.
Lock period sar-20 sar-20
NMBR 1-50000
Network Class of Service (enter the new NCOS that replaces the NCOS of the station).
baut-1
Number of authcodes to be generated automatically
To generate up to 50,000 authcodes, the maximum entry at NMBR is 5000 each time it is prompted.
baut-1
OFFP 1-8
RANR
RAN2
REQ
RTRY x...x
X x...x
X
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
(NO)
YES
Off-hour Period number
Go to ICR prompt.
sar-20
RAN route number for "Authcode Last" prompt
(NAUT), where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG
1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E
No RAN route naut-1
Route number for Authcode - last Retry RAN, where:
• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG
1000B and MG 1000T
• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E dpna-21
Removes and deactivates Authcode-last Retry
RAN baut-1 Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create new data block
Delete existing data block
Print data block
Disable authcode - last Retry.
Enable authcode - last Retry.
dpna-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 969
LD 88: Authorization Code
Prompt Response Comment
Prompted with Direct Private Network Access
(DPNA) package 250.
SARC NO YES Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) Code is to be a Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) authorization code.
Pack/Rel
sar-20
SCDR
SECR
SERV
SGRP
SPWD
STAR
STOP
(NO) YES Activate CDR for the SAR code feature.
0000-9999 Security password as entered during AUTO sequence
Prompted when CODE = ALL. Cycle continues with CODE.
SAR Service functions for SARC
(END) ENA Enable Denied Enable Allowed
(LKD) LKA Lock Denied Lock Allowed
(DSD) DSA Disable Denied Disable Allowed
(UND) UNA Unlock Denied Unlock Allowed
Up to four entries can be made at once.
0-999
ALL
<CR>
Scheduled Access Restriction group (SGRP) number
Authorization code is to be a customer SARC.
End of SAR changes, return to REQ.
xxxx hh mm
X hh mm
X sar-20 baut-1 sar-20 sar-20
Secure Data Password (same password as defined for DISA on a per customer basis in LD
15).
Prompt do not appear to user with a LAO password.
baut-1 sar-20 Start time
The current start time (hours and minutes) is printed individually after the prompt. Respond with the new start time.
Remove value and return to OFFP.
Stop time
The current stop time (hours and minutes) is printed individually after the prompt. Respond with the new stop time.
Remove value and return to OFFP.
sar-20
970 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response
TGAR 0-(1)-31
Comment
Trunk Group Access Restriction range
TYPE
AUB
AUT
RAUB
RAUT
SAR
Type of data block
Authcode data block
Authcode entries data block
Room Authcode data block (Hospitality
Management)
Room Authcode entries (Hospitality
Management) data block
Scheduled Access Restriction data block
Alphabetical list of prompts
Pack/Rel
baut-1 baut-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 971
LD 88: Authorization Code
972 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 46: LD 90: Electronic Switched
Network 3
Overlay program 90 allows data for network translation tables to be generated and administered.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only) on page 973
HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block on page 974
LOC: Location code data block (NARS only)
on page 974
NPA: Number Plan area code data block on page 975
NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block on page 976
NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block on page 976
SPN: Special Number Translation data block on page 977
HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
Response
a...a
xx
NET
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 973
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
TRAN
TYPE
HLOC
Response
aaa
HLOC xxx y..y
- DMI 1-255
Comment
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = HLOC (Home Location code)
Home Location code, where xxx = 3 digit home location code and y...y = extended code of 1-4 digits. The extended code is optional.
Digit Manipulation Index
HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
HNPA
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
HNPA xxx
1xxx
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = HNPA (Home Number plan area code transmission)
Home Numbering Plan Area code where xxx = 200 - 999
Home Numbering Plan Area code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 200 - 999.
LOC: Location code data block (NARS only)
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
LOC
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
LOC xxx y...y
- FLEN
- RLI
(0)-24 xxxx
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = LOC (Location code)
Location code, where x = home location code and y...y = extended code of 1-4 digits. The extended code is optional.
Flexible Length
Route List Index
974 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- NPA
- NXX
- ITOH
Response
xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
(NO) YES
- ITEI
- LDN xxx xx...xx
- DID (NO) YES
- - MNXX (NO) YES
- - SAVE 1-7
- - - OFFC xxxxxxx
- - RNGE 0000000-999999
9
Comment
maximum 7 digit NPA code allowed maximum 7 digit NXX code allowed
Inhibit Time Out Handler
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index
Listed Directory Number
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Multiple NXX
Saved digits
Office Code
Range
NPA: Number Plan area code data block
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
NPA
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
NPA xxx y..y z..z
- RLI
- SDRR
- - DENY xxxx a...a
x...x
- - DMI 1-255
- - - LDID x...x
- - LDDD
- - DID x...x
x...x
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = NPA (Number plan area code transmission)
Numbering Plan Area code translation, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits, and z..z = 1-4 digits. the y..y and z..z
entries are optional. Precede the xxx entry with the character "1" when using 1+ dialing.
Route List Index
Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =
ALOW, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or STRK)
Number to be denied within the NPA
Digit Manipulation Index
Local DID number to be recognized
Local DDD number to be recognized
Remote DID number to be recognized
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 975
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
- - DDD
- - ITED
- - ALOW
- ITEI
Response
x...x
x...x
x...x
xxx
Comment
Remote DDD number to be recognized
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits
Allowed codes
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index
NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
- ITEI
NSCC
- SSCL
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
NSCL xxx xxx
0-253
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = NSCL (Network Speed Call List)
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index
Network Speed Call access Code
System Speed Call List number
NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
NXX
- RLI
- SDRR
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
NXX xxx y..y
xxxx a...a
- - DENY x...x
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = NXX (Central Office Code Translation)
Numbering Plan Exchange (Central Office)
Route List Index
Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =
ALOW, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or STRK)
Number to be denied within the NXX
976 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
- - DMI
- - - LDID
- LDDD
- - DID
- - DDD
- - ITED
- - ALOW
- ITEI x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
xxx
Response
1-255 x...x
x...x
Digit Manipulation Index
Comment
Local DID number to be recognized
Local DDD number to be recognized
Remote DID number to be recognized
Remote DDD number to be recognized
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits
Allowed codes
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion index
SPN: Special Number Translation data block
Prompt
REQ
CUST
FEAT
TRAN
TYPE
SPN
- FLEN
- - INPL
- ITOH
- RLI
- CLTP
Response
a...a
xx
NET aaa
SPN x..x
(0)-24
(NO) YES
(NO) YES xxxx a...a
- SDRR
- - DENY
- - DMI a...a
x...x
1-255
- - - LDID x...x
- - LDDD
- - DID x...x
x...x
Comment
Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Customer number associated with this function
Feature = NET
Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)
Type = SPN (Special Number Translation)
Special Number translation
Flexible Length
International Dialing Plan
Inhibit Time-out Handler
Route List Index
Type of call that is defined by the special number (a...a =
(NONE), LOCL, NATL, INTL, SSER, or SERH)
Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =
ALOW, ARRN, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or
STRK)
Number to be Denied
Digit Manipulation Index
Local DID number to be recognized
Local DDD number to be recognized
Remote DID number to be recognized
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 977
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
- - DDD
- - ITED
- - ARRN
- - STRK
- - ALOW
- - - ARLI
Response
x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
0-1999
Comment
Remote DDD number to be recognized
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits
Alternate Routing Remote Number
Allowed codes for ADM/MDM
Allowed codes
Alternative Route List Index
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ALOW x...x
Response
ARLI
ARRN
0-255
0-999 0-1999 x...x
Comment
Allowed codes for ADM/MDM to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Pack/Rel
basic-22
Alternative Route List Index
Alternative Route List Index with Flexible
Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.
The ARRN prompt is repeated after the
ARLI prompt until <CR> is entered (in response to ARRN).
fnp-16 basic-7.00
Alternate Routing Remote Number to be recognized within SPN.
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or 19-m for
SPN.
fnp-16
978 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
CLTP
CUST
DDD
DENY
(NONE)
LOCL
NATL
INTL
SSER
SERH xx x...x
<CR> x...x
Response Comment
Where: m = number of digits entered for
SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Pack/Rel
kd3-20 Type of call that is defined by the special number.
No call type
Local
National
International
Special Service
Special Service Hold
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.
b/nars-1
Remote DDD number to be recognized within the NPA, NXX or SPN.
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Return to SDRR prompt.
b/nars-5
Number to be denied within the
NPA,NXX,SPN, or SDR.
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 979
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
DID
DMI
FEAT
<CR>
(NO) YES x...x
Response
<CR>
1-255
1-999 1-1999
Comment
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Return to SDRR prompt.
Pack/Rel
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
This location arranged for DID
Remote DID number to be recognized within the NPA,NXX or SPN.
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Precede with X to remove.
Return to SDRR prompt.
bnars-1
Digit Manipulation Index
Digit Manipulation Index with Flexible
Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160
DMI is prompted only when the Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped and SDRR = LDID.
dnxp-13 basic-7.00
Feature nars-1
980 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
NET
FLEN
HLOC
HNPA
INPL
ITED
(0)-24 xxx xxx y..y
xxx
1xxx
(NO) YES x...x
Comment
Network translation tables
Pack/Rel
Flexible Length (the number of digits the system expects to receive before accessing a trunk and outpulsing these digits) fnp-20
Flexible Length range
Home Location code xxx = 3 digits
Extended Home Location code, where xxx
= 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. The space between the xxx and y..y digits is optional.
nars-1
Home Numbering Plan Area code (a leading zero is not allowed)
Response for Home Numbering Plan Area code, where xxx = 200-999. A leading zero is not allowed.
Response for Home Numbering Plan Area code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 200-999.
Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".
nanp-19
International Dialing Plan for special number
Default to North American operation when
FLEN = 0. Prompted with Flexible
Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160, FLEN
= 0 and SPN = 0, 00, 01, 011, 411, 611, 911,
800, 1800.
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits
(number to be restricted within the NPA for the excluded trunk group)
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-1
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 981
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
ITEI
ITOH
LDDD
LDID
<CR>
(0)-127
(0)-255
(NO) YES x...x
<CR> x...x
Response Comment
the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Return to SDRR prompt
Pack/Rel
BARS Incoming Trunk group Exclusion
Index
NARS Incoming Trunk group Exclusion
Index
Inhibit Time-Out Handler b/nars-5 fnp-16
Local DDD number to be recognized within the NPA, NXX, or SPN
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-5
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Return to SDRR prompt
Local DID number to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact b/nars-5
982 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
LDN
LOC
MNXX
NPA
NSCC
NXX
<CR> xx...xx
x...x
xxx y..y
xxx xxx y..y z..z
xxx
Response
(NO) YES
1xxx
1xxx y..y z..z
xxxxxxx
Comment
same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Return to SDRR prompt
Pack/Rel
Listed Directory Number
Up to 20 digit listed directory number, including NPA.
Location code, where xxx = 3 digits
Location code, where x = home location code and y..y = extended code of 1-4 digits.
The extended code is optional. Separate x and y codes with a space.
nars-1
Multiple NXX codes and ranges
This prompt should not be used with NARS
DPNSS1.
b/nars-5
Numbering Plan Area code translation
Area code translation, where xxx = 3 digits.
A leading zero is not allowed.
nanp-19
Extended NPA code translation. An extended NPA code can be from 4 to 10 digits, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits and z..z = 1-4 digits. Separate xxx, y..y and z..z entries with a space.
Area code translation using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 3 digits. Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".
Extended NPA code translation 1+ dialing.
An extended NPA code using 1+ dialing can be from 5 to 11 digits, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits and z..z = 1-4 digits.
Separate xxx, y..y and z..z entries with a space. Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".
Numbering Plan Area Code basic-25 up to 7 digits are allowed when TYPE
= LOC
One to three-digit Network Speed Call access Code
Numbering Plan Exchange nars-1 b/nars-1
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 983
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
xxx
Response
1xxx
OFFC
REQ
RLI xxx y..y
1xxx y..y
<CR> xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
CHG
END
LCHG
NEW
OUT
PRT
0-127
0-255
0-999 0-1999
Comment
Office code translation, where xxx = 3 digits.
A leading zero is not allowed.
Office code translation using 1+ dialing, where: xxx = 3 digits. The xxx entry must be preceded with the digit "1".
Extended NXX code, where xxx = 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. Separate the NXX code
(xxx) and the extended
Pack/Rel
Extended NXX code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. Separate the NXX code (xxx) and the extended code
(y..y) with a space. The xxx entry must be preceded with the digit "1".
Return to REQ.
Public Network Exchange Code basic-25 up to 7 digits are allowed when TYPE
= LOC
Office Code (in North America, the NXX of the DID number)
Prompted if MNXX = YES.
b/nars-5
Note:
All OFFC entries must be the same length.
Request.
Change existing data block.
Exit Overlay program.
Print date and time that each data group was last changed (data groups include:
LOC, HLOC, NPA, HNPA, NXX, SPN and
NSCL)
Create new data block.
Delete existing data block.
Print data block.
esn-1
BARS Route List Index
NARS Route List Index
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Route List
Index
Must be in the range specified by prompt
MXRL in LD 86, (example, 0 ² RLI <
MXRL).
esn-20 basic-7.00
984 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
RNGE
Response
0000000
9999999
SAVE
SDRR
SPN
SSCL
STRK
1-7
ALOW
ARRN
DDD
DENY
DID
ITED
LDDD
LDID
STRK
<CR> x...x
0-4095 x...x
Comment Pack/Rel
Type a range with a lower and upper limit for the DID number range.
Enter the same number of digits as the number of trailing digits to be saved. For example, if SAVE is four digits, then the range must be four-digit number range, such as RNGE 1000 1999.
b/nars-1
Saved digits (number of trailing digits to be saved in dialed extension number - DID only).
b/nars-1
Supplemental Digit Restriction or
Recognition
Allowed codes
Alternate Routing Remote Number
Recognized remote Direct Distance Dial codes
Restricted codes
Recognized remote Direct Inward Dial codes
Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits
Recognized Local Direct Distance Dial codes
Recognized Local Direct Inward Dial codes
For ADM/MDM trunk groups
Return to SPN b/nars-5
Special Number.
Enter a carriage return or <CR> to return to the REQ prompt.
b/nars-1
Special Number translation
Enter the SPN digits in groups of 3 or 4 digits, separated by a space (e.g., xxxx xxx xxxx). The SPN can be up to 19 digits long.
The maximum length no longer depends on whether or not the first digit of the SPN is a
"1". That restriction has been removed.
The maximum number of groups allowed is
5.
nars-1 System Speed Call List number
Allowed codes for ADM/MDM to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN
The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 985
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
Prompt
TRAN
TYPE
AC1
AC2
SUM
ALL
HLOC
HNPA
LOC
NPA
NSCL
NXX
SPN
Response Comment
• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX
• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA
• 19-m for SPN
Where: m = number of digits entered for
NPA, NXX, or SPN.
These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.
Pack/Rel
Translator
Access Code 1 (NARS/BARS)
Access Code 2 (NARS)
Summary of Network Translations (allowed when REQ = PRT) b/nars-1
Type of data block
If REQ = PRT, all of the following types is printed
ESN Home Location Code translation data block (NARS only)
Home NPA translation code (Should not be used on DPNSS1) esn-1
ESN Location Code translation data block
(NARS only)
Numbering Plan Area code translation data block (Should not be used on DPNSS1)
Network Speed Call List data block
Central Office Code Translation data block
(Should not be used on DPNSS1)
Special code translation data block basic-4.00
Note:
With ESN Location Code Expansion, the system allows printing of partial matches of translation codes. If a partial translation code is entered for HLOC,
HNPA, LOC, NPA, NSCC, NXX, or SPN, all entries with initial match of the entered value are printed. For example, if LOC =
986 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt Response
Alphabetical list of prompts
Comment
3, all Location Codes beginning with 3 are printed.
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 987
LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3
988 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 47: LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
Overlay program 93 is used to enable and administer the Multi-Tenant Service feature. It is used to configure or change assignments and print data for Attendant Console groups, Tenant-to-Tenant groups,
Tenant-to-Route groups, Tenant-to-Attendant Console groups, and Route-to-Attendant Console groups.
Prompts and responses
REQ
Prompt
TYPE
ECDN
ICDN
ICPS
- ICPR
ACC
DENY
ALOW
AGNO
CUST
CPG
CPGS
ROUT
TEN
MBGS
SGRP
NTBL
ANUM
NAGN
Response
aaa a...a
xx
1-63
(NO) YES
0-511
1-511
(0)-65535
(0)-999 x...x
x...x
aaa
0-<NIPN> aaaa
1-511 1-511
1-511 1-511
0-63
(0)-63
1-63 1-63
0-63
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block (a...a = ACG, CPG, CPGP, RACC,
RACG, RCPG, TACC, TACG, TCPG, TENS, or TGEN)
Customer number associated with this function
Console Presentation Group number
Customer Presentation Group Services
Route number
Tenant number
Multi-location Business Group Subgroup
Scheduled Access Restriction Group number
External Call DN
Internal Call DN
Intercept Computer Printer Search [(CIR) or COM]
Intercept Computer Printer number
Access (aaaa = ALOW or DENY)
Access denied tenant numbers
Access allowed tenant numbers
Attendant Console Group Number
NAS routing Table
Add Attendant Console Numbers
Night Attendant Console Group Number
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 989
LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
AQTT
AODN
CWCL
CWTM
CWBZ
EFLL
FRRT
- FRT
SRRT
- SRT
WAIT
- MURT
RICI
TIM1
NIT2
TIM2
NIT3
TIM3
NIT4
TIM4
ICI
Prompt
LDN0
LDN1
LDN2
LDN3
LDN4
LDN5
NIT1 hh mm x...x
hh mm x...x
hh mm x...x
hh mm xx aaa x...x
x...x
x...x
x...x
Response
x...x
x...x
x...x
Comment
Listed DN 0
Listed DN 1
Listed DN 2
Listed DN 3
Listed DN 4
Listed DN 5
First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN
Time for first NTOD DN
Second NTOD DN
Time for second NTOD DN
Third NTOD DN
Time for third NTOD DN
Fourth NTOD DN
Time for fourth NTOD DN
Incoming Call Indicators (ICI)
0-(30)-255 xxxx
Attendant Queuing Threshold
Attendant Overflow DN
(0)-255 (0)-255 Call Waiting Call Limit
(0)-511 (0)-511 Call Waiting Time
(NO) YES
(0)-8064
0-511
0-(20)-2044
Call Waiting Buzz
Efficiency Factor Loading Level
First RAN Route number
First RAN Time threshold
0-511
0-(20)-2044 aaa
0-511
(NO) xx
Second RAN Route number
Second RAN Time threshold
Wait time treatment (aaa = (RGB), MUS, or SIL)
Music Route number if WAIT = MUS
Recorded overflow announcement on ICI keys
990 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ACC
AGNO
ALOW
ANUM
AODN
AQTT
CPG
Response
DENY
ALOW
Comment
Access
Denied tenants are to be entered.
Sets with TEND Class of Service can access all routes. Sets with TENA can only access routes if tenant to route access is allowed for that set's tenant. When REQ = PRT, print access denied tenants.
Allowed tenants are to be entered.
Sets with TEND Class of Service can access all routes. Sets with TENA can only access routes if tenant to route access is allowed for that set's tenant. When REQ = PRT, print access allowed tenants.
Pack/Rel
tens-7
0-63 Attendant Console Group Number
AGNO 0 always exists and contains all
Attendant Consoles that are configured for the customer. AGNO is initially specified for all tenants. When TYPE = CPG, AGNO cannot be zero.
tens-7 tens-7 1-511 1-511 Access allowed tenant numbers
Prompted when ACC = ALOW.
ALL
<CR>
Access allowed all tenants
Stop ALOW prompt.
1-63 1-63
<CR>
Add Attendant Console Numbers.
Stop prompt.
Precede with X to remove.
tens-7 xxxx aop/ cpg-15
0-(30)-255
1-63
Attendant Overflow DN
Precede with X to remove.
Attendant Queuing Threshold
Console Presentation Group number
Use <CR> to print all configured CPG data blocks for the customer.
aop/ cpg-15 cpg-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 991
LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
Prompt
CPGS
CUST
CWBZ
CWCL
CWTM
Response
(NO)
YES
Comment
Disable Customer Presentation Group level
Services
Enable Customer Presentation Group level
Services
Prompted with Console Presentation Group
(CPG) package 172.
Pack/Rel
cpg-15 xx
<CR>
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15
Print specified data for all customers when
REQ = PRT tens-7
(NO) YES (NO) YES
Call Waiting Buzz
First field: Provide 2 second buzz on exceeding upper CWCL or CWTM threshold.
Second field: Buzz on first call entering queu cpg-15
(0)-255 (0)-255
Lower and upper thresholds for Call Waiting
Call Limit
The call waiting lamp starts flashing when number of calls in the queue meets or exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the number of calls in queue is less than the lower threshold.
Enter 0 0 to disable this feature.
cpg-15
(0)-1000 (0)-1000
Lower and upper thresholds defined as a percentage of the active consoles when OPT =
FACA in LD 15
When the FACA/FACD option is changed in LD
15, a new value for CWCL must be set or the default values are used. The CWCL values for the tenant-level are set equal to the customerlevel values. (CWCL is also given in LD 15).
(0)-511 (0)-511
Lower and upper thresholds (in seconds) for
Call Waiting Time
The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when the call in the queue meets or exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the wait time is less than the lower threshold.
Enter 0 0 to disable this feature.
cpg-15
992 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DENY
ECDN
EFLL
FRRT
FRT
ICDN
ICI
Response Comment
1-511 1-511 Access denied tenant numbers
Prompted when ACC = DENY.
ALL
<CR>
Access denied all other tenants
Stop DENY prompt.
x...x
Pack/Rel
tens-7
External Call DN, where: x...x = up to 13 digits
DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and multi-tenant is not on intercept position.
The DN is used for intercept treatment for external calls.
Prompted with Intercept Computer Interface
(ICP) package 143.
icp-16
(0)-8064
0-511
Efficiency Factor Loading Level
Prompted with Network Attendant Service
(NAS) package 159.
First RAN Route number
Precede with X to remove.
nas-18 roa/cpg-15
0-(20)-2044 First RAN Time threshold xxxx Internal Call DN, where: x...x = up to 13 digits
DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and multi-tenant is not on intercept position.
The DN is used for intercept treatment for internal calls.
roa/cpg-15 xx aaa Incoming Call Indicators (ICI). Where:
• xx = key number (0-19)
• aaa = Call type**** aaa is any of the following:
• CAx = Station Category (x = 1-7)
• CFB = Call Forward Busy
• CFN = Call Forward No Answer
• DF0 = Dial 0 Fully Restricted
• DL0 = Dial 0
• IAT = Inter-Attendant call cpg-20
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 993
LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
Prompt
ICPR
ICPS
LDN0
LDN1
LDN2
LDN3
Response
0-<NIPN>
(CIR)
COM xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Comment
• IEN = Idle Extension Notification
• INT = Intercept
• LCT = Lockout intercept
• LD0 = Listed DN 0
• LD1 = Listed DN 1
• LD2 = Listed DN 2
• LD3 = Listed DN 3
• LD4 = Listed DN 4
• LD5 = Listed DN 5
• MWC = Message Waiting Calls
• NUL = remove ICI appearances
• RLL = Recall
• Rxxx Rxxx = Routes (0-511). Enter one or more routes.
Pack/Rel
Intercept Computer Printer number
NIPN is defined in LD 15. Prompted when ICPS
= COM.
icp-10
Intercept Computer Printer Search (when more than one console is used)
Circular search
One common printer for all consoles icp-10 cpg-15 Listed DN 0
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
Listed DN 1
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
cpg-15
Listed DN 2
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
Listed DN 3 cpg-15 cpg-15
994 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
LDN4
LDN5
MBGS
MURT
NAGN
NIT1
NIT2
NIT3
Response Comment
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
xxxx xxxx
Listed DN 4
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
Listed DN 5
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
(0)-65535
0-511
0-63 xxxx
Multi-location Business Group Subgroup for tenant. Where:
• 0 = no indication
• 1-65535 = Subgroup (tenant) identifier
As with the ISDN Private Network Identifier
(PNI), the entries to this prompt must be coordinated with the far- end to ensure all features function correctly within a network.
Music Route number if WAIT = MUS
Precede with X to remove.
Night Attendant Console Group Number xxxx xxxx
Pack/Rel
nldn-20 nldn-20 tens-16 roa/ cpg-15
First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN
DN can be defined as a PLDN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
cpg-15 cpg-15 Second NTOD DN
DN can be defined as a PLDN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
Third NTOD DN
DN can be defined as a PLDN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
cpg-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 995
LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
Prompt
NIT4
NTBL
REQ
RICI
ROUT
SGRP
SRRT
SRT
TEN
TIM1
Response
xxxx
Comment
Fourth NTOD DN
DN can be defined as a PLDN
Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory
Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.
Precede with X to remove.
(0)-63
Pack/Rel
cpg-15
NAS routing Table to be used for calls directed to this Attendant Console Group (ACG)/
Console Presentation Group (CPG).
nas-16
CHG
END
NEW
Request
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program
Create the Multi-Tenant Service data block.
If REQ = NEW and <CR> is entered for all prompts, then all parameters default to the customer data block (LD 15) values except
LDN0-3, ICI, RICI and AQTT.
Remove the Multi-Tenant Service data block.
Print the data block specified by TYPE.
tens-7
OUT
PRT
(NO) xx ... xx Recorded overflow announcement on ICI keys
0-19
Precede with X to remove.
0-511
<CR>
Route number
Print all routes for the specified type when REQ
= PRT.
roa/ cpg-15 tens-7
(0)-999 Scheduled Access Restriction Group number.
Prompted when TYPE = TGEN sar-20 roa/ cpg-15 0-511 Second RAN Route number
Precede with X to remove.
0-(20)-2044 Second RAN Time threshold
1-511
<CR> hh mm
Tenant number
Print specified data for all tenants of CUST when REQ = PRT.
Time for first NTOD DN. Where:
• hh = 0-23
• mm = 0-59 roa/ cpg-15 tens-7 cpg-15
996 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TIM2
TIM3
TIM4
TYPE
WAIT
Response
hh mm
Comment
Time for second NTOD DN hh mm hh mm
Time for third NTOD DN
Time for fourth NTOD DN
CPG
CPGP
RACC
RCPG
TACC
TCPG
TENS
TGEN
(RGB)
MUS
SIL
Pack/Rel
cpg-15 cpg-15 cpg-15
Type of data block
Console Presentation Group data block.
If REQ = NEW and <CR> is entered for all prompts, then all parameters default to the customer data block (LD 15) values except
LDN0-LDN3, ICI, and RICI which are cleared.
Use <CR> to print all configured CPG data blocks for the customer.
Console Presentation Group level parameters
Tenant-to-Route Access data block
Route-to-Attendant Presentation Group data block
Tenant-to-Tenant Access data block
Tenant-to-Attendant Console Group data block
Multi-Tenant Service data block
Tenant SAR data block tens-7
Wait time treatment
Ring Back
Music
Silence roa/ cpg -15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 997
LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service
998 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 48: LD 94: Multifrequency
Signaling
Overlay program 94 allows the implementation and administration of R2 and L1 Multifrequency Compelled
Signaling (MFC) and Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) tables.
Contents
Section
Overlay program 94 allows the implementation and administration of R2 and L1
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) and Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) tables.
MFC Information:
Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on
page 1000
Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table
on page 1002
Table 18: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) outgoing table on page 1003
MFE Information:
Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on page 1003
Table 20: MFE DID default incoming table
on page 1004
Table 21: MFE DOD default outgoing table
on page 1004
2 of 5 and 2 0f 6 Information:
Table 22: 2 of 5 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables
on page 1005
Table 23: 2 of 6 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables
on page 1005
L1 Signaling information:
Table 24: Programmable signals for all 6 L1 signaling levels on page 1006
Table 25: MFC default (standard) incoming tables for L1 signaling
on page 1009
Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling on page 1012
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 999
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Prompts and responses
- NTT
EECD
SMFC
SCNT
CNDR
LVNO
DFLT
RECV
ICOG
MAXT
TBNO
CACD
- SET
- ATT
- TIE
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
XMIT
Response
aaa aaaa
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)
Type of data block (aaaa = L1MF, MFET, MFK5, MFK6, R2MF or R2MFC)
Incoming/Outgoing (aaa = ICT or OGT) aaa
(1)-127 Maximum Number of Tables
1-127 <CR> Table Number
(NO) YES
(1)-10
(1)-10
1-(6)-10
Category Code Default
Set category code
Attendant category code
TIE category code
1-(6)-10 Non-TIE category code
1-127 <CR> End-to-End Signaling Code
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
Send MFC
Switch CNI on Next
(NO) YES
1-6
Calling Number Display Restriction
Level Number
0-127 Default Table number
1-15 mmmm Receive signal number and mnemonic (MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6)
1-15 NUL Remove signal number and mnemonic (MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6) mmmm 1-15 Transmit signal mnemonic and number (MFC, MFE or MFK) mmmm 0
IDCT n
Remove signal mnemonic and number (MFC, MFE or MFK)
Idle Call Trace Signal number
Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables
Group Description of mnemonic
Forward Level 1 Group I
Function mnemonic
DGT1 Digit 1 -
1000 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Group
Backward Level 1 Group A
Forward Level 2 Group II
Prompts and responses
CCNI
TFST *
TNM1 *
TNM2 *
TNM3 *
TNXT *
VACO *
OPER
NOPR
COMP
CONG
FAIL
NEXT
SCAT
SCNI
TERM
PRIO *
REST
RICA *
TOBI *
TOLL
Function mnemonic
DGT9
DGT0
HTDM
ECNI
EODL
Description of mnemonic
Digit 9
Digit 0
H tandem signal. Sent before the called party DN if DN is in the Special Service
List (SSL). The International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 must be equipped.
CNI (Calling Number Identification) not available
End of Dialing End of CPN (Calling Party
Number) Request not accepted.
Send category. Send first CNI digit.
Send next CNI digit.
Address Complete, next group
Congestion
Call Failure
Send Next digit (fixed value)
Send Category
Send first CNI digit; send next CNI digit
Terminated
Tandem, send first digit
Send last but one digit
Send last but two digits
Send last but three digits
Tandem, send next digit
Vacant Office
Operator/attendant
Subscriber No Priority
Subscriber with Priority
Restricted Station
Route Incoming Call to Attendant
Toll Operator Break-In
Toll call
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1001
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group
Backward Level 2 Group B
Function mnemonic
BUBA **
BUBN **
BUSY
CONG
FAIL
IDCT
IDLE
OUTT
VACC
* Function is transmitted (Receive only)
** Function is received (Transmit only)
Description of mnemonic
Busy (break in allowed after TOBI)
Busy (break in not allowed after TOBI)
Station Busy
Congestion
Failure
Idle Call Trace
Station Idle
Station Out-of-Order
Vacant number
Note:
on page 1000 default to NUL (no assigned function).
Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table
Group
Receive Level 1 Group I
Transmit Level 1 Group A
Receive Level 2 Group II
Transmit Level 2 Group B
Signal number
1 - 9 10 11 12 12
13 15 15
Function mnemonic
DGT1 - DGT9 DGT0 11 ASTX (CNDR)
ECNI 12 DPAL (CNDR) 13 POND
(CNDR) EODL 15 DPDN (CNDR)
1 3 4 5 6 9 11 12
13 15 15
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13
2 3 4 5 8 9
NEXT COMP CONG SCAT TERM SCNI
ASTX 11 (CNDR) DPAL 12 (CNDR)
POND 13 (CNDR) FAIL DPDN 15
(CNDR)
NOPR PRIO NOPR OPER NOPR
REST NOPR PRIO OPER NOPR
NOPR NOPR
IDLE BUSY CONG VACC OUTT FAIL
Note:
Signal numbers not listed in Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table on
page 1002 default to NUL (no assigned function.)
1002 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Table 18: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) outgoing table
Group
Transmit Level 1 Group I
Signal number Function mnemonic
1 - 9 10 12 15 DGT1 - DGT9 DGT0 ECNI EODL
Receive Level 1 Group A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 15
NEXT TNM1 COMP CONG SCAT
TERM TMN2 TNM3 SCNI TFST TNXT
FAIL
Transmit Level 2 Group II; Receive Level 2 Group B
1 5 7 2 3 4 5 8 9 NOPR OPER REST IDLE BUSY CONG
VACC OUTT FAIL
Note:
In Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on page 1003, for
incoming tables the signals which are received are forwarded signals, MFE tables have no
Level 2 forward signals. Level 1 values for function xxxx range from DGT0 to DGT9 (Digits
0 - 9).
Note:
Multiple function assignment allowed (same function to different signals).
Note:
Signals transmitted in the case of incoming tables, are backward signals.
Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables
Group I
Forward Level 1
Backward Level 1
Function mnemonic
DGT1-9
DGT0
Description of mnemonic
Digits 1-9
Digit 0
ACOC
ACSS
SACD
SEND
Access code for a call to other installation
Access code for a call to special services
Send Access Code and Digits
Send remaining digits (plus last digits if preceded by TRAN)
COMP
TRAN
FAIL
CONG
Address Complete, change to Level 2 congestion
Transit connection
Failure, new attempt
Congestion
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1003
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group I
Backward: Level 2
Function mnemonic
IDLE
Description of mnemonic
Station Idle, charge call
BUSY
CONG
OUTT
VACC
Station Busy
Congestion
Out-of-Order
Vacant number
Table 20: MFE DID default incoming table
Group I
Receive Level 1
Transmit Level 1
Transmit Level 2
Signal number
1-9 10
2 3 -
1 3 3 3 3
Function mnemonic
DGT1-DGT9 DGT0
SEND COMP CONG
IDLE BUSY CONG OUTT VACC
Table 21: MFE DOD default outgoing table
Group I
Transmit Level 1
Receive Level 1
Receive Level 2
3
4
1
2
8
9
3
6
7
8
5
6
1
2
1
5
Signal number
1-9
10
COMP
TRAN
FAIL
CONG
IDLE
IDLE
BUSY
IDLE
Function mnemonic
DGT1-DGT9
DGT0
ACOC
ACSS
SACD
SEND
IDLE
IDLE
BUSY
BUSY
1004 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Group I Signal number
9
10
BUSY
BUSY
Function mnemonic
Table 22: 2 of 5 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables
Group
Forward Group I
Forward Group II
Backward Code A
Backward Code B
Function mnemonic
DGT0-9
LOCB
SERB
NATB
INTB
GRPA
CCAL
GRBC
SALL
GRPC
COMP
CONG
FMTR
CONG
BUSY
OUTT
EOSL
Description of mnemonic
Digits 0-9
Regular subscriber
Special Services inside the province
National
International
Send Group a digits
Send Class of Call
Send Group bc digits
Send All the digits
Send Group c digits
Change to code "b"
Congestion
Subscriber free with Metering
Congestion
Subscriber Busy
Line dead
End of Selection without line state reached
Table 23: 2 of 6 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables
Group
Forward Group I
Forward Group II
Function mnemonic
DGT0-15
LOCB
LOCL
NATB
Description of mnemonic
Digits 0-15
Provincial-regular subscriber (charging by block)
Provincial-regular subscriber (charging by line)
National-regular subscriber (charging by block)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1005
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group
Backward Code A
Backward Code B
Function mnemonic
NATL
INTB
INTL
SERB
SERL
GRBC
SALL
SORG
CCAL
CONG
COMP
FMTR
CONG
BUSY
OUTT
EOSL
Description of mnemonic
National-regular subscriber (charging by line)
International-regular subscriber
(charging by block)
International-regular subscriber
(charging by line)
Special services (charging by block)
Special services (charging by line)
Send Group BC digits
Send All the digits
Send Origination subscribers number -
All Digits
Send Class of Call
Congestion
Change to code "B"
Subscriber free with Metering
Congestion
Subscriber Busy
Line dead
End of Selection without line state reached
Table 24: Programmable signals for all 6 L1 signaling levels
Group
Forward Level 1
Function mnemonic
DGT1 -
DGT9
Description of mnemonic
Digit 1 -
Digit 9
DGT0
UREJ
GOEN
EODL
Digit 0
Level 1 signal rejected (Abort call)
Change to a Supplementary Service
(SS) level. New level is Level 6 when terminator has a Backward
Supplementary Service (BSS).
Otherwise, the new level is Level 5.
End of Dialing. No more digits to send.
Aborts call when no digits have been received.
1006 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Group
Backward Level 1
Forward Level 2
Backward Level 2
Forward Level 3
Prompts and responses
Function mnemonic
NEXT
Description of mnemonic
Send Next digit in destination address
TNFS
COMP
FAIL
SCAT
TERM
CONG
EINF
Tandem encountered. Send digits again starting from the first digit.
Address Complete (Terminate signaling)
Call Failure (Abort call)
Send calling party category (always rejected)
Address complete (Terminate signaling)
Congestion (Abort call)
ELV2
ENO1
TNTX
OLNE
OPER
NETW
Request change from Level 1 to Level 6 for BSS activity. Enhanced signal set is implied.
Address complete. Change to Level 2.
Signaling also uses Level 3 or higher.
Request next digit in destination address. Implies using at least Level 3 signaling.
Tandem encountered (Send next digit)
Originator is a subscriber without priority
Originator is an attendant
Network call for Ring Again (RGA). Call is not intended for termination at a station.
Restricted circuit LSIG*
BUSY
FAIL
VCOT
IDLE
CONG
SOTI
SIIN
SUPL
NOSS
Destination is busy
Call has failed. Abort.
Call has terminated on a vacant DN
Destination is idle
Congestion (Abort call)
State of Termination undetermined
Simple call (No restrictions)
Request a Forward Supplementary
Service (FSS)
No further SS activity
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1007
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group
Backward Level 3
Forward Level 4
Backward Level 4
NEXT
Forward Level 5 and Backward Level 6
DGT1
DGT2
DGT3*
DGT4**
DGT5**
DGT6*
DGT7*
DGT8*
DGT9*
DGT10*
DGT11**
DGT12**
DGT13*
DGT14*
Function mnemonic
TERM
Description of mnemonic
Call complete (Terminate signaling)
FAIL
SUPL
SCNI**
NEXT
Call has failed (Abort)
Request BSS activity
Request Call Number Indicator (CNI)
Send FSS digit
DGT1 -
DGT9
DGT0
LFSS
CNI digit 1 -
CNI digit 9
CNI digit 0
Change to Level 1 when CNI is complete.
EODG
DGT1 -
DGT9
DGT0
KEND
No more CNI digits.
CNI digit 1 -
CNI digit 9
CNI digit 0
Changing to Level 6. Preceded by a
LFSS signal.
Send next CNI digit
FSS digit 1
FSS digit 2
FSS digit 3
FSS Digit 4
FSS Digit 5
FSS Digit 6
FSS Digit 7
FSS Digit 8
FSS Digit 9
FSS Digit 10
FSS Digit 11
FSS Digit 12
FSS Digit 13
FSS Digit 14
1008 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Group Function mnemonic
DGT15*
Description of mnemonic
FSS Digit 15
Backward Level 5 and Forward Level 6
KEND
FEND
KMFC
SS successful (Terminate signaling)
SS failed (Terminate signaling)
SS successful (Signaling continues at a slower rate)
FMFC SS failed (Signaling continues at a slower rate)
Request next SS digit NEXT
* Function is transmitted (Receive only)
** Used for Ring Again (RGA)
Table 25: MFC default (standard) incoming tables for L1 signaling
Group Signal number Function mnemonic
This table indicates the default signal tables for L1 signaling. The transmit sets indicate only those signals that can be sent. The receive sets must have duplicate signals to accept signals that must be mapped to another signal for processing.
Receive Level 1 Group I 1 DGT1 -
9
10
12
13
DGT9
DGT0
UREJ
GOEN
Transmit Level 1 Group A
5
6
3
4
15
1
2
9
10
11
12
EODL
NEXT
TNFS
COMP
FAIL
SCAT
TERM
CONG
EINF
ELV2
ENOI
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1009
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group
Receive Level 2 Group II
Transmit Level 2 Group B
Receive Level 3 Group III
SUPL
SUPL
SUPL
SUPL
SIIN
SIIN
SUPL
SUPL
NOSS
SIIN
SIIN
SIIN
SIIN
VCOT
IDLE
CONG
SOTI
TNXT
OLNE
LSIG
OLNE
OPER
OPER
OPER
OPER
NETW*
OLNE
UREJ
OLNE
BUSY
FAIL
9
10
11
12
15
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
14
5
6
Signal number
14
1
5
7
2
4
3
4
12
13
10
11
8
9
Function mnemonic
1010 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Group
Transmit Level 3 Group C
Receive Level 4 Group IV
Transmit Level 4 Group D
Receive Level 5 Group V
Transmit Level 5 Group E
Receive Level 6 Group VI
Transmit Level 6 Group F
Prompts and responses
KMFC
FMFC
NEXT
KEND
FEND
KMFC
FMFC
NEXT
DGT1
DGT2
NEXT
DGT1 -
DGT9
DG10 -
DG15
KEND
FEND
TERM
FAIL
SUPL
SCNI*
NEXT
DGT1 -
DGT9
DGT0
LFSS
EODG
DGT1 -
DGT9
DGT0
KEND
12
13
14
15
1
2
13
14
15
11
15
11
12
15
1 -
9
10 -
Signal number
1
4
15
1 -
8
9
1 -
9
10
11
9
10
11
15
Function mnemonic
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1011
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group Signal number
4
13
DGT4
DG13
Function mnemonic
* Not included unless Ring Again (RGA) is included for L1 signaling.
Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling
Group Signal number Function mnemonic
This table indicates the default signal tables for L1 signaling. The transmit sets indicate only those signals that can be sent. The receive sets must have duplicate signals to accept signals that must be mapped to another signal for processing.
Transmit Level 1 Group I 1 -
9
DGT1 -
DGT9
Receive Level 1 Group A
10
12
13
15
1
DGT0
UREJ
GOEN
EODL
NEXT
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
TNFS
COMP
FAIL
SCAT
TERM
RUID
ALFS
CONG
Transmit Level 2 Group II
2
5
14
1
10
11
12
13
EINF
ELV2
ENOI
PSNX
TNXT
OLNE
LSIG
OPER
1012 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Group
Receive Level 2 Group B
Signal number
10
3
6
9
4
5
10
11
12
13
BUSY
IDLE
BUSY
IDLE
14 SOTI
Transmit Level 3 Group III; Receive Level 3 Group C
1
5
SIIN
SUPL
NETW*
BUSY
FAIL
VCOT
IDLE
CONG
Function mnemonic
Transmit Level 4 Group IV
13
14
15
1 -
9
9
10
11
12
7
8
4
5
2
3
15
1
NOSS
TERM
TERM
TERM
FAIL
TERM
SUPL
SUPL
SCNI*
SUPL
SCNI*
SCNI*
SUPL
SCNI*
NEXT
DGT 1 -
DGT9
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1013
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Group
Receive Level 4 Group D
Transmit Level 5 Group V
Receive Level 5 Group E
Transmit Level 6 Group VI
Receive Level 6 Group F 1 -
9
10
11 -
12
13
14
15
14
15
11
12
11
12
13
6 -
9
10
11
4
5
1 -
3
Signal number
10
11
15
1 -
9
10
11
15
FEND
KMFC
FMFC
NEXT
DGT 1 -
DGT9
DGT0
DG11 -
DG12*
KEND
FEND
KMFC
FMFC
NEXT
KEND
DGT1 -
DGT3
DGT4*
DGT5*
DGT6 -
DGT9
DGT0
DG11*
DGT0
LFSS
EODG
DGT 1 -
DGT9
DGT0
KEND
NEXT
Function mnemonic
1014 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Group Signal number
15 DG15
Function mnemonic
* Not included unless Ring Again (RGA) is included for L1 signaling.
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
ATT
CACD
CNDR
DFLT
EECD
ICOG
LVNO
MAXT
NTT
RECV
Response
(1)-10
Comment
Attendant category code Category code for attendants
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-127
1-127
<CR>
ICT
OGT
1-6
Pack/Rel
mfc-10
Category Code Default Change category code default. Prompted when TYPE = R2MF opcb-14 basic-24 Calling Number Display Restriction
Set the table for CNDR CLID feature
Default table number mfc-10 mfc-18 End-to-End Signaling code
Default to TBNO response when REQ = NEW otherwise leave TBNO as assigned.
Incoming/Outgoing
Incoming table
Outgoing table mfc-10 mfc-10 Level Number
• 1-2 for TYPE = R2MF, MFK5, MFK6
• 1-6 for TYPE = L1MF
Precede with X to remove.
(1)-127
1-(6)-10
Maximum number of TablesPrompted when
REQ = NEW
Non-TIE category code
Category code for non-TIE trunks mfc-10 mfc-14
1-15 mmmm Receive signal number and mnemonic (MFC or,
MFE, MFK5 or MFK6)
Signal number range is: mfc-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1015
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
Prompt
REQ
SCNT
SET
SMFC
TBNO
TIE
Response
1-15 NUL
<CR>
Comment
• 1 - 10 if TYPE = MFK5
• 1 - 15 if TYPE = MFK6
Remove signal number and associated function mnemonic.
Stop RECV prompts
Refer to Tables
Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables
on page 1000 through Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling
on page 1012 for function mnemonics.
Pack/Rel
CHG
END
NEW
OUT
PRT
(NO)
YES
(1)-10
Request
Change existing data.
Exit Overlay program.
Add new data to the system.
Remove data block.
Print data.
mfc-10
Switch CNI on Next.
When the NEXT signal is received during CNI transmission on Level 1, the system continues sending the calling number.
When the NEXT signal is received during CNI transmission on Level 1, the system switches to called number and sends the next called number digit.
mfc-18
Set category code.
Category code for SL-1 and 500/2500 sets.
mfc-10
(NO)
YES
1-127
<CR>
1-(6)-10
Send MFC
Backward signals are stopped when the forward signal is recognized as having stopped.
Backward signals are sent (incoming calls) pulsed for 150 ms or received (outgoing calls) pulsed 150 ms +/- 20%.
mfc-18 mfc-10 Table Number
MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 table number
Print all MFC, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 tables.
TIE category code mfc-10
1016 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TYPE
XMIT
Response Comment
Category code for TIE trunks
Pack/Rel
L1MF
MFET
MFK5
MFK6
R2MF
Type of data block.
L1 MFC data block
Must have X08 to X11 Gateway (L1MF) package
188.
MFE data block
2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling
R2 MFC data block mfc-10 mmmm 1-15 Transmit signal mnemonic and number (MFC,
MFE or MFK) mmmm 0
IDCT n
<CR>
• 1 - 10 if TYPE = MFK5
• 1 - 15 if TYPE = MFK6
Remove function mnemonic mmmm and associated signal number
Any undesired function in the default transmit tables should not be removed, but instead assigned a different signal number.
LNVO is prompted following a null entry for
XMIT. If nothing is entered in response to LVNO then, provided that there is a level one, the table is stored.
Idle Call Trace signal number (Default is the same as the IDLE signal) Where: n = signal number and 0 = close
Stop XMIT prompts.
Refer to Tables 18 through 28 for the function mnemonics.
mfe-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1017
LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling
1018 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 49: LD 95: Call Party Name Display
Overlay program 95 is used to define, change, remove or print information for the Call Party Name Display
(CPND) data block and name assignment, on a per customer basis.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by task:
Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND)
on page 1019
Add Calling Party Name Display name on page 1020
Change Calling Party Name Display name on page 1021
Remove Calling Party Name Display name on page 1021
Print Calling Party Name Display data and names on page 1022
Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
CNFG
MXLN
STAL
Response aaa
CPND xx aaaa
5-(17)-27
(NO) YES
Comment
Req = NEW or CHG
Type = CPND (Calling Party Name Display)
Customer number associated with this function
Configuration (aaaa = (ALON), REMO, or LOCL)
Maximum Length
Static Allocation of name storage
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1019
LD 95: Call Party Name Display
- DFLN
DES
RESN
- CFWD
- CFNA
- HUNT
- NITC
- PKUP
- XFER
- AAA
5-(13)-27
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
(F) aaaa
(N) aaaa
(B) aaaa
(NI) aaaa
(P) aaaa
(T) aaaa
(A) aaaa
Default Length
Designator for Multiple Appearance DNs allowed
Display of Reason for redirecting calls allowed
Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display
Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display
Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display
Mnemonic for Call Forward Non Intercom Call
Mnemonic for Call Pickup display
Mnemonic for Call Transfer display
Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering display
Add Calling Party Name Display name
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
CPND_LANG
DIG
- LANG
- NAME
- XPLN a...a
xx
DISPLAY_FMT aaaa
DN
- LANG
- NAME x...x
aaa a...a
- XPLN
ENTR
- NAME
- XPLN xx x xxxx xx
- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa
Response
NEW
NAME xx aaa
0-253 0-99 aaa
Comment
Req = NEW
Type = NAME (CPND Name)
Customer number associated with this function
CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Dial Intercom Group
Language (aaa = (ROM), KAT, or ALL)
CPND Name in ASCII characters
Expected Length
Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)
Directory Number
Language (aaa = (ROM), KAT, or ALL)
CPND Name in ASCII characters
Expected Length
Entry Number (Null to exit)
Group name
Expected Length
Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)
1020 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
DCNO
- IDC
- NAME
0-254
0-254 a...a
Digit Conversion table Number
Incoming DID Digit Conversion number
CPND Name in ASCII characters
Prompts and responses
Change Calling Party Name Display name
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
Response
CHG
NAME xx
CPND_LANG aaa
DIG
- NAME
- DN
0-253 0-99 a...a
x...x
- NAME
ENTR
- NAME a...a
x xxxx
- XPLN xx
- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa
DCNO 0-254
- IDC
- NAME
0-254 a...a
Comment
Req = CHG
Type = NAME (CPND Name)
Customer number associated with this function
CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Dial Intercom Group
CPND Name using ASCII characters
Directory Number
CPND Name in ASCII characters
Entry Number (Null to exit)
Group name
Expected Length
Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)
Digit Conversion table Number
Incoming DID Digit Conversion number
CPND Name in ASCII characters
Remove Calling Party Name Display name
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
CPND_LANG
Response
OUT
NAME xx aaa
Comment
Req = OUT
Type = NAME (CPND Name)
Customer number associated with this function
CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1021
LD 95: Call Party Name Display
DIG
DN
0-253 0-99 x...x
x...x y...y
ALL
0-254 DCNO
- IDC 0-254
ARE YOU SURE? (YES) NO
Dial Intercom Group
Remove Directory Number x...x
Remove range of DN-defined names
Remove all DN-defined names
Digit Conversion table Number
Incoming DID Digit Conversion number
(Confirm) or remove operation
Print Calling Party Name Display data and names
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
CUST
CPND_LANG
LANG
Response
PRT
NAME xx aaa aaa
(NO) YES PAGE
DIG
SHRT
- DN
SHRT
DCNO
- IDC
SHRT
ENTR
- NAME
0-2045 0-99
(NO YES x...x
x...x y...y
x/xx/xxx
ALL
(NO) YES
0-254 nnn
ALL
(NO) YES x xxxx
Comment
Req = PRT
Type = NAME (CPND Name)
Customer number associated with this function
CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)
Language choice for name display (aaa = ROM or
KAT)
Page headers and numbers printed (or not) if the
Multiple DN/DIG is specified.
Dial Intercom Group
Short form
Print single Directory Number x...x
Print range of Directory Numbers
Print all DNs starting with x, xx, or xxx
Print all DNs
Short form
Digit Conversion table Number
Incoming DID Digit Conversion number
All names defined are printed
Short form
Entry Number (Null to exit)
Group name
1022 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
- XPLN xx
- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa
Alphabetical list of prompts
Expected Length
Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)
Alphabetical list of prompts
AAA
Prompt Response
aaa
Comment
Attendant Alternative Answering display mnemonic Default = A
Pack/Rel
cpnd-10
ARE YOU SURE?
(YES) NO (Confirm) or remove operation. The default response is YES.
cpnd-1
CFNA xxxx
CFWD
CNFG xxxx
(ALON)
REMO
LOCL
Call Forward No Answer display mnemonic
Default = N cpnd-10 cpnd-10 Call Forward All Calls display mnemonic
Default = F
Configuration
Standalone CPND configuration
Interwork with a remote directory system
Interwork with a local (inboard) system cpnd-10
CPND_LANG cpnd-19
CUST
DCNO
DES
DFLN
(ROM)
KAT xx
CPND language. Prompted when FTR =
CPND.
Roman CPND language
Katakana CPND language
Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15
Digit Conversion table Number 0-254
(NO) YES Designator for Multiple Appearance DNs allowed
Prompted when ODAS is equipped.
5-(13)-27 Default character string Length
Default to 13 or MXLN, whichever is less.
Prompted when STAL = YES cpnd-10 dnis-17 odas-10 cpnd-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1023
LD 95: Call Party Name Display
DIG
Prompt
ENTR
DISPLAY_FMT
DN
HUNT
Response
gg mm
Comment
Existing Dial Intercom Group number followed by member number (optional), where: gg
ALL
<CR>
• gg = 0-2045
• mm = 0-99
Existing DIG Group number
Without member number specified, ALL members within this Group are printed.
Print all Dial Intercom Groups.
Prompts DN
If CPND Name already exists, an error message is returned. Prompted when DIG is equipped.
Pack/Rel
di-10 x basic-5.00
(LAST)
FIRST xxxx
Group name configuration for an entry number to a CLID data block.
Display format for CPND name
Last name, First name (Doe, John)
First name, Last name (John Doe) cpnd-19 x...x y...y
ALL x/xx/xxx
<CR> xxxx
Directory Number (Existing eligible DN or
Partial DN). The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion
(DNXP) package 150.
Valid DN types are Single or Multiple line prime DN, trunk DN, attendant DN or ACD
DN. If Partial DN, all possible DNs are printed.
Range of DN-defined names are deleted/ printed. This entry is valid when REQ = OUT/
PRT.
All names defined are deleted/printed. ALL is a valid entry when REQ = OUT/PRT.
DNs starting with x, xx, or xxx are printed.
This entry is valid when REQ = PRT.
To re-prompt DCNO
If the CPND name is already defined, an error message is returned.
cpnd-10
Call Forward No Answer display mnemonic cpnd-10
1024 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
IDC
PKUP
REQ
Prompt
LANG
MXLN
NAME
NITC
PAGE
Response
0-254
ALL
Comment
Default = B
Incoming DID Digit Conversion number
Existing complete or partial IDC number
All Names defined
Pack/Rel
dnis-17
(ROM)
KAT
ALL
<CR>
5-(17)-27 Maximum allowable CPND character string
Length
Once an MXLN is entered, it cannot be changed to a lower value via the CHG prompt.
cpnd-10 a...a
<CR> xxxx
Language choice for name for CPND screen and set display. Allowed only if REQ = OUT.
English display (Roman characters)
Non-English display (Katakana characters)
Remove ALL names from CPND data block for the DN or DIG selected.
Roman (English) display cpnd-16
CPND Name using ASCII characters If STAL
= YES, then Name size < XPLN If STAL =
NO, then Name size = number of characters entered. DIG is reprompted to DN prompt
Group Name corresponding to a CLID data block cpnd-19 basic-5.00
(NI) aaaa Non intercom call
NITC indicates that an intercom call terminated as a normal call.
(NO)
YES
Page headers and numbers not printed if the
Multiple DN/DIG is specified.
Page headers and numbers printed if the
Multiple DN/DIG is specified.
Page headers (date and page number) are not printed if a single DN/DIG is specified.
cpnd-10 xxxx
END
NEW
Call Pickup display mnemonic. Default = P.
cpnd-10
Request.
Change existing data block
Exit Overlay program cpnd-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1025
LD 95: Call Party Name Display
Prompt
RESN
SHRT
STAL
TYPE
XFER
XPLN
Response
OUT
PRT
Comment
Create CPND data blocks and/or name strings
Remove existing name or data block
Print an existing Name or data block from the data base
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES Display of Reason for redirecting calls allowed
(NO)
YES
Prints one DN or IDC per single line. (long form)
Prints several DNs or IDCs on a single line.
(one-line form)
Prompted when DN = ALL, Range or Partial
DN to be specified.
cpnd-19 cpnd-10
(NO) YES Static Allocation of Name storage
In a Hotel/Motel environment with
Background Terminal facilities, STAL must be YES.
STAL = YES is recommended whenever
CPND Names change frequently, for efficient use of available memory (example, when a guest checks in).
cpnd-10
CPND
NAME
Type of data block
CPND data block
CPND Name data block
Allowed only if CPND data block is already defined.
cpnd-10 xxxx xx
Call Transfer display mnemonic
Mnemonic for call transfer display in Network
Call Redirection (NCRD). One to four characters are accepted.
Default = T. Prompted if ISDN = YES in LD
15 ncrd-16
Expected Length
Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN, or it default to DFLN.
This value should be set to a sufficient length to allow for current and future names to be entered.
When REQ = NEW, the XPLN prompt defines the maximum name length for that particular entry. The XPLN for a DN cannot cpnd-10
1026 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response
<CR>
Comment
be changed without deleting that name entry.
This sets the XPLN to the input length, or
DFLN whichever is greater. Re-prompts
DIG.
Prompted when STAL = YES
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1027
LD 95: Call Party Name Display
1028 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 50: LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Overlay program 97 is used to specify several system parameters for XPE and other related equipment.
These parameters include the minimum flash timing to download to the XPE packs when required.
Loss and Level Plan information may also be specified. Refer to Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182 for information regarding Loss and Level Plans prior to making any changes to the parameters defined in this Overlay.
Prompts and responses
Contents
Section
Prompts and responses by data block:
DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block
on page 1030
DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block on page 1031
FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets
on page 1031
FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block
on page 1033
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block on page 1033
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED) on page 1034
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)
on page 1034
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)
on page 1034
SUPL: Superloop parameters data block
on page 1035
SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card on page 1036
SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment
on page 1037
XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block on page 1038
XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block
on page 1038
Other Information:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1029
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Section
Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves on page 1039
BTD: Busy Tone Detection data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
BTDT
BCAD
BTDD
FREQ_0
Response
aaa
BTD
(0)-7 x...x x...x
a...a
350 - 655
FREQ_1
FDLT
350 - 655
10 - 315
FLVL_MAX 0 - 15
FLVL_MIN 20 - 35
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)
Type = BTD (Busy Tone Detection)
Busy Tone Detection Table
Busy Tone Cadence (ON and OFF cycles)
Busy Tone Detection Direction (a...a = (BOTH) or INC)
Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 0
Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 1
Frequency delta
Maximum Frequency Tone level to be detected.
Minimum Frequency Tone level to be detected.
DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block
For all DTD parameters, if a value is entered between two valid responses, the lowest valid response is stored for downloading to the XTD card. The stored value is also echoed to the craftsperson.
The type for the DTMF parameters is DTR.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
XTDT
DFQ
MDL
MVT
BRK
CAD
Response
aaa
DTD
(0)-7
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)
Type = DTD (Dial Tone Detection)
Extended Tone Detection Table
0-(4)-15
10-(20)-40
Dial Tone Frequency band for 1st dial tone
Minimum Detect Level for 1st Dial Tone
100-(400)-1600 Minimum Validation Time for 1st Dial Tone
(0)-240 Break Duration (maximum) for 1st Dial Tone
(0)-15 Cadence type for 1st Dial Tone
1030 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
SSC
Response
(0)-15
Comment
Second Stage Configuration
DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block
For all DTR parameters, if a value is entered between two valid responses, the lowest valid response is stored for downloading to the XTD/DTR card. The stored value is also echoed to the craftsperson.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
MINL
Response
aaa
DTR
3-(42)-48
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)
Type = DTR (Digitone Receiver)
Minimum accept Level for Digitone receiver
FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
FDTP t
Response
CHG PRT
FDL
FDTM
- FDAY
(NO)
YES d n
Comment
Change or Print
Flash Download for M3900 sets.
M3900 set selected for download.
Where t = (NONE) No M3900 flash download 3902 - M3902 sets 3903 - M3903 sets 3904 - M3904 sets 3905 - M3905 sets ALL - all M3900 sets
Time interval restriction for Flash Download.
No change to time intervals
Change time intervals
Note:
Flash download is automatically paused one hour before virtual midnight (refer to TODR in Ovl 17) to allow midnight routines to run. This option is not applicable to reporting.
Day and number of time intervals for download. Prompted only if FDTM = YES.
d = (0-6) Day of week, Sunday to Saturday n = (0-4)
Number of time intervals where 0 = no download for that day.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1031
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
-- FINT
FTNR
- FSTN
- FETN
FDNR
- FDDN
FRCE
Response Comment
s l
Note:
If two or more intervals are specified, they must be non overlapping, non consecutive and in increasing order.
Day is re-prompted until <CR> is entered.
Starting hour and length for a time interval. Prompted n times if n>0.
Where: s = (0-23) Starting hour using 24 hour format l = (1-24)
Length of interval in hours
TN range restriction option for Flash Download.
NO YES <CR> No TN restriction Specify TN range No change to TN range restrictions l s c u c u l s c u c u
NO YES <CR> DN range or list restriction option for Flash Download. No
DN or list restriction Specify DN range No change to DN range restrictions
Flash Download Prime Directory Number range. Prompted only if FDNR = YES c d1 d2
Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompted only if FTNR = YES
TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit TN format: c u = card, unit
Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompted only if FTNR = YES
TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit TN format: c u = card, unit
Where: c = Customer number d1 = starting prime DN d2 = ending prime DN
System-wide flash download control option.
(NO)
YES
Conditional. System-wide flash download (via FDLS in
OVL 32) applies to only a M3900 set whose flash firmware version is different from version currently found on the system disk.
Forced. Force system-wide flash download to all the specified M3900 sets regardless of their current flash firmware versions.
Note:
Use this option with caution! Once the download tree is built (after FDLS in OVL 32) this option is automatically reverted to NO (conditional). Not applicable to reporting.
1032 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
FVER
Response
(0)-99
Comment
Flash firmware version specified for full report.
Where:
(0) = Report all Flash firmware version 1-99 = Selected
Flash firmware version
FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
SUPL
Response
CHG PRT
FIRP x...x
NNDC
XSMN
5-(7)-8
(0)-63
Comment
Change or Print
Fiber Remote Parameters
Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on
Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))
No-New-Data -Calls condition Threshold
XSM address on the remote shelf
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block
Loss and Level Plan information may also be specified. Refer to Transmission Parameters,
553-3001-182 for information regarding Loss and Level Plans prior to making any changes to the parameters defined in this Overlay.
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
NATP
TTYP
- STYP
- DTYP
Response
aaa
LOSP
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)
North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT
Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)
Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or
DISL)
Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =
(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1033
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
NATP
TTYP
- STYP
Response
aaa
LOSP
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa
- DTYP aaaa
- - TNUM xx
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Loss Plan Tables
North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT
Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)
Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or
DISL)
Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =
(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)
Table Number
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
NATP
TTYP
- STYP
Response
aaa
LOSP
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa
- DTYP aaaa
PWD2 xxxx
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)
North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT
Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)
Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or
DISL)
Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =
(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)
Password 2
LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
LOSP
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)
1034 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
NATP
TTYP
- STYP
Response
(NO) YES aaaa aaaa
- DTYP
- T2WV
- T4WT
- T4WN
- T4WV
- PAGT
- RANR
- ALUS
- ALUL
PWD2
- COTS
- COTL
- DIDS
- DIDL
- T2WT
- T2WN aaaa xxxx
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
8-39 0-31
0-31
8-39
0-31 8-39
0-31 8-39
Comment
North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT
Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)
Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or
DISL)
Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =
(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)
Password 2
Central Office Trunk Short line Class of Service
Central Office Trunk Long line Class of Service
Direct Inward Dial trunk Short line Class of Service
Direct Inward Dial Trunk Long line Class of Service
TIE trunk 2-Wire TRC Class of Service
TIE trunk 2-Wire NTC Class of Service
TIE trunk 2-Wire VNL Class of Service
TIE trunk 4-Wire TRC Class of Service
TIE trunk 4-Wire NTC Class of Service
TIE trunk 4-Wire VNL Class of Service
Paging Trunk
Recorded Announcement trunk
Analog Line card Unit Short line Class of Service
Analog Line card Unit Long line Class of Service
SUPL: Superloop parameters data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
SUPL
SLOT
SUPT
Response
aaa
SUPL x...x
a aaaa
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Type = SUPL (Superloop)
Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on
Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))
Network Card is in Left or Right Slot (x = (L) or R)
Superloop type (aaaa = (STD), CARR, FIBR, MSC or
IPMG)
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1035
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
XPE0
XPE1
XPEC
Response
x y z x y z
1-95
Comment
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 0 (STD)
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 1 (STD)
Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (CARR or
FIBR)
- CE
- E1
- E
- CT
IPR0 nn.nn.nn.nn
IPMG_TYP0 aaa
ZONE0
DES0
0–255 0–8000
Shelf 0 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.
IPMG Type = (MGC), MGX or MGS
Shelf 0 IPMG cabinet zone number
No input. Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for MGC based IPMGs.
(CE) / d ..... d
(E1) / d ..... d
(E) / d ..... d
(CT) / d ..... d
Shelf 0 IPMG CE Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 0 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 0 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 0 IPMG CT Ethernet Port Designator.
- CE
- E1
- E
- CT
- T2
- T
- T2
- T
(T2) / d ..... d
(T) / d ..... d
IPR1 nn.nn.nn.nn
IPMG_TYP1 aaa
ZONE1
DES1
Shelf 0 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 0 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.
IPMG Type = (MGC) MGX, or MGS
0–255 0–8000 Shelf 1 IPMG cabinet zone number
No input. Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for MGC based IPMGs.
(CE) / d ..... d
(E1) / d ..... d
(E) / d ..... d
(CT) / d ..... d
(T2) / d ..... d
(T) / d ..... d
Shelf 1IPMG CE Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG CT Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port Designator.
Shelf 1 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.
SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
SYSM
Comment
Req = CHG or PRT
Type = SYSM (System parameters for MSDL/MISP cards)
1036 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompts and responses
Prompt
FDLC
Response
p1 p2 p3 p4
Comment
Fast Download Control parameters
SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment
INTN
CODE
CONT
CRCF
FLSH
TOHV
TDP
TID
REQ
TPF
Prompt
TYPE
TDPO
MFRL
MFLT0
MFLT1
P10R
P12R
P20R
INSO
- DEFS
Response
aaa
SYSP
(NO) YES
(0)-3
1-(4)-32767
1-(4)-32767
(120)-168
0-(250)-1275
(15)-1275
0-(150)-1275
- - DEF 2216 xx yy
- - DEF 2616 xx yy
Comment
Req = CHG or PRT
Type = SYSP (System parameters for Peripheral equipment)
International companding law
Quiet Code is used by Network Card firmware
Continuity
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Failures
Flash timing
Timer - Off-Hook Validation
Timer - Dial Pulse
Timer - InterDigit
15-(150)-1275 Timer - Dial Pulse On
0-(200)-1275 Timer - Post Flash
0-(2)-3
(0)-15
Multifrequency minimum Receiver Level
Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier 0 for
Small System and MG 1000E
(0)-15
(50)-70
(50)-70
(50)-70
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
- - DEF 2006 xx yy
- - DEF 2008 xx yy
Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier 1 for
Small System and MG 1000E
Primary Pulse 10 Ratio
Secondary Pulse 10 Ratio
Pulse 20 Ratio
Installation Options
Default sets
New default Model number, 2006 set
New default Model number, 2008 set
New default Model number, 2216 set
New default Model number, 2616 set
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1037
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
- - DEF 2000 xx yy
Response
- - DEF 500 xx yy
- - DEF 2500 xx yy
- - DEF I2002 xx yy
- - DEF I2004 xx yy
- - DEF I2050 xx yy
FNUM(wwww) zzzz
Comment
New default Model number, 2000 set
New default Model number, 500 set
New default Model number, 2500 set
Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP Phone
2002 set (where: xx is old default)
Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP Phone
2004 set (where: xx is old default)
Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP SoftPhone
2050 set (where: xx is old default)
First DN in the default numbering plan (wwww is the current value)
XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
Response
aaa
XCTP
CPAD
DTMF
CFWT
INTU
P10P
S10P
20PP x
0-(14)-255
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
0-(30)-255
0-(31)-255
0-(32)-255
Comment
Request (CHG, END, PRT)
Type = XCTP (Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters)
Conference PAD (x = (0) or 1)
Dual Tone Multifrequency
Conference Warning Tone to be provided
Intrusion tone
Primary 10 Pulses per second
Secondary 10 Pulses per second
20 Pulses Per second
XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
XPEC
Response
aaa
XPE
(0)-95
Comment
Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)
Type = XPE (Extended Peripheral Equipment shelves)
Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller
1038 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Prompt
LOC
MED
RGTP
Response
1-99 xxxxxx
(COP) x
Comment
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Location code for Peripheral Controller
Connection Media to Peripheral Controller
Ringing Generator Type (x = (8) or 16)
Alphabetical list of prompts
Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
SUPL
Response
PRT aaaa x...x
XPEC 1-95
0-252
Comment
Req = PRT
Type = SUPL or XPE
Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on
Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
20PP
ACDN
AGNT
ALUL
Response Comment
0-(32)-255 20 Pulses Per second
Tone table index for primary 20 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 32 for North
American tones.
Tone tables are defined in LD 56.
Pack/Rel
xct-15
0-100
0-32767
0-1000
0-32767
Maximum number of ACD Directory Numbers
Maximum number of ACD Directory Numbers
Maximum number of ACD Agents
Maximum number of ACD Agents xpe-16 xpe-16
0-31 8-39 Analog Line card Unit Long line Class of
Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the 1st field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the 2nd field is the Transmit (D/A) entry. Prompted if
TTYP = STAT xpe-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1039
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
ALUS
AST
BCAD
BRK
Response Comment Pack/Rel
0-31 8-39 Analog Line card Unit Short line Class of
Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the 1st field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the 2nd field is the Transmit (D/A) entry. Prompted if
TTYP = STAT.
xpe-18 x...x
Maximum number of Associated Sets, where x...x is:
• 0-100 for Large Systems
• 0-32767 for Small Systems csl-16
Busy Tone Cadence
Determines the on phase length and the off phase length during the cycle.
0000-(350)-1500 0000-(350)-1500
PH1 (ON cycle) and PH2 (OFF cycle)
0000-(500)-1500 0000-(500)-1500
PH1 (ON cycle) and PH2 (OFF cycle) for
Japan (when Japan package 97 is enabled)
The values for each phase can be from 0 to 1.5
seconds (1500 ms) and are entered as milliseconds. The input values are rounded to the nearest multiple of 25 ms.
Entering all 0's indicates continuous tone.
(Continuous tones lasts for 3.2 seconds or longer) The smallest cadence is 50 ms even though 25 ms can be entered. The stored values is echoed.
xpe-16
(0)-240 Break Duration (maximum) for 1st Dial Tone.
Input is a multiple of 16 ms:
• 0 = 0 ms
• 16 = 16 ms
• 32 = 32 ms
• ...
• 240 = 240 ms
Input that is not a multiple of 16 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 16. Recommended country specific BRK values follow: xpe-16
1040 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
BTDD
BTDT
CAD
Response
(BOTH)
INC
(0) - 7
(0)-15
Comment
• Country BRK
• Denmark 000 ms
• France 030 ms
• Germany 000 ms
• Holland TBD
• New Zealand TBD
• Norway 000 ms
• Spain 000 ms
• Sweden 000 ms
• Switzerland 000 ms
• U.K. 33/50 000 ms
• U.K. 330/440 000 ms
Pack/Rel
Busy Tone Detection on both incoming and outgoing calls
Busy Tone Detection on incoming calls only xpe-16
Busy Tone Detection Table
Table 0 can be changed but cannot be removed. Table 0 always exists (when the BTD package is equipped) and is initialized to default values for China and Japan.
When creating alternate tables, table 0's values are used to fill the table and these can be changed.
If table 0 does not exist, the Japanese BCAD defaults (500 500) are used when creating it.
Enter X in front of the table number to remove the table.
btd-21
Cadence type for 1st Dial Tone. Where:
• 0 = no cadence or continuous tone
• 1 = Italian complex cadence
• 2-15 reserved for future use
Recommended country specific CAD values follow:
• Country CAD
• Denmark 00 xpe-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1041
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
CE
Prompt
CFWT
CODE
CONT
COTL
COTS
CPAD
Response Comment
• France 00
• Germany 00
• Holland 00
• New Zealand 00
• Norway 00
• Spain 00
• Sweden 00
• Switzerland 00
• U.K. 33/50 00
• U.K. 330/440 00
Pack/Rel
d ..... d
<CR>
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG CE Ethernet Port
Designator.
1-16 alphanumeric characters.
Default value
Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.
basic-5.00
(NO)
YES
(0)
1-(4)-32767
Conference Warning Tone is not provided
Conference Warning Tone is provided basic-21
Quiet Code is used by Network Card firmware
0 is the only valid entry. Entries 1-3 are for future use.
xpe-15 xpe-15
Continuity. Maintenance threshold for number of continuity faults per timeslot.
8-39 0-31 Central Office Trunk Long line Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 Central Office Trunk Short line Class of
Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
(0)
Conference PAD
Use software PAD values xct-15
1042 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
CT
Prompt
CRCF
1
Response Comment
Use PAD values defined by switch settings on card (NT8D17). The CNFC command in LD 38 do not do the attenuation testing when CPAD
= 1.
1-(4)-32767
Pack/Rel
xpe-15 d ..... d
<CR>
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Failures
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG CT Ethernet Port
Designator.
1-16 alphanumeric characters.
Default value of ‘CT'.
Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.
basic-5.00
DEF 500 xx yy
DEF 2000 xx
DEF 2006 xx yy yy
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 500 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2000 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2006 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
DEF 2008 xx yy
DEF 2216 xx
DEF 2500 xx
DEF 2616 xx yy yy yy
DEF I2002 xx yy
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2008 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2216 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2500 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2616 set
(where: xx is old default) xpe-16
Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP
Phone 2002 set (where: xx is old default)
For CS 1000S basic-2
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1043
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt Response
DEF I2004 xx yy
Comment
Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP
Phone 2004 set (where: xx is old default)
For CS 1000S
DEF I2050 xx yy Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP
SoftPhone 2050 set (where: xx is old default)
For CS 1000S
Pack/Rel
basic-2 basic-2
DEFS
DES0 / 1
DFQ
(NO) YES Default Sets
Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for
MGC based IPMGs.
0-(4)-15 xpe-16 basic-5.00
Dial Tone Frequency band for 1st dial tone.
Input is frequency band as described below:
• 0 = 300-500 Hz
• 1 = 350-500 Hz
• 2 = 320-630 Hz
• 3 = 0-500 Hz
• 4 = 355-550 Hz
• 5-15 = reserved for future use
With UK package (190) default value for DFQ
= 0. Recommended country specific DFQ values follow:
• Country DFQ
• Denmark 1
• France 0
• Germany 1
• Holland TBD
• New Zealand 1
• Norway 1
• Spain 2
• Sweden 11
• Switzerland 4
• U.K. 33/50 3
• U.K. 330/440 0 xpe-16
1044 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
DIDL
DIDS
DSL
DTMF
DTYP
E
Response Comment
8-39 0-31 Direct Inward Dial (or Direct Outward Dial
[DOD]) trunk Long line Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
Pack/Rel
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 Direct Inward Dial (or Direct Outward Dial
[DOD]) trunk Short line Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
0-32767 Maximum number of Digital Subscriber Loops xpe-18
0-(14)-255 Dual Tone Multifrequency (Tone table index of the first DTMF digit to be used). Use 14 for
North American tones.
For MU LAW, the DTMF groups start at tone numbers 14 and 35.
For ALAW, the DTMF groups start at tone numbers 1, 89, 113, 138, 191, 218 and 234.
xct-15
(PRED)
CSTM
DISL
Predefined Dynamic Loss Switching Table
Customized Dynamic Loss Switching Table
(user is prompted to input required PORT
TYPE LI LO values)
Disable current active table (Disables Dynamic
Loss Switching)
If the DTYP was previously DISL then entering a Predefined Table number or Customized
Table ENABLEs the Dynamic Loss Switching feature.
Only 1 Dynamic Loss Switching table, either predefined or customized, exists within the system. When Dynamic Loss Plan Switch is
ENABLED then the Static Loss Plan Table is used as the "base level" table of values.
If an entry is customized, other entries in this table and in the Base Table (TTYP = STAT) should be re-examined in case possible adjustment is necessary. Dynamic Pad
Switching continues for non-B34 cards (EPE,
XUT, XEM).
xpe-18 d ..... d
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.
basic-5.00
1-16 alphanumeric characters.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1045
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
E1
Prompt
FDAY
FDDN
FDLC
Response
<CR>
Comment
Default value
Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.
d ..... d
<CR>
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port
Designator.
1-16 alphanumeric characters .
Default value
Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.
d n c d1 d2
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
Day and number of time intervals for download. Prompted only if FDTM = YES.
d = (0-6) Day of week, Sunday to Saturday n
= (0-4) Number of time intervals where 0 = no download for that day.
arie-25
Note:
If two or more intervals are specified, they must be non overlapping, non consecutive and in increasing order. Day is re-prompted until <CR> is entered.
Flash Download Prime Directory Number range. Prompted only if FDNR = YES Where: arie-25
• c = Customer number
• d1 = starting prime DN
• d2 = ending prime DN p1 p2 p3 p4 Fast Download Control parameters. Where p1 can be: xpe/msdl-15
1. (ALL) = All cards listed below
2. AML = Applications Module Link
3. BRIE = BRI Trunk Universal ISDN
Protocol Engine
4. BRIL = BRI Line cards
5. BRIT = Basic Rate Interface Trunk
6. DCH = D-channel cards
7. FNET = Fiber Network Card
(NT1P61)
8. FPEC = Fiber Peripheral Equipment
Controller card (NT1P62)
9. LCRI = Carrier Remote IPE
1046 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
FDLT
Response Comment
10. MISP = Multipurpose ISDN Signaling
Link cards
11. MSDL = Multipurpose Serial Data
Link cards
12. PRIE = Primary Rate Interface
Universal ISDN Protocol Engine
13. SDI = Serial Data Interface cards
14. XNET = Network cards
15. XPEC = Controller cards (includes
Carrier Remote IPE RCI)
16. XXXX = Data file for specific ISDN interface type (e.g. DQSG data file for
QSIG; DTCZ data file for TCNZ)
Where p2 can be:
1. (C) = Conditional download (only if there is a major fault in the firmware or after a power failure). "C" is the recommended setting.
2. F = Force download after initialization. Entering "F" applies to the first INIT following the entry only.
After the INIT, the system reverts to C
(conditional).
Where p3 can be:
1. (C) = Current version
2. L = Latest version
3. S = Specified version
Where p4 is : xx (version number, if p3 = S).
See LD 20-22 to print versions.
10 - 315
Pack/Rel
Frequency delta, gives the tolerance of the tone to be detected in +/- hertz. Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.
For dual Busy Tone Detection on card
(NT5D31), the same maximum and minimum levels applies to both tones.
btd- 23
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1047
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
FDNR
FDTM
FDTP
FETN
FINT
FLSH t
Response
NO
YES
<CR>
Comment
DN range restriction option for Flash
Download.
No DN restriction
Specify DN range
No change to DN range restrictions
(NO)
YES
Pack/Rel
arie-25
Time interval restriction for Flash Download.
arie-25
No change to time intervals
Change time intervals
Note:
Flash download is automatically paused one hour before virtual midnight (refer to
TODR in Ovl 17) to allow midnight routines to run. This option is not applicable to reporting.
M3900 set selected for download. Where t = arie-25
• (NONE) No M3900 flash download
• 3902 - M3902 sets
• 3903 - M3903 sets
• 3904 - M3904 sets
• 3905 - M3905 sets
• ALL - all M3900 sets
Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download.
Prompted only if FTNR = YES
General TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
Small System TN format: c u = card, unit arie-25 l s c u c u s l Starting hour and length for a time interval.
Prompted n times if n>0.
Where: s = (0-23) Starting hour using 24 hour format l
= (1-24) Length of interval in hours arie-25 xpe-15 (120)-768 Switchhook Flash timing
(SUPP package 131 not equipped).
Establishes Switchhook Flash time in milliseconds for 500/2500 sets (NT8D IPE only) xxx yyyy Switchhook Flash timing
1048 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment
(SUPP package 131 equipped)
Establishes minimum and maximum
Switchhook Flash timer in milliseconds for
500/2500 sets (NT8D IPE only), where:
• xxx = 20-(45)-768
• yyyy = xxx value-(896)-1275
The timing specified is used for extended peripheral equipment only. Non-extended peripheral equipment uses the FLSH specified in LD 15.
FLVL_MAX 0 - 15
FLVL_MIN 20 - 35
Pack/Rel
Maximum Frequency Tone level to be detected.
Valid entries is in multiples of 5dBm.
For dual Busy Tone Detection on card
(NT5D31), the same level applies to both tones.
btd- 23
Minimum Frequency Tone level to be detected..
Valid entries is in multiples of 5dBm
For dual Busy Tone Detection card (NT5D31), the same level applies to both tones.
btd- 23
FNUM (wwww) zzzz
FRCE
(NO)
YES
First DN in the default numbering plan (wwww is current value) xpe-16
System-wide flash download control option.
arie-25
Conditional. System-wide flash download (via
FDLS in OVL 32) applies only to a M3900 set whose flash firmware version is different from version currently found on the system disk.
Forced. Force system-wide flash download to all the specified M3900 sets regardless of their current flash firmware versions.
Note:
Use this option with caution! Once the download tree is built (after FDLS in OVL
32) this option is automatically reverted to
NO (conditional). Not applicable to reporting.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1049
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
FREQ_0
FREQ_1
FSTN
FTNR
FVER
Response Comment
350 - 655 Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 0 of a dual Busy Tone Detection to be detected in Hz.
Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.
Pack/Rel
btd- 23
350 - 655 Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 1 of a dual Busy Tone Detection to be detected in Hz.
Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.
For a single busy tone FREQ_1 must be set the same as FREQ_0.
btd- 23 l s c u c u
NO
YES
<CR>
(0)-99
Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download.
Prompted only if FTNR = YES arie-25
General TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit
Small System TN format: c u = card, unit
TN range restriction option for Flash
Download.
No TN restriction
Specify TN range
No change to TN range restrictions arie-25
Flash firmware version specified for full report.
Where: arie-25
• (0) = Report all Flash firmware version
• 1-99 = Selected Flash firmware version
INSO
INTN
(NO)
YES
(NO)
YES
Installation Options
Do not modify installation options
Change installation options
?- International companding Law
A- International companding Law xpe-16 xpe-15
INTU
IPMG_TYP0
(NO) YES Intrusion tone (insert Intrusion tone in conferences) aaa xpe-16
Note:
To invoke any changes, the Small System must be initialized.
IPMG Type, Where:
(MGC) = Media Gateway Controller
MGX = MGXPEC
MGS = CPMG basic-5.00
basic-6.00
basic-7.00
1050 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
LOC
IPMG_TYP1
IPR0 / 1 aaa nn.nn.nn.nn
Note:
Existing superloops cannot be changed to or from the MGX IPMG type. They must be removed and then re-configured on the system.
IPMG Type, Where:
(MGC) = Media Gateway Controller
MGX = MGXPEC
MGS = CPMG basic-5.00
basic-6.00
basic-7.00
Note:
Existing superloops cannot be changed to or from the MGX IPMG type. They must be removed and then re-configured on the system.
basic-5.00
<CR>
X
Shelf 0 or 1 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.
Skip to IPR0/1 when configuring new superloop
Remove IPR0/1, ZONE0/1, and VXCT0/1 data
ISM (NO) YES License
ISM and all of its subprompts (prompts TNS through KEY3) are not prompted for Option
11C. To change the system License parameters on an Option 11C, the installation program must be used.
xpe-16
(xxxxxxxx)
(xxxxxxxx)
(xxxxxxxx) xxxxxx
8 digit security key 1 provided by NT
8 digit security key 2 provided by NT
8 digit security key 3 provided by NT
Location code for Peripheral Controller (0-6 characters)
Should be equal to the column number assigned to the System Monitor and the
Universal Equipment Module (UEM) that contains the Controller.
For example: CxxMy
Where: xpe-16 xpe-16 xpe-16 xpe-15
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1051
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
LTID
MDL
MED
MFLT0
Response
(0)-15
Pack/Rel
0-32767 Maximum number of Logical Terminal IDs xpe-18
10-(20)-40 Minimum Detect Level for 1st Dial Tone. Input is absolute value of the minimum detect level.
Input is a multiple of 2 dBm: xpe-16
• 10 = -10 dBm
• 12 = -12 dBm
• 14 = -14 dBm
• ...
• 40 = -40 dBm
Odd input is rounded down. With UK package
(190) default value for MDL = 30 (-30 dBm).
Recommended country specific MDL values follow:
• Country MDL
• Denmark -26 dBm
• France -24 dBm
• Germany -22 dBm
• Holland -26 dBm
• New Zealand TBD
• Norway -30 dBm
• Spain -32 dBm
• Sweden -28 dBm
• Switzerland -30 dBm
• U.K. 33/50 -30 dBm
• U.K. 330/440 -30 dBm
(COP)
Comment
• xx = column number
• y = UEM number
Connection Media to Peripheral Controller
(copper cabling) xpe-17
Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier
0 for Small System and MG 1000E. The code and level values listed below apply to MFLT0 and MFLT1.
basic-22 basic-4.0
1052 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
MFLT1
MFRL
MINL
Response Comment
• Codes Level Values
• 1 -11 dBmO
• 2 -12 dBm0
• 3 -13 dBm0
• 4 -14 dBm0
• 5 -15 dBm0
• 6 -16 dBm0
• 7 -31 dBm0
• 8 -4 dBm0
• 9 -5 dBm0
• 10 -6 dBm0
MF transmit level changes take effect on Card
0 only if the command ENLX 0 is entered in LD
34. For XMFC packs, MF transmit level changes take effect immediately.
(0)-15
0-(2)-3
Pack/Rel
Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier
1 for Small System and MG 1000E.
Refer to the MFLT0 prompt for a listing of codes and level values for MFLT1.
basic-22 basic-4.0
xpe-16 Multifrequency minimum Receiver Level for
XMFC/ XMFE (NT5K21) for only Meridian 1
(superloop)
• Codes Level Values
• 0 -28 dBm0
• 1 -32 dBm0
• 2 -36 dBm0
• 3 -40 dBm0
3-(42)-48 Minimum accept Level for Digitone receivers.
Input is a multiple of 3 dBm: xpe-16
• 3 = -3 dBm
• 6 = -6 dBm
• 9 = -9 dBm
• ...
• 48 = -48 dBm
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1053
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
MOPT
MVT
Response Comment
Input that is not a multiple of 3 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 3. With UK package (190) default value for MINL = 45 (-45 dBm).
Recommended country specific MINL values follow:
• Country MINL
• Denmark -45 dBm
• France -30 dBm
• Germany -30 dBm
• Holland -30 dBm
• New Zealand -45 dBm
• Norway -45dBm
• Spain -30 dBm
• Sweden -28 dBm
• Switzerland -30 dBm
• U.K. 33/50 -45 dBm
• U.K. 330/440 -45 dBm
Pack/Rel
0-11 Meridian Mail Option
100-(400)-1600
Minimum Validation Time for 1st Dial Tone
Input is a multiple of 100 ms:
• 100 = 100 ms
• 200 = 200 ms
• 300 = 300 ms
• ...
• 1600 = 1600 ms (1.6 sec)
Input that is not a multiple of 100 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 100. With UK package (190) default value for MVT = 300.
Recommended country specific MVT values follow:
• Country MVT
• Denmark 1200 ms
• France 1000 ms xpe-16 xpe-16
1054 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
NATP
NNDC
P10P
P10R
P12R
Response Comment
• Germany 0900 ms
• Holland 1200 ms
• New Zealand TBD
• Norway 1000 ms
• Spain 1000 ms
• Sweden 0300 ms
• Switzerland 0400 ms
• U.K. 33/50 0300 ms
• U.K. 330/440 0300 ms
Pack/Rel
(NO) YES North American Transmission Plan for generic
XFCOT xpe-18
5-(7)-8 No-New-Data-Calls condition Threshold
NNDC defines the bit error rate (BER) for
Signal Degrade, calculated by the loadware.
The actual range is 10-5 to 10-8. The value entered here is the absolute value to the power of 10 (logarithmic scale).
rem_ipe-22
0-(30)-255 Primary 10 Pulses per second
Tone table index for primary 10 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 30 for North
American tones.
(50)-70 xct-15
Primary Pulse 10 Ratio (make-break ratio for
10 PPS dial pulse dialing)
Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 30 ms and off for 70 ms producing the 100 ms cycle for one pulse.
To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P10 in LD 14. For either
XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or
Option 11C DTI2 trunks.
xpe-16
(50)-70 Secondary Pulse 10 Ratio (make-break ratio for 10 PPS dial pulse dialing)
Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 30 ms and off for 70 ms producing the 100 ms cycle for one pulse.
To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P12 in LD 14. For either xpe-16
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1055
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
P20R
PAGT
PWD2
RANR
REQ
RGTP
Response Comment
XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or
Option 11C DTI2 trunks.
(50)-70
0-31
Pack/Rel
Pulse 20 Ratio (make-break ratio for 20 PPS dial pulse dialing)
Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 15 ms and off for 35 ms producing the 50 ms cycle for one pulse.
To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P20 in LD 14. For either
XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or Small
System DTI2 trunks.
xpe-16
Paging Trunk. Enter the coded Transmit (D/A)
Input/Output Relative Level.
xpe-18 xxxx
8-39
CHG
END
PRT
(8) 16
Password 2
Second Level Administration Password as defined in LD 17. This password is required to
"Disable" an active Table or "Create" a customized Table.
PWD2 is prompted if STYP or DTYP = CSTM or DISL, or if the user is not logged in using
Loss Planning Allowed password.
Recorded Announcement trunk
Enter the coded Receive (A/D) Input/Output
.
Relative Level xpe-18
Request
Modify existing data
Exit overlay
Print data block xpe-15
Ringing Generator Type (8 or 16 concurrent ringers; 16 requires NT6D42CA Ringing
Generator). This prompt determines the maximum number of 500/2500 telephones which can be in the active ringing state at the same time.
CAUTION: Do not set RGTP = 16 if you do not have the NT6D42 ringing generator.
Exceeding the ringer capacity may cause intermittent overload alarms on the ringing generator.
xpe-18
1056 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
S10P
SLOT
SSC
STYP
Response Comment
The value is not passed to the Peripheral
Controller card immediately after service change. That information is downloaded when the card is enabled.
Pack/Rel
0-(31)-255 Secondary 10 Pulses per second
Tone table index for secondary 10 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 31 for North
American tones. Tone tables are defined in LD
56.
xct-15
(L) R Network Card is in Left or Right slot
Enter L (left) if the Network Card is located in the lower numbered network pair. For example, in superloop 0, enter L if the Network
Card sits in the slot for network loops 0/1, enter
R (right) for 2/3.
xpe-15
(0)-15 Second Stage Configuration. Where:
• 0 = Second Stage Dial Tone Detection and uses same parameters as defined for first stage.
• 1-15 = Reserved for future use.
Recommended country specific SCC values follow:
• Country SSC
• Denmark 0
• France 0
• Germany 0
• Holland 0
• New Zealand 0
• Norway 0
• Spain 0
• Sweden 0
• Switzerland 0
• U.K. 33/50 0
• U.K. 330/440 0 xpe-16
(PRED) Predefined Static Loss Plan table xpe-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1057
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
SUPL
Response
CSTM
DISL
Comment
Customized Static Loss Plan table (user is prompted to input required PORT TYPE LI LO values)
Disable current active table (disables Static
Loss Plan downloading)
Only 1 Static Loss Plan table, either predefined or customized, exists within the system.
When Dynamic Loss Switching is ENABLED then the Static Loss Plan Table is used as the
"B34 DYNAMIC LOSS SWITCHING BASE
TABLE" of values.
If an entry is customized, other entries in this table and in the Alternative Table (TTYP =
DYNM) should be re-examined in case possible adjustment is necessary.
Dynamic Pad Switching continues for non-B34 cards (EPE, XUT, XEM).
0-156
Pack/Rel
Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...)
Superloop in multiples of 4, where:
• 0-15 = physical range of loops for Opt 51C
• 0-31 = physical range of loops for Opt 61C
• 0-159 = physical range of loops for Opt 81C
• 0-72 = physical range of loops for Small
Systems xpe-20
0-252
0-252
Note:
Loops 0-72 translates to cards 0-50 for TN mapping
Superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with
Fibre Network Fabric, where:
0-255 = physical range of loops for Opt 81C with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E basic-4.00
N0-N156
Note:
A superloop cannot have both phantom and virtual sets on it and therefore must be configured as either phantom or virtual.
Preceed with "N" to designate phantom and
"V" to designate virtual.
Phantom superloop in multiples of 4
1058 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
T
Prompt
SUPT
Response
N0-N252
N0-N252
N96-N112
Comment
Phantom superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with Fiber Network Fabric
Pack/Rel
Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E
Phantom superloop in multiples of 4 for Small
Systems basic-4.00
Note:
Loops 96-112 translates to cards 61-99 for phantom TN mapping on Small Systems.
V0- V156 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for Large
Systems without Network Capacity Expansion package.
V0- V252 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with Fibre Network Fabric basic-25
V0-V252 Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E
V96- V112 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for Small
Systems and CS 1000S basic-4.00
basic-2.0
Note:
Loops 96-112 translates to cards 61-99 for virtual TN mapping on Small Systems.
(STD)
CARR
FIBR
IPMG d ..... d
<CR>
Note:
Nortel recommends programming Phantom and Virtual loops from the highest loop number backward to prevent moving phantom and virtual units if the system can be expanded in the future.
Standard Superloop type (normal copper cable connecting an XNET to XPEC)
Carrier Link Superloop type: this connects an
Local Carrier Interface (LCI) to a Remote
Carrier Interface (RCI) rem_ipe-21
Fiber Link [connects a Fiber Network NT1P61
Card (FNET) to a Fiber IPE Controller Card
NT1P62 (FPEC)]
MG 1000E superloop ipmg-4.0
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.
basic-5.00
1-16 alphanumeric characters.
default value
Applicable only to MGC based IPMGs.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1059
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
T2
Prompt
T2WN
T2WT
T2WV
T4WN
T4WT
T4WV
TDP
Response
d ..... d
<CR>
Comment
Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port
Designator.
1-16 alphanumeric characters.
default value applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.
Pack/Rel
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire NTC (Non-Transmission
Compensated) Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire TRC (Transmission
Compensated) Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire VNL (Via Network Loss)
Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire NTC (Non-Transmission
Compensated) Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire TRC (Transmission
Compensated) Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire VNL (Via Network Loss)
Class of Service
Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.
xpe-18
(15)-1275 Timer - Dial Pulse
Minimum time for dial pulse for Extended
Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.
Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds. CDP must be greater than Minimum Switchhook
Flash.
xpe-18
1060 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TDPO
TID
TNS
TNUM
Response Comment Pack/Rel
15-(150)-1275
Timer - Dial Pulse On
Maximum time for dial pulse for Extended
Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.
Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds. TDPO must be greater than or equal to TDP.
xpe-18
0-(150)-1275
Timer - InterDigit. Interdigit time for Extended
Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.
Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.
xpe-18
0-1000
0-32767 xx
Maximum number of Terminal Numbers
Maximum number of Terminals xpe-18
Predefined Table Number to be used.
Prompted if PRED is selected. There is no default. Where:
• xx = 1-27 when TTYP = STAT
• xxx = 1-5 when TTYP = DYNM
Following is the list of predefined tables.
A table noted as ETSI Mode of Operation should be used only on systems where all
Peripheral cards are equipped with the B34
Codec.
A table noted as Existing Mode of Operation should be used on systems where all
Peripheral cards are not equipped with the B34
Codec.
xpe-18
For TTYP = STAT, the predefined tables are:
TNUM
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
Country
Austria & Greece
Austria
Belgium
Belgium
Denmark
Denmark
Finland
Mode
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1061
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
27
TNUM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
For TTYP = DYNM the predefined tables are:
TNUM
1
2
3
4
5
Prompt
TOHV
Response
0-(250)-1275
Country
Germany
Italy
Italy
Netherlands
Netherlands
Norway
Norway
Portugal
Greece & Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K.
France
France
New Zealand
Australia
China - hybrid
China - pure
Country
New Zealand
Australia
Italy
China
China
Mode
ETSI/Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI/Existing
ETSI/Existing
ETSI
Existing
ETSI/Existing
ETSI
Existing
Existing
Existing
EPE and IPE
IPE system
Mode
Existing
Existing
Existing
EPE and IPE
IPE system
Comment
Timer - Off-Hook Validation
Off-Hook Validation timer for Extended
Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC)
Pack/Rel
xpe-18
1062 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
TPF
TTYP
TYPE
(STAT)
DYNM
BTD
DTD
DTR
FDL
FIRP
LOSP
SYSM
SYSP
Response
0-(200)-1275
SUPL
XCTP
XPE
Comment
NT5K02. Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.
Timer - Post Flash
Post Flash timer for Extended Flexible
Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.
Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.
Prompted with Multi-Party Operations
(MPO) package 141.
Pack/Rel
xpe-18
B34 Static Loss Plan Table Type to be installed/modified
B34 Dynamic Loss Plan Alternative Level
Table Type to be installed/modified
A B34 Static Loss Plan Table must be installed before B34 Dynamic Loss
Switching can be enabled. Therefore, if
TTYP= DYNM, and the existing STYP =
"DISL", then error message SCH5838 is printed, and TTYP is re-prompted.
xpe-18
Type of data block
When modifying IPE system parameters, the system must initialize for the changes to come into effect. The loop number for the NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card is defined by prompt XCT in LD 17.
Busy Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection parameters
Digitone Receiver parameters
Flash Download for M3900 telephones
Fiber Remote Parameters
Loss Plan Tables
System parameters for MSDL/MISP cards.
System parameters. When modifying the
IPE system parameters, the system must initialize for the changes to come into effect.
Superloop parameters
Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters. The loop number for the
NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card is defined by prompt XCT in LD 17.
Extended Peripheral Equipment shelves xpe/msdl-18
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1063
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
XNPD 28
Response
XPE
XPE0
XPE1
1-95
<CR>
1-99 x y z x y z
Comment
Network loop number for Extended
Network/ Peripheral equipment controller/ Digitone receiver (XNPD) card
The NT8D18 card contains a superloop and 8 Digitone Receivers. The Digitone
Receivers are defined in LD 13.
Pack/Rel
xpe-15
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller
All Extended Peripheral Equipment controllers
The output format for Peripheral
Controller data is:
SO S1 S2 S3 LOC DISRGTP xx yyy yyy yyy yyy zzz YES/NO rr
Where: xpe-15
• xx = Controller number
• yyy = superloop number for each segment
• zzz = location code entered with prompt LOC
• DIS = YES of NO (Peripheral
Controller disabled)
• RGTP = 8 or 16 (Ringing
Generator Type)
Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 0
Peripheral Controller number, starting segment and ending segment
Define the superloop configuration, where:
• x = Controller number (1-95) for superloop's shelf 0
• y = starting shelf segment number (0-3)
• z = ending shelf segment number (0-3)
Enter: X to remove XPE0 or <CR> Return to REQ prompt.
xpe-15
Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 1 Peripheral Controller number, starting segment and ending segment xpe-15
1064 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of prompts
Prompt
XPEC
Response
(0)-95
1-95
Comment
Define the superloop configuration, where:
• x = Controller number (1-95) for superloop's shelf 1
• y = starting shelf segment number
(0-3)
• z = ending shelf segment number
(0-3)
Enter:
• X to remove XPE1
• <CR> Return to REQ prompt.
Pack/Rel
Extended Peripheral Equipment
Controller (assign Peripheral Controller numbers; 0 for automatic)
Block is built with segments of the peripheral shelf (RCI or FXPEC) which are associated with this SUPL (LCI or
FXNET)
Where:
0 = Automatically assign Controller numbers. The system assigns the next available Controller number. 0 cannot be assigned for XPND.
1-95 = Manually assign Controller numbers
Precede with X to remove. Remove all cards/TNs in the Controller shelf first.
XPEC is prompted if SUPT=CARR or
FIBR.
Extended Peripheral Equipment
Controller if SUPT = CARR or FIBR.
If SUPT = CARR, the superloop block is built with all segments (0-3) of the peripheral shelf (RCI) and associated with this SUPL (LCI). This ensures that one LCI is configured to only one RCI, and that all segments on the RCI are associated with the LCI.
If SUPT = FIBR, the superloop block is built with default Fiber remote parameters and all segments (0-3) of the peripheral shelf (FPEC) are associated with this
SUPL (FNET).
xpe-15 rem_ipe-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1065
LD 97: Configuration Record 2
Prompt
XSMN
XTDT
Response
(0)-63
(0)-7
Comment
XSM address on the remote shelf. (0) means not configured. XSMN applies only to Wall-Mounted remotes.
Pack/Rel
rem_ipe-22
Extended Tone Detection Table
XTDT table number in which all the following parameters are stored.
Table 0 can be changed but must not be removed. Table 0 always exists and is initialized to default values. With UK package (190) Table 0 defaults are:
Parameter Value
DFQ 0 MDL - 30 dBm
MVT 300 ms BRK 0 ms CAD 0 SSC 0
Without UK package (190) Table 0 defaults are: Parameter Value
DFQ 4 MDL -20 dBm
MVT 400 ms BRK 0 ms CAD 0 SSC 0 xpe-16
ZONE0 / 1 0-255 0–8000 Shelf 0 or 1 IPMG cabinet zone number
Note:
ZONEs used for IPMG purposes must be configured as SHARED so that other IP devices that are not in the same ZONE can gain access to the
IPMG devices.
basic-5.00
basic-7.00
1066 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 51: LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm
Management
This overlay has a command format that allows the administrator to:
• configure the Alarm Management feature
• identify all system alarms
• configure IP network interface addresses
• perform all IP network related maintenance and diagnostic functions
Both Administration and Maintenance commands appear in this overlay, therefore this overlay is present in both of the CS 1000 software reference NTPs Software Input Output Reference - Administration,
NN43001-611 and Software Input Output Reference - Maintenance, NN43001-711.
Command format
LD 117 uses a command line input interface (input parser) that has the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt):
=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD2 value)... (FIELDx value)]
LD 117 offers the administrator the following configuration features:
• Context Sensitive Help - Help is offered when "?" is entered. The Help context is determined by the position of the "?" entry in the command line. If you enter "?" in the
COMMAND position, Help text appears that presents all applicable command options. If you enter "?" in the OBJECT position, HELP text appears that presents all applicable
OBJECT options.
• Abbreviated Inputs - The new input parser recognizes abbreviated inputs for commands, objects and object fields. For example, "N" can be entered for the command "NEW" or
"R" can be entered for the object "Route".
• Optional Fields - Object fields with default values can be bypassed by the user on the command line. For example, to configure an object which consists of fields with default values, enter the command, enter the object name, press <return>, and the object is configured with default values. All object fields do not have to be specified. For CS 1000S systems both the optional fields <cab> and <port> refer to the MG 1000S number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1067
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
• Selective Change - Instead of searching for a prompt within a lengthy prompt-response sequence, "Selective Change" empowers the administrator to directly access the object field to be changed.
• Service Change Error Message Consistency - The parser simplifies usage of service change error messages. LD 117 displays only SCH0099 and SCH0105.
Alarm Management capability
With the Alarm Management feature, all processor-based system events are processed and logged into a new disk-based System Event List (SEL). Events which are generated as a result of administration activities, such as SCH or ESN error messages, are not logged into the SEL.
Events which are generated as a result of maintenance or system activities, like BUG and ERR error messages, are logged into the SEL. Unlike the previous System History File, this new
System Event List survives Sysload, Initialization and power failures.
Feature packaging
With the exception of the Alarm Notification subfeature, the Alarm Management feature is optional. It is a major enhancement to the existing Alarm Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package
243.
The Event Collector
The Event Collector captures and maintains a list of all processor-based system events. The
Event Collector also routes critical events to FIL TTY ports and lights the attendant console minor alarm lamp as appropriate. The System Event List (SEL) can be printed or browsed.
The Event Server
The Event Server consists of two components:
1. Event Default Table (EDT): This table associates events with a default severity. By using the CHG EDT command in LD 117, the EDT is overridden so that all events default to a severity of either INFO or MINOR. The EDT is viewed in LD 117. The
Default Table is stored in a disk file but is scanned into memory on start-up for rapid run-time access.
1068 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alarm Management capability
Table 27: Sample Event Default Table (EDT)
Error Code
ERR220
IOD6
BUG4001
Severity
Critical
Critical
Minor
Note:
Error codes which do not appear in the EDT is assigned a default severity of
MINOR.
2. Event Preference Table (EPT): This table contains site-specific preferences for event severities as well as criteria for severity escalation and alarm suppression.
The administrator configures the EPT to: a. override the default event severity assigned by the default table or b. escalate event severity of frequently occurring minor or major alarms.
Table 28: Sample Event Preference Table (EPT)
Error Code
ERR??? (see Note 1)
INI???
BUG1??
HWI363
Severity
Critical
Default
Minor
Major
Escalate Threshold
(events/60 sec.) (see Note 2)
5
7
0
3
Note:
The "?" is a wildcard. See the section below for explanation of wildcard entries.
Note:
The window timer length defaults to 60 seconds. However, this value can be changed by the Administrator. Read
on page 1070 for more information.
Wildcards
The special wildcard character "?" can be entered for the numeric segment of an error code entry in the EPT to represent a range of events. All events in the range indicated by the wildcard entry can then be assigned a particular severity or escalation threshold.
For example, if "ERR????" is entered and assigned a MAJOR severity in the EPT, all events from ERR0000 to ERR9999 are assigned MAJOR severity. If "BUG3?" is entered and assigned
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1069
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management an escalation threshold of 5, the severity of all events from BUG0030 to BUG0039 is escalated to the next higher severity if their occurrence rate exceeds 5 per time window.
The wildcard character format is as follows:
• ERR? = ERR0000 - ERR0009
• ERR?? = ERR0010 - ERR099
• ERR??? = ERR0100 - ERR0999
• ERR???? = ERR1000 - ERR9999
Escalation and suppression thresholds
The escalation threshold specifies a number of events per window timer length that, when exceeded, causes the event severity to be escalated up one level. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. Escalation occurs only for minor or major alarms. Escalation threshold values must be less than the universal suppression threshold value.
A suppression threshold suppresses events that flood the system and applies to all events. It is set to 15 events per minute by default.
Global window timer length
Both the escalation and suppression thresholds are measured within a global window timer length. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. However, the window timer length can be changed by using the CHG TIMER command in LD 117.
TTY output format of events
TTY event output can be formatted or unformatted. Formatted output is also called fancy format. Output format is configurable in LD 117 using the CHG FMT _OUTPUT command.
Fancy format output
Formatted output appears in the following template:<severity> <report id> <date> <time>
<prim_seq_no> <cp_id> <cp_ad> DESCTXT: <descriptive text> OPRDATA: <operator data>
EXPDATA: <expert data>
Field
<severity>
<report id>
Description
"***" (critical); "**" (major); "*" (minor); " " (blank for info)
The report ID consists of an event category (e.g. BUG, ERR, etc.) and an event number (1200, 230, etc.). It is padded with blanks at the end to
1070 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alarm Management capability
<descriptive text>
Field
<date>
<time>
<cp_ad>
Description
ensure it is 9 characters long (4 characters maximum for category and 5 digits maximum for number). Examples of report IDs are: ACDxxxx,
ERRxxx and BUGxx, where x = 0-9.
DD/MM/YY
HH:MM:SS
<prim_seq_no> Primary sequence number of the event (length of 5 digits)
<cp_id> The Component ID is a 15 character string which indicates the ID of the subsystem generating the alarm
The Component address is a 15 character string which indicates the address of the subsystem generating the event
This is an optional string which describes an event
<operator data> This is an optional field which holds a 160 character string containing extra text or data to assist the operator in clearing a fault. This field contains any data output with a filtered SL-1 alarm (e.g. loop number, TN, etc.)
<expert data> This is an optional variable length character string which contains extra text or data for a system expert or designer.
The following are samples of fancy format output:
*** BUG015 15/12/95 12:05:45 00345
EXPDATA: 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EC6 05500EAA
BUG015 + 05500E72 + 05500E56 + 0550D96 + 055053A + 04D84E02 + 04D83CFC
BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7EFC 04F7E1B0
* ERR00220 15/12/92 12:05:27 00346
OPRDATA: 51
VAS0010 15/12/92 12:06:11 00347 VMBA VAS 5
Unformatted Output
Unformatted data consists of only the report ID and perhaps additional text. The following is a sample of unformatted output:
BUG015
BUG015 + 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EAA 0550E8E
BUG015 + 05500E72 05500E56 05500D96 0550053A 04D84E02
BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7E2FC 04&E1B0
BUG015 + 04F7E148
ERR00220 51
VAS0010
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1071
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol
LD 117 is used to configure and manage an IP network interface. The large systems are hardware-equipped with an Ethernet controller on the I/O processor (IOP) card. Each IOP card is equipped with a Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet (LANCE) which is preconfigured with an unique Ethernet address.
The Small Systems and CS 1000S systems can be hardware-equipped with Ethernet daughterboards on the System Controller card. They support both Ethernet and Point-to-Point
Protocol.
For large systems, the unique 48-bit long physical address (Ethernet address) is a assigned to the Ethernet controller on the IOP. On a single CPU M1 system, there is only one IOP which contains one Ethernet interface and an IP address which must be configured. Single CPU systems use only a Primary IP address.
On a redundant or dual CPU M1 system, two IP addresses must be specified: Primary and
Secondary. A dual CPU M1 system operating normally uses the Primary IP address. A dual
CPU M1 system operating in split mode (the mode used only when upgrading software or hardware) uses the Secondary IP address.
Remote access to the switches is made possible with Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). LD 117 is used to configure IP addresses for Point-to-Point Protocol.
The large system Ethernet interface is provided by the IOP card with AUI cable on the back panel on Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C. The Small System provides an Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the main cabinet. The CS 1000S system provides an
Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the Call Server. The Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) is established via asynchronous connection to any system SDI port. The IP addresses for Ethernet and PPP interface are configured in Overlay 117, and defaults are available for all new installations and upgrades.
How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol
The following tables explain how to configure IP addresses for Ethernet and Point-to-Point
Protocol. These two tables are followed by examples.
Step
Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)
Action
1 Load Overlay 117
2
3
4
Create host entries
Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)
Set up Ethernet subnet mask
1072 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol
Step
Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)
Action
5 Set up routing entry
Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface (10BaseT)
Step Action
1 Load Overlay 117
2
3
Create host entries
Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)
Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)
Given: Primary IP address: 47.1.1.10 ; Secondary IP address: 47.1.1.11; Subnet mask:
255.255.255.0; Default Gateway IP: 47.1.1.1
Step
1
2
Action
Load Overlay 117
3
Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:
NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP 47.1.1.10
NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)
NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)
Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands:
CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP
CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY_IP (for Dual CPU only)
Verify your IP address for Ethernet by entering the PRT ENLK command.
4
5
Note:
To reuse the active host entry and/or associated IP address, the existing entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing enty, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. Out the original host entry, then proceed to Step 2.
Set up Ethernet subnet mask. Enter the command:
CHG MASK 255.255.255.0
Verify subnet mask setting by entering the command: PRT MASK
Set up routing entry. Enter the command:
NEW ROUTE 0.0.0.0 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)
Where: 0.0.0.0 = destination network IP and 47.1.1.1 = default gateway
IP
Note:
When more than one gateway exists, replace 0.0.0.0 with the destination network address for each entry of the routing table.
Verify default routing by entering the command: PRT ROUTE
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1073
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)
Note:
For a single CPU machine, the secondary IP is not used.
Note:
The secondary IP is accessible only when a system is in split mode.
Note:
The subnet mask must be the same value used for the system Ethernet network.
Note:
The system private Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used for system access and control. Use an internet gateway to isolate the system private Ethernet from the Customer Enterprise
Network.
Note:
Routing information is required if an internet gateway or router connects a system private network (ELAN subnet) to the Customer Enterprise Network. New routes use network
IPV4 classification to determine the whether the route is network or host based.
Note:
INI is required for the activation of subnet Mask.
Example 2 Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface
(10BaseT)
Given: Local IP address: 172.1.1.1; Remote IP address 100.1.1.1
Step
1
2
Action
Load Overlay 117
3
Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:
NEW HOST LOCAL_PPP 172.1.1.1
NEW HOST REMOTE_PPP 100.1.1.1 (this entry is optional)
Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands:
CHG PPP LOCAL LOCAL_PPP 0 (always use interface #0)
CHG PPP REMOTE REMOTE_PPP 0 (this entry is optional)
Verify your IP address(es) for PPP by entering the PRT PPP command.
1074 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Command descriptions
Command descriptions
Command
****
BROWSE
CHG
DIS
ENL
Definition
Abort
Browse
Change
Disable
Enable
INV
GENERATE
Enable
INV MIDNIGHT Enable
INV PRT
NEW
OUT
PRT
RST
SET
STAT
STIP
TEST
UPDATE
New
Out
Reset
Set
Status
Status
Test
Update
Description
Abort overlay or Printing if it is printing an Inventory file
Browse an existing System Event List
Change/modify object configuration
Disable Point-to-Point Protocol
Enable Point-to-Point Protocol
Enable inventory
Set Midnight routine for inventory
Print out the status of the Inventory feature
Add and configure new object
Delete existing object
Print configuration of existing object
Reset Object
Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value
Display object statistics
Display resource locator module information
Test Object
Update INET database
Object descriptions
DBS
DNIP
EDT
Object Description
Database
IP address of IP Phone
Event Default Table: Table of default event entries and associated severities
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1075
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
ELNK
Object
ELNK ACTIVE
ELNK INACTIVE
EPT
FMT_OUTPUT
HOST
IPDN
IPR
IPM
LDAPSYNC
MASK
NDAPP
OPEN_ALARM
PPP
PPP LOCAL
PPP REMOTE
PTM
Description
Ethernet interface
Active Ethernet Link: Change the Primary IP address and host name
Inactive Ethernet Link: Change the Secondary IP address and host name
Event Preference Table: Table of customer's event entries with associated severities
Formatted Output: Determine if system events uses formatted (also called fancy) or unformatted output.
Host name
IP address of configured DN
IP connectivity configuration associated with specified port
IP connectivity configuration associated with main cabinet
LDAP server synchronization
Subnet mask
Name Directory application
Open Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps setting
Point-to-Point Protocol interface
Local Point-to-Point Protocol interface address
Remote Point-to-Point Protocol interface address
Point-to-Point Protocol idle Timer
ROUTE
SELSIZE
SEL
SUPPRESS
Configure new routing entry
System Event List Size: Number of events in System Event Log
System Event List
Number of times the same event is processed before it is suppressed.
SUPPRESS_ALARM Severity level that triggers sending of alarms.
TIMER Global window timer length
How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S
The following tables explain IP Connectivity set-up using Bootp and Manual Configuration. The tables are followed by examples.
1076 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S
Important:
CS 1000S does not support IP addresses of all zeros (0) or all ones (1).
Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used
To configure Mac addresses for the MG 1000S 100BaseT daughterboard in a Point-to-Point configuration, use the following steps. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system is done on the Call Server side in OVL117. Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S.
Step
1
2
3
Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard.
Action
Load Overlay 117.
Configure MAC address.
Reboot Call Server.
Given:
Example 1 Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard.
MAC address of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the MG 1000S:
00:90:cf:03:71:15 The MG 1000S is connected to the port number 1 of the Call Server.
Step
1
2
Action
Load Overlay 117.
3
Configure the MAC address. Enter the following commands:
CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15
Verify the MAC address by entering the PRT IPR command.
Reboot the Call Server.
Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration
- Call Server only
The following tables explain how to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 2 LAN configuration. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system occurs on the Call Server side in OVL117. The MG 1000S does not need to be configured.
Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S. BootP is the recommended Layer 2 configuration procedure.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1077
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT ports.
Step Action
1 Load Overlay 117.
2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.
3
4
Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT.
Reboot the Call Server.
Example 2 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN
100BaseT ports.
Given: MAC address of the 100BaseT daughter board on the MG 1000S:
00:90:cf:03:71:15; IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT:
47.147.75.101; Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT:
255.255.255.0; IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100;
Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100Base: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S is connected to the slot number 1 of the Call Server.
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Load Overlay 117
Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES
Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1
Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0
Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1
Reboot the Call Server.
Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S
When using manual configuration the following steps are required for both the Call Server and
MG 1000S.
IP connectivity Layer 2 configuration for the Call Server side occurs in OVL117. These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer
2 configuration on the Call Server side:
1078 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S
Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask.
Step Action
1 Load Overlay 117.
2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.
3
4
Configure the IP address on the Call Server 100BaseT.
Reboot the Call Server.
Example 3 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask.
Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100; Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call
Server.
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Load Overlay 117.
Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES
Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1
Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0
Verify by entering the command: PRT IPM 1
Reboot the Call Server.
The Layer 2 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side occurs during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure
IP address for the 100BaseT daughter board in a Layer 2 configuration on the MG 1000S side:
TTY needs to be connected to the MG 1000S.
Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.
Step Action
1 Choose Manual configuration option from the installation menu.
2
3
4
Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.
Configure the MG 1000S NetMask.
Configure the IP address of the Call Server.
Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.
Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.75.101;
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1079
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.
Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0;
IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100;
The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server.
Step
1
Action
IP parameters for this module are obtained by:
1. Automatically using BootP
2. Using Manual configuration
2 Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.75.101
Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0
Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.75.100
Note:
If the MG 1000S IP address is on a subnet different than the Call
Server IP address then the default MG 1000S Address (0.0.0.0) is required.
Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S
The IP connectivity Layer 3 for the Call Server is configured in OVL117.
Note:
For Layer 3, manual configuration is mandatory.
These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the Call Server side:
Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports.
Step Action
1 Load Overlay 117.
2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.
3
4
5
Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT.
Configure routing entry between the Call Server and MG 1000S.
Reboot the Call Server.
Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN
100BaseT ports.
Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT port 1: 47.147.10.100; Subnet
Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; Gateway address on
1080 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S
Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN
100BaseT ports.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Call Server: 47.147.10.1; IP address of the MG 1000S 1: 47.147.20.101
The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call Server.
Action
Load Overlay 117.
Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.20.101 255.255.255.0 YES
Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1
Configure IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:
CHG IPM 1 47.147.10.100 255.255.255.0
Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1
Configure new route to reach IPR:
NEW ROUTE 47.147.20.0 47.147.10.1 0 1
Configure new route to reach IPM Local subnet:
NEW ROUTE 47.147.10.0 47.147.20.100 0 1
Reboot Call Server.
The Layer 3 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side is configured during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure
IP address for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the MG 1000S side:
Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN (100BaseT) port.
Step Action
1 Choose the Manual configuration option from the installation menu.
2
3
Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.
Configure the IP MG 1000S NetMask.
4
5
Configure the IP address on the Call Server.
Configure the MG 1000S Routing address.
Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN
(100BaseT) port.
Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.20.101;
Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0;
Gateway address for MG 1000S: 47.147.20.1;
IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.10.100;
The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1081
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN
(100BaseT) port.
Step Action
1
2
IP parameters for this module are obtained by:
1. Automatically using BootP
2. Using Manual configuration
Enter your selection: 2
Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.20.101
Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0
Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.10.100
Enter the MG 1000S Router/Gateway address: 47.147.20.1
Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports
The Auto-Negotiation feature must be enabled on each Main Cabinet/Call Server and
Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S ethernet port to allow bandwidth negotiation of 100 Mbps full duplex.
Note:
These commands are executed on the Main Cabinet/Call Server side.
The commands for enabling auto-negotiation are:
• Main Cabinet/Call Server ports CHG AUTONEG IPM <port> <a...a>
• Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S port CHG AUTONEG IPR <port> <a...a>
To enable Auto-Negotiation with a Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S configured on port one, enter the following commands:
CHG AUTONEG IPM 1 ON
CHG AUTONEG IPR 1 ON
Important:
When auto-negotiation is enabled, if a link is already up, a LINK DOWN message is reported on the TTY. This is normal because the data ports must perform the bandwidth negotiation protocol to obtain its required 100Mbps full duplex. This process takes 5 to 7 seconds. Once the process is complete, a LINK UP message is reported and the system is ready for normal operations.
To get the status of the auto-negotiation process, after process completion, enter the following commands:
STAT AUTONEG IPM
1082 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
STAT AUTONEG IPR
The following is a sample print out for the Main Cabinet/Call Server:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/CALL
SERVER PORTS
---------------------------------------------------
PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate
===================================================
IPM 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON
IPM 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
IPM 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON
IPM 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise
UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.
The following is a sample print out for the MG 1000S:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS
---------------------------------------------------
PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate
===================================================
IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON
IPR 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON
IPR 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise
UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.
IP command descriptions
Command
CHG AUTONEG IPM
CHG AUTONEG IPR Change Auto-Negotiation for Expansion Cabinet port.
CHG AUTOSB <cab> <a...a> Change the automatic switch back option of a given
Expansion Cabinet.
CHG CACVT <Zone> <1–
(48)-255>
Description
Change Auto-Negotiation for Main Cabinet ports.
Configure the zone-to-zone record validity time interval.Where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(48)-255 = interval in hours
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1083
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
CHG CD <zone> <1–
(50)-100>
Command Description
Change the Cd coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone.Where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = Cd coefficient
CHG CPL <zone> <1–
(50)-100>
Change the Cpl coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone.Where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = Cpl coefficient
CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP
Address> <Echo Server Port>
Change Echo Server 1’s IP address and port number.Where:
• Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)
• Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000)
CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP
Address> <Echo Server Port>
Note:
Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the LTPS card.
Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number.Where:
• Echo Server 2 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)
• Echo Server 2 Port number = (10000)
Note:
Echo Server 2 IP address uses the node IP address on the node’s master card.
CHG IPM <port> <ip> [mask] Changes the IP connectivity configuration associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port.
CHG IPR <port> <mac> [ip]
[mask] [a...a]
Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port.Where: a...a = zeroBandwidth = (NO) YES
Default value for zeroBandwidth means that in a ’no traffic condition’ bandwidth is not brought down to zero. Use NO in a PTP configuration, when data units are configured on the Expansion Cabinet to avoid potential packet loss. Use
1084 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
Command Description
YES in a Layer 2 or Layer 3 configuration to bring the bandwidth down to zero in a no traffic condition.
CHG NKT
CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix>
<country_code> <npa> <ac1>
<ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>
<ttbl>
Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.
Where time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds.
Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>
CHG PDV <port> <delay>
CHG PPP LOCAL
<hostname> [cab]
CHG PPP REMOTE
<hostname> [cab]
Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone. Package
420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Set Packet Delay Variation (PDV) buffer size and delay.
Set CS 1000S local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address.
Set CS 1000S remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address.
CHG PTM <xxx> [cab] Change Point-to-Point Protocol Timer.
CHG SWOTO <cab> <x...x> Change the switch over time out timer of a given MG
1000S.
CHG SURV <cab> <a...a>
CHG ZACB <Zone> <AC1–
AC2> <AC1–AC2>
Change Survivable Capability of a given MG 1000S.
Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone.
CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a> Define a zone as a branch office zone.
CHG ZDES <Zone>
<ZoneDescription>
Assign the Zone a descriptive name (ZoneDescription).
CHG ZDID <numbering zone>
<matching string>
<replacement string>
[<description>]
CHG ZDP <Zone>
<DialingCode1>
<DialingCode2>
<DialingCode3>
Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone.
CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a
<StartMonth> <StartWeek>
<StartDay> <StartHour>
<EndMonth> <EndWeek>
<EndDay> <EndHour>
Specify whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1085
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
CHG ZESA <Zone>
<ESARLI> <ESAPrefix>
<ESALocator>
Description
Defines the emergency services access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the ESA package is enabled.
CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>
<type> [<replacement string>]
[LEN <max length>]
[“<description>”]
Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber>
<intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy>
<interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy> <a...a>
Change the parameters of an existing Zone.Where:
• <zoneNumber> = 0–255
• <zoneNumber> = 0–8000
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network
Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than
255.
• <intraZoneBandwidth> = Intrazone available bandwidth
(0 to 10000000 Kbps)
• <intraZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy (BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)
• <interZoneBandwidth> = Interzone available bandwidth
(0 to 10000000 Kbps)
• <interZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy ((BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)
• <zoneResourceType> = type of zone (Shared or Private)
- Shared: The ethersets configured in Shared zones use
DSP resources configured in Shared zones. If all of the
Shared zones’ gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the shared zones’ channels
- Private: DSP channels configured in a Private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that Private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones are used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the
1086 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
Command Description
private zones’ channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same private zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the pool of shared zones’ channels
Note:
Current default zone type = Shared.
CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name>
<value>
CHG ZTDF <Zone>
<TimeDifferenceFrom
HeadOffice>
Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time.
DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC]
[ESA] [TIM]
Disable features of the branch office zone.
DWL DBS [cab]
Note:
All parameters must be re-entered when changing a zone.
Change the value of a ZBD numbering zone parameter.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Download 100BaseT database to the specified Expansion
Cabinet.
Enable features for the branch office zone.
ENL ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC]
[ESA] [TIM]
GEN ZONEFILE Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server.
IMPORT ZONEFILE
<fileName>
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist.
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1087
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
NEW HOST <hostname>
<IPaddress> [cab]
Description
range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
Configure a new host entry (add host name and IP address to network host table). To reuse the active host entry and/ or associated IP address, the existing host entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing host entry, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. OUT the original host entry and re-create your intended host entry.
NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix>
<country_code> <npa> <ac1>
<ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>
<ttbl>]
NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES
<zoneStartNumber>
<zoneAmount>
<intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy>
<interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy>
<zoneIntent>
<zoneResourceType>
NEW ROUTE <destination
IP> <gateway> [cab] [port]
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
Configure a new ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone
Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Create new bandwidth zones. This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting from
<zoneStartNumber>. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created.
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
Configure a new routing entry (add new route to the network routing table).
NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>
[<replacement string>] [LEN
<max length>] [<description>]
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
Configure a new ZBD numbering zone-based Flexible
Dialing Plan. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
1088 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
Command
NEW ZONE <ZoneNumber>
[<intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy>
<interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy>
<zoneIntent>
<zoneResourceType>]
OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone>
OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES
<zoneStartNumber>
<zoneAmount>
OUT ZDID <numbering zone>
<matching string>
OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>
PRT AQOS <attribute>
<zone> / ALL>
PRT CAB [cab]
PRT DNIP <DN>
[<CustomerNo>]
Description
Create a new zone with parameters.
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
Remove a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone
Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones. This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than
<zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted.
Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation.
Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL).
Print parameters and survivable capability of the specified
Expansion Cabinet.
Print a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN.
PRT ES1
PRT ES2
PRT ESS
PRT INTERZONE
PRT INTRAZONE
PRT IPDN <IPAddress>
Note:
A partial DN can be entered.
Print Echo Server 1’s IP address and port number.
Print the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number.
Print both Echo Servers IP address and port number.
Print interzone statistics for the range between the near and far zones.
Print intrazone statistics for all zones or for the specified zone.
Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address(es).
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1089
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
PRT IPM <port>
PRT IPR <port>
PRT NKT
PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone>
PRT NZDES <numbering zone>
PRT PDV <port>
PRT PPP [cab]
PRT PTM [cab]
PRT QOS <cab>
PRT SURV [cab]
PRT ZACB [<Zone>]
PRT ZBW [<Zone>]
PRT ZDES
[<DESMatchString>]
PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]
Note:
Partial IP addresses can be entered with only the leading digits of the IP address (for example, 142.10), or as the
IP address with zeroes at the end (for example,
142.10.0.0)
Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port.
Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port.
Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.
Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Print the current size of the PDV buffer and the number of
PDV underflows.
Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es).
Print Point-to-Point Protocol idle timer settings.
Print level of service based on system configured thresholds for selected Expansion Cabinet.
Prints the Expansion Cabinet Survivable capability for all, or specified Expansion Cabinets.
Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.
Print a table of zone bandwidth utilization.
Print a table of the zone description entries.
PRT ZDP [<Zone>]
PRT ZDST [<Zone>]
PRT ZESA [<Zone>]
Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.
Print a table of branch office zone emergency services access (ESA) entries.
1090 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
Command
PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]
PRT ZONE ALL
PRT ZONE x...x
PRT ZPAGE [<zone number>
<zonesPerPage>]
PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]
PRT ZQOS <zone>
<attribute / ALL>
PRT ZTDF [<Zone>]
Description
Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Print zone information for all zones.
Print zone information for a specific zone.
Print zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting at <zone number> zone.
Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.Package
420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL).
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.
PRT ZTP [<Zone>]
PING ipAddress
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.
Ping far end IP address.
• When IP (voice) link is UP:
PING to/from 100BaseT is ONLY enabled among the Call
Server and the Expansion Cabinets. They do not respond to PING from/to any other device in the data network.
• When IP (voice) link is DOWN:
PING command is enabled to/from entire data network.
STAT LINK APP
<applicationType>
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
Display the link information status of the server for the specified application.Where <applicationType> is:
• LTPS (Line TPS)
• VGW (Voice Gateway)
• H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk)
• GK (GateKeeper)
STAT LINK IP <IP address> Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified subnet.Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the
Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1091
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
STAT LINK NAME
<hostName>
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format
(e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").
Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name.Where <hostname> =
MAINSERVER
STAT LINK NODE <nodeID> Display the link information status of the specified node.Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999.
STAT LINK SRV
<serverType>
STAT SERV APP
<applicationType>
Note:
The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling
Server equipment.
Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type.Where <serverType> is:
• ITGP (ITG Pentium)
• SMC (Media Card)
• SS (Signaling Server)
Display the link information status of the server for the specified application.Where <applicationType> is:
• LTPS (Line TPS)
• VGW (Voice Gateway)
• H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk)
• GK (GateKeeper)
• SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)
• MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
• SLG (SIP Line Gateway)
STAT SERV IP <IP address> Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP Address> = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media
Card.
STAT SERV NAME
<hostName>
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format
(e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").
Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name.Where <hostname> =
MAINSERVER
1092 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
IP command descriptions
Command Description
STAT SERV NODE <nodeID> Display the link information status of the specified node.Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway
Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.
STAT SERV TYPE
<serverType>
Display the server information of the specified server type.Where <serverType> is:
• ITGP (ITG Pentium)
• SMC (Media Card)
• SS (Signaling Server)
STAT SS Display the server information of the specified Signaling
Server.
STAT ZBR [<Zone>] Display status of branch office zones (displays which local dialing).
Display zone status table.
STAT ZONE [<Zone>]
STIP ACF
STIP ACF <status>
Displays status for all ACF calls.
Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) information.
STIP HOSTIP <IP address> Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the
Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.
STIP NODE <nodeID>
STIP SIPLUA
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.
For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".
Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID.Where
<nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.
Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User
Agent string.
STIP TERMIP <IP address> Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP address> = the TLAN IP address of the
IP Phone or Voice Gateway Media Card.
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.
For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1093
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
STIP TN l s c u
STIP TYPE <aaa>
Description
Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and cu parameters.
- 2002
- 2004
- 2007
- 2033
- 2050
- 2210
- 2211
- 2212
- 1140
- 1145
- 1150
- 1160
- 1210
- 1220
- 1230
- 2001
Note:
All codecs configured for the specified TN are listed in the format — <codec standard> and <bandwidth used for it>: CODEC(BW): G711a noVAD(1904), G711u noVAD(1904). The exact value of G.711 20ms codec BW usage is 190400 bps (or 190.4 kbps). However, the configured zone BW limit in the zone table is measured and configured in ‘kbps‘. The zone BW usage for a single call is counted in ‘kbps‘ and only in integer values. Zone
BW usage should be readable. The STIP commands in
LD 117 take BW value for IP codecs from the RLM table.RLM table stores the exact BW value and in the following format - 190400 bps divided to 100.
Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type.Where <aaa> is:
• IP Phone type:
- 1110
- 1120
- 1130
1094 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Command
STIP ZONE <zone>
UPDATE DBS
NTP Command descriptions
Description
- MVC2050
• ISET = all IP Phones
• VGW = Voice Gateway resources
• IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks
Note:
Up to 3 types can be specified.
Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones.Where <zone> = any valid zone number (0 - 8000) in the system.
Rebuild INET database and download to all Expansion
Cabinets (update network database).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
Note:
To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using
Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the
Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.
NTP Command descriptions
Note:
NTP commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and
Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Note:
To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1095
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
CHG NTP IPADDR
CHG NTP THRESH
CHG NTP SECURE
CHG NTP AUTHMODE
CHG NTP TIMEINT
CHG UTCOFFSET
ENL NTP
DIS NTP
STAT NTP
SYNC NTP
STOP NTP BACKGROUND
PRT NTP
Comment
Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and/or
Secondary NTP Servers.
Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels (Minimum,
Warning, Maximum).
Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or
Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation.
Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both, NTP servers.
Configure both the time interval for background NTP synchronization and the time offset from other background routines.
Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone.
Enable NTP.
Disable NTP.
Check Status of NTP.
Synchronize NTP servers manually or in background mode.
Stop background synchronization from running.
Display the current configuration parameters of NTP.
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
The commands listed below use the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt):
=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD 2 value)... (FIELDx value)]
In the following table, COMMANDS and OBJECTS are in bold typeface and fields are in regular typeface. Fields enclosed in brackets ( ) are default values.
Command
PRT BKPR ALL
Description Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Administer Accounts.
1096 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This prompt is available only when adding/modifying Level 2
(PWD2) user.
Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.
BANNERLOAD aa...a
basic-5.0
0
Login Banner. Input terminated with \n OR \r\n. Restricted to:
• 20 lines
• Up to 80 characters per line
• characters “a-z”, “A-Z”, ”0-9”, “,<.>/?;:’”[{]}‘~!@#$%^&*()_-+=|
\”
Note:
Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege loads the contents from the /u/pub/ banner.txt for use as the system login banner
An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/
VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.
BANNER LOAD
Load customized banner from banner.txt into memory.
BANNER RESET basic-5.0
0
BANNER SHOW
Reset banner contents with default value.
Note:
Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege
An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/
VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.
basic-5.0
0
Retrieves and displays the customized banner text from memory.
BROWSE SEL
Browse system event log by lines or string
BROWSE SEL UP n
Browse up n # of lines in System Event List (SEL).
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1097
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
BROWSE SEL DOWN n
Browse down n # of lines in SEL.
BROWSE SEL TOP
Browse to top of SEL.
BROWSE SEL BOT
Browse to bottom of SEL.
Pack/Rel
BROWSE SEL FIND xxx
Browse forward to find string xxx in SEL.
BROWSE SEL BFIND xxx
Browse backward to find string xxx in SEL.
BYRANGE
Return range of entries from embedded command
CHG ADMIN_COMM n aa...a
basic-4.0
0
Change SNMP community string for a given admin. group, where:
• n = a number from 1 to 3
• aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters, where:
- Default(1) = admingroup1 *
- Default(2) = admingroup2 *
- Default(3) = admingroup3 *
* = case-sensitive
These communities are used for accessing different SNMP objects on the Call Server, Signaling Servers, Voice Gateway
Media Cards and Media Gateway Controllers.
In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if administration group community strings are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an
"OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the
SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117
Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the
"ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
1098 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
CHG APPSRV
Description
Change the IP address of the application server for PD.
CHG BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy
Pack/Rel
Change a Backup Rule, where:
• xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system
• a...a = SCS, rule type that allows direct replication to another system
• b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system
• yy = (2)-10, the number of database versions to save on the destination system grprim-4
.00
CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>]
[<name>]
Change backup rule to Fixed Media Device (FMD), where:
• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD
43).
• FMD = mnemonic for this rule type
• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device
• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed basic-4.5
0
Note:
The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS
1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).
CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FTP <IP addr>
<login><pwd> <path> [<N of versions1-10>] [<name>]
Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where:
• <rule number> = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic Redundancy Database Replication
Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup basic-4.5
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1099
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43).
• FTP = mnemonic for this rule type
• IP addr = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data
• login = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters
• pwd = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters
• path = path on the FTP server where the backup data file (or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters
• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server
• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed
Pack/Rel
Note:
The only backup rule type which can be referenced from
GRDRC is SCS.
Note:
The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000
Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.
CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> RMD [<N of versions>]
[<name>]
Change backup rule to an Removable Media Device (RMD), where:
• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD
43).
• RMD = mnemonic for this rule type
• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device
• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed basic-4.5
0
1100 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS
1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).
CHG BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP>
<FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>
Change a backup schedule, where:
• Rule for BKUP = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation
• FREQ = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where:
- M = monthly
- W = weekly
- D = daily
- A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A basic-4.5
0
Note:
When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR
DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ
= M, where:
- (SU) = Sunday
- MO = Monday
- TU = Tuesday
- WE = Wednesday
- TH = Thursaday
- FR = Friday
- SA = Saturday
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1101
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
- (1)- 31
Note:
When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month.
HOUR = 0-(3)-23
Pack/Rel
Note:
This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.
CHG CACVT <Zone> <1-(48)-255> zcac-4.5
0
Change the CAC record validity time interval in hours for CAC, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(48)-255 = interval in hours, default value is 48.
basic-7.0
0
CHG CD <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5
0
Change the CD coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the
Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = CD coefficient, default value is 50.
zcac-7.0
0
CHG CJ <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5
0
Change the CJ coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the
Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = jitter coefficient, default value is 50.
zcac-7.0
0
1102 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
CHG CPL <Zone> <1-(50)-100>
Description Pack/Rel
zcac-4.5
0
Change the CPL coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the
Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = CPL coefficient, default value is 50.
zcac-7.0
0
CHG CQOS <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5
0
Change the CQoS coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = QoS coefficient zcac-7.0
0
CHG CQTH
Change the QoS warning and unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis
CHG CQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency>
<UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>
Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis, where: pvqm-4.0
• UnacpJitter = 5-(40)-500 msec
• UnacpLatency = 5-(100)-500 msec
• UnacpPacketLoss = 5-(70)-250 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1%
• UnacpRFactor = 20-(60)-94
Note:
Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the
Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.
CHG CQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss>
<WarnRFactor>
Change VQ Warning thresholds on a per call basis, where: pvqm-4.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1103
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• WarnJitter = 5-(20)-200 msec
• WarnLatency = 5-(40)-100 msec
• WarnPacketLoss = 5-(20)-100 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1%
• WarnRFactor = 20-(65)-94
Pack/Rel
Note:
Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the
Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.
CHG CR <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5
0
Change the Cr co-efficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(50)-100 = Cr coefficient zcac-7.0
0
CHG EDT
Enable/disable the use of Event Default Table (EDT).
CHG EDT NORMAL alrm_filte r-21
Use Event Default Table (EDT) default severities.
CHG EDT INFO alrm_filte r-21
Override EDT; use INFO as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT).
CHG EDT MINOR
Override EDT; use MINOR as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT)
CHG ELNK ACTIVE hostname
Set system active Ethernet interface IP address (set active
ELAN IP address).
alrm_filte r-21
1104 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG ELNK INACTIVE hostname
Set system inactive Ethernet interface IP address (set inactive
ELAN IP address)
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG EPT aa... a INFO x alrm_filte r-21
Change an Event Preference Table (EPT) entry to Information severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry
CHG EPT aa... a EDT x
Change EPT to NT-defined severity from EDT, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21
CHG EPT aa... a MAJOR x alrm_filte r-21
Change an EPT entry to Major severity, where:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1105
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry
Pack/Rel
CHG EPT aa... a MINOR x
Change an EPT entry to Minor severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21
CHG EPT aa... a CRITICAL x
Change an EPT entry to Critical severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21
CHG ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend>
<staticELIN> <osdn>]
Change an Emergency Response Location (ERL) table entry, where:
• <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier
Number in the range 1-65535.
• <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL
- RT = by route number
- RLI = by Route Line Index
• <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token)
- route number = as specified in LD 16
- route line index number = as specified in LD 86
• <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90 basic-5.0
0
1106 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls
• <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)
• <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN
To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.
Pack/Rel
CHG ERLLOC <ERL#> <Location Description> basic-5.0
0
Assign a Location Description to an ERL.
CHG ERLSITE <ERL#> <Site Name> basic-5.0
0
Assign a Site Name to an ERL.
CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port> basic-4.0
0
Change the Echo Server 1 IP address and port number, where:
• Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)
• Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000)
Note:
Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the
LTPS card.
CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port> basic-4.0
0
Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number, where:
• Echo Server IP Address = (0.0.0.0)
• Echo Server Port = (10000)
Note:
Echo Server 2 default IP address uses the node IP address on the node's master card.
CHG FMT_OUTPUT OFF alrm_filte r-21
Turn off formatted output
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1107
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
CHG FMT_OUTPUT ON
Description Pack/Rel
alrm_filte r-21
Turn on formatted output
CHG GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc
Change current Geographic Redundancy Data Replication
Control (GRDRC) block, where:
• xxx = Backup Rule number.
• aaa = how the automatic database replication to the destination system occurs. Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD:
- SCHD - according to defined backup schedule
- (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation
- MIDN - after midnight data dump only
- NO - not allowed
• yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>.
• bbb = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic restore operation on the secondary system
• ccc = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system grprim-4
.00
Note:
ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES
CHG GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>]
Change GR N-way backup schedules, where:
• FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where:
- M = monthly
- W = weekly
- D = daily
• DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ
= M, where:
- (SU) = Sunday
- MO = Monday basic-5.0
0
1108 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
- TU = Tuesday
- WE = Wednesday
- TH = Thursday
- FR = Friday
- SA = Saturday
- (1)-31
When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR.
• HOUR = 0-(3)-23
• MINUTE = (0)-59
• DELAY = (3)-60
The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups.
The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and modifies a
BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.
Pack/Rel
CHG GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a
grprim-4
.00
Change current Geographic Redundancy State Control (GRSC) block, where:
• xxx = (1)-10% x (Basic IP User License + IP User License), the number of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the ACTIVATING state
• yyy = (5)-600, Short Term Failure Timer in minutes
• zzz = (5)-180, Failure Clearance Timer in minutes
• a..a = (AUTO) MAN, Secondary system Deactivation Mode, where:
- (AUTO) = Automatic
- MAN = Manual
CHG HSP_MASK <subnet mask> basic-4.5
0
Modify the manually-configured HSP subnet mask, if it exists; otherwise, the subnet mask to the Call Server is added.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1109
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
CHG IPR
Description
Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for IPMG.
CHG IPR x mac ip mask
Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the IP (Intelligent Peripheral) Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where:
• x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected
• mac = xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx, MAC address obtained from the sticker on the IP daughterboard mounted on the IP Expansion
SSC, where: x is a hexidecimal digit in the range 0-F
• ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0–255
• mask = x.x.x.x , subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0–255
Pack/Rel
CHG IPM
Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for Call
Server.
CHG IPM x ip mask
Change the IP connectivity configuration associated with the main cabinet end of the specified port, where:
• x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected
• ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0–255
• mask = x.x.x.x, subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0–255
CHG L3ELAN x ACTIVE <address> basic-5.0
0
Define physical active ELAN address: Where:
• x = 0 OR 1 Core
• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
1110 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
CHG L3GW x <address>
Description Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Define physical ELAN default gateway address: Where:
• x = 0 OR 1 Core
• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG L3HSP <side> <address> basic-5.0
0
Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where:
• Side = 0 OR 1 Core
• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG L3HSPGW <side> <address> basic-5.0
0
Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where:
• Side = 0 OR 1 Core
• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG L3HSPMASK <side> <mask> basic-5.0
0
Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where:
• Side = 0 OR 1 Core
• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG L3MASK <side> <mask> basic-5.0
0
CHG L3PRIV active | inactive <address>
Define the IP address of the virtual ACTIVE / INACTIVE ELAN:
Where:
Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
basic-5.0
0
CHG LCL
Change the mask of the side specific ELAN port. Where:
• Side = 0 OR 1 Core
• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1111
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Change the Local Core Location Loop and Shelf values
(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).
Pack/Rel
CHG LDAPSYNC <ldapsync> [<timeOfDay> [<ldapserver>
<userid> < password> [<security> [<secure port>
[insecure port>] ]]]]
Enable/disable the scheduled synchronization of the Unicode
Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data, or change the parameters for the scheduled synchronization task.
Where:
• <ldapsync> = disable/enable scheduled synchronization of the Unicode Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data
- 0 = disable
- 1 = enable
• <timeOfDay> = the time of day for scheduled LDAP synchronization
Format = hh:mm
• <ldapserver> = IP address or FQDN of the CND LDAP server
• <userid> = username required for access to the CND LDAP server
• <password> = password required for access to the CND
LDAP server
• <security> = enable/disable secure SSL connection to the
CND LDAP server
• <secure port> = port used for secure SSL connection to CND
LDAP server.
Default port = 636.
• <insecure port> = port used for insecure connection to CND
LDAP server.
Default port = 389.
basic-6.0
0
Note:
<userid> and <password> must always be specified as a pair.
CHG MASK nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
Change subnet mask.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications
1112 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NAV_SITE aa... a
Pack/Rel
basic-4.0
0
Change the navigation site name (MyCity, for example), where:
• aa...a = a string with maximum length of 32 characters
• default = Navigation Site Name
Note:
Use a single X to clear the field.
In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if the navigation site name is modified in LD117, it is stored in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
CHG NBWMM IP
Set the IP address of the Primary NBWM Master.
CHG NBWMM STATE
Change the IP Peer System state.
CHG NBWMMA IP
Set the IP address of Alternate NBWM Master.
CHG NDAPP <ndAppValue> [<ndLkupTimer>] basic-6.0
0
Enable/disable the Name Directory Application.
Where:
• <ndAppValue> = 0, 1, OFF, ON
- 0 or OFF = disabled
- 1 or ON = enabled
• <ndLkupTimer> = 500-10000
If not specified, a default value of 3000 msec is used.
CHG NKT basic-4.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1113
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router, where: time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds
Pack/Rel
CHG NTP AUTHMODE <Secure | Insecure> <Primary |
Secondary | All>
Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both,
NTP servers.
basic-5.0
0
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NTP IPADDR <primary_ip_addr> <secondary_ip_addr> basic-5.0
0
Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and Secondary NTP
Servers.
Note:
When you are configuring the IP address for the secondary
NTP server, enter the IP address of the primary NTP server, followed by the IP address of the secondary NTP server.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NTP MODE CS basic-5.0
0
Configure Router as the mode of communication between the
NTP server and the CS.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NTP MODE SS basic-5.0
0
Configure Signaling Server as the mode of communication between the NTP server and the CS.
1114 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NTP SECURE <primary_ip_add> <secondary_ip_addr>
<key_id>
Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or
Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation.
Where:
• <primary_ip_add> = IP address of primary NTP server
• <secondary_ip_addr> = IP address of secondary NTP server
• <key_id> = private key with values = 1 - 4294967295.
The system prompts for the private key if not entered.
basic-5.0
0
Note:
For security reasons, the private key does not show in the command line as you enter it.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NTP THRESH <Minimum> <Warning> <Maximum> basic-5.0
0
Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels.
Where:
• <Minimum> = (0)-5 seconds
• <Warning> = (6)-15 seconds
• <Maximum> = (16)>15 seconds
Note:
Enter values for all three threshold levels when you use this command.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM CP PMserver). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1115
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
CHG NTP TIMEINT <time interval in hours> <offset in minutes>
Configure both the time interval for background synchronization and the offset from other background routines.
Where:
• <time interval in hours> = 1, 2, 6, 12, (24), 30
• <offset in minutes> = 15, (30), 45
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix>
<country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>
<ttbl>
Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number
A number from 1-1023.
• ZBD zone parameters:
- <site_prefix> = site prefix
A number from 0-9999.
- <country_code> = country code
A number from 0-9999.
- <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)
A number from 0-9999.
- <ac1> = trunk access code 1
A number from 0-99.
- <ac2> = trunk access code 2
A number from 0-99.
- <natc> = national dial code
A number from 0-9999.
- <intc> = international dial code
A number from 0-9999.
- <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call
A number from (0)-1.
- <ttbl> = tone table
A number from (0)-32.
zbd-6.00
1116 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>
Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <description> = 1-128 characters
Description of numbering zone.
CHG PDBAK
Change parameters for remote backup of PD
CHG PDV
Change PDV value in milliseconds
CHG PPP LOCAL hostname
Set Meridian 1 local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address
CHG PPP REMOTE hostname
Set Meridian 1 remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address
CHG PTM 0-60
Change Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to specified value, where:
0-60 = value in minutes
Pack/Rel
zbd-6.00
CHG RCL
Change the Remote Core Location Loop and Shelf values
(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).
CHG SELSIZE 5-(500)-2000
Change System Event List Size, where:
5-(500)-2000 = number of events in SEL
CHG SNMP_SYSCONTACT aa... a basic-4.0
0
Change the contact person name for this system element
(machine).
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1117
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters.
Default = "System Contact".
Note:
Use a single X to clear the field.
CHG SNMP_SYSLOC aa...a
Pack/Rel
basic-4.0
0 basic-4.0
0
Change the defined physical location for this system element
(machine).
Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters.
Default = "System Location".
basic-4.0
0
Note:
Use a single X to clear the field.
CHG SNMP_SYSNAME aa...a
basic-4.0
0
Change the system name assigned to this system element
(machine).
Where aa...a = a system name string with a maximum length of
100 characters.
can include a %hostname% variable that allows the system to configure the physical hostname as a component of the system element name
Default = "System Name".
basic-4.0
0 basic-5.5
0
Note:
Use a single X to clear the field.
CHG SQOS <SamplePeriod> <SampleRateWindow>
<MinSampleCnt>
Change VQ sampling parameters, where:
• SamplePeriod = 5-(30)-60 seconds
• SampleRateWindow = 60-(300)-3600 seconds
• MinSampleCnt = 50-(100)-1000 pvqm-4.0
1118 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
CHG SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask> <ERL> <ECL> "<Location
Description>"
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Change a subnet entry where:
• IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
• ERL and ECL = 0-65535
• Location Description = 20 alphanumeric characters withn quotation marks.
Note:
Only the location fields (ERL, ECL, and Location Description) can be changed.
CHG SUPPRESS 5-(15)-127 alrm_filte r-21
Change global suppress for events, where:
5-(15)-127 = number of occurrences before event is suppressed
CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM [n] basic-4.0
0
Changes the minimum alarm severity threshold of the alarms that are sent.
Where [n] is:
• 0 = All
• 1 = Minor
• 2 = Major
• 3 = Critical
SYNC SNMPCONF basic-6.0
0
Update the "ACTIVE Configuration" (current) SNMP parameters on the CS with "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP parameters, and propagate the updated SNMP parameters to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the
CS.
SYNC SYS Propagates Dbconfig and QOS parameters on the CS to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the
CS.
basic-5.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1119
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
CHG SYSMGMT_TRAP_COMM <aaa...a>
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Configure the SNMP community string
CHG SYSMGMT_RD_COMM n aa...a
basic-4.0
0
Change the system management read-only community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters
CHG SYSMGMT_WR_COMM n aa...a
Change the system management read / write community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters basic-4.0
0
CHG TIMER (1)-60 alrm_filte r-21
Change global timer window length, where:
(1)-60 = time in minutes
Note:
See
Global window timer length on page 1070 for more
information.
CHG UTCOFFSET <Time Offset>> basic-5.0
0
Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone.
Where <Time Offset> = +/-hh:mm (+00:00).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
CHG VPNKEY <key> basic-5.0
0
Define the VPN pre-shared key. Where: key = 8 to 64 Alphanumeric characters
1120 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
CHG VPNMASK <mask>
Description Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Change the VPN mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG VPNNET <ip address> basic-5.0
0
Change the VPN network IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG VPNROUTER <side> <address type> <address>
Configure interface of VPN Router Where:
• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
• Address type = ‘PUBLIC’ / ‘PRIVATE’ VPN Router interface
• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
CHG ZACB <Zone>[ALL] [<AC1...AC2> <AC1...AC2>]
Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone, where:
• ALL = both AC1 and AC2 receive digit manipulation and no re-translation occurs
• AC1 = the first Access Code parameter defines which NARS
Access Code to consider as the source of local calls
• AC2 = the second Access Code parameter defines which
NARS Access Code to send the modified number to for retranslation.
basic-5.0
0
Note:
If NARS is configured as recommended in the NTPs, this would be AC2 for local call and AC1 for retranslation.
CHG ZALT <zone> <ALTPrefix> [<All_calls>] basic-4.5
0
Change Alternate Prefix number for zone, where:
• zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• ALTPrefix = digit string of up to 7 digits that is added to the start of dialed number if the call do not be routed through the basic-7.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1121
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
WAN due to lack of bandwidth, poor QoS or feature is configured for all calls.
• All_calls = Allow or Deny Alternative Routing for all calls, where:
- (NO) = deny
- YES = allow
Pack/Rel
CHG ZAST <zone> [<AlarmSuppressTime>] basic-4.5
0
Changes ACR settings for particular zone, where:
• zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• AlarmSuppressTime = 0-3600, time in seconds basic-7.0
0
CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a>
Define a zone as a branch office zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• a...a = Yes or No basic-7.0
0
CHG ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>
<replacement string> [<description>]
Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string
Unique inside a numbering zone.
• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string
If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>
= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.
If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.
• <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry
If not specified, the ZDID table entry remains unchanged.
zbd-6.00
1122 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
CHG ZDES <Zone> <ZoneDescription>
Assign a descriptive name to make the zone numbers more meaningful, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• ZoneDescription = descriptive name that is used only in the data display and status commands
Pack/Rel
basic-7.0
0
CHG ZDP <Zone> <DialingCode1> <DialingCode2>
<DialingCode3>
Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• DialingCode1 = Prefix, represents the access code for long distance or international access. In North America, it is "1" for long distance access and "011" for international access.
Outside North America, it is "0" for national access and "00" for international access.
• DialingCode2 = The country code or trunk code. Normally
NPA when calling from within North America, and "1" when calling from outside North America.
• DialingCode3 = Destination network code. Normally not used in North America. Outside North America, it is a combination of region, city, or district codes.
basic-7.0
0
CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a <StartMonth> <StartWeek>
<StartDay> <StartHour> <EndMonth> <EndWeek> <EndDay>
<EndHour>
Specifies whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• a...a = Yes or No, During daylight saving time, the clock automatically advances one hour forward.
• StartMonth = start month of year (1-12)
• StartWeek = start week in month (1-5)
• StartDay = start day in week (1-7)
• StartHour = start hour of day (1-23) of the start of DST basic-7.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1123
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• EndMonth = end month of year (1-12)
• EndWeek = end week in month (1-5)
• EndDay = end day in week (1-7)
• EndHour = end hour of day (1-23) of the end of DST.
Pack/Rel
Note:
In North America, DST normally starts on the 1st Sunday in
April at 2am and ends on the last Sunday in October at
2am.
The digit 5 is the last week of the month irrespective of number of weeks this month. For example: StartWeek = start week in month (1-5) [1st-5th, 5 is the last week of the month]
CHG ZESA <Zone> <ESARLI> <ESAPrefix> <ESALocator>
Defines the Emergency Services Access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the
ESA package is enabled, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• ESARLI = the route to use to send emergency calls to the branch office Gateway by way of the VTRK
• ESAPrefix = a digit string of up to 15 digits that is added to the start of the ESDN before it is sent to the route indicated by the
ESARLI. This allows the Gatekeeper to differentiate the different destinations for otherwise identical ESDN's
• ESALocator = the DID phone number to be sent for use by the
PSAP to locate the source of the emergency call basic-7.0
0
CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type>
[<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>]
["<description>"]
Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string
Unique inside a numbering zone.
• <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts zbd-6.00
1124 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified:
- If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/
AC2+replacement string.
- If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string.
- If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC
+replacement string.
- If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string.
- If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC
+ZNPA+replacement string
- If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/
AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string
- If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/
AC2+replacement string
- If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string
- If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string
• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string
If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>
= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.
If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.
• [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match
If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches.
• [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry
If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.
Pack/Rel
CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy> <a...a>
Change the parameters of an existing Zone, where:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1125
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
• zoneNumber = 0–255
• zoneNumber = 0–8000
Description
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
• intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to
10000000 Kbps)
• intraZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy
(BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)
• interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to
10000000 Kbps)
• interZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy
(BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)
• a...a = type of zone, where:
- (Shared) = current default zone type. The ethersets configured in shared zones use DSP resources configured in shared zones. If all of the shared zones' gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is:
• channel from same zone as etherset is configured
• any available channel from the shared zones' channels
- Private = This zone type is introduced by IPL 3.0. DSP channels configured in a private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones is used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the private zones' channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is:
• channel from same private zone as etherset is configured
• any available channel from the pool of shared zones' channels
Pack/Rel
basic-7.0
0
CHG ZONE <zoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy> [<zoneIntent>
<zoneResourceType>] basic-4.5
0
1126 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Change the parameters of an existing Zone. All parameters must be re-entered, where:
• zoneNumber = 0–255
• zoneNumber = 0–8000
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
• intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:
- BQ = Best Quality
- BB = Best Bandwidth
• interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:
- BQ = Best Quality
- BB = Best Bandwidth
• zoneIntent = type of zone, where:
- MO = Main Office zone
- BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone
- VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone
• zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:
- (shared) = shared DSP channels
- private = private DSP channels
Pack/Rel
basic-7.0
0
Note:
With release 4.50 the zones that were described with BMG designator stay with BMG one, all the other zones are provided with the MO designator. It is possible to update
ZoneIntent using CHG ZONE command.
CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name> <value> zbd-6.00
Change the value of a ZBD numbering zone parameter.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <parameter name> = name of numbering zone parameter
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1127
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Where:
- PREF = site prefix
- CC = country code
- NPA = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)
- AC1 = trunk access code 1
- AC2 = trunk access code 2
- NATC = national dial code
- INTC = international dial code
- DAC = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call
- TTBL = tone table
• <value> = new value for specified parameter
- If <parameter name> = PREF, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = CC, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = NPA, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = AC1, <value> = 0-99.
- If <parameter name> = AC2, <value> = 0-99.
- If <parameter name> = NATC, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999.
- If <parameter name> = DAC, <value> = (0)-1.
- If <parameter name> = TTBL, <value> = (0)-32.
Pack/Rel
CHG ZQNL <level>
Change the Notification Level for all zones, where: level = 0-(2)-4, where:
- Level 0 = All voice quality alarms are suppressed.
- Level 1 = Allow zone-based Unacceptable alarms.
- Level 2 = Allow all level 1 alarms PLUS zone-based Warning alarms.
- Level 3 = Allow all level 1 and 2 alarms PLUS per-call
Unacceptable alarms.
- Level 4 = Allow all level 1, 2, and 3 alarms PLUS per-call
Warning alarms.
pvqm-40
1128 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
CHG ZQNL <ZoneNumber> <level>
Change the Notification Level for the specified zone, where:
• ZoneNumber = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• level = 0-(2)-4
Pack/Rel
pvqm-40 pvqm-7.0
0
CHG ZQRT <Zone> <1-100> zcac-4.5
0
Change ZQRT which is Response time increase by percentage.
It is the amount by which the Sliding Maximum is increased for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(10)-100 = increase value in percentage zcac-7.0
0
CHG ZQRTI <Zone> <1-120> zcac-4.5
0
Change the QoS Response Time Interval while alarms are not coming to increase the Sliding Maximum for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(5)-120 = Interval in minutes zcac-7.0
0
CHG ZQUAT <Zone> <1-99> zcac-4.5
0
Change the QoS Unacceptable Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(75)-99 = threshold value zcac-7.0
0
Note:
When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is presented as being deactivated. This value must be below the value of
ZQWAT.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1129
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
CHG ZQWAT <Zone> <1-99>
Description
Change the QoS Warning Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• 1-(85)-99 = threshold value
Pack/Rel
zcac-4.5
0 zcac-7.0
0
Note:
When the zone-to-zone QoS value drops below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is reported as deactivated. The value for ZQWAT must be higher than the value of ZQUAT.
CHG ZQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss>
<WarnRFactor>
Change VQ Warning thresholds, where: pvqm-4.0
• WarnJitter = 0-(20)-100%
• WarnLatency = 0-(20)-100%
• WarnPacketLoss = 0-(20)-100%
• WarnRFactor = 0-(20)-100%
Note:
Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the
Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.
CHG ZQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency>
<UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>
Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a zone basis, where:
• UnacpJitter = 0-(2)-100%
• UnacpLatency = 0-(2)-100%
• UnacpPacketLoss = 0-(2)-100%
• UnacpRFactor = 0-(2)-100% pvqm-4.0
Note:
Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the
Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.
1130 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
CHG ZTDF <Zone> <TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice>
Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice = -1380 to 1380 minutes
(Minus 23 hours to plus 23 hours), time difference in minutes basic-7.0
0
CLR CACR <Near Zone> {<Near VPNI>} {<Far Zone>} {<Far
VPNI>} zcac-4.5
0
Clear zone-to-zone record for near (VPNI-Zone) per far (VPNI-
Zone), where:
• Near Zone = 0–255
• Near Zone = 0–8000
• Near VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier
• Far Zone = 0–255
• Far Zone = 0–8000
• Far VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier zcac-7.0
0 zcac-7.0
0
DIS SHELLS SECURE basic-4.5
0
Disables all secure shells in the system, includes SSH, SFTP, and SCP sessions.
Warning:
Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX.
SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.
DIS SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5
0
Disables all insecured shells in the system, includes TELNET,
RLOGIN, and FTP sessions.
Warning:
Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1131
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
DIS TRANSFERS INSECURE
Description Pack/Rel
basic-6.0
0
Disable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system.
Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.
Note:
SFTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time.
Note:
Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.
DIS TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0
0
Disable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol). Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and
IPMG devices.
Important:
SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.
Note:
FTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time.
Note:
Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.
ECNT CARD Print all registered IP Phones with associated card.
basic-4.5
0
ECNT CARD l s c [<customer>] basic
4.50
Print the number of IP Phones registered, where:
• l s c = loop, shelf, card
• customer = customer number associated with this command
Note:
Partial TN are allowed
1132 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
ECNT FW
Description
Print all registered IP Phones for each available firmware ID
Pack/Rel
basic-4.5
0 basic-4.5
0
ECNT FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>]
Print the number of IP Phones, where:
• XX = firmware ID
• A = major version designator
• BB = minor version designator
• FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where:
- (==) = equal to
- != = not equal to
- < = less then
- > = greater then
ECNT MODL Print the number of registered IP Phones with model name basic-4.5
0 basic-4.5
0
ECNT MODL <MMMM>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where:
MMMM = IP Phone model name, where:
- 2001P2 = IP Phone 2001 Phase 2
- 2002 = IP Phone 2002
- 2002P2 = IP Phone 2002 Phase 2
- 2004 = IP Phone 2004
- 2004P2 = IP Phone 2004 Phase 2
- 2033 IP Phone 2033 Conference Phone
- 2210 IP Phone 2210 Wireless Handset
ECNT NODE Print registered IP Phones for all nodes
ECNT NODE <nodeNum>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: nodeNum =the specified node basic-4.5
0 basic-4.5
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1133
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
ECNT PEC Print the number of registered IP Phones by PEC
ECNT PEC <PEC>
Pack/Rel
basic-4.5
0 basic-4.5
0
Print the number of IP Phones, where:
PEC = Product Engineering Code
ECNT SS Print the number of registered IP Phones for all signaling servers basic-4.5
0
ECNT SS <hostName> basic-4.5
0
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: hostName = host name assigned to signaling server
Note:
If the hostName variable contains an underscore (_), then an
NPR001 error message is returned. An underscore is considered to be an invalid character.
ECNT ZONE Print the number of registered IP Phones for all zones basic-4.5
0
ECNT ZONE <zoneNum> <customer> basic-4.5
0
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where:
• zoneNum = specified zone
• customer = customer number associated with this command
ENL / DIS ERL <ERL>
Enable / Disable specified ERL.
ENL / DIS L3VPN basis-5.0
basic-5.0
0
Enable / Disable the VPN tunneling (on both sides).
ENL / DIS NTP basic-5.0
0
Enable / Disable NTP.
1134 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
These commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Note:
To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element
Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.
ENL / DIS RFC2833PRT basic-5.0
0
Enable / Disable the info message printing.
ENL SHELLS SECURE basic-4.5
0
Enables all secure shells.
ENL SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5
0
Enables all unsecured shells.
ENL SYSTEM RESTORE basic-6.0
0
Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.
ENL TRANSFERS INSECURE basic-6.0
0
Enable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system.
Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.
Note:
Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.
ENL TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0
0
Enable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol) on the system. Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1135
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description Pack/Rel
Important:
SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.
Note:
Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.
EXPORT a The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).
basic-4.0
0
EXPORT EDT basic-4.0
0
The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).
EXPORT EPT basic-6.0
0
FLTH 0 -
9
IMPORT
EPT
Store Event Preference Table file to disk/PCMCIA
Failed log in threshold (in minutes)
The EPT file stored on the floppy / PC Card (a:/smpserv.db) drive is copied to the hard drive (/u/db/smpserv.db).
GEN ZONEFILE <fileName> basic-5.0
0 basic-4.0
0 basic-7.0
0
Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server. You can use the <fileName> parameter to specify a file name and file path for the CSV file. If you do not specify a file name and file path, a file named zone.csv is created and stored in the /u/db directory. After you execute this command the location of the file is displayed.
Note:
The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range
0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
1136 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
IMPORT ZONEFILE <fileName>
Description Pack/Rel
basic-7.0
0
Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist.
If you do not specify a file name and file path, an attempt is made to use the zone.csv file stored in the /u/db directory; otherwise the command will use the file name and file path that you specify.
The output for this command is the number of zones successfully added or changed.
Note:
The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range
0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
INV ENTITY SETS <ON> (OFF) STATUS basic-4.0
0
Turn ON the inclusion of digital telephones and IP Phones in the
Entity MIB Turn OFF the inclusion of digital telephones and IP
Phones in the Entity MIB Display whether or not the digial telephones and IP Phones are included in the Entity MIB.
The output displays either ON or OFF.
INV GENERATE
Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL or ABORT
INV GENERATE ABORT
Abort any currently running Inventory generations.
INV GENERATE ALL
Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating both the card and telsets Inventory file.
INV GENERATE CARDS
Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the
Inventory file for all of the cards in the system. The generation produces an inventory file with all of the cards configured on the system. Those cards that are present in the system and have card ID are noted in the inventory file with their card type, TN,
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1137
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
and card ID. Those cards that do not have card ID or are not present in the system, is noted to be "Unavailable" in place of their card ID.
Pack/Rel
INV GENERATE SETS
Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the
Inventory file for the digital telsets with their telsets' IDs that have been configured in the system. Those telsets that are present in the system and have sets ID are noted in the inventory file with their sets type, TN, sets ID, DES, Primary DN. Those telsets that do not have sets ID or ar not present in the sytem is noted to be
"Unavailable" in place of their sets ID.
INV GENERATE ABORT basic-5.0
0
Abort the inventory generation for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT.
System message MAT055 is printed on the TTY when Inventory
Location Report is aborted.
INV GENERATE ALL basic-5.0
0
Inventory files for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT.
INV GENERATE LOCRPT basic-5.0
0
Inventory Location Report for all the IP Phones in the TN table.
The inventory file “locrpt.inv” is generated in the path [c:]/u/db/ inv/. System message MAT052 is printed on the TTY when the generation is complete.
INV MIDNIGHT
Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL, OFF or
STATUS (admin)
INV MIDNIGHT ALL
Scheduling for the Midnight to run both Card and Sets Inventory generations.
INV MIDNIGHT CARDS
Scheduling for the Midnight to run Card Inventory generation.
INV MIDNIGHT OFF
1138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Turns off Midnight run off Card and Sets Inventory generations.
INV MIDNIGHT SETS
Scheduling for the Midnight to run Sets Inventory generation.
INV MIDNIGHT STATUS
Print out the state of the Midnight schedule of Inventory.
INV PRT
Refer to INV PRT STATUS command.
Pack/Rel
INV PRT
ALL
Requests for both the Card Inventory file and the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).
INV PRT CARDS
Requests for the Card Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).
INV PRT LOCRPT basic-5.0
0
Print the generated Inventory Location Report file.
INV PRT SETS
Requests for the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY)
INV PRT STATUS
Requests for the status of the Inventory feature. Result may look somewhat:
Inventory status:
Card file status is Ok
43 records; 18/03/1999 17:10:21
Sets file status is Ok
19 records; 18/03/1999 16:44:09
****
Abort overlay. This command can also be used to abort any
Inventory file printing.
LOCRPT
ALL
Print location report for all IP phones.
basic-5.0
0
LOCRPT DN x basic-5.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1139
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified DN (or partially-specified DN).
Pack/Rel
LOCRPT ECL x basic-5.0
0
Print location report for the IP phone(s) in the specified ECL.
LOCRPT ERL basic-5.0
0
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified
Emergency Response Location (ERL).
LOCRPT HWID x basic-5.0
0
Print location report for the IP phone with the specified (or partially-specified) Hardware Identifier (HWID)
LOCRPT IP basic-5.0
0
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified
IP Address.
LOCRPT MANUALUPDATE/MU basic-5.0
0
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are Manual-
Update (ManualUpdate=True).
LOCRPT NEEDUPDATE/NU basic-5.0
0
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that need a location update (NeedsUpdate=True).
LOCRPT ROAMING basic-5.0
0
Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are not at home
(example their Current ECL is different from their Home ECL).
Note:
This applies only when the Home ECL is not unknown
(zero).
This does not apply to Manual Update phones, because by definition, they are always at home.
1140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
LOCRPT TN x
Description
Inactivity timeout (in minutes)
NEW BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified TN (or partially-specified TN).
LOCRPT UNALLOCATED/UNKNOWN basic-5.0
0
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are Auto-
Update and ERL=Unknown.
Note:
This is not the same as “LOCRPT ERL 0” – ERL 0 are Auto
Update phones.
LOCRPT UNREG basic-5.0
0
Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are unregistered but have a TN table entry.
LOUT 0 - (20) - 1440 basic-5.0
0 grprim-4
.00
Add a new Backup Rule, where:
• xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system.
• a...a = SCS. Currently, this is the only rule type that exists: it allows direct replication to another system.
• b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system.
• yy = the number of database versions to save on the destination system = (2)-10.
NEW BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>]
[<name>]
Change backup rule to an Fixed Media Device (FMD), where:
• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and basic-4.5
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1141
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD
43).
• FMD = mnemonic for this rule type
• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device
• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed
Pack/Rel
Note:
The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS
1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).
NEW BKPR <rule number> FTP <IP addr> <login><pwd>
<path> [<N of versions>] [<name>]
Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where:
• <rule number> = 1-100
Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic
Redundancy Database Replication Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43).
• FTP = mnemonic for this rule type
• <IP addr> = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data
• <login> = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters basic-4.5
0
• <pwd> = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters
• <path> = path on the FTP server where the backup data file
(or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters
• <N of versions> = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server
• <name> = rule name
Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed
Note:
The only backup rule type that can be referenced from
GRDRC is SCS.
1142 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000
Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.
NEW BKPR <rule number> RMD [<N of versions>] [<name>] basic-4.5
0
Change backup rule to a Removable Media Device (RMD), where:
• <rule number> = 1-100
Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/
RSR commands activated from LD 43).
• RMD = mnemonic for this rule type
• <N of versions> = (1)-10
Number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device.
• <name> = rule name
Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed
Note:
The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS
1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).
NEW BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP>
<FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>
Add a backup schedule, where:
• <schedule number> = (1)-10
Up to 10 backup schedules can be defined.
• <Rule for BKUP> = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation
• <FREQ> = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where:
- M = monthly
- W = weekly
- D = daily
- A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A.
basic-4.5
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1143
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
When <FREQ> = D, the next parameter is <HOUR> where:
• <DAY> = day of the week
Where:
- (SU) = Sunday
- MO = Monday
- TU = Tuesday
- WE = Wednesday
- TH = Thursaday
- FR = Friday
- SA = Saturday
- (1)- 31
Note:
Only applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M.
Note:
When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month.
• <HOUR> = 0-(3)-23
Pack/Rel
Note:
This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.
NEW / OUT ELIN <erl> <tn> basic-5.0
0
Associate / Disassociate specified TN to specified ERL.
Note:
The TN must already be configured to compose an ANI that is registered in the ALI database against this emergency location.
For Small System, the TN format is “c u”
For Large System, the TN format is “l s c u”.
NEW EPT aa... a INFO x alrm_filte r-21
Assign Information severity to new EPT entry, where:
1144 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry.
Pack/Rel
NEW EPT aa... a EDT x
Assign NT-defined severity from EDT to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry.
alrm_filte r-21
NEW EPT aa... a MAJOR x
Assign Major severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry.
alrm_filte r-21
NEW EPT aa... a MINOR x
Assign Minor severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry.
alrm_filte r-21
NEW EPT aa... a CRITICAL x
Assign Critical severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-
Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG
SUPPRESS entry.
alrm_filte r-21
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1145
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description Pack/Rel
NEW ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend>
<staticELIN> <osdn>]
Add an ERL table entry, where:
• <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier
Number in the range 1-65535.
• <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL
- RT = by route number
- RLI = by Route Line Index
• <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token)
- route number = as specified in LD 16
- route line index number = as specified in LD 86
• <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90
• <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls
• <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)
• <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN
To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.
basic-5.0
0
NEW GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc grprim-4
.00
Add a GRDRC block, where:
• xxx = Backup Rule number.
• aaa = how the automatic database replication to the secondary system occurs (Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD):
- SCHD - according to defined backup schedule
- (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation
- MIDN - after midnight data dump only
- NO - not allowed
• yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>.
1146 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• bbb = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic restore operation on the secondary system is allowed.
• ccc = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system is allowed. ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES.
Pack/Rel
NEW GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a
grprim-4
.00
Add a new GRSC block, where:
• xxx = the number (N) of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the
ACTIVATING state. If no value is entered, xxx = 1. The maximum value of xxx is: 10% x (Basic IP User License + IP
User License).
• yyy = Short Term Failure Timer, in minutes = (5) - 600
• zzz = Failure Clearance Timer, in minutes = (5) - 180
• a..a = Secondary system Deactivation Mode = (AUTO)/MAN
NEW GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>] basic-5.0
0
Add a Survivable Remote Gateway Backup, where:
• FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where:
- M = monthly
- W = weekly
- D = daily
• DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ
= M, where:
- (SU) = Sunday
- MO = Monday
- TU = Tuesday
- WE = Wednesday
- TH = Thursday
- FR = Friday
- SA = Saturday
- (1)-31
When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1147
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• HOUR = 0-(3)-23
• MINUTE = (0)-59
• DELAY = (3)-60
The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups.
The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and creates a
BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.
Pack/Rel
NEW HOST DEV_SIDE0_HSP <ip address> basic-4.5
0
Configure the HSP ip address
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Configure the HSP ip address
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
NEW HOST <hostname> <IPaddress>
Configure a new host entry, where;
• host name must exist in the host table
• default setting for the Primary IP address is: 137.135.128.253
• default setting for Primary Host Name is: PRIMARY_ENET
• default setting for the Secondary IP address is:
137.135.128.254
• default setting for the Secondary Host Name is:
SECONDARY_ENET.
Note:
Host Name Syntax: A host name can be up to 16 characters in length. The first character of a host name must be a letter of the alphabet. A character can be a letter, number, or underscore(_). A period is used as a delimiter between domain names. Spaces and tabs are not permitted. No distinction is made between upper and lower case.
1148 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix>
<country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>
<ttbl>]
Configure a new numbering zone with specified (optional) ZBD zone parameters.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number
A number from 1-1023.
• ZBD zone parameters:
- <site_prefix> = site prefix
A number from 0-9999.
- <country_code> = country code
A number from 0-9999.
- <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)
A number from 0-9999.
- <ac1> = trunk access code 1
A number from 0-99.
- <ac2> = trunk access code 2
A number from 0-99.
- <natc> = national dial code
A number from 0-9999.
- <intc> = international dial code
A number from 0-9999.
- <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call
A number from (0)-1.
- <ttbl> = tone table
A number from (0)-32.
zbd-6.00
Note:
Default values (hard-coded) are used for the ZBD numbering zone parameters, if they are not specified.
NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES <zoneStartNumber> <zoneAmount>
<intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy>
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1149
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
<interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy>
<zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>
Create new bandwidth zones.
This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting from
<zoneStartNumber>
. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created.
Where:
• zoneStartNumber = Zone number [0–8000]
Pack/Rel
basic-7.0
0
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
• zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be created [1-8001]
• intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to
10000000 Kbps)
• intraZoneStrategy = Intrazone preferred strategy (Best
Quality (BQ) or Best Bandwidth (BB))
• interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to
10000000 Kbps)
• interZoneStrategy = Interzone preferred strategy (BQ or BB)
• zoneIntent = MO (default), BMG, or VTRK
• zoneResourceType = shared or private
NEW ROUTE <network IP address> <gateway IP address>
Configure a new routing entry
<IP address>= valid IP address
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
NEW SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> <ERL> <ECL>
"<Description>"
Add a subnet entry where: basic-5.0
0
1150 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• ip address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
• mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
• ERL and ECL = 0-65535
• Description = 20 alphanumeric characters within quotation marks.
Pack/Rel
NEW ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>
<replacement string> [<description>]
Configure a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string
Unique inside a numbering zone.
• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string
If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>
= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.
If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.
• <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry
If not specified, the ZDID table entry has no textual description.
zbd-6.00
NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type>
[<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>]
["<description>"]
Create a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits
Unique inside a numbering zone.
• <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts
After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified:
- If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/
AC2+replacement string.
zbd-6.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1151
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
- If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string.
- If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC
+replacement string.
- If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string.
- If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC
+ZNPA+replacement string
- If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/
AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string
- If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/
AC2+replacement string
- If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string
- If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string
• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string
If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>
= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.
If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.
• [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match
If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches.
• [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry
If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.
Pack/Rel
NEW ZONE <zoneNumber> [<intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]
Create a new zone with the following parameters:
• zoneNumber = 0–255 zone number
• zoneNumber = 0–8000 zone number basic-7.0
0 basic-4.5
0 basic-7.0
0
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the
1152 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
• intraZoneBandwidth = 0-10000000 Kbps
• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:
- (BQ for Best Quality
- BB for Best Bandwidth)
• interZoneBandwidth = 0-10000000 Kbps
• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:
- (BQ for Best Quality
- BB for Best Bandwidth)
- zoneIntent = type of zone, where:
• MO = Main Office zone
• BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone
• VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone
- zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:
• (shared) = shared DSP channels
• private = private DSP channels
NEW ZONE <x...x>
Create a new Zone with the following default bandwidth values:
• 10000000 Kbps for intraZoneBandwidth
• BQ for intraZoneStrategy
• 10000000 Kbps for interZoneBandwidth
• BQ for interZoneStrategy
NEW ZONE <x...x> aa
Create a new Zone, where: aa = one of the following bandwidths:
- intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
- intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:
• BQ = Best Quality
Pack/Rel
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1153
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• BB = Best Bandwidth
- interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
- interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:
• BQ = Best Quality
• BB = Best Bandwidth
Pack/Rel
NEW ZONE <zoneNumber> [<intraZoneBandwidth>
<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>
<interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]
Configure a new zone, where:
• zoneNumber = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000 zcac-4.5
0 zcac-7.0
0
Caution:
Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth
Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.
• intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:
- BQ = Best Quality
- BB = Best Bandwidth
• interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps
• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:
- BQ = Best Quality
- BB = Best Bandwidth
• zoneIntent = type of zone, where:
- MO = Main Office zone
- BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone
- VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone
• zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:
- (shared) = shared DSP channels
- private = private DSP channels
1154 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
OUT BKPR <rule number>
Description Pack/Rel
grprim-4
.00
Remove backup rule, where <rule number> = a rule number from 1-100.
If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are removed.
OUT BKPS <schedule number 1-10> basic-4.5
0
Remove backup schedule
OUT EPT <a...a> | ALL alrm_filte r-21
Delete an entry in the Event Preference Table (EPT)
Where:
• a...a = identifier of EPT table entry
• ALL = delete all EPT table entries
OUT ERL <ERL#>
Delete an ERL entry.
OUT GRDRC Remove current GRDRC Block
OUT GRNS
OUT GRSC
Remove all backup schedules that reference backup rules of type SCS.
Remove GRSC Block grprim-4
.00
basic-5.0
0 grprim-4
.00
OUT HOST nnn
Delete configured host entry (delete host from network host table).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
OUT HSP_MASK basic-4.5
0
Removes the configured HSP subnet mask from the Call Server and replaces it with the default HSP subnet mask
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1155
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES basic-7.0
0
Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones.
This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than <zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted.
Where:
• zoneStartNumber = Zone number [0–8000]
• zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be deleted [1-8001]
OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone)
Remove a ZBD numbering zone, where <numbering zone) = a number from 1-1023.
zbd-6.00
OUT ROUTE nn
Delete configured routing entry
OUT SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> basic-5.0
0
OUT ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>
Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits
Unique inside a numbering zone.
zbd-6.00
OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>
Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits
Unique inside a numbering zone.
zbd-6.00
1156 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
OUT ZONE <x...x>
Description
Remove an existing zone.
PDT (NO)/ PDT1 / PDT2
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
PDT Access.
Note:
Aavailable only when adding/modifying LAPW, Level 1
(PWD1) and Level 2 (PWD2) users.
PORT ACCESS CUSTOM
Configures a custom Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system.
Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:
1. Check to ensure a custom Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure.
If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted.
2. Displays a warning that enabling a custom Access
Restrictions rules file could possibly have detrimental effects on the system, and prompts the user to confirm the action (Y or N).
3. Check to ensure that the custom Access Restrictions rules file will load.
If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted.
4. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access
Restrictions feature is already enabled, disable the existing
Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access
Restrictions rules.
5. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access
Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enable it and set the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL.
Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared.
6. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file.
7. Load the custom Access Restrictions rules file.
If a problem is encountered when loading the custom
Access Restrictions rules file, the system displays an error, aborts the command, and returns the Access Restrictions feature to its previous state.
8. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to
Custom.
basic-6.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1157
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file.
9. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the mandatory and custom Access
Restrictions rules files version numbers.
An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file.
Pack/Rel
Note:
When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,
OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.
PORT ACCESS DEFAULT
Configures the default Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system.
Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:
1. Check to ensure a default Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure.
It is not expected that any errors will occur when processing the default Access Restrictions rules file.
2. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access
Restrictions feature is already enabled, delete the existing
Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access
Restrictions rules.
3. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access
Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enables it and sets the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL.
Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared.
4. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file.
5. Load the default Access Restrictions rules file.
6. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to
Default.
basic-6.0
0
1158 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file.
7. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros.
An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file.
Pack/Rel
Note:
When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,
OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.
PORT ACCESS OFF
Disables all Access Restrictions rules in the system.
Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:
1. Disable all enabled Access Restrictions rules.
2. Deactivate the VxWorks firewall facility.
3. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to
OFF.
An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational.
4. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros.
An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational.
basic-6.0
0
Note:
When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,
OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1159
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
PORT ACCESS SHOW CUSTOM
Description Pack/Rel
basic-6.0
0
Display the Access Restrictions rules in the CUSTOM Access
Restrictions rules file in tabular format.
PORT ACCESS SHOW DEFAULT basic-6.0
0
Display the Access Restrictions rules in the DEFAULT Access
Restrictions rules file in tabular format.
PORT ACCESS STATUS [ALL] basic-6.0
0
Display the global state of the Access Restrictions feature.
If the [ALL] parameter is specified, the system polls all endpoints to determine their local Access Restrictions state:
• If there are any cards that don’t have matching file signatures, or that can’t be contacted, they are displayed.
A list of the possible failures is as follows:
- CS local state incorrect: <CS state>
- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> state not received
- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect state of <bad state>
- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default and custom file
- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default file
- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect custom file
• If all cards have matching file signatures, a message is displayed indicating that all endpoints match.
PORT ACCESS VALIDATE basic-6.0
0
Validates the rules in a CUSTOM file and Prints out what is wrong with the file.
PRT ADMIN_COMM basic-4.0
0
Print the administration group read-only community name strings.
If administration group community strings have been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC
SNMPCONF command, the PRT ADMIN_COMM command basic-6.0
0
1160 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
prints the added and modified strings in an "OVLY 117
Configuration" area and the existing community strings in an
"ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
Pack/Rel
PRT APPSRV
Print the IP address of the application server for PD.
PRT AQOS <attribute> <zone / ALL>
Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL). Where:
Attribute = 1 - 32
Defined in the Traffic Report 16 (see Traffic Measurement
Formats and Outputs Reference, NN43001-750), for example
"Interzone warning jitter count".
basic-4.5
PRT BKPR xxx grprim-4
.00
Print backup rule, where: xxx = a rule number ID 1-100
If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are printed.
PRT BKPR <rule number 1-100> basic-4.5
0
Print backup rule, where: rule number = 1-100
PRT BKPS ALL basic-4.5
0
Print all backup schedules
PRT BKPS <schedule number 1-10> basic-4.5
0
Print backup schedule
PRT CAB
Prints all data related to survivability.
PRT DNIP <DN> [<CustomerNo>]
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1161
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Pint a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN.
Pack/Rel
Note:
A partial DN can be entered.
Sample output:
=> PRT DNIP 4000 0 (only search customer 0 for DN) CUST 00
DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone Status
------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002 03
SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR
47.11.215.39 000 REG => prt dnip 4000 (same DN in different customers) CUST 00 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone
Status ------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002
03 SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR
47.11.215.39 000 REG CUST 01 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP
Address Zone Status -------------------------------------------------------
061-10 i2004 05 MCR 47.11.215.38 001 REG
PRT EDT aa... a alrm_filte r-21
Print a single Event Default Table (EDT) event, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
PRT EDT aa... a bb...b
alrm_filte r-21
Print a range of Event Default Table (EDT) events, where:
• aa... a = first entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• bb...b = last entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
PRT EDT <severity <eventID> <eventID> basic-4.0
0
The entries in the EDT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.
PRT ELIN [ALL] / <erl> basic-5.0
0
Print ELINs for ALL / specified ERL.
PRT ENABLE_TRAPS basic-6.0
0
1162 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Display the enabled/disabled parameter for all SNMP traps.
Pack/Rel
PRT ELNK Display active and inactive Ethernet interface IP addresses
(display active and inactive ELAN IP addresses).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT EPT aa... a alrm_filte r-21
Print a single Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025
PRT EPT aa... a bb...b
alrm_filte r-21
Print specific Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where:
• aa... a = first entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
• bb...b = last entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000,
ERR0025)
PRT EPT
ALL
Print all entries in Event Preference Table (EPT)
PRTS PRTS EDT alrm_filte r-21 basic-4.0
0
Print entries in Event Default Table by Severity
PRTS EPT severity <eventID> <eventID> basic-4.0
0
The entries in the EPT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.
PRT ERL [ALL] basic-5.0
0
Print all ERL entries.
PRT ERL [<ERL #> [<+/-Count>]
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1163
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
PRT ES1
PRT ES2
Description
Print the specified ERL entry, or a “page” of ERLs starting from the specified ERL..
Pack/Rel
Print Echo Server 1's IP address and port number.
Print the Echo Server 2's IP address and port number.
basic-4.0
0 basic-4.0
0
PRT ESS Print both Echo Server's IP address and port number.
PRT FMT_OUTPUT basic-4.0
0 alrm_filte r-21
PRT GRDRC
PRT GRSC
Print formatted output string
Print GRDRC Block
Print GRSC Block grprim-4
.00
grprim-4
.00
PRT HOST Display network host table entries (enabled and disabled hosts).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT HSP_MASK
Retrieves the manually configured HSP mask from the Call
Server if it exists and outputs it to the screen, otherwise it prints the default HSP subnet mask (255.255.255.0)
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT INTERZONE {<nearZone>} {<farZone>} {<nearVPNI>}
{<farVPNI>}
Print interzone statistics between near (VPNI - Zone) and far
(VPNI - Zone), where: zcac-4.5
0
1164 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• NEAR END = ZONE and VPNI
• FAR END = ZONE and VPNI
• State = ENL/DIS
• Type= PRIVATE/SHARED
• Strategy = BB/BQ
• ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK
• QoS factor = %
• Bandwidth = number of Kbps
• Sliding Max = number of Kbps
• Usage = number of Kbps
• Peak = %
• Average = number of Kbps
• Alarms = Aph
Pack/Rel
Note:
The report rows are grouped as:
• First row = summary bandwidth usage per near zone
• Next rows = bandwidth usage per near (VPNI- Zone) and far
(VPNI - Zone)
• With release 4.50 the PRT ZONE command is not used.
Note:
The interzone command printout shows the Bandwidth usage for inter zone calls only.
PRT INTRAZONE {<zone>} zcac-4.5
0
Print intrazone statistics for all or for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
• State = ENL/DIS
• Type = PRIVATE/SHARED
• Strategy = BB/BQ
• ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK
• Bandwidth = number of Kbps zcac-7.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1165
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• Usage = number of Kbps
• Peak = %
Note:
The intrazone command printout shows bandwidth usage for both intra and inter zone calls.
PRT IPDN <IPAddress>
Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address.
Sample output for PRT IPDN 47.11.215.38:
IP 47.11.215.38
CUST 01 TN 061-10 TYPE i2004 ZONE 001 REG
Key DN CPND Name
---------------------------------------------
00 SCR 4010 I2004_1 VLN61-10
05 MCR 4000 i2004_cust1 vln61_10
Pack/Rel
Note:
An IP address can be specified with only the leading digits
(for example, 47.11). An IP address with zeroes at the end can be specified (for example, 47.11.0.0)
PRT IPR x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the
IP Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where x = 1-4.
supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all
IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)
PRT IPM x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the
Main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4
PRT IPMG supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all
IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)
PRT LCL
Prints the Local Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values
(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS) basic-6.0
0
1166 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
PRT L3ELAN [side / CR] [role / CR]
Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
PRT L3MASK [side / CR]
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Display the physical addresses of the CS cores. Where:
• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
• Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.
PRT L3GW [side] basic-5.0
0
Display the default gateway for physical ELAN. Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
PRT L3HSP <side / CR> basic-5.0
0
Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
PRT L3HSPGW [side / CR] basic-5.0
0
Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
PRT L3HSPMASK [side / CR] basic-5.0
0 basic-5.0
0
Display the ELAN mask. Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
PRT L3PRIV [role] basic-5.0
0
Display the ELAN virtual ACTIVE and INACTIVE addresses.
Where:
• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
• Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1167
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
PRT LDAPSYNC
Description Pack/Rel
basic-6.0
0
Display the parameters of the Unicode Name Directory <-> CND
LDAP scheduled data synchronization task.
PRT MASK basic-5.0
0
Display subnet mask stored in database.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT MEDS
Print Mediation Server Selection feature
PRT MGMT_ALARM
Print MGMT SNMP traps setting
PRT MSEC ALL basic-5.0
0
Print System-wide media security configuration, and the media security CLS for all TNs.
PRT MSEC IP <ip_addr> basic-5.0
0
Print Media SECcurity class of service (CLS) for a specified IP address where:
<ip_addr> = full or partial IP address
PRT MSEC SYS basic-5.0
0
PRT MSEC TN
Print system wide Media SECurity configuration.
basic-5.0
0
Print Media SECurity CLS for a specified full or partial TN.
PRT NAV_SITE basic-4.0
0
1168 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Print the navigation site name
Pack/Rel
If the navigation site name has been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT NAV_SITE command prints the modified navigation site name in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing navigation site name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the
"OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
PRT NAV_SYSTEM basic-4.0
0
Print the navigation system name
If the navigation system name has been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT NAV_SYSTEM command prints the modified navigation system name in an "OVLY 117
Configuration" area and the existing navigation system name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" change is activated and becomes part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
PRT NBWMM CFG
Print CS Configuration table
PRT NBWMM REG
Print CS Registration Information table
PRT NBWMM STAT
Print CS Network status table
PRT NDAPP basic-6.0
0
Print the Name Directory application parameters.
=> PRT NDAPP
NDApplState=Enabled
NDlookupTimer=4000
PRT NKT Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.
basic-4.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1169
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
PRT NTP
Description
Display the current configuration parameters of NTP.
Displayed parameters include:
• IP addresses of primary and secondary NTP servers
• values for the three threshold levels: Minimum, Warning, and
Maximum
• security mode: secure or insecure
• Key ID (if NTP is running in secure mode)
• time interval
• local time zone offset from UTC
• synchronization mode: manual or background
Pack/Rel
basic-5.0
0
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone)
Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone, where
<numbering zone> = 1-1023.
Output:
• <PREF> = site prefix
A number from 0-9999.
• <CC> = country code
A number from 0-9999.
• <NPA> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)
A number from 0-9999.
• <AC1> = trunk access code 1
A number from 0-99.
• <AC2> = trunk access code 2
A number from 0-99.
• <NATC> = national dial code
A number from 0-9999.
• <INTC> = international dial code
A number from 0-9999.
• <DAC> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call
A number from (0)-1.
• <TTBL> = tone table zbd-6.00
1170 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
A number from (0)-32.
Description Pack/Rel
Note:
If <numbering zone> is not specified, all numbering zones are printed.
PRT NZDES [<numbering zone>]
Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone.
Note:
Descriptions for all numbering zones are printed if
<numbering zone> is not specified.
zbd-6.00
PRT OPEN_ALARM
Display SNMP open alarm trap settings.
If SNMP open alarm trap settings have been added or modifed in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command, the PRT OPEN_ALARM command displays the new
(not yet activated) SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "OVLY
117 Configuration" area, and the existing (currently active)
SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the
"OVLY 117 Configuration" open alarm changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
PRT PDBAK
Print parameters for remote backup of PD
Print the current PDV value PRT PDV
PRT PPP
PRT PTM
Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es)
Print current Point-to-point Protocol idle timer settings
PRT QOS Print the current and average QOS values
PRT QSTHS Print all VQ thresholds
PRT RCL Prints the Remote Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values
(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).
PRT ROUTE Display routing table entries stored in the database.
pvqm-4.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1171
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
PRT SEL [nn] [aaaa]
Print most recent record(s) in system event list, where:
• [nn] = 0-(20)-SELSIZE
• [aaaa] = category name (for example, BUG)
All categories are printed if not specified.
basic-4.5
PRT SELSIZE
Print System Event List size
PRT SNMP_SYSGRP basic-4.0
0
Print all parameters of the MIB-II system group.
If MIB-II system group parameters have been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command
(not activated), the PRT SNMP_SYSGRP command prints the modified MIB-II system group parameters in an "OVLY 117
Configuration" area and the existing MIB-II system group parameters in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the
SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117
Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the
"ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
PRT SUBNET [ALL] basic-5.0
0
Print all subnet entries.
PRT SUBNET ECL <ecl> basic-5.0
0
Print all subnets that match the specified ECL.
PRT SUBNET ERL<erl> basic-5.0
0
Print all subnets that match the specified ERL.
PRT SUBNET <IP Address> basic-5.0
0
1172 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Print the specified subnet entry (or all entries that match a partially-specified IP address).
Pack/Rel
PRT SUBNET NTH <n-th> <count> basic-5.0
0
Print ‘count’ subnets starting from ‘n-th’ entry.
PRT SUPPRESS alrm_filte r-21
Print global suppress value
PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM basic-4.0
0
Prints the alarm suppression threshold value.
PRT SYSMGMT_COMM basic-4.0
0
Print the system management Read/Write/Trap community name strings
If system management read/write/trap community strings have been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the
SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT
SYSMGMT_COMM command prints the added and modified system management read/write/trap community strings in an
"OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing system management read/write/trap community strings in an "ACTIVE
Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.
basic-6.0
0
PRT TIMER Print global timer window length (in minutes). See
Global window timer length on page 1070for more information.
PRT VPNKEY alrm_filte r-21 basic-5.0
0
Display the pre-shared key:
PRT VPNNET basic-5.0
0
Display both VPN Network IP and Mask
PRT VPNROUTER <side / CR> <address type / CR> basic-5.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1173
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Display interface of VPN Router Where:
• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
• Address type = ‘PUBLIC’ / ‘PRIVATE’ VPN Router interface
Pack/Rel
PRT ZACB [<Zone>]
Print branch office zone dialing plans, where <zone> = branch office zone.
If <zone> is not specified, print branch office zone dialing plans for all branch office zones.
PRT ZALT [<zone number>]
Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0–
255.
Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0–
8000.
If <zone number> is not specified, print Alternate Prefix numbers for all configured zones.
basic-4.5
0 basic-7.0
0
PRT ZAST Print Alarms Suppress time interval for the zone.
PRT ZBW [<Zone>]
Print zone bandwidth utilization, where <zone> = zone.
If <zone> is not specified, print zone bandwidth utilization for all configured zones.
PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Dest Zone>] basic-4.5
0
Print a zone-to-zone QoS status for all zones, where:
• Source Zone = 0–255
• Source Zone = 0–8000
• Dest Zone = 0–255
• Dest Zone = 0–8000 basic-7.0
0 basic-7.0
0
PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> ALL basic-4.5
0
Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table for all zones, where,
• Source Zone = 1-255
• Source Zone = 1-8000
Table Output Fields are: basic-7.0
0
1174 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
• Source — Zone and VPNI
• Destination — Zone and VPNI
• QoS factor
• Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps)
• Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps)
• Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps)
• Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps)
Pack/Rel
PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Destination Zone>]
Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table, where:
• Source Zone = 0–255
• Source Zone = 0–8000
• Destination Zone = 0–255, and
• Destination Zone = 0–8000
Output Fields are:
• Source — Zone and VPNI
• Destination — Zone and VPNI
• QoS factor
• Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps)
• Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps)
• Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps)
• Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps) basic-7.0
0 basic-7.0
0
PRT ZCAC {<zone>} zcac-4.5
0
Print CAC parameters for all or for the identified zone, where:
• Local Zone = 0–255
• Local Zone = 0–8000
• State = ENL/DIS
• CR =1-100
• CPL =1-100
• CD =1-100
• CJ = 1-100
• CQOS = 1-100 zcac-7.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1175
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description Pack/Rel
• ZQRT = 1-100
• ZQRTI = 10-120
• ZQUAT = 1-99
• ZQWAT =1-99
• CACVT = 1-255
PRT ZDES [<DESMatchString>]
Print a table of the zone description entries.
PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]
Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits
Unique inside a numbering zone.
Only numbering zone-based call translations with the specified 1-16 digit numeric matching string are printed
If not specified, all numbering zone-based call translations are printed.
zbd-6.00
PRT ZDP [<Zone>]
Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.
PRT ZESA [<Zone>]
Print a table of branch office zone EmergencyServices Access
(ESA) entries.
PRT ZDST
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.
PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>] basic-6.0
0
Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans.
Feature 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.
Where:
• <numbering zone> = 1-1023
1176 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed.
• <matching string> = 1-16 digit numeric string
Unique inside a numbering zone.
Only numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans with the specified 1-16 digit matching string are printed.
If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed.
PRT ZONE ALL
Print zone information for all configured zones
PRT ZONE <x...x>
Print zone information for a specific zone, where:
• ZoneNumber = 0–255
• ZoneNumber = 0–8000
Pack/Rel
pvqm-7.0
0
PRT ZPAGE
This commands prints zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting from zone number <zoneNumber>. Data is printed for the following categories:
• zone number
• intrazone bandwidth
• intrazone strategy
• interzone bandwidth
• interzone strategy
• resource type
• zone intent
• description
PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]
Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone, where
<numbering zone> = 1-1023.
zbd-6.00
Note:
When no numbering zone is specified, parameters for all ZBD numbering zones are printed.
PRT ZQNL <ZoneNumber> pvqm-4.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1177
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Print the Notification Level for the specified zone, where:
• ZoneNumber = 0–255
• ZoneNumber = 0–8000
Pack/Rel
pvqm-7.0
0
PRT ZQNL ALL
Print the Notification Level for all zones.
pvqm-40
PRT ZQOS <zone> <attribute / ALL>
Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL). Where attribute is defined in the Traffic
Report 16 (see Traffic Measurement: Formats and Outputs
Reference, NN43001-750), for example "Interzone warning jitter count".
basic-4.5
PRT ZTDF [<Zone>]
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries
PRT ZTP [<Zone>]
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.
REGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE
Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for the element.
REGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM
Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for all system elements
RELOAD EPT basic-4.0
0
The new/modified EPT file is loaded into memory from disk (/u/ db/smpserv.db).
Reset IP sets with specified DN RST DN
RST ELNK ACTIVE
Reset Meridian 1 active Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset active ELAN IP address to default).
1178 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
RST ELNK INACTIVE
Reset Meridian 1 inactive Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset inactive ELAN IP address to default).
RST FW
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Print all scheduled reset times basic-4.5
0
RST FW <FWID> basic-4.5
0
Print all scheduled reset times by firmware ID
RST FW <FWID> START basic-4.5
0
Immedicate hard-reset all IP Phones, where:
FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones
RST FW <FWID> <START/STOP> <HH:MM> basic-4.5
0
Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where:
• FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones
• START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where:
- START = set reset time schedule
- STOP = cancel scheduled reset
• HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset
RST IPR x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the IP
Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1179
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
RST IPM x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the Main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4
Pack/Rel
RST MASK Reset subnet mask to default
RST PPP LOCAL
Reset local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value
RST PPP REMOTE
Reset remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value
RST PTM Reset Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to default
RST TN Reset IP set with specified TN
RST ZONE Print all scheduled reset times
RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> basic-4.5
0 basic-4.5
0
Print all scheduled reset times by zone
RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> START basic-4.5
0
Hard-reset all IP Phones, where:
ZoneNumer = zone number
RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> <START/STOP> <HH:MM> basic-4.5
0
Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where:
• ZoneNumer = zone number
• START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where:
- START = set reset time schedule
- STOP = cancel scheduled reset
• HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset
SECRET DEFAULT
1180 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Set the Secret to default value.
SECRET SET
Define the Secret
SECRET STAT
Print the Secret
SECURITY DOMAIN JOIN
Pack/Rel
basic-6.0
0
Establish mutual trust with the UCM Primary Security Server.
SECURITY DOMAIN LEAVE basic-6.0
0
Remove the UCM Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device.
SECURITY DOMAIN MODE [MANUAL | USER | AUTO]
Configure the UCM security domain management mode on the
Call Server.
Where:
• MANUAL = all devices must join the UCM security domain using local CLI commands
• USER = the user is prompted with a list of all currently active devices and is asked to confirm their addition to the UCM security domain
• AUTO = The credentials for the user accounts assigned the necessary role are cached on the Call Server so that they can be sent at a later time to any device that the Call Server requires to join the UCM security domain basic-6.0
0
SECURITY DOMAIN STAT basic-6.0
0
Display the IP address and fingerprint of the UCM Primary
Security Server.
Display ESALO information
STAT
ESALO
STAT IPMG [<supl shelf>] basic-5.0
0 basic-5.0
0
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1181
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Display the detailed status of all/one IPMG(s) configured on the system
Pack/Rel
STAT IPMG SUMMARY basic-5.0
0
Display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system. .
STAT L3VPN [side] basic-5.0
0
Display the VPN tunneling state. Where:
Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)
STAT NTP
Check status of NTP.
Status information displays in four categories—current NTP configuration, last NTP configuration, last synchronization error, and counters—and includes the following fields:
• NTP enabled or disabled (if disabled, the report includes no further information)
• IP addresses of the primary and secondary NTP servers
• local time zone offset from UTC
• time difference (delta) between system time and NTP server
• current threshold level: Minimal, Warning, Maximum
• secure mode of operation set to secure or insecure
• packets sent
• packets received basic-5.0
0
Note:
NTP status information also appears on the Date and Time page in Element Manager, under the Network Time Protocol field.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
STAT RFC2833 <TN>
Display RFC2833 capability for TN for selected <TN>.
basis-5.0
1182 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command
STAT SHELLS SECURE
Description Pack/Rel
basic-4.5
0
Indicates whether secured shell access is enabled or disabled.
STAT SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5
0
Indicates whether unsecured shell access is enabled or disabled.
STAT SNMPCONF
Display the status of the SYNC SNMPCONF command. The result indicates whether the SNMP parameters configured through LD 117 ("OVLY 117 Configuration") are synchronized with the CS.
There are two possible results:
• SNMP Configuration is in progress
When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is not executed, the new SNMP parameters are pending activation.
• SNMP Configuration is completed
When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed (new
SNMP parameters are activated).
basic-6.0
0
STAT TRANSFERS INSECURE basic-6.0
0
Display the status of the insecure File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
STAT TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0
0
Display the status of the secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).
STAT UCM SYS basic-6.0
0
Show UCM registration status for all system elements.
STAT UCM SYS REFRESH basic-6.0
0
Request UCM registration status update from all devices.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1183
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
STAT UCMSECURITY
Description
Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint
STAT VOLO
Display the active VOLO TN information
STAT ZALT <zone>
Pack/Rel
basic-4.5
0
Display Alternative Routing Status, where: zone = bandwidth zone
STAT ZBR [<zone>]
Display status of branch office zones, where: basic-4.0
0 zone = bandwidth zone
Note:
With release 4.50 this command supports Alternative Routing for NBWM.
basic-4.5
0
SSH KEY ACTIVATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE basic-5.0
0
Activates / Inactivates the pending SSH key by restarting the
SSH server
SSH KEY ACTIVATE CABINET n/ALL basic-5.0
0
Activates the pending SSH key on Cabinet n or ALL Cabinet by restarting the SSH server
SSH KEY CLEAR basic-5.0
0
Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.
SSH KEY CLEAR ACTIVE/ INACTIVE basic-5.0
0
Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.
SSH KEY CLEAR CABINET n/ ALL basic-5.0
0
1184 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description
Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.
Pack/Rel
SSH KEY GENERATE basic-5.0
0
Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.
SSH KEY GENERATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE basic-5.0
0
Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.
SSH KEY GENERATE CABINET n/ALL basic-5.0
0
Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.
SSH KEY SHOW basic-5.0
0
Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.
SSH KEY SHOW ACTIVE/ INACTIVE basic-5.0
0
Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.
SSH KEY SHOW CABINET n/ ALL basic-5.0
0
Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.
STIP DTLS <Node> <Connection_Type> <DTLS_Capability> basic-6.0
0
Display IP Phones based on signaling encryption related values, namely the type of connection currently in use by each IP Phone and their capability to make DTLS connections.
Where:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1185
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• <Node> = the node ID of the node the subject IP phones belong to, or “ALL” to omit node-based filtering
• <Connection_Type> = type of signaling encryption used
- INSECURE = no signaling encryption
- SECURE” = USec or DTLS
- DTLS = DTLS
- USEC = UNIStim Security
- ALL = all encryption types
• <DTLS_Capability> = capability to make DTLS connections
- YES = able to make DTLS connections
- NO = not able to make DTLS connections
- ALL = both capabilities
Pack/Rel
STIP FW Print the number of registered IP Phones with associated RLM data basic-4.5
0
STIP FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>] basic-4.5
0
Print the RLM data for registered IP Phones, where:
• XX = firmware ID
• A = major version designator
• BB = minor version designator
• FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where:
- (==) = equal to
- != = not equal to
- < = less then
- > = greater then
STIP MODL <MMMM> basic-4.5
0
Print the RLM for all IP Phones, where:
MMMM = IP Phone model
STOP NTP BACKGROUND basic-5.0
0
Stop background synchronization from running.
1186 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Administration commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
You cannot stop a background synchronization if no background routine is running. Attempts to do so result in an error message.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
SYNC NTP <Manual | BACKGROUND> basic-5.0
0
Synchronize with NTP server in manual or background mode.
Note:
Manual synchronization places LD 117 on hold for 15 seconds. During that time, you cannot abort from the overlay.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn] basic-4.0
0
Generate an alarm.
Where:
• aaaa = any character sequence.
However, to test how an existing system message category
(for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message.
• (nnnn )= any numeric sequence
Defaults to 0000.
The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter.
The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and EPT.
Nonexistent system messages have a severity of Info .
The following items are found in the details section of the trap output:
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1187
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated
• commonMIBSeverity
= defined by the EDT and EPT or
Info(5)
• commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the
Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS
(component type)
• commonMIBNotificationID = 0
• commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call
Server
• commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN
• commonMIBAlarmType = 8 (indicating unknown)
• commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown)
• commonMIBAlarmData
= Contains textual description
The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.
Pack/Rel
UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE
Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for the element.
UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM
Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for all system elements.
UPDATE DBS
Rebuild INET database and renumber host and route entry ID
(update network database).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Maintenance commands share the same entry format as Administration commands.
1188 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command
DIS BUF
ALL
DIS BUF
CDR
Description
Disable buffering for all data types
Disable buffering for CDR data
DIS BUF
STN
DIS BUF
TRF
Disable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync
Disable buffering for TRF data
Pack/Rel
DIS DBK Display database disaster recovery's backup & restore
DIS DVLA IDLELOGOUT
Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones Logout is disabled
DIS HOST n
Remove a host from the run time host table, where n = host entry number.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
DIS MEDS Disable Mediation Server Selection feature
DIS PPP Disable Point-to-point Protocol access (this enables PPPD)
DIS ROUTE n
Remove a route from the run time routing table, where n = route entry number.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
DIS ZALT <zone>
Disable ACR for zone, where:
• zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000 basic-4.50
basic-7.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1189
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Note:
Branch Office is configured at the Main Office
DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]
Disable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where:
• zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000
• ALL = all features
• LOC = Local Dialing Access
• ESA = Emergency Service Access
• TIM = Time Adjustment
• ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch
DIS ZCAC <Zone>
Disable Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
Pack/Rel
basic-4.00
basic-7.00
basic-4.50
zcac-4.50
zcac-7.00
Note:
Disables the feature on a zone by zone basis.
DIS ZONE <x...x>
Disable a Zone, No new calls is established inside the disabled zone, from or towards this Zone.
DVLA LOGOUTLIST <fileName>
Parses the specified file from /e/temp/ directory on Call
Server and logs out all DVLA IP Phones whose TNs are presented in the file.
The file must contain only the TN in string format (for example, 096 0 00 30) on each line.
basic-7.00
DVLA LOGOUTALL [<idleTime>]
Logs out all DVLA logged-on idle IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified).
basic-7.00
1190 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description
DVLA LOGOUTTN <loop><shelf><card><unit>
Logs out a specific DVLA IP Phone if it is logged in and idle.
ENL BUF
ALL
Enable buffering for all data types
ENL BUF CDR
Enable buffering for CDR data
ENL BUF STN
Enable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
ENL BUF TRF
Enable buffering for TRF data
ENL DBK Enable database disaster recovery's backup and restore
ENL DVLA
MIDNLOGOU
T nnnn
Enable Automatic DVLA IP Phones Logout during Midnight
Routine. DVLA IP Phone will be logged-out if it is inactive more then nnnn minutes, where: nnnn = 1- (30) - 1440 minutes basic-7.00
ENL HOST n
Add a host to run time host table, where n = host entry number.
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
ENL MEDS Enable Mediation Server Selection feature
ENL PPP
Enable Point-to-point Protocol access (Enables PPPD command)
ENL ROUTE n
Add a route to run time routing table, where n = route entry number .
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1191
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
ENL ZALT <zone>
Enable ACR for zone, where:
• zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000
Pack/Rel
basic-4.50
basic-7.00
Note:
Branch Office zone is configured at the Main Office
ENL ZBR <zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]
Enable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where:
• zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000
• ALL = all features
• LOC = Local Dialing Access
• ESA = Emergency Service Access
• TIM = Time Adjustment
• ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch
ENL ZCAC <Zone>
Enables Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000
Note:
Enables the feature on a zone by zone basis.
ENL ZONE <x...x>
Enable a Zone
PING Ping an IP address to test the network settings.
basic-4.00
basic-7.00
basic-4.50
zcac-4.50
zcac-7.0
1192 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
PRT DVLA IDLELOGOUT
Print the status of Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones logout
SET ENABLE_TRAPS (ON) | OFF
C Enable/disable the sending of SNMP traps.
Where:
• ON = enabled
• OFF = disabled basic-6.00
basic-6.00
SET
HSP_IP
Activates the HSP IP addresses and subnet mask
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
SET MASK
Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value (set runtime subnet mask to the configured value).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
SET MGMT_ALARM
Generate MGMT SNMP Traps
SET OPEN_ALARM <slot> <IP address> [<port>]
Add an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) trap destination.
Where: basic-4.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1193
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
• <slot> = 0-7
• <IP Address> = any valid value in an x.x.x.x format (TCP/
IP)
• <port> = destination port for the SNMP trap
Note:
When <port> is not specified, SNMP traps are routed to port 162 by default.
Pack/Rel
Note:
To clear an SNMP trap destination, specify appropriate
<slot> value and set <IP Address> = 0.0.0.0.
When SNMP open alarm trap destinations are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an "OVLY 117
Configuration" area pending activation. When the
SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP open alarm changes are activated and become part of the
"ACTIVE Configuration" (current) on the system.
basic-6.00
SET USN Set the unique system name for IP Peer System
STAT AUTONEG IPM
Display auto-negotiate status of Main Cabinet ports.
The following report is displayed:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/
CALL SERVER PORTS
----------------------------------------------------------
PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate
=================================
IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100
Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.
STAT AUTONEG IPR
Display auto-negotiate status of Expansion Cabinet ports.
The following report is displayed:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS -
EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS
------------------------------------------------------------------
1194 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description
PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate
=================================
IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100
Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.
Pack/Rel
STAT BUF Display buffer info (data type,% full, not ready)
STAT DBK Display status of disaster recovery (enabled, disabled)
STAT ELIN [ALL] / <erl>
Print current status of all ELINs in all / specified ERLs.
basic-5.00
STAT ELIN ACTIVE [<erl>]
Print active mappings for specified ERL, or all ERLs if none is specified.
basic-5.00
STAT HOST Display current runtime host table status (enabled hosts).
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
STAT IP
DTLS
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified UNIStim encr. and DTLS cap
STAT IP
FW
STAT IP
MODL
Display the Resource Locator Module information for
Ethersets with specified F/W ID(s)
STAT IP HOSTIP
Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified HOST IP
Display the Resource Locator Module information for
Ethersets of the specified Model Name
STAT IP
NODE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1195
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command
STAT IP SIPLUA
Description
Display the Resource Locator Module information for SIPL
TNs with matching User Agent ID
STAT IP TERMIP
Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified Etherset IP
STAT IP
TN
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN or group of TNs
STAT IP TYPE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN type
STAT IP ZONE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified zone
STAT ISET ALL
Display the Resource Locator Module information for all nodes
STAT ISET NODE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node
STAT LINK APP <applicationType>
Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType, where:
- LTPS = Line TPS
- VGW = Voice Gateway
- H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk
- GK = GateKeeper
- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
STAT LINK IP <IP address>
Pack/Rel
1196 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description
Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified subnet, where:
IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card
Pack/Rel
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.
For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".
STAT LINK NAME <hostName>
Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host nam, where: hostName = MAINSERVER
STAT LINK NODE <nodeID>
Display the link information status of the specified node, where: nodeID = 0-9999
Note:
The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling
Server equipment.
STAT LINK SRV <serverType>
Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type, where: serverType, is:
- ITGP = ITG Pentium
- SMC = Media Card
- SS = Signaling Server
- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
STAT PPP
Display Point-to-point Protocol connection status.
STAT ROUTE
Display host and network routing tables.
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1197
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Note:
This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the
Linux Base layer.
STAT SERV APP <applicationType>
Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType is:
- LTPS = (Line TPS)
- VGW = Voice Gateway
- H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk
- GK = GateKeeper
- SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)
- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
- SLG = SIP Lines Gateway
STAT SERV IP <IP address>
Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:
IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.
Pack/Rel
Note:
The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.
For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".
STAT SERV NAME <hostName>
Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name, where: hostName = MAINSERVER
STAT SERV NODE <nodeID>
Display the link information status of the specified node, where:
1198 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description Pack/Rel
nodeID = 0-9999
Note:
The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling
Server equipment.
STAT SERV TYPE <serverType>
Display the server information of the specified server type, where: serverType is:
- ITGP = ITG Pentium
- SMC = Media Card
- SS = Signaling Server
- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
STAT SS
Display the server information of the specified Signaling
Server.
STAT UCM SYS
Show UCM registration status for all system elements.
STAT UCM SYSREFRESH
Request UCM registration status update from all devices.
STAT ZBR [<Zone>]
Display status of branch office zones, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000 basic-6.00
basic-6.00
basic-7.00
STAT ZONE [<Zone>]
Display zone status table, where:
• Zone = 0–255
• Zone = 0–8000
STIP ACF Displays status for all ACF calls
STIP ACF <status> basic-7.00
basic-4.50
basic-4.50
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1199
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) status information, where:
• UNREG = unregistered calls
• HREG = half-registered calls
• REB = rebuilt calls
• HREB = half-rebuilt calls
• PREB = partial-rebuilt calls
Pack/Rel
STIP DVLA [<idleTime>]
Outputs information (TN, Prime DN, idle time) about loggedin DVLA IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified). Not more than 1000 records can be output at once. If more than 1000 records are collected, then
Info message SCH2376 is printed.
basic-7.00
STIP HOSTIP <IP address>
Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:
IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.
Note:
IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".
STIP NODE <nodeID>
Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID, where: nodeID = 0-9999
Note:
The nodeID identifies the node number you have assigned to a group of VGMC and Signaling Server equipment.
STIP SIPLUA <UA string>
Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User Agent string.
basic-6.00
1200 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command
STIP TERMIP <IP address>
Description
Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:
IP address = the TLAN IP address of the IP Phone or Voice
Gateway Media Card.
Pack/Rel
Note:
IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".
STIP TN <l s c u>
Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and c u parameters.
STIP TYPE <aaa>
Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type.
Where valid values for <aaa> are:
• I2002 = IP Phone 2002
• I2004 = IP Phone 2004
• I2050 = IP Phone 2050
• ISET = all IP sets
• VGW = Voice Gateway resources
• IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks
• MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC
Where valid values for <aaa> are:
• 1210 = IP Phone 1210
• 1220 = IP Phone 1220
• 1230 = IP Phone 1230 basic 5-5
Note:
Up to 3 TN types can be specified.
STIP ZONE <zone>
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1201
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
Command Description
Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones, where:
• zone = 0–255
• zone = 0–8000
Pack/Rel
basic-7.00
TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn]
Generate an alarm.
Where:
• aaaa = any character sequence.
However, to test how an existing system message category (for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message.
• (nnnn )= any numeric sequence
Defaults to 0000.
The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter.
The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and
EPT. Nonexistent system messages have a severity of
Info
.
The following items are found in the details section of the trap output:
• commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated
• commonMIBSeverity = defined by the EDT and EPT or Info(5)
• commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS
(component type)
• commonMIBNotificationID = 0
• commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call
Server
• commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN
• commonMIBAlarmType
= 8 (indicating unknown)
• commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown)
• commonMIBAlarmData = Contains textual description
The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.
basic-4.00
1202 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands
Command Description
TEST SUBNETLIS <IP address>
Return the location data for the subnet entry that matches the specified IP address.
Pack/Rel
basic-5.00
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1203
LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management
1204 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Chapter 52: Communication Server 1000
High Scalability System
Common Data
Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System (HS System) common data is a group of identically configured data blocks across multiple Communication Server 1000E High Availability Groups (HA
Groups) within the same HS System. Data that are common across multiple HA Groups are configured once and automatically propagated to all groups within the same HS System, so that the HS System appears as a single entity from a common data management perspective. For more information on HS
System common data, see Communication Server1000E High Scalability Installation and Commissioning,
NN43041-312.
With the exception of the following prompts
• the SPVC prompt in the ATT_DATA block of LD 15
• the ALDN and PREO prompts in the FTR_DATA block of LD 15
• the VNR prompt in the NET_DATA block of LD 15 all prompts in the data blocks listed in
Table 29: Default definition of common data
on page 1205 are included in the default definition of common data.
Table 29: Default definition of common data
14
Load Number
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Data Block Type
IPTI
Description
IP TIE trunk data block
CDB
DEFAULT
AML_DATA
ANI_DATA
ATT_DATA
CAS_DATA
CCS_DATA
CDR_DATA
FCR_DATA
FFC_DATA
Customer data block
Default customer data block
Application Module Link options
Automatic Number Identification numbers
Attendant Console options (Except prompt SPVC)
Centralized Attendant Service options
Controlled Class of Service options
CDR and Charge Account options
New Flexible Code Restriction options
Flexible Feature Code options
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1205
Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
15
15
15
15
Load Number
15
15
15
15
CSA
DIC
DID
FEX
FGDT
IDA
ISA
MCU
RDB
AWR
CAA
CAM
CBCT
COT
MUS
PAG
R232
R422
RAN
RCD
RLM
RLR
Data Block Type
FTR_DATA
INT_DATA
LDN_DATA
MPO_DATA
NET_DATA
PWD_DATA
RDR_DATA
ROA_DATA
Description
Features and options (Except prompts ALDN and
PREO)
Intercept treatment options
Departmental Listed Directory Numbers
Multi-Party Options
ISDN and ESN Networking options (Except prompt
VNR)
Customer related Passwords
Call Redirection
Recorded Overflow Announcement options
Route data block and Meridian 911
Automatic Wake Up trunk block for RAN/Music
Common Control Switching Arrangement
Central Automatic Message Accounting trunk
Call by call master route cbc_pkg-23
Central Office Trunk data block
Common Control Switching Arrangement access
Dictation trunk data block basic-1
Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block
Foreign Exchange trunk data block basic-1
Feature Group D trunk fgd-17
Integrated Digital Access
Integrated Service Access route or Call-by-Call
Meridian Communications Unit port basic-18
Music trunk data block
Paging trunk data block basic-1
DAC for NT7D16 on RS-232 port basic-18
DAC for NT7D16 on RS-422 port basic-18
Recorded Announcement trunk data block
Emergency Recorder trunk data block
Release Link Main trunk data block
Release Link Remote trunk data block
1206 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
117
117
87
87
87
86
86
86
86
17
17
17
17
24
16
16
16
16
16
16
Load Number
DGT
ESN
ITGE
RLB
FCAS
FSNS
NCTL
NET
HNPA
LOC
NPA
NSCL
NXX
SPN
ERL
NumZone
Data Block Type
TIE
TIE ATL
TIE SEMI
TIE AUTO
TIE TONE
WAT
Description
TIE trunk data block
TIE ATL data block for Sweden supp-15
Semi-automatic TIE trunk data block opcb-14
Automatic TIE trunk data block opcb-14
Tone TIE trunk data block opcb-14
Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block basic-18
ADAN
CEQU
PARM
VAS
ESA
All input/output devices (includes D-channels) basic-19
Common Equipment parameters basic-19
System Parameters basic-19
Value Added Server
Emergency Services Access data block
Digit manipulation data block
ESN data block
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion data block
Route List data Block
Free Calling Area Screening
Free Special Number Screening
Network Control
Network translation tables
Home NPA translation code
ESN Location Code translation data block
Numbering Plan Area code translation data block
Network Speed Call List data block
Central Office Code Translation data block
Special code translation data block
Emergency response location
Numbering Zone
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1207
Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data
1208 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
Index
Special Characters
(LD 18) ......................................................................
Numerics
0-RT (LD 28) .............................................................
0+RT (LD 28) ............................................................
1RT (LD 28) ..............................................................
20PP (LD 97) ..........................................................
2DT (LD 16) ..............................................................
3ANI (LD 19) .............................................................
500B (LD 17) ............................................................
500L (LD 73) .............................................................
A
A (LD 18) ..................................................................
A_FILTER (LD 17) ....................................................
A1MR (LD 16) ...........................................................
AAA (LD 95) ............................................................
AAAO (LD 16) ...........................................................
AACD (LD 10) ............................................................
AACQ (LD 23) ..........................................................
AACR (LD 21) ...........................................................
AACS (LD 20) ...........................................................
AADN (LD 12) ...........................................................
AANI (LD 16) ............................................................
AAT (LD 16) ..............................................................
AATB (LD 16) ............................................................
AATO (LD 16) ...........................................................
ABAN (LD 12) ...........................................................
ABAN (LD 16) ...........................................................
ABCD (LD 17) ...........................................................
ABDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
ABOR (LD 17) ..........................................................
ABR (LD 23) .............................................................
ABST (LD 56) ...........................................................
ABTR ........................................................................
AC1 (LD 86) ..............................................................
AC2 (LD 15) ..............................................................
AC2 (LD 86) ..............................................................
ACAA (LD 23) ...........................................................
ACC (LD 93) .............................................................
ACCD (LD 15) ..........................................................
ACDN (LD 23) ..........................................................
ACDN (LD 97) .........................................................
ACDR (LD 88) ..........................................................
ACFT (LD 56) ...........................................................
ACKW (LD 16) ..........................................................
ACLE (LD 88) ...........................................................
ACMP (LD 16) ..........................................................
ACNI (LD 16) ............................................................
ACNO (LD 56) ..........................................................
ACNS (LD 15) ...........................................................
ACNT (LD 23) ...........................................................
ACO (LD 73) .............................................................
ACOD (LD 16) ..........................................................
ACOD (LD 21) ..........................................................
ACPQ (LD 23) ..........................................................
ACPS (LD 58) ...........................................................
ACPT (LD 58) ...........................................................
ACRC (LD 73) ..........................................................
ACT_BUSY (LD 15) ..................................................
ACT_IDLE (LD 15) ...................................................
ACTN (LD 56) ...........................................................
ADAN (LD 17) ...........................................................
ADAY (LD 10) .............................................................
ADAY (LD 11) ...........................................................
ADAY (LD 16) ...........................................................
ADCP (LD 16) ...........................................................
ADD (LD 73) .............................................................
ADDG (LD 15) ..........................................................
ADDG (LD 16) ..........................................................
ADDITIONAL_PORT (LD 17) ...................................
ADDP (LD 16) ...........................................................
ADFT (LD 19) ...........................................................
ADHT (LD 15) ...........................................................
ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 81) ........................
ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 22) ........................
ADJUST PAPER THEN cr (LD 20) ...........................
ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 82) .........................
ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 83) .........................
ADLD (LD 15) ...........................................................
ADMIN_PORT (LD 17) .............................................
ADMN (LD 57) ..........................................................
ADPD (LD 23) ...........................................................
AEFD (LD 11) ...........................................................
AEHT (LD 11) ...........................................................
AENI (LD 23) ............................................................
AF_STATUS (LD 17) ................................................
AFBT (LD 15) ...........................................................
AFCO (LD 15) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1209
AFD (LD 11) ..............................................................
AFNT (LD 15) ...........................................................
AFX (LD 73) ..............................................................
AGCD (LD 17) ..........................................................
AGNO (LD 93) ..........................................................
AGNT (LD 97) .........................................................
AHNT (LD 11) ...........................................................
AHOL (LD 10) .............................................................
AHOL (LD 11) ...........................................................
AHOL (LD 16) ...........................................................
AIA (LD 16) ...............................................................
AID (LD 23) ...............................................................
ALARM (LD 17) ........................................................
ALDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
ALEN (LD 88) ...........................................................
ALL (LD 57) ..............................................................
ALOG (LD 23) ...........................................................
ALOW (LD 19) ..........................................................
ALOW (LD 49) ..........................................................
ALOW (LD 87) ..........................................................
ALOW (LD 90) ..........................................................
ALOW (LD 93) ..........................................................
ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT (LD 24) .......................
ALPD (LD 12) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 15) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 16) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 17) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 18) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 73) ...........................................................
ALRM (LD 74) ...........................................................
ALST (LD 86) ............................................................
ALT (LD 86) ..............................................................
ALUL (LD 97) ..........................................................
ALUS (LD 97) .........................................................
AML (LD 17) .............................................................
AML_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
ANAT (LD 15) ...........................................................
ANAT (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
ANDN (LD 16) ..........................................................
ANDT (LD 16) ...........................................................
ANFA (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANFB (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANFT (LD 16) ...........................................................
ANI_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................
ANI2_CLID ...............................................................
ANIC (LD 16) ............................................................
ANIE (LD 10) ..............................................................
ANIE (LD 11) .............................................................
ANIE (LD 16) ............................................................
ANIE (LD 27) ............................................................
ANII (LD 19) ..............................................................
ANIT (LD 19) ............................................................
ANKP (LD 16) ...........................................................
ANLD (LD 15) ...........................................................
ANNS (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANOF (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANQU (LD 56) ..........................................................
ANSR (LD 56) ...........................................................
ANSZ (LD 16) ...........................................................
ANTK (LD 16) ...........................................................
ANUM (LD 12) ..........................................................
ANUM (LD 93) ..........................................................
ANXC (LD 56) ...........................................................
AOBT (LD 56) ...........................................................
AOCS (LD 15) ..........................................................
AODN (LD 15) ..........................................................
AODN (LD 93) ..........................................................
AOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
AOM (LD 11) .............................................................
APAD (LD 15) ...........................................................
APL (LD 15) ..............................................................
APL (LD 23) ..............................................................
APPL (LD 17) ...........................................................
APPL (LD 27) ...........................................................
APRT (LD 17) ...........................................................
APVL (LD 17) ...........................................................
AQTT (LD 15) ...........................................................
AQTT (LD 93) ...........................................................
ARBK (LD 56) ...........................................................
ARDL (LD 87) ...........................................................
ARDL_ACCEPT (LD 15) ..........................................
ARDL_ATTEMPT (LD 15) .........................................
ARDL_RETRY (LD 15) .............................................
ARE YOU SURE .......................................................
ARE YOU SURE? (LD 95) ......................................
AREM (LD 57) ..........................................................
ARLI (LD 90) .............................................................
ARRN (LD 90) ..........................................................
ART (LD 56) ..............................................................
ARTO (LD 10) .............................................................
ARTO (LD 11) ...........................................................
ASID (LD 20) ............................................................
ASID (LD 21) ............................................................
ASID (LD 23) ............................................................
ASPCT (LD 15) .........................................................
ASRC (LD 57) ...........................................................
AST (LD 10) ...............................................................
AST (LD 11) ..............................................................
AST (LD 14) ..............................................................
AST (LD 23) ..............................................................
AST (LD 97) ............................................................
1210 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
ASTM (LD 15) ...........................................................
ASTP (LD 16) ...........................................................
ASUM (LD 02) ......................................................
ASUM A (LD 02) ...................................................
ASUM E (LD 02) ...................................................
ASUP (LD 16) ...........................................................
ATAC (LD 15) ............................................................
ATAN (LD 16) ............................................................
ATBL (LD 16) ............................................................
ATCH (LD 15) ...........................................................
ATDA (LD 57) ...........................................................
ATDD (LD 57) ...........................................................
ATDN (LD 14) ...........................................................
ATDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
ATDN (LD 16) ...........................................................
ATGT (LD 16) ...........................................................
ATIM (LD 15) ............................................................
ATO (LD 73) ..............................................................
ATRC (LD 15) ...........................................................
ATRN (LD 17) ...........................................................
ATRR (LD 16) ...........................................................
ATT (LD 94) ............................................................
ATT_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
ATVR (LD 16) ...........................................................
AUDN (LD 16) ..........................................................
AUDT (LD 17) ...........................................................
AUT (LD 11) ..............................................................
AUTB (LD 11) ...........................................................
AUTH (LD 10) .............................................................
AUTH (LD 11) ...........................................................
AUTH (LD 16) ...........................................................
AUTH (LD 49) ...........................................................
AUTH (LD 57) ...........................................................
AUTHCOD_ALRM (LD 88) .......................................
AUTM (LD 16) ..........................................................
AUTO (LD 16) ...........................................................
AUTO (LD 88) ...........................................................
AUTO_AUDIT (LD 17) ..............................................
AUTO_BIMP (LD 14) ................................................
AUTR (LD 15) ...........................................................
AUTR (LD 24) ...........................................................
AUXP (LD 16) ...........................................................
AWU (LD 15) ............................................................
AWU_DATA (LD 15) .................................................
AWUA (LD 57) ..........................................................
AWUD (LD 57) ..........................................................
AWUT (LD 56) ..........................................................
AWUV (LD 57) ..........................................................
AXID (LD 15) ............................................................
AXQI (LD 17) ............................................................
AXQO (LD 17) ..........................................................
B
B (LD 18) ..................................................................
B1 (LD 27) ................................................................
B1CT (LD 27) ...........................................................
B2 (LD 27) ................................................................
B2CT (LD 27) ...........................................................
BAND (LD 16) ...........................................................
BANR (LD 17) ...........................................................
BATT (LD 17) ............................................................
BAUD (LD 11) ...........................................................
BCAD (LD 97) .........................................................
BCAP (LD 15) ...........................................................
BCAP (LD 17) ...........................................................
BCH (LD 27) .............................................................
BCHI (LD 17) ............................................................
BCHL (LD 17) ...........................................................
BCOT (LD 16) ...........................................................
BCST (LD 17) ...........................................................
BDCT (LD 16) ...........................................................
BDI (LD 15) ...............................................................
BDSP (LD 16) ...........................................................
BGTH (LD 52) ...........................................................
BILN (LD 16) .............................................................
BIMP (LD 10) ..............................................................
BIMP (LD 14) ............................................................
BIPC (LD 73) ............................................................
BIPV (LD 73) ............................................................
BITL (LD 17) .............................................................
BKGD (LD 17) ..........................................................
BLEN (LD 16) ...........................................................
BLOC (LD 50) ...........................................................
BNE (LD 86) .............................................................
BNRA (LD 57) ...........................................................
BNRD (LD 57) ..........................................................
BNUM (LD 16) ..........................................................
BOTO (LD 15) ...........................................................
BPS (LD 17) .............................................................
BPSS (LD 15) ...........................................................
BPV (LD 73) .............................................................
BRIL (LD 73) .............................................................
BRIP (LD 16) ............................................................
BRIT (LD 73) ............................................................
BRK (LD 97) ...........................................................
BRSC (LD 27) ...........................................................
BRST (LD 88) ...........................................................
BRST PARM (LD 74) ................................................
BSCW (LD 23) ..........................................................
BSFE (LD 15) ...........................................................
BSGC (LD 15) ..........................................................
BSRC (LD 17) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1211
BSRV (LD 17) ...........................................................
BSSU (LD 16) ...........................................................
BTCG (LD 16) ...........................................................
BTDD (LD 97) .........................................................
BTDT (LD 14) ...........................................................
BTDT (LD 97) .........................................................
BTID (LD 14) ............................................................
BTT (LD 16) ..............................................................
BTUA (LD 16) ...........................................................
BUID (LD 11) ............................................................
BUID (LD 20) ............................................................
BUSY (LD 23) ...........................................................
BUSY (LD 56) ...........................................................
BWTM (LD 02) ...........................................................
BYPS (LD 49) ...........................................................
BYPS (LD 58) ...........................................................
BYTH (LD 23) ...........................................................
C
C (LD 18) ..................................................................
C CLRB (R) (LD 73) .................................................
C CLRB (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
C SUPO(S) (LD 73) ..................................................
C6DS (LD 57) ...........................................................
CAB (LD 17) .............................................................
CAB (LD 56) .............................................................
CAC (LD 10) ...............................................................
CAC (LD 16) .............................................................
CAC (LD 27) .............................................................
CAC_CIS (LD 10) .......................................................
CAC_CIS (LD 11) .....................................................
CAC_CIS (LD 16) .....................................................
CAC_CIS (LD 27) .....................................................
CAC_CIS (LD 88) .....................................................
CAC_CONV (LD 16) .................................................
CAC_MFC (LD 10) .....................................................
CAC_MFC (LD 11) ....................................................
CAC_MFC (LD 27) ...................................................
CAC0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC4 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC5 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC6 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC7 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC8 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CAC9 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CACC (LD 15) ..........................................................
CACC (LD 16) ..........................................................
CACD (LD 16) ..........................................................
CACD (LD 94) .........................................................
CAD (LD 97) ...........................................................
CALB (LD 20) ...........................................................
CALB (LD 21) ...........................................................
CALB (LD 23) ...........................................................
CALP (LD 23) ...........................................................
CAMP (LD 56) ..........................................................
CANC (LD 15) ..........................................................
CARD (LD 27) ..........................................................
CAS (LD 15) .............................................................
CAS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
CAST (LD 56) ...........................................................
CAT (LD 16) ..............................................................
CBCR (LD 16) ..........................................................
CBQ (LD 16) .............................................................
CBQ (LD 86) .............................................................
CBQ (LD 87) .............................................................
CBTL (LD 87) ...........................................................
CC0 (LD 73) .............................................................
CC1 (LD 73) .............................................................
CC2 (LD 73) .............................................................
CC3 (LD 73) .............................................................
CC4 (LD 73) .............................................................
CCAN (LD 19) ..........................................................
CCAR (LD 73) ..........................................................
CCB (LD 16) .............................................................
CCB1 (LD 16) ...........................................................
CCB2 (LD 16) ...........................................................
CCBA (LD 16) ...........................................................
CCBA (LD 23) ...........................................................
CCBA (LD 24) ...........................................................
CCBA (LD 87) ...........................................................
CCDO (LD 15) ..........................................................
CCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................
CCFD (LD 57) ...........................................................
CCFWDN (LD 15) .....................................................
CCGD (LD 73) ..........................................................
CCLS (LD 19) ...........................................................
CCNI (LD 16) ............................................................
CCO (LD 16) .............................................................
CCRS (LD 15) ..........................................................
CCS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
CDAN (LD 19) ..........................................................
CDCT (LD 16) ...........................................................
CDEN (LD 10) ............................................................
CDEN (LD 11) ...........................................................
CDEN (LD 12) ..........................................................
CDEN (LD 13) ..........................................................
CDEN (LD 14) ..........................................................
CDEN (LD 20) ..........................................................
CDN (LD 23) .............................................................
1212 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
CDNC (LD 56) ..........................................................
CDNO (LD 17) ..........................................................
CDP (LD 86) .............................................................
CDPC (LD 16) ..........................................................
CDPC (LD 18) ..........................................................
CDPL (LD 15) ...........................................................
CDPR (LD 15) ..........................................................
CDR (LD 15) .............................................................
CDR (LD 16) .............................................................
CDR (LD 27) .............................................................
CDR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
CDRB (LD 16) ..........................................................
CDRC (LD 57) ..........................................................
CDRX (LD 16) ..........................................................
CDRY (LD 16) ...........................................................
CDSQ (LD 23) ..........................................................
CDT (LD 56) .............................................................
CDTI2 (LD 73) ..........................................................
CDTO (LD 15) ...........................................................
CE (LD 97) ..............................................................
CEIL (LD 23) .............................................................
CEPT (LD 57) ...........................................................
CEQP (LD 73) ..........................................................
CEQU (LD 17) ..........................................................
CFBA (LD 57) ...........................................................
CFDD (LD 57) ...........................................................
CFDT (LD 56) ...........................................................
CFHO (LD 57) ..........................................................
CFLP (LD 14) ...........................................................
CFMW (LD 56) .........................................................
CFN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CFN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CFN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................
CFNA (LD 95) .........................................................
CFSN (LD 56) ...........................................................
CFTA (LD 15) ............................................................
CFTN (LD 10) .............................................................
CFTN (LD 11) ...........................................................
CFWA (LD 57) ..........................................................
CFWD (LD 57) ..........................................................
CFWD (LD 95) ........................................................
CFWI (LD 57) ...........................................................
CFWR (LD 16) ..........................................................
CFWS (LD 17) ..........................................................
CFWT (LD 56) ..........................................................
CFWT (LD 97) ........................................................
CFWV (LD 57) ..........................................................
CGPC (LD 16) ..........................................................
CH (LD 27) ...............................................................
CHANGE MAP? (LD 29) ..........................................
CHDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
CHID (LD 14) ............................................................
CHLN (LD 15) ...........................................................
CHMN (LD 15) ..........................................................
CHRG (LD 16) ..........................................................
CHTY (LD 16) ...........................................................
CIC (LD 19) ..............................................................
CIS_ANI (LD 15) .......................................................
CIS_ENT (LD 15) .....................................................
CISFW (LD 73) .........................................................
CISR (LD 16) ............................................................
CIST (LD 14) ............................................................
CITM (LD 02) ..............................................................
CLAS (LD 88) ...........................................................
CLASS_FMT (LD 15) ...............................................
CLDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
CLEA (LD 73) ...........................................................
CLEN (LD 16) ...........................................................
CLID (LD 15) ............................................................
CLID (LD 16) ............................................................
CLID (LD 17) ............................................................
CLIP (LD 27) .............................................................
CLK (LD 11) ..............................................................
CLK (LD 16) ..............................................................
CLKN (LD 73) ...........................................................
CLN (LD 56) .............................................................
CLOK (LD 17) ...........................................................
CLOK (LD 27) ...........................................................
CLR (LD 19) .............................................................
CLRB (R) (LD 73) .....................................................
CLRB (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
CLRF (R) (LD 73) .....................................................
CLRF (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
CLS (LD 10) ...............................................................
CLS (LD 14) ..............................................................
CLS (LD 16) ..............................................................
CLS (LD 27) ..............................................................
CLS1 (LD 15) ............................................................
CLS2 (LD 15) ............................................................
CLTP (LD 90) ............................................................
CMD (LD 29) ............................................................
CMF (LD 14) .............................................................
CMS (LD 17) .............................................................
CMS (LD 23) .............................................................
CNAT (LD 15) ...........................................................
CNCS (LD 15) ..........................................................
CNDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
CNDR (LD 94) ........................................................
CNEG (LD 16) ..........................................................
CNEG (LD 17) ..........................................................
CNF_NAME (LD 15) .................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1213
CNFD (LD 15) ...........................................................
CNFFIELD (LD 15) ...................................................
CNFG (LD 95) .........................................................
CNI (LD 15) ..............................................................
CNI (LD 17) ..............................................................
CNIE (LD 16) ............................................................
CNIP (LD 15) ............................................................
CNIT (LD 16) ............................................................
CNT (LD 56) .............................................................
CNTC (LD 15) ...........................................................
CNTL (LD 16) ...........................................................
CNTL (LD 23) ...........................................................
CNTL (LD 74) ...........................................................
CNTP (LD 15) ...........................................................
CNTR (LD 74) ...........................................................
CNTY (LD 16) ...........................................................
CNTY (LD 17) ...........................................................
CNV (LD 86) .............................................................
CNVT (LD 16) ...........................................................
CO_TYPE (LD 17) ....................................................
COAT (LD 16) ...........................................................
CODE (LD 17) ..........................................................
CODE (LD 57) ..........................................................
CODE (LD 88) ..........................................................
CODE (LD 97) ........................................................
COLP (LD 27) ...........................................................
COLR (LD 50) ...........................................................
COND (LD 57) ..........................................................
CONF (LD 15) ..........................................................
CONF (LD 17) ..........................................................
CONF (LD 79) ..........................................................
CONF_DSP (LD 15) .................................................
CONG (LD 15) ..........................................................
CONN (LD 14) ..........................................................
CONN (R) (LD 73) ....................................................
CONN (S) (LD 73) ....................................................
CONT (LD 18) ..........................................................
CONT (LD 97) .........................................................
COPC (LD 02) ............................................................
COPN (LD 02) ............................................................
COPS (LD 02) ............................................................
COPT (LD 86) ...........................................................
CORT (LD 28) ...........................................................
COS (LD 24) .............................................................
COS (LD 88) .............................................................
COT (LD 56) .............................................................
COTL (LD 97) .........................................................
COTR (LD 16) ..........................................................
COTS (LD 97) .........................................................
CPAC (LD 57) ...........................................................
CPAD (LD 14) ...........................................................
CPAD (LD 97) .........................................................
CPAR (LD 19) ...........................................................
CPAS (LD 15) ...........................................................
CPCI (LD 15) ............................................................
CPDC (LD 16) ..........................................................
CPFXS (LD 16) .........................................................
CPG (LD 93) .............................................................
CPGS (LD 93) ..........................................................
CPNC (LD 56) ..........................................................
CPND (LD 10) ............................................................
CPND (LD 11) ...........................................................
CPND (LD 12) ..........................................................
CPND_LANG (LD 10) ................................................
CPND_LANG (LD 11) ...............................................
CPND_LANG (LD 95) .............................................
CPOQ (LD 56) ..........................................................
CPP (LD 16) .............................................................
CPP (LD 57) .............................................................
CPPO (LD 57) ..........................................................
CPRD (LD 23) ..........................................................
CPRK (LD 57) ...........................................................
CPTM (LD 50) ..........................................................
CPUB (LD 16) ...........................................................
CRC (LD 17) .............................................................
CRC (LD 73) .............................................................
CRCF (LD 97) .........................................................
CRCS (LD 10) ............................................................
CRCS (LD 24) ...........................................................
CRDAY (LD 15) ........................................................
CRHOL (LD 15) ........................................................
CRID (LD 16) ............................................................
CRID (LD 21) ............................................................
CRNO (LD 49) ..........................................................
CRQS (LD 23) ..........................................................
CRT0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CRT1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CRT2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CRT3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
CRTOD (LD 15) ........................................................
CSDN (LD 10) ............................................................
CSDN (LD 11) ...........................................................
CSDN (LD 20) ..........................................................
CSDN (LD 83) ..........................................................
CSHF (LD 57) ...........................................................
CSQI (LD 17) ............................................................
CSQO (LD 17) ..........................................................
CT (LD 27) ................................................................
CT (LD 97) ..............................................................
CTBL .................................................................
CTOC (LD 16) ...........................................................
CTON (LD 16) ...........................................................
1214 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
CTRC (LD 15) ...........................................................
CTVN (LD 15) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 11) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 12) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 17) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 20) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 27) ...........................................................
CTYP (LD 86) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 10) .............................................................
CUST (LD 11) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 12) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 14) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 15) ...................................................
CUST (LD 16) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 17) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 18) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 19) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 20) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 21) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 22) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 23) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 24) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 25) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 26) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 27) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 28) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 49) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 50) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 56) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 57) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 58) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 79) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 81) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 82) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 83) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 86) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 87) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 88) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 90) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 93) ...........................................................
CUST (LD 95) .........................................................
CWBZ (LD 15) ..........................................................
CWBZ (LD 93) ..........................................................
CWCL (LD 15) ..........................................................
CWCL (LD 93) ..........................................................
CWGA (LD 57) .........................................................
CWGD (LD 57) .........................................................
CWLF (LD 23) ..........................................................
CWLW (LD 23) ..........................................................
CWNC (LD 23) .........................................................
CWNT (LD 23) ..........................................................
CWT (LD 56) ............................................................
CWTH (LD 23) ..........................................................
CWTM (LD 15) .........................................................
CWTM (LD 93) .........................................................
CWTT (LD 23) ..........................................................
CWUP (LD 15) ..........................................................
CY45 (LD 17) ............................................................
CYCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
D
D (LD 18) ..................................................................
DACT_BUSY (LD 15) ...............................................
DACT_IDLE (LD 15) .................................................
DAL (LD 23) ..............................................................
DANI (LD 11) ............................................................
DAPC (LD 12) ...........................................................
DAPC (LD 15) ...........................................................
DAPC (LD 16) ...........................................................
DAPC (LD 21) ...........................................................
DASC (LD 15) ...........................................................
DATA_CORRECT (LD 17) ........................................
DATE (LD 15) ...........................................................
DATE (LD 20) ...........................................................
DATE (LD 22) ...........................................................
DATE (LD 81) ...........................................................
DATE (LD 82) ...........................................................
DATE (LD 83) ...........................................................
DAY (LD 15) ..............................................................
DAY0 (LD 15) ............................................................
DAY1 (LD 15) ............................................................
DAY2 (LD 15) ............................................................
DAY3 (LD 15) ............................................................
DAYS (LD 86) ...........................................................
DAYS (LD 88) ...........................................................
DBA (LD 11) ..............................................................
DBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
DBK (LD 86) .............................................................
DBNC (LD 73) ..........................................................
DBRC (LD 15) ..........................................................
DCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
DCD (LD 11) .............................................................
DCD (LD 16) .............................................................
DCDR (LD 16) ..........................................................
DCFW (LD 11) ..........................................................
DCH (LD 16) .............................................................
DCHI (LD 16) ............................................................
DCHI (LD 17) ............................................................
DCHL (LD 17) ...........................................................
DCHR (LD 58) ..........................................................
DCLP (LD 10) .............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1215
DCMX (LD 15) ..........................................................
DCNO (LD 16) ..........................................................
DCNO (LD 49) ..........................................................
DCNO (LD 95) ........................................................
DCO (LD 73) .............................................................
DCTI (LD 16) ............................................................
DCUS (LD 17) ..........................................................
DDCS (LD 17) ..........................................................
DDCS (LD 74) ..........................................................
DDD (LD 90) .............................................................
DDGT (LD 24) ...........................................................
DDGT (LD 56) ..........................................................
DDI (LD 86) ..............................................................
DDLY (LD 16) ...........................................................
DDMI (LD 16) ...........................................................
DDO (LD 16) .............................................................
DDSL (LD 14) ...........................................................
DDSL (LD 74) ...........................................................
DDV ..........................................................................
DEAF (LD 57) ...........................................................
DEF 2000 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 2006 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 2008 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 2216 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 2500 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 2616 (LD 97) ...................................................
DEF 500 (LD 97) .....................................................
DEF I2002 xx (LD 97) .............................................
DEF I2004 xx (LD 97) .............................................
DEF I2050 xx (LD 97) .............................................
DEFS (LD 97) .........................................................
DEL (LD 86) ..............................................................
DEL (LD 87) ..............................................................
DELETE_VMB (LD 10) ...............................................
DELETE_VMB (LD 11) .............................................
DEM (LD 11) .............................................................
DEM (LD 16) .............................................................
DENS (LD 17) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 19) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 49) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 56) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 87) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 90) ...........................................................
DENY (LD 93) ...........................................................
DES (LD 10) ...............................................................
DES (LD 11) ..............................................................
DES (LD 14) .............................................................
DES (LD 16) .............................................................
DES (LD 17) .............................................................
DES (LD 20) .............................................................
DES (LD 22) .............................................................
DES (LD 27) .............................................................
DES (LD 81) .............................................................
DES (LD 82) .............................................................
DES (LD 84_85) .......................................................
DES (LD 95) ...........................................................
DES0 / 1 (LD 97) ....................................................
DEST (LD 25) ...........................................................
DEXT (LD 16) ...........................................................
DFCL (LD 24) ...........................................................
DFDN (LD 23) ...........................................................
DFDN (LD 27) ...........................................................
DFLN (LD 95) .........................................................
DFLT (LD 15) ............................................................
DFLT (LD 18) ............................................................
DFLT (LD 56) ............................................................
DFLT (LD 73) ............................................................
DFLT (LD 94) ..........................................................
DFLT_LANG (LD 15) ................................................
DFLT_SCPW (LD 15) ...............................................
DFN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
DFN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
DFN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
DFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................
DFNR (LD 15) ...........................................................
DFQ (LD 97) ...........................................................
DGRP (LD 11) ...........................................................
DGRP (LD 15) ..........................................................
DGRP (LD 20) ..........................................................
DGTO (LD 19) ..........................................................
DGTP (LD 16) ...........................................................
DGTS (LD 24) ...........................................................
DGTS (LD 56) ...........................................................
DI0 (LD 56) ...............................................................
DIAL (LD 56) .............................................................
DIALPLAN (LD 15) ...................................................
DIALPLAN (LD 21) ...................................................
DID (LD 56) ..............................................................
DID (LD 90) ..............................................................
DIDD (LD 16) ............................................................
DIDD (LD 17) ............................................................
DIDL (LD 97) ...........................................................
DIDN (LD 15) ............................................................
DIDS (LD 97) ..........................................................
DIDT (LD 15) ............................................................
DIG (LD 10) ................................................................
DIG (LD 16) ..............................................................
DIG (LD 95) ............................................................
DIGS (LD 16) ............................................................
DIND (LD 15) ............................................................
DISD (LD 15) ............................................................
DISPLAY NEW MAP? (LD 29) ..................................
1216 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
DISPLAY_FMT (LD 10) ..............................................
DISPLAY_FMT (LD 11) .............................................
DISPLAY_FMT (LD 95) ...........................................
DITI (LD 15) ..............................................................
DLAC (LD 17) ...........................................................
DLAT (LD 15) ............................................................
DLDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
DLEN (LD 12) ...........................................................
DLNG (LD 11) ...........................................................
DLNT (LD 24) ...........................................................
DLOP (LD 17) ...........................................................
DLT (LD 15) ..............................................................
DLTN (LD 16) ............................................................
DLTN (LD 86) ............................................................
DMC (LD 10) ..............................................................
DMC (LD 20) ............................................................
DMEM (LD 20) ..........................................................
DMI (LD 86) ..............................................................
DMI (LD 87) ..............................................................
DMI (LD 90) ..............................................................
DMOD (LD 16) ..........................................................
DMPH (LD 27) ..........................................................
DMWM (LD 15) .........................................................
DN (LD 10) .................................................................
DN (LD 11) ................................................................
DN (LD 20) ...............................................................
DN (LD 22) ...............................................................
DN (LD 24) ................................................................
DN (LD 27) ...............................................................
DN (LD 82) ...............................................................
DN (LD 95) ..............................................................
DNAM (LD 16) ..........................................................
DNAN (LD 11) ...........................................................
DNAN (LD 12) ..........................................................
DNAT (LD 27) ...........................................................
DNDA (LD 56) ..........................................................
DNDH (LD 15) ..........................................................
DNDI (LD 12) ............................................................
DNDL (LD 15) ...........................................................
DNDR (LD 11) ...........................................................
DNDT (LD 15) ...........................................................
DNIC (LD 27) ............................................................
DNIS (LD 16) ............................................................
DNIS (LD 23) ............................................................
DNLG (LD 15) ...........................................................
DNLN (LD 58) ...........................................................
DNPS (LD 58) ...........................................................
DNRI (LD 11) ............................................................
DNRO (LD 11) ..........................................................
DNRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
DNSZ (LD 16) ...........................................................
DNSZ (LD 18) ...........................................................
DNUM (LD 17) ..........................................................
DORG (LD 86) ..........................................................
DOW (LD 23) ............................................................
DPNS (LD 17) ...........................................................
DPPI (LD 16) ............................................................
DPPO (LD 16) ..........................................................
DPSD (LD 27) ...........................................................
DPVS (LD 57) ...........................................................
DRAT (LD 17) ...........................................................
DRNG (LD 16) ..........................................................
DROL (LD 17) ...........................................................
DSAC (LD 23) ...........................................................
DSBL (LD 16) ...........................................................
DSC (Distant Steering Code) ...................................
DSC (LD 87) .............................................................
DSEL (LD 16) ...........................................................
DSET (LD 73) ...........................................................
DSL (LD 27) ..............................................................
DSL (LD 97) ............................................................
DSP (LD 87) .............................................................
DSPD (LD 16) ...........................................................
DSPL (LD 11) ............................................................
DSPT (LD 11) ...........................................................
DSPT (LD 16) ...........................................................
DSTL (LD 25) ...........................................................
DTAO (LD 11) ...........................................................
DTCR (LD 14) ...........................................................
DTCS (LD 17) ...........................................................
DTCS (LD 74) ...........................................................
DTD (LD 16) .............................................................
DTDF (LD 16) ...........................................................
DTDT (LD 17) ...........................................................
DTI2 (LD 17) .............................................................
DTIB (LD 17) ............................................................
DTIC (LD 17) ............................................................
DTMF (LD 15) ...........................................................
DTMF (LD 97) .........................................................
DTMK (LD 11) ...........................................................
DTO (LD 13) .............................................................
DTO (LD 73) .............................................................
DTOB (LD 17) ...........................................................
DTOC (LD 16) ...........................................................
DTOS (LD 16) ...........................................................
DTPI (LD 16) ............................................................
DTPn (LD 56) ...........................................................
DTPO (LD 16) ...........................................................
DTR (LD 11) ..............................................................
DTR (LD 16) .............................................................
DTRB (LD 17) ...........................................................
DTRK (LD 16) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1217
DTSL (LD 14) ...........................................................
DTSL (LD 74) ...........................................................
DTT (LD 73) ..............................................................
DTYP (LD 97) .........................................................
DUP (LD 11) .............................................................
DUP (LD 16) .............................................................
DUPX (LD 17) ...........................................................
DUR5 (LD 17) ...........................................................
DURT (LD 23) ...........................................................
DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE (LD 17) ............................
DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT (LD 17) ........................
E
E (LD 97) ................................................................
E CONN (R) (LD 73) .................................................
E CONN (S) (LD 73) .................................................
E SEZ (R) (LD 73) ....................................................
E SEZ (S) (LD 73) ....................................................
E_FILTER (LD 17) ....................................................
E1 (LD 97) ..............................................................
EBLF (LD 12) ............................................................
ECC1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ECC2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ECDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
ECDN (LD 93) ..........................................................
ECDR (LD 15) ..........................................................
ECHG (LD 10) ............................................................
ECHG (LD 11) ...........................................................
ECL ...........................................................................
ECL (LD 81) ..............................................................
EDGE (LD 73) ..........................................................
EECD (LD 94) .........................................................
EES (LD 23) .............................................................
EESD (LD 15) ...........................................................
EEST (LD 15) ...........................................................
EEST (LD 56) ...........................................................
EFCS (LD 73) ...........................................................
EFD (LD 11) ..............................................................
EFD (LD 27) .............................................................
EFLL (LD 15) ............................................................
EFLL (LD 93) ............................................................
EHNO (LD 20) ..........................................................
EHR (LD 23) .............................................................
EHT (LD 11) ..............................................................
EHT (LD 27) .............................................................
ELAN (LD 17) ...........................................................
ELKA (LD 57) ...........................................................
ELKD (LD 57) ...........................................................
ELKP (LD 10) .............................................................
ELKP (LD 11) ............................................................
ELPL (LD 15) ............................................................
EMGY (LD 16) ..........................................................
EML (LD 16) .............................................................
EMRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
EMTY (LD 14) ...........................................................
EMULATED (LD 20) .................................................
ENBL (LD 19) ...........................................................
ENBS (LD 19) ...........................................................
END (LD 56) .............................................................
ENL (LD 17) ..............................................................
ENS (LD 15) .............................................................
ENTR ........................................................................
ENTR (LD 86) ...........................................................
ENTR (LD 95) .........................................................
ENTRY (LD 15) .........................................................
EOS (LD 16) .............................................................
EOVR (LD 57) ..........................................................
EQA (LD 87) .............................................................
EQAR (LD 16) ..........................................................
ERDT (LD 86) ...........................................................
ERL ...........................................................................
ERL (LD 10) ...............................................................
ERL (LD 12) ..............................................................
ERL (LD 27) ..............................................................
ERL (LD 81) ..............................................................
ERR (LD 52) .............................................................
ERRM (LD 17) ..........................................................
ERWT (LD 56) ..........................................................
ERWT (LD 86) ..........................................................
ESA_APDN (LD 15) .................................................
ESA_HLCL (LD 15) ..................................................
ESA_INHN (LD 15) ...................................................
ESA_ONLY (LD 20) ..................................................
ESCALATE (LD 17) ..................................................
ESDI (LD 17) ............................................................
ESDN (LD 24) ...........................................................
ESN (LD 16) .............................................................
ESRT (LD 24) ...........................................................
ETOD (LD 86) ...........................................................
EXP (LD 86) .............................................................
EXT_NAME (LD 15) .................................................
EXT0 (LD 17) ............................................................
EXT1 (LD 17) ............................................................
EXTFIELD (LD 15) ...................................................
EXTR (LD 58) ...........................................................
EXTT (LD 15) ...........................................................
F
FACN (LD 16) ...........................................................
FACY (LD 16) ...........................................................
FADR (LD 23) ...........................................................
FADT (LD 23) ...........................................................
1218 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
FAEL (LD 52) ............................................................
FAER (LD 52) ...........................................................
FALT (LD 16) ............................................................
FALT (R) (LD 73) ......................................................
FALT (S) (LD 73) .......................................................
FAP (LD 73) ..............................................................
FCAF (LD 15) ...........................................................
FCAR (LD 11) ...........................................................
FCAR (LD 14) ...........................................................
FCDR (LD 17) ...........................................................
FCFT (LD 23) ...........................................................
FCI (LD 86) ...............................................................
FCI (LD 87) ...............................................................
FCNC (LD 15) ...........................................................
FCR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
FCSD (LD 49) ...........................................................
FCTB (LD 10) .............................................................
FCTB (LD 11) ............................................................
FCTB (LD 20) ...........................................................
FCTH (LD 23) ...........................................................
FCWD (LD 15) ..........................................................
FDAY (LD 97) ..........................................................
FDDN (LD 97) .........................................................
FDID (LD 49) ............................................................
FDIS (LD 57) ............................................................
FDLC (LD 97) .........................................................
FDLT (LD 97) ..........................................................
FDN (LD 11) ..............................................................
FDN (LD 27) .............................................................
FDNR (LD 97) .........................................................
FDTM (LD 97) .........................................................
FDTP (LD 97) .........................................................
FEAT (LD 27) ............................................................
FEAT (LD 73) ............................................................
FEAT (LD 81) ............................................................
FEAT (LD 86) ............................................................
FEAT (LD 87) ............................................................
FEAT (LD 90) ............................................................
FEATID (LD 27) ........................................................
FEDC (LD 16) ...........................................................
FETN (LD 97) .........................................................
FFC_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
FFCS (LD 15) ...........................................................
FFCT (LD 56) ...........................................................
FFCT (LD 57) ...........................................................
FGNO (LD 16) ..........................................................
FGNO (LD 19) ..........................................................
FINT (LD 97) ...........................................................
FLEN (LD 15) ...........................................................
FLEN (LD 87) ...........................................................
FLEN (LD 90) ...........................................................
FLOW (LD 17) ..........................................................
FLOW CNTL (LD 74) ................................................
FLOW_TYPE (LD 17) ...............................................
FLSH (LD 15) ...........................................................
FLSH (LD 97) ..........................................................
FLTA (LD 17) ............................................................
FLTH (LD 17) ............................................................
FLVL_MAX (LD 97) .................................................
FLVL_MIN (LD 97) ..................................................
FMOP (LD 15) ..........................................................
FMT_OUTPUT (LD 17) ............................................
FNAD (LD 15) ...........................................................
FNAL (LD 15) ...........................................................
FNAT (LD 15) ............................................................
FNCF (LD 23) ...........................................................
FNP (LD 15) .............................................................
FNUM (LD 97) ........................................................
FOPT (LD 15) ...........................................................
FOR (LD 20) .............................................................
FORC (LD 23) ..........................................................
FORM (LD 16) ..........................................................
FPC (LD 17) .............................................................
FR44 (LD 17) ............................................................
FRAN (LD 15) ...........................................................
FRCE (LD 49) ...........................................................
FRCE (LD 97) .........................................................
FREQ_0 (LD 97) .....................................................
FREQ_1 (LD 97) .....................................................
FRFW (LD 73) ..........................................................
FRIN (LD 16) ............................................................
FRL (LD 16) ..............................................................
FRL (LD 86) ..............................................................
FRL (LD 87) ..............................................................
FROA (LD 23) ...........................................................
FROM (LD 49) ..........................................................
FRPT (LD 17) ...........................................................
FRRC (LD 16) ...........................................................
FRRD (LD 16) ...........................................................
FRRS (LD 16) ...........................................................
FRRT (LD 15) ...........................................................
FRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
FRRT (LD 93) ...........................................................
FRT (LD 15) ..............................................................
FRT (LD 23) ..............................................................
FRT (LD 93) ..............................................................
FSNI (LD 86) ............................................................
FSNI (LD 87) ............................................................
FSTN (LD 97) .........................................................
FSVC (LD 11) ...........................................................
FTNR (LD 97) .........................................................
FTOP (LD 15) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1219
FTR (LD 10) ...............................................................
FTR_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
FTR_DATA (LD 21) ...................................................
FTYP (LD 17) ...........................................................
FUNC (LD 17) ...........................................................
FVER (LD 97) .........................................................
FWTM (LD 02) ............................................................
FWTM (LD 14) ..........................................................
G
GBCS (LD 56) ..........................................................
GCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
GCR (LD 16) .............................................................
GHTA (LD 57) ...........................................................
GHTD (LD 57) ..........................................................
GKCF (LD 87) ...........................................................
GP03 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP04 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP05 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP06 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP07 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP08 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP09 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP10 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP11 (LD 15) ............................................................
GP12 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP13 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP14 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP15 (LD 15) ...........................................................
GP2 (LD 73) .............................................................
GPNO (LD 26) ..........................................................
GPXX (LD 15) ...........................................................
GRCL (LD 57) ...........................................................
GRD (LD 16) .............................................................
GRNO (LD 18) ..........................................................
GRNO (LD 20) ..........................................................
GRP (LD 17) .............................................................
GRP (LD 18) .............................................................
GRP (LD 20) .............................................................
GRP (LD 52) .............................................................
GRPC (LD 18) ..........................................................
GRPF (LD 57) ...........................................................
GRPx (LD 26) ...........................................................
H
HBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
HCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
HCC (LD 15) .............................................................
HCCT (LD 56) ...........................................................
HDID (LD 10) ..............................................................
HDLC (LD 11) ...........................................................
HDLC (LD 16) ...........................................................
HDOPT (LD 15) ........................................................
HDTM (LD 15) ..........................................................
HIDN (LD 57) ............................................................
HLCL (LD 15) ...........................................................
HLCL (LD 16) ...........................................................
HLDC (LD 56) ...........................................................
HLOC (LD 15) ...........................................................
HLOC (LD 90) ...........................................................
HMDN (LD 10) ............................................................
HMDN (LD 11) ..........................................................
HMDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
HMDN (LD 81) ..........................................................
HMSB (LD 23) ..........................................................
HMTL (LD 15) ...........................................................
HNPA (LD 15) ...........................................................
HNPA (LD 90) ...........................................................
HNTN (LD 15) ...........................................................
HNTN (LD 16) ...........................................................
HNXX (LD 15) ...........................................................
HOL_OPT (LD 15) ....................................................
HOLD (LD 16) ...........................................................
HOLD (LD 57) ...........................................................
HOML (LD 23) ..........................................................
HOSP (LD 15) ..........................................................
HOSP (LD 49) ..........................................................
HOST (LD 17) ...........................................................
HOT (LD 11) .............................................................
HOUR (LD 15) ..........................................................
HOUR (LD 16) ..........................................................
HOUR (LD 21) ..........................................................
HOWL (LD 56) ..........................................................
HPIB (LD 17) ............................................................
HPQ (LD 23) .............................................................
HRCL (LD 15) ...........................................................
HREL (LD 57) ...........................................................
HRLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
HSID (LD 23) ............................................................
HSP_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
HTLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
HTNO (LD 20) ..........................................................
HTYP (LD 57) ...........................................................
HTYP (LD 74) ...........................................................
HUNT (LD 10) ............................................................
HUNT (LD 11) ...........................................................
HUNT (LD 27) ...........................................................
HUNT (LD 95) .........................................................
HWTT (LD 15) ..........................................................
1220 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
I
IABS (LD 16) ............................................................
IADN (LD 12) ............................................................
IADR (LD 17) ............................................................
IANI (LD 16) ..............................................................
IAPG (LD 10) ..............................................................
IAPG (LD 11) ............................................................
IAPG (LD 14) ............................................................
IBCS (LD 56) ............................................................
IC (LD 27) .................................................................
ICAD (LD 56) ............................................................
ICCR (LD 15) ............................................................
ICDD (LD 23) ............................................................
ICDL (LD 15) ............................................................
ICDN (LD 15) ............................................................
ICDN (LD 16) ............................................................
ICDN (LD 93) ............................................................
ICDR (LD 12) ............................................................
ICFA (LD 57) .............................................................
ICFD (LD 57) ............................................................
ICFV (LD 57) ............................................................
ICI (LD 15) ................................................................
ICI (LD 93) ................................................................
ICIS (LD 16) ..............................................................
ICMM (LD 15) ...........................................................
ICNP (LD 16) ............................................................
ICNT (LD 16) ............................................................
ICOG (LD 16) ...........................................................
ICOG (LD 94) ..........................................................
ICON (LD 17) ............................................................
ICP (LD 12) ...............................................................
ICP (LD 15) ...............................................................
ICP (LD 23) ...............................................................
ICP_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................
ICPA (LD 57) .............................................................
ICPD (LD 15) ............................................................
ICPD (LD 57) ............................................................
ICPO (LD 57) ............................................................
ICPP (LD 57) ............................................................
ICPR (LD 15) ............................................................
ICPR (LD 23) ............................................................
ICPR (LD 93) ............................................................
ICPS (LD 15) ............................................................
ICPS (LD 16) ............................................................
ICPS (LD 23) ............................................................
ICPS (LD 93) ............................................................
ICR (LD 88) ..............................................................
ICS (LD 73) ...............................................................
ICT (LD 10) .................................................................
ICT (LD 11) ...............................................................
ICT (LD 12) ...............................................................
ICTD (LD 15) ............................................................
ICWN (LD 15) ...........................................................
ID (LD 16) .................................................................
ID (LD 52) .................................................................
ID (LD 86) .................................................................
ID1 (LD 56) ...............................................................
ID2 (LD 56) ...............................................................
IDBB (LD 86) ............................................................
IDBZ (LD 15) ............................................................
IDC (LD 16) ..............................................................
IDC (LD 95) .............................................................
IDCA (LD 15) ............................................................
IDD (LD 56) ..............................................................
IDE (LD 56) ...............................................................
IDEF (LD 15) ............................................................
IDEF (LD 16) ............................................................
IDGT (LD 49) ............................................................
IDLB (LD 23) .............................................................
IDLE (R) (LD 73) .......................................................
IDLE (S) (LD 73) .......................................................
IDLE_DISP_CHAR (LD 17) ......................................
IDLE_DISP_STRING (LD 17) ...................................
IDLE_SET_DISPLAY (LD 17) ...................................
IDLP (LD 17) .............................................................
IDLT (LD 02) ...............................................................
IDLT 1 (LD 02) ............................................................
IDOP (LD 16) ............................................................
IDR (LD 15) ..............................................................
IDTB (LD 16) ............................................................
IDUB (LD 23) ............................................................
IEC (LD 16) ...............................................................
IFC (LD 16) ...............................................................
IFC (LD 17) ...............................................................
IFDN (LD 23) ............................................................
IFLS (LD 15) .............................................................
IFTO (LD 19) .............................................................
IHT (LD 16) ...............................................................
IIT (LD 19) ................................................................
IITP (LD 19) ..............................................................
ILIN (LD 56) ..............................................................
ILLR (LD 16) .............................................................
ILOU (LD 56) ............................................................
IMA (LD 15) ..............................................................
IMA (LD 23) ..............................................................
IMBI (LD 16) .............................................................
IMCB (LD 16) ............................................................
IMPH (LD 15) ............................................................
IMS (LD 15) ..............................................................
IMS (LD 23) ..............................................................
IMS (LD 57) ..............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1221
IMS_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
INAC (LD 16) ............................................................
INC (LD 14) ..............................................................
INC (LD 16) ..............................................................
INC_T306 (LD 16) ....................................................
INC_T306 (LD 17) ....................................................
INDMF (LD 16) .........................................................
INDX (LD 10) ..............................................................
INFO (LD 20) ............................................................
INIT (LD 19) ..............................................................
INIT (LD 49) ..............................................................
INPL (LD 90) .............................................................
INSO (LD 97) ..........................................................
INST (LD 16) ............................................................
INST (LD 57) ............................................................
INST (LD 86) ............................................................
INT (LD 11) ...............................................................
INT (LD 15) ...............................................................
INT (LD 16) ...............................................................
INT_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................
INT_NAME (LD 15) ..................................................
INTC (LD 15) ............................................................
INTC (LD 16) ............................................................
INTFIELD (LD 15) .....................................................
INTL (LD 15) .............................................................
INTL (LD 17) .............................................................
INTM (LD 58) ............................................................
INTN (LD 97) ..........................................................
INTR (LD 15) ............................................................
INTR (LD 19) ............................................................
INTR (LD 58) ............................................................
INTU (LD 56) ............................................................
INTU (LD 97) ..........................................................
INVC (LD 02) ..............................................................
INVN (LD 02) ..............................................................
INVS (LD 02) ..............................................................
IOHQ (LD 86) ...........................................................
IPCONF (LD 17) .......................................................
IPIE (LD 17) ..............................................................
IPMG (LD 17) ...........................................................
IPR0 / 1 (LD 97) ......................................................
IPRI (LD 14) ..............................................................
IPTN (LD 14) ............................................................
IPUB (LD 16) ............................................................
IRFP (LD 15) ............................................................
IRFR (LD 15) ............................................................
IRNG (LD 15) ............................................................
ISAP (LD 23) ............................................................
ISAR (LD 16) ............................................................
ISDM (LD 86) ............................................................
ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) ...............
ISDN (LD 15) ............................................................
ISDN (LD 16) ............................................................
ISDN_MCNT (LD 17) ................................................
ISDN_MCNT (LD 27) ................................................
ISET (LD 86) .............................................................
ISLM (LD 17) ............................................................
ISM (LD 97) ............................................................
ITBP (LD 73) .............................................................
ITDN (LD 16) ............................................................
ITED (LD 90) ............................................................
ITEI (LD 86) ..............................................................
ITEI (LD 90) ..............................................................
ITEM (LD 10) ..............................................................
ITEM (LD 11) ............................................................
ITH1 (LD 15) .............................................................
ITH2 (LD 15) .............................................................
ITH3 (LD 15) .............................................................
ITHC (LD 02) ..............................................................
ITHS (LD 02) ..............................................................
ITNA (LD 11) .............................................................
ITOH (LD 87) ............................................................
ITOH (LD 90) ............................................................
ITOL (LD 16) .............................................................
ITPP (LD 73) .............................................................
ITXX (LD 57) .............................................................
IVMS (LD 23) ............................................................
IVR (LD 23) ...............................................................
J
JDGT (LD 16) ...........................................................
JDMI (LD 17) ............................................................
K
K (LD 17) ..................................................................
KBA (LD 11) ..............................................................
KBD (LD 11) ..............................................................
KEEP_MSGS (LD 10) ................................................
KEEP_MSGS (LD 11) ...............................................
KEM (LD 11) .............................................................
KEM_RANGE (LD 20) ..............................................
KEMOFST (LD 11) ....................................................
KEY (LD 12) .............................................................
KEY1 (LD 97) ..........................................................
KEY2 (LD 97) ..........................................................
KEY3 (LD 97) ..........................................................
L
L2_RST (LD 74) .......................................................
1222 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
LA11 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA12 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA21 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA22 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA31 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA32 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA41 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA42 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA51 (LD 15) ............................................................
LA52 (LD 15) ............................................................
LAAC (LD 19) ...........................................................
LADN (LD 15) ...........................................................
LANG (LD 11) ...........................................................
LANG (LD 12) ...........................................................
LANG (LD 95) .........................................................
LANGUAGE (LD 17) .................................................
LAPB (LD 27) ...........................................................
LAPD (LD 17) ...........................................................
LAPD (LD 27) ...........................................................
LAPW (LD 17) ..........................................................
LAST (LD 16) ............................................................
LCKT (LD 15) ...........................................................
LCLB (LD 73) ............................................................
LCMT (LD 17) ...........................................................
LCN1 (LD 27) ...........................................................
LCN2 (LD 27) ...........................................................
LCNO (LD 16) ...........................................................
LCTL (LD 17) ............................................................
LD 11 program ..........................................................
LDA0 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDA1 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDA2 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDA3 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDA4 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDA5 (LD 15) ............................................................
LDAC (LD 19) ...........................................................
LDBZ (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDDD (LD 90) ...........................................................
LDID (LD 90) ............................................................
LDN (LD 10) ...............................................................
LDN (LD 11) ..............................................................
LDN (LD 27) .............................................................
LDN (LD 56) .............................................................
LDN (LD 90) .............................................................
LDN_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
LDN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN0 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN1 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN2 (LD 86) ...........................................................
LDN2 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDN3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN3 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDN4 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN4 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDN5 (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDN5 (LD 93) ...........................................................
LDNT (LD 15) ...........................................................
LDOP (LD 14) ...........................................................
LDTT (LD 15) ............................................................
LEC (LD 15) ..............................................................
LEC (LD 16) ..............................................................
LEND (LD 15) ...........................................................
LEVL (LD 17) ............................................................
LFAC (LD 73) ............................................................
LFAL (LD 52) ............................................................
LFAL (LD 73) ............................................................
LFAR (LD 52) ............................................................
LFFD (LD 15) ............................................................
LGTH (LD 16) ...........................................................
LHK (LD 11) ..............................................................
LID (LD 16) ...............................................................
LILO (LD 57) .............................................................
LIMT (LD 56) ............................................................
LINK (LD 15) .............................................................
LINT (LD 52) .............................................................
LIS (LD 17) ...............................................................
LIST (LD 87) .............................................................
LLID (LD 17) .............................................................
LLT (LD 15) ...............................................................
LM0 (LD 52) ..............................................................
LM1 (LD 52) ..............................................................
LM2 (LD 52) ..............................................................
LM3 (LD 52) ..............................................................
LMNL (LD 16) ...........................................................
LNAME_OPTION (LD 17) ........................................
LNRS (LD 10) .............................................................
LNRS (LD 11) ...........................................................
LOC (LD 90) .............................................................
LOC (LD 97) ...........................................................
LOCD (LD 16) ...........................................................
LOCK (LD 17) ...........................................................
LOCK (LD 88) ...........................................................
LOCL (LD 15) ...........................................................
LOG (LD 23) .............................................................
LOGIN_NAME (LD 17) .............................................
LOOP (LD 27) ...........................................................
LOOP (LD 52) ...........................................................
LOOP (LD 73) ...........................................................
LOUT (LD 16) ...........................................................
LOUT (LD 17) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1223
LPIB (LD 17) .............................................................
LPK (LD 11) ..............................................................
LPWD (LD 17) ..........................................................
LSC (LD 15) ..............................................................
LSC (LD 87) ..............................................................
LSC (Local Steering Code) .......................................
LSNO (LD 18) ...........................................................
LSNO (LD 20) ...........................................................
LSNO (LD 57) ...........................................................
LSNO (LD 81) ...........................................................
LSSL (LD 74) ............................................................
LTEI (LD 27) .............................................................
LTER (LD 86) ............................................................
LTHR (LD 17) ............................................................
LTID (LD 97) ...........................................................
LTN (LD 11) ..............................................................
LVNO (LD 94) .........................................................
M
M911_ABAN (LD 16) ................................................
M911_ANI (LD 16) ....................................................
M911_FORM (LD 16) ...............................................
M911_TONE (LD 16) ................................................
M911_TRK_TYPE (LD 16) .......................................
MAIN (LD 15) ............................................................
MAND (LD 73) ..........................................................
MANO (LD 16) ..........................................................
MANU (LD 17) ..........................................................
MANU (LD 81) ..........................................................
MAP (LD 29) .............................................................
MARP (LD 10) ............................................................
MARP (LD 11) ...........................................................
MARP (LD 17) ..........................................................
MAT (LD 17) .............................................................
MAT_READ_ONLY (LD 17) ......................................
MATT (LD 15) ...........................................................
MAUT (LD 10) ............................................................
MAUT (LD 11) ...........................................................
MAX (LD 16) .............................................................
MAXP (LD 23) ..........................................................
MAXT (LD 15) ...........................................................
MAXT (LD 94) .........................................................
MAXU (LD 14) ..........................................................
MBG (LD 15) ............................................................
MBGA (LD 16) ..........................................................
MBGA (LD 17) ..........................................................
MBGS (LD 93) ..........................................................
MBNR (LD 15) ..........................................................
MBXR (LD 16) ..........................................................
MBXR (LD 21) ..........................................................
MCAL (LD 27) ...........................................................
MCAN (LD 57) ..........................................................
MCCD (LD 16) ..........................................................
MCCL (LD 11) ...........................................................
MCDC (LD 15) ..........................................................
MCDT (LD 16) ..........................................................
MCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................
MCFD (LD 23) ..........................................................
MCLR (LD 15) ..........................................................
MCM (LD 73) ............................................................
MCNT (LD 17) ..........................................................
MCOM (LD 57) .........................................................
MCRT (LD 15) ..........................................................
MCTM (LD 16) ..........................................................
MCTS (LD 16) ..........................................................
MDID (LD 15) ...........................................................
MDL (LD 97) ...........................................................
MDMP (LD 16) ..........................................................
MDTD (LD 16) ..........................................................
MED (LD 97) ...........................................................
MEMB (LD 27) ..........................................................
MFAC (LD 15) ...........................................................
MFAO (LD 73) ..........................................................
MFC (LD 16) .............................................................
MFC_ENT (LD 15) ....................................................
MFCG (LD 15) ..........................................................
MFCI (LD 16) ............................................................
MFCO (LD 16) ..........................................................
MFEA (LD 16) ...........................................................
MFED (LD 16) ..........................................................
MFEI (LD 16) ............................................................
MFEO (LD 16) ..........................................................
MFF (LD 73) .............................................................
MFID (LD 15) ............................................................
MFKI (LD 16) ............................................................
MFKO (LD 16) ..........................................................
MFL (LD 14) .............................................................
MFLI (LD 14) ............................................................
MFLT0 (LD 97) ........................................................
MFLT1 (LD 97) ........................................................
MFPD (LD 14) ..........................................................
MFRL (LD 86) ...........................................................
MFRL (LD 97) .........................................................
MFSD (LD 17) ..........................................................
MFSL (LD 73) ...........................................................
MFSS (LD 16) ...........................................................
MFVN (LD 15) ..........................................................
MFVO (LD 15) ..........................................................
MG_CARD (LD 17) ...................................................
MG_CARD (LD 27) ...................................................
MGCLK (LD 73) ........................................................
MGCONF (LD 17) .....................................................
1224 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
MGCR (LD 17) ..........................................................
MGTDS (LD 17) ........................................................
MHLD (LD 15) ..........................................................
MID ...........................................................................
MID_SCPU (LD 17) ..................................................
MIN (LD 16) ..............................................................
MINL (LD 97) ..........................................................
MINP (LD 73) ............................................................
MINT (LD 56) ............................................................
MISDIAL_DELAY (LD 24) .........................................
MISDIAL_PREVENTION (LD 24) .............................
MISP (LD 27) ............................................................
MLDN (LD 15) ..........................................................
MLDN (LD 17) ..........................................................
MLIO (LD 57) ............................................................
MLNG (LD 11) ...........................................................
MLNG (LD 81) ..........................................................
MLPPSD (LD 15) ......................................................
MLPPSD (LD 87) ......................................................
MLWU_LANG (LD 10) ................................................
MLWU_LANG (LD 11) ..............................................
MMDN (LD 58) .........................................................
MNDN (LD 14) ..........................................................
MNG1 (LD 73) ..........................................................
MNG2 (LD 73) ..........................................................
MNOD .......................................................................
MNPI .........................................................................
MNT (LD 57) .............................................................
MNTC (LD 57) ..........................................................
MNUM ......................................................................
MNXX (LD 90) ..........................................................
MOD (LD 11) .............................................................
MOD (LD 16) ............................................................
MODE (LD 16) ..........................................................
MODE (LD 17) ..........................................................
MODE (LD 27) ..........................................................
MODIFY (LD 17) .......................................................
MODL (LD 10) ............................................................
MODL (LD 11) ...........................................................
MODL (LD 14) ..........................................................
MODL (LD 20) ..........................................................
MON (LD 16) ............................................................
MONT (LD 19) ..........................................................
MOPT (LD 97) ........................................................
MOTN (LD 11) ..........................................................
MOTN (LD 20) ..........................................................
MPED (LD 17) ..........................................................
MPH (LD 15) .............................................................
MPH (LD 27) .............................................................
MPHC (LD 27) ..........................................................
MPHI (LD 11) ............................................................
MPHI (LD 20) ............................................................
MPL (LD 87) .............................................................
MPO_DATA (LD 15) .................................................
MPOP (LD 15) ..........................................................
MPRI (LD 87) ............................................................
MQA (LD 23) ............................................................
MQAP (LD 23) ..........................................................
MQAS (LD 23) ..........................................................
MQC_FEAT (LD 16) .................................................
MQC_FEAT (LD 17) .................................................
MQCF (LD 23) ..........................................................
MQUE (LD 57) ..........................................................
MR (LD 16) ...............................................................
MRCD (LD 20) ..........................................................
MRPS (LD 58) ..........................................................
MRT (LD 11) .............................................................
MRT (LD 16) .............................................................
MSBA (LD 57) ..........................................................
MSBD (LD 57) ..........................................................
MSCC (LD 86) ..........................................................
MSCD (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSCL (LD 17) ...........................................................
MSDT (LD 17) ..........................................................
MSEC (LD 17) ..........................................................
MSG (LD 29) ............................................................
MSG1 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG10 (LD 15) ........................................................
MSG2 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG3 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG4 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG5 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG6 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG7 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG8 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSG9 (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSRN (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSSC (LD 15) ..........................................................
MSSD (LD 17) ..........................................................
MTAR (LD 15) ...........................................................
MTEI (LD 27) ............................................................
MTFM (LD 27) ..........................................................
MTGL (LD57) ............................................................
MTND (LD 16) ..........................................................
MTO (LD 58) .............................................................
MTON .......................................................................
MTRC (LD 57) ..........................................................
MTRN (LD 57) ..........................................................
MTRO (LD 17) ..........................................................
MTSP (LD 27) ...........................................................
MULT (LD 16) ...........................................................
MULTI_USER (LD 17) ..............................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1225
MURT (LD 15) ..........................................................
MURT (LD 23) ..........................................................
MURT (LD 50) ..........................................................
MURT (LD 93) ..........................................................
MUS (LD 15) .............................................................
MUS (LD 16) .............................................................
MUSR (LD 15) ..........................................................
MVSG (LD 25) ..........................................................
MVT (LD 97) ...........................................................
MWAN (LD 56) .........................................................
MWC (LD 23) ............................................................
MWDT (LD 56) .........................................................
MWFB (LD 15) ..........................................................
MWIF (LD 17) ...........................................................
MWIF (LD 74) ...........................................................
MWNS (LD 15) .........................................................
MWRA (LD 57) .........................................................
MWRT (LD 16) ..........................................................
MWRT (LD 17) ..........................................................
MWTO (LD 16) .........................................................
MWTO (LD 17) .........................................................
MWUA (LD 57) .........................................................
MWUD (LD 57) .........................................................
MWUN (LD 10) ...........................................................
MXDM (LD 86) ..........................................................
MXFC (LD 86) ..........................................................
MXFS (LD 86) ...........................................................
MXIX (LD 86) ............................................................
MXLC (LD 86) ...........................................................
MXLN (LD 95) .........................................................
MXRL (LD 86) ...........................................................
MXSC (LD 86) ..........................................................
MXSD (LD 86) ..........................................................
MXTI (LD 16) ............................................................
N
N1 (LD 17) ................................................................
N1 (LD 27) ................................................................
N2 (LD 17) ................................................................
N2 (LD 27) ................................................................
N200 (LD 17) ............................................................
N200 (LD 27) ............................................................
N201 (LD 17) ............................................................
N201 (LD 27) ............................................................
N2X4 (LD 17) ............................................................
N2X4 (LD 27) ............................................................
NACC (LD 16) ..........................................................
NACT (LD 20) ...................................................
NACT (LD 22) ...........................................................
NACT (LD 81) ...........................................................
NACT (LD 82) ...........................................................
NACT (LD 83) ...........................................................
NADT (LD 16) ...........................................................
NAGN (LD 93) ..........................................................
NALT (LD 86) ............................................................
NAME (LD 10) ............................................................
NAME (LD 11) ...........................................................
NAME (LD 23) ..........................................................
NAME (LD 95) ........................................................
NAS_ ACTV (LD 15) .................................................
NAS_ ATCL (LD 15) .................................................
NASA (LD 16) ...........................................................
NASA (LD 17) ...........................................................
NATC (LD 15) ...........................................................
NATL (LD 16) ............................................................
NATP (LD 97) ..........................................................
NAUT (LD 15) ...........................................................
NBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
NBLK (LD 15) ...........................................................
NCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
NCDP (LD 86) ..........................................................
NCFW (LD 23) ..........................................................
NCG1 (LD 73) ...........................................................
NCG2 (LD 73) ...........................................................
NCNA (LD 16) ..........................................................
NCNI (LD 16) ............................................................
NCOS (LD 10) ............................................................
NCOS (LD 11) ...........................................................
NCOS (LD 14) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 15) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 16) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 18) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 19) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 24) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 27) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 81) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 87) ..........................................................
NCOS (LD 88) ..........................................................
NCPU (LD 17) ..........................................................
NCR (LD 17) .............................................................
NCRD (LD 16) ..........................................................
NCS1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
NCS2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
NCSD (LD 73) ..........................................................
NCTH (LD 16) ...........................................................
NCWL (LD 23) ..........................................................
NDFL (LD 23) ...........................................................
NDGT (LD 16) ..........................................................
NDGT (LD 18) ..........................................................
NDID .........................................................................
NDID (LD 15) ............................................................
NDIG (LD 16) ............................................................
1226 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
NDNO (LD 16) ..........................................................
NDP (LD 16) .............................................................
NDR1 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................
NDR1 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................
NDR2 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................
NDR2 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................
NDR3 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................
NDR3 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................
NDR4 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................
NDR4 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................
NDRI (LD 16) ............................................................
NEDC (LD 16) ..........................................................
NET_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
NEW DATA PLANNED? (LD 29) ..............................
NEWTYP ..................................................................
NFCR (LD 15) ...........................................................
NFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................
NFNS (LD 15) ...........................................................
NGRP (LD 14) ..........................................................
NHTN (LD 11) ...........................................................
NINV (LD 15) ............................................................
NIPN (LD 15) ............................................................
NIPR (LD 56) ............................................................
NIT (LD 15) ...............................................................
NIT_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................
NIT1 (LD 15) .............................................................
NIT1 (LD 93) .............................................................
NIT2 (LD 15) .............................................................
NIT2 (LD 93) .............................................................
NIT3 (LD 15) .............................................................
NIT3 (LD 93) .............................................................
NIT4 (LD 15) .............................................................
NIT4 (LD 93) .............................................................
NIT5 (LD 15) .............................................................
NITC (LD 95) ..........................................................
NITE (LD 14) ............................................................
NITR (LD 15) ............................................................
NMAP (LD 86) ..........................................................
NMBR (LD 88) ..........................................................
NMME (LD 15) ..........................................................
NMNL (LD 16) ..........................................................
NMSG (LD 16) ..........................................................
NMUS (LD 14) ..........................................................
NND (LD 52) .............................................................
NNDC (LD 97) ........................................................
NNT (LD 15) .............................................................
NODE (LD 16) ..........................................................
NOLS (LD 18) ...........................................................
NOOS (LD 73) ..........................................................
NOTI (LD 15) ............................................................
NOUT (LD 16) ..........................................................
NPA (LD 16) ..............................................................
NPA (LD 19) ..............................................................
NPA (LD 87) ..............................................................
NPA (LD 90) ..............................................................
NPI (LD 15) ...............................................................
NPID (LD 16) ............................................................
NPID_TBL_NUM (LD 16) .........................................
NRAC (LD 23) ..........................................................
NRCV (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
NRDY (LD 57) ..........................................................
NRES (LD 15) ...........................................................
NRMT (LD 56) ..........................................................
NRNG (LD 87) ..........................................................
NRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
NRT (LD 16) .............................................................
NRT (LD 23) .............................................................
NRWU (LD 15) ..........................................................
NSC (LD 87) .............................................................
NSCC (LD 90) ..........................................................
NSCP (LD 15) ...........................................................
NSF (LD 16) .............................................................
NSO (LD 15) .............................................................
NSTO (LD 58) ...........................................................
NT2 (LD 74) ..............................................................
NTBL (LD 93) ...........................................................
NTC (LD 73) .............................................................
NTCD (LD 50) ...........................................................
NTN (LD 27) .............................................................
NTN1 (LD 27) ...........................................................
NTN2 (LD 27) ...........................................................
NTNO (LD 27) ..........................................................
NTOF (LD 16) ...........................................................
NTOL (LD 16) ...........................................................
NTT (LD 94) ............................................................
NUID (LD 11) ............................................................
NUMZONE (LD 10) ....................................................
NUMZONE (LD 11) ...................................................
NUMZONE (LD 12) ..................................................
NUMZONE (LD 20) ..................................................
NUMZONE (LD 83) ..................................................
NWIF (LD 27) ...........................................................
NWT (LD 15) ............................................................
NXX (LD 19) .............................................................
NXX (LD 87) .............................................................
NXX (LD 90) .............................................................
NZON (LD 81) ..........................................................
O
OABS (LD 16) ...........................................................
OACn (LD 56) ...........................................................
OAL (LD 16) .............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1227
OAN (LD 16) .............................................................
OAS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
OBKT (LD 56) ...........................................................
OBPT (LD 23) ...........................................................
OBSC (LD 23) ..........................................................
OBTN (LD 23) ...........................................................
OC (LD 27) ...............................................................
OCB1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
OCB2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
OCB3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
OCBA (LD 57) ..........................................................
OCBD (LD 57) ..........................................................
OCBV (LD 57) ..........................................................
OCLI (LD 15) ............................................................
OCN (LD 23) .............................................................
ODN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN4 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN5 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN6 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN7 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN8 (LD 15) ...........................................................
ODN9 (LD 15) ...........................................................
OFFC (LD 90) ...........................................................
OFFP (LD 88) ...........................................................
OGDN (LD 16) ..........................................................
OGIS (LD 16) ............................................................
OGNP (LD 16) ..........................................................
OGNT (LD 16) ..........................................................
OGPS (LD 16) ..........................................................
OHAS (LD 15) ..........................................................
OHID (LD 10) .............................................................
OHID (LD 11) ............................................................
OHQ (LD 16) ............................................................
OHQ (LD 56) ............................................................
OHQ (LD 86) ............................................................
OHQ (LD 87) ............................................................
OHQT (LD 16) ..........................................................
OHT (LD 16) .............................................................
OHTD (LD 16) ..........................................................
OHTL (LD 87) ...........................................................
OHTT (LD 16) ...........................................................
OMPH (LD 15) ..........................................................
ONP (LD 73) .............................................................
OOSC (LD 73) ..........................................................
OPA (LD 16) .............................................................
OPCB (LD 16) ..........................................................
OPD (LD 16) .............................................................
OPDL (LD 16) ...........................................................
OPE (LD 11) .............................................................
OPE (LD 16) .............................................................
OPER (LD 19) ..........................................................
OPER (LD 58) ..........................................................
OPP (LD 16) .............................................................
OPR (LD 16) .............................................................
OPR (LD 20) .............................................................
OPRI (LD 14) ............................................................
OPT (LD 15) .............................................................
OPT (LD 27) .............................................................
OPT (LD 29) .............................................................
OPX (LD 73) .............................................................
ORUR (LD 17) ..........................................................
OSDN (LD 24) ..........................................................
OSG1 (LD 73) ...........................................................
OSG2 (LD 73) ...........................................................
OSGD (LD 73) ..........................................................
OTBF (LD 17) ...........................................................
OTCR (LD 15) ..........................................................
OTH (LD 56) .............................................................
OTL (LD 16) ..............................................................
OUT_T306 (LD 16) ...................................................
OUT_T306 (LD 17) ...................................................
OUTS (LD 23) ...........................................................
OVBU (LD 23) ..........................................................
OVDN (LD 23) ..........................................................
OVFL (LD 23) ...........................................................
OVFL (LD 56) ...........................................................
OVLA (LD 17) ...........................................................
OVLL (LD 86) ...........................................................
OVLP (LD 19) ...........................................................
OVLR (LD 16) ...........................................................
OVLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
OVLS (LD 16) ...........................................................
OVLS (LD 17) ...........................................................
OVLT (LD 16) ............................................................
OVLT (LD 17) ............................................................
OVLY (LD 17) ...........................................................
OVRD (LD 56) ..........................................................
OVRD (LD 57) ..........................................................
OVTH (LD 23) ...........................................................
P
P BRLS (R) (LD 73) ..................................................
P BRLS (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
P BURS (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P BURS (S) (LD 73) .................................................
P CALL (R) (LD 73) ..................................................
P CAS (R) (LD 73) ....................................................
P CAS (S) (LD 73) ....................................................
P DIGT (R) (LD 73) ...................................................
1228 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
P DIGT (S) (LD 73) ...................................................
P EOS (R) (LD 73) ....................................................
P EOSB (S) (LD 73) .................................................
P EOSF (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
P ESNW (R) (LD 73) ................................................
P ESNW (S) (LD 73) .................................................
P FRLS (R) (LD 73) ..................................................
P FRLS (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
P METR (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P NXFR (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P NXFR (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
P OPCA (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P OPRC (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P OPRS (R) (LD 73) .................................................
P RCOD (S) (LD 73) .................................................
P RCTL (R) (LD 73) ..................................................
P RCTL (S) (LD 73) ..................................................
P RRC (S) (LD 73) ....................................................
P WNKS (R) (LD 73) ................................................
P WNKS (S) (LD 73) .................................................
P10 (LD 56) ..............................................................
P10P (LD 97) ..........................................................
P10R (LD 97) ..........................................................
P12R (LD 97) ..........................................................
P20R (LD 97) ..........................................................
PADL (LD 16) ............................................................
PADT (LD 16) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 20) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 22) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 23) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 81) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 82) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 83) ...........................................................
PAGE (LD 95) .........................................................
PAGEOFST (LD 11) ..................................................
PAGT (LD 97) .........................................................
PANI (LD 15) .............................................................
PANN (LD 58) ...........................................................
PANS (LD 16) ...........................................................
PAR (LD 11) ..............................................................
PAR (LD 16) ..............................................................
PARM (LD 17) ...........................................................
PARY (LD 17) ...........................................................
PATH (LD 58) ............................................................
PATI (LD 56) .............................................................
PBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
PBDO (LD 11) ...........................................................
PBDO (LD 16) ..........................................................
PBLK (LD 15) ...........................................................
PBUZ (LD 15) ...........................................................
PBXH (LD 17) ...........................................................
PCA (LD 15) .............................................................
PCA (LD 21) .............................................................
PCAD (LD 56) ...........................................................
PCDL (LD 15) ...........................................................
PCDR (LD 17) ..........................................................
PCDS (LD 15) ...........................................................
PCID (LD 16) .....................................................
PCID (LD 21) ............................................................
PCMC (LD 15) ..........................................................
PCML (LD 14) ...........................................................
PCML (LD 17) ...........................................................
PCML (LD 52) ...........................................................
PCMM (LD 23) ..........................................................
PCMR (LD 52) ..........................................................
PCWT (LD 56) ..........................................................
PDCA (LD 14) ...........................................................
PDCA (LD 27) ...........................................................
PDCA (LD 73) ...........................................................
PDCH (LD 17) ..........................................................
PDT ..........................................................................
PECL (LD 16) ...........................................................
PELK (LD 15) ...........................................................
PER (LD 86) .............................................................
PERS (LD 73) ...........................................................
PFAN (LD 15) ...........................................................
PFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................
PFX1 (LD 15) ............................................................
PFX2 (LD 15) ............................................................
PGAP (LD 57) ...........................................................
PGBY (LD 29) ...........................................................
PGIP (LD 57) ............................................................
PGMM (LD 29) .........................................................
PGPN (LD 16) ..........................................................
PGPN (LD 27) ..........................................................
PGSP (LD 57) ...........................................................
PH (LD 27) ................................................................
PHDT (LD 15) ...........................................................
PHIP (LD 15) ............................................................
PICP (LD 15) ............................................................
PII (LD 16) ................................................................
PINT (LD 15) ............................................................
PINX_CUST (LD 17) ................................................
PINX_DN (LD 15) .....................................................
PKND (LD 15) ...........................................................
PKUP (LD 95) .........................................................
PLAT (LD 18) ............................................................
PLDN (LD 18) ...........................................................
PLDN (LD 57) ...........................................................
PLEV (LD 10) .............................................................
PLEV (LD 11) ............................................................
PLEV (LD 16) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1229
PMCR (LD 17) ..........................................................
PMIN (LD 17) ............................................................
PMSI (LD 17) ............................................................
PNDL (LD 16) ...........................................................
PNI (LD 15) ...............................................................
PNI (LD 16) ...............................................................
PNNC (LD 16) ..........................................................
PNNC (LD 56) ..........................................................
PNPS (LD 16) ...........................................................
POLR (LD 13) ...........................................................
PONW (LD 57) .........................................................
PORT (LD 15) ...........................................................
PORT (LD 17) ...........................................................
POS (LD 11) .............................................................
POST (LD 16) ...........................................................
POST (LD 18) ...........................................................
PPID (LD 14) ............................................................
PPM_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
PPMD (LD 15) ..........................................................
PPMD (LD 73) ..........................................................
PR_RTN (LD 16) ......................................................
PR_RTN (LD 17) ......................................................
PR_TRIGS (LD 16) ...................................................
PR_TRIGS (LD 17) ...................................................
PRBK (LD 56) ...........................................................
PRCS (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
PRDL (LD 16) ...........................................................
PRDN (LD 14) ..........................................................
PRE (LD 18) .............................................................
PRED (LD 18) ...........................................................
PREF (LD 15) ...........................................................
PREF (LD 73) ...........................................................
PREF CC0 (LD 73) ...................................................
PREF CC1 (LD 73) ...................................................
PREF CC2 (LD 73) ...................................................
PREF CC3 (LD 73) ...................................................
PREF CC4 (LD 73) ...................................................
PREM (LD 16) ..........................................................
PREM (LD 56) ..........................................................
PREO (LD 15) ..........................................................
PRES (LD 12) ...........................................................
PRES (LD 19) ...........................................................
PRES (LD 27) ...........................................................
PRET (LD 58) ...........................................................
PRFX (LD 27) ...........................................................
PRI (LD 10) ................................................................
PRI (LD 11) ...............................................................
PRI (LD 17) ...............................................................
PRI (LD 27) ...............................................................
PRI (LD 73) ...............................................................
PRI_CH (LD 27) .......................................................
PRI2 (LD 17) .............................................................
PRI2 (LD 73) .............................................................
PRID (LD 27) ............................................................
PRIM (LD 17) ............................................................
PRIM (LD 23) ............................................................
PRIO (LD 14) ............................................................
PRIO (LD 23) ............................................................
PRIV (LD 16) ............................................................
PRIV (LD 74) ............................................................
PRM (LD 11) .............................................................
PRMT (LD 15) ..........................................................
PRNG (LD 15) ..........................................................
PROCEED ................................................................
PROG (LD 16) ..........................................................
PROG (LD 17) ..........................................................
PROM (LD 87) ..........................................................
PRTD (LD 19) ...........................................................
PRTY (LD 17) ...........................................................
PSAL (LD 58) ...........................................................
PSDS (LD 11) ...........................................................
PSDS (LD 16) ...........................................................
PSEL (LD 11) ............................................................
PSEL (LD 16) ...........................................................
PSIZ (LD 27) .............................................................
PST (LD 18) ..............................................................
PSTN (LD 15) ...........................................................
PTMR (LD 17) ..........................................................
PTTY (LD 15) ...........................................................
PTUT (LD 16) ...........................................................
PTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................
PUDN (LD 57) ..........................................................
PUGR (LD 57) ..........................................................
PULS (LD 56) ...........................................................
PURN (LD 57) ..........................................................
PVC (LD 27) .............................................................
PVCN (LD 27) ...........................................................
PWD (LD 17) ............................................................
PWD_DATA (LD 15) .................................................
PWD2 (LD 15) ..........................................................
PWD2 (LD 17) ..........................................................
PWD2 (LD 22) ..........................................................
PWD2 (LD 29) ..........................................................
PWD2 (LD 97) ........................................................
PWnn (LD 17) ...........................................................
PWTP (LD 17) ..........................................................
Q
QCHID (LD 17) .........................................................
QDIS (LD 12) ............................................................
QREC (LD 16) ..........................................................
QTHM (LD 12) ..........................................................
1230 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
QUE (LD 86) .............................................................
R
R_ENTRY (LD 15) ....................................................
R_SIZE (LD 15) ........................................................
R2BN (LD 15) ...........................................................
R2ED (LD 15) ...........................................................
R2MD (LD 16) ..........................................................
RACD (LD 16) ..........................................................
RADR (LD 17) ..........................................................
RADT (LD 87) ...........................................................
RAGT (LD 23) ...........................................................
RAIE (LD 73) ............................................................
RALL (LD 15) ............................................................
RALM (LD 73) ...........................................................
RAN (LD 23) .............................................................
RAN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
RAN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
RAN2 (LD 88) ...........................................................
RANC (LD 87) ..........................................................
RANE (LD 87) ...........................................................
RANF (LD 15) ...........................................................
RANG (LD 58) ..........................................................
RANH (LD 16) ..........................................................
RANR (LD 15) ..........................................................
RANR (LD 16) ..........................................................
RANR (LD 24) ...........................................................
RANR (LD 58) ..........................................................
RANR (LD 88) ..........................................................
RANR (LD 97) .........................................................
RANX (LD 16) ...........................................................
RAO (LD 23) .............................................................
RATE (LD 27) ...........................................................
RATE (LD 74) ...........................................................
RATS (LD 73) ...........................................................
RBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................
RBTD (LD 86) ...........................................................
RCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
RCAL (LD 16) ...........................................................
RCAL (LD 18) ...........................................................
RCAL (LD 58) ...........................................................
RCAP ........................................................................
RCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................
RCFD (LD 57) ...........................................................
RCFV (LD 57) ...........................................................
RCLE (LD 15) ...........................................................
RCLS (LD 16) ...........................................................
RCNT (LD 15) ...........................................................
RCO (LD 10) ..............................................................
RCO (LD 11) .............................................................
RCRG (LD 58) ..........................................................
RCTI (LD 58) ............................................................
RCVP (LD 17) ...........................................................
RCY1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
RCY2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
RDLN (LD 57) ...........................................................
RDNA (LD 23) ..........................................................
RDNE (LD 57) ..........................................................
RDNL (LD 16) ...........................................................
RDR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
RDSN (LD 57) ..........................................................
RDST (LD 57) ...........................................................
RECA (LD 50) ...........................................................
RECD (LD 15) ..........................................................
RECV (LD 94) .........................................................
REF (LD 16) .............................................................
REF0 (LD 15) ...........................................................
REF1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
REF2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
REF3 (LD 15) ...........................................................
REMD (LD 17) ..........................................................
REMO (LD 17) ..........................................................
REMQ (LD 17) ..........................................................
REP (LD 16) .............................................................
REP (LD 57) .............................................................
REPL PARM (LD 74) ................................................
REPT (LD 73) ...........................................................
REQ (LD 10) ...............................................................
REQ (LD 11) .............................................................
REQ (LD 12) .............................................................
REQ (LD 13) .............................................................
REQ (LD 14) .............................................................
REQ (LD 15) .............................................................
REQ (LD 16) .............................................................
REQ (LD 17) .............................................................
REQ (LD 18) .............................................................
REQ (LD 19) .............................................................
REQ (LD 20) .............................................................
REQ (LD 21) .............................................................
REQ (LD 22) .............................................................
REQ (LD 23) .............................................................
REQ (LD 24) .............................................................
REQ (LD 25) .............................................................
REQ (LD 26) .............................................................
REQ (LD 27) .............................................................
REQ (LD 28) .............................................................
REQ (LD 29) .............................................................
REQ (LD 49) .............................................................
REQ (LD 50) .............................................................
REQ (LD 52) .............................................................
REQ (LD 56) .............................................................
REQ (LD 57) .............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1231
REQ (LD 58) .............................................................
REQ (LD 73) .............................................................
REQ (LD 74) .............................................................
REQ (LD 79) .............................................................
REQ (LD 81) .............................................................
REQ (LD 82) .............................................................
REQ (LD 83) .............................................................
REQ (LD 86) .............................................................
REQ (LD 87) .............................................................
REQ (LD 88) .............................................................
REQ (LD 90) .............................................................
REQ (LD 93) .............................................................
REQ (LD 94) ...........................................................
REQ (LD 95) ...........................................................
REQ (LD 97) ...........................................................
RESN (LD 95) .........................................................
RETC (LD 87) ...........................................................
RETT (LD 87) ...........................................................
RFRQ (LD 23) ..........................................................
RGAA (LD 57) ..........................................................
RGAB (LD 56) ..........................................................
RGAD (LD 57) ..........................................................
RGAI (LD 23) ............................................................
RGAR (LD 56) ..........................................................
RGAV (LD 57) ...........................................................
RGBK (LD 56) ..........................................................
RGFL (LD 16) ...........................................................
RGNA (LD 15) ..........................................................
RGTP (LD 97) .........................................................
RICI (LD 15) .............................................................
RICI (LD 93) .............................................................
RING (LD 56) ............................................................
RLA (LD 15) ..............................................................
RLCR (LD 15) ...........................................................
RLDN (LD 14) ...........................................................
RLI (LD 15) ...............................................................
RLI (LD 86) ...............................................................
RLI (LD 87) ...............................................................
RLI (LD 90) ...............................................................
RLNO ........................................................................
RLS (LD 17) ..............................................................
RLS (LD 50) ..............................................................
RLSM (LD 16) ...........................................................
RMOV (LD 26) ..........................................................
RMST (LD 57) ..........................................................
RNGE (LD 20) ..........................................................
RNGE (LD 21) ..........................................................
RNGE (LD 90) ..........................................................
RNPG (LD 10) ............................................................
RNPG (LD 11) ...........................................................
RNPG (LD 81) ..........................................................
RNPI .........................................................................
ROA_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................
ROLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
ROPT (LD 15) ...........................................................
ROPT (LD 23) ...........................................................
ROUT (LD 16) ..........................................................
ROUT (LD 56) ..........................................................
ROUT (LD 87) ..........................................................
RPA (LD 15) ..............................................................
RPA (LD 16) ..............................................................
RPAN (LD 57) ...........................................................
RPAR (LD 58) ...........................................................
RPAW (LD 56) ..........................................................
RPAX (LD 57) ...........................................................
RPAX (LD 58) ...........................................................
RPCT (LD 56) ...........................................................
RPEB (LD 17) ...........................................................
RPF (LD 52) .............................................................
RPNS (LD 15) ...........................................................
RPPM (LD 16) ..........................................................
RPRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
RPTO (LD 58) ...........................................................
RR (LD 15) ...............................................................
RRBS (LD 16) ...........................................................
RRPA (LD 87) ...........................................................
RSAC (LD 28) ...........................................................
RSND (LD 23) ..........................................................
RTCL (LD 86) ...........................................................
RTIM (LD 15) ............................................................
RTIM (LD 58) ............................................................
RTMB (LD 14) ...........................................................
RTMR (LD 24) ...........................................................
RTN (LD 16) .............................................................
RTNO (LD 86) ...........................................................
RTON ........................................................................
RTPC (LD 23) ...........................................................
RTQO (LD 23) ..........................................................
RTQT (LD 23) ...........................................................
RTRY (LD 88) ...........................................................
RTS (LD 11) ..............................................................
RTSA (LD 15) ...........................................................
RTXX (LD 57) ...........................................................
RTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................
RUCF (LD 16) ...........................................................
RUCS (LD 16) ..........................................................
RURC (LD 16) ..........................................................
RVDL (LD 56) ...........................................................
RVSD (LD 16) ...........................................................
RWTA (LD 87) ..........................................................
RXMT (LD 17) ..........................................................
1232 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
S
S_ENTRY (LD 15) ....................................................
S_SIZE (LD 15) ........................................................
S10P (LD 97) ..........................................................
S2 (LD 74) ................................................................
SAC (LD 19) .............................................................
SACP (LD 15) ...........................................................
SADS (LD 57) ...........................................................
SAEN (LD 57) ...........................................................
SALK (LD 57) ...........................................................
SAMM (LD 15) ..........................................................
SARC (LD 88) ...........................................................
SASU (LD 73) ...........................................................
SAT (LD 16) ..............................................................
SAT (LD 74) ..............................................................
SATD (LD 15) ...........................................................
SATN (LD 17) ...........................................................
SATT (LD 73) ............................................................
SAUN (LD 57) ...........................................................
SAVE (LD 90) ...........................................................
SAVE NEW MAP? (LD 29) .......................................
SBA_ADM_INS (LD 17) ...........................................
SBA_USER (LD 17) .................................................
SBLF (LD 15) ............................................................
SBN (LD 16) .............................................................
SBOC (LD 86) ..........................................................
SBUP (LD 15) ...........................................................
SCBQ (LD 87) ..........................................................
SCCI (LD 86) ............................................................
SCCT (LD 56) ...........................................................
SCDL (LD 15) ...........................................................
SCDR (LD 88) ..........................................................
SCDT (LD 16) ...........................................................
SCFT (LD 02) .............................................................
SCI (LD 10) ................................................................
SCI (LD 11) ...............................................................
SCNO (LD 20) ..........................................................
SCNT (LD 94) .........................................................
SCNV (LD 86) ...........................................................
SCOD (LD 24) ..........................................................
SCPC (LD 57) ...........................................................
SCPL (LD 15) ...........................................................
SCPW (LD 10) ............................................................
SCPW (LD 11) ..........................................................
SCPW (LD 27) ..........................................................
SCR (LD 16) .............................................................
SCTL (LD 02) .............................................................
SDA (LD 18) .............................................................
SDCH (LD 14) ..........................................................
SDFL (LD 15) ...........................................................
SDID (LD 16) ............................................................
SDID (LD 49) ............................................................
SDNB (LD 23) ...........................................................
SDRR (LD 90) ..........................................................
SDST (LD 02) .............................................................
SDTA (LD 02) .............................................................
SDTT (LD 73) ...........................................................
SECOND_DN (LD 10) ................................................
SECOND_DN (LD 11) ..............................................
SECR (LD 88) ...........................................................
SECU (LD 17) ...........................................................
SEIZ (LD 14) .............................................................
SEIZ (LD 16) .............................................................
SEMT (LD 17) ...........................................................
SER (LD 50) .............................................................
SERV (LD 88) ...........................................................
SET (LD 94) ............................................................
SETN (LD 12) ...........................................................
SEVERITY (LD 17) ...................................................
SEZA (R) (LD 73) .....................................................
SEZA (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
SEZD (R) (LD 73) .....................................................
SEZD (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
SEZV (R) (LD 73) .....................................................
SEZV (S) (LD 73) .....................................................
SFAC (LD 57) ...........................................................
SFDN (LD 10) .............................................................
SFDN (LD 11) ...........................................................
SFEX (LD 14) ...........................................................
SFLT (LD 10) ..............................................................
SFLT (LD 11) ............................................................
SFMT (LD 10) .............................................................
SFMT (LD 11) ...........................................................
SFNB (LD 20) ...........................................................
SFNB (LD 21) ...........................................................
SFNB (LD 23) ...........................................................
SFRB (LD 20) ...........................................................
SFRQ (LD 23) ...........................................................
SGL (LD 16) .............................................................
SGRP (LD 10) ............................................................
SGRP (LD 11) ...........................................................
SGRP (LD 12) ..........................................................
SGRP (LD 16) ..........................................................
SGRP (LD 27) ..........................................................
SGRP (LD 81) ..........................................................
SGRP (LD 88) ..........................................................
SGRP (LD 93) ..........................................................
SHAN (LD 19) ...........................................................
SHCD (LD 25) ..........................................................
SHORT (LD 20) ........................................................
SHR (LD 23) .............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1233
SHRT (LD 95) .........................................................
SHSG (LD 25) ..........................................................
SICA (LD 14) ............................................................
SICA (LD 73) ............................................................
SID (LD 16) ...............................................................
SID (LD 17) ...............................................................
SIDE (LD 16) ............................................................
SIDE (LD 17) ............................................................
SIDE (LD 74) ............................................................
SIGL (LD 14) ............................................................
SIGL (LD 16) ............................................................
SIGL (LD 74) ............................................................
SIGO (LD 16) ............................................................
SIND (LD 16) ............................................................
SIPD (LD 15) ............................................................
SIPL_ON (LD 15) .....................................................
SIPU (LD 11) .............................................................
SITM (LD 02) ..............................................................
SIZE (LD 15) .............................................................
SIZE (LD 17) .............................................................
SIZE (LD 18) .............................................................
SIZE (LD 21) .............................................................
SL1B (LD 17) ............................................................
SLCT (LD 16) ...........................................................
SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP .................................................
SLLC (LD 02) .............................................................
SLOT (LD 97) .........................................................
SLP (LD 73) ..............................................................
SLV3 (LD 19) ............................................................
SLV6 (LD 19) ............................................................
SMAS (LD 14) ..........................................................
SMEM (LD 17) ..........................................................
SMFC (LD 94) .........................................................
SNUM (LD 58) ..........................................................
SOHQ (LD 87) ..........................................................
SOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
SOPC (LD 02) ............................................................
SOPN (LD 02) ............................................................
SOPS (LD 02) ............................................................
SORTBY (LD 20) ......................................................
SOS (LD 73) .............................................................
Source Timed Local Flow-in queue ..........................
Source Timed Overflow queue .................................
SPAR (LD 52) ...........................................................
SPCC (LD 57) ...........................................................
SPCE (LD 57) ...........................................................
SPCL (LD 56) ...........................................................
SPCP (LD 23) ...........................................................
SPCT (LD 16) ...........................................................
SPCU (LD 57) ...........................................................
SPDN (LD 50) ...........................................................
SPID (LD 10) ..............................................................
SPID (LD 11) .............................................................
SPID (LD 27) ............................................................
SPN (LD 16) .............................................................
SPN (LD 87) .............................................................
SPN (LD 90) .............................................................
SPRE (LD 15) ...........................................................
SPRI (LD 87) ............................................................
SPTO (LD 16) ...........................................................
SPVC (LD 15) ...........................................................
SPWD (LD 10) ............................................................
SPWD (LD 11) ..........................................................
SPWD (LD 15) ..........................................................
SPWD (LD 20) ..........................................................
SPWD (LD 24) ..........................................................
SPWD (LD 88) ..........................................................
SRAN (LD 15) ...........................................................
SRC (LD 25) .............................................................
SRC (LD 56) .............................................................
SRC1 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC2 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC3 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC4 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC5 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC6 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC7 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRC8 (LD 56) ...........................................................
SRCD (LD 15) ..........................................................
SRCH (LD 16) ..........................................................
SRCL (LD 25) ...........................................................
SREF (LD 14) ...........................................................
SREF (LD 73) ...........................................................
SREF CC0 (LD 73) ...................................................
SREF CC1 (LD 73) ...................................................
SREF CC2 (LD 73) ...................................................
SREF CC3 (LD 73) ...................................................
SREF CC4 (LD 73) ...................................................
SRIM (LD 73) ............................................................
SRMM (LD 73) ..........................................................
SRNT (LD 73) ...........................................................
SRPM (LD 16) ..........................................................
SRPT (LD 23) ...........................................................
SRRT (LD 15) ...........................................................
SRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................
SRRT (LD 93) ...........................................................
SRT (LD 15) ..............................................................
SRT (LD 16) ..............................................................
SRT (LD 23) ..............................................................
SRT (LD 56) ..............................................................
SRT (LD 93) ..............................................................
SRTK (LD 73) ...........................................................
1234 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
SRVC (LD 16) ...........................................................
SSC (LD 97) ...........................................................
SSCL (LD 90) ...........................................................
SSDG (LD 18) ..........................................................
SSDT (LD 17) ...........................................................
SSHC (LD 02) ............................................................
SSHS (LD 02) .............................................................
SSID (LD 02) ..............................................................
SSL (LD 16) ..............................................................
SSL (LD 18) ..............................................................
SSLK (LD 56) ...........................................................
SSPU (LD 57) ...........................................................
SSRC (LD 17) ...........................................................
SSRC (LD 22) ...........................................................
SSRV_ETSI (LD 27) .................................................
SSRV_N1 (LD 27) ....................................................
SST (LD 16) ..............................................................
SSU (LD 11) ..............................................................
SSU (LD 12) .............................................................
SSUC (LD 18) ...........................................................
SSUP (LD 17) ...........................................................
STAD (LD 02) .............................................................
STAL (LD 95) ..........................................................
STAR (LD 88) ...........................................................
STCB (LD 15) ...........................................................
STE (LD 15) ..............................................................
STEP (LD 16) ...........................................................
STHC (LD 02) .............................................................
STHS (LD 02) .............................................................
STIO (LD 23) ............................................................
STND (LD 16) ...........................................................
STO (LD 58) .............................................................
STOP (LD 17) ...........................................................
STOP (LD 88) ...........................................................
STOR (LD 18) ...........................................................
STOR (LD 26) ...........................................................
STRG (LD 15) ...........................................................
STRI (LD 14) ............................................................
STRK (LD 16) ...........................................................
STRK (LD 90) ...........................................................
STRL (LD 15) ...........................................................
STRO (LD 14) ...........................................................
STRT (LD 16) ...........................................................
STSG (LD 25) ...........................................................
STUN (LD 25) ...........................................................
STYP (LD 14) ...........................................................
STYP (LD 16) ...........................................................
STYP (LD 97) .........................................................
SUB (LD 19) .............................................................
SUPL_SVC (LD 27) ..................................................
SUPN (LD 14) ...........................................................
SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY (LD 17) ........................
SUPPRESS (LD 17) .................................................
SUPT (LD 97) .........................................................
SURV (LD 56) ...........................................................
SVFL (LD 16) ............................................................
SWP (LD 16) ............................................................
SXS (LD 14) .............................................................
SYNC (LD 17) ...........................................................
SYNM (LD 17) ..........................................................
SZNI (LD 73) ............................................................
T
T (LD 97) .................................................................
T_TN (LD 14) ............................................................
T1 (LD 17) ................................................................
T1 (LD 27) ................................................................
T10/T20 (LD 27) .......................................................
T100 (LD 15) ............................................................
T100 (LD 16) ............................................................
T11/T21 (LD 27) .......................................................
T12/T22 (LD 27) .......................................................
T13/T23 (LD 27) .......................................................
T2 (LD 17) ................................................................
T2 (LD 27) ................................................................
T2 (LD 97) ...............................................................
T200 (LD 17) ............................................................
T200 (LD 27) ............................................................
T203 (LD 17) ............................................................
T203 (LD 27) ............................................................
T23 (LD 17) ..............................................................
T2WN (LD 97) .........................................................
T2WT (LD 97) .........................................................
T2WV (LD 97) .........................................................
T3 (LD 17) ................................................................
T3 (LD 27) ................................................................
T310 (LD 17) ............................................................
T310 (LD 27) ............................................................
T4WN (LD 97) .........................................................
T4WT (LD 97) .........................................................
T4WV (LD 97) .........................................................
TABL (LD 16) ............................................................
TABL (LD 23) ............................................................
TABL (LD 56) ............................................................
TABT (LD 58) ............................................................
TARG (LD 16) ...........................................................
TASK (LD 52) ............................................................
TAWU (LD 15) ..........................................................
TBL (LD 15) ..............................................................
TBL (LD 16) ..............................................................
TBL (LD 56) ..............................................................
TBL (LD 86) ..............................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1235
TBNO ........................................................................
TBNO (LD 18) ...........................................................
TBNO (LD 20) ...........................................................
TBNO (LD 94) .........................................................
TBTR (LD 58) ...........................................................
TC (LD 27) ................................................................
TCFT (LD 02) .............................................................
TCPP (LD 16) ...........................................................
TCRS (LD 16) ...........................................................
TDET (LD 16) ...........................................................
TDET (LD 86) ...........................................................
TDG (LD 16) .............................................................
TDNS (LD 23) ...........................................................
TDP (LD 97) ............................................................
TDPO (LD 97) .........................................................
TDS (LD 17) .............................................................
TDSH (LD 56) ...........................................................
TDST (LD 02) .............................................................
TDTA (LD 02) .............................................................
TEI (LD 27) ...............................................................
TEM (LD 20) .............................................................
TEMP (LD 20) ...........................................................
TEN (LD 10) ...............................................................
TEN (LD 11) ..............................................................
TEN (LD 17) .............................................................
TEN (LD 20) .............................................................
TEN (LD 93) .............................................................
TERD (LD 17) ...........................................................
TERM (LD 17) ..........................................................
TERQ (LD 17) ...........................................................
TEST (LD 56) ...........................................................
TFAS (LD 57) ............................................................
TFD (LD 16) ..............................................................
TFDR (LD 15) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 10) ............................................................
TGAR (LD 11) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 14) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 16) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 24) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 27) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 86) ...........................................................
TGAR (LD 88) ...........................................................
TGLD (LD 15) ...........................................................
TGLR (LD 73) ...........................................................
TGR1 (LD 15) ...........................................................
TGR2 (LD 15) ...........................................................
THIRD_DN (LD 10) ....................................................
THIRD_DN (LD 11) ...................................................
TID (LD 97) .............................................................
TIDM (LD 15) ............................................................
TIDY (LD 16) ............................................................
TIE (LD 56) ...............................................................
TIE (LD 94) .............................................................
TIER (LD 16) ............................................................
TIM_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
TIM1 (LD 15) ............................................................
TIM1 (LD 93) ............................................................
TIM2 (LD 15) ............................................................
TIM2 (LD 93) ............................................................
TIM3 (LD 15) ............................................................
TIM3 (LD 93) ............................................................
TIM4 (LD 15) ............................................................
TIM4 (LD 93) ............................................................
TIME (LD 15) ............................................................
TIME (LD 73) ............................................................
TIMP (LD 10) ..............................................................
TIMP (LD 14) ............................................................
TIMR (LD 16) ............................................................
TIMR (LD 17) ............................................................
TIMR (LD 27) ............................................................
TITE (LD 17) .............................................................
TITH (LD 16) .............................................................
TITM (LD 02) ..............................................................
TKEY (LD 17) ...........................................................
TKID (LD 14) ............................................................
TKTP (LD 16) ...........................................................
TKTP (LD 27) ...........................................................
TLLC (LD 02) ..............................................................
TLP (LD 56) ..............................................................
TLPT (LD 56) ............................................................
TMAT (LD 56) ...........................................................
TMDI (LD 17) ............................................................
TMON (LD 15) ..........................................................
TMOT (LD 56) ..........................................................
TMRK (LD 17) ..........................................................
TN (LD 10) ..................................................................
TN (LD 11) ................................................................
TN (LD 12) ................................................................
TN (LD 13) ................................................................
TN (LD 14) ................................................................
TN (LD 17) ................................................................
TN (LD 20) ................................................................
TN (LD 22) ................................................................
TN (LD 27) ................................................................
TN (LD 50) ................................................................
TN (LD 84_85) ..........................................................
TN1 (LD 15) ..............................................................
TN2 (LD 15) ..............................................................
TN3 (LD 15) ..............................................................
TN4 (LD 15) ..............................................................
TN5 (LD 15) ..............................................................
TN6 (LD 15) ..............................................................
1236 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
TNDM (LD 15) ..........................................................
TNDM (LD 18) ..........................................................
TNDN (LD 57) ...........................................................
TNLS (LD 73) ...........................................................
TNS (LD 97) ............................................................
TNUM (LD 97) ........................................................
TO (LD 49) ................................................................
TOBO (LD 16) ...........................................................
TOD (LD 86) .............................................................
TODR (LD 17) ...........................................................
TODS (LD 86) ...........................................................
TOFT (LD 23) ...........................................................
TOGP (LD 26) ...........................................................
TOGR (LD 18) ..........................................................
TOHQ (LD 87) ..........................................................
TOHV (LD 97) .........................................................
TOLL (LD 18) ............................................................
TOLL (LD 73) ............................................................
TOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
TOLS (LD 18) ...........................................................
TOLT (LD 73) ............................................................
TON (LD 15) .............................................................
TONE (LD 56) ...........................................................
TONE (LD 86) ...........................................................
TONES (LD 56) ........................................................
TOPC (LD 02) .............................................................
TOPN (LD 02) .............................................................
TOPS (LD 02) .............................................................
TORT (LD 19) ...........................................................
TOT4 (LD 23) ............................................................
TOTN (LD 10) ..............................................
,
TOTN (LD 11) ...........................................................
TOTN (LD 14) ...........................................................
TOV (LD 11) ..............................................................
TOV (LD 16) .............................................................
TPDN (LD 15) ...........................................................
TPDN (LD 21) ...........................................................
TPF (LD 97) ............................................................
TPO (LD 17) .............................................................
TRAN (LD 11) ...........................................................
TRAN (LD 16) ...........................................................
TRAN (LD 58) ...........................................................
TRAN (LD 90) ...........................................................
TRANS (LD 27) ........................................................
TRC (LD 73) .............................................................
TRCL (LD 15) ...........................................................
TRCR (LD 15) ...........................................................
TRDN (LD 23) ...........................................................
TRDN (LD 58) ...........................................................
TRGT (LD 23) ...........................................................
TRIGGER (LD 17) ....................................................
TRLL (LD 17) ............................................................
TRMB (LD 16) ..........................................................
TRMD (LD 57) ..........................................................
TRMT (LD 16) ...........................................................
TRMT (LD 27) ...........................................................
TRNS (LD 17) ...........................................................
TRNX (LD 15) ...........................................................
TRO (LD 16) .............................................................
TRRL (LD 16) ...........................................................
TRSH (LD 17) ...........................................................
TRSH (LD 73) ...........................................................
TRVS (LD 57) ...........................................................
TSC (LD 87) .............................................................
TSET (LD 27) ...........................................................
TSFT (LD 23) ............................................................
TSHC (LD 02) .............................................................
TSHS (LD 02) .............................................................
TSID (LD 02) ..............................................................
TSO (LD 17) .............................................................
TST (LD 16) ..............................................................
TST_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................
TST0 (LD 15) ............................................................
TST1 (LD 15) ............................................................
TST2 (LD 15) ............................................................
TST3 (LD 15) ............................................................
TSTL (LD 15) ............................................................
TSUT (LD 56) ...........................................................
TTA (LD 16) ..............................................................
TTAD (LD 02) .............................................................
TTBL (LD 15) ............................................................
TTBL (LD 16) ............................................................
TTHC (LD 02) .............................................................
TTHS (LD 02) .............................................................
TTY (LD 17) ..............................................................
TTY_TYPE (LD 17) ..................................................
TTYLOG (LD 17) ......................................................
TTYP (LD 97) ..........................................................
TUBO (LD 17) ...........................................................
TW_INC_CLID (LD 16) .............................................
TW_ROUTE (LD 16) ................................................
TWSP (LD 58) ..........................................................
TYNM (LD 29) ..........................................................
TYPE (LD 10) .............................................................
TYPE (LD 11) ............................................................
TYPE (LD 12) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 13) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 14) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 15) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 16) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 17) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 18) ...........................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1237
TYPE (LD 19) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 20) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 21) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 22) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 23) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 24) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 26) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 27) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 28) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 49) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 50) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 52) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 56) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 57) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 58) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 73) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 74) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 79) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 86) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 87) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 88) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 90) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 93) ...........................................................
TYPE (LD 94) .........................................................
TYPE (LD 95) .........................................................
TYPE (LD 97) .........................................................
U
UAPR (LD 15) ...........................................................
UBRI (LD 15) ............................................................
UCFS (LD 73) ...........................................................
UCST (LD 15) ...........................................................
UMG (LD 15) ............................................................
UMG (LD 23) ............................................................
UMT (LD 23) .............................................................
UPDT (LD 49) ...........................................................
USBM (LD 15) ..........................................................
USCR (LD 57) ..........................................................
USE (LD 57) .............................................................
USER (LD 17) ...........................................................
USER (LD 27) ...........................................................
USER (LD 56) ...........................................................
USER (LD 57) ...........................................................
USFB (LD 20) ...........................................................
USFB (LD 21) ...........................................................
USFB (LD 23) ...........................................................
USID (LD 27) ............................................................
USR (LD 17) .............................................................
UST (LD 15) .............................................................
UST (LD 23) .............................................................
USTA (LD 57) ...........................................................
UUI (LD 23) ..............................................................
UXID (LD 20) ............................................................
UXTY (LD 20) ...........................................................
V
V25 (LD 11) ..............................................................
V25 (LD 16) ..............................................................
VAS (LD 17) ..............................................................
VCNA (LD 17) ...........................................................
VCRD (LD 17) ..........................................................
VDCH (LD 86) ..........................................................
VDMI (LD 86) ............................................................
VHST (LD 22) ...........................................................
VLL (LD 11) ..............................................................
VMB (LD 10) ...............................................................
VMB (LD 11) .............................................................
VMB_COS (LD 10) .....................................................
VMB_COS (LD 11) ...................................................
VMB_STATE (LD 20) ................................................
VNDN (LD 79) ..........................................................
VNL (LD 73) ..............................................................
VNR (LD 15) .............................................................
VNS (LD 86) .............................................................
VNSC (LD 17) ...........................................................
VNSM (LD 17) ..........................................................
VNSP (LD 17) ...........................................................
VO_ALO (LD 15) ......................................................
VO_ALOHR (LD 15) .................................................
VOLO_CALBK_TIM (LD 24) .....................................
VOLO_COUNT (LD 24) ............................................
VOLO_FIRST_TN (LD 24) ........................................
VOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................
VPNI (LD 15) ............................................................
VRAT (LD 16) ...........................................................
VSID (LD 15) ............................................................
VSID (LD 17) ............................................................
VSID (LD 23) ............................................................
VSIG (LD 17) ............................................................
VSIT (LD 10) ..............................................................
VSIT (LD 11) .............................................................
VTLF (LD 57) ............................................................
VTLN (LD 57) ...........................................................
VTRK (LD 16) ...........................................................
VTRK (LD 86) ...........................................................
VTRO (LD 17) ...........................................................
VXCT (LD 17) ...........................................................
W
WAIT (LD 15) ............................................................
1238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011
WAIT (LD 16) ............................................................
WAIT (LD 93) ............................................................
WATR (LD 16) ..........................................................
WCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................
WDGT (LD 16) ..........................................................
WIRE (LD 11) ............................................................
WKDY (LD 15) ..........................................................
WRLS (LD 10) ............................................................
WRT (LD 18) .............................................................
WSIZ (LD 27) ............................................................
WTON (LD 56) ..........................................................
WTYP (LD 10) ............................................................
WUD (LD 15) ............................................................
X
X25P (LD 27) ............................................................
XCAD (LD 56) ...........................................................
XCT (LD 17) .............................................................
XDIC (LD 14) ............................................................
XEM (LD 73) .............................................................
XFER (LD 95) .........................................................
XLAT (LD 18) ............................................................
XLST (LD 10) .............................................................
XLST (LD 11) ............................................................
XLST (LD 27) ............................................................
XMIT (LD 94) ..........................................................
XNPD (LD 97) .........................................................
XNUM (LD 17) ..........................................................
XPDN (LD 49) ...........................................................
XPE (LD 97) ............................................................
XPE0 (LD 97) ..........................................................
XPE1 (LD 97) ..........................................................
XPEC (LD 97) .........................................................
XPLN (LD 10) .............................................................
XPLN (LD 11) ............................................................
XPLN (LD 95) .........................................................
XPVC (LD 27) ...........................................................
XRFP (LD 15) ...........................................................
XRFR (LD 15) ...........................................................
XSM (LD 17) .............................................................
XSMN (LD 97) ........................................................
XTDT (LD 13) ...........................................................
XTDT (LD 16) ...........................................................
XTDT (LD 97) .........................................................
XTMR (LD 17) ..........................................................
XTON (LD 56) ...........................................................
XTRK (LD 14) ...........................................................
XTRK (LD 20) ...........................................................
XUT (LD 73) .............................................................
XXX (LD 87) .............................................................
Y
YALM (LD 17) ...........................................................
Z
ZBD (LD 15) .............................................................
ZBD (LD 21) .............................................................
ZONE (LD 11) ...........................................................
ZONE (LD 12) ...........................................................
ZONE (LD 14) ...........................................................
ZONE (LD 16) ...........................................................
ZONE0 / 1 (LD 97) ..................................................
Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1239
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 15 Revision History
- 21 Format and structure
- 22 The Prompts and responses table
- 22 The Alphabetical list of prompts table
- 23 Feature Packages
- 24 System migration
- 25 Terminology
- 25 Notational conventions
- 27 NTPs
- 27 Online
- 27 CD-ROM
- 31 Logging in and out
- 32 Local and remote access
- 32 HOST mode access
- 33 PDT and OAM commands for SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)
- 33 Line mode interface log in procedure
- 34 Access through the maintenance telephone
- 36 Accessing Meridian Mail
- 37 Legend:
- 38 Low memory and disk warnings
- 66 Multi-User commands
- 72 Set traffic report schedules
- 73 Set system ID
- 73 System reports
- 74 Customer reports
- 74 Network reports
- 75 Set customer for feature key usage measurement
- 75 Stop printing of title, date and time
- 75 Set traffic measurement on selected terminals
- 76 Set blocking probability for Line Load Control (LLC)
- 76 Set time and date
- 77 Set daily time adjustment
- 77 Set and print Daylight Savings Time
- 78 Set thresholds
- 79 Perform threshold tests on last reports
- 79 Print last reports
- 82 Contents
- 85 Add a telephone
- 88 Copy a set
- 89 Easy change
- 89 Remove a telephone
- 90 Move a telephone
- 130 Contents
- 136 Add a voice telephone
- 140 Add a data telephone
- 144 Copy a telephone
- 146 Easy change
- 146 Move a telephone
- 146 Remove a telephone
- 267 Contents
- 268 Customer data block
- 270 Default Customer Data Block
- 379 Contents
- 380 RDB: Route data block
- 396 ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block
- 397 SCH: ATM Schedules data block
- 397 Meridian 911 Route data block
- 398 NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block
- 398 Release Mechanism Options
- 480 D-Channel Expansion
- 480 Configuration record 1
- 481 Gate Opener: ADAN (Action Device and Number)
- 488 Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)
- 488 Gate Opener: CEQU (Common Equipment)
- 490 Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)
- 491 Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay)
- 491 Gate Opener: PARM (System Parameters)
- 495 Gate Opener: PWD (Password)
- 496 Gate Opener: VAS (Value Added Server)
- 577 Contents
- 578 Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records
- 578 Configure Group Call lists
- 579 Configure Speed Call lists
- 579 Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list
- 580 Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists
- 580 Configure Special Service List
- 581 Move from one group or list to another
- 581 Configure Group Hunt
- 582 Configure ABCD data block
- 593 Contents
- 593 ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block
- 594 CRB: Code Restriction data block
- 594 FGDB: Feature Group D data block
- 607 Templates
- 607 Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP)
- 608 Linked Overlay programs
- 610 2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data
- 610 Analog set (500 and PBX) data
- 611 Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data
- 611 Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data
- 612 Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business
- 612 Communication Set (BCS) data
- 613 Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data
- 613 Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital
- 613 Class Modem unit data
- 614 Calling Line ID Verification data
- 614 Data access card (DAC) data
- 615 Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data
- 615 Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data
- 616 Digital Communications Set data
- 616 Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data
- 616 Digitone Receiver (DTR) data
- 617 Directory number (DNB) data
- 617 Directory number (DNB) range data
- 618 Directory number (DNB) selection
- 618 Group Call (GRP) data
- 618 Hot Line List (HTL) data
- 619 Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data
- 619 IP Phone Model (ISET) data
- 620 Mobile Extension (MOBX) data
- 620 Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data
- 621 Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data
- 621 Power (PWR) data
- 621 Pretranslation (PRE) data
- 622 Special Service List (SSL) data
- 622 Speed call lists (SCL) data
- 622 Tandem Connection (TCON) data
- 622 Template (TEM) data
- 623 Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks
- 624 Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data
- 624 Tone Detector (TDET) data
- 625 Trunk data: All Trunks
- 625 Trunk data: Specific Trunk types
- 626 Universal Extension (UEXT) data
- 627 Unused Card (LUC) data
- 627 Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data
- 627 Unused Units (LUU) data
- 628 Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data
- 629 Voice Mailbox (VMB) data
- 645 Input Processing
- 646 Application Module Link (AML) data
- 647 Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15
- 647 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data
- 647 Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data
- 648 Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data
- 648 Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data
- 648 Call Detail Recording (CDR) data
- 648 Call Redirection (RDR) data
- 649 Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data
- 649 Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key
- 649 Code Restriction (CRB) data
- 649 Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data
- 650 Customer data block (CDB)
- 650 Features and options (FTR) data
- 650 Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data
- 651 Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data
- 651 Hospitality Management (HSP) data
- 651 Integrated Message Service (IMS) data
- 651 Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data
- 652 Intercept Treatments (INT) data
- 652 ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data
- 652 Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data
- 652 Multi-Party Operations (MPO) data
- 653 Networking (NET) data
- 653 Night Service (NIT) data
- 653 Off Hook Alarm Security (OAS) data
- 653 Password (PWD) data
- 654 Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) data
- 654 Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA) data
- 654 Route Data Block (RDB)
- 655 Set Relocation (SRDT) data
- 655 Test lines (TST) data
- 655 Timers (TIM) data
- 655 Trunk Members (LTM) data
- 661 Packages equipped
- 661 Issue and release
- 662 Audit trail (AUDT) data
- 663 Common Equipment (CEQU) data
- 663 Configuration Record (CFN) data
- 663 Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems
- 663 History File (VHST) data
- 664 Input/output device (ADAN) data
- 664 Integrated Message Service (IMA) data
- 665 Issue and Release (ISS)
- 665 Meridian Modular Telephone (ATRN) data
- 665 Overlay area (OVLY) data
- 665 Package (PKG) information
- 666 Password (PWD) data
- 666 Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data
- 666 System Limits (SLT) data
- 666 System Loop Limit (SLL) data
- 667 System Parameters (PARM) data
- 667 System Patch (ISSP) data
- 667 Tape ID (TID) data
- 667 Value Added Server (VAS) data
- 677 Contents
- 681 ACD or SCB: Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-D) or Schedule data block
- 682 ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue Assignment prompts)
- 682 CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer Controlled Routing)
- 684 NACD: Network ACD data block
- 684 OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table
- 709 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) data block
- 710 Emergency Services Access (ESA) data block
- 711 Mobile Service Access (MSA) data block
- 725 BRSC: Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator data block
- 726 CARD: SILC/UILC card data block
- 727 DNAT: Data Network Address Tables data block
- 727 DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIL)
- 728 DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIT or BRIE)
- 729 LAPB: Link Access Procedure - Balanced data block
- 730 MISP: Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block
- 731 PVC: Permanent virtual circuit connections data block
- 732 PROT or LAPD: Protocol or Link Access Protocol data block
- 732 TSP: Terminal Service Profile data block
- 734 X25P: X25P packet protocol parameters data block
- 771 Call Park data
- 771 Meridian Modular Telephone ID change during relocation
- 775 Contents
- 775 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold)
- 776 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)
- 777 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold)
- 777 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer)
- 778 Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block
- 786 Intrusion Tone Note for Small Systems
- 787 Contents
- 787 AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block
- 788 DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block
- 789 FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block
- 789 FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block
- 789 FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block
- 795 MCAD: Master cadence data block
- 796 RART: Route Access Restriction table data block
- 796 RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block
- 796 TBAR: Trunk Barring data block
- 797 Print a customer defined route ART course
- 797 Default Master Cadence (MCAD) tables
- 798 Master Cadence (MCAD) table for Japan
- 800 Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table for Japan
- 833 Contents
- 833 RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block
- 834 RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block
- 835 RPS: Radio Paging System data block
- 835 TBL: Translation Table access data block
- 841 Contents
- 842 DDB: Digital data block
- 844 PRI2 data block ( LPTI)
- 846 DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI)
- 847 DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)
- 849 Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package 167)
- 854 What can be entered for the abcd response?
- 855 How to tell if the signal is pulsing, pulsed or steady?
- 855 How to determine signal direction?
- 856 How to tell if the prompt incoming or outgoing, or both
- 856 A note about JDMI
- 935 Contents
- 935 FEAT equal to CMDB (flexible CLID manipulation)
- 937 FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation)
- 937 FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network)
- 939 FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion)
- 939 FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)
- 940 FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)
- 941 FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier)
- 955 Contents
- 955 CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)
- 956 FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)
- 957 FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)
- 957 NCTL (Network Control)
- 965 Contents
- 965 AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block
- 966 AUT: Authcode entries data block
- 967 SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block
- 973 Contents
- 973 HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only)
- 974 HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block
- 974 LOC: Location code data block (NARS only)
- 975 NPA: Number Plan area code data block
- 976 NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block
- 976 NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block
- 977 SPN: Special Number Translation data block
- 1019 Contents
- 1019 Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND)
- 1020 Add Calling Party Name Display name
- 1021 Change Calling Party Name Display name
- 1021 Remove Calling Party Name Display name
- 1022 Print Calling Party Name Display data and names
- 1029 Contents
- 1030 BTD: Busy Tone Detection data block
- 1030 DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block
- 1031 DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block
- 1031 FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets
- 1033 FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block
- 1033 LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block
- 1034 LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED)
- 1034 LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)
- 1034 LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)
- 1035 SUPL: Superloop parameters data block
- 1036 SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card
- 1037 SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment
- 1038 XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block
- 1038 XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block
- 1039 Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves
- 1068 Feature packaging
- 1068 The Event Collector
- 1068 The Event Server
- 1069 Wildcards
- 1070 Escalation and suppression thresholds
- 1070 Global window timer length
- 1070 TTY output format of events
- 1070 Fancy format output
- 1071 Unformatted Output
- 1072 How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol
- 1077 Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used
- 1077 Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration - Call Server only
- 1078 Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S
- 1080 Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S
- 1082 Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports